PROSPER Complete PDF

Petroleum Experts
User Manual
IPM
PROSPER
Version 12
May 2013
PROSPER
IPM - Single Well Model OVERVIEW
by Petroleum Experts Limited
PROSPER is a well performance, design and optimisation program which is part of the
Integrated Production Modelling Toolkit (IPM). This tool is the industry standard well
modelling with the major operators worldwide.
PROSPER is designed to allow the building of reliable and consistent well models, with the
ability to address each aspect of well bore modelling; PVT (fluid characterisation), VLP
correlations (for calculation of flow-line and tubing pressure loss) and IPR (reservoir inflow).
PROSPER provides unique matching features, which tune PVT, multiphase flow
correlations and IPR to match measured field data, allowing a consistent well model to be
built prior to use in prediction (sensitivities or artificial lift design). PROSPER enables
detailed surface pipeline performance and design: Flow Regimes, pipeline stability, Slug
Size andFrequency
APPLICATIONS
Design and optimise well completions including multi-lateral, multilayer and horizontal
wells
Design and optimise tubing and pipeline sizes
Design, diagnose and optimise Gas lifted, Hydraulic pumps and ESP wells
Generate lift curves for use in simulators
Calculate pressure losses in wells, flow lines and across chokes
Predict flowing temperatures in wells and pipelines
Monitor well performance to rapidly identify wells requiring remedial action
Calculate total skin and determine breakdown (damage, deviation or
partial penetration)
Unique black oil model for retrograde condensate fluids, accounting
for liquid dropout in the wellbore
Allocate production between wells
The copyright in this manual and the associated computer program are the property of Petroleum Experts
Ltd. All rights reserved. Both, this manual and the computer program have been provided pursuant to a
Licence Agreement containing restriction of use.
No part of this manual may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated
into any language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical or otherwise, or
disclose to third parties without prior written consent from Petroleum Experts Ltd., Petex House, 10 Logie
Mill, Edinburgh, EH7 4HG, Scotland, UK.
Petroleum Experts Ltd. All rights reserved.
IPM Suite, GAP, PROSPER, MBAL, PVTP, REVEAL, RESOLVE, IFM, ModelCatalogue and OpenServer are
trademarks of Petroleum Experts Ltd.
Microsoft (Windows), Windows (2000) and Windows (XP) are registered trademarks of the Microsoft
Corporation
The software described in this manual is furnished under a licence agreement. The software may be used or
copied only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. It is against the law to copy the software on any
medium except as specifically allowed in the license agreement. No part of this documentation may be
reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying,
recording, or information storage and retrieval systems for any purpose other than the purchaser's personal
use, unless express written consent has been given by Petroleum Experts Limited.
Address:
Petroleum Experts Limited
Petex House
10 Logie Mill
Edinburgh, Scotland
EH7 4HG
Tel : (44 131) 474 7030
Fax : (44 131) 474 7031
email: edinburgh@petex.com
Internet: www.petex.com
Copyright Notice
3
1990-2013 Petroleum Experts Limited
PROSPER I
Table of Contents
0
Chapter 1 Technical Overview 2
................................................................................................................................... 2 1 Summary of Capabilities
................................................................................................................................... 10 2 Fluid modelling options
................................................................................................................................... 13 3 Inflows and Sand Control options
................................................................................................................................... 14 4 Well bore and Pipeline hydraulics
................................................................................................................................... 15 5 Artificial lift systems
................................................................................................................................... 16 6 Flow assurance
.......................................................................................................................................................... 16 Advanced Thermal Models
.......................................................................................................................................................... 16 General Flow Assurance Features
................................................................................................................................... 17 7 What's New
................................................................................................................................... 46 8 Examples Guide
Chapter 2 User Guide 52
................................................................................................................................... 52 1 Introduction
.......................................................................................................................................................... 52 Using PROSPER
.......................................................................................................................................................... 55 PROSPER and Systems Analysis
......................................................................................................................................................... 57 About PROSPER
.......................................................................................................................................................... 59 Examples
................................................................................................................................... 60 2 File Management
.......................................................................................................................................................... 60 PROSPER Files
......................................................................................................................................................... 60 PVT Data (*.PVT)
......................................................................................................................................................... 61 Input Data (*.SIN)
......................................................................................................................................................... 61 Analysis Data (*.ANL)
......................................................................................................................................................... 61 Output Data (*.OUT)
......................................................................................................................................................... 62 Creating a New File
......................................................................................................................................................... 62 Opening an Existing File
......................................................................................................................................................... 62 Saving a File
......................................................................................................................................................... 63 Copying a File
.......................................................................................................................................................... 63 Preferences
......................................................................................................................................................... 63 Main Screen
......................................................................................................................................................... 65 File
......................................................................................................................................................... 66 Plot
......................................................................................................................................................... 68 User Applications
......................................................................................................................................................... 69 Limits
......................................................................................................................................................... 71 Units
......................................................................................................................................................... 72 Equipment
......................................................................................................................................................... 72 VPC
.......................................................................................................................................................... 73 Software Key Maintenance
.......................................................................................................................................................... 76 FileList
.......................................................................................................................................................... 77 Evaluate OpenServer Statement
.......................................................................................................................................................... 79 User Correlations
.......................................................................................................................................................... 81 Printer Setup
......................................................................................................................................................... 81 Preparing to Print
II Contents
PROSPER Manual May, 2013
......................................................................................................................................................... 82 Selecting and conf iguring a Printer
......................................................................................................................................................... 82 Printing Export Data
......................................................................................................................................................... 84 Selecting an Exported Data to Print
.......................................................................................................................................................... 84 Word Processing in PROSPER
.......................................................................................................................................................... 85 Clipboard Command
.......................................................................................................................................................... 85 Command Buttons
................................................................................................................................... 87 3 Data Input - General
.......................................................................................................................................................... 87 PROSPER Main Menu
......................................................................................................................................................... 88 File
......................................................................................................................................................... 88 Options
......................................................................................................................................................... 89 PVT
......................................................................................................................................................... 89 System
......................................................................................................................................................... 89 Matching
......................................................................................................................................................... 89 Calculation
......................................................................................................................................................... 89 Design
......................................................................................................................................................... 89 Output
......................................................................................................................................................... 90 Wizard
......................................................................................................................................................... 90 Units
......................................................................................................................................................... 90 Help
.......................................................................................................................................................... 90 Options - Options Selection
......................................................................................................................................................... 92 Fluid Description
......................................................................................................................................... 92 Fluid Type
......................................................................................................................................... 92 Method
......................................................................................................................................... 92 Equation of State Setup
......................................................................................................................................... 93 Separator
......................................................................................................................................... 95 Emulsions
......................................................................................................................................... 95 Hydrates
......................................................................................................................................... 96 Water Viscosity
......................................................................................................................................... 96 Viscosity model
......................................................................................................................................... 96 Water Vapour
......................................................................................................................................................... 97 Well
......................................................................................................................................... 97 Flow Type
......................................................................................................................................... 97 Well Type
......................................................................................................................................................... 98 Artif icial Lif t
......................................................................................................................................... 98 Method
......................................................................................................................................... 98 Type
......................................................................................................................................................... 101 Calculation Type
......................................................................................................................................... 101 Predict
......................................................................................................................................... 101 Model
......................................................................................................................................... 103 Calculation
......................................................................................................................................... 103 Output
......................................................................................................................................................... 103 Steam Calculation
......................................................................................................................................................... 104 Well Completion
......................................................................................................................................... 104 Type
......................................................................................................................................... 104 Sand Control
......................................................................................................................................................... 104 Reservoir
......................................................................................................................................... 104 Type
......................................................................................................................................... 104 Gas Coning
......................................................................................................................................................... 105 User Inf ormation and Comments
.......................................................................................................................................................... 105 Options - Perforating Gun DataBase
.......................................................................................................................................................... 107 Options - Tubing DataBase
.......................................................................................................................................................... 109 Options - Casing DataBase
.......................................................................................................................................................... 111 Options - Pipe Schedule
PROSPER III
................................................................................................................................... 113 4 PVT Data Input
.......................................................................................................................................................... 113 Introduction
.......................................................................................................................................................... 115 Black Oil - Oil and Water
......................................................................................................................................................... 115 Input Data
......................................................................................................................................... 117 Black Oil Compressibility Calculation
......................................................................................................................................................... 117 Tables
......................................................................................................................................................... 118 Match Data
......................................................................................................................................................... 119 Regression
......................................................................................................................................... 120 Match
................................................................................................................................... 120 Match All
................................................................................................................................... 120 Plot
................................................................................................................................... 121 Parameters
................................................................................................................................... 121 Viewing the Match Parameters
................................................................................................................................... 122 Matching FVF above Bubble Point
......................................................................................................................................................... 122 Correlations
......................................................................................................................................................... 123 Calculate
......................................................................................................................................... 123 Calculating PVT Data
......................................................................................................................................... 125 Displaying the Calculated Data on the screen
......................................................................................................................................... 126 Plotting the Calculated Data
......................................................................................................................................... 127 Saving PVT tables f rom Calculated Data
......................................................................................................................................................... 127 Save
......................................................................................................................................................... 127 Open
......................................................................................................................................................... 128 Composition
......................................................................................................................................................... 129 Emulsions Input Data
......................................................................................................................................... 130 Emulsion Modelling
......................................................................................................................................... 131 Emulsions Matching
......................................................................................................................................................... 133 Non-Newtonian Fluid
......................................................................................................................................................... 136 Power Fluid Data
......................................................................................................................................................... 139 Diluent Fluid
......................................................................................................................................................... 142 PVT Warning Tables
.......................................................................................................................................................... 144 Black Oil - Dry And Wet Gas
......................................................................................................................................................... 144 Input Data
.......................................................................................................................................................... 146 Black Oil - Retrograde Condensate
......................................................................................................................................................... 146 Input Data
......................................................................................................................................................... 147 Calculations
.......................................................................................................................................................... 148 Export
.......................................................................................................................................................... 148 Equation Of State - All Fluids
......................................................................................................................................................... 150 EOS Model Setup
......................................................................................................................................................... 156 EOS PVT Input Data
......................................................................................................................................... 158 Generate PVT properties
......................................................................................................................................... 161 Properties
......................................................................................................................................... 161 Phase Envelope
......................................................................................................................................... 163 Target GOR
.......................................................................................................................................................... 164 Steam Calculations
......................................................................................................................................................... 165 Calculating Steam Properties
......................................................................................................................................... 166 Calculate Range
......................................................................................................................................... 167 Calculate Single
......................................................................................................................................................... 169 Setting Steam Quality
................................................................................................................................... 171 5 Equipment Data Input
.......................................................................................................................................................... 172 Predicting Pressure Only
......................................................................................................................................................... 173 Deviation Survey
......................................................................................................................................... 176 Filter
......................................................................................................................................................... 180 Surf ace Equipment
IV Contents
......................................................................................................................................................... 183 Downhole Equipment
......................................................................................................................................................... 185 Temperature Survey
......................................................................................................................................................... 186 Pipe Schedule and Equipment
.......................................................................................................................................................... 190 Predicting Pressure and Temperature
......................................................................................................................................................... 190 Rough Approximation
......................................................................................................................................... 191 Deviation Survey
......................................................................................................................................... 191 Surf ace Equipment
......................................................................................................................................... 192 Downhole Equipment
......................................................................................................................................... 193 Geothermal Gradient
......................................................................................................................................... 195 Average Heat Capacities
......................................................................................................................................... 195 Gauge Details
......................................................................................................................................................... 196 Enthalpy Balance
......................................................................................................................................... 201 Temperature Data
......................................................................................................................................... 203 Drilling and Completion
......................................................................................................................................... 204 Lithology
......................................................................................................................................... 205 Databases
......................................................................................................................................... 206 Gauge Details
......................................................................................................................................................... 207 Improved Approximation
......................................................................................................................................... 210 Temperature Data
................................................................................................................................... 211 6 IPR Data Input
.......................................................................................................................................................... 212 IPR Single Well Data
......................................................................................................................................................... 213 The Main Data Entry Screen
......................................................................................................................................................... 214 Section Buttons
......................................................................................................................................................... 214 Action Buttons
......................................................................................................................................................... 215 Model Selection Screen
......................................................................................................................................................... 217 Data Input Screen
.......................................................................................................................................................... 219 IPR Models for Oil and Water Wells
......................................................................................................................................................... 219 P.I. Entry
......................................................................................................................................................... 219 Vogel
......................................................................................................................................................... 220 Composite
......................................................................................................................................................... 220 Darcy
......................................................................................................................................................... 221 Fetkovich
......................................................................................................................................................... 221 Multi-rate Fetkovich
......................................................................................................................................................... 221 Jones
......................................................................................................................................................... 221 Multi-rate Jones
......................................................................................................................................................... 222 Transient
......................................................................................................................................................... 223 Hydraulically Fractured Well
......................................................................................................................................................... 224 Horizontal Well - No Flow Boundaries
......................................................................................................................................................... 225 Horizontal Well - Constant Pressure Upper Boundary
......................................................................................................................................................... 226 Multi-Layer Inf low
......................................................................................................................................................... 228 External Entry
......................................................................................................................................................... 229 Horizontal well - dP Friction Loss in Wellbore
......................................................................................................................................................... 234 Multi-Layer - dP Loss in Wellbore
......................................................................................................................................................... 237 SkinAide
......................................................................................................................................................... 238 Dual Porosity
......................................................................................................................................................... 238 Horizontal Well with Transverse Vertical Fractures
......................................................................................................................................................... 240 Thermally Induced Fracture Model
......................................................................................................................................... 240 Overview
PROSPER V
......................................................................................................................................... 241 Data Entry
......................................................................................................................................................... 243 Coning Calculation
.......................................................................................................................................................... 243 IPR for Gas and Retrograde Condensate
......................................................................................................................................................... 244 Jones
......................................................................................................................................................... 244 Forchheimer
......................................................................................................................................................... 245 Back Pressure
......................................................................................................................................................... 245 C and n
......................................................................................................................................................... 245 Multi-rate C and n
......................................................................................................................................................... 246 Multi-rate Jones
......................................................................................................................................................... 247 External Entry
......................................................................................................................................................... 247 Petroleum Experts
......................................................................................................................................................... 250 Hydraulically Fractured Well
......................................................................................................................................................... 250 Horizontal Well - No-Flow Boundaries
......................................................................................................................................................... 250 Multi-layer Inf low
......................................................................................................................................................... 250 Horizontal Well - dP Friction Loss in Wellbore
......................................................................................................................................................... 250 Dual Porosity
......................................................................................................................................................... 250 Horizontal Well with Transverse Vertical Fractures
......................................................................................................................................................... 251 Multi-Layer - dP Loss in Wellbore
......................................................................................................................................................... 251 Modif ied Isochronal Inf low Model
......................................................................................................................................................... 252 Forchheimer with Pseudo Pressure
......................................................................................................................................................... 253 Multirate Forchheimer with Pseudo Pressure
.......................................................................................................................................................... 253 Dietz Shape Factors
.......................................................................................................................................................... 255 IPR for CBM Wells
.......................................................................................................................................................... 256 Skin Models
......................................................................................................................................................... 256 Mechanical/Geometrical Skin
......................................................................................................................................................... 261 Deviation/Partial Penetration Skin
.......................................................................................................................................................... 262 Other IPR-related features
......................................................................................................................................................... 262 Sand Control Options
......................................................................................................................................... 263 Gravel Packed Completion
................................................................................................................................... 267 Gravel Pack Completion Velocities
......................................................................................................................................... 268 Pre-Packed Screen completion
......................................................................................................................................... 270 Wire-Wrapped Screen Completion
......................................................................................................................................... 272 Slotted Liner Completion
......................................................................................................................................................... 274 Relative Permeability Curves
......................................................................................................................................... 275 Relative Permeability Calculation Details
......................................................................................................................................... 277 Test Data
......................................................................................................................................... 277 Plot
......................................................................................................................................................... 277 Viscosity Modelling
......................................................................................................................................................... 279 Compaction Permeability Reduction
.......................................................................................................................................................... 280 Injection Wells
.......................................................................................................................................................... 281 SkinAide
......................................................................................................................................................... 281 SkinAide Theoretical Background
......................................................................................................................................... 282 Position of the producing interval with respect to reservoir geometry
......................................................................................................................................... 282 Interf erence between perf orations and the damaged zone
......................................................................................................................................... 283 The Crushed Zone
......................................................................................................................................... 284 Perf oration tunnel which penetrates the f ormation
......................................................................................................................................... 284 Perf oration tunnel through the casing and cement
......................................................................................................................................... 285 Annulus between Casing and Screen
......................................................................................................................................... 285 Hemispherical Flow Model
......................................................................................................................................................... 286 Using SkinAide
......................................................................................................................................... 286 Flow Model
......................................................................................................................................... 287 Skin Model
......................................................................................................................................... 287 Perf oration Data
......................................................................................................................................... 288 Geometry
VI Contents
......................................................................................................................................... 289 Petrophysics
......................................................................................................................................... 291 Damaged Zone
......................................................................................................................................... 291 Cased Hole
......................................................................................................................................... 292 Crushed Zone
......................................................................................................................................... 293 Perf orations
.......................................................................................................................................................... 300 SPOT: Shell Perforating Optimisation Tool
......................................................................................................................................................... 300 Introduction to SPOT
......................................................................................................................................................... 302 Gun System databases
......................................................................................................................................... 307 Gun
......................................................................................................................................... 309 Spot Perf oration Calculations
......................................................................................................................................................... 311 SPOT: Model inputs
......................................................................................................................................... 313 SPOT: Model inputs - Options
......................................................................................................................................... 321 SPOT: Model inputs - Layers
................................................................................................................................... 326 SPOT: Model inputs - Rel Perm Data
................................................................................................................................... 330 SPOT: Model inputs - Mud Invasion
................................................................................................................................... 339 SPOT: Model inputs - Old Gun
......................................................................................................................................... 341 SPOT: Model inputs - Log Data
................................................................................................................................... 345 SPOT: Model inputs - Generate Log Data
................................................................................................................................... 345 SPOT: Model inputs - Perf oration Cutof f
................................................................................................................................... 346 SPOT: Model inputs - Perf oration Depth
......................................................................................................................................... 347 SPOT: Model inputs - Completion
......................................................................................................................................... 349 SPOT: Model inputs - Gravel Pack
......................................................................................................................................................... 350 SPOT: Model Results
......................................................................................................................................... 351 SPOT: Model Results - Layer Results
......................................................................................................................................... 352 SPOT: Model Results - Log Results
.......................................................................................................................................................... 353 Multi-Lateral Interface
......................................................................................................................................................... 353 Network Interf ace
......................................................................................................................................... 353 Motivation
......................................................................................................................................... 353 Interf ace Overview
................................................................................................................................... 355 Network Window
................................................................................................................................... 357 The Navigator Window
................................................................................................................................... 358 Toolbar Details
................................................................................................................................... 359 Network Manipulation
................................................................................................................................... 360 Menu Details
................................................................................................................................... 363 Visualisation Screens
......................................................................................................................................................... 364 Data Entry
......................................................................................................................................... 364 Overview
......................................................................................................................................... 365 Tie-point and Junction Data
......................................................................................................................................... 365 Tubing Data
......................................................................................................................................... 365 Completion Data
......................................................................................................................................... 366 Reservoir Data
......................................................................................................................................................... 366 Multilateral Example
................................................................................................................................... 366 7 Artificial Lift Data Input
.......................................................................................................................................................... 366 Continuous Gas Lift Input Data
......................................................................................................................................................... 367 General Options
......................................................................................................................................................... 368 Fixed Depth Of Injection
......................................................................................................................................................... 369 Optimum Depth of Injection
......................................................................................................................................................... 370 Valve Depth Specif ied
......................................................................................................................................................... 370 Gas Lif t (Saf ety Equipment)
......................................................................................................................................................... 372 Gas Lif t (Allow injection in Pipe Line above wellhead)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 373 Gas Lift For Gas Wells
......................................................................................................................................................... 374 Gas Lif t For Gas Wells Input
.......................................................................................................................................................... 375 Intermittent Gas Lift
.......................................................................................................................................................... 375 ESP Input Data
PROSPER VII
......................................................................................................................................................... 378 Gas Separator Modelling
......................................................................................................................................... 378 Enter Separator Ef f iciency
......................................................................................................................................... 378 Calculate - Petroleum Experts
......................................................................................................................................... 379 Calculate - Natural
......................................................................................................................................... 380 Comparison of Separator Models
......................................................................................................................................... 380 Separator Ef f iciency Calculation
......................................................................................................................................................... 381 Pump Wear Factor
......................................................................................................................................................... 382 Tapered ESPs
......................................................................................................................................................... 383 ESP in Pipeline
.......................................................................................................................................................... 385 HSP Input Data
.......................................................................................................................................................... 387 Progressive Cavity Pumps
......................................................................................................................................................... 387 Sucker Rod Drive
......................................................................................................................................................... 389 Downhole Motor Drive
.......................................................................................................................................................... 390 Coiled Tubing Gas Lift
.......................................................................................................................................................... 392 Diluent Injection
.......................................................................................................................................................... 394 Jet Pumps
.......................................................................................................................................................... 396 Multiphase Pumps
.......................................................................................................................................................... 396 Sucker Rod Pumps
................................................................................................................................... 398 8 Matching Menu
.......................................................................................................................................................... 400 VLP/IPR Match and Quality Check
......................................................................................................................................................... 403 Estimate U Value
......................................................................................................................................................... 403 Correlation Comparison
......................................................................................................................................... 404 VLP Quality Check
......................................................................................................................................................... 406 VLP Matching
......................................................................................................................................... 410 VLP Correlation Applications
......................................................................................................................................................... 411 IPR Matching
......................................................................................................................................... 414 Adjust IPR
.......................................................................................................................................................... 416 Gradient Matching
.......................................................................................................................................................... 418 Surface Pipe Matching
.......................................................................................................................................................... 420 Correlation Comparison
.......................................................................................................................................................... 425 QuickLook for Gas Lift
......................................................................................................................................................... 426 Calculation Details
......................................................................................................................................... 426 Top Down (Measured)
......................................................................................................................................... 426 Bottom Up (Calculated)
......................................................................................................................................................... 427 Input
......................................................................................................................................................... 429 Perf orming the QuickLook Calculation
......................................................................................................................................................... 432 Notes on Quicklook f or Gas Lif t
.......................................................................................................................................................... 433 QuickLook for ESP
......................................................................................................................................................... 433 Calculation Details
......................................................................................................................................... 434 From Fixed WHP
......................................................................................................................................... 434 From Static BHP
......................................................................................................................................................... 435 Input
......................................................................................................................................................... 440 Notes on ESP Quicklook Matching
.......................................................................................................................................................... 441 QuickLook for HSP
......................................................................................................................................................... 441 Input
......................................................................................................................................... 444 Pump Speed Method
.......................................................................................................................................................... 447 Tubing Parameters
.......................................................................................................................................................... 447 Pipeline Parameters
.......................................................................................................................................................... 447 Correlation Thresholds
................................................................................................................................... 448 9 Calculation Menu
.......................................................................................................................................................... 449 Inflow (IPR)
VIII Contents
......................................................................................................................................................... 449 IPR Calculation Screen
......................................................................................................................................... 450 IPR Data Input
......................................................................................................................................... 451 IPR Sensitivity Cases
......................................................................................................................................... 452 IPR Results
......................................................................................................................................... 452 IPR Plot
......................................................................................................................................... 453 IPR Toolbar
................................................................................................................................... 453 Cases
................................................................................................................................... 455 Calculate
................................................................................................................................... 455 Plot
.......................................................................................................................................................... 456 System (IPR + VLP)
......................................................................................................................................................... 456 System Calculation Screen
......................................................................................................................................... 457 Data Input
......................................................................................................................................... 460 Sensitivity Cases
......................................................................................................................................... 461 Results
......................................................................................................................................... 461 System Plot
......................................................................................................................................... 461 Toolbar
................................................................................................................................... 462 Calculate
................................................................................................................................... 463 Running Sensitivity Studies
................................................................................................................................... 464 Plotting Sensitivity Results
................................................................................................................................... 467 Plot
................................................................................................................................... 469 Gradient Calculations
................................................................................................................................... 469 Export Lif t Curves
.......................................................................................................................................................... 470 Gradient (Traverse)
......................................................................................................................................................... 471 Gradient Calculation Screen
......................................................................................................................................... 471 Data Input
................................................................................................................................... 473 Barnea Critera
................................................................................................................................... 473 Slugging Methods
......................................................................................................................................... 476 Sensitivity Cases
......................................................................................................................................... 476 Results
......................................................................................................................................... 477 Gradient Plot
......................................................................................................................................... 478 Toolbar
................................................................................................................................... 479 Calculate
................................................................................................................................... 479 Sensitivity Cases
................................................................................................................................... 481 Plot
................................................................................................................................... 482 Options
......................................................................................................................................................... 482 Note on HSP
.......................................................................................................................................................... 482 VLP (Tubing Curves)
......................................................................................................................................................... 483 VLP Calculation
......................................................................................................................................................... 484 VLP Calculation Screen
......................................................................................................................................... 485 VLP Input Data
......................................................................................................................................... 488 VLP Sensitivity Cases
......................................................................................................................................... 488 VLP Results
......................................................................................................................................... 489 VLP Plot
......................................................................................................................................... 489 VLP Toolbar
................................................................................................................................... 490 Sensitivity Cases
................................................................................................................................... 491 VLP Recommended Variables
................................................................................................................................... 492 Export Lif t Curves
.......................................................................................................................................................... 493 Choke Performance
.......................................................................................................................................................... 496 ESP Performance
.......................................................................................................................................................... 497 Generate for GAP
.......................................................................................................................................................... 500 Bottom Hole Pressure from Wellhead Pressure
......................................................................................................................................................... 502 Ref erences
.......................................................................................................................................................... 502 Reset Results
.......................................................................................................................................................... 503 Note on Enthalpy Balance Model
PROSPER IX
................................................................................................................................... 503 10 Design Menu
.......................................................................................................................................................... 504 Continuous Gas Lift Design
......................................................................................................................................................... 504 Menu Options
......................................................................................................................................................... 505 New Well
......................................................................................................................................... 506 Setting Up the Design Problem
......................................................................................................................................... 511 Gas Lif t Valve Selection
......................................................................................................................................... 511 Perf orming the Design (New Well)
................................................................................................................................... 512 Calculation of the Design Rate
................................................................................................................................... 514 Calculating the Valve Spacings
................................................................................................................................... 514 Plotting the Gas Lif t Design
................................................................................................................................... 515 Design Results
................................................................................................................................... 517 Valve Perf ormance
................................................................................................................................... 517 Gas Lif t Stability
................................................................................................................................... 519 Transf erring Design to Model
......................................................................................................................................................... 519 Existing Mandrels Design
......................................................................................................................................... 520 Setting Up the Design Problem
......................................................................................................................................... 521 Def ining the Depths of Existing Mandrels
......................................................................................................................................... 523 Gas Lif t Valve Selection
......................................................................................................................................... 523 Calculating the Design Rate
......................................................................................................................................... 525 Designing Gas Lif t System (Existing Mandrels)
......................................................................................................................................... 526 Design Results
......................................................................................................................................................... 526 Gas Lif t Design Sensitivity
......................................................................................................................................................... 529 Gas Lif t Adjustments
......................................................................................................................................................... 535 Gaslif t Valve Perf ormance
......................................................................................................................................... 535 Valve Perf ormance Clearinghouse (VPC)
......................................................................................................................................................... 536 Notes on Gas Lif t Design
......................................................................................................................................... 536 Gas Lif t Perf ormance Curve
......................................................................................................................................... 539 Unloading with Gas Lif t
................................................................................................................................... 540 Spacing Procedure f or Casing Sensitive Valves in PROSPER
................................................................................................................................... 541 Spacing Procedure f or Tubing Sensitive Valves in PROSPER
................................................................................................................................... 541 Valves
................................................................................................................................... 543 Unloading with Valves
................................................................................................................................... 545 Sizing the Valves
................................................................................................................................... 549 Use IPR f or Unloading
................................................................................................................................... 550 Check Rate Conf ormance with IPR
......................................................................................................................................... 551 Proportional Valves
.......................................................................................................................................................... 554 Electrical Submersible Pump Design
......................................................................................................................................................... 555 ESP Design Parameters
......................................................................................................................................................... 555 ESP Calculate
......................................................................................................................................... 558 Checking Suitability of Separator Ef f iciency
......................................................................................................................................................... 558 ESP Design (Pump, Motor and Cable Selection)
......................................................................................................................................... 560 Checking the Pump Design
.......................................................................................................................................................... 561 Hydraulic Pump Design
......................................................................................................................................................... 561 HSP Design Parameters
......................................................................................................................................................... 563 HSP Calculate
......................................................................................................................................................... 564 HSP Design (Pump and Turbine Selection)
......................................................................................................................................... 566 Checking the Pump/Turbine Design
.......................................................................................................................................................... 567 Progressive Cavity Pump Design
......................................................................................................................................................... 568 PCP Design Parameters
......................................................................................................................................................... 569 PCP Calculate
......................................................................................................................................................... 571 PCP Design (Sucker Rod Drive)
......................................................................................................................................................... 572 PCP Design (Down-hole Motor)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 574 Coiled Tubing GasLift Design
......................................................................................................................................................... 574 Coiled Tubing Design Parameters
X Contents
......................................................................................................................................................... 575 Coiled Tubing Design Rate
......................................................................................................................................................... 576 Coiled Tubing Design
.......................................................................................................................................................... 577 Intermittent Gas Lift
......................................................................................................................................................... 577 Intermittent Gas Lif t Theory
......................................................................................................................................................... 580 Design Parameters
......................................................................................................................................................... 582 Valves
.......................................................................................................................................................... 584 Jet Pump Design
......................................................................................................................................................... 585 Jet Pump Theory
......................................................................................................................................................... 587 Jet Pump Design Parameters
......................................................................................................................................................... 588 Jet Pump Calculate
......................................................................................................................................................... 588 Jet Pump Design (Pump Selection)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 589 Sucker Rod Pump Design
......................................................................................................................................................... 590 Background
......................................................................................................................................................... 593 Design Sucker Rod Pump
......................................................................................................................................... 594 Enter Design Parameters
......................................................................................................................................... 595 Perf orm Design
......................................................................................................................................... 597 Rod Sensitivity
.......................................................................................................................................................... 598 Artificial Lift Database
......................................................................................................................................................... 599 Database Toolbar
......................................................................................................................................................... 600 Gas Lif t Valve Database
......................................................................................................................................... 600 Adding a New Valve
......................................................................................................................................................... 601 ESP Database
......................................................................................................................................... 601 Pump Database
................................................................................................................................... 603 Adding a New Pump
......................................................................................................................................... 606 Motor Database
................................................................................................................................... 607 Adding a New Motor
......................................................................................................................................... 610 Cables Database
................................................................................................................................... 611 Adding a New Cable
......................................................................................................................................................... 611 HSP Database
......................................................................................................................................... 611 Pumps Database
................................................................................................................................... 612 Adding a New Pump
......................................................................................................................................... 614 Turbines Database
................................................................................................................................... 615 Adding a New Turbine
......................................................................................................................................................... 617 PCP Database
......................................................................................................................................... 617 Pumps Database
................................................................................................................................... 618 Adding a New Pump
......................................................................................................................................... 623 Sucker Rods Database
................................................................................................................................... 623 Adding a New Sucker Rod
......................................................................................................................................... 624 Motor and Cable Databases
......................................................................................................................................................... 624 Jet Pumps Database
......................................................................................................................................... 625 Adding a New Pump
......................................................................................................................................................... 625 MultiPhase Pumps Database
......................................................................................................................................... 626 Adding a New Pump
......................................................................................................................................................... 627 Sucker Rod Pump
......................................................................................................................................... 627 Pump database
................................................................................................................................... 627 Adding a New Pump
......................................................................................................................................... 632 Sucker Rods Database
................................................................................................................................... 633 Adding a New Sucker Rod
................................................................................................................................... 633 11 Output
.......................................................................................................................................................... 634 Report
......................................................................................................................................................... 634 Setting Up the Reporting System
......................................................................................................................................................... 634 Reports
.......................................................................................................................................................... 650 Export
......................................................................................................................................................... 650 Export Setup
PROSPER XI
.......................................................................................................................................................... 655 Plot
................................................................................................................................... 656 12 Units
.......................................................................................................................................................... 657 Units Summary
......................................................................................................................................................... 658 Unit Systems
......................................................................................................................................................... 659 Changing Unit Systems f or some Variables
......................................................................................................................................................... 660 Changing the Units
......................................................................................................................................................... 662 Validation Limits
......................................................................................................................................................... 662 Units Details
......................................................................................................................................................... 663 Units Reset
................................................................................................................................... 663 13 Wizard
.......................................................................................................................................................... 663 Running the Wizard
.......................................................................................................................................................... 664 Creating/Editing a Wizard
......................................................................................................................................................... 665 Notes of OS strings
......................................................................................................................................................... 666 Wizard examples
................................................................................................................................... 666 14 Plotting
.......................................................................................................................................................... 666 Selecting Plotting Method
.......................................................................................................................................................... 667 New Plot Screen
......................................................................................................................................................... 668 Sensitivity Cases
......................................................................................................................................................... 669 Variables
......................................................................................................................................................... 669 Plotting Options
......................................................................................................................................................... 671 Plot
......................................................................................................................................................... 672 General Plot Data
.......................................................................................................................................................... 672 Plotting Variables
......................................................................................................................................................... 672 Plotting Variables f or Single Case
......................................................................................................................................................... 674 Plotting Variables f or Multiple Cases
.......................................................................................................................................................... 676 Saving and Recalling Plots
......................................................................................................................................................... 676 Saving a Plot
......................................................................................................................................................... 678 Recalling a Plot
................................................................................................................................... 679 15 Help
.......................................................................................................................................................... 680 Finding Information in Help
......................................................................................................................................................... 680 Use the Search f eature in Help
......................................................................................................................................................... 680 Use the Help Index
......................................................................................................................................................... 680 Context Sensitive Help
.......................................................................................................................................................... 680 Accessing Help
......................................................................................................................................................... 680 Help Through the Menu
......................................................................................................................................................... 680 Getting Help Using the Mouse
......................................................................................................................................................... 680 Getting Help Using the Keyboard
......................................................................................................................................................... 681 To Minimise Help
.......................................................................................................................................................... 681 Flow Correlations
.......................................................................................................................................................... 681 Open Server
.......................................................................................................................................................... 681 Help About PROSPER
.......................................................................................................................................................... 682 Web Options
................................................................................................................................... 682 16 Appendix
.......................................................................................................................................................... 682 A - References
......................................................................................................................................................... 682 PVT Calculations
......................................................................................................................................... 683 CO2 Injection
......................................................................................................................................... 684 PVT Separator Pressure
......................................................................................................................................................... 685 IPR Calculations
......................................................................................................................................................... 686 Multiphase Flow Calculations
......................................................................................................................................................... 687 Temperature Calculations
......................................................................................................................................................... 688 Artif icial Lif t Design
.......................................................................................................................................................... 689 B - Equations
XII Contents
......................................................................................................................................................... 689 Black Oil Model f or Condensate
......................................................................................................................................... 689 Mass Balance Calculations
......................................................................................................................................... 692 Using the mass balance results to def ine Condensate Model
......................................................................................................................................... 694 Estimation of CGRmin
......................................................................................................................................................... 695 Multiphase Pseudo Pressure
......................................................................................................................................................... 697 Temperature Models
......................................................................................................................................... 698 Rough Approximation Temperature Model
................................................................................................................................... 699 Overall Heat Transf er Coef f icient
......................................................................................................................................... 700 Enthalpy Balance
................................................................................................................................... 707 Def ault Thermal Properties Database
......................................................................................................................................................... 708 Choke Calculation
......................................................................................................................................................... 709 Sand Control Calculations
......................................................................................................................................... 713 Pressure Drop Across Sand Control
................................................................................................................................... 713 Gravel Pack
................................................................................................................................... 714 Pre-Packed Screen
................................................................................................................................... 716 Wire-Wrapped Screen
................................................................................................................................... 717 Slotted Liner
......................................................................................................................................................... 722 Multi-Phase Flow Correlations
......................................................................................................................................... 725 Multiphase Flow Fundamentals
................................................................................................................................... 725 Single-Phase Energy Balance Equation
................................................................................................................................... 726 Multi-Phase Energy Balance Equation
................................................................................................................................... 727 Multi-Phase Flow
................................................................................................................................... 729 Flow Regimes
................................................................................................................................... 730 PVT
......................................................................................................................................... 731 Historical Development
......................................................................................................................................... 732 VLP Flow Correlations
................................................................................................................................... 733 Hagedorn Brown
................................................................................................................................... 735 Duns and Ros
................................................................................................................................... 739 Gray
................................................................................................................................... 740 Aziz Govier and Fogarisi
................................................................................................................................... 743 Beggs and Brill
................................................................................................................................... 746 Orkisewski
......................................................................................................................................... 748 Pipeline Correlations
................................................................................................................................... 748 Dukler
................................................................................................................................... 749 Dukler Flanigan
.......................................................................................................................................................... 750 C - Dietz Shape Factors
.......................................................................................................................................................... 752 D - File Formats
......................................................................................................................................................... 752 Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 752 External PVT Tables
......................................................................................................................................................... 754 Lif t Curves
......................................................................................................................................................... 755 IPR
......................................................................................................................................................... 756 ESP PUMPS
......................................................................................................................................................... 757 ESP MOTORS
......................................................................................................................................................... 758 ESP CABLES
......................................................................................................................................................... 759 HSP PUMPS
......................................................................................................................................................... 760 HSP TURBINES
.......................................................................................................................................................... 761 E - Glossary
.......................................................................................................................................................... 770 F - Importing Data from Text Files
Chapter 3 Examples Guide 777
................................................................................................................................... 777 1 Prosper Tutorials
.......................................................................................................................................................... 780 Introduction to Tutorials in PROSPER
......................................................................................................................................................... 781 Advise on Input Data
PROSPER XIII
......................................................................................................................................... 781 PVT Data
......................................................................................................................................... 782 Reservoir Data
......................................................................................................................................... 782 Well Equipment Data
......................................................................................................................................... 783 Well Test Data
.......................................................................................................................................................... 784 Tutorial 00 Integrated Oil Well Model
......................................................................................................................................................... 784 Statement of the Problem
......................................................................................................................................................... 784 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 785 General Approach
......................................................................................................................................................... 785 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 785 Basic Data
......................................................................................................................................... 786 PVT Data
......................................................................................................................................... 786 Equipment Data
................................................................................................................................... 787 Deviation Survey
................................................................................................................................... 787 Downhole Equipment
................................................................................................................................... 788 Geothermal Gradient Data
................................................................................................................................... 788 Average Heat Capacity Data
......................................................................................................................................... 788 IPR Data
......................................................................................................................................... 789 Completion Data
......................................................................................................................................... 790 Sand Control Data
......................................................................................................................................... 790 Test Data
......................................................................................................................................................... 790 Step-by-Step Guide
......................................................................................................................................... 791 Setting Up the Model
......................................................................................................................................... 791 Inserting PVT Data
................................................................................................................................... 792 PVT Matching
................................................................................................................................... 794 Matching the Correlations
................................................................................................................................... 798 Selecting the Correlation
......................................................................................................................................... 799 Specif ying Equipment Data
................................................................................................................................... 802 Surf ace Equipment
................................................................................................................................... 804 Geothermal Gradient
................................................................................................................................... 805 Average Heat Capacities
................................................................................................................................... 805 Gauge Details
................................................................................................................................... 806 Equipment Summary
......................................................................................................................................... 807 Inputting IPR Data
................................................................................................................................... 808 Entering Data f or the Darcy Model
................................................................................................................................... 809 Entering Data f or Skin Models
................................................................................................................................... 811 Entering Data f or Sand Control
......................................................................................................................................... 813 VLP/IPR Matching
................................................................................................................................... 814 Entering Well Test Data
................................................................................................................................... 815 Matching U Value
................................................................................................................................... 817 VLP Quality Check
................................................................................................................................... 821 Correlation Comparison
................................................................................................................................... 825 VLP Matching
................................................................................................................................... 827 IPR Matching
................................................................................................................................... 829 Adjust IPR
......................................................................................................................................... 833 Water Cut Sensitivity
................................................................................................................................... 833 Setting Variables
................................................................................................................................... 835 System Calculation
.......................................................................................................................................................... 838 Tutorial 01 Basic Oil Well Model
......................................................................................................................................................... 838 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 839 Available Data
XIV Contents
......................................................................................................................................... 839 Basic Data
......................................................................................................................................... 839 PVT Data
......................................................................................................................................... 840 Equipment Data
......................................................................................................................................... 842 IPR Data
................................................................................................................................... 850 Gauge Details
......................................................................................................................................... 856 Running System Calc
................................................................................................................................... 857 Inserting Calculation Conditions
................................................................................................................................... 858 Running a System Calculation
.......................................................................................................................................................... 860 Tutorial 02 - Basic Gas Well Model
......................................................................................................................................................... 860 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 861 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 861 Basic Data
......................................................................................................................................... 861 PVT Data
......................................................................................................................................... 862 Equipment Data
......................................................................................................................................... 864 IPR Data
......................................................................................................................................... 865 Setting Up The Model
................................................................................................................................... 873 Gauge Details
.......................................................................................................................................................... 885 Tutorial 03 - Basic Water Injection Model
......................................................................................................................................................... 885 Objectives
PROSPER XV
......................................................................................................................................................... 886 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 886 Basic Data
......................................................................................................................................... 886 PVT Data
......................................................................................................................................... 887 Equipment Data
......................................................................................................................................... 888 IPR Data
................................................................................................................................... 897 Gauge Details
.......................................................................................................................................................... 907 Tutorial 04 - Basic Gas Injection Model
......................................................................................................................................................... 907 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 908 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 908 Basic Data
......................................................................................................................................... 908 PVT Data
......................................................................................................................................... 909 Equipment Data
......................................................................................................................................... 910 IPR Data
................................................................................................................................... 920 Gauge Details
.......................................................................................................................................................... 928 Tutorial 05 - Matching PVT of an Oil
......................................................................................................................................................... 928 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 929 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 929 PVT Match Data
XVI Contents
......................................................................................................................................... 929 Inserting Match Data
......................................................................................................................................... 930 Matching the Correlations
......................................................................................................................................... 934 Selecting the Correlation
.......................................................................................................................................................... 938 Tutorial 06 - Matching PVT of a Gas
......................................................................................................................................................... 938 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 939 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 939 PVT Match Data
......................................................................................................................................... 939 Inserting Match Data
......................................................................................................................................... 940 Matching the Correlations
......................................................................................................................................... 944 Selecting the Correlation
.......................................................................................................................................................... 948 Tutorial 07 - Adding a Surface Pipeline
......................................................................................................................................................... 948 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 949 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 949 Pipeline Data
......................................................................................................................................... 950 Inserting Pipeline Data
.......................................................................................................................................................... 956 Tutorial 08 - The Darcy IPR Model
......................................................................................................................................................... 956 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 957 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 957 IPR Model Data
......................................................................................................................................... 957 Sensitivity Study Data
......................................................................................................................................... 957 Selecting the Darcy Model
......................................................................................................................................... 958 Inserting IPR Data
......................................................................................................................................... 961 Perf orming a Sensitivity Study
.......................................................................................................................................................... 968 Tutorial 09 - The SPOT IPR Model
......................................................................................................................................................... 968 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 969 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 969 IPR Model Data
......................................................................................................................................... 972 Selecting the SPOT Model
PROSPER XVII
................................................................................................................................... 973 SPOT Options
................................................................................................................................... 974 SPOT Layers
................................................................................................................................... 979 SPOT Log Data
................................................................................................................................... 981 SPOT Completion
......................................................................................................................................... 983 Viewing SPOT Skin Results
.......................................................................................................................................................... 989 Tutorial 10 - Horizontal Well IPR Model
......................................................................................................................................................... 989 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 990 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 990 IPR Model Data
......................................................................................................................................... 991 Selecting the Horizontal Well Model
.......................................................................................................................................................... 997 Tutorial 11 - Multilayer Well IPR Model
......................................................................................................................................................... 997 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 998 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 998 IPR Model Data
......................................................................................................................................... 999 Selecting the Multilayer Model
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1009 Tutorial 12 - Multilateral Well IPR
......................................................................................................................................................... 1009 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1010 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1010 IPR Model Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1013 Setting up the Model
......................................................................................................................................... 1014 Multilateral IPR Model
................................................................................................................................... 1015 Building the Multilateral Network
................................................................................................................................... 1016 Adding the Tie-Point
................................................................................................................................... 1016 Adding the Junction
................................................................................................................................... 1017 Adding the Completions
................................................................................................................................... 1018 Adding the Reservoir
................................................................................................................................... 1018 Adding the Links
................................................................................................................................... 1019 Inputting Model Data
................................................................................................................................... 1020 T1 Input
................................................................................................................................... 1021 Joint 1 Input
................................................................................................................................... 1022 Branch 1 Input
................................................................................................................................... 1025 Branch 2 Input
................................................................................................................................... 1028 Reservoir Input
................................................................................................................................... 1029 Viewing the Well
XVIII Contents
................................................................................................................................... 1030 Calculating the IPR
................................................................................................................................... 1030 Single Pressure Point
................................................................................................................................... 1033 IPR Curve
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1035 Tutorial 13 - Modelling Skin
......................................................................................................................................................... 1035 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1036 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1036 Completion Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1037 Selecting the Skin Models
......................................................................................................................................... 1037 Inserting Skin Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1039 Viewing Calculated Skin
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1045 Tutorial 14 - Modelling a Gravel Pack
......................................................................................................................................................... 1045 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1046 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1046 Saving a Previous Plot
......................................................................................................................................... 1047 Setting up Sand Control
......................................................................................................................................... 1048 Gravel Pack Input Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1050 Plotting Saved Streams
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1054 Tutorial 15 - Modelling a Frac and Pack Well
......................................................................................................................................................... 1054 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1055 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1055 Fracture Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1056 IPR Input Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1059 Gravel Pack Input Data
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1064 Tutorial 16 - Modelling a Wire-wrapped Screen
......................................................................................................................................................... 1064 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1065 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1066 Wire-wrapped Screen Input Data
PROSPER XIX
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1072 Tutorial 17 - Modelling a Pre-Packed Screen
......................................................................................................................................................... 1072 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1073 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1074 Pre-Packed Screen Input Data
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1080 Tutorial 18 - Modelling a Slotted Linear
......................................................................................................................................................... 1080 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1081 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1082 Slotted Liner Input Data
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1088 Tutorial 19 - Matching an Oil Well Test
......................................................................................................................................................... 1088 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1089 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1089 Well Test Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1090 VLP/IPR Matching
................................................................................................................................... 1092 Matching U Value
................................................................................................................................... 1094 VLP Quality Check
................................................................................................................................... 1102 VLP Matching
................................................................................................................................... 1104 IPR Matching
................................................................................................................................... 1106 Adjust IPR
......................................................................................................................................... 1110 Water Cut Sensitivity
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1115 Tutorial 20 - Matching a Gas Well Test
......................................................................................................................................................... 1115 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1116 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1116 Well Test Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1117 VLP/IPR Matching
................................................................................................................................... 1118 Matching U Value
XX Contents
................................................................................................................................... 1124 VLP Matching
................................................................................................................................... 1126 IPR Matching
................................................................................................................................... 1128 Adjust IPR
......................................................................................................................................... 1129 WGR Sensitivity
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1135 Tutorial 21 - Matching a Water Injection Well Test
......................................................................................................................................................... 1135 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1136 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1136 Well Test Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1136 VLP/IPR Matching
................................................................................................................................... 1138 Matching U Value
................................................................................................................................... 1144 VLP Matching
................................................................................................................................... 1146 IPR Matching
................................................................................................................................... 1148 Adjust IPR
......................................................................................................................................... 1150 Generating VLP Tables
................................................................................................................................... 1150 VLP Input Data
................................................................................................................................... 1154 Calculating and Exporting VLPs
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1159 Tutorial 22 - Matching a Gas Injection Well Test
......................................................................................................................................................... 1159 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1160 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1160 Well Test Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1160 VLP/IPR Matching
................................................................................................................................... 1162 Matching U Value
................................................................................................................................... 1168 VLP Matching
................................................................................................................................... 1170 IPR Matching
................................................................................................................................... 1172 Adjust IPR
................................................................................................................................... 1175 VLP Input Data
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1184 Tutorial 23 - Designing a Continuous Gas Lift System
......................................................................................................................................................... 1184 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1185 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1185 Gas Lif t Options
......................................................................................................................................... 1185 IPR Model Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1185 Completion Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1186 Gas Lif t Design Criteria
......................................................................................................................................... 1187 Activating Gas Lif t Option
......................................................................................................................................... 1188 Def ining the Annulus
......................................................................................................................................... 1189 Updating the Reservoir Conditions
PROSPER XXI
......................................................................................................................................... 1191 Designing a Gas Lif ted System
................................................................................................................................... 1192 Entering the Design Criteria
................................................................................................................................... 1192 Finding the Design Rate
................................................................................................................................... 1194 Designing the Valve Depths
................................................................................................................................... 1196 Results of Gas Lif t Design
................................................................................................................................... 1197 Checking the Design Stability
......................................................................................................................................... 1199 Transf erring Gas Lif t Design
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1206 Tutorial 24 - Modelling an Intermitent Gas Lifted Well
......................................................................................................................................................... 1206 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1207 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1207 Gas Lif t Options
......................................................................................................................................... 1207 IPR Model Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1207 Completion Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1211 Updating the Downhole Equipment
................................................................................................................................... 1213 Constant Surf ace Closing Pressure Method
......................................................................................................................................... 1214 Calculating the Rate f rom an Intermittent Gas Lif ted Well
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1216 Tutorial 25 - Designing a Coiled Tubing Gas Lift System
......................................................................................................................................................... 1216 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1217 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1217 Gas Lif t Options
......................................................................................................................................... 1217 IPR Model Data
................................................................................................................................... 1222 Entering the Design Criteria
................................................................................................................................... 1222 Finding the Design Rate
................................................................................................................................... 1223 Designing the Valve Depths
......................................................................................................................................... 1225 Transf erring Gas Lif t Design
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1230 Tutorial 26 - Designing an ESP Lifted System
......................................................................................................................................................... 1230 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1231 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1231 ESP Options
......................................................................................................................................... 1231 IPR Model Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1231 Completion Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1232 ESP Design Criteria
XXII Contents
......................................................................................................................................... 1232 Activating ESP Option
......................................................................................................................................... 1236 Designing an ESP lif ted System
................................................................................................................................... 1237 ESP Calculation
................................................................................................................................... 1239 ESP Design
......................................................................................................................................... 1242 Transf erring ESP to Model
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1249 Tutorial 27 - Designing an HSP Lifted System
......................................................................................................................................................... 1249 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1250 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1250 HSP Options
......................................................................................................................................... 1250 Completion Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1250 IPR Model Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1251 HSP Design Criteria
......................................................................................................................................... 1251 Activating HSP Option
......................................................................................................................................... 1252 Power Fluid Properties
......................................................................................................................................... 1256 Designing an HSP lif ted System
................................................................................................................................... 1257 HSP Calculation
................................................................................................................................... 1258 HSP Design
......................................................................................................................................... 1262 Transf erring HSP to Model
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1268 Tutorial 28 - Designing a Sucker Rod Pump System
......................................................................................................................................................... 1268 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1269 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1269 SRP Options
......................................................................................................................................... 1269 PVT Data
................................................................................................................................... 1269 Match Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1269 Equipment Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1271 IPR Model Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1272 SRP Design Criteria
......................................................................................................................................... 1273 Setting up the Model
......................................................................................................................................... 1273 Inserting the PVT
................................................................................................................................... 1274 Inserting Match Data
................................................................................................................................... 1275 Matching the Correlations
................................................................................................................................... 1276 Selecting the Correlation
PROSPER XXIII
................................................................................................................................... 1284 Gauge Details
......................................................................................................................................... 1286 Designing A Sucker Rod Pump System
................................................................................................................................... 1288 Rod Sensitivity
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1292 Tutorial 29 - Designing a PCP Lifted System
......................................................................................................................................................... 1292 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1293 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1293 PCP Options
......................................................................................................................................... 1293 IPR Model Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1293 Completion Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1294 PCP Design Criteria
......................................................................................................................................... 1294 Activating PCP Option
......................................................................................................................................... 1298 Designing a PCP Lif ted System
................................................................................................................................... 1299 PCP Calculation
................................................................................................................................... 1300 PCP Design
......................................................................................................................................... 1302 Transf erring PCP to Model
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1308 Tutorial 30 - Modelling Diluent Injection with Gas Lift
......................................................................................................................................................... 1308 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1309 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1309 Artif ical Lif t Options
......................................................................................................................................... 1309 PVT Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1309 IPR Model Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1309 Completion Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1310 Diluent Injection Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1310 Activating Diluent Injection Option
......................................................................................................................................... 1311 Def ine PVT Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1315 Def ine the Injection Data
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1320 Tutorial 31 - Modelling a Surface Multiphase Pump
......................................................................................................................................................... 1320 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1321 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1321 Artif ical Lif t Options
XXIV Contents
......................................................................................................................................... 1321 IPR Model Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1321 Pipeline Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1322 Pump Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1322 Activating the Multiphase Pump Option
......................................................................................................................................... 1323 Def ining the Surf ace Pipeline
......................................................................................................................................... 1326 Def ine Pump Details
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1333 Tutorial 32 - Designing a Jet Pump Lifted System
......................................................................................................................................................... 1333 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1334 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1334 Jet Pump Options
......................................................................................................................................... 1334 Completion Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1335 IPR Model Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1335 Jet Pump Design Criteria
......................................................................................................................................... 1335 Activating Jet Pump Option
......................................................................................................................................... 1336 Def ining the Power Fluid
......................................................................................................................................... 1340 Designing a Jet Pump lif ted System
................................................................................................................................... 1341 Jet Pump Calculation
................................................................................................................................... 1342 Jet Pump Design
......................................................................................................................................... 1344 Transf erring Jet Pump to Model
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1350 Tutorial 33 - Troubleshooting a Gas Lifted Well
......................................................................................................................................................... 1350 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1351 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1351 Well Test Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1351 Troubleshooting a Gas Lif ted Well with Quicklook
................................................................................................................................... 1352 Inserting Test Data
................................................................................................................................... 1354 Calculate Quicklook Plot
................................................................................................................................... 1355 Finding the Injection Depth
................................................................................................................................... 1357 Analysing the From Static BHP Gradient
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1364 Tutorial 34 - Troubleshooting an ESP Well
......................................................................................................................................................... 1364 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1365 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1365 Well Test Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1366 Troubleshooting an ESP Well with Quicklook
................................................................................................................................... 1366 Inputting Quicklook Data
PROSPER XXV
................................................................................................................................... 1369 Analysing the Fixed Top Node Pressure Gradient
................................................................................................................................... 1376 Updating the Model
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1380 Tutorial 35 - Troubleshooting an HSP Well
......................................................................................................................................................... 1380 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1381 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1381 Well Test Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1381 Troubleshooting an HSP Well with Quicklook
................................................................................................................................... 1382 Inputting Quicklook Data
................................................................................................................................... 1383 Analysing the Fixed Top Node Pressure Gradient
................................................................................................................................... 1392 Updating the Model
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1396 Tutorial 36 - Trouble-shooting a SRP-lifted well
......................................................................................................................................................... 1396 Dynamometer Card Analysis
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1398 Tutorial 37 - Modelling a Fully Compositional Retrograde Condensate Well
......................................................................................................................................................... 1398 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1399 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1399 Basic Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1399 PVT Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1400 Equipment Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1401 IPR Data
................................................................................................................................... 1412 Gauge Details
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1419 Tutorial 38 - Validation of the Black Oil Retrograde Condensate PVT Model
......................................................................................................................................................... 1419 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1420 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1420 Basic Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1420 PVT Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1421 Calculating the Gradient with EoS PVT
................................................................................................................................... 1423 Saving the Plot Results
XXVI Contents
......................................................................................................................................... 1424 Extracting the PVT Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1426 Changing the Model Set Up
......................................................................................................................................... 1428 Calculating the Gradient with BO PVT
................................................................................................................................... 1430 Recalling Saved Results
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1434 Tutorial 39 - Modelling a Fully Compositional CO2 Well
......................................................................................................................................................... 1434 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1435 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1435 Basic Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1435 PVT Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1436 Equipment Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1437 IPR Data
................................................................................................................................... 1448 Gauge Details
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1456 Tutorial 40 Enthalpy Balance Temperature Model Example
......................................................................................................................................................... 1456 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1457 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1457 Basic Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1458 Equipment Data
................................................................................................................................... 1459 Temperature Data
................................................................................................................................... 1459 Drilling and Completion Data
................................................................................................................................... 1460 Lithology Data
................................................................................................................................... 1460 Gauge Data
................................................................................................................................... 1467 Drilling and Completion Data
................................................................................................................................... 1468 Lithology Data
................................................................................................................................... 1469 Databases
................................................................................................................................... 1469 Gauge Details
PROSPER XXVII
................................................................................................................................... 1473 Calculating the Equivalent U Values
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1476 Tutorial 41 Improved Approximation Temperature Model Example
......................................................................................................................................................... 1476 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1477 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1477 Basic Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1477 Equipment Data
................................................................................................................................... 1484 VLP Input Data
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1493 Tutorial 42 Modelling a Steam Injection Well
......................................................................................................................................................... 1493 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1494 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1494 Basic Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1496 Calculating Saturation Temperature
......................................................................................................................................... 1501 Running a Gradient Calculation
................................................................................................................................... 1503 Running a Gradient Calculation
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1508 Tutorial 43 General Flow Assurance Features
......................................................................................................................................................... 1508 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1509 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1509 Test Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1510 Water Salinity Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1510 Instability and Liquid Loading
................................................................................................................................... 1511 Unstable VLP Curves
................................................................................................................................... 1511 Theory
................................................................................................................................... 1512 Using the VLP Curve f or Flow Assurance
................................................................................................................................... 1513 Turner Velocity
................................................................................................................................... 1513 Theory
................................................................................................................................... 1514 Using the Turner Velocity f or Flow Assurance
................................................................................................................................... 1515 Predicting Instability using Petroleum Experts 5
................................................................................................................................... 1515 Theory
................................................................................................................................... 1515 Using PE5 f or Flow Assurance
XXVIII Contents
................................................................................................................................... 1517 Summary of Techniques
......................................................................................................................................... 1517 Hydrate Formation
................................................................................................................................... 1518 Setting Up the Model
................................................................................................................................... 1519 Modelling the Impact of Salts on Hydrate Curves
................................................................................................................................... 1527 Calculating Hydrate Conditions
................................................................................................................................... 1527 Hydrate Flag in VLP
................................................................................................................................... 1529 Hydrate Flag in Gradient Calculation
......................................................................................................................................... 1530 Erosional Velocity Limit
................................................................................................................................... 1531 Calculating the Erosional Velocity
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1534 Tutorial 44 Modelling Non-Newtonian Fluids
......................................................................................................................................................... 1534 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1535 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1535 Basic Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1535 PVT Data
................................................................................................................................... 1536 Match Data
................................................................................................................................... 1536 Non-Newtonian Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1536 Equipment Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1538 IPR Data
................................................................................................................................... 1540 Matching PVT
................................................................................................................................... 1548 Gauge Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1548 Pressure Gradient with Newtonian Fluid
................................................................................................................................... 1549 Inserting Input data
................................................................................................................................... 1550 Calculating the Pressure Gradient
................................................................................................................................... 1550 Saving the Plot
......................................................................................................................................... 1551 Enabling the non-Newtonian Model
......................................................................................................................................... 1554 Pressure Gradient with non-Newtonian Fluid
................................................................................................................................... 1556 Comparing the Plots
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1560 Tutorial 45 CBM Water Well
......................................................................................................................................................... 1560 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1561 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1561 Basic Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1561 PVT Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1561 Equipment Data
PROSPER XXIX
......................................................................................................................................... 1563 IPR Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1564 ESP Data
................................................................................................................................... 1571 Gauge Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1575 Inserting ESP Details
................................................................................................................................... 1577 VLP Input Data
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1585 Tutorial 46 Modelling Emulsions
......................................................................................................................................................... 1585 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1586 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1586 Basic Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1586 PVT Data
................................................................................................................................... 1586 Match Data
................................................................................................................................... 1587 Emulsion Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1587 Equipment Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1589 IPR Data
................................................................................................................................... 1591 Matching PVT
................................................................................................................................... 1595 Adding Emulsion Data
................................................................................................................................... 1603 Gauge Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1603 Pressure Gradient without Emulsion
................................................................................................................................... 1605 Saving the Plot
......................................................................................................................................... 1606 Enabling the Emulsion Model
......................................................................................................................................... 1607 Pressure Gradient with Emulsion Model
XXX Contents
................................................................................................................................... 1609 Comparing the Plots
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1614 Tutorial 47 - Modelling a Gas Lifted Gas Well
......................................................................................................................................................... 1614 Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1615 Available Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1615 Gas Lif t Options
......................................................................................................................................... 1615 IPR Model Data
......................................................................................................................................... 1618 Inserting the Gas Lif t Data
Chapter
1
Technical Overview 2
1 Technical Overview
This technical overview contains a summary list of the major technical capabilities of
PROSPER. The capabilities can be divided in the following disciplines:
Fluid modelling (PVT)
Inflow (IPR) and sand control options
Well bore and pipeline hydraulics (VLP)
Artificial lift options
Flow assurance and advanced thermal options
What's New
Examples Guide
1.1 Summary of Capabilities
# Functionality Comment
1 Fluid Descriptions for Oil
and Water, Dry and Wet
Gas and Retrograde
Condensate.
Depending upon the fluid type selected, only
options relevant to the fluid type that is selected will
be available throughout the building of the model.
2 PVT Handling for Black Oil
or Fully Compositional
Models
For black oil descriptions, the following correlations
are available:
Pb, Rs, Bo: Glaso, Standing, Lasater, Petrosky, Al
Mahroon
Viscosity: Beal, Beggs, Petrosky, Egbogah,
Bergman-Sutton
Gas viscosity: Lee, Carr
PROSPER includes a proprietary Black Oil model
for Condensates
For fully compositional; PR or SRK EoS
descriptions available, with or without Volume Shift.
3
PROSPER
When using EoS the viscosity can be modelled
using any of the black oil methods above or the
following models:
Lohrenz Bray Clark (LBC)
LBC with coefficients
Pedersen et al
3 Multiphase Flash with Water Water can be modelled within the EoS using a
multiphase flash with water. These models include:
Soreide and Whitson
Modified Cubic
CPA
SRK plus Huron Vidal
4 Accurate CO
2
Modelling The density of CO
2
has been corrected for use
within an EoS by adjusting the volume shift of CO
2
.
This has the advantage of not limiting the
methodology to the pure component.
The thermal properties have also been adjusted to
give a much more accurate value over the pressure
and temperature range encountered in normal
application.
5 Hydrates Hydrate maps can be brought in from an external
program such as PVTp to be used as a warning to
when hydrates may occur.
Hydrate calculations also include a comprehensive
set of calculations based on the Hydrafact modified
Cubis and CPA models.
6 Calculation of Water Vapour
in Gas
This option allows the water vaporised in gas to be
calculated. The model will also condense or
vaporise more water into/out of the gas as the
pressure and temperature within the system
changes.
7 Steam Enabled Steam tables have been added to PROSPER for
generating lift curves in situations where steam is
injected in the reservoir (SAGD, Huff and Puff etc)
8 Handling of Non-Newtonian
Fluids
Specific model for the shear thinning or thickening
of fluids. This makes it possible to handle fluids that
traditional viscosity models (Beal, Petrosky etc)
have not been designed to address.
9 Handling of Emulsions on
Pressure Drops and ESP
Performance
PROSPER includes a range of models, as well as
Hydraulic Institute data for ESP head, power and
efficiency corrections. The user may also choose to
enter this data based on manufacturers
recommendations.
10 Ability to Derive Equivalent
Compositions from Black
Oil Models
This functionality is necessary in obtaining thermal
properties of hydrocarbon mixtures for enthalpy
balance calculations when a full EOS description
has not been provided.
11 Large number of Artificial
Lift Options
Continuous and Intermittent Gas Lift, ESP, Gas Lift,
Hydraulic Submersible Pumps, Progressive Cavity
Pumps, Diluent Injection, Simultaneous Diluent and
Gas Injection, Coil Tubing Gas Lift, Rod Pumps, Jet
Pumps, Multiphase Pumps (Framo)
12 Up to Date Artificial Lift
database
Vendors have provided a large number of pumps,
motors and cables to PETEX and these have been
added to PROSPER. We are working very closely
with Centrilift for example, since PROSPER is being
used to complement Autograph in their own internal
workflows (design and troubleshooting)
Also available are gas lift valves, Framo Multiphase
Pumps, Sucker Rod Pumps, Sucker Rods, HSP
and Jet Pumps.
5
PROSPER
13 Availability of Tubing,
Casing databases as well
as pipe schedules
The user can choose the casing or tubing from the
database and add the characteristics on the well
equipment window. This ensures consistency with
manufacturer data when the model is being
constructed.
14 Flow Type for tubing,
annular or both (tubing and
annular)
Flow regime map has been modified to take into
account the effects of flowing through tubing or the
annulus
15 Pressure Drop Models for
detecting minimum and
maximum physically
possible pressure in the well
(for troubleshooting test
down-hole gauge data)
Fancher-Brown and Duns & Ross Modified are
being used as QC models since they provide the
minimum and maximum physically possible
pressures in the wells.
16 Availability of Flow Models
that can predict well in all
flow regime areas
The Petroleum Experts models have been
designed to be able to calculate well in all flow
regimes, by combining the best features of
traditional models (Hagedorn Brown, Duns & Ross,
Griffith-Wallis etc.) along with Prof. Thomas Goulds
flow regime map.
17 Ability to perform pigging
calculations
18 Slug/bubble size and
frequency prediction models
This is used by flow assurance engineers to get an
idea of what the values will be without complex and
time consuming OLGA transient calculations.
19 Taitel Duckler Flow regime
map
This feature allows a comparison of the traditional
flow regime maps with the Taitel Duckler map,
which allows for changing boundaries between flow
regimes depending on the conditions.
20 Correlation available that
has been specifically
developed for heavy oils
Petroleum Experts 3 includes specialised
corrections for heavy oils and this has been tested
on fluids on fields like Captain (North Sea 200cp)
all the way to fluids from Venezuela (3000 cp)
21 Advanced Mechanistic
Models available
PETEX Models: Petroleum Experts 4 and 5
OLGAS 2 and 3 phase
Hydro 3 Phase
GRE Modified by PE
22 Ability to detect instability
through mechanistic models
Petroleum Experts 5 has been designed to show
negative friction gradients when a well goes into a
region of instability, indicating that liquid is
dropping back down into the tubing.
23 Simple and Advanced
Temperature prediction
models available for fluid
travelling in the well
PROSPER includes the Rough Approximation,
Improved Approximation and Enthalpy Balance
models. The Rough Approximation model allows
for grouping all heat losses in the well into one U
value (heat transfer coefficient).
The Improved Approximation model solves the full
energy equation, with the heat transfer entered
through multiple U values.
Enthalpy Balance Model solves full energy equation
predicting temperature changes, including Joules-
Thomson effects, free and forced convection,
conduction and radiation based on full well
completion description. Model is also transient,
predicting temperature changes in the formation
temperature over time.
24 Large Number of IPR
models available
The following IPR models have been added in
PROSPER allowing the users to choose model
depending on their data and objectives:
PI and Vogel
Composite
Darcy
Fetkovitch
Multi-rate Fetkovitch
Jones
Multi-rate Jones
Transient
Hydraulically fractured
Horizontal Well Models for upper boundary being
7
PROSPER
no flow or constant pressure:
Kuchuk and Goode
Babu and Odeh
Goode and Wilkinson
Multilayer
Multilayer with DP Friction loss
Skin-Aide (from Elf)
Dual Porosity
Horizontal well with transverse vertical fractures
SPOT (Shell Perforation Optimization Tool)
Additional Gas IPRs:
Petroleum Experts Gas IPR (uses Pseudo
Pressure)Forchheimer (with and without Pseudo
Pressure)
Multi-rate Forchheimer (with Pseudo Pressure)
Back Pressure
C and n
Multi-rate C and n
Modified Isochronal
Injection wells:
Thermally Induced Fracture
25 Modelled fluid temperature
entering the wellbore
IPR now includes the calculated bottom hole flowing
temperature which is found from the Joules-
Thompson effect as the fluid travels through the
formation.
26 Relative Permeability
Correction on the IPR
This is done by correcting the calculations of the
above models based on user defined relative
permeability curves.
27 Compaction correction on
the IPR
A correction factor can be applied to the
permeability of the reservoir due to compaction of
the formation as the reservoir pressure drops
below its initial value.
28 Multilateral model able to
predict interference
between large number of
branches
This is a unique model that many companies have
taken advantage of in studying the performance of
complex multilateral wells without the need to resort
to numerical simulation models.
29 Models able to predict
perforation skin, including
correction on Section 1 and
Section 2 data of API
standard
Locke
MacLeod
Karakas and Tariq
The simple analytical models listed above require
the user to enter the depth of penetration, which the
API standard derived data will not predict correctly
(stress corrections from surface to down-hole
conditions not done)
SPOT (Shell Perforation Optimization Tool) does
these corrections and has been found to be the
most advanced model currently available in a nodal
analysis package and has been given to PETEX for
implementation and distribution to all PETEX
clients.
30 Models predicting Partial
Penetration and deviation
skins
Cinco - Martin Bronz (includes 2 models as
described in the literature)
Wong - Clifford
31 Sand Control models Gravel Packs
Pre-Packed screen
Wire Wrapped Screen
Slotted Liner
32 Gas Coning Model A relationship between drawdown and GOR can be
inserted to include the effects of gas coning on the
producing fluid.
33 Ability to view erosional
velocities on VLPs
If calculated velocity is greater than calculated
erosional velocity at any point in the well a flag will
be raised at the given flow rate on the VLP curve.
34 Ability to view Turner criteria
on VLPs
If calculated velocity is less than calculated Turner
criteria at any point in the well a flag will be raised
at the given flow rate on the VLP curve.
35 Display of various
components of Skin on
VLP/IPR plot
The value of the different skin components and the
pressure drop associated with each skin can be
plotted on the VLP/IPR plot to assist completion
optimisation.
9
PROSPER
36 Sensitivity calculations These include completely different tubing
descriptions, gas lift injection points, depth of
pumps etc.
37 Ability to sensitise on
Perforation Guns from a
Gun Database
The SPOT functionality mentioned above allows for
the impact of different guns to be evaluated on the
same plot, allowing engineers to easily compare
guns from different vendors as to their effectiveness
in depth of penetration and ultimately recovery from
the formation.
38 Lift curve generation for
simulation studies
The following formats are available:
PETEX - GAP/MBAL
Schlumberger - Eclipse
Landmark - VIP
Well Drill - Simco 3
SSI - Comp 3
SSI - Comp 4
ExxonMobil - Pegasus
FranLab - FRAGOR
FranLab - Athos
Landmark - VIP
Roxar - MORE
Shell - MoRes
BP GCOMP
Chevron - CHEARS
ExxonMobil - EMPOWER
ConocoPhillips PSIM
CMG - IMEX/GEM (old format)
CMG IMEX/GEM (Release 2009.10)
Saudi Aramco - POWERS
39 Matching models to test
data
To ensure that the pressure drops calculated in the
well model are representative of the actual flowing
conditions in the well the VLP calculations can be
matched to well test data.
40 Troubleshooting ability for
artificially lifted systems
There are various artificial lift troubleshooting
options available in PROSPER, allowing for
investigation of the performance of gas lifted
systems, ESP wells, HSP wells, Rod pump wells
etc.
For a gas lifted well, Quicklook can be used as an
advanced troubleshooting feature, which allows
troubleshooting the depth of injection, presence of
multi-pointing and problems with the valves
themselves for gas lift. Messages on the screen are
designed to warn the user for any problems in the
injection system based on test data as shown
above.
For systems with pumps, it is possible to compare
the modelled inlet and outlet conditions to
measured data as well as match the dP using a
pump wear factor..
41 Design of Artificial Lift
Systems
The following artificial lift methods can be designed
and added to a model using PROSPER:
Gas Lift (continuous) New Well
Gas Lift (continuous) Existing Mandrels
Gas Lift (intermittent)
Coiled Tubing Gas Lift
Electrical Submersible Pump
Progressive Cavity Pump
Sucker Rod Pump
Jet Pump
Hydraulic Pump
42 Artificial Lift for Gas and
Retrograde Condensate
Wells
Gas Lift (continuous) is now available for gas and
retrograde condensate wells.
1.2 Fluid modelling options
PROSPER offers two fluid modelling options with the traditional "black oil" approach or
a "fully compositional" approach.
Black Oil
PROSPER offers black oil models for:
dry and wet gas
oil and water (heavy oil, "black oil", volatile oils, ...)
retrograde condensate
11
PROSPER
For all types of fluids, the user can:
use existing black oil correlations
calibrate and validate lab measurements against black oil correlations
use PVT look-up tables over the expected operating pressure and temperature
conditions.
When using black oil models, hydrate curves can be imported from any other
application like PVTp, the thermodynamics package developed by Petroleum Experts.
There is a flag that can be activated whenever calculated operating conditions falls
within the hydrates formation region.
Fully Compositional
In addition to the black oil models, the two majors Equation Of State (EoS) models used
in the oil industry (Peng-Robinson and Soave Redlich Kwong) are also
implemented in PROSPER allowing fully compositional modelling to be peformed. Fully
compositional models require a characterised composition to be imported into
PROSPER from a thermodynamic package such as PVTp. Multiphase flashing is
available within IPM to allow water to be modelled within the EoS using a number of
different models.
users can embed their own proprietary EoS models into PROSPER via Dynamic Link
Library and the format of the DLL can be provided at request.
Hydrate and wax calculations can be performed with compositional fluid models.
Hydrate calculations have been updated to include a comprehensive set of calculations
based on the Hydrafract modified cubic and CPA models. Calculations can be carried
out with a mixture of salts and/or a mixture of inhibitors such as DEG, TEG, Methanol
etc.
CO
2
Modelling
When modelling CO
2
wells with the fully compositional approach, the density and
thermal properties of the CO
2
have been adjusted to give much more accurate values
over the pressure and temperature ranges encountered in normal applications.
PROSPER can model steam injection and steam production. A steam table calculator is
available.
The viscosity of oil and gas can be calculated separately using different methods. A
number of different methods are available for both gas and oil models.
Further fluid modelling options in PROSPER are:
Non-Newtonian fluids,
DLL for proprietary fluid viscosity model for Non-Newtonian fluids
Emulsion models
Back to Overview
13
PROSPER
1.3 Inflows and Sand Control options
More than two dozens of combinations of inflow models exist in PROSPER that can be
selected for different configurations:
straight open or cased hole
slanted well
partially perforated well
horizontal well (with and without friction loss)
horizontal well with transverse vertical fracture
multi-zone completions for stacked reservoirs with possible cross-flow and
pressure loss between the zones
multi-lateral well and smart well
well of any geometry like snaky or U-shaped wells
Hydraulically fractured well
Well in dual-porosity reservoirs (naturally fractured)
water and gas injection wells
water injector with thermally induced fractures
External entry with user-entered IPR look-up tables
Various skin models are currently available:
Locke Skin model
MacLeod Skin model
Karakas & Tariq
Cinco-Ley and Martig-Bronz (I & II)
Wong-Clifford
SkinAide (Elf)
SPOT (Shell)
A DLL template exists that allows the user to import proprietary IPR and skin
models into PROSPER.
The following sand control options are available in PROSPER:
Gravel Pack
Pre-Packed screen,
Wire-wrapped screen and
Slotted liners
Further inflow-related models which are available in PROSPER are:
Mobility corrections using relative permeability
Vogel correction
Permeability reduction due to rock compaction
Advanced perforation modelling capabilities with integrated tubing / casing
and gun system databases
Gas coning with matching
Analytical coning model for water, gas and gas + water for horizontal wells
(see horizontal well with dP friction)
Back to Overview
1.4 Well bore and Pipeline hydraulics
Nearly two dozen multiphase correlations are available to the PROSPER user. The
flexible architecture of the software gives any user the opportunity to add any number of
proprietary multiphase correlations via DLL. The format of the DLL can be provided at
request by contacting PETEX Technical Support.
Internal research has led to the development of a series of very successful multiphase
correlations that have become benchmarks in the industry today. In particular when
compared to actual measurements, the Petroleum Experts 2 correlation has given
excellent results in a wide range of situations: vertical well, horizontal well, deviated well,
large diameter well,oil wells, gas and retrograde condensate wells, ..
When calculating the pressure drop in a well bore or a pipeline, PROSPER offers the
option to switch from one starting multiphase correlation to another one depending upon
the well or pipe inclination.
PROSPER can handle any combination of flow paths: annular flow only, tubular flow only,
simultaneous annular and tubular flow, sequences of tubular and annular flow or
sequences of mixed flow and tubular or annular flow.
Back to Overview
15
PROSPER
1.5 Artificial lift systems
The following artificial lift options are available in PROSPER:
Continuous gas lift
Intermittent gas lift
Coiled Tubing gas lift
Electrical Submersible Pumps (ESP)
Hydraulic Downhole Pumps (HSP) with Commingled Annular Supply
Hydraulic Downhole Pumps (HSP) with Commingled Tubing Supply
Hydraulic Downhole Pumps (HSP) with Closed Loop Supply
Progressive Cavity Pumps (PCP) with Sucker Rod Drive
Progressive Cavity Pumps (PCP) with Down Hole Motor Drive
Diluent Injection (Annular Injection - Tubing Production)
Diluent Injection (Tubing Injection - Annular Production)
Diluent Injection (Simultaneous Water and Gas Injection at Different Depths)
Jet Pump (Annular Injection - Tubing Production)
Jet Pump (Tubing Injection - Annular Production)
Multiphase Pumps (Framo Pumps)
Back to Overview
1.6 Flow assurance
Advanced thermal models and miscellaneous options are available in PROSPER for flow
assurance features studies.
1.6.1 Advanced Thermal Models
For advanced thermal modelling, the user can select the 'Enthalpy Balance' model or
the 'Improved Approximation'.
The 'Enthalpy Balance' is a rigorous thermal model that accounts for forced convection,
free convection, radiation and conduction as the fluid travels up the well bore. From
these different heat transfer methods, the equivalent heat transfer coefficent is found
and used within an enthalpy balance. As this method used a full enthalpy balance to
predict the temperature of the fluid, the Joule-Thompson effects are accounted for.
Another advanced thermal model is the "improved approximation" which is also a full
enthalpy balance model but, unlike the 'Enthalpy Balance' model, the heat term is
calculated with a variable user-entered overall heat transfer coefficient whereas the heat
transfer coefficient in the full enthalpy balance model is calculated internally.
1.6.2 General Flow Assurance Features
Beside the advanced thermal models, the following options are available in PROSPER
for flow assurance studies:
Hydrate and wax appearance prediction models
Solid Transportation models
Erosional velocity calculation with clean fluid or sand laden fluid
Liquid loading calculations
Pigging calculation: pigged slug length, pigged slug volume, pigged slug
production time and pigged slug residency time
Taitel-Dukler flow regime map along pipeline length with severe-slugging
region (with and without Barnea criteria)
Detailed output for slug and bubble calculations: mean slug length, mean
bubble length, slug frequency, Slug and bubble surge factor, ...
Back to Overview
17
PROSPER
1.7 What's New
This is a list of enhancements to Prosper for each new Version
released.
Version 12.0
This is a summary of the main additions that have been incorporated into the
PROSPER program since the 2010 official release.
Program Version
64 bit
PROSPER is now available in both a 32bit and a 64bit
version.
Program Interface
New Screens
The appearance of the screens within PROSPER have been
updated.
New Plotting
The plotting feature used within PROSPER has been
changed to be consistent with the plotting method used
across the IPM suite.
Plots can also be saved and recalled from different files
File Overwrite check
Possibility to switch on/off a confirmation message when an
existing file is overwritten.
PVT Modelling
Improved CO
2
modeling
The density of CO
2
has been corrected for use within an
EoS. The correction os done by adjusting the volume shift of
CO
2
This has the advantage of not limiting the methodology to the
pure component.
The thermal properties have also been adjusted to give a
much more accurate value over the pressure and
temperature ranges encountered in normal application.
Hydrates
Hydrate calculations have been updated to include a
comprehensive set of calculations based on the Hydrafact
modified cubic and CPA models.
Calculations can be carried out with a mixture of salts and/or
a mixture of inhibitors such as DEG, TEG Methanol etc.
Multiphase Flash with Water
Multiphase flashing is being added to IPM to allow water to be
modelled within the EoS. Models will include:
Soreide and Whiton
Modified Cubic
CPA
SRK plus Huron Vidal
Viscosity Modelling for EoS
Viscosity can be modelled separately for gas and oil. Each
can be separately regressed within PVTp and used within
PROSPER.
Oil Models:
LBC
LBC with Coefficients
Pedersen et al
Black Oil - Beal
Black Oil - Beggs
Black Oil - Petrosky
Black Oil - Bergman
Black Oil - Egbogah
Gas Models:
LBC
LBC with Coefficients
Pedersen et al
Black Oil - Lee
Black Oil - Carr
IPR Modelling
IPR
PROSPER will now calculate the bottom hole flowing
temperature and how this varies with rate.
Horizontal dP segment results (flow per unit length etc) can
now be saved.
SPOT - Fractional flows and Saturations to Water Cut.
Equipment
Edit Screens
The screens used to insert data for the equipment have been
updated
Gauges
Up to 10 gauges can be specified in the equipment section
and temperatures and pressures at these depths will be
reported after SYSTEM calculations.
Artificial Lift
ESP
The gas flow in the annulus is now modelled with either casing
head pressure or liquid level being calculated.
New gas separator models have been added which vary the
19
PROSPER
gas separation efficiency with respect to liquid rate.
The change in temperature of the fluid caused by the Pump
and the Motor are now included.
Tapered ESPs can now be specified in a system to model
stages of different pumps being placed in series.
PCP
The gas flow in the annulus is now modelled with either casing
head pressure or liquid level being calculated.
New gas separator models have been added which vary the
gas separation efficiency with respect to liquid rate.
The change in temperature of the fluid caused by the Pump
and the Motor are now included.
Gas Lifted Oil Wells
When carrying out a gas lift design (to find valve depths)
sensitivity studies can now be carried out on certain variables
to see their impact on the valve depths and properties
calculated.
Diluent Injection
Water Injection can now be modelled with the injected water
having a different salinity to the produced water.
Simultaneous water and gas injection at different depths can
now be modelled.
ESP VLP/IPR matching
The VLP/IPR matching for ESP allows to enter the pump
intake and discharge pressures as inputs. These data can
then be passed over to the Quicklook for detailed analysis of
the pump performance
Gas Lift for Gas Wells
Continuous Gas Lift can now be modelled in retrograde
condensate wells.
Coal Bed
Methane
Producers
VLPs
This new type of well can be implemented using new ESP
and PCP models.
Variables for VLP generation can be set as CBM GLR, liquid
level and Pump Speed.
The casing pressure and liquid level are now
IPRs
A new CBM Producer IPR model has been included which
models the impact of increasing GLR.
Calculations
New Sensitivity Variables added
Multi-layer dP Model
Liquid Level (for ESP/PCP)
CBM GLR
Diluent Salinity
Diluent Gas Injection Depth
Diluent GLR Injected
Number of Sensitivity variables rationalised
Rather than having different types of VLP and SYSTEM
calculations for each different number of variables (3,4 or
multi-variable) there is now one calculation screen and the
number of variables used can be selected by the user.
Rates used for SYSTEM and VLP Calculations
To up 50 rates can be used for the generation of VLP curves
and in the SYSTEM calculation screen.
Solids Plot
Critical Transport velocities plot is now available after running
any calculation by accessing the Options button
Miscellaneous
Preferences
Specify the number of rates in the IPR/VLP section
Plots - specify if old plots or new plots should be shown or if
the choice should be made at the run time.
Dynamic OLGAS Licensing
OpenServer
New OS Command:
PROSPER.ANL.VMT.
VLPIPR(c,t)
For correlation c (if c=0 then all
correlations done)
For test t (if t=0 then all tests done)
Version 11.5
PVT Modeling
Improved CO
2
modeling
Condensed Water Vapour with Retrograde Condensate
21
PROSPER
Condensed water vapour can be modeled with gas retrograde
condensate fluid
Improved Black Oil Retrograde Condensate Model
Changes applied to improve consistency of the black oil model at
the boundaries of its applicability for oil and condensate systems
Artificial Lift
HSP
Addition of Pump Speed Method (Entered or Calculated) in
Quicklook, Gradient and VLP calculations. It is now possible to
use the program to calculate the pump/turbine speed in order
to operate the pump at the highest efficiency
ESP pump database
Complete CENTRILIFT Pump Database implemented
Gas lift Quicklook
Added the possibility to enter DeRating parameters for
Thornhill/Craver to correct the dP through the orifice for
actual performance
ESP VLP/IPR matching
The VLP/IPR matching for ESP allows to enter the pump
intake and discharge pressures as inputs. These data can
then be passed over to the Quicklook for detailed analysis of
the pump performance
Calculations
Reset results
An option to erase the results of any calculation previously
performed has been added
Gradient Summary Chart
In the Tubing Correlation and Pipeline Correlation Comparison
a Summary section allows the user to compare the pressure
drops and the components of the pressure drops of the
selected multiphase flow correlations and mechanistic
models
Solids Plot
Critical Transport velocities plot is now available after running
any calculation by accessing the Options button
Export/Import
Export option in PVT section
In the main PVT section an export facility has been added to
allow the used to export input (Input Data, Match data tables,
Tables) and output (correlation parameters, PVT
calculations)
Export/Import option in IPR External Entry
The External Entry IPR can be exported/imported from the
IPR section
Clip to Copy and Paste data in PVT section
The Clip buttons in the PVT Match Data and Tables sections
now allow the user to copy and paste data from/to the
Clipboard to facilitate data import/export
Program Interface
Improved IPR Validation Error Messages
More information are reported when a validation error is
triggered
IPR test data enhancement
In the IPR plot Test Data it is now possible to enter a date
stamp and a comment for each entered test
File Overwrite check
Possibility to switch on/off a confirmation message when an
existing file is overwritten
OpenServer
New OS Commands:
PROSPER.RESET Reset some or all of the data -
RESET(ALL)
RESET(PVT)
RESET(SIN)
RESET(ANL)
RESET(OUT)
PROSPER.PVT.IMPORT Import PVTP file in PVT Tables or
Match sections
PROSPER.ANL.VMT.
VLPIPR
Perform the VLP/IPR Matching
VLP/IPR Command
PROSPER.ANL.VMT.
ADJUSTCALC
Adjust Calculate
PROSPER.ANL.VMT.
ADJUSTCALC(i)
- for test i (if i=0 then does all tests)
PROSPER.ANL.VMT.
ADJUSTPI
Adjust PI
PROSPER.ANL.VMT.ADJUSTPI(i)
PROSPER.ANL.VMT.
ADJUSTPRES
Adjust Pres
PROSPER.ANL.VMT.
ADJUSTPRES(i)
23
PROSPER
PROSPER.ANL.VMT.
ADJUSTRESET
Reset Adjust Data & Results
PROSPER.ANL.VMT.
ADJUSTRESET(type,i)
type=1 Reset Amended PI
type=2 Reset Amended PRES
type=3 Calculated FBHP
type=4 Heat Transfer Coefficient
type=5 Calculated Results
type=6 Reset ALL
PROSPER.MENU.FILE.
OPEN
Menu Command - File Open
PROSPER.MENU.FILE.
SAVEAS
Menu Command - File Save As
PROSPER.MENU.ANL.
RESET
Menu Command - Calculation -
Reset Results
Version 11.0
Inflow
SPOT(Shell Perforation Optimisation Tool) is an IPR calculator
developed originally by Shell.
Its main unique features are:-
Modelling of different perforating guns selected from a guns
database covering all the major vendors.
Corrects gun test data such as DoP (Depth of
penetrationG and EHD (Entry Hole Diameter) to reservoir
conditions.
Log data can be used to model vertical differences in
reservoir parameters such as permeability, porosity and
rock strength.
Model to predict sanding.
Several invasion models.
Models reperforation jobs/workovers.
This has been implemented in PROSPER as a new IPR model.
The correction of test DoP and EHD to reservoir conditions is
also available for existing PROSPER IPR models.
Sand Control
Previously the only option for sand control in Prosper was Gravel
Pack. The following options have now been added
Pre Packed Screen
Wire Wrapped Screen
Slotted Liner
Both the Darcy and Non-Darcy effects are modelled for the
screen/liner and any material between the formation and screen/
liner
Sand Production (Failure)
Sand Production can be caused by increasing stress near the
well bore resulting from reservoir depletion. The economic
impact of the result is significant both in terms of completion
costs (implementing sand control) and the number of
development wells (because of the lower productivity associated
with sand control). Prediction of the maximum possible
drawdown before sand production can therefore be important in
field development.
The aim of this model is to calculate the drawdown at which
sand production can be expected. Stress can be estimated
either
From depth and reservoir pressure
From a specified stress
From specified stress gradients and depths
From assumptions if no stress data available
Inflow MultiLayer Models
Automatic transfer of model from Prosper to GAP
Pseudo Pressure table per layer for Gas/Condensate models
Increases accuracy in cases when layer PVT properties
are significantly different
Ability to sensitise on Layer PVT properties in System
calculation
Sensitivity
Following new variables are available :
Perforating Gun (SPOT)
Tubing Description
Casing Description
Injection Fluid Temperature
Multi Layer PVT Parameters
Sensitivity Data Export
Sensitivity Generate Options
Databases
Perforating Gun Database
Provided by Shell as part of SPOT
Updated and verified by PE in conjunction with the
manufacturers
1) Baker
2) DYNA
25
PROSPER
3) ETA
4) Halliburton
5) Schlumberger
6) Owen
7) INNICOR
8) Titan
9) GeoDynamics
10) CCP
Tubing Database
Available for the following manufacturers
1) Benoit Machine
2) FiberGlass Systems
3) Grant Prideco
4) Halliburton Energy Services
5) Hunting Energy Services
6) JFE Steel
7) Metal One Corp
8) Tenaris Hydril
9) TPS Technitube Rohrenwerke
10) VAM
Casing Database
Available for the following manufacturers
1) Centron International Inc.
2) Dalmine Spa
3) Equivalent S.A.
4) FiberGlass Systems
5) Frank's International
6) GB Connections
7) Grant Prideco (Atlas Bradford)
8) HSC Corp
9) Hunting Energy Services
10) Hydril
11) JFE Steel / Hunting Oilfield
12) Mannesmann
13) Nippon Steel Corp
14) NKK Corp
15) Sidera S.A.I.C.
16) Smith FiberGlass products Inc.
17) Star FiberGlass Systems
18) Tenaris
19) TPS Technitube Rohrenwerke
20) Tubular FiberGlass Corp
21) VAM
22) XL Systems Inc.
Pipe Schedule
Access to the tubing and casing database will also be available from
the equipment date entry screens
PVT
Section
Rigorous modelling of CO
2
Injection when combined with
EoS
Lumping-DeLumping large compositions
Paired large and small(lumped) compositions with same
phase behaviour and surface properties
Sour Gas Modelling
Originally created to model CO
2
rich compositions.
Now improved and extended to other similar mixtures CO
2
,
H
2
S, C
1
etc
Egbogah Viscosity Correlation
Bergman-Sutton Viscosity Correlation
Al Marhoun Correlation for Pb, Rs, Bo and Viscosity
Injection of Non-Newtonian Fluids (Polymers etc)
Interpolation warnings for Bg
VLP / IPR
Matching
Estimated Heat Transfer Coefficient options
We can now transfer the estimated U value (or average of
estimated U values) directly into the geothermal gradient
Estimation of Reservoir Parameters from Match Point data
Many users have used the VLP/IPR Matching section and its
easy access to the Inflow section to adjust reservoir
parameters in order to find a solution that corresponded to the
measured data in the VLP Match record. Thus they were able
to track changes in Reservoir Pressure and P.I. Improvements
in IPM6 meant that this process had become slightly more long
winded. This can now be done automatically in Prosper in
IPM7
o Estimation of Reservoir Pressure
o Estimation of PI from (Only if IPR PI method selected)
Lift
Curves
Multi Variable SYSTEM & VLP commands
Mass and Molar Rate Entry
Independent of separation process
Mass Rates available for Black Oil & EOS models
Molar Rate only for EOS
Eclipse
Generation of files compatible with E300
Molecular weight & Water Molar Fraction as sensitivity
variables
Artificial
Lift
Intermittent Gas Lift Design
Spacing Line Design Methodology
Stability Criteria for Gas Lift
Lift Gas Gradient available on gradient calculation screens
Valve Performance Clearinghouse
27
PROSPER
VPC in Gas Lift Design & QuickLook
VPC Options in Preferences
Hydraulic Submersible Pump
Improved sensitivity modelling
Automatic step size reduction.
Addition of complete Centrilift Pump & Motor catalogue
Automatic step size reduction.
SRP
Calculation of Stroke size from Liquid Rate improved
Improved error reporting & database export.
OpenServer
New OS Commands
ANL.SYM.CALC Perform the System Sensitivity
Calculation (Multi Variables)
ANL.SYM.GENRATES Generate Rates for the System
Sensitivity Calculation (Multi Variables)
ANL.SYM.EXPORT Export Lift Curves Generated by the
System Sensitivity Command (Multi Variables)
ANL.VLM.CALC Perform the VLP (Multi Variable)
Sensitivity Command
ANL.VLM.GENRATES Generate Rates for the VLP (Multi
Variable) Sensitivity Command
ANL.VLM.EXPORT Export Lift Curves Generated by the
VLP (Multi Variable) Sensitivity Command
ANL.GLI.CALC Perform the Intermittent Gas lift
Design
New OS Functions
ANL.NODES.MSD Returns The Measured Depth Of The
ith Node (PROSPER.ANL.NODES.MSD[i])
ANL.NODES.TVD Returns The True Vertical Depth Of
The ith Node (PROSPER.ANL.NODES.TVD[i])
Evaluation Button on Open Server Screen
Miscellaneous
WHPtoBHP to include surface equipment
Hydro3P flow correlation updated
Hydro Choke Model updated
Improved handling of OLGAS licences
Improved Flow Correlation Information
Plots in Deviation Survey
Plotting Improvements
Tubing and Pipe drawings Improved
Free Format number option
Version 10.0
Steam Model in PVT to enable modelling of Steam Injector Wells
Additional Artificial Lift Method to enable the design and modelling of wells produced using Sucker
Rod Pumps
The Enthalpy Balance Temperature Model now has the same calculation options as the Improved
Approximation Temperature Model (including Choke Performance calculations)
Allow Solution Node at first node for system calculation in Improved Approximation/Enthalpy
Balance models.
ESP modelling (not Design) available for Improved Approximation and Enthalpy Balance
temperature models
Target GOR calculator and extended options
Improvements in phase behaviour calculation for compositions rich in sour gases (CO
2
and H
2
S)
Increase size of PVT Match tables.
Add Impurities to Retrograde Condensate Black Oil model.
Improved error handling and reporting
Calculate the flow velocity across the completion as a function of open perforations, frac pack
properties and formation properties. (Casing Velocity (Vc) & Screen Velocity (Vs) calculated in
Gravel Pack Section)
Add Beta Factor in the gravel pack pressure drop prediction. (Calculated or Entered) (See Gravel
Pack)
IPR Sensitivity Calculations now available from IPR Section.
Pressure dependent permeability
IPR Test Points - this section has now been rewritten and enhanced to separate it from the multi-
rate test point input data. Test points are now displayed on all relevant screens/plots
It is now possible to change the port size and recalculate output parameters in the GasLift Design
Calculation Screen
Enable de-rating of Thornhill-Craver flow rates in GasLift Design
Real GasLift Valve Response Modelling
Add IPR button to GasLift Design screens to enable easy modification of Inflow model during
GasLift Design
Allow Choke Performance calculations in the Prosper Enthalpy Balance Model
Addition of a Choke Performance Plot in the Choke Performance section.
New lift curve formats are available for CMG reservoir simulators IMEX and GEM.
Generate for GAP has been enhanced for Naturally flowing and ESP wells to allow up to ten
manifold pressures as input
OLGA 2-phase and 3-phase correlations are now available directly from Petroleum Experts. Please
contact us for details of cost and installation.
Data Entry for Temperature Gradients in Enthalpy Balance model was been rewritten, including the
addition of the Geothermal Gradient to the model.
Injected Fluid Temperature is now available as a sensitivity variable
Heat Transfer Coefficients as sensitivity variables
Ability to put in reservoir pressure in VLP/IPR matching screen that corresponds with each test.
Add "date" field to well test table so the Match Point Comment column can be used for actual
29
PROSPER
comments.
VLP MAtching for ESPs
QuickLook from VLP/IPR Matching
IPR/VLP plot - include well test date info for test point info entered
Make left hand intersection (for gas coning) available. (This is already automatically done if
coning flag is set)
Preferences Section
It is now possible to display the users Comments on the main screen instead of the Program and
Contact details.
user preference to allow the user to set the file name and path displayed/hidden.
The user can specify default roughness for tubings and pipelines.
New OpenServer Generate Rate commands for INF, SYS, SY4, VL3 & VL4
New OpenServer Commands PROSPER.ANL.JET.DESIGN
New OpenServer Function to detect Matched PVT (PROSPER.PVT.MATCHED)
Open server command that would be equivalent to clicking on the Clear button in the sensitivity
variables section.
OS command to implement API RP43 Calculation ( calculate perforation length & diameter)
Open-server variables and command to enter a MD in the deviation survey section, and calculate its
corresponding TVD.
OS Command to do Deviation Survey Filtering
Reset, transfer and calculate angle OS command for Deviation Survey Filter
Implement PROSPER.ANL.SPD.CAL(v1,v2,v3) and PROSPER.ANL.SP4.CALC(v1,v2,v3,v4)
Addition of Sensitivity Summary Export in the 4 Variable System Sensitivity Analysis
Section.
Allow the entry of up to 2 Gauge Depths to VLP calculation screen. Pressures are then calculated
at these depths and displayed and reported. The calculated pressures are also included in exported
TPD files for integration into IFM
New variable available "Gas Fraction At Pump Intake" in ESP design calculations screen
Remove MacLeod as an option for Horizontal Well Models
Warn user if a lift Curve table contains invalid variables for any particular given format. (Warning is
at file creation time)
Increase size of PVT Match Tables
Add Impurities to Retrograde Condensate Section (Black Oil PVT Model only)
Version 9.0
This note is a summary of the main additions that have been incorporated
into the PROSPER program since the 2005 official release.
PVT Enhancements
Equation of State
The objective of the following improvements is to enhance the compositional modelling
capabilities of Prosper:
PVT modelling with EoS available for Injector wells
Enhanced Optimisation
Common EoS options throughout IPM Suite
Path dependent variables (volumetric properties like GOR, FVF, CGR) can be
calculated using three different methods leading to standard conditions:
Straight flash to stock tank conditions
Flash through a train of up to 10 separators
Using individual separator stage or full plant K-values
Enhanced plots of generated fluid properties
FVF calculations with Volume Shift validated for mass balance
Inflow Enhancements
Modified Isochronal IPR model
This IPR model utilises the modified isochronal well test, which consists of repeated shut-in
periods of equal duration as the flowing periods. The IPR model is based on the back-pressure
equation.
Modelling perforation diameter and length varying rock hardness
The API RP43 can be used to calculate the perforations characteristics
Inflow calculation Improvements
Display calculated inflow model PI on the IPR plots
Use of the Perforation Efficiency in all the skin models
Determines the number of open perforations. It is applied to shot density in a similar
manner to gravel pack calculations
On-screen Help with gravel pack data for given gravel sises
Enabled appropriate Inflow models for given well configuration
Coning Calculation - the length interval has been decreased
Inflow Calculation - the GOR can be entered and sensitised upon
Outflow Enhancements
Gas Condensate Plots
Oil as well as Gas can be plotted on the X-axis
Lift Curves Improvements
Export Options saved to file
More data in comments
user configurable data added to file
System Calculation
4 Variable System Command is available
Export Lift Curves option is available
VLP Matching procedure has been improved
Simultaneous injection of Oil and Water
Flow Modelling Enhancements
Pipeline Calculations
Slug Characteristics
Surge factors for gas and liquid in the bubble and slug are calculated to describe the
slug characteristics of the flow
Pigging Calculations
Calculations to determine the pigging characteristics of the flow
Modelling Pressure and temperature drops across fittings
dP and dT can be calculated for a very wide variety of fittings by using equivalent
lengths. Tabulated L/D values for each fitting type are used to calculate an appropriate K Value for
each different type of fitting and configuration
Artificial Lift Enhancements
31
PROSPER
Jet Pumps
Modelling of existing Jet Pump installations
PVT modelling of the Power Fluid
Possibility to store the pump models in the Artificial Lift Database
Exporting lift curves to simulators
Design of new Jet Pump installations
Diluent Injection
Modelling of Diluent injection in the wellbore
PVT modelling of the Injection Fluid
Possibility to sensitise on injection depth and rate
FRAMO Pumps
Modelling of Multiphase pipeline booster pumps
Wizards
This feature guides the user in setting up models and performing certain tasks following a pre-defined
sequence.
A few wizard examples are available when installing PROSPER. These examples are step-by-step
guides to build typical models, like naturally flowing wells, ESP, etc.
However, the user can create his own wizards to performed given tasks. This option is particularly
useful when repetitive calculations are to be performed on well models.
The Wizard is based on a VB script. The script consists of a series of VB commands using
OpenServer strings to set the values of the input parameters or to call up the appropriate data entry
screen , perform calculations, and retrieve or plot results.
OpenServer Enhancements
New Commands
The following capabilities have been implemented:
PVT Match and Match All
4 Variable System Calculation command
Estimate U Value in VLP /IPR Matching Command
Export of lift curves from VLP and System calculations
HSP design - System Calculation command
Perform Coiled Tubing and Jet Pump Design
Menu commands to open the input, calculation and plot screens
Evaluation dialogueue
This option can be used to test OpenServer Commands without building VB applications. The
basic OS actions (DoSet, DoGet and DoCmd) can also be used to quickly initialise and resetting the
data
Open Server Help
Command List
Variable List
Function List
Miscellaneous Enhancements
Deviation Survey Filter
This feature allow to enter up to 1000 points from deviation survey tables and determines a
minimum number of deviation points that best fits them
Calculate Torque for ESP wells
The Shaft Torque is calculates during the phase of ESP design
Version 8.0
Online PROSPER in GAP
PROSPER flow modelling is now available in GAP.
It can be used to model pipelines and wells.
It can be used directly as an online calculator or offline to generate lift curves (to speed GAP
network calculations)
Lift Curves
Data stored in GAP
Data stored in external PROSPER file.
PROSPER online
Data stored in GAP
Can be imported from an existing PROSPER file
Calculation Detail
Calculations can be viewed with the precision and detail of PROSPER Gradient screen
Implicit access to all flow and fluid modelling technology in PROSPER
Advanced Flow Correlations (e.g... Petroleum Experts, GRE, Hydro 3 Phase)
Flow Correlation Matching
Choke Modelling
Fluid modelling and matching (especially Condensate)
Enthalpy Balance calculations for rigorous pressure and temperature modelling. Implicitly
includes Joule-Thomson effects
Artificial Lift options
Gas Lift (Standard and Coiled Tubing)
Electrical Submersible Pumps (ESPs)
Progressive Cavity Pumps (PCPs)
PVT Enhancements
Equation Of State
Goal for these improvements is complete compatibility to ensure that results obtained in
PVTP can be reproduced exactly.
Omega A, Omega B can be entered
Choice of Peng-Robinson or Soave-Redlich-Kwong
Parameter Estimation (Fill In Table)
New Composition Export to PVTP
Improved Composition Import from PVTP (including Reservoir Temperature)
True Critical Point calculation included as part of Phase Envelope Calculation.
This helps speed improvements due to quicker phase detection.
Improve calculation speed without compromising results
Optimise - None - 2 - 3 times faster } Raw PVT
Optimise - Low - 10 - 20 times faster } Calculation
Optimise - Medium - 30 - 80 times faster } Speed Improvement
PROSPER Example System Sensitivity on 3 tubing sises
Original - 3+ hours
None - 95 minutes
Low - 12 minutes
Medium- 2 minutes 40 seconds
33
PROSPER
Allow more calculation flexibility for Equation of State models
Target GOR
user enters initial composition
Target GORs are entered as sensitivity variables
Program iterates from original composition to a composition with specified GOR
New composition saved as a result for display and/or reporting
Black Oil
PVT Lookup Tables
Increased size
(Number of Temperature Tables (10 -> 50 )
Number of Pressure Entries ( 15 -> 100 )
Generate Option
PVT properties for all phases are available in table
user responsibility to ensure material balance is preserved
Standard Conditions Warning
user is notified when there is no entry in the table at standard conditions.
Common cause of problems due to interpolation errors.
Convergence Pressure Method removed.
EoS model improvements (and faster computers) make this redundant
Flow Modelling Enhancements
Norsk Hydro Three Phase Correlation (Hydro3P)
Solves the steady state momentum equations for three-phase gas/oil/water pipe flow computing
pressure drop, water and oil hold-up and oil droplet fraction in the gas. Also models oil-in-water
phase and water-in-oil phase. Initial comparisons very favourable. Reasonably fast and very
robust. Works for a wide range of conditions for all fluid types. Very fast for two-phase system.
Much slower for three-phase systems.
Modified Turner Equation For Liquid Loading
Used to determine unstable flow regions in Gas or Condensate wells with liquid production. Has
been found to be not necessarily reliable. The original Turner Constant was 20.4. It has been
found (using Petroleum Experts 4) that 2.04 gives much more reliable results in a wide range of
examples. This constant can be changed by the user.
Erosional Velocity Calculations With Sand Production
Implementation of a ConocoPhillips paper (An Alternative to API14E Erosional Velocity Limits for
Sand Laden Fluids) which challenges API14E (the industry standard) on the basis that it can be
very conservative for clean service and is not applicable for conditions where corrosion or sand
are present. It proposes a simple alternative approach that has been verified by a comparison
with several multi-phase flow loop tests that cover a broad range of liquid-gas ratios and sand
concentrations.
Step size
This feature allows the user to specify the default step size used in Flow Modelling calculations
Artificial Lift Enhancements
Rewrite database
One database for all artificial lift types
Completely redesigned interface
Booster Pumps
ESPs in pipeline.
Implement Progressive Cavity Pumps (PCPs)
HSP & PCP Lift Curves for GAP
Gaslift
Allow injection in pipeline (above wellhead)
Allow a valve at the design depth of injection (as well as an orifice as at present)
Gaslift Adjustments
Provides additional calculations for testing gas lift designs under operating conditions.
Surface casing pressures when restarting production are presented in addition to input
parameters needed for setting up automatic well controllers
Coiled Tubing Gaslift
Can already be achieved in PROSPER using annular flow but requires manual set up by user
New input options to make problem set-up automatic
Description via ID and Thickness makes sensitivity analysis more flexible
Enthalpy Balance Model Enhancements
Convection in mud between casings
Selectable the the user
Sea Velocity gradients
As an addition to the Sea Temperature Gradient
Correlation Comparison
Implemented for both Tubing and PipeLine
Extra variables in gradient display
Enthalpy (gas, oil, water)
Conductivity (gas, oil, water)
Specific Heat Capacity (gas, oil, water)
Fix outside casing temperature at time t=0
Diffusivity equation only valid for t > 0.5 days
Casing Conductivity user selectable
Previously was a fixed value
Inflow Performance Enhancements
Simple MultiLayer
Increased number of Layers ( from 5 to 50)
MultiLayer With dP Loss
New Layer Models
Fractured Well
Horizontal Well
Increased number of layers (from 20 to 50 layers)
Gas and Condensate Implemented
Improved IPR DLL
Add a skin model to internal reservoir model
Proper validation of user data
Access to internal model data
Ability to deny access to unauthorised users
Non-Newtonian Fluid Modelling
New Model
Implement Model based on drilling fluid models developed by Total. This will enable foams in
heavy oils to be modelled more accurately. However, it should be noted that this model does
not estimate the apparent viscosity of the emulsion with water. Research on another program
(REVEAL) is ongoing on this subject.
Calculate Equivalent Apparent Viscosity
Oil and Gas viscosities both set equal to Apparent Viscosity
Implemented in reservoir by calculating an equivalent pipe radius
35
PROSPER
user DLL
user DLL option allows user to test internal models within PROSPER via the usual DLL
interface.
Will allow the user to model viscosity of all phases (if required)
Benefits of testing and implementing engineering technology and research without having to
design and maintain the testbed
Import DLL
Allows user to import from any file (binary or ascii) if they know the precise format.
Can be used for legacy applications with proprietary format.
Import from a report output of another application
Can be done without any input from Petroleum Experts (avoids confidentiality conflicts)
Integrates seamlessly with File Open option.
user file type just becomes another available file type to read
Can be used in batch mode to convert many files and automatically creates PROSPER input
files
Uses OpenServer strings to push the data from user DLL to PROSPER.
Choke DLL Improvements
Allow more user data per DLL
Saving and recalling user data to file
Redesign Choke Performance screen to allow use with user defined choke DLL

Lift Curves
Additional Formats
ChevronTexaco CHEARS
ExxonMobil EMPOWER
VIP Format Update
Previously if one specified GOR then rates were Oil and if one specified GLR rates where
Liquid
Now, it is possible to mix and match Gas Fraction Types and Rate Types
General Point
Please keep us informed of changes in format - we like to respond as quickly as possible to
keep users up-to-date
Documentation of lift curve format should be as comprehensive as possible. Quite often, the
only documentation is an example file. It can be quite difficult to extrapolate from one
example to a complete solution. The following points are quite useful to note.
Specify all possible Gas Fraction Types (GOR, GLR OGR etc)
Specify all possible Water Fraction Types (WC, WGR, WOR etc)
Rate Types ( Oil, Liquid Gas)
Artificial lift types (don't forget pumps)
All fluid Types (oil, gas and condensate)
Unit types for all variables and unit sets as well (Field, SI, LAB)
Producers and Injectors
Variable Combinations - what is valid and what is invalid
Left Hand Intersection in SYSTEM Calculation
Normally VLP/IPR intersections that occur when the tubing pressures are declining (on the LHS) are
considered to represent unstable flow and are usually ignored.
When Gas Coning occurs however the GOR is changing constantly for different rates and it is
possible to have two solutions and for the LHS intersection to represent stable flow
Add option to allow user to select which intersection to use
Miscellaneous
Units Popup
Right-clicking on units field on screen shows user all available units for the variable and its
current selection and allows the user to change this current selection.
Extended and Improved Data Validation
MultiLateral - set end points for curve calculations
OpenServer - NEWFILE & SHUTDOWN commands
Export - data formatting improvements
Plot Legend - data content improvements
Version 7.5
Make Prosper more accessible to other IPM Tools
Much work has been done restructuring PROSPER so that all the single-well technology and
engineering can be readily utilised by other programs in the IPM suite.The results of this radical
restructuring are not obvious or available at present but will be incorporated in the next versions of
GAP and MBAL
Model Annulus and Tubing Production
A model has been Implemented for production through the tubing and annulus at the same time and
also a variable flow path i.e. fluid can flow in either the tubing or the annulus or both and this can vary
in different segments of the well
Vlp/Ipr Matching Improvements
Ability to perform a Correlation Comparison for each test point. Data is automatically transferred from
the test point straight to the Correlation Comparison screens.
VLP/IPR plot has been enhanced to provide a VLP curve for each test point for a selection of flow
correlations.
Estimating U values in VLP/IPR matching section from entered Tubing Head Pressures in the Rough
Approximation Temperature Model
Pipe Matching Improvements
Ability to perform a Pipeline Correlation Comparison for each test point. Data is automatically
transferred from the test point straight to the Pipeline Correlation Comparison screens.
Multi-Lateral - Improvements Model
Calculation Dialogue Screen Improvements.
Multi Layer (Layer-by Layer ) response calculated and plotted.
PVT Section
Water Vapour Condensation Correlation for Gas Wells
Water Viscosity Variation with Pressure
Boiling Temperature column in EOS model.
Parachor column in EOS model (for Surface Tension Calculations).
Editable EOS Component Name instead of number
Miscellaneous
New variables displayed in Gradient Calculations.
Oil Viscosity
Water Viscosity
Liquid Density
Total mass Flow Rate
Oil mass Flow Rate
Gas Mass Flow Rate
Water Mass Flow Rate
37
PROSPER
Oil Formation Volume Factor
Gas Formation Volume Factor
Water Formation Volume Factor
Water Holdup
Slip Water Velocity
Superficial Water Velocity
Cumulative Liquid Volume
Cumulative Water Volume
Cumulative Oil Volume
Cumulative Gas Volume
Cumulative Liquid Holdup
Cumulative Water Holdup
Tubing Flow Rate
Annulus Flow Rate
New layout options in Gradient Calculations
Depth Calculator in Equipment Deviation Survey screen
Improved errror checking in IPR section subDialogue screens
Improvments in annulus configuration management (Enthalpy Balance)
Improvements in Drilling section error reporting
Improvements to TPD file generation for ESP wells
File List - browser for viewing /summarising PROSPER files.
Standing correction to Vogel in IPR calculations.
Version 7.0
32-bit
Improved memory management.
Long File and Directory name.
Results Management.
Implementaion of Open Server
Open Data/Function Server implemented the same as GAP and MBAL
MultiLateral
Model has been enhanced and extended
Models all fluid types (oil, Gas and Retrograde Condensate)
Models Producers and Injectors
Can be used in conjuction with artificially lifted wells (Gaslift, ESP and HSP)
Enthalpy Balance Temperature Prediction
Complete rewrite of enthalpy balance temperature prediction method to allow more flexibility and
accuracy.
Account for air and sea velocities.
Improved Completion fluid handling.
Can specify cement and casing conductivity
Account for temperature gradient in the sea.
Improved Rough Approximation Temperature Model
Specify heat transfer coefficient by depth and pipe section
Define a temperature gradient for the sea
Can make use of Joule-Thomson coefficient
Constrained Calculation with Enthalpy Balance
Determine pressure and temperature profile for the entire well from the wellhead pressure and bottom
hole temperature
Thermal Fracturing
Model the combined effects of temperature, stress and fluid mechanics to predict the inflow behaviour
of injection wells
New Correlation (Petroleum Experts 4)
Advanced mechanistic model for any angled wells (including dowhill flow) suitable for any fluid
(including Retrograde Condensate)
Solids Transport
Predicting maximum grain size that can be transported.
Hydrates Flagging
user entered table describing pressure-temperature regions where hydrates formation is likely. The
program will then highlight areas with a potential for Hydrates Formation.
Miscellaneous
user can specify default Units System (on Preferences Screen).
Version 6.0
INFLOW
New Interface
Implemented for all fluids.
Completely redesigned to ease user input and to integrate with the external, user-written IPR model
enhancement (see below)
MultiLateral/MultiLayer Inflow Model
Deviated Well Model
Based on a model produced by Wong and Clifford
Dual Porosity Model
Assumptions: For naturally fractured reservoirs where the matrix (formation) porosity is greater than
the fracture porosity and the matrix permeability is much smaller than the fracture permeabilty, but
not negligible.
Source: See References
Horizontal Well with Transverse Vertical Fracture(s) Model
Assumptions
1. Circular fractures.
2. Well goes through centre i.e. no shape factor implemented.
3. Fractures are equally spaced - so if there is just one it is in the centre.
user IPR Model DLL
Allows the user to develop their own inflow model(s) and implement it within PROSPER in a similar
fashion to flow correlations. The user-developed model can encompass every element of an inflow
description including the reservoir model and every component of the skin or can simply be any
particular element. Please contact us for details on how to implement this for the specific application
Dietz Shape Factor Calculator
Implemented for 'Darcy-like' models in all fluids.
39
PROSPER
Assumptions: Calculation is for vertical wells rectangular reservoirs.
Gas Coning
Implemented for oil. Modifies solution GOR by multiplying it by a weighting factor greater than 1,
which is a positive function of the liquid rate. The output is a total, or produced, GOR. This model
has been implemented with the facility of matching/tuning to real test data
Assumptions: High permeability reservoirs.
Source: See References.
EQUIPMENT
More Pipeline nodes
Reverse x,y coordinate system for pipeline data entry
Rate Multiplier Per Node
Option to "disable" Surface Equipment
FLOW MODELLING
Complex Terrain Flow Correlation
Slug modelling
Correlation Threshold Angles
Erosional Velocity (C Factor) calculation.
Flow Regime Plots
More detailed data displayed during Gradient calculations
Phase Densities, inter-phase IFTs, slug and bubble properties
ARTIFICIAL LIFT
Hydraulic Drive Downhole Pumps (or HSPs)
Design
System Sensitivity and Lift Curve Generation
QuickLook diagnostic
Pump and Turbine Database management
MISCELLANEOUS
Preferences
All options relating to the customisation of an individual installation of the program have been
gathered together in one location.
This option can be found on the File menu and has four sections (tabs)for ease of use. These are
Screen
File
Plot
user Applications
Welcome Screen
This screen is displayed immediately the program is started and is destroyed as soon as the main
screen appears. There can be a significant time difference in some cases between these two events
and this screen will assure the user that the prgram has indeed started. The reason for the time
difference could be any of the following
1) Program Installation - The program could be on a remote network drive and network traffic would
affect access time.
2) Software Key - a network installation could slow access to the key is the network is busy.
3) Last file loaded - if one automatically reloads the last file on program startup,then the file size and
location(remote network) could make a difference
New import format for PVTP file
The new format exported from the PVTP program includes more details (Volume Shift flag and the
separators included in the analysis.)
Screen Design
Redesign of many data screens. More consistency between data screens, navigation, and flexibility
of screen size (see Preferences-> Screen)
Version 5.1
Changes to EOS model
The method of calculating GOR and FVF has been enhanced to take account of the fluids path back
to surface. Up to 5 separator stages can be defined. The fluid is flashed through any defined stages
to find the resultant gas/oil mixture in the accumulator/stock tank. If no stages are defined a single
flash to ambient conditions is performed.
WHP to BHP
Method for calculating flowing bottom hole pressure from the wellhead pressure for a large number of
points.
VLP Matching
Ability to allow or disallow the plotting of labels. Added ability to export and report from this screen.
Output more information to reports
Miscellaneous
The following bug fixes/ improvements.
Errors in files when saving long labels from downhole/surface equipment.
Sensible choice for file prefix when saving files.
Improved error checking in relative permeability screen in IPR section.
Scaling problems on status screen IPR plot when changing units have been fixed.
General updates to Status Screen
Errors transferring surface equipment details when changing from Pressure only to Pressure and
temperature prediction have been corrected.
Improved legend for Gaslift Design Plot
Improved legends for plots generally for consistency.
Improved handling of multi rate input data in IPR section.
Load correlation DLLs automatically from run directory.
Fixed errors in PVT matching reports
Fixed errors for water injectors reporting marginal amount of oil
Improved depth error checking in equipment section
Fixed bug in gradient calculation section (not setting Top Node Pressure and Rate correctly)
Insert a check for Choke Model selected when reading files.
Fixed EOS calculation initialisation problems.
Added feature to output 4 variable MBV (lift curve ) files
ESPs - allow user to select location of database files
Sensitivity analysis - improved error checking in variable selection
Status screen error for PVT Condensate display (wrong unit for CGR/WGR)
System Plot - wrong label for Gas Rate has been corrected.
IPR - improved calculation of combined Total GOR for multi layer IPRs
Gray Correlation - advise of unsuitability for use in Pressure and Temperature predictions
PVT Matching - ability to transfer data from Tables and import data from PVT Program
41
PROSPER
PVT Tables - ability to import data from Matching Section.
Version 5.0
Report Generator
The reporting interface gives complete control over how the reports are formatted and what
information is utilised to make up the report. This is facilitated by the use of report templates which
can be edited to suit the user's own requirements. One can choose to use the default report
templates provided with the system or can choose to create its own slightly different versions of these
reports. The selected templates can then be used to generate the actual reports which can be sent to
a variety of places (printer, file or screen).
Flexible Importing
This facility is designed to let the user import tabular data from a wide variety of files and databases
via ODBC. A filter 'template' is configured visually and can be saved to disk for future use. It can also
be distributed easily to other users.
User Choke Model DLL
Allows the user to develop their own choke model and implement it within PROSPER in a similar
fashion to flow correlations
New Choke Model (from ELF)
A model based on Perkin's (SPE 206333) approach along with discharge coefficients determined by
the author (Stephane Rastoin of ELF Aquitaine at TUALP)
Pipe Correlation Comparison
A technique for comparing pipeline flow correlations against observed data similar to the existing
Correlation Comparison for tubing correlations
QuickLook for ESP
A diagnostic technique for analysing ESP lifted systems to determine if the pump is performing as
expected and to trouble shoot for potential problems
Inipath
A option to allow users to run PROSPER from one network copy whilst maintaining their own
configurations in private copies of PROSPER.INI
New Gaslift Design Options
New Emulsion Viscosity Modelling Options
Generate TPD files for GAP
Extended lift curve format to allow modelling of ESP systems in GAP
Expanded EOS Import Format
Allows user to import all the data that is normally generated by Petroleum Experts EOS model. The
file format is flexible to allow for multiple compositions and the results obtained for each composition.
This allows the possibility in the future to generate sensitivities for several compositions. (e.g. EOS-
based lift curves)
Gradient Test Data
Allows output of consistent test data on all gradient plots in PROSPER
ESP Database Handling Improved
Database information regarding current pump, motor and cable in use is stored on file to enable
distribution of files easily between users
Water Injector As Specific Well Type
Allows easy setup an minimal PVT data entry to handle this well type.
Variable Solution Node
Allow solution node at sandface, wellhead or manifold
Injection Model For Temperature Improved (Rough Approximation Model)
Improved Equipment Data Entry
Many problems for users are caused by incorrect entry of equipment data. Improving error detection
in this area helps to reduce support requirements and improves usability of the program
Pipeline Calculation Only
Simplify setup (especially for equipment) in order to model pipeline flow
New Tubing Correlation (Petroleum Experts 3)
Plot Annotations
Version 4.5
This note is a summary of the main additions that have been incorporated in
PROSPER since the May 1995 release.
Black Oil PVT
Added new Pressure-Volume-Temperature Correlations for Gulf of Mexico Crude Oils due to
Petrosky et al (SPE26644)
Added new Viscosity Correlations for Gulf of Mexico Crude Oils due to Petrosky et al (
SPE29268)
Allow modelling of emulsion viscosity corrections for OIL-WATER mixtures.
Improved matching for heavy oils.
Equation of State PVT from external DLL
Added a new interface to give user's the ability to program their own equation of state PVT
model and link it to PROSPER.
FLASH.DLL routines updated to closely follow PVT Package calculations. This has resulted
in improved viscosity, liquid densities and phase detection. Stability has improved for low molecular
43
PROSPER
weight liquids and gas.
ESP's
Emulsion PVT applied to ESP head, power (and consequently) efficiency corrections.
Intake gas fraction sensitivity plot (Dunbar plot).
Tubing automatically terminated at pump depth.
Database report improved.
Inflow Performance
Multi-layer - Upgraded for injection wells.
GAP and MBAL links. IPR points are transferred directly to GAP or saved in a file for MBAL.
SkinAide - new IPR model from ELF
Gaslift Design
Optional checks for rate conformance with IPR during design.
Expanded design options and additional logic for valve closing pressures.
Improved dome pressure temperature correction above 1200 psi.
Design plot shows unloading fluid gradients, actual surface injection pressure and production
rates.
Database report improved.
File handling
Significant reduction in all file sises due to implementation of file compression techniques.
Improved error handling in low space (disk nearly full) situations.
Speed up file reading/writing..
Error Checking
Improved the checking of equipment entry
Units
Revised to include validation option on main Units screen.
New options added to allow user selection of precision of display,
Reports
Screen reporting more flexible
Font handling problems (with regards to font size) fixed. Printer fonts are now entered as
point sises instead of relative size units. This avoids the need to adjust printer font sises when
changing printers
Batch
Automatic Batch generation of tubing curves(VLP) and inflow curves(IPR) via improved
interface with GAP
ProdMan ( Production Manager)
Provision of visual field modelling with automatic access to PROSPER and capability for
batch mode operation for certain calculations.
(GAP without the modelling and optimisation features)
Calculation / Generate for GAP
Rate logic improved for high rate producers and injectors.
Calculation / System
User selection of sensitivity values on plots.
Calculation / Gradient
Plots can now be made for the entire system including both well and pipeline. Extended
range of plot variables available.
Miscellaneous
Plot results in multirate IPR's.
Reset buttons in sensitivity variable selection screen
Screen appearance has been improved to improve layout and readability.
IPR MultiLayer report
Separate units available for Anisotropy, PumpWearFactor, TimeToSurface and Volume
Allow selection of curves to plot in VLP
Store and report Depth Of Injection in gradient sensitivty analysis
Fluid Flow Correlation Parameters report added
Last file loading option
Previous files loading option.
Version 4.0
This note is a summary of the main additions that have been incorporated in
PROSPER since the May 1994 release.
General
UNIX versions have been shipped for HP 9000 and IBM RISC. Other platforms can be
supported on request.
New program installation procedure build program icon and group automatically.
Stackable keys now supported.
Black Oil PVT
Black oil PVT now handles 100% CO
2
. (Accuracy verified against measured data)
45
PROSPER
Composition estimation from Black Oil properties. Estimated composition now used for
calculation of thermodynamic properties (enthalpy, entropy) for choke calculations etc. This improves
the accuracy of the Enthalpy Balance temperature predictions for high GOR cases.
Black oil PVT lookup table file import available.
EOS PVT
EOS PVT input screen editing improved. Now allows input of up to 30 pseudocomponents.
Critical volume is now passed between PVTP and PROSPER. This improves PROSPER
viscosity calculations for some fluids. For old files, Vcrit is estimated using a correlation as before.
EOS algorithms improved and run faster.
EOS oil density now used instead of Standing and Katz.
System I Equipment
Sketches of both surface and downhole equipment can be drawn from the summary screen.
Surface equipment geometry can be optionally entered as TVD, Length or X,Y co-ordinates.
Inflow Performance
Relative permeability can be optionally used in oil IPR calculations. PROSPER allows entry
relative permeability curves and the water cut at a test rate. PROSPER now calculates IPR
sensitivities for water cut.
Fractured well IPR improved for both short and long flowing times.
Horizontal well - friction dP. This major development allows modelling of horizontal well
accounting for friction loss, gravel packs for oil, gas and condensate.
Multi-layer - Layer dP. A network algorithm is used to solve multi layer IPR while accounting
for pressure differences between layers. Available for oil now, gas and condensate in Summer 95.
Matching
IPR matching facility added. Allows IPR to be compared to matched test pressures. This is
a useful graphical means to find reservoir pressures and to examine changes in well condition and
quality control the well model.
Match data screen re-worked to allow cut and paste to/from windows clipboard. Match data
comment field added.
Calculation / Inflow
A new Inflow section has been added. This enables sensitivities for IPR variables to be
quickly calculated without the need to calculate the VLP also (System calculation).
The range of sensitivity variables has been expanded with completion design in mind.
User selected rates can be now be Generated if required. This is useful for IPR sensitvities
when Automatic rates are determined by the AOF for the base case. Sensitivity variables values can
be Generated also.
Calculation / System
The range of outputs displayed expanded to include wellhead temperature, pressure loss
components, gas injection depth.
Calculation / Gradient
Plots can now be made for the entire system including both well and pipeline. Extended
range of plot variables available.
Range of sensitivity variables expanded.
Calculation / VLP
Lift curve variables are sorted and filtered so that only valid sensitivity variable are considered.
Number of VLP table entries increased from 1296 to 10,000
Increased range of VLP variables and simulator formats supported. (COMP3 VIP & MORE)
For oil wells, VLP can be calculated in terms of gas rates
VLP algorithms improved for very high GOR.
Additional VLP correlations - Petroleum Experts 2 (improved loading rate calculations) and
Duns and Ros Original.
Calculation / Choke
General purpose choke tool can find: flow rate, pressure drop or choke size. Calculation
based on thermodynamic principles, not empirical correlations.
Calculation / Generate for GAP
Now active even if PROSPER has not been called from GAP. This allows an engineer to
work with PROSPER independently of GAP.
For naturally flowing wells, 5 generate pressures can be input and calculated.
Generates performance curves for both injection and flowing wells.
Design / Gaslift design
Design logic has been improved and greater flexibility in design methods is provided.
Fixed mandrel depth design selects the best location for unloading valves from a list of pre-
set mandrel depths.
Design / ESP design
Current (1992) motor characteristics for REDA motors included in database.
ESP Inc. motor and pump data included in database
1.8 Examples Guide
The example guide in Chapter 3 of this manual contains a collection of tutorials
designed to help jump-start the use of PROSPER. The tutorials are grouped by subjects:
Integrated Oil Well Model
Basic Tutorials for Naturally Flowing Wells
47
PROSPER
PVT Matching Tutorials
Pipeline Tutorial
Modelling Well Inflow Tutorials
Skin and Sand Control Tutorials
Well Test Matching Tutorials
Artificial lift design tutorials
Tutorials on Trouble-shooting Artificially Lifted Wells
Tutorials on Compositional Modelling
Tutorials on Temperature Modelling and Flow Assurance Studies
Tutorials on Special Topics
Integrated Well-bore Model
Tutoria
l
Description Reference File
00 Integrated oil well model T00_Integrated_Oil_Well.OUT
Basic tutorials for naturally flowing wells
Tutoria
l
01 Modelling an Naturally Flowing Oil Producer T01_Basic_Oil_Well.OUT
02 Modelling a Dry Gas Producer T02_Basic_Gas_Well.OUT
03 Modelling a Water Injection Well T03_Water_Injector.OUT
04 Modelling a Gas Injection Well T04_Gas_Injector.OUT
PVT Matching
Tutoria
l
05 Modelling an Naturally Flowing Oil Producer T05_PVT_Match_Oil_Well.OUT
06 Modelling a Dry Gas Producer T06_PVT_Match_Gas_Well.OUT
Pipeline Tutorial
Tutoria
l
07 Modelling a Surface Pipeline T07_Modelling_Surface_Pipeline.
OUT
Tutoria
l
08 Modelling a Darcy IPR T08_Darcy_IPR_Model.OUT
09 Modelling an IPR using SPOT T09_SPOT_lPR_Model.OUT
10 Modelling a Horizontal Well T10_Modelling_A_Horizontal_Well.
OUT
11 Modelling a Multilayer Well with dP Loss in
Wellbore
T11_Modelling_A_Multilayer_Well.
OUT
12 Modelling a Multilateral Gas Producer T12_Modelling_A_Multilateral_Wel
l.OUT
Tutoria
l
13 Modelling Skin T13_Modelling_Skin.OUT
14 Modelling an oil well with gravel-pack T14_Modelling_A_GravelPack.OUT
15 Modelling a 'frac and pack' well T15_Frac_And_Pack_Oil_Well.OUT
16 Modelling a well with wire-wrapped screens T16_Modelling_Wire_Wrapped_scr
een.out
17 Modelling a well with pre-packed screens T17_Modelling_PrePacked_Screen.
OUT
18 Modelling a well with slotted liners T18_Modelling_A_Slotted_Liners.
out
Tutoria
l
19 Matching a Naturally Flowing Oil Well Test T19_Matching_Well_Test_For_Oil_Wel
l.OUT
20 Matching a Gas Well Test T20_Matching_Well_Test_For_Gas_We
ll.OUT
21 Matching a Water Injection Well Test T21_Matching_Water_Injection_Well_
Test.OUT
22 Matching a Gas Injection Well Test T22_Matching_Gas_Injection_Well_Tes
ts.OUT
Artificial Lift Design Tutorials
Tutoria
l
23 Continuous Gas lift design T23_Continuous_GasLift_Design.OUT
24 Intermittent Gas Lift Design T24_Intermittent_GasLift_Design.OUT
25 Coiled Tubing Gas lift Design T25_Coiled_Tubing_Gas_Lift_Design.
OUT
26 Design of an ESP system for an oilT26_ESP_Design.OUT
49
PROSPER
producer
27 Design of an HSP system for an oil
producer
T27_HSP_Design.OUT
28 Design of a Sucker Rod Pump for an oil
producer
T28_Sucker_Rod_Design.OUT
29 Design of a PCP lift system for an oil
producer
T29_PCP_Design.OUT
30 Diluent Injection tutorial T30_Diluent_Injection_with_GasLift.
OUT
31 Multiphase pump in a pipe connected to a
single well
T31_Modelling_Surface_Multiphase_P
ump.OUT
32 Design of a Jet Pump system for an oil
producer
T32_Designing_A_Jet_Pump.OUT
Tutorials on Trouble-shooting of Artificially Lifted Wells
Tutoria
l
33 Troubleshooting a Gas Lifted Well T33_GasLift_QuickLook.OUT
34 Trouble-shooting an ESP-Lifted Well T34_ESP_Quicklook.OUT
35 Trouble-shooting an HSP-Lifted Well T35_HSP_Quicklook.OUT
36 Trouble-shooting a Sucker Rod Lifted Well No reference file
Compositional Modelling Tutorials
Tutoria
l
37 Fully Compositional Retrograde Condensate
Well
T37_Compostional_Condensate_We
ll.Out
38 Validation of the Black Oil PVT Model for a
Retrograde Condensate Producer
T38_BO_Condensate_Validation.
Out
39 Fully compositional CO2 injection well T39_Compostional_CO2_Injector.
Out
Tutorials on Temperature Modelling and Flow Assurance studies
Tutoria
l
40 Full Enthalpy Balance Example T40_Enthalpy_Balance.OUT
41 Improved Approximation Tutorial T41_Improved_Approximation.OUT
42 Modelling a Steam Injection Well T42_Steam_Injector.OUT
43 General Flow Assurance Features T43_Flow Assurance.OUT
Tutoria
l
44 Modelling Non-Newtonian Fluids T44_Modelling_Non_Newtonian_Fl
uids.OUT
45 Modelling a Coal Bed Methane (CBM) Water
Producer
T45_CBM_Dewatering_Well.OUT
46 Modelling Emulsions T46_Modelling_An_Emulsion.OUT
47 Gas Lift in a Gas Well T47_Gas_Lift_For_Gas_Wells.OUT
Chapter
2
User Guide 52
2 User Guide
This user guide is subdivided in the following sections:
Introduction
File management
Data input - General
PVT data input
Equipment data input
IPR Data Input
Artificial Lift Data Input
Matching menu
Calculation Menu
Design menu
Output
Units
Wizard
Plotting
Help and
Appendix
2.1 Introduction
Welcome to PROSPER, Petroleum Experts Limited's advanced PROduction and S
ystems PERformance analysis software. PROSPER can assist the production or
reservoir engineer to predict tubing and pipeline hydraulics and temperatures with
accuracy and speed. PROSPER's powerful sensitivity calculation features enable
existing designs to be optimised and the effects of future changes in system
parameters to be assessed.
By separately modelling each component of the producing well system, then allowing
the user to verify each model subsystem by performance matching, PROSPER ensures
that the calculations are as accurate as possible. Once a system model has been tuned
to real field data, PROSPER can be confidently used to model the well in different
scenarios and to make forward predictions of reservoir pressure based on surface
production data.
2.1.1 Using PROSPER
These are the main features available in PROSPER:
1. PROSPER is a fundamental element in the Integrated Production Model (IPM)
as defined by Petroleum Experts as it creates a robust well model which can
be linked to GAP (the production network optimisation program for gathering
system modelling) and linked to MBAL (the reservoir engineering and modelling
53
PROSPER
tool which allows for making fully integrated total system modelling and
production forecasting).
2. The PVT section in PROSPER can compute fluid properties using standard black
oil correlations and these black oil correlations can be modified to better fit
measured lab data. PROSPER also allows detailed PVT data in the form of
tables to be imported for use in the calculations. A third option is to use the
Equation of State method. This option allows the user to enter the equation of
state model parameters and uses the standard Peng-Robinson or SRK EoS
models to generate properties given a multi-stage separator scheme. With this
option the users can also import all PVT data in the form of tables, which could
have been generated using their own proprietary EoS models.
3. The tool can be used to model reservoir inflow performance (IPR) for single layer,
multi-layered, or multilateral wells with complex and highly deviated completions,
optimising all aspects of a completion design including perforation details and
gravel packing.
4. It can be used to accurately predict both pressure and temperature profiles in
producing wells, injection wells, across chokes and along risers and flow lines.
5. The sensitivity calculations capabilities allow the engineer to model and easily
optimise tubing configuration, choke and surface flow line performance.
6. It can be used to design, optimise and troubleshoot the following artificial lift
systems: gas lifted, coiled tubing, ESP, PCP, HSP (hydraulic pump), Jet pump
and Sucker Rod pump equipped wells.
7. The choke calculator can be used to predict flow rates given the choke size, or
the choke size for a specified production rate and of course, the pressure drop
across a known choke at a specified rate. It can also be used to generate choke
performance curves.
8. The multiphase flow correlations implemented can be adjusted to match
measured field data to generate vertical lift performance curves (VLP) for use in
simulators and network models.
9. The tool can utilise externally programmed dynamic link libraries (DLL) for
multiphase flow correlations, Equation of State (EOS) PVT calculations, choke
calculations, Inflow (IPR) models, HSP Gas De-Rating models and proprietary
viscosity models (both Newtonian and non-Newtonian) .
10. The tool can be used in a matching or predictive mode. Matching of real data is
available in the PVT, IPR, Gradient matching and VLP matching sections.
In matching mode, real data can be entered and matched using non-linear
regression methods to create custom correlations that fit the input data.
In predictive mode, the correlations created can be used to make
User Guide 54
estimates of future well performance.
11. PROSPER can be used to model complex (topographically) and extensive (in
length) surface pipelines. Complex steady state slug analysis can also be
performed by taking into account slug build up and decay due to pipeline
topography, giving an indication of expected slug length and frequency. Pigging
calculations are also available
12. Black Oil PVT tables can be imported directly into PROSPER. The black oil
tables can be generated by Petroleum Experts PVTP thermodynamics analysis
program or from from any third-party application, provided it has the right format
(*.PTB file). Equally, compositional models can also be directly imported as *.
PRP file.
13. A flexible and fully customisable units system is implemented in PROSPER. Data
may be input using one set of units and output using a second set of units.
Validation limits and display resolution can be independently set for each
variable type.
14. It has the utility for flagging of potential hydrate formation, if the user chooses this
in the options. The additional input required for this calculation is the hydration
formation tables as a part of the black oil PVT description. The hydrate and wax
models are readily available if the fluid model in PROSPER is compositional.
Note that one can also use Petroleum Experts PVTP thermodynamics analysis
program to predict waxes and hydrates appearance conditions. A compositional
PROSPER model or PVTP can be used to generate hydrate formation tables.
15. The following situations can be modelled:
Fluid Type:
Oil and Water (Black oil or Equation of State PVT)
Dry and Wet Gas (Black oil or Equation of State PVT)
Retrograde Condensate (Black Oil or Equation of State PVT)
Emulsion viscosity can be optionally applied for any combination of inflow,
tubing and ESPs or HSPs.
Separation mode: Single or Two Stage separation or Multistage (for
Compositional model)
Modelling of non-Newtonian fluids for oil wells
Modelling of condensed water vapour for gas wells
Well Flow Configuration:
Tubing or Annular flow or Tubing + Annular flow
Producer or Injector
Artificial Lift Method:
Naturally flowing well
55
PROSPER
Gas lifted well (continuous and intermittent)
Electric submersible pump (ESP)
Hydraulic drive downhole pump (HSP)
Progressive Cavity Pumps
Jet Pumps
Gas Lift with Coiled Tubing
Injection of Diluents
Multiphase Pumps
Sucker Rod Pumps
Prediction Type:
Pressure Only
Pressure and Temperature Offshore
Pressure and Temperature on Land
Temperature Model:
Enthalpy Balance with or without steam
Rough Approximation
Improved Approximation with or without steam
Completion:
Cased Hole
Open Hole
Sand control:
Gravel Pack
Pre-packed screen
Wire wrapped screen
Slotted liner
Sand failure
Reservoir:
Single Well
Multi-lateral Well in a Multi-layered Reservoir
Gas Coning (Rate dependent GOR calculator)
2.1.2 PROSPER and Systems Analysis
PROSPER can help E&P companies to maximise their production earnings by providing
the engineering means to critically analyse the performance of individual producing or
injecting wells. Each well system component that contributes to overall performance is
separately modelled. Fluid properties, inflow performance, pressure drop in the tubing
and pressure losses in the surface gathering system are individually evaluated,
analysed, validated and calibrated against recorded performance data whenever
possible.
User Guide 56
Well potential and producing pressure losses are both dependent on fluid (PVT)
properties. The accuracy of systems analysis calculations is therefore dependent on
the accuracy of the fluid properties model (i.e. PVT). The pressure drop in a pipeline or
wellbore is the summation of 3 components:
Gravity head
Friction loss
Acceleration
i.e.
p p p p
total gravity friction acceleration
The gravity component is due to the density of the fluid mixture at each point in the
system and is a complex function of the relative velocity of the phases present.
PROSPER makes a flash computation at each calculation step to determine the
proportion of oil, water and gas present. The no-slip density is then calculated using the
proportions of each phase and the predicted density at each pressure and temperature
step.
Industry standard 2-phase and 3-phase correlations are then applied to determine the
increase in apparent fluid density due to the higher vertical velocity of gas compared to
oil and water (slippage). The gravity head loss is proportional to the fluid density
corrected for slip. The slip correction to be applied depends on the flow regime, fluid
velocity etc. The need for an accurate PVT description for predicting the gravity head
loss becomes obvious.
Friction losses are controlled by fluid viscosity and geometric factors (pipe diameter
and roughness). In the majority of oilfield applications (i.e. large elevation difference
between inlet and outlet with liquids present) the gravitational component normally
accounts for around 90% of the overall head loss. Therefore, the total pressure drop
function may often not be particularly sensitive to the value of the friction loss coefficient.
The acceleration component is usually small except in systems involving significant fluid
expansion. However, it is accounted for in all PROSPER calculations.
Historically, systems analysis software has lumped all flowing pressure loss terms
together and allowed the user to match real data by adjusting the roughness coefficient
of the friction loss term. This will certainly achieve a match for a particular rate, but
cannot be expected to achieve a match over a significant range of rates due to the
different dependencies of the gravity and friction loss terms on liquid velocity.
The recommended engineering approach when modelling wells and / or pipelines
response with PROSPER is to first construct a robust PVT model for the fluid. The
process consists when possible of entering laboratory PVT data and adjusting the black
oil correlation model to fit the measured data while respecting the fluid thermodynamics.
This approach consistently improves the accuracy of forward prediction.
In essence, an accurate PVT model confines any uncertainty in the gravity loss term
57
PROSPER
to the slip correction only.
In the VLP matching phase, PROSPER divides the total pressure loss into friction and
gravity components and uses a non-linear regression technique to separately optimise
the value of each component. Not only does the matching process result in a more
accurate model, it will quickly highlight inconsistencies in either the PVT or equipment
description.
Provided sufficiently accurate field data is available, robust PVT, IPR and VLP models
can be achieved by validating and calibrating the models against actual performance.
Each model component is separately validated, therefore dependency on other
components of the well model is eliminated. Understanding potential deterioration in
well performance is simplified with such a consistent process that ultimately helps to
reduce the number of unknowns.
2.1.2.1 About PROSPER
PROSPER can predict either Pressure Only or Pressure and Temperature. The
Pressure Only option makes PROSPER a "Systems Analysis" package in the traditional
sense. In Pressure Only mode, the fluid temperature profile within the well must be
inputted by the user. Temperature data is normally recorded whenever a pressure
survey is made, as the temperature is required to correct the downhole pressure
readings.
The Pressure and Temperature calculation option will generate both temperature and
pressure profiles. Three temperature models are provided.
The Rough Approximation model utilises a user-input overall heat transfer coefficient. It
determines the steady state temperature profile from the mass flow rates of oil, water
and gas before commencing the pressure loss calculations. This method runs quickly,
but unless calibrated using measured temperature data, it is not accurate.
The Enthalpy Balance model calculates the heat transfer coefficients at each
calculation step by considering heat flow and enthalpy changes. The Joule Thompson
effect, conduction,free convection, forced convection and radiation are modelled.
These calculations require considerably more input data than for pressure only
calculations and must commence from a known temperature and pressure (the sand
face for producers, or wellhead for injectors). Computation times are longer than for the
Rough Approximation option, but this method is predictive and gives accurate results
over a wide range of conditions.
The Enthalpy Balance model is completely transient and can be used to study
temperature changes over time.
Temperature prediction is useful for generating temperature profiles in:
long pipelines transporting retrograde condensate.
subsea wells with long flowlines
User Guide 58
high pressure/temperature exploration wells
predicting temperature/pressure profiles for flow assurance studies: prediction of
wax/hydrate deposits
The production riser is properly accounted for by PROSPER. The user-input riser
geometry determines the heat loss coefficients calculated by the program between the
seabed and wellhead.
The Improved Approximation is a full Enthalpy Balance model, with the difference that
the heat exchange coefficient is not calculated but defined by the user along the
completion. Like the Enthalpy Balance model, the Joule Thompson effect is accounted
for.
PROSPER is also able to predict condensate liquid drop out using either black oil or
compositional models.
PROSPER uses a "Smart Menu" system meaning that only data relevant to a particular
problem need to be entered.
The flow chart below gives an outline of the calculation steps required to carry out a
simple systems analysis using PROSPER.
59
PROSPER
2.1.3 Examples
To help illustrate the power of PROSPER, examples are provided with the program.
We suggest to run through them to become familiar with the program and its various
options.
The example guide provide the user with tutorials covering various dexterity and
User Guide 60
engineering topics showing how to build, match and use a well model.
All the example files related are in the folder ~\samples\PROSPER , where Petroleum
Experts software in installed. The location of this directory depends on where the
program has been installed.
Example Guide
2.2 File Management
This section describes the menus, options and procedures used in PROSPER to create
new files and open or save existing files. The units system and how to define printer
settings are also outlined. The menus described in this section are the PROSPER File
menu and Units menu.
The File menu provides additional options such as defining the default data directory,
as well as the facility to establish links to other programs running under Windows.
PROSPER will (optionally) open the last file accessed when it starts. PROSPER also
displays a file status screen that shows the application options selected in summary
format: input PVT and IPR data, the equipment type summary and the analysis output.
To protect the work, good practice is to save the file on a regular basis. This simple
procedure could potentially prevent hours of input and analysis being lost.
2.2.1 PROSPER Files
PROSPER uses a flexible file structure that enables data to be easily exchanged
between files and other application programs. In PROSPER information is grouped into
the following categories:
PVT Data System Input Data
Analysis Data Output Data
and saved into the following types of data file:
2.2.1.1 PVT Data (*.PVT)
File containing the well fluid data, PVT match data and any PVT tables entered under
the PVT menu.
It is possible to save PVT files separately under different names, and use them with
other input, analysis and output files in PROSPER. This feature is useful when analysing
a number of wells from the same producing pool.
The .PVT file can be also imported/exported in/from MBAL models.
61
PROSPER
2.2.1.2 Input Data (*.SIN)
The *.SIN file contain all the options selected under the Options menu, in addition to the
well IPR and equipment data entered under the System menu. When an input file is
opened or saved, the program automatically opens and saves a .PVT file with the same
name.
2.2.1.3 Analysis Data (*.ANL)
This *.ANL file contains all the information from the *.SIN file along with all the sensitivity
input data for the calculations selected under the Calculation or Design menus. When
an analysis file is opened and saved, the program automatically opens and saves a .
PVT & .SIN file with the same name. GAP manipulates .ANL files to batch calculate well
lift curves.
2.2.1.4 Output Data (*.OUT)
This file contains all the inputs and all the results of the calculations. When an output file
is saved, then program automatically saves a .PVT, .SIN & .ANL file of the same name.
The *.OUT file can be seen as the master PROSPER file.
PROSPER files are ranked by their order of input, which essentially reflects the way data
should be entered into the program, that is from the LEFT to the RIGHT of the PROSPER
menu. It is possible to note that the order of files also corresponds to the options on the
menu bar as one is navigating through the program.
The file hierarchy does not prevent the user from creating and combining any number of
input and output data files. Until the user becomes familiar with the program, we
recommend to work with *.OUT files. This can avoid confusion as the program will
automatically open and save the required data files to run a complete analysis cycle.
More experienced users can take advantage of the flexible file structure to combine the
data files from different wells. This "sharing" of data is useful in areas where wells have
similar fluid properties or reservoir IPR's. If disk space is a concern, the data contained
in a .ANL file together with its complementary .PVT and .SIN files can be used to re-
create a given set of calculation outputs, therefore avoiding the need to always save
large .OUT files on disk.
For example, if one wants to run an analysis with the PVT data of Well 1, the input data
(*.SIN) data of Well 2, and the analysis data of Well 3, the following steps can be
followed to achieve that:
Open Well 2.SIN
Recall Well 1.PVT under the PVT menu.
Under the Options menu, select the processing options.
Modify the data files if necessary.
Next, select the Save As command and save the data under a new file
name.
User Guide 62
It is possible to set up PROSPER so that only the *.OUT file is saved in the File |
Preferences | File screen. More information on this option can be found in the
Preferences Section.
2.2.1.5 Creating a New File
While working with PROSPER, new input or output data files can be created at any time.
To create a new file select File | New from the main menu. This command does not
actually create a new and separate file, but re-initialises the program input/output data.
2.2.1.6 Opening an Existing File
Existing data files can be opened quickly and easily at any time during the current
working session. To open a file, from the File menu choose the Open option. It is
possible to select one of the following file types:
Input Data (. SIN)
Input and Analysis Data (. ANL)
Input, Analysis and Output Data (. OUT)
by using the Files of Type dropdown box.
The file open dialogue is exactly the same as in any Windows program.
2.2.1.7 Saving a File
When files are opened in PROSPER, the program copies the selected file into the
computer's memory. Any changes to the file are made to the copy in memory. In the
event of a power failure or computer crash, these changes would be completely lost. To
prevent this, we recommend to save the data on a regular basis and especially before
quitting the program.
The Save command stores all the changes made in the active file. By default, the Save
command saves a file under its original name and to the drive and directory last
selected. A prompt will be displayed to select one of the following file types:
Input Data (.SIN)
Automatically saves the input file and corresponding .PVT file.
Input and Analysis Data (.ANL)
Automatically saves the analysis data and corresponding .SIN & .PVT data
files.
63
PROSPER
Input, Analysis and Output Data (.OUT)
Automatically saves the output results and corresponding .SIN, .PVT & .ANL
files if a file of the same name exists in the selected directory, the file is
overwritten. To avoid overwriting an existing file, use the Save As command
and enter a different file name.
2.2.1.8 Copying a File
The Save As command allows to make more than one copy or version of an existing
file.
This command is the same as in any other program running under Windows and allows
to save the PROSPER model in any of the file formats (.SIN, .ANL, .OUT).
2.2.2 Preferences
The 'Preferences' screen is used to customise the program to the particular
requirements. Click the File | Preferences menu to customise PROSPER. Click on the
appropriate tab at the top of the data entry section in order to change the option
require. The various tabs are described below:
2.2.2.1 Main Screen
This tab is used to customise the appearance of the PROSPER main screen and all data
User Guide 64
entry (dialogue) screens.
Dialogue
Font
This changes the font type and size used to display all data entry
screens. This may be useful to make all dialogues smaller in case of a
low-resolution screen or larger to improve readability in case of a high-
resolution screen. Use the Reset button to reset the dialogue screen
font to its default value.
Status
Screen
Selecting On the screen status information will be continuously
displayed and updated during the program usage. Selecting Off the
screen status information screen will not be displayed (apart from
whenever a new file is opened).
Font Height
If the font height is modified then an attempt is made to scale the font
so that all information displayed in each panel on the status screen will
be visible. This will vary depending on the relative size of the program
window to the total screen. If the font height is not modified then some
information may not be displayed as the size of the program window is
varied.
Screen Font
Use this option to change the font type and size used to display
information on the status (front) screen of the program.
Label Colour Change the colour used to display labels on the status screen
Text Colour Change the colour used to display text on the status screen
Background Change the colour used for the background of the status screen
Box Colour
Change the colour used for the background of each panel on the status
screen
Box Shadow
Change the colour used for the 3D shadow effect on the status screen
panels
Box
Highlight
Change the colour used for the 3D-highlight effect on the status screen
panels
FileName
Option
Options to display the file name in the main program toolbar. It is
possible to visualise the file name with/without the complete path, or a
certain number of characters ot not visualise it at all. The changes will
have effect as soon as a file is loaded
Length of
FileName
Active only if the FileName Option Compact Path/File to Specified
Length is selected
Analysis
Summary
Columns
This option changes the way the Analysis Summary is displayed in the
PROSPER main screen
For all of the above Colour options the Choose button to the right will bring up a
dialogue screen to select an appropriate colour.
65
PROSPER
2.2.2.2 File
Use this tab to customise various options relating to file management.
Default Data
Directory
The directory where data files are normally stored. Use the Browse
buttons to browse for the appropriate directories.
Default Data
Directory
Choice
This option determines the directory that is used as the default in file
dialogue. The choices are either to always use the default data
directory (see above) or to use the directory of the last file opened or
saved.
Reload Last
File On Start
Up
Specifies whether the last file that the user was working with should be
automatically reloaded on program start up.
Number of
File Names
Saved
Specifies the number of previously used files that are to be displayed
on the file menu.
Location of
Import Files
Use this option to specify the default location of the Import files
Import File
Directory
Choice
Use this option to define the directory that will be pointed every time
the file Import function is selected
Location of Use this option to specify the default location of the Import Filter
User Guide 66
Import Filters
Location of
Report
Output Files
Use this option to specify the default location of output files from the
reporting subsystem.
Location of
User-
Created
Report Files
Use this option to specify the default location of user-created report
templates from the reporting subsystem
Confirm
Calculations
Switches (on or off) the message that appears at the end of any
calculation function.
File
Compressio
n
Switches (on or off) file compression for PROSPER files (OUT, ANL,
SIN, PVT). Default is off. File reading and writing is slower with
compression on, but less disk space is used by the file. The user
needs to decide the trade-off between speed and disk space.
File
Overwrite
This option switches on/off a confirmation message whenever saving
and overwriting an existing file
Save Only .
OUT file
With this option set to 'No', when a PROSPER file is saved 4 files (*.
OUT, *.ANL, *.SIN and *.PVT) will be saved. If this option is set to 'Yes'
only the *.OUT file will be saved.
2.2.2.3 Plot
67
PROSPER
Use this tab to set defaults for all aspects of the plot.
Always Use
Plot Defaults
Each time a plot is done default values will be used rather than the last
selected values for each particular plot type
Display New
Plots
Version 12.0 of PROSPER has implemented a new plotting method
across the program. To use this plotting method select 'Yes' or to use
the older plotting method select 'No'.
If 'Choose' is selected, then the option of which plotting system to use
will be given everything 'Plot' is selected in the main program.
X Grid
Blocks
Number of gaps between grid lines on X-axis. (Range 1-20)
Y Grid
Blocks
Number of gaps between grid lines on Y-axis. (Range 1-20)
Plot Labels Shows or hides the plot labels.
Plot Scales Shows or hides the plot scales
Plot Legend
Shows or hides the plot legend. If the legend is hidden, the body of the
plot will expand to fill the whole window.
Scaling
Method
Endpoint or rounded. Endpoint means the scales are taken from
the exact extremities of the data being plotted. Rounded means that
ranges are chosen to surround the data but with whole numbers
ensured for the end points and the gridline intervals.
Grid Line
Type
Selects from dotted lines, dashed lines, solid lines or tick marks.
Mouse
Readout
Switches the mouse cursor position readout no or off.
Date Stamp
Title
Selects to append the current data and time to the plot title or not
Line
Thickness
To select the thickness of plotted lines
Vertical Font Selects the default font for all vertical text (Y-axis)
Horizontal
Font
Selects the default font for all horizontal text
Default
Colours
Sets the default colour scheme for the plot
User Guide 68
2.2.2.4 User Applications
This tab allows to add up to four of the users favourite or most-often used Windows
applications to the PROSPER menu. Although PROSPER has a very flexible reporting
system, the user may wish to use a spreadsheet (such as EXCEL), a word processor
(such as WORD) and a presentation package (such as Power Point) to build
presentation quality reports using PROSPER output in a slick and efficient manner.
Any output (plots and reports) produced by PROSPER is automatically copied to the
Clipboard. From there it can easily be pasted into one of the above-mentioned
applications using one simple keystroke. Using the power and flexibility of the chosen
application high quality reports and presentations can be easily prepared.
All plots can be saved in Windows Metafile format. These can be easily read by a
word processing package or presentation graphics package and give the maximum
flexibility for user customisation.
All reports can be saved in TSV (Tab Separated Variable) format using the Export
facility that means they will automatically be tabulated when read into the favourite
spreadsheet.
Enter a description and a command line for each application to be added to the
PROSPER menu.
The description is the data that appears on the menu.
The command line is the full path name of the program to execute.
69
PROSPER
Use the Browse buttons to browse for the application require. Use the Clear buttons
to initialise the appropriate application information.
2.2.2.5 Limits
Use this tab used to set the limits of the calculations in PROSPER
For IPR Generation
Maximum AOF for OIL
Maximum AOF for GAS
Maximum AOF for RETROGRADE
CONDENSATE
For Performance Curve Generation
Minimum GLR Injected for GAP Performance
Curves
For VLP Generation
User Guide 70
It is possible control the display of large VLP values in SYSTEM | VLP calculations.
VLP Pressure
Display Limit
Twice Reservoir
Pressure
VLP Pressure is only displayed is
less than twice the reservoir pressure
Unlimited VLP Pressure is always displayed
VLP MultiVariable Analysis
Maximum Number of Rates
This option defines the maximum number of
rates that can be used to calculate the well
VLPs
Maximum Number of
Sensitivity Values
This option defines the maximum number of
values that can be used for each sensitivity
variable
For HSP System Calculations (within Design Screen)
These options are used to control the iteration that searches for a solution for the Inflow/
Outflow intersection that ensures that the Pump and Turbine power are equal.
HSP Rate Refinement Tolerance
HSP Pump/Turbine Power
Tolerance
HSP Power Fluid Ratio
HSP Power Fluid Divisor
HSP Iteration Limit
For Gradient Calculations
Calculation Step Length User specified step length
Use Correlation Step
Length
No
Use Program defaults for correlation step
length
Yes
Use user-entered value for the step length
used by correlations in nodal analysis
For Steam Calculations
It is now possible to select a separate User defined step length which will only be used
when the Steam option is enabled.
71
PROSPER
Steam Step Length User specified step length
Use Steam Step Length
No
Use Program defaults for correlation step
length
Yes
Use user-entered value for the step length
used by correlations in nodal analysis for
Steam calculations only.
For TPD Files
Document TPD Files
No No documentation within TPD files
Yes
TPD files are documented with
descriptions of all data. Use this option
sparingly as it increases the size of the
resultant files considerably.
2.2.2.6 Units
This tab allows the user to specify the default Units Systems to use for new files.
If setting the option "Always Use Default Units" to "Yes", then the units displayed for any
file read in will always be set to the default choice, regardless of the settings in the file.
Units Database Directory: this is the location where the PROSPER Units database
(PRPUNITS.PXDB) resides.With the browse button one can alter it.
User Guide 72
The 'free format number' option sets the precision for all inputs and output data to free.
2.2.2.7 Equipment
This option defines the default values for the Pipeline and Tubing Roughness that will be
used in the Equipment Data.
2.2.2.8 VPC
VPC stands for Valve Performance Clearinghouse.
73
PROSPER
For members of the VPC consortium, access to the VPC gas lift valve database is
established through this screen.
2.2.3 Software Key Maintenance
The Software Key command activates the Petroleum Experts Remote Utility. This
program allows the user to see what programs are currently enabled, their expiry date,
and user authorisation codes and key number - as can be seen in the screen shot
below.
This utility is also used to enter the authorisation codes that will update or activate the
software key where necessary. For reasons of security, Petroleum Experts normally
sends an inactive software device with the application program. The codes needed to
activate or update the software key are sent separately by e-mail.
User Guide 74
This utility is also used to update the software key and to view versions. Software keys
must be updated when new programs or modules are required or the key expiry date
changed.
Entering the Authorisation Code
To enter the authorisation codes, click the Update button. The following screen will
appear:
75
PROSPER
Enter the codes that have been received from Petroleum Experts from left to right
beginning with the top row. The easiest way to do this is to use the Paste button to copy
the codes from the email sent by Petroleum Experts.
Press Continue to activate the codes or Cancel to quit the code update.
Updating the Software Protection Key
Access to the software automatically ceases when the license expiry date has elapsed.
The user is however, reminded several days in advance, which gives sufficient time to
contact Petroleum Experts to obtain update codes.
This occurs when either:
The software license trial period has ended.
The annual software maintenance fee is due.
Software protection keys also need updating when one acquires new Petroleum
User Guide 76
Experts software packages. The procedure for updating the software key is the same
as described above. When the appropriate screen appears, enter the codes provided -
from left to right beginning with the top row. Press OK to activate the codes, or Cancel
to quit the update. To view the expiry date for any of the enabled programs, click on the
software title.
When receiving new codes, always update every key that belongs to the company.
Subsequent updates may fail if all previously issued codes have not been properly
entered into the key.
One can view the software key driver versions by clicking on the Versions button. The
following screen will appear.
2.2.4 FileList
Use this screen to search for PROSPER files anywhere in the system.
Browse a directory, then enter the Patter (file format, for example: *.OUT to load all the
PROSPER files) and then Load Files to visualise all the PROSPER files contained within
the selected directory. Information about the files will be imported as well.
77
PROSPER
2.2.5 Evaluate OpenServer Statement
This option can be used to test the OpenServer commands and variables. In the
'Evaluate OpenServer' screen a field is available where to input the OS string, which
can correspond to a parameter or to a command:
User Guide 78
Type or Paste the OS string in the String field, then select one of basic OS commands
(DoGet, DoSet, DoCommand), if required enter the 'Value' (valid only if using DoSet)
and click Evaluate to perform the function.
In the 'Returned value' it is possible to read the results of the operation.
The buttons Commands, Variables and Functions will access the lists of the strings of
the commands, input/output variables and functions
In the string lists screen it is possible to search for strings by using the Search
function
79
PROSPER
2.2.6 User Correlations
PROSPER has been designed to accept outside calculation modules for fluid flow
correlations, Equation of State PVTP calculations, choke models (pressure loss through
restrictions), inflow performance calculations, HSP Gas Derating models and viscosity
models. Users can obtain an authoring kit from Petroleum Experts to enable the
building of a compatible Dynamic Link Library for use in PROSPER.
.
MODEL EXTENSION
Flow Correlation .COR
Equation of State PVTP Model .EOS
Choke Correlation .CHK
Inflow Performance Model .RSM
HSP Gas DeRating Model .GDR
Viscosity Model .VSM
User Guide 80
Before a DLL can be accessed, it must first be installed into PROSPER. This is done by
clicking File | User Correlations.
Select either Flow Correlation, Equation of State Model, Choke Correlation,
Inflow Performance Model, HSP Gas DeRating Model or Viscosity Model.
PROSPER will display a list of the currently installed DLLs of the selected type. To add a
correlation, click Add and select the appropriate file from the file dialogue. Click OK
and it will be imported into PROSPER
Information about particular correlations (name, phases and flow regimes modelled,
etc.) can be obtained by clicking the Info button. A screen similar to the following will be
displayed.
81
PROSPER
2.2.7 Printer Setup
The following section details how a printer can be configured to print hard copies of
exported data from PROSPER.
2.2.7.1 Preparing to Print
There must be a properly installed and connected printer in order to print.
User Guide 82
The Printer Setup command of the File menu allows to select a printer and define its
set-up options.
2.2.7.2 Selecting and configuring a Printer
Select the correct printer from the list box provided. Only printers that have been
installed under Windows will be displayed.
The configuration of the printer follows the exact guidelines of any other software running
under Windows.
2.2.7.3 Printing Export Data
Prior to printing export data, it is always a good idea to save the data file(s). In the
unlikely event that a printer error or some other unforeseen problem occurs, this simple
procedure could prevent the work from being lost.
To print export data, select the Output menu and the Export option. Select the
sections to report on the dialogue box. The program will lead the user through a series
of input screens to set up the required report sections. From the main dialogue box,
select a destination for reporting data.
83
PROSPER
The appearance of printed reports is controlled by the export data set-up options that
have been set.
Click Setup to display the following screen:
Select a suitable font and set the margins etc. that will be used for printed export data.
Only non-proportional fonts are allowed in reports to maintain vertical alignment of the
columns.
The PROSPER default font is recognised by most print set-ups. To
User Guide 84
avoid potential printing problems, always set up the system to use a font
that is supported on the system prior to printing PROSPER export data
for the first time.
Click OK to return to the output screen. Clicking Print initiates generation of the export
data and sends it to the selected destination.
Export data can be sent to the following entities:
Printer
The primary printer as set up under Windows
TM
File Creates an ASCII data file and saves it. Clicking Print will
display a dialogue box that requests a file name and
destination. Enter a suitable file name (the program
automatically appends a ".PRN" extension) and click OK to
save the file. The Fixed Format option saves a file in a
printer ready format that can be imported into a DOS based
word processor or text editor. Use the Tab Delimited format
to save a file suitable for importing directly into a
spreadsheet such as EXCEL.
Clipboard Clicking Print after selecting this option copies the data onto
the Windows clipboard. From the Clipboard, can view, edit
and paste the data directly into another Windows application.
E.g. a word processing program. Tab delimited data can
be pasted directly into spreadsheets.
Screen Clicking Print after selecting this option allows to view the
report on the screen. Scroll through the data using the
scrolling thumbs or arrows. When finished viewing, click OK
to return to the main menu.
2.2.7.4 Selecting an Exported Data to Print
It is not necessary to be in PROSPER to print a report. Provided to have previously
generated a report file (*.PRN), a report can be easily opened and imported into any
word or spreadsheet program. If the Tab Delimited option was selected, this will allow
the user to easily create tables and/or format the data using a word processor.
2.2.8 Word Processing in PROSPER
The WordPad command on the File menu gives direct access to the Windows word
processing package. This application can be used to make notes of the current
analysis for later inclusion in reports. If no alternative word processing package is
available, it is possible to use WordPad to edit, format and print the reports.
85
PROSPER
2.2.9 Clipboard Command
The Clipboard command on the File menu gives direct access to the Windows
clipboard viewer. This feature is useful for checking data input or intermediate results
from e.g. gas lift design calculations that are written to the clipboard by PROSPER.
2.2.10 Command Buttons
The following command buttons are used in PROSPER.
All
This command button is used in the Equipment and Gas Lifted (safety
equipment) option screens. It will select all input parameters and data
points for automated editing.
Calculate
Performs the various calculations on the input parameters for the
correlations selected.
Cancel
Returns to the previous screen. Any changes or modifications will be
ignored by the system.
Continue
Continues to the next input screen. Any changes to the fields will be saved
and retained in memory for later calculations. A warning message will be
displayed when fields requiring input data are left blank.
Copy
To copy existing data points, select the line entries to duplicate and click
on Copy. Next, select the destination line(s) and click on Copy again.
Subsequent line entries will be not be overwritten by this operation.
Correlati
o
n
s
Displays the results of any matching performed under the VLP/IPR Match
option.
Delete
This command button is used in the Equipment and Gas Lifted (safety
equipment) option screens. It allows to delete individual or several data
points.
To delete, select the line entries to erase and click on Delete. If one
wishes to delete all
existing line entries, click All and then Delete. The program will clear the
input screen.
Done
Returns to the previous menu. Any changes or modifications will be
retained in memory by the program.
Edit
This command button is used in the main Equipment screen. One or more
items can be modified at a time. When used with 'All', all items will be
selected for editing.
Export
Brings up the Data Export interface. This will be specific to the data on the
active window.
Help Provides on screen help for PROSPER. For general information, press the
User Guide 86
'ALT' and 'H' keys together in the Main menu, or the Index button under any
help screen. Specific help screens are also available for each window.
Import
Calls up the general import interface that allows to grab data from any text
file. This button will usually be found where tabular data is to be input.
Insert
This allows to add one or several data points providing there are sufficient
entry fields. Select the line number where to add a new entry and click on I
nsert. The program will move existing line entries down to accommodate
the inserted line(s).
Main
Returns to the Main Application Menu. Any changes or modifications will
be saved and retained in memory by the program.
Match
Displays a variable screen where match data can be entered in order to
adjust existing correlations to fit real data.
Move
Allows to re-arrange data points. Select the line(s) to transfer and click on
Move. Next, select the destination line(s) and click on Move again.
Subsequent line entries will be moved down to accommodate the
transferred line(s).
Plot
Plots any calculated results and displays them on screen. Hard copies of
the screen display can be printed by selecting the Hardcopy command
button on the Plot screen.
Recall
Allows to recall an existing file. The user will be prompted for the directory
and name of the file.
Report
Calls up the reporting interface with a report that is specific to the active
window. This is generally found on windows that display the results of
calculations. It is then possible to choose to print this report. The report is
generated from a system report template.
Reset
Resets the 'Match parameters' in order to reinstate the original textbook
correlations.
Save
Saves a current file. If this is a new data file, the user will be prompted for
a file name.
Summar
y
Displays a summary screen of the input equipment parameters or system
units.
The following command buttons are used in the Plot Menu and Plot screens.
Clipboard
Sends black and white or colour copies of the screen plot to the
Windows Clipboard where it may be retrieved by a word processing
program for inclusion in reports.
Colours
Allows to define the screen display colours of plot labels, scales, grids,
etc.
Finish Returns to the previous menu or screen.
87
PROSPER
Hardcopy
Generates black and white or colour print copies of the screen plot. It
is automatically sent to the device selected.
Labels
Allows to label plots. All plot labels are stored in memory and saved
when Output files are generated.
Replot Re-displays the original screen.
Scales
Allows to re-define the minimum and maximum values for the X and Y
plot axes.
2.3 Data Input - General
This section describes the PROSPER main menu and the input data required before an
analysis can be performed. Data should be entered by working through the PROSPER
menus following the logic order from left to right and top to bottom. The following menus
are described in this section:
Main menu
Options menu
2.3.1 PROSPER Main Menu
All PROSPER functions are listed as menu options. Simply select the required menu
and choose an item from the list displayed. This will activate an option or display the
relevant screen.
Problem solving with PROSPER is approached systematically by working from left to
right through the main menu. Calculation menus are activated only when the necessary
input data has been entered.
To start PROSPER, select the appropriate icon and press or double-click the program
icon. A screen similar to the following will appear:
User Guide 88
The menu options across the top of the screen are the PROSPER main menu options.
Each is described below.
2.3.1.1 File
The File menu is a management menu with commands that enables to open, save or
create new data files.
It is possible to use this menu to define the default data directory, printer set-ups options
and hook in external DLLs. A facility for accessing other Windows programs via
PROSPER is also provided.
More information on on the options in this menu can be found in Section 2.2.
2.3.1.2 Options
The Options menu is the starting point of PROSPER and the key to the program.
Use this menu to define the application and principal well features such as - prediction
method, artificial lift type and fluid type. The options selected are unique to the current
file and apply until changed by the user, or another file is recalled. These options also
determine the subsequent screens, menus and commands that are displayed.
89
PROSPER
2.3.1.3 PVT
The PVT menu is used to define well fluid properties and select fluid property
correlations.
PVT correlations can be modified to match laboratory-measured data using a non-
linear regression technique. Alternatively, detailed PVT data may be entered in tables
or a characterised composition can be imported for use with an Equation of State
model.
2.3.1.4 System
The System menu is used to define the well's down-hole and surface equipment as well
as the reservoir inflow performance.
When applicable, equipment data for artificial lift methods are also entered in this menu.
2.3.1.5 Matching
The Matching menu allows comparison of field data with calculated pressure drops in
well tubing and surface piping. All available correlations can be compared to allow
selection of the model that best suits the field conditions.
The QUICKLOOK feature is used to troubleshoot existing artificial lift installations.
2.3.1.6 Calculation
The Calculation menu provides the user with the relevant calculation options.
Calculations to determine well performance, pressure and temperature profiles in the
wellbore, to perform sensitivity analyses, carry out gradient comparisons and generate
lift curve tables are available in this menu.
2.3.1.7 Design
ESP, HSP, PCP, Jet Pumps, Sucker Rod Pumps, Multiphase Pumps sizing as well as
gas lift mandrel placement and valve setting pressure calculations, coiled tubing and
diluents injection are available from the Design menu. Access to the databases that
hold gas lift valves, ESP, HSP, PCP, Jet pumps, Sucker Rod Pumps equipment
characteristics is via the Design menu also.
2.3.1.8 Output
The Output menu is used to generate reports, to export data and to plot data. Report
templates are provided and user templates can also be defined. The data used can be
User Guide 90
input data, analysis data, results or plots. Reports can be saved in various file formats
(RTF, TXT and native) and can be displayed or sent to a printer. Export data can be
viewed on screen, sent to the Windows clipboard, sent to a printer or saved in a file.
Plots can be printed directly, saved to a report file or a Windows metafile. Selected
plots can also be sent to the clipboard where they can be retrieved by other Windows-
based programs.
2.3.1.9 Wizard
This menu accesses the wizard area of PROSPER. This allows to Create/Edit and Run
wizards that allow the user to build and run models in a step-by-step guided fashion.
2.3.1.10Units
This menu is used to define the input and output units of measurement. A flexible
system of units is provided allowing the user to customise the internal units system.
2.3.1.11Help
Provides on-line help for PROSPER. The user can get help on specific tasks, fields or
commands. Help is also given on the keyboard and miscellaneous Windows
commands.
2.3.2 Options - Options Selection
The Options menu is used to define the characteristics of the well. The options
selected establish the input data required and the calculation options available. The
selections made apply to the current session. The data entry screens, input fields and
variables are limited to those relevant to the particular application. Input options may be
changed at any stage of the processing. New choices may require other information to
be supplied. Therefore the user is advised to ensure that all relevant input is still valid
for the new option selection.
To access the Options menu, point to the menu name and click the mouse or press
ALT+O.
The following data entry screen will appear:
91
PROSPER
The entry screen is divided in two main sections - System options and User
information.
Under the System options section, the user will define the well characteristics such as
fluid type, well completion, lift method, etc. These selections determine the information
that will be required to be entered later. The lower section of the screen comprises of
the header information and comments that identify the well and will appear on the report
and screen plot titles.
Option Selection
To select an option, click on the arrow to the right of the required field. The list of
available choices will be displayed.
User Guide 92
2.3.2.1 Fluid Description
2.3.2.1.1 Fluid Type
Oil and Water (Black Oil Model or Compositional)
Oil and/or Water fluids
Dry and Wet Gas (Black Oil Model or Compositional)
Dry and Wet Gas is handled under the assumption that condensation occurs at
the separator and not within the modelled system. The liquid is put back into the
gas as an equivalent gas quantity. The pressure drop is therefore calculated on
the basis of a single-phase gas, unless water is present.
Retrograde Condensate (Black Oil Model or Compositional)
This fluid type accounts for the condensate drop out in the tubing.
2.3.2.1.2 Method
Black Oil
This option uses industry standard Black Oil models. Six correlations are
available for oil producers. For retrograde condensate systems an internally
developed model is used. These correlations can be adjusted to match
measured data using non-linear regression.
Equation of State
The reservoir fluid is modelled by pseudo components having user-specified
properties. The two equation of state models Peng-Robinson and Soave-
Redlich-Kwong are available in PROSPER to predict PVT properties.
User EoS DLLs can also be linked into PROSPER.
2.3.2.1.3 Equation of State Setup
This button is active when Equation of State Method has been selected and can be
used to access all of the options related to the use of the Equation of State:
EoS Model (Peng-Robinson or Soave-Redlich-Kwong)
Optimisation Mode (None, Low and Medium)
Volume Shift enable/disable
Reference Pressure and Temperature
Path to Surface and Recycle: Flash Straight to Stock Tank, Use
Separator Train, Use K values
93
PROSPER
Target GOR Method (Use Separator Fluids or Use Fluid from PSAT)
More information on the setup of the Equation of State Method is given in the EoS Model
Setup Section.
2.3.2.1.4 Separator
The path a fluid takes to surface will define certain properties such as the GOR, gas
gravity and oil gravity. Depending upon the PVT model, different options are available to
use.
Black Oil Models (Oil and Water)
The input data for black oil corrections assume that a single GOR, gas gravity and oil
gravity are known. Therefore, if more than one stage of separation has been reported
these values must be converted into a single GOR and an average gas gravity
(representative for this single GOR) in order to satisfy the equations.
For an 'Oil and Water' model, the separation options are:
Single Stage - Enter a single value of GOR, Gas Gravity and Oil Gravity
Two Stage - Enter separator and tank values for GOR and Gas Gravity and a single
value for Oil Gravity. The GOR and Gas Gravity are then combined internally by
PROSPER to calculate the equivalent single stage values.
If the black oil data is only available as a multi-stage separation results these can be
converted to either single stage or two-stage outside of the program and then brought in
using the logic shown below.The separation train to be converted has 3 stages (2
separators and the tank) as shown below:
User Guide 94
If the gas properties are to be converted to an equivalent single stage
separation, this can be done using the equations shown below:
Alternatively, the two separation stages can be converted together to be inserted as
part of a two stage separation:
95
PROSPER
Black Oil Models (Dry and Wet Gas)
For a 'Dry and Wet Gas' model, the properties must be entered as a Single Stage
separation. The equations shown above can be used to calculate the total GOR and
average Gas Gravity if only multi-stage separation data is available.
Black Oil Models (Retrograde Condensate)
The 'Retrograde Condensate' model must have fluid properties entered as a multi-stage
separation. For more details on this input please refer to the Retrograde Condensate
PVT Input Section.
Equation of State Method
When using the Equation of State method for defining PVT, up to 10 stages of
separation can be inserted in the EoS Options Screen. For more information on this
screen, please refer to the following EoS Setup Section.
2.3.2.1.5 Emulsions
No or Emulsion +Pump viscosity correction
Select Emulsion + Pump viscosity correction to allow input of Emulsion
viscosity in the PVT section. This option must be selected to turn on pump
viscosity corrections. This option allows for the changes in viscosity of shear
dependent (non-Newtonian) fluids to be modelled as they travel through;
tubing, casing and pumps.
2.3.2.1.6 Hydrates
Disable Warning or Enable Warning
Select Enable Warning to allow flagging of different PVT formation in
calculation screens. Warnings can be enables for Hydrate Formation, Salt
Precipitation, Wax Appearance, Asphaltenes and Scale Production. To use
User Guide 96
this feature, go to the PVT section and enter or import the relevant formation
table.
2.3.2.1.7 Water Viscosity
Use Default Correlation or Use Pressure Corrected Correlation
When the default correlation is used, the water viscosity will be sensitive to
the water salinity and temperature. When the pressure corrected correlation
is used, the water viscosity will be sensitive to the water salinity, temperature
and pressure.
The correlations used to predict water properties (e.g. viscosity) can be found in
McCain's "Properties of Petroleum Fluids" in the 'Oil Field Waters' chapter.
The Pressure corrected model is based on Fig, 24-8, Bradley et al., Petroleum
Engineering Handbook, SPE, Dallas, 1987.
The viscosities of oilfield waters at reservoir conditions are low, virtually always less
than one centipoise. Water Viscosity does not vary greatly with pressure because the
small amount of gas dissolved in the water has small effect on its viscosity.
2.3.2.1.8 Viscosity model
By default the fluid modelled within PROSPER is considered to be a Newtonian fluid. By
this we mean that the viscosity does not change as a shear force is applied to it. If
desired, non-Newtonian effects can be modelled by selecting 'Non-Newtonian' and
entering in the PVT section rheologic properties of the fluid.
More information on the Non-Newtonian fluid modelling option and inputs can be found
in the following Section.
2.3.2.1.9 Water Vapour
No Calculation or Calculate Condensed Water Vapour
This option is available for 'Dry and Wet Gas' and 'Retrograde Condensate'
fluid types with PVT Black Oil model. If Calculate Condensed Water Vapour
is selected, the condensation of water vapour will be taken into account when
performing pressure drop calculation.
The calculated moisture contents of natural gases is based on the equations of
Bukacek (Equilibrium Moisture Content of Natural Gases, Research Bulletin Vol 8,
Institute of Gas Technology, Chicago USA, 1955).
The correlation on which these calculations are based is accurate to within five percent.
This was developed for dry gases. The presence of heavier hydrocarbons in wet gases
and retrograde condensates increases the water content by as much as ten percent at
1000 psia and twenty percent at 10,000 psia.
97
PROSPER
2.3.2.2 Well
2.3.2.2.1 Flow Type
Tubing Flow
This option models flow through a circular cross sectional area (flow in tubing/
pipe)
Annular Flow
This option models production up the casing / tubing annulus
Tubing +Annular Flow
This option models production up the tubing, the annulus space, or tubing and
annulus simultaneously. With this option, it is possible to specify precisely
where in the well annular or tubing flow is to be carried out.
2.3.2.2.2 Well Type
Producer
This option is used to model production wells
Injector
This is a generic injector well. The fluid to be injected can be specified by the
user. Gas, Steam, Water and CO2 injectors can be modelled by selecting this option
and selecting the appropriate fluid type.
Water Injector
Injection of single-phase water
The best approach to model CO
2
Injection is to use an Equation Of State PVT Model
and set the Fluid Type as "Retrograde Condensate" and not "Dry And Wet Gas". The
reason for this is that the "Dry And Wet Gas" models considers the fluid as a single
phase throughout the entire system and modifies the gas properties to account for the
condensate. The "Retrograde Condensate" model assumes multiphase flow modelling
allowing for gas and/or liquid phases to be present anywhere in the system (depending
on the prevailing pressure and temperature).
For a fully worked tutorial which details the steps required to build a CO
2
injector well,
please refer to Tutorial 40.
N.B. In CO
2
Injection, depending on the conditions of pressure and temperature, it is
possible to have phase changes somewhere in the system (Gas-.Liquid->Gas)
The Gray (and Modified Gray) correlation uses its own internal PVT calculator that
overrides the Prosper-calculated PVT properties and therefore this should not be used
to model CO
2
Injection.
User Guide 98
2.3.2.3 Artificial Lift
2.3.2.3.1 Method
The following artificial lift options are available when Oil is selected as a fluid type.
None
No artificial Lift selected
Gas Lift (continuous)
Three different approaches are provided. Annular gas lift is handled by
PROSPER. If the Flow Type is Annular Flow and a Gas Lift method is selected,
then PROSPER automatically switches to model gas injection down the tubing,
and production up the annulus.
An ESP installation can be analysed or designed using this option
Hydraulic Drive Downhole Pump
A HSP installation can be analysed or designed using this option
Progressive Cavity Pumps
A PCP installation can be analysed or designed using this option
Coiled Tubing Gas Lift
Coiled Tubing with gas lift can be analysed or designed using this option
Diluent Injection
Injection of a given rate of diluent in the tubing can be modelled. This option also
allows gas lift to be injected at a different depth to the diluent if the option is selected.
J et Pump
A Jet Pump installation can be analysed or designed using this option
Multiphase Pump
Framo multiphase pump can be analysed using this option
Sucker Rod Pumps
A Sucker Rod Pump installation can be analysed and designed
Gas Lift (Intermittent)
PROSPER can be used to design and model the performance of wells with
intermittent gas lift

2.3.2.3.2 Type
If Gas Lift is the chosen method, then the following types are available:
No Friction Loss In
Annulus
It is the classic approach for the annulus gas gradient. The
pressure drop due to friction in the annulus is ignored and
the gas gradient is determined by the top casing pressure
99
PROSPER
and the temperature profile.
Friction Loss In
Annulus
The pressure drop due to friction in the annulus is taken into
account, but the top casing pressure is assumed constant.
If this option is selected the tubing equipment screens will
automatically change and require tubing OD and casing ID
data to be entered.
Safety Equipment
Surface delivery lines, chokes, the gas lift injection string
and safety valves in the annulus are taken into account. Top
casing pressures will change with injection rate.
If Electrical Submersible Pump is the chosen method, then the following types are
available.
Model Produced Oil
Only
This option will model only the fluid which passes through
the pump and up the tubing above it. Any gas separated at
the pump will be passed to surface but not be modelled.
Model Produced Oil
and Gas In Annulus
In addition to the fluid in the tubing above the pump being
modelled, any gas which is separated at the pump inlet is
also modelled as it travels up the annulus. This allows the
liquid level in the well to be calculated from a given casing
head pressure or the casing head pressure from a given
liquid level.
If Hydraulic Drive Downhole Pump is the chosen method, then the following types
are available.
Commingled Annular
Supply
The power fluid for the turbine is supplied via the annulus
and returns to surface, commingled with the produced fluid
via the tubing.
Commingled Tubing
Supply
The power fluid for the turbine is supplied via the tubing and
returns to surface, commingled with the produced fluid via
the annulus.
Closed Loop Supply
The power fluid for the turbine is supplied via the outer
annulus and returns to surface via the inner annulus. The
reservoir fluid is produced through the tubing. There is no
commingling of produced and power fluids.
If Progressive Cavity Pump is the chosen method, then the following types are
available.
Sucker Rod Drive
The program will assume to have a surface drive head from
which require rods in order to move the rotor across the
pump.
Downhole Motor Drive
The program assumes to have a downhole motor instead of
surface drive motor.
User Guide 100
Sucker Rod Drive -
Gas In Annulus
As with 'Sucker Rod Drive' only now any gas which is
separated at the pump is modelled as it travels up the
annulus. This allows the liquid level in the well to be
calculated from a given casing head pressure or the casing
head pressure from a given liquid level.
Motor Drive - Model
Gas In Annulus
As with 'Downhole Motor Drive' only now any gas which is
separated at the pump is modelled as it travels up the
annulus. This allows the liquid level in the well to be
calculated from a given casing head pressure or the casing
head pressure from a given liquid level.
If Coiled Tubing Gas Lift is the chosen method, then the following types are available.
No Friction Loss in
Coiled Tubing
Friction losses along the coiled tubing are neglected.
Friction Loss in Coiled
Tubing
Friction losses along the coiled tubing are accounted for.
If Diluent Injection is the chosen method, then the following types are available:
Tubing Injection-
Annular Production
The power fluid is injected in the tubing and the production
flows through the annulus
Annular Injection-
Tubing Production
The power fluid is injected in the annulus and the production
flows through the tubing
Tubing Injection with
Gas Lift
The diluent fluid is injected in the tubing and a depth of
injection for Gas Lift gas is also specified. Production flows
through the annulus.
Annular Injection with
Gas Lift
The diluent fluid is injected in the annulus and a depth of
injection for Gas Lift gas is also specified. Production flows
through the tubing.
If Jet Pump is the chosen method, then the following types are available:
Tubing Injection-
Annular Production
The power fluid is injected in the tubing and the production
flows through the annulus
Annular Injection-
Tubing Production
The power fluid is injected in the annulus and the production
flows through the tubing
If Multiphase Pump is the chosen method, then the following types are available:
Framo Pumps
101
PROSPER
2.3.2.4 Calculation Type
2.3.2.4.1 Predict
The program is capable of predicting either pressure only or pressure and temperature
changes simultaneously.
Pressure Only
If this option is selected, the flowing fluid temperature profile must be entered.
This calculation option is fast and can provide accurate pressure profiles,
however, it does not account for changes of temperature due to variation of
operating conditions.
Pressure and Temperature (On Land and Offshore)
This option will calculate both pressure and temperature profiles using the
method specified in Temperature Model. When using the 'Rough
Approximation' or 'Improved Approximation' there is no difference between
the on-land or offshore options. When using the 'Enthalpy Balance model', a
flowing sea gradient is required for an offshore completion.
2.3.2.4.2 Model
Three models for temperature calculations are available:
Rough Approximation
Calculates the heat loss from the well to the surroundings using an overall
heat transfer coefficient, the temperature difference between the fluids and
the surrounding formation and the average heat capacity of the well fluids.
The geothermal gradient entry screen is used to input formation
temperatures (e.g. from logging runs) at measured depth points. A minimum
of the bottom hole and well head temperatures are required. Temperatures
entered should be the extrapolated static temperatures, and should not be
confused with the entry of measured flowing temperatures required for the
Predicting pressure only case.
The Rough Approximation temperature model requires calibration using
measured temperature data. This can be done as part of the VLP/IPR
Matching process described in the following Section.
Enthalpy Balance
This rigorous thermodynamic model considers heat transfer by conduction,
radiation, and forced and free convection. Heat transfer coefficients are
calculated using values held in a user-definable database. The temperature
prediction calculations are transient, allowing sensitivities against flowing
User Guide 102
time to be run. This temperature model requires considerably more input
data and computation time for either 'Predicting Pressure Only' or the 'Rough
Approximation' temperature model.
The production riser is properly taken into account. Therefore the heat loss
prediction between the seabed and wellhead will be accurate. Due to
increased computation times we recommend that this option be used only
when temperature prediction rather than pressure loss is the required result
(for e.g. process calculations and material selection).
The 'Enthalpy Balance' temperature model is capable of accurate flowing
temperature prediction for a wide range of conditions.
The temperature prediction is useful for generating temperature profiles in:
long pipelines
subsea wells
predicting temperature/pressure profiles to help predict wax/
hydrate deposits.
These models also account for Joule-Thompson Effects.
The temperature calculation must commence from a known condition. This is
usually the reservoir pressure and temperature. As a consequence,
calculating from a downstream node (unknown temperature) to an upstream
node (known temperature) is not meaningful
Improved Approximation
As the 'Enthalpy Balance' model, this is also a full enthalpy balance pressure
and temperature prediction model, with the difference that the term of the
enthalpy balance concerning the heat exchange with the surroundings (which
includes free and forced convection, conduction and radiation) is simplified
by a heat loss term characterised by an overall heat exchange coefficient.
For this reason data related to the completion hardware and thermal
properties are not necessary.
Like any enthalpy balance model, Joule-Thomson Effect is also accounted
for.
These characteristics make this model particularly useful when an accurate
calculation of temperature is sought for and only a few data on the completion
are available.
The geothermal gradient entry screen is used to input formation temperatures
(e.g. from logging runs) at measured depth points. A temperature gradient in
the sea can be entered for offshore applications. A minimum of the surface
and first node temperatures are required. Temperatures entered should be
103
PROSPER
the extrapolated static temperatures, and should not be confused with the
entry of measured flowing temperatures required for the Predicting pressure
only case.
The Improved Approximation temperature model requires calibration using
measured temperature data and may not be accurate in a predictive mode.
2.3.2.4.3 Calculation
Full System
Calculations for pipelines, tubing and reservoir.
Pipeline Only
Calculations for pipelines only. For this option no IPR data is required.
2.3.2.4.4 Output
Show calculating Data
During a calculation, the results of each calculated value will be displayed as
soon as they have been calculated.
Hide calculating Data
The time it takes for the operating system to display the results between each
calculation means that PROSPER will have to wait until this is done before the
next calculation is carried out. While the time taken for each value to be
displayed is small, when a large number of calculations are being carried out, the
display time required to display all of the value can increase the overall time
taken for the calculation to be completed.
Select Hide to avoid having PROSPER wait for the results to be displayed
between calculations. The results will be displayed all together when the final
calculation is completed. This will automatically be set to Hide when run from
GAP.
2.3.2.5 Steam Calculation
When the fluid type is set to 'Oil and Water' and one of the enthalpy balance models
(Improved Approximation or Enthalpy Balance) is selected, the option to enable/disable
the steam calculations is available.
No Steam Calculations
Allow Steam Calculations
For more information on the Steam Calculations please refer to the Steam Properties
Section.
User Guide 104
2.3.2.6 Well Completion
2.3.2.6.1 Type
Cased Hole or Open Hole
This selection determines the appropriate IPR Completion models to use. In
particular 'Cased Hole' enables the availability of Skin models to calculate the
skin factor, whilst 'Open Hole' disables the availability of Skin models.
2.3.2.6.2 Sand Control
Five options are currently available:
None
Gravel Pack
Pre-Packed Screen
Wire Wrapped Screen
Slotted liners
The properties of the sand control method selected can then be inserted into the IPR
section.
For more information on these models please refer to the Sand Control Section.
2.3.2.7 Reservoir
2.3.2.7.1 Type
Single Branch
This option allows to model single branch IPRs. The IPR screen comes with
various standard inflow models from which the user selects one.
Multilateral Well
Enables the Multilateral IPR model. For the multi-lateral selection, the IPR screen
requires detailed drawing of the downhole completion.
2.3.2.7.2 Gas Coning
Yes or No
Rate dependant GOR will be modelled and calculated when Yes is selected.
This option is only available for Single Branch type wells.
105
PROSPER
2.3.2.8 User Information and Comments
These fields are optional. The details entered here provide the user information that
identifies the well model in the screen plots and printed reports. The 'Comments' area
is used to enter free format text describing the details of the analysis. A Date stamp
feature is provided to mark either the comment text or the header data for future
reference.
We recommend that comments be used to summarise any assumptions made in the
analysis. Whenever an existing model is modified, appending a summary of changes
and a date stamp will greatly assist current and future users working with the file. This
information can be displayed on the main PROSPER screen by selecting the appropriate
option in the Preferences Section (Main Screen Tab - Status screen option).
2.3.3 Options - Perforating Gun DataBase
Under Options | Perforating Database, a database for perforating guns is
accessible. The gun database initially originates from SPOT (Shell Perforating
Optimisation Tool) and permission was granted for its implementation into PROSPER.
User Guide 106
Like other databases in PROSPER, the user can add, delete and amend the inputs in the
gun database. A filter allows to select guns by:
- vendors,
- Gun OD
- Gun types
- Minimum restriction and
- Tolerance.
The following section was taken from the SPOT help file and is published with
permission from Shell:
The gun database contains API 19-B
1
and API RP 43 Section I Data for perforating
guns available from:
Baker Hughes Incorporated (Baker)
Schlumberger (SLB)
Halliburton/ Jet Research Centre (Hall/JRC)
Dynawell (DYNA)
Innicor Subsurface Technologies (INNICOR)
Owen Oil Tools (Owen)
Explosivos Technologicos Argentinos (ETA)
GEODynamics (GEODynamics)
Titan (TITAN)
Companies were provided with an opportunity to adjust/ update data in the SPOT Gun
Database. It is recommended that users cross check all critical information with the
appropriate perforating manufacturer/ service company before a gun type/ completion
method is selected.
Sections I to IV of API 19-B are summarised below:
Section I - firing a fully-loaded gun section under ambient conditions into a
standard casing and cement target;
Section II - firing a single charge under pressurised conditions into a stressed
rock sample;
Section III - firing a single charge into a metal target at elevated temperature;
Section IV - firing a single charge into a stressed rock sample under simulated
wellbore and reservoir conditions, then measuring the flow performance of the
107
PROSPER
perforated sample relative to its performance prior to shooting;
Section V
2
- measuring the amount of debris retained within a fired fully-loaded
gun section in order to calculate how much debris will be introduced into the
wellbore per foot of gun;
It should be noted that API RP43 preceded API RP19B. The American Petroleum
Institute (API) Perforating Subcommittee adopted API RP19B during November of
2000, and state that API 19B is the only document that API recognises as valid in this
program. As API 19B data is not available for all gun systems, API RP43 data has also
been included in the database (data sources are clearly marked). Although API RP43 is
not officially valid, Section 1 testing for both API RP43 and API 19B is based on
concrete targets.
As concrete is not representative of reservoir rock, API 19-B and API-RP 43 Section 1
data is converted to downhole conditions in SPOT using Shell proprietary correlations
(based on laboratory research). Although these correlations should provide a
reasonable estimate of perforation characteristics in reservoir rock under downhole
conditions, a better estimate of perforation performance can be obtained by conducting
reservoir specific Section II (firing a single charge under pressurised conditions into a
stressed rock sample) and/or Section IV tests (firing a single charge into a stressed
rock sample under simulated wellbore and reservoir conditions, then measuring the flow
performance of the perforated sample relative to its performance prior to shooting). If
Section II or Section IV data is available, it can be entered into the SPOT Vendor
Database under the Section II/Section IV Data heading.
If the concrete strength during the API RP 19B or API RP43 test is not recorded in the
Gun Database, in accordance with the minimum allowable strength specified in API RP
19B, a briquette strength of 5000psi is assumed in SPOT calculations.
___________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________
__
1. API Recommended Practice 19-B, Recommended Practice for the Evaluation
of Well Perforators, 1
st
Edition, 28 Sep 2001
2. To be introduced in the next revision of RP 19-B, a draft of which is with API for
review at the time of writing.
2.3.4 Options - Tubing DataBase
Under Options | Tubing Database, a comprehensive tubing data base is available in
PROSPER:
User Guide 108
The database is also accessible from the down hole equipment screen so that the user
can select any tubing from the database directly to be used for the description of the
down hole equipment.
Done Return to previous screen - continue with copy process ( if appropriate)
Cancel Return to previous screen
Copy
Copies the currently selected record to the Clipboard. If this dialogue is
invoked from the Downhole Equipment screen, then select done and you
will be presented with the following screen:
109
PROSPER
Select the appropriate action and press done to copy the selected record
to your downhole equipment.
Help View the help screen.
2.3.5 Options - Casing DataBase
Under Options | Casing Database, a comprehensive casing database is available in
PROSPER:
User Guide 110
The database lists casing manufacturer, type, specification, seal, Casing OD, casing
weight, Casing ID and wall thickness.
The database can be accessed from the down hole equipment input screen. From the
down hole equipment screen, the user can select any casing available in the database
and use it directly for the description of the well bore.
Done Return to previous screen - continue with copy process (if appropriate)
Copy
Copies the currently selected record to the clipboard. If this dialogue is
invoked from the Downhole Equipment screen, then select done and you
will be presented with the following screen:
111
PROSPER
Select the appropriate action and press done to copy the selected record
to your downhole equipment.
Help View the help screen.
2.3.6 Options - Pipe Schedule
Under Options | Pipe Schedule, a comprehensive pipe database is available in
PROSPER:
User Guide 112
The database lists nominal pipe size, pipe OD, Iron Pipe size, Steel schedule number,
wall thickness and pipe internal diameter.
The pipe database can be accessed from the surface equipment input screen. From
the surface equipment input screen, the user can select any pipe available in the
database and use it directly for the description of surface pipes.
Done
Return to previous screen - continue with copy process ( if
appropriate)
Copy
Copies the currently selected record to the clipboard. If this dialogue
is invoked from the Downhole Equipment screen, then select done
and you will be presented with the following screen:
113
PROSPER
Select the appropriate action and press done to copy the selected
record to your downhole equipment.
Help View this screen
2.4 PVT Data Input
2.4.1 Introduction
To predict pressure and temperature changes from the reservoir, along the well bore
and flow line tubular to the wellhead or manifold, it is necessary to accurately predict
fluid properties as a function of pressure and temperature. The user must enter data
that fully describes the fluid properties or enables the program to calculate them. There
are four possible approaches:
Correlations
User Guide 114
Where only basic PVT data is available, the program uses traditional black oil
correlations, such as Glaso, Beal, Petrosky etc. to calculate the fluid properties. A
unique black oil model is available for condensate fluids and details of this can be found
later in this manual.
Matching
Where both basic fluid data and some PVT laboratory measurements are available, the
program can modify the black oil correlations to best-fit the measured data using a non-
linear regression technique.
Tables
Where detailed PVT laboratory data is provided, PROSPER uses this data instead of
the calculated properties. This data is entered in table format (PVT tables), and can be
supplied either manually or imported from an outside source. So called black oil tables
can be generated from an EOS model and then be imported and used in PROSPER.

Use of Tables: Tables are usually generated using one fluid composition which
implies a single GOR for the fluid. This will therefore not provide the right fluid
description when we have injection of hydrocarbons in the reservoir or when
the reservoir pressure drops below the bubble/dew point. There is also a
danger that if the range of pressure and temperature is not wide enough the
program may have to extrapolate properties. This can lead to erroneous
properties being calculated.
Compositional
Where the full Equation of State description of the fluid is available and all of the PVT
can be obtained from a Peng-Robinson or a Soave Redlich Kwong description of the
fluid phase behaviour.
Use of EOS: The equations of state are models that need to be matched to
measured lab data (PVT lab report). Care has to be taken in order to make sure
that the EOS has been matched and is applicable for the range of Pressures
and Temperatures to be investigated.
The program also allows fluid properties to be calculated and plotted for specified
pressure and temperature ranges. The PVT menu has three options - Report, Input and
Export. Select Report to inspect previously entered data, Export to save data to a text
file, or Input to set up a new problem or edit an existing one.
Recommended Steps When Using Black Oil Correlations
Only Limited PVT Data Available (Minimum required for correlations)
115
PROSPER
Enter data as requested on PVT input data screen and select correlations
that are known to best fit the region or oil type.
Limited PVT Data and Laboratory Measured Data Available
Enter the basic black oil data requested in the PVT input data screen.
Enter PVT laboratory data in the Match Data data menu. The laboratory PVT
data and the fluid properties entered on the data input screen must be
consistent. Flash Data must be used. Up to 50 tables of laboratory
measurements made at different temperatures may be entered. Use the 'up'
and 'down' buttons next to the 'Table Number' buttons to switch between
tables. Click Match to return to the PVT input screen.
At this point it is possible to match the PVT properties using a correlation and
plot the calculated and match data to see how closely the non-optimised
correlation fits.
Select Match All to perform a non-linear regression to find a best fit for each
correlation to the measured lab data. Once the calculation is finished, select
Parameters and identify the correlation that best fits the measured data.
This correlation should then be selected and this modified correlation will be
used in all further calculations of fluid property data. The fit parameters are
the multiplier and shift applied to the correlation in order to fit the lab data. If
the correlation were a perfect fit to the match data, Parameter 1 would be set
to 1.0 and Parameter 2 would be zero.
In order to see how well the tuned correlations fit the data, on the regression
screen there is plot utility, which will plot the variable values from the matched
correlations, and the data entered simultaneously, to allow the user to see
how good the fit is. Select Plot to display both the calculated and measured
PVT data.
For a step-by-step example of how to match the PVT for an oil well, please refer to
Tutorial 05 in the Examples Guide.
2.4.2 Black Oil - Oil and Water
2.4.2.1 Input Data
Select the PVT Input option from the main menu to display the following PVT Input data
screen:
User Guide 116
Enter the required data in the fields provided. Movement from one box to another can
be done using the TAB key. Next, select a Pb, Rs and Bo correlation and a viscosity
correlation to use then click OK.
Enter the oil solution GOR. This should not include free gas production. For
gas production in wells producing injection or gas cap gas the solution GOR
should still be entered. The balance of free gas production is accounted for
elsewhere.
Mole Percent CO2, N2 and H2S refers to the separator gas stream composition. The
impurities are used to correct the Z factor of the gas on the basis of the Wichert Aziz
modifications for CO2, N2 and H2S.
When an "Oil and Water" model is used to describe the fluid, the viscosity
correlation used by default for gas viscosity calculations is the Lee correlation.
For some details about the input parameters, refer to the Glossary (Appendix E).
117
PROSPER
2.4.2.1.1 Black Oil Compressibility Calculation
Water compressibility is a function of salinity, temperature, and the volume with
respect to pressure (reservoir pressure in this instance).
Specifying the water salinity and any impurities (H2S, CO2 and N2) allows black oil
correlations to generate PVT parameters: specifically the water FVF (Bw).
From the water FVF the compressibility of water is directly back calculated (cw).
The equations used for the water FVF are those available in the following two papers:
o Craft & Hawkins (1959), page 131, Petroleum Reservoir Engineering
o Numbere, Brigham, and Standing (Nov 1977), page 16, physical properties of
petroleum reservoir brines, by the petroleum institute of Stanford university.
The conversion from Bw to Cw is as follows;
2.4.2.2 Tables
In PROSPER the PVT data can also be entered as tables by clicking Tables from the
main PVT input screen. Up to fifty separate tables may be entered, each at a different
temperature. The program will use the data from the tables in all further calculations
provided the 'Use Tables' option has been selected on the input data screen. This
option should be used only when extensive table data is available for a range of
temperatures.
PROSPER interpolates the entered table data and if the entered data is
incomplete (i.e. one table containing only a single row of values) this will result
in interpolation errors.
One of the conditions at which the properties are entered MUST be standard
conditions.
User Guide 118
IMPORTANT: Tables are usually generated using one fluid composition which
implies a single GOR for the fluid. This will therefore not provide the right fluid
description when we have injection of hydrocarbons in the reservoir or when
the reservoir pressure drops below the bubble/dew point. There is also a
danger that if the range of pressure and temperature is not wide enough the
program may have to extrapolate properties. This can lead to erroneous
properties being calculated.
Rather than entering the values by hand, PROSPER can read in tables of Black Oil PVT
properties. To do this, click the Import button from the Tables screen, and PROSPER will
prompt for the name of an ASCII file containing the PVT data. Petroleum Experts
PVT Package PVTp can be used to calculate and export Black Oil PVT tables.
An example of the PVT Table import file format is given in Appendix D.
Data can be imported from an ASCII file using the Import function. Information on how
to import the data using this function can be found in Appendix F - Importing Data from
Text Files.
2.4.2.3 Match Data
Click the Match Data button and enter PVT laboratory measured data to match to as
shown on the example screen below:
Since gas evolution in the tubing is a constant composition process, Flash data, and not
119
PROSPER
differential liberation data, should be used for matching. For each match data table,
enter the temperature and bubble point, then enter pressure versus gas oil ratio, oil FVF
and oil viscosity. Where data is incomplete or not available, leave the field blank. Use
the GOR and FVF at bubble point plus the viscosity if available. Enter only the minimum
number of points to ensure a good match.
Where only differential liberation PVT data is available, a PVT simulation
program like Petroleum Experts' PVT package PVTp can be used to
calculate the flash properties using a model that has been matched to the lab
data.
Better results for sparse laboratory PVT data sets are usually obtained using
correlations matched to the available lab data rather than using a PVT table lookup.
A full step-by-step guide to perform this PVT Matching can be found in Tutorial 05 in
Section 3 of the this Guide.
2.4.2.4 Regression
This function is used to perform the non-linear regression, which adjusts the correlations
to best-fit laboratory measured PVT data. The non-linear regression matching
technique can be used on up to five PVT match tables, each with a different
temperature. The following PVT properties can be used as match variables:
Pb Bubble point pressure.
GOR Gas oil ratio versus pressure.
Oil FVF Oil formation volume factor versus pressure.
Oil viscosity Oil viscosity versus pressure.
It is not necessary to match on all properties for all applications. In cases where the
PVT data is incomplete or of poor quality, better results can often be obtained by
matching on the best characterised parameters only. However, because bubble point
can be difficult to accurately predict from correlations, it is recommended that, where
possible, it is used as a match parameter.
The form of the correlations for FVF is different above and below the bubble
point. If the FVF at bubble point is not available, the regression may not
achieve good results. When matching the oil FVF, always enter data at the
bubble point. Do not enter many match points only use the minimum number
to define the shape of the correlation curves. In most cases, only data at the
bubble point is required.
User Guide 120
The minimum data required to match an oil is the solution GOR and the bubble
point at a given temperature.
2.4.2.4.1 Match
From the 'Regression' screen, individual correlations can be matched to selected
measured PVT data by:
Selecting the correlations
Selecting the fluid properties to match to
Clicking Match
2.4.2.4.1.1 Match All
All correlations can be matched to all the fluid property data in one keystroke by
selecting the Match All command button.
2.4.2.4.1.2 Plot
It is possible to view the closeness of the match by selecting Plot as this will bring up a
graph of the matched properties and the original test points to which it should be
matched.
Selecting Plot will bring up the option to view the plot By Pressure or By
Temperature.
Selecting By Temperature will plot the variables against pressure with a different curve
for each temperature table entered.
Selecting By Pressure will plot the variables against temperature with a different curve
for each value of pressure entered.
Once the plotting method has been selected, the variable to be viewed can be selected
in the bottom left hand corner of the screen:
121
PROSPER
2.4.2.4.1.3 Parameters
Having performed the matching process, the match parameters are displayed by
clicking the Parameters button. The non-linear regression technique applies a
multiplier (Parameter 1) and a shift (Parameter 2) to the correlations. The standard
deviation is also displayed, which represents the overall closeness of fit. The lower the
standard deviation, the better the fit. The best overall model is the one that has
Parameter 1 closest to unity.
The Parameters button displays the PVT correlations parameters screen. This shows
the match parameters and the standard deviation for each matched correlation. Use
these statistics to select the best correlation for the data set and conditions pertaining to
the application. A plot should be made and a visual check of the fit quality performed
before making the final correlation selection. This plot can be seen on the previous
'Regression' screen. The match parameters can be reset (i.e. returned to the
unmatched state) by selecting the reset option.
The following is an example of a correlation parameters screen:
User Guide 122
The standard correlations do not always accurately model the FVF above bubble point
(especially for heavy or waxy oils). Additional match parameters (Parameter 3 and 4)
have been introduced to allow the FVF to be independently tuned below (P1 and P2)
and above (P3 and P4) the bubble point.
In all circumstances, always enter match data at the bubble point to ensure that no
discontinuities occur.
2.4.2.5 Correlations
This options displays the match parameters and standard deviations for each matched
correlation. See the Match section for a more detailed explanation.
123
PROSPER
2.4.2.6 Calculate
In order to make a plot or listing of fluid property data, PROSPER must first calculate the
values over a specified range of temperatures and pressures. Using the calculated
data points, plots of fluid properties versus temperature or pressure can be generated.
The following is an example of the PVT 'Calculations' screen. If the correlations have
been matched, then the fluid properties will be calculated using the modified
correlations.
The calculation procedure is optional and used only to generate fluid property
data for display and quality control purposes. During the computation of a
pressure traverse, PROSPER calculates fluid properties at each pressure and
temperature step or node as required by the application.
2.4.2.6.1 Calculating PVT Data
The Calculate button accesses the PVT calculator, which can be used to perform
calculation of PVT properties with varying pressure and temperature.
User Guide 124
To generate tables and plots of PVT data:
Select correlations (The correlation which best matches the test data should
be used.)
Select 'Automatic generation of Data Points'
Enter the temperature range and number of steps
Enter the pressure range and number of steps
Click Calculate to compute PVT data for the entire range of pressures and
temperatures required by the modelling application. The following calculation
screen will be displayed:
125
PROSPER
The PVT section can be used as a convenient calculator by entering user selected data
points, then entering specific temperatures and pressures to calculate fluid properties.
2.4.2.6.2 Displaying the Calculated Data on the screen
The calculated data is displayed on the screen as default. The options to choose the
calculated variables to be displayed are available by using 'Layou't button in the PVT
Calculation Results screen. Selecting Layout displays the list of all calculated variables
that can be selected to customise viewing.
User Guide 126
2.4.2.6.3 Plotting the Calculated Data
The calculated data can be displayed on a plot. The variables which are plotted, are
defined under the 'Variables' option on the plot. After performing a PVT calculation click
Plot from the PVT calculation screen and select to view either pressure or temperature
on the x-axis.
The required temperature can be selected in the top left hand corner and the required
variable can be viewed by double clicking on it in the bottom left hand corner:
127
PROSPER
Carefully examine the PVT plots for consistency with the match data. If necessary,
select a different correlation and repeat the PVT calculations until satisfactory results
have been obtained.
2.4.2.6.4 Saving PVT tables from Calculated Data
The calculated data can be saved in the form of .ptb files by the button Save PTB
provided at top of the calculation results screen.
There is also the option to transfer the displayed calculation data to the Tables by
pressing on the Tables button.
2.4.2.7 Save
This option allows a PVT data set to be saved under a separate name. A dialogue box
will appear prompting to name the PVT file. The PVT extension is automatically
provided by the program. If this step is omitted, the program will automatically save the
(matched) PVT data in a .PVT file with the same name as the input (.SIN) file.
2.4.2.8 Open
This option allows a previously saved PVT data set to be recalled into the open file. A
dialogue box will appear prompting to select a PVT file. If this step is carried out after
recalling a .SIN file, this will overwrite the PVT data from the original file.
User Guide 128
For multi-well projects, it is useful to set up matched PVT models for each
producing area first. This will save time and reduce the potential for error by
recalling the relevant PVT data into each well file.
2.4.2.9 Composition
In the PVT input data screen, click the Composition button, and PROSPER will use the
PVT properties (Oil Gravity, GOR) to estimate the composition of the reservoir fluid. It is
important to note that there is no unique composition which must be true for a set of
black oil properties and this is one possible solution. The resultant composition is not
used in any calculations within PROSPER.
The following is an example of an estimated Black Oil composition:
Click BI Coefficients and PROSPER will display the Binary Interaction coefficients to be
129
PROSPER
used in an EOS description of the fluid. An example BI Coefficients display is shown
below:
Estimation of reservoir fluid composition is available for Oil and Retrograde
Condensate fluids.
2.4.2.10Emulsions Input Data
If the 'Emulsions' option is selected in Options | Options then this tells PROSPER
where the viscosity corrections will take place during calculation. An additional option
section will be added to the PVT screen in PROSPER:
User Guide 130
The Flowline Emulsion Data button opens the Emulsion Data entry screen.
Water cut can be entered at this point that will then be used to calculate the emulsion
viscosity in the PVT calculation section.
2.4.2.10.1 Emulsion Modelling
PROSPER can model the effect of Oil/Water emulsions on mixture viscosity for black oil
PVT systems. The behaviour of emulsions in producing well equipment is not well
understood, however, emulsion PVT in PROSPER provides a means to assess the
possible effects of increased emulsion viscosity by curve fitting experimentally
determined data. It must be emphasised that the method is empirical and does not
represent any rigorous model of emulsion behaviour.
In the laboratory, stable emulsions can be prepared from many crude oil / water
systems. Emulsion samples discovered in surface separation equipment do not
necessarily imply that emulsions are present in the well and field experience shows that
the effect of emulsions is usually less than predicted by laboratory tests. Emulsion PVT
should be used with caution and only when it is certain that emulsions are present and it
is necessary to evaluate their effect on calculated pressures.
To enable emulsion PVT in PROSPER, the 'Emulsion' option must first be selected on
the Options | Options screen. Emulsion viscosity will replace the mixture viscosity for
131
PROSPER
the selected elements of the production system. Experimental or empirical emulsion
viscosity data can be entered and curve-fitted using non-linear regression. The fitted
curve is used to optionally replace the oil/water mixture viscosity in IPR, VLP and pump
calculations. When selected, the emulsion viscosity for the user-entered value of water
cut will be substituted for the fluid mixture viscosity.
Drop down the Emulsion box and select from the following:
No viscosity corrections
Turns off emulsion viscosity corrections
Everywhere
Emulsion viscosity for IPR, VLP and pump if present
Tubing and Pipe
Emulsion viscosity for casing, tubing and pump if present
Pump only
Emulsion viscosity for pump only
Pump and Above
Emulsion viscosity in pump and tubing above pump
Tubing +Pipe (not pump)
Emulsion viscosity in tubing and pipe only
The selection of system elements affected by emulsion can be changed at a later time.
Even if No Emulsion Corrections has been selected on the PVT screen,
pump viscosity corrections will be applied whenever the 'Emulsions' option is
selected. Produced fluid viscosity, not emulsion viscosity, will then be used for
these corrections.
2.4.2.10.2 Emulsions Matching
To set up the emulsion model, select 'Emulsion Everywhere', (otherwise emulsion
viscosity will not be active for the PVT calculations) then click the Flowline Emulsion
Data button and the following screen will be displayed.
User Guide 132
The screen is divided into 3 sections:
Emulsion Data Experimental data for matching
Experimental Parameters Experimental base conditions
Match Parameters Results of regression
The pressure and temperature that correspond to the experimental conditions are
entered in 'Experimental Parameters'. This enables PROSPER to correct the emulsion
viscosity for temperature and pressure.
Emulsions Everywhere must be selected before plotting the emulsion
viscosity curve. The emulsion viscosity entered for zero water cut should be
compatible with the 100% oil viscosity at the experimental temperature and
pressure.
Emulsion viscosity is modelled as a function of water cut in 3 stages:
Sharp increase at low water cut
Plateau with a constant maximum viscosity for intermediate water cuts
Tail that declines to the viscosity of water after the plateau
The parameters Left and Right Water Cut for Maximum Viscosity define the maximum
plateau region. To calculate emulsion viscosity:
Enter pairs of water cut and emulsion viscosity data points in the Emulsion
133
PROSPER
Data table.
Enter the Experimental Parameters
Click the 'Match' button.
When the regression has completed, click 'Plot' to display the matched mixture
viscosity:
Match data is plotted as crosses, whereas the calculated viscosity is shown as a solid
line.
During the matching process, only parameters 1,2 and 3 are matched. Parameters 4
and 5 control the shape of the curve at water cuts greater than the plateau but these
must be changed manually to improve the match.
When 'Emulsions' have been selected, the calculated oil viscosity, water viscosity and
liquid viscosity in the PVT section will be replaced by the emulsion viscosity for the value
of Water Cut entered.
For a step-by-step example of how to implement the emulsion model, please refer to
Tutorial 47 in Section 3 of this manual.
2.4.2.11Non-Newtonian Fluid
PROSPER includes a model to capture the effect of non-Newtonian fluids.
A fluid whose viscosity is not constant at all shear rates and does not behave like a
Newtonian fluid would fall into this category. This will enable foams in heavy oils to be
modelled more accurately. Most drilling fluids are non-Newtonian.
User Guide 134
The 'non-Newtonian' fluid option can be selected in Options | Options and when this is
done a new 'Viscosity Modelling' section is added to the PVT screen:
To enter the required non-Newtonian fluid viscosity data, select Rheological
Parameters from the PVT Input Data screen:
135
PROSPER
The model is based on the Herschel-Bulkley shear model:
Index Thinning Shear
Shear Rate
Index y Consistenc
Stress Yield
Stress Shear
0
0
n
K
K
n
This model calculates an equivalent apparent viscosity. Oil and Gas viscosities are both
set equal to the apparent viscosity and is also implemented in the reservoir by using an
equivalent pipe radius.
This 'Apparent Viscosity' is calculated as follows
User Guide 136
2.4.2.12Power Fluid Data
If one of the following Artificial Lift Methods have been selected: HSP (Hydraulic
Submersible Pump), Diluent Injection or Jet Pump, then additional details of the power
fluid must be supplied to estimate the fluid properties.
A new 'Power Fluid Properties' section is added to the PVT screen:
137
PROSPER
There are two choices for power fluid type:
Water (not available for Diluent Injection)
Other Fluid
If Water is selected, then the only other data required is the salinity of the power fluid.
The program will then estimate fluid properties using the normal water PVT model.
If Other Fluid is selected, then tables of fluid properties need to be entered which
PROSPER will use to interpolate upon. The program will never extrapolate so please
ensure that the table data covers the expected ranges of pressures and temperatures.
Click the Properties button and the following screen will be displayed:
User Guide 138
Tables of data for up to 10 temperatures may be entered. Please ensure that the tables
span the expected range of conditions that will be encountered.
The Generate feature allows data to be automatically calculated and inserted
into the tables using the PVT model in the main screen.
If a PVT model is available for the power fluid, the suggestion is the following:
1. Enter the fluid black oil properties of the power fluid in the PVT main
screen .
2. Use 'Generate' to create the tables modelling the power fluid
3. Return to the main screen and enter the black oil parameters for the
produced fluid.
139
PROSPER
2.4.2.13Diluent Fluid
When modelling diluent injection, the injection fluid must be specified in the PVT | Input
Data screen:
The fluid can be either Water or Other Fluid.
If Water is selected, also the salinity of that water is required to be entered as the other
properties will be found from the standard water correlations.
If Other Fluid is entered, the equivalent API must be inserted to define the density of the
fluid:
User Guide 140
As well as the API, tables of fluid properties must also be generated. This can be done
by selecting Properties:
141
PROSPER
Each table entered has a fixed temperature and the Formation Volume Factor and
Viscosity changes with pressure are captured. Up to ten tables can be entered and we
can be move between each one by using the arrows highlighted in the screenshot
above.
Please note: These tables should cover the entire range of temperatures and
pressures which may occur within system so as to avoid extrapolation.
The data can be imported into the model using the Import feature or calculated using
the Generate button. If Generate is used, this will generate PVT properties based upon
the PVT inserted into the main PVT screen. It is therefore recommended that if this
option is to be used, the following steps should be followed:
1. Remove the current PVT data in the main PVT screen and also reset any matching
which has been performed.
2. Enter the PVT properties (and carry out the matching process if data is available)
using the diluent fluid properties.
3. Select Generate to generate the tables based upon the diluent PVT.
4. Return to the main PVT screen and remove all of the diluent fluid data and matching
parameters.
5. Reenter the PVT of the produced fluid and carry out any matching which had
previously been performed again.
User Guide 142
Following these steps should allow the correct PVT to be used for both the diluent and
the produced fluid.
2.4.2.14PVT Warning Tables
If the PVT Warnings | Enable Warning option has been selected in the main program
Options, then a pressure temperature look-up table can be entered for Hydrate
Formation, Salt Precipitation, Wax Appearance, Asphaltenes and Scale Production.
Click the Warnings button at the top of the main PVT screen and the following entry
screen will be displayed:
Each different warning can be enabled or disabled on this screen. When a warning is
enabled, the pressure-temperature table can be inserted by selecting Data:
143
PROSPER
Enter here the appropriate formation phase envelope conditions.
Up to one hundred data points may be entered. Please ensure that the table spans
within the expected range of conditions that will be encountered.
Select Plot to see the curve which has been entered:
User Guide 144
2.4.3 Black Oil - Dry And Wet Gas
In this PVT method, all of the condensate drop out is assumed to occur at the separator
and not within the production system. The condensate is treated as an equivalent gas
rate which allows for its presence and impact by ensuring that a mass balance is
observed.The hydrocarbon phase is therefore treated as a single phase fluid in
pressure drop calculations.Free water production in the tubing is also considered and
therefore the fluid becomes a multiphase fluid when water is present.
2.4.3.1 Input Data
When Dry and Wet Gas is selected as the PVT option, the following input data screen
is displayed:
145
PROSPER
The bottom part of the screen will only appear when the option Calculate Condensate
Water Vapour is selected in the Options | Water Viscosity section. If this option is
selected, the effects of condensation of water vapour on the pressure drop calculation in
the tubing / pipeline will be taken into account.
The calculated moisture content of natural gases is based on the equations of Bukacek
(Equilibrium Moisture Content of Natural Gases, Research Bulletin Vol 8, Institute of
Gas Technology, Chicago USA, 1955). The correlation on which these calculations are
based is accurate to within five percent and was developed for dry gases. The
presence of heavier hydrocarbons in wet gases and retrograde condensate fluids
increases the water content by as much as ten percent at 1000 psia and twenty percent
at 10,000 psia. The Bukacek correlation is also graphically referenced in McCain,
William D. Jr. The Properties of Petroluem Fluids Figures 16-18 and 16-19 and
mathematically illustrated in Lee, John and Wattenbarger, Robert A. Gas Reservoir
Engineering Section 1.12.
The Dry and Wet Gas model applies to most gas wells. The condensate production is
included in the gas stream as an increase in density - the flow remains single-phase
gas plus free water if present. The separator pressure is used to estimate the GE (Gas
Equivalent Rate). The separator temperature is assumed to be the same as the top
node temperature. If there is significant hydrocarbon liquid drop out in the tubing, a
retrograde condensate model should be used.
Note the following:
User Guide 146
The Gray VLP correlation has an internal PVT routine that models the effect of
liquid dropout in the tubing. This overrides the Dry and Wet gas PVT.
Gas properties (e.g. Gas FVF) are calculated directly from the gas Z factor.
The Z factor is calculated based on the Standing Katz Z-Factor charts.
The impact of the impurities on the Z-factor are calculated using Wichert and
Aziz.
The Gas FVF is then calculated using the real gas law.
Gas viscosity is calculated from the Lee or Carr correlations.
Matching operations are carried out in the same way as for oil PVT. Please
refer to the PVT Matching Data section for more details.
2.4.4 Black Oil - Retrograde Condensate
The PROSPER Retrograde condensate (Black Oil) model has been developed in house
by Petroleum Experts. This model predicts liquid drop out taking place in the tubing.
The reservoir gas gravity is determined using the principle of mass balance for an
equivalent density of the oil.
Unlike bubble point systems (oil), the black oil condensate model should not be
matched against lab or simulated PVT data. This is because the black oil model for
condensate in PROSPER uses a mathematical model based upon mass balance and
matching could throw the model out of bounds.
It is important to check the validity of the Retrograde Condensate Black Oil model by
comparing the results to a fully compositional model. A step-by-step guide showing how
to perform this validation can be found in Tutorial 39 which can be found within Section
3 of this manual.
The equations used are given in Appendix B.
2.4.4.1 Input Data
When Retrograde Condensate (Black oil) PVT is selected the following input data
screen is displayed:
147
PROSPER
Enter the required data for the model as shown above.
If only single stage flash data is available, the separator can be entered as standard
conditions (0psig, 60
o
F). The total GOR can then be entered as the Separator GOR and
the gas gravity as the Separator Gas Gravity. The Tank GOR can be set to 1 scf/STB
and the Tank Gas Gravity to the same value as the Separator Gas Gravity.
If the separator pressure is above dew point, then there can be no liquid
production. When the dew point is unknown, set it to the reservoir pressure.
PROSPER handles conflicting input data by dropping the separator pressure to
atmospheric, and increasing the separator gas gravity as required accounting
for the liquid production indicated by the Separator GOR. The mass balance
is respected at all times.
The black oil condensate model must not be matched as previously done for
oils. This is because the black oil model for condensate in PROSPER uses a
mathematical model and matching could throw the model out of bounds.
Instead, the black oil validation process should be carried out as detailed in
Tutorial 39 of this User Guide.
2.4.4.2 Calculations
Fluid property data can be calculated for a specified range of temperatures and
pressures. If the correlations have been matched, then the matched correlations will be
used for the calculations. Plots of fluid properties versus temperature or pressure can
User Guide 148
be generated.
The calculated PVT property values should be compared to constant
composition expansion (CCE) data, as this process best describes the
evolution of the fluid in the tubing.
2.4.5 Export
The 'Export' button enables the user to export: input data, correlation parameters, match
data, tables and calculation results from the PVT main section.
2.4.6 Equation Of State - All Fluids
This PVT option allows PROSPER to calculate the vapour fraction and fluid physical
properties using an equation of state (EOS) description for the reservoir fluid.
The Peng-Robinson and Soave Redlich Kwong EOS models are available in PROSPER
, and user specified EOS PVT modules can also be linked to PROSPER.
The PVT calculation method is identical for all reservoir fluid types (i.e. oil and water,
condensate or gas) and so the fluid type selected will only affect the choice of IPR and
VLP models which can be selected, as well as the range of available sensitivity
variables.
Equations of State were developed to give a mathematical relationship between
pressure, volume and temperature. They were originally put forward as a method of
interpreting the non-ideal nature of many pure substances. With time, this role has been
extended successfully to predicting the properties of simple and complex mixtures.
The equations used in PROSPER are derived from Van der Waals Equation and
represent the total pressure as a summation of an attractive and a repulsive element:
149
PROSPER
P
total
= P
repulsive
- P
attractive
The classic Van der Waals equation describes this relationship as
where b represents the hard-sphere volume of the molecules and a the inter-
molecular attraction.
The two cubic Equations of State which are available in PROSPER are:
1) Peng-Robinson (PR)EoS:
and,
2) Soave-Redlich-Kwong(SRK)EoS:
All cubic Equations of State can be rewritten as a function of the compressibility factor Z
e.g. the Peng Robinson equation becomes:
and for SRK
where
and

User Guide 150
When using EoS models, the viscosity of oil and gas can be modelled in
different ways. Each fluid can have a different method selected for
using the models below:
Lohrenz Bray Clark
Lohrenz Bray Clark with user defined coefficients
Pedersen et al
Any of the Black Oil Viscosity models
A Note about using the EOS option
PROSPER can handle pressure drop calculations using EOS PVT in two distinct ways:
It can calculate fluid properties at each calculation step from the EOS explicitly.
This option eliminates any potential interpolation errors, as the EOS is used to
calculate fluid properties at the exact node pressure and temperature. The
additional computing overhead required by this method increases calculation
times.
If PVT tables have been generated using the EoS, selecting the Interpolated from
Generated Tables option instructs PROSPER to look up and interpolate the
tables. The tables must be calculated over a sufficient number of points that
cover the entire range of pressures and temperatures to reduce interpolation
errors. For problems that require it, the Use Tables option allows an EOS fluid
description to be used without significantly increasing computation times.
PROSPER will determine whether the reservoir fluid is an oil or a gas
condensate within the EOS PVT calculations. Since the VLP correlations are
approached differently depending on whether a gas or oil is being produced,
when running calculations, if the fluid type recognised during the calculations is
different to the fluid type specified in the main program Options screen, the
program will display a warning message.
2.4.6.1 EOS Model Setup
The EOS fluid mode options must be consistent with the entered compositional data for
PROSPER to calculate.
151
PROSPER
The EoS options can now be set up by selecting EoS Setup:
User Guide 152
The following main EOS options can be pre-set:
153
PROSPER
EoS Model
Select one of the available EoS equations: Peng-Robinson or Soave-Redlich-
Kwong.
Optimisation Mode
Over the past few years, our PVT experts have been working on ways to speed up the
calculation of properties from an EOS model. Speed is one of the main issues with fully
compositional models and the options in this field will define the speed of calculations.
The objective of this option is to speed up the calculations without penalising the
accuracy the results. The Medium mode is the fastest (up to 80 times).
Optimise Repeat Calculations
This value should be set to Yes to optimise the efficiency and accuracy of the EoS
calculations.
Volume Shift
Option to enable/disable the use of Volume Shift in the EoS.
Correct CO
2
Density
The density of CO
2
can be corrected for use within an EoS by adjusting the volume shift
using this option. This gives the same results as the Span Wagner EoS. This correction
also ensures that the enthalpy of the fluid is also being calculated robustly which leads to
more accurate thermal properties.
This correction is able to capture the properties not only of pure CO
2
but also carbon
dioxide streams with impurities within them.
For more information on these corrections please refer to the PVTp User Guide.
Lumping
In some cases when EoS is used, two different compositions are created; one fully
composition has a large number of components while a second composition is lumped
into fewer pseudo-components. This allows the program to switch between the two
compositions depending upon the requirements of the program.
Reference Conditions
The reference conditions used to define standard conditions can be set in this screen.
Flash
It is now possible to carry out flash calculations in IPM with water. These are referred to
multiphase phases can a number of different options can be selected.
Two Phase
Pseudo Multiphase
Soreide and Whitson, Modified Cubic or Modified CPAs can be selected.
Viscosity
A number of different methods can be selected to model the viscosity of the fluid:
User Guide 154
Lohrenz Bray Clark
Lohrenz Bray Clark with user defined coefficients
Pedersen et al
Any Black Oil Viscosity Correlation
Water and Hydrates
The hydrate calculations in the EoS have been updated to include a comprehensive set
of calculations based on the Hydrafact modified cubics and CPA models. These
calculations can be carried out with a mixture of salts and/or a mixture of inhibitors such
as DEG, TEG, Methanol etc.
For more information on these new calculations, and how the water compositions can
be entered and used in calculations, please refer to the PVTp User Guide.
Path to Surface
This Option specifies the path the fluid follows down to standard condition.
This is essential when calculating volumetric properties like FVF or GOR, which are
path dependent. The amount of gas and liquid resulting from the calculations will be
different depending on the path the fluid will take to standard conditions. These are the
available options:
Flash Straight to Stock Tank
Use Separator Train
Use K values
The Use K Values option is an addition to the compositional modelling that
allows modelling the process based on K-values (equilibrium ratios). This can
allow process calculations from systems more complex than separation to be
represented as Pseudo separators and can be obtained from process
simulators.
To import the K values select 'Import K Values':
155
PROSPER
User Guide 156
K-values can be entered by hand or also generated in PVTp by performing a simple
separator experiment, and then exported to PROSPER.
These options should reflect the EOS available for the fluid (from PVTP
for example) and the process (path) the fluid follows to standard
conditions (which will affect the volumes and quality of the resulting
fluid when expressed at standard conditions)
Target GOR Method
A single composition will only provide a single value of GOR through a defined
separator train. There are applications when other GOR values are required e.g. in the
production of lift curves. This calculation takes the gas and oil derived from the fluid and
recombines them until it reaches the target value.
There are two methods available to the user. The difference between them lies in the
source of the gas and liquid to be mixed.
Use Separator fluids
This option uses the dead oil and accumulated separator gas to create the mixture
Use fluid from PSAT
This method first finds the saturation pressure of the fluid. The program then flashes
the fluid to just below P
SAT
to obtain an oil and gas composition. These are mixed
to achieve the target GOR. It should be noted that this restricts any target that can
be found to the R
s
of the oil below P
SAT
and the GOR of the equivalent gas.
Although more restricted, this mixture better reflects the case of an oil entraining
gas cap gas etc.
2.4.6.2 EOS PVT Input Data
A sample EOS PVT input screen is shown below:
157
PROSPER
The EOS fluid model is activated via the Options | Options screen where the various
EOS options can be selected. The Options can also be changed from the EoS main
screen by selecting Change.
This screen requires input of pure and pseudo component concentrations and
properties (critical temperature, pressure and volume, acentric factor, molecular weight
and specific gravity). Up to 30 pseudo components can be entered. Entry of Critical
Volume, Volume Shift, Boiling Point Temperature and Parachor are optional.
EoS data can be imported into PROSPER from a *.PRP format by selecting Import...
PRP. The *.PRP file contains all the information necessary to the EoS: EoS
parameters, BI Coefficients, Options, Separator train, etc., and can be generated using
Petroleum Experts' PVTp.
Use of regressed critical volume data will improve the quality of calculated liquid
viscosities. Where critical volume data is unavailable, PROSPER uses a correlation to
estimate the values. The Parachor is used for surface tension calculation. Binary
interaction components are entered on a screen similar to that shown below by clicking
on the BI coeffs button from the EOS input screen.
User Guide 158
After entering the interaction coefficients, click OK to return to the input screen. Then
click Generate to display a screen requesting the range of pressures and temperatures
and the number of pressure and temperature steps to calculate.
Production rates entered in PROSPER when using EOS PVT assume the
produced fluid is flashed through the user-entered separator train.
The EOS option in PROSPER is not intended to be used as a fully featured
PVT package. For the initial compositional calibration of the fluid, it is
recommended to use a specialised program such as Petroleum Experts
PVTP.
The Gray VLP correlations internal PVT will override the EOS PVT.
2.4.6.2.1 Generate PVT properties
The fluid properties can be generated using the EoS in different ways:
Calculated directly from the EoS
Interpolate the properties from Tables generated by the EoS itself
159
PROSPER
The first option is the more accurate as it avoids interpolation, though it is slower.
Choose the desired option from the menu available in the left bottom of the EoS
window.
Performing CCE calculations
Calculate the PVT fluid properties using the EOS directly by clicking Generate on the
main EoS PVT screen.
Enter the range of temperatures and pressures and select Calculate and then on the
next screen Calculate again:.
User Guide 160
Display the results by clicking Plot
161
PROSPER
2.4.6.2.2 Properties
Click the Properties button and the program will determine the equivalent black oil
properties by flashing the fluid to atmospheric (i.e. standard) conditions using the
separator scheme entered in the EoS setup screen.
2.4.6.2.3 Phase Envelope
Generating the Phase Envelope
The phase envelope can be displayed by selecting the Phase Env... button.
In this section the Phase Envelope can be calculated:
User Guide 162
The Plot button displays the calculated envelope:
PROSPER will automatically calculate the Cricondentherm, Cricondenbar and where
applicable, the critical point.
163
PROSPER
The EOS input screen allows pseudo component data to be imported directly from data
files such as those generated by Petroleum Experts' PVT package PVTp or other
programs. Simply click 'Import' and select the appropriate file from the dialogue box.
Once the fluid properties have been generated, they can be saved in a .PVT file by
clicking the Save button and entering a file name when prompted.
Calculate Hydrate...Wax
This utility allows the user to calculate the Hydrate formation curve, along with the wax
occurrence temperature.
The Hydrate formation curve and wax formation temperature plot will be displayed along
with the phase envelope.
2.4.6.2.4 Target GOR
This feature allows the calculation of the recombined fluid composition characterised by
a GOR different to the Original Composition GOR:
Enter the new GOR in the Target GOR field and then Calculate, and the program will use
the 'Target GOR' method defined in the main EoS options in order to determine the new
composition.
User Guide 164
The Calculated composition is reported in the Calculated column.
2.4.7 Steam Calculations
In order to allow steam calculations to be included in a PROSPER model, either the
Enthalpy Balance or Improved Approximation temperature models must be selected
in the Options | Options screen. When one of these options has been selected, the
'Steam Calculations' can be enabled on the same screen:
Due to the nature of steam, a small change in pressure can lead to a large change in the
steam quality and therefore it is recommended that when steam calculations are being
carried out, a small step length (such as 50ft) be used for gradient calculations.
It is possible to set the steam step length in the File | Preferences screen:
165
PROSPER
Setting 'Use Steam Step Length' to Yes will use this step length to calculate gradient
calculations when the steam option is enabled but PROSPER will revert to the default
step length if the option is not enabled.
2.4.7.1 Calculating Steam Properties
It is possible to calculate the properties of steam in PROSPER by selecting PVT |
Steam Calculator. This option is only available when the steam calculations have been
enabled.
The following options are available:
OK Returns to the main screen and saves any data which has
User Guide 166
beenentered or calculated.
Cancel
Returns to the main screen and discards any data which has
been entered or calculated.
Help Will access the Online Help.
Calculate Range
Calculates the properties of steam over a range of
conditions.
Calculate Single
Calculates the properties of steam at a single given
condition.
2.4.7.1.1 Calculate Range
Selecting Calculate Range will allow the user to calculate the properties of steam over
a range of pressures and temperatures:
Enter the minimum pressure and temperature to be calculated in the 'From' boxes and
the maximum values in the 'To' boxes. The number of steps to be taken between these
two limits should be placed in the '# steps' boxes.
Once the required ranges have been entered, select Calculate to proceed to the
calculation screen.
Select Calculate to carry out the calculation and view the results:
167
PROSPER
The reported results are:
- Saturation Temperature
- Saturation Enthalpy (vapour and liquid)
- Quality
- Enthalpy (vapour and liquid)
- Density (vapour and liquid)
- Volume (vapour and liquid)
- Viscosity (vapour and liquid)
- Specific Heat (C
v
) (vapour and liquid)
- Specific Heat (C
p
) (vapour and liquid)
- Compressibility (vapour and liquid)
- Joules Thompson Coefficient (vapour and liquid)
- Thermal Conductivity (vapour and liquid)
2.4.7.1.2 Calculate Single
Selecting Calculate Single will allow the User to calculate the properties of steam at a
given set of conditions.
Enter the pressure and enthalpy of the fluid to be calculated and then select Calculate
to view the results:
User Guide 168
The above screenshot shows the results of a single phase water while the screenshot
below shows the results when the solution is found to be in the two phase region:
169
PROSPER
2.4.7.2 Setting Steam Quality
The quality of steam is the proportion of saturated steam in a saturated water/steam
mixture. 100% steam quality means that all of the mixture is steam while 0% means that
the mixture is 100% water. In order to calculate the steam quality of a stream, knowing
the temperature and pressure of the stream is not enough. The steam quality is also
dependent upon the enthalpy of the fluid.
User Guide 170
When carrying out calculations involving steam in PROSPER, the quality of the steam can
either be set (with the resultant enthalpy being calculated) or calculated from an inserted
enthalpy value.
For example, to carry out a gradient calculation for a steam injector model, select
Calculation | Gradient (traverse). In the 'Input Data' section, the additional options for
steam can be seen:
For 'Steam Choice', select 'Enter Quality' if the steam quality is to be entered or 'Enter
Enthalpy' to enter the enthalpy. Whichever property is not entered directly, will be
calculated.
When the calculation has been performed, the steam properties are reported:
171
PROSPER
These results can be seen by scrolling to the right hand side of the results section.
Please note that if the fluid is not at its saturation conditions (at saturation temperature
for the given pressure) then the steam cannot have a quality other than 0 or 1. If
unphysical values are inserted (i.e. a steam quality of 54% when the fluid is above the
saturation temperature), PROSPER will instead use the thermodynamically calculated
value.
2.5 Equipment Data Input
This section describes the menu option used to define the wells hardware, deviation
survey and formation temperature profile. The program requests only the data required
by the options that have been selected in Options | Options.
The data required for temperature prediction depends on the temperature model used.
For the Rough Approximation and Improved Approximation there is little additional
User Guide 172
data required. For the rigorous Enthalpy Balance temperature model, it is necessary
to completely define the well environment, including all casing strings, cement tops,
formation lithology etc.
A Note about Depth References:
Depths in PROSPER for down-hole and surface equipment are referenced to zero on the
deviation survey screen. Calculated pressures are then referenced to the Xmas tree (if
no surface equipment has been entered) or Manifold (if surface equipment has been
entered). Therefore, when PROSPER well models are combined in a field-wide system
model, the depth references that were used in the individual PROSPER models are not
important. In the field model, however, the depth of each wells 'Top Node' must be
specified with respect to a common reference.
For sub-sea systems, any depth reference (e.g. sea level, drill floor, ground level) can be
used. If ground level is used then a tied back well would have a negative wellhead
elevation. To minimise the potential for errors in correcting the depths, it is
recommended to use the same reference as used for the deviation survey data.
2.5.1 Predicting Pressure Only
When predicting 'Pressure only', click System Equipment to display the following
input screen:
To start the data entry for a new application, click All to select all of the different sections
and the Edit.PROSPER will then display all the relevant input screens in sequence.
If data has already been entered, clicking the Summary command button will display a
summary of the current equipment.
173
PROSPER
To go back and edit one particular equipment item, click on the button beside the
appropriate item.
Data can be entered for the surface equipment and then include or exclude it
temporarily from any calculation by setting the Disable Surface Equipment choice box
at the bottom of the screen to Yes.
2.5.1.1 Deviation Survey
From the well deviation survey, select a number of depth points that mark significant
changes in deviation. Enter pairs of data points for measured depth (MD) and the
corresponding true vertical depth (TVD). Up to 20 pairs of data points can be entered.
The editing buttons Cut, Copy, Paste, Insert and Delete operate on data records that
have been selected by clicking on their row number button(s). All records can be
simultaneously selected by clicking the All button. Use the Import button to import data
from a wide variety of sources.
User Guide 174
There is a Measured Depth to True Vertical Depth calculator at the top of the
screen.
If the user wishes to find the TVD at a given MD, just enter the MD value in the
relevant space and select Calculate.
If the User wishes to find the MD at a given TVD, just enter the TVD value in the
relevant space and select Calculate
Once depths have been entered, plot the well profile by selecting Plot. A plot similar to
the one below will be displayed:
175
PROSPER
The reference depth used by PROSPER for all calculations is zero in the
Deviation Survey table. The Deviation Survey table is interpolated upon to
determine the difference in TVD between any two well nodes. MD and TVD data
must be at least as deep as the bottom-hole tubing depth; PROSPER will not
calculate beyond the last depth in the table.
Deviation Survey data entry is required also for vertical wells - enter 0,0 for the
surface reference and an MD the same as the TVD of the intake node. The
deviation survey has to start with 0 measured depth and 0 TVD. Due to this
reason, the reference depth (where TVD = 0) has to be at or above the wellhead.
For a sub-sea well (with or without pipeline), if the reference depth is selected in
such a way that it is above the wellhead (at the mean sea level for instance), we
can actually assume an imaginary vertical path in the deviation survey table down
to the wellhead. We do not need to include the pipeline measured depth in the
deviation survey. The deviation survey describes the deviation of the down-hole
equipment only.
Horizontal wells with deviation angles greater than 90 degrees from vertical can
be entered. PROSPER will issue a warning that the TVD of one node is less than
the previous one, but well profile plots and calculations will proceed as normal.
User Guide 176
For Horizontal wells the deviation survey may be entered only up to the heel of the
well, as the well from the heel all the way up to the to is a part of the inflow
description.
2.5.1.1.1 Filter
When more than 20 points are available, the Filter allows a determined number of
points (up to 20) that best-fit the entered points (see figure below).
177
PROSPER
In the 'Raw Data' table (figure above) enter the data from the survey.
It is possible to copy the table by selecting the first row and paste from the
Clipboard
These are the function buttons:
User Guide 178
Calculate
Other
Calculates the third column which has not been inserted
Reset Deletes the entered data
Filter Calculates a number of points which fit the deviation table entered on
the left. Check the fitting by hitting on Plot. If this is not ok, change
some parameters (like for example the angle step)
Transfer Transfers the calculated points to the main Deviation Survey screen
The Filter parameters are described in the following table:
Initial Filter Angle
Used to chose second point of the deviation survey; the point
with higher angle will be filtered through
Angle Step Defines the minimum angle difference between two points; if
the difference is higher the point will be filtered through
Maximum Number
of Points
The Maximum Number of Points that can be filtered through; if
the number of points filtered is more than the value specified
PROSPER will increase the angle to satisfy the criterion
Actual Filter Angle The angle calculated by PROSPER to satisfy Maximum
Number of Points criteria
When selecting Filter, the program will filter the points in order to reproduce the well
trajectory previously imported.
The first point of the deviation survey is always filtered through as a starting point. Then
the Initial Filter Angle parameter is used to choose second point of the deviation
survey; i.e. the first point along the deviation survey where the angle from the vertical
goes above the initial filter angle will pass through the filter and is selected as the
second point.
The next points are filtered through based on the Angle Step; i.e. if the difference in the
angle between two points is more than the value specified.
PROSPER actually calculates the Angle Step internally depending on the Maximum
Number of Points entered by user; i.e. if the number of point passed through the filter is
more than the Maximum Number of Points specified the angle will be increased to
satisfy the former. The resulting value is then reported as Actual Filter Angle.
The filtering is performed on the basis of Measured Depth (not Cumulative
Displacement). In essence, the filtering ensures that the measured depth
(and TVD) between two points is always consistent with the original survey
even though plotted profiles may appear slightly different. This is because
Measured Depth defines length of the pipe (tubing), which is particularly
important in temperature and pressure drop calculations in PROSPER.
179
PROSPER
The Plot function allows to quality check the fitting. In the plot the well entered trajectory
(in blue) is plotted along with the fitted points (in red):
User Guide 180
2.5.1.2 Surface Equipment
The Surface Equipment screen is used to enter surface flowline, choke and pipe fitting
data as shown below:
181
PROSPER
Data is entered from the manifold (at the top of the screen) to the wellhead (at the
bottom of the screen).
PROSPER defines surface equipment as the pipe work between the production manifold
and the upstream side of the wellhead choke. The production manifold is regarded by
PROSPER as presenting a constant back-pressure, regardless of flow rate. If systems
analysis is to be performed relative to the wellhead, (i.e. gathering system pressure
losses are neglected) then no surface equipment input is required.
The surface equipment model can be described using the following 3 elements:
Pipe
Choke
Fitting
The manifold is set as the first equipment type automatically by PROSPER. Surface
equipment geometry can be entered either as pairs of X, Y co-ordinates relative to the
manifold or the Xmas Tree, Reverse X, Y (Y co-ordinates deeper than the reference
depth are negative) or TVD of the upstream end and the length of the pipe segment.
The difference in TVD between the ends of a pipe segment is used to calculate gravity
head losses. The internal diameter (ID), roughness and pipe length entered determine
the friction pressure loss. The flowing temperatures for each upstream node must also
be entered when calculation option Pressure only is selected.
The Rate Multiplier column enables simulation of the pressure drop due to several
identical wells being connected to a production manifold via a common surface flow
line. The fluid velocity in the flowline is multiplied by the value entered increasing the
frictional pressure losses. For most applications it should be left at its default value of 1.

As an example, the pressure drop in a flowline connected to 3 identical wells
could be modelled using a pipeline rate multiplier of 3. 2 parallel flowlines
having identical dimensions can be modelled by entering the actual
dimensions for one pipe and a pipeline rate multiplier of 0.5. It is also
possible to vary the rate multiplier along the pipeline to simulate varying
sections of dual pipelines for example.
Fittings have been added to the surface equipment section of PROSPER to account for
the various pressure losses associated with pipe fittings throughout a given system:
User Guide 182
Right clicking on a row in the table allows data to be Copied, Pasting or Cut as well as
allowing rows to be inserted, deleted or cleared.
PROSPER multi-phase choke pressure loss correlation accounts for both critical and
sub-critical flow. We would recommend the use of the ELF Choke correlation that it
similar to the Petroleum Experts method and is more robust in extreme conditions.
Ensure that the length of each pipe segment is equal to or greater than the
difference in TVD between its ends.
183
PROSPER
The down-hole and surface equipment entries must describe a continuous
system. The TVD and temperature of the upstream end of the last pipeline
segment should be equal to the Xmas tree TVD and temperature. In X,Y co-
ordinates, the Y co-ordinate of the last pipe segment must be the same
elevation as the wellhead TVD. (i.e. same magnitude, but opposite sign)
To check that the surface equipment description is accurate, click Plot to display a plot
of the pipe elevation as follows:
2.5.1.3 Downhole Equipment
The Downhole Equipment screen enables the down-hole completion data to be
entered.
User Guide 184
The Downhole Equipment screen will change automatically depending on the options
selected in the Options | Options menu screen. For example, if Annular Flow has
been selected, the screen will require Casing I.D. and Tubing O.D. to be entered in
addition to the Tubing I.D.
The tubing string can be modelled using the following element types:
Tubing
SSSV
Restriction
Casing
PROSPER automatically inserts the Xmas tree as the first down hole equipment item.
To describe the tubing string, work from the shallowest depth downwards, entering the
bottom depth of changes in tubing diameter, ID and roughness factor. The deepest
depth entries for the tubing, deviation survey and temperature should be consistent.
The last depth specified in the down-hole equipment is taken to be the
bottom-hole depth by PROSPER and should correspond to the top of the
perforations or the top of the reservoir. Everything below this point is
considered as part of the IPR.
Below the uppermost producing perforation, the flow profile (as measured by
a production logging tool) depends on layer productivity etc. The uppermost
producing perforation is the deepest point in the well passing 100% of the
185
PROSPER
production. Below this point, the calculated frictional pressure gradient may
be over-estimated in high rate wells having small I.D. completions.
An SSSV is considered to have no length, and is modelled as a sharp-edged
orifice inserted between adjacent tubing string elements. A restriction is
handled identically to an SSSV. The pressure loss calculations in PROSPER
account for choking as sonic flow velocity is approached.
The Rate Multiplier column enables simulation of the pressure drop due to intermittent
sections of dual completion. The fluid velocity in the tubing is multiplied by the value
entered - thereby increasing the frictional pressure losses. For standard single tubing
completions it should be left at its default value of 1.
It is possible to view databases of both tubing and casing sizes using the Tubing DB or
Casing DB buttons. These will take the User to the databases described in the
Options Section.
Right Clicking on a row in the table allows data to be Copied, Pasting or Cut as well as
Up to 50 tubing string elements can be input. For complex completions, simplify the
data entry by entering only the major elements that dominate the overall tubing pressure
drop.
2.5.1.4 Temperature Survey
This screen enables entry of the flowing temperature profile of the fluid in the well. If
no bottom hole flowing temperature survey data is available, the static reservoir
temperature at the mid-point of perforations and the wellhead flowing temperature can
be used. A minimum of two depth / temperature points is required.
User Guide 186
Right Clicking on a row in the table allows data to be Copied, Pasting or Cut as well as
PROSPER interpolates temperatures from the survey data for depths within the
table limits, and uses linear extrapolation elsewhere. To eliminate potential
errors, ensure that a temperature is entered for the deepest node depth. It is
recommended that the maximum temperature survey depth, deviation survey
depth and intake node depths are all consistent.
2.5.1.5 Pipe Schedule and Equipment
In the 'Surface Equipment' or in the 'Downhole Equipment' section it is possible to
import as pipe, tubing and casing ID values from databases containing pipeline, tubing
and casing data.
In the 'Surface Equipment' section this is achieved by selecting the Pipe Schedule
button and in the 'Downhole Equipment' section this is achieved by selecting the
Casing DB or Tubing DB buttons:
These are the steps to import the equipment ID:
1. Select the Type of equipment from the screen - for example, Tubing - as shown
187
PROSPER
below:
2. Select the row corresponding to the piece of equipment and select the Equipment
button (if in the Surface Equipment section, select Pipe Schedule) and select the
database (in this case Tubing Database)
3. Select the equipment to use from the database
User Guide 188
Then Copy and Done
4. The program will show a dialogue with at the bottom an option on the way forward.
189
PROSPER
For example, selecting Copy ID and OD to Selected Records, then Done will pass the
values to the equipment screen:
User Guide 190
2.5.2 Predicting Pressure and Temperature
The Equipment data entry screens vary depending on the Temperature model selected
in the main program Options. The following sections discuss the different data which is
required to be input when both pressure and temperature are being predicted.
2.5.2.1 Rough Approximation
Equipment entry for the 'Rough Approximation' temperature model varies little from the
'Predicting Pressure Only' option. Click on System Equipment to display the
following input screen:
191
PROSPER
To start data entry for a new application, click All Edit. PROSPER will then display all
the relevant input screens in sequence. If data has already been entered, clicking the
Summary command button will display a schematic summary of the current equipment.
To go back and edit one particular equipment item, click on the button beside the
appropriate item.
Data can be entered for the surface equipment and then included or excluded
temporarily from any calculation by using the Disable Surface Equipment choice box
at the bottom of the screen.
2.5.2.1.1 Deviation Survey
Enter data as per Pressure Only case.
2.5.2.1.2 Surface Equipment
Surface Equipment is the same as for Predicting Pressure Only except that the
temperature of the pipe surroundings and an overall heat transfer coefficient are
required to be entered in the top left hand corner of the screen. There is also no longer a
need to enter the fluid temperature at each node as this is being calculated:
User Guide 192
The heat transfer coefficient should not be confused with the pipe thermal conductivity.
The overall heat transfer coefficient accounts for the heat flow through the production
tubing, annulus and insulation (if present) to the surroundings. Heat transfer by forced
and free convection, conduction and radiation must all be accounted for in the value of
the overall heat transfer coefficient. In PROSPER, the overall heat transfer coefficient is
referenced to the pipe inside diameter.
2.5.2.1.3 Downhole Equipment
The Downhole Equipment section of PROSPER defines the path which the fluid takes
to surface and should be defined from the bottom hole (normally taken to be the top of
the producing perforations) to the well head.
193
PROSPER
The Downhole Equipment input data is the same as for Predicting Pressure Only.
2.5.2.1.4 Geothermal Gradient
This is where the 'Rough Approximation' temperature model differs most from the
Pressure Only case. PROSPER requires the formation temperature profile to be
entered on this screen and not the fluid temperature:
User Guide 194
The geothermal gradient can be entered relative to measured depth or TVD by
selecting the required option from the drop down menu.
PROSPER requires a minimum of two points for the geothermal gradient; one
taken at the depth of the well head and one taken at the bottom-hole depth.
The formation temperature will be calculated by linear interpolation between
the entered points.
195
PROSPER
Enter static formation temperatures e.g. extrapolation of temperatures
recorded on logging runs - NOT flowing well bore temperatures.
As for surface equipment, enter an overall heat transfer coefficient (U value) that
describes the resistance to heat flow by all mechanisms (convection, radiation and
conduction) from the well to its surroundings. If well test data is available, this U value
can be estimated in the 'VLP/IPR Matching' section. The Enthalpy Balance
temperature model is a convenient way to determine average heat transfer coefficients
if no test data is available.
The heat transfer area is referenced to the pipe inside diameter.
2.5.2.1.5 Average Heat Capacities
To edit Average Heat Capacities, click its check box then click Edit to display the
following dialogue:
Enter values that correspond to average conditions in the well. Note that for oil, and
especially gas that Cp values are strong functions of both temperature and pressure.
The default values will often give reasonable results in moderate GOR oil wells.
However, actual Cp values for oil and gas may vary significantly. Do not rely on
the defaults - obtain good estimates of Cp, or use the Enthalpy Balance
method where accurate temperature prediction are achieved.
2.5.2.1.6 Gauge Details
Up to 10 gauges can be added to a well in PROSPER:
User Guide 196
The pressure and temperature at these gauges will be given as additional results in any
calculation being run.
2.5.2.2 Enthalpy Balance
To commence data entry for a new application, click All | Edit. PROSPER will then
display all the input screens in sequence.
197
PROSPER
If data has already been entered, clicking the Summary command button will display a
summary of the current equipment. To go back and edit one particular equipment item,
click the button on the left of the appropriate item.
Data can be entered for the surface equipment and then included or excluded
at the bottom of the screen.
An example of the surface equipment screen is shown below:
User Guide 198
To calculate heat losses, additional data such as outside diameter, material type and
insulation (if used) are required to be input. The surface equipment model can utilise
the following equipment types:
Line pipe
Coated pipeline
Flexible tubes
User selected
Choke
Fittings
To allow for pipe bends, etc., enter an equivalent length/diameter (90 bends can be
specified within the 'Fittings option.'). The choke calculation handles both sub-critical
and critical flow and will calculate the temperature drop across the choke.
Descriptive labels for each element can be entered in the Label field if desired as these
labels appear on reports and calculation screens.
Surface equipment geometry can be optionally entered as TVD of the upstream end of
the pipe segment and length or as X, Y (from the manifold or the Xmas Tree) co-
ordinate pairs. More details on these options can be found in the Pressure Only Surface
Equipment Section.
The 'Rate Multiplier' column enables simulation of the pressure drop due to several wells
being connected to a production manifold via a common surface flow line. The fluid
velocity in the flow-line is multiplied by the value entered - thereby increasing the
frictional pressure losses. For most applications it should be left at its default value of 1.

199
PROSPER
As an example, the pressure drop in a flow-line connected to 3 identical wells could be
modelled using a pipeline rate multiplier of 3. 2 parallel flow-lines having identical
dimensions can be modelled by entering the actual dimensions for one pipe and a
pipeline rate multiplier of 0.5. It is also possible to vary the rate multiplier along the
pipeline to simulate varying sections of dual pipelines for example.
Right clicking on a row in the table allows data to be Copied, Pasting or Cut as well as
Pipe insulation (e.g. concrete, foam or bitumen) can be modelled and to define the pipe
insulation click the Enter button to display the following screen:
Select the required insulation type from the drop-down list, then enter the thickness.
Enter the insulation beginning with the innermost layer. PROSPER uses the thermal
properties in its database to calculate the thermal conductivity of the composite
insulation. Click OK to return to the surface equipment screen. Different insulations can
be entered for each section of the flow-line as required. The calculated composite
thermal conductivity is referenced to the pipe inside diameter.
Pipes can be laid on the surface (burial depth = 0) or buried. The diagram below shows
the burial depth geometry.
User Guide 200

The burial depth is the distance between the soil surface and the bottom of the pipe
(including insulation, if present). The pipe is partially buried if the burial depth < O.D. of
the insulated pipe.
Ensure that the flow-line pipe geometry is consistent with the pipe burial
depth. If necessary, insert another node and change the burial depth for e.g.
the riser.
The soil conductivity around buried surface pipes is taken from the Thermal
Properties database for the shallowest rock type entered in the Lithology
screen.
The downhole equipment section is used to describe the production tubing, SSSV and
restrictions. The following equipment items are available:
Mild steel tubing
Plastic coated tubing
Stainless steel (either 13% or 25% chromium)
SSSV
Restrictions
The thermal properties database for down-hole equipment elements can be edited or
added to if required. Pressure and temperature changes across subsurface safety
valves and restrictions (nipples) are modelled. The following is an example of a down-
hole equipment data input screen:
201
PROSPER
For the Enthalpy Balance temperature model the casing dimensions and material type
are entered under 'Drilling and Completion,' so the down-hole equipment description is
required only for the tubing string.
To select tubing string elements to build up the tubing string description, click on the list
box arrows to the right of the item fields and make the appropriate selection from the
drop-down list.
Right Clicking on a row in the table allows data to be: copied, pasting or cut as well as
Up to 18 tubing string elements can be input. For complex completions, simplify the
data entry by entering only the major elements that dominate the overall tubing pressure
drop.
The Rate Multiplier column enables simulation of the pressure drop due to intermittent
sections of dual completions. The fluid velocity in the tubing is multiplied by the value
entered - thereby increasing the frictional pressure losses. For standard single tubing
completions it should be left at its default value of 1.
2.5.2.2.4 Temperature Data
The Temperature Data section is required for the calculations of heat loss for the
surface flow lines and in the well-bore. The input data required will change depending if
the 'On-land' or 'Off-Shore' option has been selected in the Options | Options screen:
User Guide 202

In the 'Temperature Data' screen enter the temperature gradient in the formation (just as
in the 'Geothermal Gradient' section for 'Rough Approximation').
If the well is on land, then the air humidity, temperature and velocity are required as well
as the ground level with respect to the origin.
If the well is offshore, then in addition to the data on the air, the sea level and sea bed
depth must be entered along with the temperature profile and velocity of the sea.
203
PROSPER
2.5.2.2.5 Drilling and Completion
This data is used to calculate the heat transfer coefficients down hole. If the offshore
option has been selected the marine riser parameters must be entered in this section.
Entries must be from TOP to BOTTOM. Thus, the riser will be the first entry.
The completion fluid liquid and gas 'types' can have a significant effect on the heat loss
through the annulus as the properties can differ significantly. If pressure is maintained on
the annulus, the mud weight used should be modified to reflect the actual annulus
pressure at the packer depth. If the well is being gas lifted, the program assumes that
the annulus is full of gas down to the injection point.
c as well as allowing rows to be inserted, deleted or cleared.
Ensure the Tubing OD is less than the Casing ID.
For complex completions fluids, select the appropriate Customised Options from the
main Drilling and Completions section. Completion fluid property data will be
entered via look-up table data. The figure below shows the data required when
selecting the Completion Fluid Gas Type | Customised option from the drilling and
User Guide 204
completions section.
Five temperature dependent tables of properties can be entered. Please ensure that
the table will span the expected range of pressure and temperature conditions. The
program will not extrapolate outside the range of the input table. The Import button can
be used to import the data from a wide variety of sources.
2.5.2.2.6 Lithology
The program contains a database of thermal properties for various rock types including
sandstone, shale, limestone, dolomite, halite and others. The thermal properties
database can be edited and added to as required. If detailed lithology data is available
it should be entered in the screen shown below. If no data is available, use shale from
surface to total depth.
205
PROSPER
The reservoir temperature and pressure should be entered for the production reference
depth. The formation temperature gradient is interpolated between the reservoir and
surface environment temperatures.
Right clicking on a row in the table allows data to be copied, pasted or cut as well as
Thermal properties for buried pipelines are taken from the shallowest
formation type entered in the 'Lithology' screen.
2.5.2.2.7 Databases
This optional feature is used to access the thermal properties databases for editing or
addition of user-defined materials. Select 'Databases' and click 'Edit' and the following
selection screen will be displayed:
User Guide 206
Depending on the selection, PROSPER expects input of thermal conductivity, emissivity,
specific heat capacity, specific gravity or density.
Check that the units are correct prior to entering the thermal properties.
Edited values remain in memory and become part of a particular well model file when
the file is saved. To permanently save edited values or new user-defined entries for use
in other projects click the Save button to keep them in the database. The Reset button
is used to return all entries to their default values.
2.5.2.2.8 Gauge Details
Up to 10 gauges can be added to a well in PROSPER:
207
PROSPER
The pressure and temperature at these gauges will be given as additional results in any
calculation being run.
2.5.2.3 Improved Approximation
Equipment entry for the 'Improved Approximation' temperature model varies little from
the 'Rough Approximation' option. Click on 'System Equipment' to display the following
input screen:
User Guide 208
To start data entry for a new application, click All | Edit. PROSPER will then display all
the relevant input screens in sequence. If data has already been entered, clicking the S
ummary command button will display a summary of the current equipment. To go back
and edit one particular equipment item, click on the button beside the appropriate item.
Data can be entered for the surface equipment and then include or exclude it
at the bottom of the Equipment Data screen.
Entering data for the 'Surface Equipment' is the same as for Predicting Pressure Only
except for the requirement to enter the overall heat transfer coefficient and the
surrounding temperature. The fluid temperature in the pipeline is not longer required to
be entered as this is now calculated.
209
PROSPER
The heat transfer coefficient can be specified for each pipe segment and should not be
confused with the pipe thermal conductivity.
The heat transfer coefficient accounts for the heat flow through the production tubing,
annulus and insulation (if present) to the surroundings. Heat transfer by forced and free
convection, conduction and radiation must all be accounted for in the value of the overall
heat transfer coefficient. In PROSPER, the overall heat transfer coefficient is referenced
to the pipe inside diameter.
The 'Downhole Equipment' section of PROSPER defines the path which the fluid takes
to surface and should be defined from the bottom hole (normally taken to be the top of
the producing perforations) to the well head.
User Guide 210
The 'Downhole Equipment' input data is the same as for Predicting Pressure Only.
2.5.2.3.4 Temperature Data
PROSPER requires the formation temperature profile together with the heat transfer
coefficient to be entered on this screen:
Enter static formation temperatures from e.g. extrapolation of temperatures
recorded on logging runs - NOT flowing well bore temperatures.
As for surface equipment, enter an overall heat transfer coefficient that describes the
resistance to heat flow by all mechanisms (convection, radiation and conduction) from
the well to its surroundings. This value can vary throughout the formation. The Enthalpy
Balance temperature model is a convenient way to determine average heat transfer
coefficients. The heat transfer area is referenced to the pipe inside diameter.
211
PROSPER
PROSPER requires a minimum of two points for the geothermal gradient; one
taken at the depth of the well head and one taken at the bottom-hole depth.
The formation temperature will be calculated by linear interpolation between
the entered points.
2.6 IPR Data Input
This section describes how PROSPER defines the reservoir inflow performance. The
following table lists the Inflow Performance options:
IPR
Method
Oil &
Water
Dry &
Wet Gas
Retrograde
Condensate
Back Pressure
C and n
Composite
CBM Producer (available when well
type is set to CBM Producer)
Darcy
Dual Porosity
External Entry
Fetkovich
Forchheimer
Forchheimer with Pseudo - Pressure
Multirate Forchheimer with Pseudo -
Pressure
Horizontal well - No Flow Boundaries
Horizontal well - Constant Pressure
upper boundary
Horizontal well - dP friction
Horizontal well - transverse vertical
fractures
Hydraulically fractured
Jones
Multi-lateral
Multi-layer
Multi-layer - dP Loss
User Guide 212
Multi-rate C and n
Multi-rate Fetkovich
Multi-rate Jones
Modified Isochronal IPR
Petroleum Experts
P.I. Entry
SkinAide
Thermally Induced Fracture
(injection only)
Transient
Vogel
SPOT
2.6.1 IPR Single Well Data
The Inflow Performance Relationship (IPR) defines the flow into the well from the
reservoir. Calculating an IPR results in a relationship between the bottom hole pressure
and the flow rate passing into the well.
Click System | Inflow Performance on the main toolbar and the main data entry
screen will appear.
213
PROSPER
2.6.1.1 The Main Data Entry Screen
The screen consists of three parts.
1. Section Buttons. At the top right of the dialogue screen are two buttons, labelled
Select Model and Input Data. These allow switching between screens that control
model selection and detailed data input. The former also contains generic data
relating to all models (such as reservoir pressure and temperature), and the latter
manages the data input specific to the chosen model.
2. Action Buttons. To the left of the section buttons is a set of buttons that perform
various actions such as 'Calculate'.
3. Model Selection Screen. The child screen is the area below the action and section
buttons and contains either the model selection or the data input screens. A
reservoir model, as well as a skin model if appropriate, must be selected on this
screen. A number of general reservoir parameters such as pressure, temperature
and fluid properties must also be selected.
User Guide 214
2.6.1.2 Section Buttons
The Section Buttons are used to switch between the Select Model screen and the
Input Data Screen.
The Select Model screen is used to select the IPR model which is to be used and, if
applicable, a Skin model should also be selected. This screen also requires general
reservoir properties which are independent of the model selected (such as reservoir
pressure and temperature) to be inserted.
The Input Data screen is used to input the data which is required for the specific IPR
and Skin models which have been selected. If additional options such as 'sand control'
or 'relative permeability correction' have been selected, then the data for these models
are also inserted in this screen.
As well as switching between the model selection and data input screens the section
buttons also indicate the validation status of the screens. The selection of one screen or
the other is shown by the indentation of the button for that screen and the validity of the
data is flagged by the colour.
Green means that all the required data is entered and within the numerical range for the
units chosen; where appropriate, extra consistency checks have also been carried out.

Red implies that either there is insufficient data entered or it is out of range/inconsistent.
In addition, if no models at all are selected the Select Model and Input Data buttons
are marked invalid. Also, if not enough models are selected the Select Model button is
marked invalid (e.g. a reservoir but no skin model).
2.6.1.3 Action Buttons
Done
This button exits the screen after saving and validating all the data
pertaining to the chosen models. If the data are not valid an option of
remaining in the IPR edit screen and reviewing the validation errors that are
listed in a validation error dialogue is provided. This also occurs after the
validation in the Calculate, Transfer Data and Save Results button
commands. If the IPR section is exited with invalid data left in the input then
all calculation options using IPR data and models are disabled.
Cancel This exits the screen and restores the data to its state at the start of the
main edit session. Any changes made during the current visit will be lost.
Validate Checks that the data on the current child screen falls within the validation
ranges of each variable. If the data is not valid, the validation dialogue will
appear with diagnostic messages. If any data is missing, then this is also
highlighted.
Reset This replaces the data of the current child screen with the data that was
current when the screen was entered
215
PROSPER
Help This displays information relevant to the current child screen
Calculate Saves and validates all the data pertaining to the chosen models (e.g.
Darcy reservoir model and Enter Skin By Hand) then runs the correct
calculation routine if the data are valid. On successful completion of the
calculation the results are automatically plotted
Plot Will produce a plot screen appropriate to the current reservoir model (for
example, a Darcy plot) and plot the data from the last Calculate command.
Report Enters the PROSPER Reporting System. The report produced will depend
on the current model choices
Export Can export current data (input and results) to the printer, a file, the clipboard
or the screen
Test Data
Allows to enter the test data (rate vs Bottom Hole Pressure, a date stamp
and a comment) that will be then displayed in the IPR plot
Sensitivity

Allows to perform sensitivities on the various parameters affecting the IPR
Transfer
Data
Saves and validates all the current data before opening a standard File
Save As dialogue that provides an opportunity to save the data to file in
MBAL input format (.MIP).
If PROSPER has been opened from a session in GAP then the data are
posted to GAP instead. The transfer button does not prompt for creation of
a .MIP file.
Save
Results
This option is only enabled when PROSPER is run from GAP. On a
successful validation options to either over-write the current file or to save
the PROSPER file using File Save As options are provided
GAP This option is only enabled when PROSPER is run from GAP. It shuts down
the IPR screen and minimises PROSPER, thus bringing GAP to the forefront
Note that the Save and Validate sequence carried out by several of the
action button commands does not actually save to file but transfers data
from the context of the IPR data screen to the PROSPER data structure in
memory. Hence, files should regularly be saved to avoid losing work due to
power failures or crashes.
2.6.1.4 Model Selection Screen
An example of the model selection screen for the Oil and Water fluid choice can be
seen below:
User Guide 216
The 'model selection' part of the IPR input screen controls the choice of almost all the
tabbed dialogues that will be seen in the subsequent data input screen.
There are four major selections done in this screen. These are:
Selection of Reservoir Model
For each fluid various single well IPR models available to be selected. Details on
each model can be found in the subsequent sections of this guide.
Selection of Mechanical/Geometrical Skin Model
The user has the option of entering the skin by hand or using one of the analytical
models to model the mechanical and geometric skin.
Selection of Deviation / Partial Penetration Skin Model
There are three skin models and these become available if a analytical skin
model of mechanical / geometric skin calculation has been used.
Reservoir input
The user also specifies the pressure, temperature, producing GOR and water cut
at this screen.
Compaction Permeability Reduction Model.
This option can be set to Yes or No. If set to Yes, the user must enter an initial
217
PROSPER
reservoir pressure, compressibility and compaction model exponent to model
the decrease in permeability due to compaction.
Relative permeability.
This option can be set to Yes or No in case of oils. If set to Yes, the user has the
option of defining a set of relative permeability curves, which will be used to
change productivity of the system with changing water cut.
The gravel pack selection and the type of completion (cased or open hole) are
chosen from the main Options screen (in the PROSPER main menu) but some
reservoir models have internal gravel pack data entries instead.
In case gas coning option has been selected in main options, for oils the
coning button is displayed to allow the activation of a dialogue screen in which
parameters for the calculation of rate-dependent GORs can be entered
If the fluid is a gas or a condensate the format of the screen is very similar; only the
reservoir and other model input selections vary for example, in gas systems, we have
CGR and WGR instead of GOR and WC.
The choice of reservoir models governs which subsidiary models (principally skin) are
enabled. Thus, horizontal well models do not require a deviation skin data entry and
some of the more complex reservoir models (e.g. multi-layer with dP friction loss)
contain their own skin and gravel pack models.
2.6.1.5 Data Input Screen
The data input screen contains a set of data entry tabbed dialogues that become
available depending on the IPR model and other options selected.
The tabs are coloured according to the validity of the data on the
corresponding dialogues.
If the tab is green, then the data is valid for the current system set-up.
If it is red, then the data is invalid or empty.
If the tab is grey, then this tab is not applicable to the current reservoir
model (or model selection) and so is inaccessible.
User Guide 218
The tabs are labelled as follows:
Reservoir Model
Mech/Geom Skin
Dev/PP Skin
Gravel Pack
Relative Perm
Viscosity
Compaction
Notes on Data Validation:
On each of the IPR input screens there is a validate button. Pressing this
button invokes a checking routine which flags for the any invalid entries. This
validation is only carried out on the screen currently being viewed.
Notes on Data Entry in IPR section
In all the IPR input screens, for various options, the data may be required to be entered
in one of the following ways:
219
PROSPER
Entering a value against a blank field
Pressing a push button, which takes us further into another screen, where actual
data required is entered as indicated against Dietz calculator on the screenshot
above reported.
Using a drop-down list.
Some models require data entered for multiple layers (e.g. multi-layer and
multi-layer with dP friction loss) and/or multiple completion zones (e.g.
horizontal well with dP friction loss and Wong-Clifford deviation/partial
penetration skin model).
In dialogues with grid entry it is also possible to select, copy, cut and paste
blocks of the table, using mouse drag operations and the buttons provided on
the screen. As the data in a table are typically interdependent some
consistency validation checks are carried out in addition to the range
validation.
2.6.2 IPR Models for Oil and Water Wells
The IPR model chosen depends upon the available data and the type of inflow
sensitivities to be performed.
The following sections list various inflow models that are available for oil wells.
For more details on each IPR model, the Reference Section details the papers and
books on which the models are based.
2.6.2.1 P.I. Entry
A straight-line inflow model is used above the bubble point based on the equation
shown below. The Vogel empirical solution is used below the bubble point, the test point
being the rate calculated using the following equation at bottom hole pressure equal to
bubble point. The user input productivity index (PI) is used to calculate the IPR. The IPR
rates are always Liquid Rates. Hence the PI refers to Liquid Rate.
) (
b r
P P J Q

Where J is the Productivity Index, expressed as (STB/day)/psi.
2.6.2.2 Vogel
The program uses the straight-line inflow relationship above the bubble point and the
Vogel empirical solution below the bubble point. A single flowing bottom hole pressure
and surface test rate is used to calculate the IPR, below the bubble point. From this IPR
the rate and bubble point pressure are used to evaluate the PI for the straight-line part of
User Guide 220
the inflow above the bubble point.
When calculating IPR sensitivities for reservoir pressure, PROSPER retains the correct
well productivity. Otherwise, changing the reservoir pressure changes the Vogel well
productivity.
2
max
8 . 0 2 . 0 1
r
wf
r
wf
P
P
P
P
Q
Q
2.6.2.3 Composite
This is an extension of the Vogel inflow solution (Petrobras method) that accounts for
water cut.
Vogel essentially decreases the inflow below bubble point because of gas formation.
However, if the water cut is higher the inflow potential will increase and approach a
straight-line IPR due to single-phase flow.
More information on the 'Composite' model can be found on page 30-32 of 'The
Technology of Artificial Lift Methods - Volume 4' by Kermit Brown.
A test flow rate, flowing bottom-hole pressure and water cut are required to be entered.
2.6.2.4 Darcy
The program uses the Darcy inflow equation above the bubble point and the Vogel
solution below the bubble point. The Vogel solution is based upon the rate when the
FBHP is equal to the bubble point as calculated by the Darcy equation.
The required inputs are:
Reservoir permeability (total permeability at the prevailing water cut and GOR)
Reservoir thickness (thickness of producing reservoir rock, i.e. thickness of net pay
interval)
Drainage area
Well bore radius
Dietz shape factor (to account for the shape of the drainage area)
If the effects of water cut are to be taken into account when calculating the PI, the
Relative Permeability Curve options should be consulted.
221
PROSPER
2.6.2.5 Fetkovich
The Fetkovich equation for oil is a modified form of the Darcy equation, which allows for
two phase flow below the bubble point. The Fetkovich equation can be expressed as:
) ( ' ) (
2 2
wf r b r
P P J P P J Q
Enter the same inputs as for the Darcy example plus the relative permeability for oil.
Skin can be entered either by hand or calculated using Locke's, Macleod's or the
Karakas and Tariq method.
2.6.2.6 Multi-rate Fetkovich
This method uses a non-linear regression to fit the Fetkovich model for up to 10 test
points. The model is expressed as:
Q C P P
r wf
n
(( ) / )
2 2
1000
The fit values of C and n are posted on the IPR plot. If the reservoir pressure is not
available, the program will calculate it. For producing wells, enter a reservoir pressure
lower than the measured flowing bottomhole pressures. The program will dismiss the
reservoir pressure that has been entered and calculate it.
2.6.2.7 Jones
The Jones equation for oil is a modified form of the Darcy equation, which allows for
both Darcy and non-Darcy pressure drops. The Jones equation can be expressed in
the form:
( ) P P aQ bQ
r wf
2
Where "a" and "b" are calculated from reservoir properties or can be determined from a
multi-rate test. The same data as for the Darcy model plus the perforated interval is
required. Skin can be directly entered or calculated using the available methods.
2.6.2.8 Multi-rate Jones
This method uses a non-linear regression to fit for up to 10 test points for the Jones
model.
User Guide 222
i.e.
( ) P P aQ bQ
r wf
2
If the reservoir pressure is not available, the program will calculate it. For producing
wells, enter a reservoir pressure lower than the measured flowing bottomhole pressures.
The program will dismiss the reservoir pressure that has been entered and calculate it.

2.6.2.9 Transient
This IPR method takes into account the change of deliverability with time. This method
can be particularly important for tight reservoirs. Both the Darcy and Jones equations
assume that the well has reached pseudo-steady state flow conditions. In tight
reservoirs, the transient equation can be used to determine the inflow performance as a
function of flowing time. Once the flowing time is long enough for pseudo-steady state
flow to develop within the drainage radius, the Darcy inflow model is then used. Enter
the same data as the Darcy example plus:
Porosity (Enter the reservoir porosity)
Time (Time in days, must be greater than 0.5 days)
The transient IPR equation is:
'Time' is the flowing time since the last reservoir pressure equalisation up to the time of
the analysis.
The Transient IPR model in PROSPER is designed to:
Check whether the production is in the transient state or semi-steady state.
If it is in the transient state, then the IPR will be calculated using the equation
mentioned above.
If the production has already reached the semi-steady state conditions, then the
IPR will be calculated using the semi-steady state inflow equation
The units used in the above transient IPR equation are oilfield units:
Q = stb/d P = psig = cp B
o
= rb/stb
k = mD t = hours C
t
= 1/psi h, r
w
= ft
Note:
223
PROSPER
Although the total saturation weighted compressibility is used in the literature,
PROSPER only uses the fluid compressibility as the relative magnitude of the formation
compressibility is such that it will have negligible impact on the pressure drop
calculations.
2.6.2.10Hydraulically Fractured Well
The hydraulically fractured well inflow model can be used to run sensitivities on hydraulic
fracture designs. The model is transient and is particularly useful in determining the
transient deliverability of a well after stimulation.
The hydraulically fractured well model is based on the paper by Cinco Ley - SPE 6014.
Gravel packs can be combined with the hydraulically fractured well IPR to model
Frac-Packed wells
Reservoir
permeability
Total permeability at prevailing water cut
Formation thickness Thickness of producing reservoir rock
Drainage Area This is the drainage area from which the well is producing
Wellbore radius Radius of the wellbore
DIETZ shape factor Depends on the shape of the drainage area.
Time Enter the time since the last reservoir pressure equalisation
up to the time of the analysis.
Fracture Height The original model assumes that fracture height is equal to
that of the reservoir thickness, however, the fracture height
(Hf) is used in Gas Wells to compute the Non-Darcy factor.
The fracture height is therefore only used for gas well and is
not used for oil wells.
Fracture Half Length Half length of the fracture
Dimensionless
Fracture Conductivity
Dimensionless fracture conductivity is a key design
parameter in well stimulation that compares the capacity of
the fracture to transmit fluids down the fracture and into the
wellbore with the ability of the formation to deliver fluid into
the fracture.
Defined as:
f R
f f
x K
b K
FCD
where:
FCD Fracture Conductivity
Kf Fracture Permeability
User Guide 224
bf Fracture Width
Kr Reservoir
Permeability
xf Fracture Half Length
The skin by hand is the 'Fracture Face Skin'. This can be set to zero if the fracturing
program has been performed such that there isnt an additional pressure drop in the
fracture. If the fracturing program has been such that it leads to an additional pressure
drop then this skin value can be increased. There cannot be a 'negative skin'
associated with the 'fracture' as the fracture is being explicitly modelled in this case. The
analytical models such as karakas-tariq are not applicable for the fracture skin and are
hence not available.
2.6.2.11Horizontal Well - No Flow Boundaries
This steady-state inflow model is based on the work of Kuchuk and Goode. It assumes
that the horizontal well is draining a closed rectangular drainage volume that is bounded
by sealing surfaces. The well can be placed anywhere within the drainage region. The
pressure drop along the well bore itself is not taken into account and so this model may
not be suitable for long horizontal sections drilled in high productivity reservoirs where
high flow rates may lead to considerable frictional pressure drops. Instead, the
Horizontal well - friction dP IPR should be used in such cases.
The definitions of symbols for various parameters to PROSPER horizontal well
model are as per this manual and not necessarily on basis of the reference
paper.
Enter:
Reservoir
permeability
Horizontal
Anisotropy
Ratio of Ky/Kx where Kx is permeability in the direction of the
horizontal well and Ky is the permeability perpendicular to the
horizontal well
Vertical Anisotropy Ratio of Kz/Ky where Kz is the vertical permeability
Length of well Horizontal producing section, L
Length of drainage
area
Reservoir dimension parallel to well, Lx
225
PROSPER
Width of drainage
area
Reservoir dimension perpendicular to well, Ly
Distance from length
edge to centre of well
Xw
Distance from width
Yw
Distance from bottom
of reservoir to centre
of well
Zw
A sketch outlining the main geometric parameters is shown below:
2.6.2.12Horizontal Well - Constant Pressure Upper Boundary
The reservoir geometry is the same as for the No Flow Boundaries case, except for a
constant pressure upper boundary. The pressure drop along the well bore itself is not
taken into account. This model requires the same input data as the Horizontal Well -
Bounded Reservoir model above.
The plot below compares PROSPER calculated IPR values with those obtained by
Kuchuk and Goode for a well in the centre of a 4000 by 4000 square reservoir.
User Guide 226
PROSPER Horizontal Well IPR
vs Fine Grid Simulation
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5
L1/2/Lx
P
.
I
.

(
B
O
P
D
/
p
s
i
)
0.01
0.1
1.0
h = 50'
zw = 25'
rw = 0.25'
kh = 50 md
vis = 1 cp
Anisotropy
4000'
4
0
0
0
'
Simulator - Lines
PROSPER - Symbols
2.6.2.13Multi-Layer Inflow
The multi-layer inflow model allows up to 50 discrete reservoir layers to be entered as
shown in the following example input screen:
227
PROSPER
Each layer can have different reservoir pressures, inflow models and fluid properties
and the oil gravity, GOR and water cut may be entered differently for each layer. The
produced fluid properties in the wellbore are determined from the summation of the
individual layer contributions. The summation accounts for cross flow between layers
having different pressures. Each layer can be gravel packed if desired.
All reservoir pressures should be referenced to the same depth - the depth of the
solution node (the last node in the down-hole equipment)
For cases where the zones are separated by significant depth or friction pressure
losses are significant, the Multi-layer - dP Loss in Wellbore IPR model should be used.
If PVT matching has been used in the PVT section, it is assumed that it was
performed on the commingled layer fluids. The fit parameters generated will
be applied to all PVT calculations for all layers in determining the combined
inflow performance.
To use the Multi-Layer IPR, enter the reservoir temperature then click 'Input Data' to
enter the tab-controlled screen, and then click on the 'Reservoir Model' tab button. For
each layer, select the inflow model from: Darcy, Multi-rate Jones, or PI Entry methods
then enter the layer PVT properties, average pressures, thickness and skins. For each
User Guide 228
layer, click the 'Layer Data' button and enter the information required by the inflow
model.
To facilitate rapid comparison of flow rates using different completion options,
select a Null IPR type for a layer i.e., from the Layer Model drop-down
dialogue box select the blank (no text) option. This effectively turns the layer
off. To return it to production, re-select the original IPR type, and the layer
parameters etc. will be re-instated when the IPR is re-calculated.
2.6.2.14External Entry
This option allows an externally generated IPR data set to be imported or directly
entered. Up to five tables can be entered to allow sensitivities to be calculated on any
arbitrary set of variables. For example, IPRs for a range of reservoir pressures
calculated by a simulator could be input using this option.
An example of an external entry IPR input screen is shown below:
External IPR tables can also be imported from ASCII files. The file format is given in
Appendix D of the PROSPER User Guide.
229
PROSPER
Curve Label and Units
These fields allow the user to identify the curves with a label and units. Note that label
and units will appear only in the Sensitivity calculation in the list of sensitivity variables,
where one can interpolate among the entered curves.
Import/Export
It is possible to import or export the IPR tables for the External Entry IPR
2.6.2.15Horizontal well - dP Friction Loss in Wellbore
To adequately model horizontal well inflow in high productivity reservoirs, it is necessary
to account for pressure loss along the horizontal section. PROSPER divides the
horizontal section into 20 sections and a network algorithm solves for zone production
and well bore pressure. Pressure loss between these zones is accounted for. The
Horizontal well - dP Friction input screen is shown below:
User Guide 230
The reservoir parameters entered in the upper section of the screen determine the
overall well productivity using the selected model. The zone parameters are used by the
network algorithm to re-scale the overall productivity on a zone-by-zone basis. A
description of the input parameters follows:
Reservoir Parameters
Horizontal Well
model
Model used for overall well productivity
Reservoir
permeability
Horizontal
Anisotropy
Ratio of Ky/Kx where Kx is permeability in the direction of the
horizontal well and Ky is the permeability perpendicular to the
horizontal well
Vertical Anisotropy Ratio of Kz/Ky where Kz is the vertical permeability
Length of well Horizontal producing section, L
Length of drainage Reservoir dimension parallel to well, Lx
231
PROSPER
area
Width of drainage
area
Reservoir dimension perpendicular to well, Ly
Distance from length
Xw
Distance from width
Yw
Distance from bottom
of reservoir to centre
of well
Zw
The horizontal well models available are:
Kuckuk and Goode (bounded and constant pressure boundary)
Babu & Odeh
Goode / Wilkinson partial completion (bounded and constant pressure boundary)
The reservoir parameters are entered as for the original infinite conductivity (no
pressure loss) horizontal well model.
Geometric definitions vary between published horizontal well inflow models.
Ensure that geometric parameters entered in PROSPER are consistent with
the above definitions. Refer to the Horizontal Well IPR sketch for details.
Zone Parameters
Data for up to 20 zones can be entered. The required inputs are as follows:
Zone Type Blank, Perforated or Open Hole
Skin Method 'Enter by Hand' or 'Karakas & Tariq' for perforated zones
Gravel Pack Yes or No
Zone Length Length of zone along the well
Zone Permeability Average permeability of the zone at the prevailing water cut
Flowing Radius Internal radius of the completion tubing which is used in
friction calculations
Zone Roughness Roughness of zone for friction calculation
These parameters describe the local permeability and the flow path along the well bore.
Click the Zone Data button to enter details such as skin and perforation parameters. If
the Skin Method is Enter by Hand, the skin and open hole radius are required. If
Karakas & Tariq is selected, then enter the perforation details and PROSPER will
User Guide 232
estimate the zone skin. If the zone is to be gravel packed, this data is entered under
'Zone Data.'
To allow comparison of the IPR with and without friction losses, setting the
zone roughness to zero turns off the friction pressure drop calculation entirely
rather than calculating friction for a smooth pipe
Coning Calculations in Horizontal wells
The Ben Dikken and Chaperon correlations prediction of critical coning rates for gas,
water or gas and water have been implemented. From the 'Horizontal well - dP Friction'
data entry screen click Coning to display the Coning Calculations screen:
Enter a production rate and porosity then select the required coning calculation method.
Click Calculate to find the critical rate and time to breakthrough for the rate entered.
The pressure along the well bore for the specified rate is calculated and displayed by
clicking Plot.
233
PROSPER
The production contribution from each zone can be displayed as:
Rate per Unit Length
Percentage production
Cumulative percentage production
An example of a rate per unit length plot is shown below:
User Guide 234
The Horizontal Well - friction dP IPR models the pressure at the heel of the
well as a function of pressure. The intake node is therefore the heel of the well.
The heel should be the last node entered in System Equipment and Deviation
Survey tables - it is not necessary to enter details of the horizontal producing
section except in the IPR. If the length is included in both the IPR and down-
hole equipment sections, then the pressure drop will be accounted for twice.
2.6.2.16Multi-Layer - dP Loss in Wellbore
The Multi-Layer dP Loss in Wellbore model can be used to model the production from
multi-layered reservoir systems where pressure losses in the wellbore are significant.
PROSPER iterates until the production from each zone and the well pressures converge
at the solution rate.
The effect of the pressure drop due to gravity and friction between zones and cross flow
is also accounted for. An example of a Multi-Layer - dP Loss input screen is shown
below:
235
PROSPER
This screen allows for the entry of up to 50 layers. To enter PVT, IPR data (permeability,
test rates etc. depending on the IPR model selected) and layer skin, click the
appropriate button to display the input screen.
The layer depth entered for each layer is the depth to the BOTTOM of that layer. Hence,
the bottom of layer 1 becomes the top of layer 2 and so forth. The top of layer 1 is
defined in the row labelled 'TOP'. The depth entered for TOP is the depth for which the
IPR is to be evaluated (the solution node). This should be the same as the deepest
depth entered in 'System Equipment'.
The input data required are:
Layer Type Either Blank, Perforated or Open Hole
Measured Depth Measured depth of the bottom of layer n
True Vertical Depth TVD of the bottom of layer n
Layer Pressure Pressure at the bottom of layer n (referenced to the bottom
of layer n)
Layer Flowing
Radius
Internal radius of the completion tubing which is used in
friction calculations.
User Guide 236
Layer IPR Model Select from Darcy, Multi-rate Jones, P.I. Entry, Fractured or
Horizontal
Layer Skin Model 'Enter by Hand' or 'Karakas & Tariq' for perforated layer
Layer Gravel Pack Yes or No
Layer PVT Data GOR, Oil and Gas Gravity plus Water Cut
Layer Parameters Relevant parameters for the selected IPR model
Layer Skin Relevant parameters for the selected Skin model
Click Calculate and the IPR for each layer and the summation will be calculated and
displayed on a plot as follows:
To list the layer production in detail, click 'Results' and scroll through the layer results
one by one. An example results screen is shown below:
237
PROSPER
Scroll from the selection menu to view the results for each of the layers.
Gravel pack and well skin etc. can be seen by scrolling to the right of the results table.
Negative layer production rates indicate cross-flow into the layer.
If a zero roughness is entered, then inter-layer pressure drops are not
computed. The layer pressures are then equivalent to a potential referred to
the depth of the TOP layer. The calculations are then equivalent to the simpler
Multi-Layer IPR without dP model.
The multilayer option is also available for dry gas and gas condensate model.
Different IPR models (based upon gas systems) are available in this case.
The Gravel Pack sand control option is only available for the Multi-Layer dP
Loss in Wellbore IPR model and can be activated via the Options menu
2.6.2.17SkinAide
The Elf inflow and skin calculation method is incorporated in PROSPER. API perforation
characteristics can be used to estimate perforation damage given casing and formation
properties. A detailed description of SkinAide is given SkinAide Section of this guide.
User Guide 238
2.6.2.18Dual Porosity
This model is useful for naturally fractured reservoirs where the matrix (formation)
porosity is greater than the fracture porosity and the matrix permeability is much smaller
than the fracture permeability, but not negligible.
The model is based upon the work of Warren and Root in SPE426.
It requires the entry of the following parameters: fracture permeability, reservoir
thickness, drainage area, well-bore radius, porosity, time, storativity ratio and
interporosity coefficient. The latter two parameters are defined as follows:
1. Storativity ratio, = f cf / ( f cf + m cm)
where: f - fracture porosity,
cf - fracture compressibility,
m - matrix porosity and
cm - matrix compressibility.
2. Interporosity, = km rew^2 /kf
where: - shape factor (see Warren, J.E. and Root, P.J.: "The Behaviour of
Naturally Fractured Reservoirs.", SPE 426, SPEJ (Sept. 1963), 245-255.)
km - matrix permeability
rew^2 - effective well radius squared
kf - fracture permeability.
2.6.2.19Horizontal Well with Transverse Vertical Fractures
The horizontal well with transverse vertical fractures is based on a model proposed by T.
M. Herge and Leif Larsen in the SPE paper 28845. The model calculates an effective
wellbore radius based on fracture conductivity, fracture size, wellbore radius and
number of fractures. The fractures are assumed to be uniformly distributed along the
horizontal length of the well. This effective wellbore radius is then used in the horizontal
well - no-flow-boundaries IPR model (based on the work of Kuckuk and Goode) to
calculate the well productivity.
This is for use with wells that are stimulated with one or more transverse vertical
fractures. It is assumed that the fractures are circular, the well goes through their centre
and they are evenly spaced. If there is one fracture it is in the middle of the well. The
data to be entered are the same as those for a horizontal well, along with the fracture
half-length, its dimensionless conductivity and the number of fractures present.
The following steps describe the method of performing the calculations.
The fracture half length, fracture conductivity, and number of fractures are used to
239
PROSPER
calculate an equivalent wellbore radius. This calculation is based on the
technique developed by Hegre and Larsen (SPE 28845)
The effective well-bore radius is then used in the Horizontal Well No Flow
Boundary model to compute the IPR of the well.
Warning:
Care should be taken when using this model when considering reservoirs with limited
thickness. If the equivalent wellbore radius is calculated to be large, it may exceed the
reservoir thickness and this effective places the well on the edge or outside of the
defined drainage area. This will lead to unphysical results and therefore the model is no
longer applicable for these cases.
This is most commonly noticed when increasing the vertical anisotropy, number of
fractures, fracture half length or dimensionless fracture conductivity leads to a decrease
in the AOF reported. In such cases, the user may wish to consult a reservoir simulator
(such as REVEAL) which is able to model the multiple fractures along a well.
User Guide 240
2.6.2.20Thermally Induced Fracture Model
2.6.2.20.1 Overview
This IPR model is enabled when well type Injector and fluid type Oil and Water is set in
the Options | Options screen.
The algorithm follows the framework outlined in:
SPE 30777, Thermally Induced Fractures: A Field-Proven Analytical Model. SPE
Reservoir Evaluation & Engineering, February 1998. J-L. Detienne, Max Creusot,
Nicolas Kessler, Bernard Sahuquet and J-L. Bergerot.
Information was also assembled from SPE 7964 (radial reservoir temperature profile)
and SPE 11332 (coefficient for thermo-elastic stress equation). Note that the
temperature profile derivation uses the same basis as the work of de Lauwerier
referred to in SPE 30777.
SPE 7964: Analytical Definition of the Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient, A. B.
Zolotukhin.
SPE 11332: The Effect of Thermo-elastic Stresses on Injection Well Fracturing, T.K.
Perkins and J.A. Gonzalez.
This model is concerned with the thermo-mechanical effects induced by injecting cold
water into a hot reservoir. The method first tests whether a calculated P
wf
rises above
the reservoir stress around the well bore. If this occurs then a fracture is assumed to
propagate and the P
wf
at the fracture tip is equated to the reservoir stress (i.e.
equilibrium) by iterating on the fracture length. The fracture effect is incorporated in a
skin term, and two stress effects are considered; a thermo-elastic one (varies with
injection temperature) and a poro-elastic one (varies with P
wf
). The stress at the
wellbore is calculated by adding these effects to the initial reservoir stress. The P
wf
is
calculated using varying fluid and geometric properties (inner and outer radii) and a
Darcy-like model in three circular zones. The first (inner) is water that is still cool, the
second is water that has warmed up, and the third (outer) is the original reservoir.
The IPR calculated by this model consists, therefore, of two different zones with a break-
point where the fracturing occurs. See the following figure.
241
PROSPER
The model is not valid for uncontrolled hydraulic fracturing where the fracture length may
be several hundred feet. The fracture should not extend beyond the so-called cooled
injection zone, the extent of which is calculated using the temperature profile referred to
above.
This is the recommended approach when modelling injection wells as the thermal
effects of injected a cooler fluid into the formation are considered.
2.6.2.20.2 Data Entry
The Thermally Induced Fracture model reservoir data screen is split into two tabbed
screens, one handling 'Injecitivity Index' parameters, and one handling 'Thermo-
mechanical' parameters. Also, it is required to enter the injected fluid temperature in the
model selection screen.
PVT parameter
Injected Fluid
Temperature
Bottom hole flowing temperature of injection fluid
Injectivity Index Parameters
Reservoir
Permeability
Formation Thickness Thickness of producing formations
Drainage Area Enter the drainage area which is being produced from.
User Guide 242
DIETZ Shape Factor Depends on the shape of the drainage area
Wellbore Radius
Porosity The porosity of the reservoir.
Time Time in days, must be greater than 0.5 days.
Mean Historical
Injection Rate
The average injection rate over the history of the injection
well should be inserted.
Thermo-mechanical Parameters
Initial Reservoir
Stress
Stress under initial reservoir conditions
Sweep Efficiency
Injected Fluid
Specific Heat
Capacity
Overall Reservoir
Conductivity
Overall Reservoir
Specific Heat
Capacity
Overall Reservoir
Density
Top and Bottom
Surroundings
Conductivity
Top and Bottom
Surroundings
Specific Heat
Capacity
Top and Bottom
Surroundings
Density
Reservoir Thermal
Expansion
Thermo-elastic correlating coefficient, relates temperature
perturbation to stress perturbation
Biot's Constant Poro-elastic correlating coefficient, relates pressure
perturbation to stress perturbation
Poisson's Ratio
243
PROSPER
Reservoir Young's
Modulus
2.6.2.21Coning Calculation
In addition to the coning model implemented for the Horizontal Well with dP Friction
Loss model, a gas coning option can be chosen from the 'Options' screen in the main
menu. This applies to all oil IPR models. It modifies the solution GOR by multiplying it
by a weighting factor greater than 1, which is a positive function of the liquid rate. The
output is a total, or produced, GOR. The model implemented was originally developed
for high permeability reservoirs (see Urbanczyk, C.H, and Wattenbarger, R.A.,
"Optimization of Well Rates under Gas Coning Conditions.", SPE Advanced
Technology Series, Vol. 2, No. 2, April 1994).
The following data is required to calculate the total GOR from a rate:
Reservoir permeability
Perforation height (vertical distance from perforation top to bottom)
Vertical anisotropy
Vertical distance from perforation top to gas-oil contact
Three correlating parameters: F1, F3 and an exponent
If the gas coning is enabled then a Coning button appears on the model selection
dialogue screen. Clicking on this brings up a dialogue that allows the correlating
parameters to be tuned. There is an automatic matching facility, which calculates F3
from the other data and a (rate, GOR) coordinate. Also, the GOR can be calculated
from different rates whilst in this screen in order to verify the parameters.
It is recommended that this model be calibrated against measure rate versus
produced GOR data before using it as a predictive tool.
2.6.3 IPR for Gas and Retrograde Condensate
Over Seventeen inflow options are available, including a multi-lateral inflow model. The
choice depends upon the information available and the type of sensitivities that will be
done. If multi-rate test data is available, the modelled IPR can be matched to the
measured data.
As for oil, gas inflow models are divided between design and production applications.
Calculated IPR models can be used to estimate productivity for different completion
options. Other models are available for estimating productivity from measured flowing
pressures.
The average reservoir pressure and reservoir temperature must be entered for all inflow
User Guide 244
performance models, however both the Multi-rate C and n and Multi-rate Jones models
can be used to calculate the reservoir pressure from production test data.
For more details on each IPR model, the Reference Section details the papers and
books on which the models are based.
2.6.3.1 Jones
The Jones equation for gas is a modified form of the Darcy equation, which allows for
both laminar and non-Darcy flow pressure drops. The Jones equation can be
expressed in the form:
Q b Q a P P
2 2
wf
2
R
Where "a" and "b" are calculated from reservoir properties or "a" and "b" can be
determined from a multi-rate test.
Required data entry is:
Reservoir
permeability
Drainage Area
DIETZ Shape Factor Depends on the shape of the drainage area. Used to correct
the assumption that the flow into the well is perfectly radial.
Perforation Interval Used to calculate the non-Darcy coefficient
The Jones IPR model is discouraged from being used with high reservoir
pressures as the assumption of the model is to keep 1 / Z constant at all
pressures.
2.6.3.2 Forchheimer
The Forchheimer equation expresses the inflow performance in terms of a laminar and
a non-Darcy pressure drop coefficients expressed as:
Q b Q a P P
2 2
wf
2
R
The "a" and "b" factors are input parameters for the Forchheimer IPR model.
245
PROSPER
2.6.3.3 Back Pressure
In this form of the back pressure equation:
n 2
wf
2
R
) P (P C Q
C is determined from the reservoir pressure and reservoir properties. Required input
data are:
Reservoir
permeability
Drainage Area
Exponent n Between 0.5 and 1
2.6.3.4 C and n
This is the common form of the back pressure equation:
n 2
wf
2
R
) P (P C Q
C and n can be determined from a plot of: Q versus (Pr2-Pwf2) on log-log paper. n is
the inverse of the slope and varies between 1 for Darcy flow to 0.5 for completely non-
Darcy flow.
This option allows direct entry of C and n.
2.6.3.5 Multi-rate C and n
Up to 10 test points can be entered and they will be fitted to the C and n back pressure
equation for gas:
n 2
wf
2
R
) P (P C Q
The fit values of C and n are posted on the IPR plot and listed in the IPR report.
If the reservoir pressure defined in the IPR section is less than the highest value of the
bottom hole pressure for the test points, then PROSPER will automatically calculate the
reservoir pressure. For example, there are two well test data points defined for the IPR
model as follows:
User Guide 246
If the reservoir pressure defined is less than 2500 psig (the bottom hole pressure for the
lower rate), PROSPER will recalculate the reservoir pressure. If the reservoir pressure is
greater than the highest FBHP specified, then the Multirate C & n model is designed to
recalculate the C and n parameters so that the IPR will pass through the test data points
and the reservoir pressure specified.
It is advised to enter three or more test points. Using a single data point can
generate a non-representative IPR profile as multiple solutions become
available.
2.6.3.6 Multi-rate Jones
Up to 10 test points can be entered and they will be fitted to the Jones equation for gas
expressed as:
Q b Q a P P
2 2
wf
2
R
247
PROSPER
The fit values of a and b are posted on the IPR plot and listed in the IPR report. The
multi-rate Jones IPR is a convenient way to determine a and b from well tests. These
values can be entered in the Forcheimer IPR for calculating IPR sensitivities.
The program will automatically calculate the reservoir pressure if it is not available. For
producing wells, input a reservoir pressure lower than the measured pressures. The
program will dismiss the reservoir pressure entered and calculate one. For injection
wells, input a reservoir pressure higher than one of the pressures entered. The program
will calculate the reservoir pressure.
Note for injection wells. If flow test data for a producer has been fitted, the well
will have the correct IPR if it is then converted to an injector.
2.6.3.7 External Entry
Refer to External Entry for Oil.
2.6.3.8 Petroleum Experts
The Petroleum Experts inflow option uses a multi-phase pseudo pressure function to
model the reduction in well productivity resulting from increasing liquid saturation in
condensate wells. It assumes that no condensate banking occurs and that all the
condensate that drops out is produced. Transient effects on P.I. are accounted for if the
well is calculated to be producing in a time period before stead-state conditions have
been established.
User Guide 248
The following data is required to be entered:
Reservoir
permeability
Either total or effective permeability at connate water
saturation
Drainage Area
Perforation Interval Enter the TVD of the height of perforations for the well. This
is used to calculate the non-Darcy coefficient
Porosity Average over producing section
Time Refer to Transient IPR for Oil - Section 7.2.9
Connate water
saturation
Used in relative permeability calcs. - see below
Permeability entered Either total or effective at Swc
Non-Darcy Flow Enter by hand or PROSPER can calculate it
249
PROSPER
Factor
The non-Darcy coefficient can be entered from a well test where available or calculated
using a correlation.
The D factor calculation is based on equations 8.24 and 8.27 from Chapter 8 of
Fundamentals of Reservoir Engineering by L. Dake.
Since the Petroleum Experts IPR model calculates flow profile during transient
conditions, the constant in equation 8.27 is replaced by 1637. This is based on the
Essis-Thomas equation for flow during transient conditions.
The non-Darcy D-factor is calculated as a product of the following two variables:
D = A
1
*A
2
Where:
A
1
= 3.161E
-12
T
abs
SG / (
g
h
perf
2
r
w
)
A
2
= k
abs
h / (1637T
abs
)
k
ef f
= k
abs
(1-S
wc
)
2
= 2.73E
10
/ k
ef f
1.1045
The following diagram illustrates how PROSPER treats total and effective permeability in
the Petroleum Experts IPR model:
Petroleum Experts IPR
Relative Permeability Method
Liquid Saturation
R
e
l
a
t
i
v
e

P
e
r
m
e
a
b
i
l
i
t
y
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Krl
Krg when effective permeability is entered
Krg when total permeability is entered
Krg'
Slc
The mass flow rate of each phase is directly proportional to its mobility (k/ ), Krs can
be determined using PVT and the surface production rates. This technique is used to
determine the reduction in productivity as a function of the produced liquid ratios.
User Guide 250
The derivation of the Multiphase Pseudo Pressure technique and details of the
equations used are given in Appendix B.
2.6.3.9 Hydraulically Fractured Well
Please refer to Hydraulically Fractured IPR model in the Oil IPR section. Additional
input data for gas and condensate applications are connate water saturation, a non-
Darcy flow factor and either relative permeability to gas or total permeability.
2.6.3.10Horizontal Well - No-Flow Boundaries
Please refer to Horizontal Wells in OIL IPR section. Additional input data for gas and
condensate applications are connate water saturation, a non-Darcy flow factor and
either relative permeability to gas or total permeability.
2.6.3.11Multi-layer Inflow
The multi-layer inflow model allows up to 50 discrete reservoir layers to be entered each
with different reservoir pressures, inflow models and fluid properties. Each layer can be
gravel packed if desired. Both injectors and producers can be modelled.
The gas gravity, CGR and WGR must be entered for each layer. The produced fluid in
the well bore is equivalent to the summation of the individual layer contributions. Refer
to Multi-layer Inflow for Oil for more details.
2.6.3.12Horizontal Well - dP Friction Loss in Wellbore
The reservoir porosity and connate water saturation are required to be input in addition
to the parameters described in the Horizontal Well- dP friction loss model in the Oil IPR
section.
2.6.3.13Dual Porosity
Please refer to the Dual Porosity model in the IPR for Oil section. Additional input data
for gas and condensate applications are connate water saturation, a non-Darcy flow
factor and either relative permeability to gas or total permeability.
2.6.3.14Horizontal Well with Transverse Vertical Fractures
Please refer to Horizontal Well with Transverse Vertical Fractures in the IPR for Oil
section. Additional input data for gas and condensate applications are connate water
saturation, a non-Darcy flow factor and either relative permeability to gas or total
permeability.
251
PROSPER
2.6.3.15Multi-Layer - dP Loss in Wellbore
The Multi-Layer dP Loss in Wellbore model can be used to model the production from
multi-layered gas reservoir systems.
Please refer to the Multi-Layer dP Loss model for oil wells for further details.
2.6.3.16Modified Isochronal Inflow Model
The 'Modified Isochronal' test is a type of deliverability test conducted in gas wells to
generate a stabilised gas deliverability curve (IPR). This test overcomes the limitation
of the isochronal test, which requires long shut-in times to reach the average reservoir
pressure.
In the modified isochronal test, the shut-in periods are of equal duration, as are the
flowing periods. The final shut-in pressure before the beginning of the new flow is used
as an approximation of the average reservoir pressure. The same procedure is typically
repeated four times. A stabilised point (pseudo-steady state) is usually obtained at the
end of the test.
Modified isochronal tests are commonly used in gas wells, because they require less
time and money to produce results comparable to the isochronal test. This IPR model is
based on the standard Back Pressure Model

The flow at any selected rate should be continued long enough for the reservoir to
approach steady-state (stabilised) conditions. The time to reach stabilised conditions is
called the readjustment time. For wells with wide well spacing (large drainage radius
values), low permeabilities, or high gas compressibilities (low reservoir pressures),
large readjustment times can be expected. In cases where the readjustment time
exceeds the duration of each test, the test data can be corrected to isochronal
conditions and then to stabilised conditions as described below.
When a well is tested from an initial steady state shut-in condition, the increase in
drainage radius with time is not dependent upon the rate. Therefore, separate flow tests
conducted for the same length of time will reach the same drainage radius.
When a well is not shut-in between tests until steady state is reached, successive tests
will indicate values of (P
2
res P
2
wf) which are too large because of the increasing
User Guide 252
drainage radius. For the general case, a table of correction factors to be applied to (P
2
res
P
2
wf
) to obtain an isochronal performance curve from conventional performance
data can be calculated as follows:
Flow Correlation Factors
The back pressure equation coefficients C and 'n' are obtained by non-linear
regression using the isochronally corrected data. 'n', the reciprocal of the slope of this
line, is constrained to a value between 0.5 and 1.

Although 'n' is constant, the coefficient 'C' is not the same at stabilised flow conditions
as it is at isochronal conditions. It is calculated using the same technique as before,
regressing on C and keeping n constant, after adjusting the isochronal (P
2
res
-P
2
wf
)
values to stabilised conditions using a variation of the following equation.
The time to stabilisation is calculated as follows:
2.6.3.17Forchheimer with Pseudo Pressure
This IPR model is based on the Forcheimer IPR using pseudo-pressure function instead
of pressure:
where the pseudo-pressure function is defined as:
253
PROSPER
a and b are the input parameters for the IPR model.
NOTE: The a and b parameters for the pseudo pressure Forcheimer IPR are not the
same as the a and b parameters used in the pressure squared Forcheimer IPR.
2.6.3.18Multirate Forchheimer with Pseudo Pressure
This IPR is based on the Forchheimer IPR with pseudo-pressure (refer to previous
section):
The a and b parameters are here determined by means of multi-rate tests data.
2.6.4 Dietz Shape Factors
Select a value for DIETZ shape factor from the list of reservoir descriptions below.
User Guide 254
255
PROSPER
2.6.5 IPR for CBM Wells
When the CBM Producer option is selected in the Options | Options screen, an
additional IPR model called the CBM Producer becomes enabled:
This model will calculate both phases directly from inflow equations and will use the
relative permeability curves entered to calculate the relative permeability values used in
the equations. This allows the gas IPR to be calculated using pseudo pressure, even
though it is the secondary phase.
When this option is selected, the PI of the liquid is entered and from this gas inflow is
calculated. This is done using the following equations:
User Guide 256
2.6.6 Skin Models
PROSPER divides the total skin into two parts. These are:
Mechanical / Geometric Skin.
Deviation / Partial Penetration
The skin values could be either:
Entered by Hand
Calculated Using Models.
2.6.6.1 Mechanical/Geometrical Skin
Enter Skin by Hand
If a reliable skin value is available from well testing, then this value should be directly
entered by selecting the "Enter by hand" option. Alternatively, a value can be used to
match the model to test data using PROSPER.
It is assumed that this value will contain deviation and partial penetration
information.
In case the entered skin is only mechanical skin, there is an option of enabling
the 'Wong-Clifford' model for deviation and partial penetration in the input
screen for the skin itself.
Skin Evaluation using Models
PROSPER provides 3 methods of estimating a mechanical/geometrical skin factor
257
PROSPER
using input parameters such as perforation geometry, depth of damage etc.
The skin estimation models provided in PROSPER are those of:
Locke
McLeod
Karakas and Tariq
The required input parameters are often difficult to accurately define, therefore the
absolute value of the calculated skin often cannot be precisely predicted. The power of
these techniques is their ability to assess the relative importance of completion options
on the overall value of well skin.
The Elf SkinAide inflow method can also be used to estimate skin pressure drops for
cased- and open-hole completions with and without gravel packs.
PROSPER can also be used to estimate the value of the skin pressure drop across the
completion and the proportion of the total pressure drop attributable to the various
completion elements.
'Karakas and Tariq' has been found to give good results in many field applications. The
following input data are required:
Reservoir
permeability
Either total or effective permeability at connate water
saturation
Perforation diameter Entry hole diameter
Shots per foot Shot Density
Perforation length Effective perf. length in formation
Damaged zone
thickness
Thickness of invasion
Damaged zone
permeability
Permeability in invaded zone
Crushed zone
thickness
Crushing associated with perforation
Crushed zone
permeability
Reduced permeability near perf. tunnel
Shot phasing Angle between perforations
Vertical permeability
Wellbore radius Enter the open hole radius, not casing I.D.
User Guide 258
An example of the input data for the Karakas and Tariq method is shown below:
A sketch outlining the main geometric variables is shown in the figure below.
If the permeability values to use for the different modelled zones are unknown, the
Karakas and Tariq paper provided the following guidelines:

259
PROSPER
Damaged zone
permeability
= 50% of Reservoir Permeability
Crushed zone
permeability
= 25% of Reservoir Permeability
Vertical permeability = 10% of Reservoir Permeability
Enter the requested data and, having entered some reservoir model data, press Cal
culate to display an IPR plot. The plot shows the pressure drop resulting from the total
skin as well a breakdown of the individual factors contributing to the total skin as per the
following example. The individual factors to be plotted can be chosen from the menu at
th bottom left hand corner of the screen:
This plot is useful to assess the efficiency of a particular perforating program by allowing
the user to instantly assess the completion pressure loss resulting from different
perforation options. For gravel packed wells, the value of skin posted on the plot does
not include the gravel pack skin. Click 'Display Plot Results' on the IPR plot screen to
display the breakdown of dPs resulting from each completion element:
User Guide 260
An enhancement to the skin modelling options in PROSPER is the ability to apply the API
RP43 or SPOT methods to determine the actual length and diameter of perforations
(figure below).
261
PROSPER
Note on Skin:
Locke's technique is valid for shots per foot of 1,2,4,6,8,10,12,and 16.
2.6.6.2 Deviation/Partial Penetration Skin
In PROSPER three models are available to model the 'Deviation and Partial
Penetration Skin':
Cinco / Martin-Bronz
Wong-Clifford
Cinco (2) / Martin-Bronz
The Cinco / Martin-Bronz requires the following data:
Deviation angle of well
Partial penetration fraction
Formation vertical permeability
The Cinco / Martin-Bronz is based on two correlations. The deviation skin is calculated
using the Cinco method, whereas the partial penetration skin is calculated using the
Martin-Bronz method.
The Cinco / Martin-Bronz model does not consider the anisotropy in the reservoir, that
is, it considers the reservoir as isotropic. The vertical permeability entered in the
deviation and partial penetration skin is only used for calculating the Partial Penetration.

This model is based on a correlation. The validity of this extends to wells up to 65
degrees.
The Cinco (2) / Martin-Bronz model is similar to the Cinco / Martin - Bronz model,
however, the difference between the two models is that the Cinco (2) / Martin-Bronz
model also considers the anisotropy in the reservoir. The vertical permeability entered
in the 'Deviation and Partial Penetration' screen is used to calculate the deviation skin.
This means that it is valid for wells up to 75 degrees.
The Wong-Clifford model can compute a skin for multiple completions. The Wong-
Clifford model does not have a separate calculation for the deviation & partial
penetration skin - it is a point source solution that calculates a skin that combines all of
the skin effects in one value. This total skin is placed in the deviation skin column and
the partial penetration skin is set to zero.
Please note that for the Wong-Clifford model the perforation interval length should not
be less than three times the effective wellbore radius in order for the model to be valid.
This can be important in cases such which use negative skin as the effective wellbore
User Guide 262
radius can be significantly increased.
This model requires the following data entered:
1. Reservoir parameters:
Formation vertical thickness
Well-bore radius
Drainage area
Dietz shape factor
Formation vertical permeability ratio
Local vertical permeability ratio
Horizontal distance from well to reservoir edge
Depth of top of reservoir
2. Completion parameters the following for each completion:
Completion start measured depth
Completion end measured depth
Completion start true depth
Completion end true depth
2.6.7 Other IPR-related features
Depending on the options selected throughout the model, different tabs will become
available in the Input Data screen. Below are a description of each possible tab.
2.6.7.1 Sand Control Options
PROSPER offers different sand control options that can be selected in Options |
Options under the Well Completion | Sand Control drop down menu:
263
PROSPER
The following sand control options are available:
- Gravel Pack,
- Pre-Packed screen,
- Wire-wrapped screen and
- Slotted Liner
The following sections detail the input parameters which are required for each model to
be used. For a more in depth discussion of the calculations involved for each method
please refer to the Sand Control Calculation Section of the Appendix.
2.6.7.1.1 Gravel Packed Completion
PROSPER can model openhole gravel pack as well as cased hole gravel pack
depending upon the selection of well completion type in the Option | Option screen.
User Guide 264
PROSPER models gravel packed completions as a concentric cylinder having a user
specified permeability connected to the well bore via perforations of specified diameter.
By sensitising on perforation spacing and diameter, the effect of pressure drop due to
flow concentration on well performance can be investigated. Likewise, the effect of
varying gravel length (i.e. the thickness of gravel between the OD of the screen and the
ID of the original open hole) on skin can be evaluated. A sample gravel pack data input
screen for a cased hole is shown below:
The following data input is required:
Gravel pack
permeability
Enter the in-site permeability for the gravel
Perforation diameter Diameter of perforation tunnel
Shots per foot Shot Density
Gravel pack length Distance from the screen O.D. to the sandface
Perforation interval The perforation interval for the sand control options is used
for calculating the flow velocities only and is the measured
depth not the TVD
Perforation efficiency Proportion of perforations that are open and effective
265
PROSPER
Beta (Turbulence) Select if the Non-Darcy flow factor is Calculated or Entered
Method Single Phase or Multiphase
The 'Multi Phase' method consists of using phase-weighted fluid properties
during gravel pack pressure drop calculations. This option is only active in
case of Oil fluid type.
The 'Single Phase' method is the classic method which utilises the main fluid
type properties (i.e. Oil properties in case of oil fluid).
On the right side of the screen a table shows typical permeability data for different types
of gravels.
The pressure drop across a gravel pack is computed using a summation of a Darcy and
a non-Darcy component. For a cased oil well, the pressure drop due to the gravel pack
(dP
gravel
) is calculated using the Jones IPR equation:
Q b Q a dP
2
GRAVELPACK
Where:
a = The non-Darcy term,
Q = The total liquid rate and
b = The Darcy term
Intermediate calculations are required prior to computing the dP

gravel
value and consider
the following variables:
K
g
Gravel Pack Permeability
(1.47E7)/(Kg^0.55)
PerfDi Perforation Diameter
SPF Shots per ft
PRFINT Perforation Interval
AOTF
Area Open To Flow = (PerfDi/24)
2
SPF*PRFINT
o
Oil Viscosity in cp
B
o
Oil FVF
o
Oil Density
L Gravel pack length
User Guide 266
The Darcy (B-term) and the non-Darcy (A-term) are calculated
a-Term = 9.08E-13* *B
o
2
*
o
*L/12/AOTF
2
b-term =
o
*B
o
*L/12/(1.127E-3*K
g
*AOTF).
This dP may then be transformed into skin using an appropriate relationship.

The main geometric parameters are shown on the following sketch:
Skin can be calculated using one of the methods described in Section 7.3 or directly
entered. Note that partial completion skin is included in the total well skin, and is not
affected by adjusting the gravel pack completion parameters. The total well skin as
measured by a well test prior to gravel packing should be entered. Click Calculate
when finished entering data and an IPR plot similar to that below will be presented (the
plotting of the individual dP components can be chosen from the Variables menu in the
plot window):
267
PROSPER
The contribution of the gravel pack to the total skin pressure drop can be readily seen
on the IPR plot. The value of skin posted on the IPR plot does not include the gravel
pack skin. Click Display Plot Results on the IPR plot screen to display the breakdown
of pressure drops resulting from each completion element. Sensitivities can be
calculated on factors such as gravel pack thickness, shots per foot etc. to evaluate the
effectiveness of gravel pack designs. Gravel packed completions are also available in
the Multi-layer IPR model.
The PROSPER gravel pack model allows for non-Darcy (i.e. dP proportional to rate
squared) effects within the gravel pack and the resulting rate dependent skin. Lift
curves for gravel packed wells generated using PROSPER can be calculated from the
sandface, through the completion, and back to the production manifold. This more
correctly models the IPR as compared to simply imposing an additional skin to allow for
the gravel pack pressure loss as is done in many reservoir simulators.
Gravel packs can be combined with the Hydraulically Fractured Well IPR to
model Frac-Pack completions.
2.6.7.1.1.1 Gravel Pack Completion Velocities
In the IPR results (accessible from the Plot view, Display Plot Results menu) the
velocity at the Casing (Vc) is available, along with the Gravel Pack Non-Darcy factor (A):
User Guide 268
Vc is the velocity of the fluid at the entry point of the casing.
It is calculated by dividing the flow rate of the fluid with the area of flow at the casing.
These velocity calculations were implemented at the request of clients who require
these velocities for gravel pack design.
2.6.7.1.2 Pre-Packed Screen completion
Pre-packed screens can be modelled in PROSPER. For this, the option "Pre-packed
Screen" should first be selected under Options | Options.
The description of the sand control type is made under System | Inflow Performance
in the Sand Control tab of the Input Data screen:
269
PROSPER
The following inputs are required to describe a pre-packed screen completion:
- Screen inner radius,
- Screen outer radius,
- Screen inner and outer Permeability,
- Screen inner and outer Turbulence.
If the Beta value for the screen is unknown, it can be left blank in order to allow
PROSPER to calculate it or set to zero to ignore it from the calculation.
The IPR curve is generated with by selecting Calculate:
User Guide 270
To see details of the impact of the pre-packed screen, select 'Display Plot Results' at
the top of the plot screen.
2.6.7.1.3 Wire-Wrapped Screen Completion
Wire wrapped screens can be modelled in PROSPER. For this, the option "Wire
Wrapped Screen" should first be selected in the Options | Options screen.
The choice of sand control type is made in the System | Inflow Performance menu in
the Sand Control tab of the Input Data screen:
271
PROSPER
The following inputs are required to describe a pre-packed screen completion:
- Screen outer radius,
- Screen outside Permeability,
- Screen outside Turbulence.
If the outside beta factor (turbulence) is unknown, it will be calculated by PROSPER if
the box is left blank or ignored from the calculation if entered as zero.
The IPR curve is generated with Calculate:
User Guide 272
In order to visualise the rate-dependent skin associated with the wire packed screen, it
is possible to see the results of the plot by selecting Display Plot Results from the top
of the plot screen.
2.6.7.1.4 Slotted Liner Completion
PROSPER can model wells completed with slotted liners. For this, the option "Slotted
Liner" should first be selected in the Options | Options screen.
The choice of sand control type is made in the System | Inflow Performance menu in
the Sand Control tab of the Input Data screen:
273
PROSPER
The input data required to model the slotted line completion are:
- Liner Inner Radius,
- Liner Outer Radius,
- Slot height
- Slot width
- Slot density
- Screen Outer Radius (optional)
- Outer Permeability and
- Outside turbulence (optional).
The IPR curve is generated with Calculate:
User Guide 274
In order to visualise the rate-dependent skin associated with the wire packed screen, it
is possible to see the results of the plot by selecting Display Plot Results from the top
of the plot screen.
2.6.7.2 Relative Permeability Curves
Relative permeability curves are optionally used together with fluid viscosities (from
PVT) to calculate the total fluid mobility for a given water cut. The calculated IPR can be
matched to measured data and used to calculate IPR pressures for any rate and water
cut
Relative Permeability Calculation Details
If you have selected the Correction for Vogel option on the main IPR screen then the
modelling is extended to include Gas Relative Permeability Curves. The calculated
IPR can be matched to measured data and used to calculate IPR pressures for any rate,
water cut and GOR
Relative permeability can be applied to all oil IPR models in PROSPER.
The relative permeability for oil and water is a function of the reservoir water saturation.
If the relative permeability curves have been defined, the total mobility (oil, water and
gas) can be determined. This enables the producing drawdown (IPR) to be calculated
as a function of both water cut and production rate.
Enter the following data for both oil and water (and optionally gas):
275
PROSPER
Residual
Saturation
Parameter indicating the minimum saturation above which the
related phase becomes mobile.
Endpoint Relative
Permeability
Maximum relative permeability.
Corey Exponent Parameter defining the slope of the relative permeability curve.
A Corey exponent of 1.0 defines straight line relative
permeability curves. Values greater than 1 give a concave
upwards curve i.e. delayed water breakthrough. Corey
exponents less than 1 define a concave downwards relative
permeability curve i.e. early water breakthrough.
Water cut during
test
Matching measured and calculated IPR pressures establishes
the well productivity for the prevailing water cut. To allow
PROSPER to re-calculate the IPR for other water cuts, the water
cut during test value is used to determine the reference water
saturation for the test conditions.
GOR during test
(optional)
Matching measured and calculated IPR pressures establishes
the well productivity for the prevailing GOR. To allow PROSPER
to re-calculate the IPR for other GORs, the GOR during test
value is used to determine the reference gas saturation for the
test conditions.
To enter lab relative permeability data, click Test Data. Enter your test data and click O
K to display the plot again. If necessary, adjust the values of Corey Exponents for oil
and water until PROSPER's calculated relative permeability curves fit the measured data
points.
Having entered and verified the relative permeability data, click Finish to quit the plot,
then OK to return to the IPR screen.
When relative permeability option is being used, water cuts for both the test data and
that used to calculate the IPR curve are required. The water cut during test value will
be carried over from the relative permeability input screen.
The water cut for calculation value can be subsequently changed to see the effect on
the calculated IPR. The same will apply for GOR if the Correction for Vogel option is
selected.
2.6.7.2.1 Relative Permeability Calculation Details
Relative Permeability Calculation Details
Oil and Water Only
The process is as follows:-
User Guide 276
Use the test water cut and the PVT model to calculate the downhole fractional flow
Fw.
Calculate the water and oil saturations that give the Fw. Note we set Sg=0 as the
IPR is already corrected for gas with the Vogel correction.
Calculate the relative oil and water permeabilities using the relative permeability
curves and the oil and water saturations.
Calculate a test mobility from
Mt = Kro/(oBo) + Krw/(wBw)
The water and oil viscosities are calculated from the test reservoir pressures and the
PVT. We should actually use the absolute oil and water relative permeabilities but since
the only use of the total mobility is when divided by another mobility, the final results will
be correct.
Whenever an IPR calculation is done:-
Calculate the PVT properties using the current reservoir pressure and the PVT
model.
Calculate the downhole fractional flow from the current water cut.
Calculate the water and oil saturations that give the Fw. Note we set Sg=0 as the
IPR is already corrected for gas with the Vogel correction.
Get the relative permeabilities for oil and water from the relative permeability
curves.
Calculate the current mobility M as shown above.
Modify the PI using:-
PI = PIi * M/Mt
In the above method we do not take into account the reduction in oil mobility due to any
increase in the gas saturation. When calculating the Sw and So for a particular Fw we
set Sg=0.0.
Oil, Water and Gas
If you wish to take the effect of increasing gas saturation into account then select the
Correct Vogel for GOR option. You will also be required to enter a Test GOR - this is
a produced GOR. The process will now be as follows:-
Use the test water cut, test GOR and the PVT model to calculate the downhole
fractional flows Fw and Fg.
Calculate the gas, water and oil saturations that satisfy the Fw, Fg and
So+Sw+Sg=1.0.
Calculate the relative oil and water permeabilities using the relative permeability
curves and the oil, gas and water saturations.
277
PROSPER
Calculate a test mobility from:-
Mt = Kro/(oBo) + Krw/(wBw)
The water and oil viscosities are calculated from the test reservoir pressures and the
PVT. We should actually use the absolute oil and water relative permeabilities but since
the only use of the total mobility is when divided by another mobility, the final results will
be correct.
Whenever an IPR calculation is done:-
Calculate the PVT properties using the current reservoir pressure and the PVT
model.
Calculate the downhole fractional flows Fw and Fg from the current water cut and
produced GOR.
Calculate the gas, water and oil saturations that satisfy the Fw, Fg and
So+Sw+Sg=1.0.
Get the relative permeabilities for oil and water from the relative permeability
curves and the oil, gas and water saturations.
Calculate the current mobility M as shown above.
Modify the PI using:-
PI = PIi * M/Mt
2.6.7.2.2 Test Data
To enter lab relative permeabilities, enter your test data and click Done to display the
plot again. If necessary, adjust the values of Corey Exponents for oil and water until
PROSPER's calculated relative permeability curves fit the measured data points.
2.6.7.2.3 Plot
Relative permeability curves are optionally used together with fluid viscosities (from
PVT) to calculate the total fluid mobility for a given water cut. The calculated IPR can be
matched to measured data and used to calculate IPR pressures for any rate and water
cut. Relative permeability can be applied to all oil IPR models in PROSPER.
The relative permeability for oil and water is a function of the reservoir water saturation.
If the relative permeability curves have been defined, the total mobility (oil, water and
gas) can be determined. This enables the producing drawdown (IPR) to be calculated
as a function of both water cut and production rate.
2.6.7.3 Viscosity Modelling
This screen is activated only when the fluid option non-Newtonian fluid is selected.
User Guide 278
Enter in this screen the required parameters:
Wellbore radius Radius of the hole, corresponding to the drill bit size
Drainage Area Area of the drainage region
Reservoir Thickness Vertical thickness of producing interval
Reservoir porosity Porosity
Connate Water
Saturation
Connate water saturation
These parameters are used to determine an equivalent flowing radius that will be used
by the program to estimate the pressure drop due to the friction in the reservoir.
The dP friction will take into account the fluid apparent viscosity (which is velocity -
dependent) calculated by the non-Newtonian viscosity model.
279
PROSPER
2.6.7.4 Compaction Permeability Reduction
The 'Compaction Permeability Reduction' option is an analytical model to estimate the
change of reservoir permeability due to reservoir compaction effects.
The correction is carried out by means of a correction factor that will be then applied to
the permeability
where:
Corr = Permeability Correction Factor (Multiplier)
C
f
= Rock Compressibility
P
R
= Current Reservoir Pressure
P
Ri
= Initial Reservoir Pressure
N = Compaction Model Exponent
This option can be enabled in the main IPR section:
The option will activate a new TAB screen in the 'Input Data' section where the basic
model inputs are required:
User Guide 280
The input data required by the model are:
Initial Reservoir
Pressure
Initial reservoir pressure
Reservoir
Compressibility
Reservoir Rock Compressibility
Compaction Model
Exponent
Exponent (see definition above)
2.6.8 Injection Wells
Irrespective of the inflow model used, injection well IPR calculations are complicated by
a number of factors as compared to producers:
The injected fluid temperature at the sandface is a function of surface
temperature, injection rate history and well configuration.
Relative permeability of injected fluid is required and will change as more fluid is
281
PROSPER
injected and at different distances from the wellbore.
Injectivity changes with time as the saturations around the well change.
Injecting a cooler fluid into the reservoir will create a cooled region around the
well bore which will change the stresses.
Fracturing (mechanical or thermally induced) often occurs because of these
changes in the stresses.
It is therefore normally best to use a numerical simulator such as REVEAL to model the
injection of fluids as these thermal and rock mechanical effects will be taken into
account.
If modelling a water injector in PROSPER, the best model to use will be the Thermally
Induced Fracture IPR model. Tutorial 03 details how such a model can be set up.
2.6.9 SkinAide
The SkinAide inflow method has been developed by Elf Aquamarine and
acknowledgement is given for its inclusion in PROSPER. The following description is
based on information provided by Elf.
2.6.9.1 SkinAide Theoretical Background
Consider the case of a partially penetrating, deviated well, cased and perforated and
equipped with a gravel pack. The total pressure drop around such a well corresponds
to the pressure difference between:
- an equipotential surface at the external limit of the reservoir drainage area, and
- another equipotential surface corresponding to the screen.
This total pressure drop is due to a number of features. Moving downstream from the
external limit of the drainage area towards the well:
- the position of the producing interval with respect to the reservoir geometry (due
to partial penetration and deviation).
- the damaged zone.
- interference between the different perforations.
- the crushed zone surrounding the perforation tunnels.
- gravel in the perforation tunnels.
- gravel in the annulus between the screen and the casing.
Pressure drops between equipotential surfaces can be added to one another, and the
conceptual model corresponds to an attempt to simplify the problem by finding
equipotential surfaces.
User Guide 282
2.6.9.1.1 Position of the producing interval with respect to reservoir geometry
The pressure drop due to the position of the producing interval with respect to the
reservoir geometry can be considered to be independent of the pressure drop
surrounding the well completion in so far as one can imagine an equipotential cylindrical
surface with, say, a 2 m radius, separating the two regions.
This pressure drop is calculated in SkinAide using a reservoir engineering correlation.
2.6.9.1.2 Interference between perforations and the damaged zone
Moving downstream, the next feature encountered is the interference between
perforations and the damaged zone. If the perforation tunnel emerges from the
damaged zone, the damaged zone has much less influence than if the perforation
remains entirely within the damaged zone.
283
PROSPER

The pressure drop due to interference between perforations and the damaged zone is
calculated using the Karakas and Tariq correlation.
2.6.9.1.3 The Crushed Zone
The downstream limit of the previous feature is the crushed zone. The outside surface of
the crushed zone, and the inner surface of the perforation tunnel are both assumed to be
equipotentials. As a result flow in both the crushed-only and the crushed-and-damaged
zones is radial.
Pressure drops in the crushed zone can be calculated analytically.
User Guide 284
2.6.9.1.4 Perforation tunnel which penetrates the formation
The next feature downstream is flow in that part of the perforation tunnel which
penetrates the formation. We use the flux into the tunnel previously calculated for radial
flow in the crushed zone to calculate the flow profile along the tunnel :
This situation can be solved analytically.
2.6.9.1.5 Perforation tunnel through the casing and cement
Moving yet further downstream, two equipotentials can be drawn, one at the external
surface of the cement, the other on the inside of the casing:
This linear flow can be solved analytically.
285
PROSPER
2.6.9.1.6 Annulus between Casing and Screen
The last feature is the region between the equipotential at the opening of the perforation
tunnel in the casing, and the screen.
An approximate analytical solution has been found for flow in this region.
2.6.9.1.7 Hemispherical Flow Model
The conventional linear perforation model assumes that the surface of the perforation
tunnel is an equipotential surface. This assumption breaks down when permeability of
gravel in the tunnel becomes sufficiently low. When permeability in the tunnel becomes
sufficiently small, flow in the reservoir approaches hemispherical flow towards the
perforation mouth.
Flow takes place
- in the reservoir beyond the crushed and the damaged zones
- in the damaged zone
- in the crushed-and-damaged zone
User Guide 286
- in the perforation tunnel itself.
Analytical solutions to hemispherical flow have been developed to represent this model,
which can be considered to be an upper bound to the conventional linear perforation
model.
2.6.9.2 Using SkinAide
When the SkinAide IPR model is selected, the following IPR Input screen is presented:
Select the required options for the Flow and Skin models plus Perforation Data. The
options are listed below:
2.6.9.2.1 Flow Model
Steady State - corresponds to a constant flux at the outer reservoir boundary. The
inflow at the external boundary is equal to the well flow rate. This boundary condition
corresponds to pressure maintenance by natural (aquifer influx, gas cap drive) or
artificial (gas or water injection). The steady state productivity equation is:
Semi Steady State - corresponds to no-flow at the outer reservoir boundary. This
boundary condition corresponds to reservoir depletion with no pressure
maintenance. The radial flow Productivity Index equation for semi-steady state is:
These equations differ only in the constant 3/4 vs 1/2 for steady state flow. These radial
flow equations can be generalised for other drainage geometries.

287
PROSPER
P
e
, the static reservoir pressure is the average pressure in the well
drainage area, not the pressure at the external boundary. P
e
is used in
the Productivity Index equation:
The reservoir pressure should be entered at the same reference datum
as the intake node depth.
2.6.9.2.2 Skin Model
Linear Flow - Skin pressure drop is calculated assuming that flow is predominantly
linear towards the well. This is the normal situation for a well completed across most
of the reservoir.
Hemispherical Flow - Skin pressure drop is calculated assuming a hemispherical
flow geometry. This situation occurs for single perforations or wells having extreme
partial completion effects.
Flow Giving Minimum dP - Skin pressure drop is calculated assuming flow is always
along the path of lowest resistance. (i.e. between linear and hemispherical flow)
2.6.9.2.3 Perforation Data
In-Situ Geometry Entered - The dimension of the actual perforations in the reservoir
are entered.
API Test Data Edition 4 - API perforation gun data are entered and SkinAide
estimates the downhole perforation geometry.
API Test Data Edition 5 - API perforation gun data are entered and SkinAide
estimates the downhole perforation geometry. This option utilises more recently
defined gun test specifications.
Having selected the required options, SkinAide requires data entry in the following
categories:
Geometry
(Reservoir dimensions)
Petrophysics
(Reservoir permeability etc.)
Damaged Zone
(Damaged zone properties)
Cased Hole
User Guide 288
(casing dimensions)
Crushed Zone
(Crushed zone properties)
Perforations
(Gun and perforation geometry)
Gravel Pack
(Only for Gravel Packed wells)
The data required can vary according to the options selected. Click each data entry
button in turn and enter the data as follows:
2.6.9.2.4 Geometry
Reservoir Thickness - Enter the thickness normal to the bedding plane in dipping
reservoirs. When thin shales are distributed throughout a heterogeneous reservoir,
use the net sand thickness.
Completed Interval - Enter the perforated interval as measured along the wellbore.
Distance to Top of Completion - This parameter affects partial completion skin and is
measured along the wellbore. If gross sand thickness is used for reservoir thickness,
289
PROSPER
enter the actual distance to the top perforation (dimension h
1
in the above sketch).
When using net sand, restrict the distance to net sand intervals.
Drainage Area - Area drained by the subject well
Dietz Shape Factor - Allows for drainage area shape and well placement.
Hole Diameter - Open hole drilled diameter. Use bit size or caliper measured size
where applicable. Perforation length, damage depth are measured beyond the hole
diameter.
Deviation - Average angle between the well axis and vertical.
2.6.9.2.5 Petrophysics
Horizontal Permeability - Reservoir permeability measured parallel to the cap rock
(along the bedding plane).
User Guide 290
Vertical Permeability - Reservoir permeability measured perpendicular to the
horizontal permeability in the vicinity of the completed interval. Used to determine
anisotropy ratio near the perforations. Values can be taken from core analysis.
Vertical Permeability for Geometrical Skin - Reservoir permeability for the bulk
reservoir measured perpendicular to the horizontal permeability. Determines the
anisotropy ratio between the completed interval and the remainder of the reservoir.
Porosity - Used in the high velocity flow coefficient correlation:
Where:
k Reservoir horizontal permeability
Reservoir porosity
a,b,c Constants
Correlations are used to estimate the values used in the high velocity flow
equation. Field specific correlations can be prepared from well test analysis.
Turbulence coefficient a - multiplier for the overall turbulence coefficient.
Dimensions are reciprocal distance.
Permeability exponent b - Permeability raised to this power. Default is -1.33. Note,
the exponent value entered corresponds to permeability in millidarcies regardless of
the current unit set.
Porosity exponent c - Porosity raised to this power. Default is 0.0. Note the
exponent value assumes the porosity is a fraction, regardless of the current unit set.
High velocity flow pressure drops arise from acceleration and deceleration of reservoir
fluids as they pass through pore throats as in the following diagram:
291
PROSPER
2.6.9.2.6 Damaged Zone
The damaged zone is modelled as an annulus surrounding the wellbore in which
permeability and porosity have been impaired during the drilling and completion
process. The depth of damage is measured beyond the drilled hole.
In anisotropic reservoirs, formation damage is deeper in the low permeability direction
than the high permeability. An elliptic damaged zone forms in such cases. SkinAide
assumes a circular damaged zone irrespective of reservoir anisotropy.
Damaged Zone Thickness - Since damaged zone skin is controlled by the ratio of
perforation tunnel length to damaged zone depth, enter a damage zone depth that
respects this relationship.
Damaged Zone Permeability - Determines the ratio of damaged zone to reservoir
permeability. Estimating the true value is not straightforward, however, the
undamaged reservoir permeability could be used as a starting point.
Damaged Zone Porosity - Porosity to be used in the high velocity flow coefficient
correlation.
2.6.9.2.7 Cased Hole
The casing dimensions are used to correct the API perforation length for field
conditions. The casing I.D. is calculated from the O.D. and casing weight.
User Guide 292
External Casing Diameter - Enter nominal casing diameter opposite the completed
interval.
Casing Weight - Enter nominal casing weight per unit length opposite the completed
interval.
2.6.9.2.8 Crushed Zone
Shaped charge perforating creates a cavity filled by charge debris and surrounded by a
zone of reservoir rock that has been altered by the high pressure / high temperature jet.
Charge debris is removed by perforation washing or underbalanced perforating - the
crushed zone remains. SkinAide recognises separate properties for the crushed zone
in the undisturbed reservoir and damaged zone.
Most of the high velocity flow pressure loss occurs in the crushed zone and is added to
the loss in the reservoir. Note that if a zero crushed zone thickness is entered, no high
flow velocity pressure drops are calculated.
Crushed Zone Thickness - Thickness of perforation altered zone. The default value
is 0.5 inches.
Crushed Zone Permeability - Reduced permeability for crushed zone within the
virgin reservoir.
Crushed Zone Porosity - Porosity in the crushed zone for estimation of high
pressure flow losses.
Crushed + Damaged Zone Permeability - Permeability for the crushed zone within
the damaged zone.
Crushed + Damaged Zone Porosity - Porosity for the crushed zone within the
damaged zone.
293
PROSPER
Permeability in the crushed and damaged zone is introduced by the ratio:
R
crushed and damaged
= Crushed and damaged zone (horizontal)
permeability / undisturbed formation (horizontal) permeability.
The same anisotropy ratio opposite the completion interval as applies to the
undisturbed formation is used for the crushed and damaged zone permeability.
It is suggested that the crushed and damaged zone permeability ratio should be
the product:
R
crushed and damaged
= R
damaged
R
crushed only
.
Where the ratio for the damaged zone:
R
damaged
= damaged (horizontal) permeability / undisturbed formation
(horizontal) permeability
and the crushed-only zone:
R
crushed only
= only crushed zone (horizontal) permeability / undisturbed
formation (horizontal) permeability.
2.6.9.2.9 Perforations
The perforation data input depends on the option selected. If In-Situ Geometry is
selected, the actual perforation sises are required. Alternatively, API test data can be
entered for a particular gun, and SkinAide will estimate the perforation geometry
considering completion and reservoir variables such as compressive strength and
casing size.
Common Perforation Parameters
Perforation Efficiency - The number of producing perforations is the product of
perforation efficiency, shot density and the length of the completed interval.
Perforation efficiency is used to account for ineffective perforations such as those
shot into shaly beds. If gross sand is used to define reservoir geometry, the
maximum perforation efficiency should be the ratio of net/gross reservoir sand. If net
sand is used, the perforation efficiency does not need to be further modified.
User Guide 294
Shot Density - Nominal shots per foot for the selected perforating gun.
Gun Phasing - Angle between two adjacent perforating charges. Affects
interference between perforation tunnels.
Angle Between Vertical Plane and Perforations - For anisotropic reservoirs, the
angle between the perforation tunnels and the direction of maximum permeability
influences productivity. When 0 or 180 guns are selected, perforations are all
aligned with the low side of the hole. For other gun phasings, SkinAide assumes an
angle of 45 .
In-Situ Geometry Entered
Tunnel Length - Length of effective perforation in the reservoir formation i.e. beyond
the cement sheath.
295
PROSPER
Tunnel Diameter - Diameter of effective perforation in the reservoir formation.
Cavity Entrance Diameter - Not active - use Tunnel Diameter. SkinAide presently
uses a cylindrical model for perforations. Future versions will allow a cone-shaped
perforation geometry.
Cavity Tip Diameter - Not active - use Tunnel Diameter. SkinAide presently uses a
cylindrical model for perforations. Future versions will allow a cone-shaped
perforation geometry.
API Test DataThe correction from test data to In-Situ conditions is influenced by the API
test series selected. The form of data input is identical for both options.
API RP 43/2 Total Target Penetration - Length of perforation in Berea sandstone
target. If RP 43/2 data is unavailable, use 2/3 of API RP43/1 cement target TTP.
API RP 43/1 Entry Hole Diameter - Entry hole diameter for steel / cement target
test. Note that the steel quality changes between Editions 4 and 5 of the API test
specifications. Ensure the relevant data is entered.
User Guide 296
Gun diameter - Gun diameter is used to correct API perforation test results for
stand-off.
Reservoir Uniaxial Compressive Strength - Compressive strength is used to
calculate in-situ perforation dimensions. Typical values of reservoir uniaxial
compressive strength are given in the following table:
Lithology Reservoir Uniaxial
Compressive
(psi)
Strength
(bar)
Loose sand 150 10
Sand which crumbles by hand 750 50
Sandstone from which sand grains can be peeled
by hand
1500 100
Well cemented sandstone 3750 250
Well cemented limestone 3750 250
Rock Density - Enter apparent In-Situ rock density as measured by a density log,
not the density of the minerals (e.g. Quartz) that comprise the formation grains.
Casing Elastic Limit - Used for correction of API data to In-situ perforation
dimensions. The elastic limit in thousands of psi corresponds to the pipe steel
quality. e.g. N80 casing has an elastic limit stress of 80,000 psi.
Reservoir Stress - Used for correction of API data to In-situ perforation dimensions.
Stress is assumed to be Isotropic. Generally the minimum effective stress (frac
gradient) is suitable.
Gravel Packs in SkinAideWhen the Gravel Pack option has been selected, additional
data entry is required to describe the pack geometry and properties. Separate gravel
properties can be entered for the annular gravel pack and the sand in the perforation
tunnels. This allows mixing of formation and pack sand to be simulated.
297
PROSPER
Screen Outside Diameter - The space between the screen O.D. and the drilled hole
diameter is occupied by gravel.
Annulus Gravel Permeability - Permeability of gravel in the space between the
screen and the open hole. Gravel size is specified in terms of mesh size. e.g. 20/40
mesh gravel will pass a sieve with 1/20 inch holes, but not pass a 1/40 inch sieve.
Average laboratory measured permeability values for various gravel sises are given
in the following table:
Gravel Mesh Lab
Permeability
Type (Darcies)
Ottawa Sand 12/20 500
20/40 150
30/50 90
40/60 60
50/70 30
Carbolite 20/40 350
16/20 500
Isopac 20/40 110
Annulus Gravel Porosity - Used in calculation of high velocity flow coefficient in the
gravel pack.
Tunnel Gravel Permeability - Used to reduce the permeability of sand in the
perforation tunnels due to mixing of formation and gravel pack sand.
User Guide 298
Tunnel Gravel Porosity - Used to reduce the porosity of sand in the perforation
tunnels.
The inflow and skin pressure drop are computed by clicking the Calculate button once
all the relevant input data have been entered and Plot to display the results. To evaluate
the contribution of individual completion components in the inflow performance, click
Variables and select the parameters to display as in the following screen example:
Select the required variables by clicking their check boxes. Click Done to display the
results:
299
PROSPER
Skin Components
The conceptual models used to calculate the total skin factor include :
- a contribution due to the position of the producing interval with respect to
reservoir geometry, called geometric skin S
geometric
- contributions due to pressure losses close to the actual wellbore, beginning with
the pressure loss due to the damaged zone and ending with pressure loss in the
casing/screen annulus for gravel packed wells. This contribution to the total skin
is called the completion skin S
completion
.
The total skin is the sum of the two components
S
total
=S
geometric
+ S
completion
The contribution S
completion
to the total skin is particularly convenient when using
reservoir engineering equations. However S
completion
does not necessarily reflect the
quality of the completion itself. Indeed, imagine two wells with identical completions,
producing reservoirs with identical properties, the thickness of one reservoir is double
that of the other:
User Guide 300
S
completion
= a k h DP
completion
/ ( Q m B )
Since DP
completion
is identical but reservoir thickness h differs by a factor 2, applying
the above relation leads to values of S
completion, which differ,
by a factor 2.
Mechanical skins are defined so as to reflect the quality of well completion. In the
formula for mechanical skins, the vertical reservoir thickness h is replaced by the length
of the producing interval (measured along the wellbore) h
p
:
S
mechanical
= a k h
p
DP
skin
/ ( Q m B )
where, for oil wells,
SI US French
a depends on units 2 7.07 10-3 0.0536
k permeability m2 mD mD
h
p
length of the completed interval m ft m
DP
skin
DP
real well
- DP
idealised well
Pa psi bar
Q flowrate (standard conditions) m3/s bpd m3/d
m viscosity (reservoir conditions) Pa.s cP cP
B fluid formation volume factor v/v v/v v/v
Total and mechanical skins are related by the simple formula :
S
mechanical
/ h
p
= S
completion
/ h
2.6.10 SPOT: Shell Perforating Optimisation Tool
The SPOT inflow method has been developed by Shell and permission is given for its
inclusion in PROSPER. The following description is based on information provided by
Shell.
2.6.10.1Introduction to SPOT
SPOT (Shell Perforating Optimisation Tool) is a module that enables engineers to
predict and compare perforation charge performance, assisting selection of the optimal
perforating gun. It should be highlighted that SPOT is not a perforating charge sales
tool; the purpose of SPOT is to allow Users to easily assess and compare performance
of different completion techniques. Perforating charge performance is calculated using:
Charge properties
Reservoir rock properties (field average or log scale properties)
301
PROSPER
Fluid properties
Drilling mud invasion models
SPOT can be used to analyze different completion types including; openhole,
conventional case and perforated, open hole perforated, and casing conveyed
perforated. Thus, a user can identify if perforating is the correct technique for their
application, and if not, pursue alternative technologies, including, but not limited to
barefoot completions, stimulation, underbalanced drilling and propellants.
SPOT is a powerful model that gives the user the ability to directly compare perforation
charge performance in reservoir rock on a log scale. It takes into account perforation
depth of penetration, entrance hole diameter, shot density and drilling mud invasion.
SPOT is intended to demonstrate that perforation charges often dont pass the mud-
invaded zone and that correct mud design is vital in these cases (particularly in low
permeability reservoirs).
In PROSPER, the output from SPOT, an Inflow Performance Relationship (IPR) curve,
can be directly combined with any Vertical Lift Performance (VLP) correlation to predict
the well performance under various operating conditions: well head flowing pressure,
water cut, GOR and so on..
Here is a list of the peculiar acronyms used in the SPOT inflow module along with their
meaning:
API
American Petroleum Institute
AOF
Absolute Open Flow
CBL
Cement Bond Log
CFD
Computational Fluid Dynamics
EoH
Entrance Hole Diameter
DoP
Depth of Penetration
FDC
Formation Density Compensated
GUI
Graphical User Interface
IPR
Inflow Performance Relationship
NWEVS
Near Wellbore Effective Vertical Stress
User Guide 302
RP
Recommended practice like API RP XX
OB
OverBalanced
SPOT
Shell Perforation Optimisation Tool
TWC
Thick Walled Cylinder
UCS
Unconfined Compressive Strength
WIQI
Well Inflow Quality Index

2.6.10.2Gun System databases
The gun database contains API 19-B
1
and API RP 43 Section I Data for perforating
guns available from:
Baker Hughes Incorporated (Baker)
Schlumberger (SLB)
Halliburton/ Jet Research Centre (Hall/JRC)
Dynawell (DYNA)
Innicor Subsurface Technologies (INNICOR)
Owen Oil Tools (Owen)
Explosivos Technologicos Argentinos (ETA)
GEODynamics (GEODynamics)
Titan (TITAN)
Companies were provided with an opportunity to adjust/ update data in the SPOT Gun
Database. It is recommended that Users cross check all critical information with the
appropriate perforating manufacturer/ service company before a gun type/ completion
method is selected.
303
PROSPER
Sections I to IV of API 19-B are summarised below:
Section I - firing a fully-loaded gun section under ambient conditions into a
standard casing and cement target;
Section II - firing a single charge under pressurised conditions into a stressed
rock sample;
Section III - firing a single charge into a metal target at elevated temperature;
Section IV - firing a single charge into a stressed rock sample under simulated
wellbore and reservoir conditions, then measuring the flow performance of the
perforated sample relative to its performance prior to shooting;
Section V
2
- measuring the amount of debris retained within a fired fully-loaded
gun section in order to calculate how much debris will be introduced into the
wellbore per foot of gun;
A report containing lists of all data can be automatically generated in SPOT by using
Data followed by Reporting selected from the Toolbar.
program. As API 19B data is not available for all gun systems, API RP43 data has
also been included in the database (data sources are clearly marked). Although API
RP43 is not officially valid, Section 1 testing for both API RP43 and API 19B is based
on concrete targets.
As concrete is not representative of reservoir rock, API 19-B and API-RP 43 Section 1
data is converted to downhole conditions in SPOT using Shell proprietary correlations
(based on laboratory research). Although these correlations should provide a
reasonable estimate of perforation characteristics in reservoir rock under downhole
conditions, a better estimate of perforation performance can be obtained by
conducting reservoir specific Section II (firing a single charge under pressurised
conditions into a stressed rock sample) and/or Section IV tests (firing a single charge
into a stressed rock sample under simulated wellbore and reservoir conditions, then
measuring the flow performance of the perforated sample relative to its performance
prior to shooting). If Section II or Section IV data is available, it can be entered into the
SPOT Vendor Database under the Section II/Section IV Data heading.
If the concrete strength during the API RP 19B or API RP43 test is not recorded in the
Gun Database, in accordance with the minimum allowable strength specified in API
RP 19B, a briquette strength of 5000psi is assumed in SPOT calculations.
1. API Recommended Practice 19-B, Recommended Practice for the
Evaluation of Well Perforators, 1
st
Edition, 28 Sep 2001
User Guide 304
2. To be introduced in the next revision of RP 19-B, a draft of which is with
API for review at the time of writing.
305
PROSPER
All the guns available in SPOT as well as corresponding information is displayed here.
Note that Normalised gun data displays Section 1 results that have been converted to
5000psi pressure (rather than ambient conditions).
Companies were provided with an opportunity to adjust/ update the data in the SPOT
Gun Database. It is recommended that the user cross checks critical information with
the appropriate perforating manufacturer/ service company before a gun type/
completion method is selected.
program. As API 19B data is not available for all gun systems, API RP43 data has also
been included in the database (data sources are clearly marked). Although API RP43 is
not officially valid, Section 1 testing for both API RP43 and API 19B is based on
concrete targets.
As concrete is not representative of rock, API 19-B and API-RP 43 Section 1 data is
converted to downhole conditions in SPOT using Shell proprietary correlations (based
on laboratory research). Although these correlations should provide a reasonable
estimate of perforation characteristics in reservoir rock under downhole conditions, a
better estimate of perforation performance can be obtained by conducting reservoir
specific Section II (firing a single charge under pressurised conditions into a stressed
rock sample) and/or Section IV tests (firing a single charge into a stressed rock sample
under simulated wellbore and reservoir conditions, then measuring the flow
performance of the perforated sample relative to its performance prior to shooting). If
Section II or Section IV data is available, it can be entered into the SPOT under the
Section II/Section IV Data heading.
The following data must be entered under the Section II/Section IV Data heading:
Basic gun information e.g. gun type, gun size and vendor name
Deep Penetrating/ Big Hole: the type of gun must be selected and if the gun is
classified as a deep penetrating or big hole charge. This information should be
available in the Gun Database. Generally, a deep penetrating gun will have an
entrance hole less than or equal to 0.5in.
Depth of penetration: the perforating depth of penetration measured from the inside of
the casing or tubing to the end of the perforation tunnel (Reference: API RP19B,
Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Well Perforators, 2001).
Entrance hole diameter: the diameter of the hole through the casing
Test sample compressive rock strength (UCS)
Effective stress: the net effective stress applied on the sample in a Section IV test or
3000psi for a Section II test (Reference: API RP19B, Recommended Practice for
Evaluation of Well Perforators, 2001). If a pseudo Section II test was conducted at
atmospheric conditions the effective stress would be zero.
Casing material: Select between J55, L80, P105 or P110. If a different material was
used in the test, pick the material with the closest hardness. i.e.:

User Guide 306
Material J55 L80 P105 P110
Brinell Hardness 180 230 275 320
Fluid fill type: This is the fluid fill in the pore spaces of the rock sample. According to
API RP19B, Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Well Perforators, 2001, the
pore fluid should be sodium chloride brine solution (3% by weight). This function
allows you to conduct a pseudo Section II or Section IV test with gas filled core to
represent a gas reservoir and input the result in SPOT. Note that the well bore fluid is
always assumed to be liquid.
Standoff during test: This is the distance from the outside of the perforating charge
case to the inside of the casing. According to API RP19B, Recommended Practice
for Evaluation of Well Perforators, 2001, the standoff should normally be 0.5in.
Core Sample size: Select between 4in and 7in core sample used in the Section II or
Section IV test. If neither a 4in or 7in core sample was used in the laboratory tests, the
user should select the core size closest to these bounds. This information is used in
the Synthetic Effective stress Correlation selected on the Options screen).
It should be highlighted that flow data obtained from Section IV test is not used in the
SPOT inflow performance calculation. The Core Flow Efficiency (CFE) ratio can
however be used as a qualitative check and for charge/charge comparisons.
The user also has the ability to enter additional gun systems in the Gun Database by
clicking the "Add" button..
Gun selection from the Vendor Database can be made according to:
Vendor
The type of gun i.e. wireline, tubing conveyed
Gun OD
Clearances:
o Enter the minimum restriction.
o Restriction Tolerance.
o Click "Update" which will only display guns with an OD less than the minimum
restriction minus the tolerance.
o Click "Clear" to remove the above filtering.
307
PROSPER
2.6.10.2.1 Gun
This dialogue is used to examine a single gun from the guns database. It is displayed in
different situations:-
Editing/entering a new gun in the database:
If you have the API 19B or 43 test for a new gun which is not in the default database, the
gun can be added by the user. In this case the dialogue is used to enter or edit the
information from the test sheet.
Viewing details for a selected gun:
User Guide 308
This dialogue is also used to display the details of the gun that the user has selected for
the SPOT calculations. Click the "Select Gun from Database" button to pick a gun from
the guns database. In this case most of the fields are disabled as they are read only.
The only two fields in the "Gun Details" that are enabled are Shot Density and Gun
Phasing. These two values are specified in the API 19B and 43 test. However some
guns can be configured to different values to those used in the test. In this case we allow
the user to modify them from the values in the test. Warning : although we allow these
values to be modified this is strictly incorrect as the shot density and phasing have an
effect on the Lp. The section 2/4 data is also enabled as this may be modified by the
user.
See the Gun Database help for specific information on the data.
309
PROSPER
2.6.10.2.2 Spot Perforation Calculations
This dialogue allows the user to select a gun from the PROSPER gun database and
correct the test Lp and EHD to in-situ conditions using the Shell SPOT corrections.
These are the same calculations as used in the full SPOT IPR but this calculation is for a
single set of conditions e.g. UCS, permeability. The Lp and EHD can then be
transferred to the PROSPER IPR data and used in calculation of skin.
Input Data:
This is a description of the in-situ data required by the SPOT Lp and EHD correction.
User Guide 310
Lp Correlation Type
API19B Section 1- API 19B Section II or IV Conventional Correlations- these
correlations assume that effective stress applied in a Section II or Section IV test
setup reaches the centre of the sample. The correlation should also be used for a
Section 1 test (no effective stress applied)
API 19B Section 1- API 19B Section II or IV Synthetic Rock Correlations- these
correlations are based on Shell laboratory tests in which it is believed that effective
stress applied in a Section II or Section IV type test setup does not reach the centre of
the core sample. These adjustments are made to reflect the fact that the
perforation depth of penetration under effective stress measured at surface in
conventional Section II and IV setups is not the perforation depth that would be
expected downhole under the same effective stress condition. It should be
highlighted that effective stress applied using a triaxial test approach is believed to be
valid and as such the API 19B Section 1- API 19B Section 2 conventional
correlations option should be selected.
It should be highlighted that effective stress applied using a triaxial test approach is
believed to be valid and as such the API 19B Section 1- API 19B Section 2
conventional correlations option should be selected.
Casing OD
Casing Weight
Casing Grade
API 19B/43 tests are performed through a casing defined in the test data. So if if a
much thicker casing is used then it will decrease the Lp as more of the gun energy is
lost perforating the casing. Or if a thinner casing is used then the Lp will be higher.
These data should refer to the casing at the depth of the perforation.
If a different casing grade was used in the test, pick the material with the closest
hardness. i.e.:
Mean Brinell Hardness 180 230 275 320
Layer Fluid - For producers this is fixed by the type of the producer. For injectors this
should be set to the fluid in the rock that is being perforated.
Rock Type - The rock type to be used in the perforation calculation must be selected.
(carbonate or sandstone). This will affect the perforation depth of penetration
calculation. It should be highlighted that SPOT does not take karsts and fractures into
account when modeling inflow performance of carbonates. This may result in unrealistic
flow results.
Use Downhole Standoff - Select "Yes" if you wish to enter a gun standoff. Otherwise
select "No" in which case the gun is assumed to be centralised.
Downhole Standoff - If "Use Downhole Standoff" is set to "Yes" enter the value to be
used.
311
PROSPER
Well Radius - Wellbore hole radius
Effective Stress Data:
In-situ effective stress is one of the key numbers in the correction of Lp and EHD in the
SPOT algorithm. This section of the dialogue allows entry of data to calculate the
effective stress or to enter the value directly.
Mean Sea Level wrt Origin, Sea Bed Depth wrt Origin - Used to calculate the effect
of sea on in-situ effective stress (enter zero if on-shore).
Depth - Measured depth of the perforation.
Overburden Pressure Gradient - This pressure gradient is used to calculate the
overburden pressure and subsequently the Near Wellbore Effective Vertical Stress
(NWEVS). The NWEVS is used in perforation depth of penetration calculations. A
common overburden pressure gradient (i.e.lithostatic pressure gradient) is 1psi/ft.
Reservoir Pressure - Average current reservoir pressure.
Enter Effective Stress, Effective Stress - To enter the value of effective stress
directly, select "Enter Effective Stress" and enter the "Effective Stress".
Gun Data:
This section of the dialogue shows the data relating to the selected gun. See Guns
Database for information on this data. Click the "Select Gun" button to pick a gun from
the guns database.
Section 2/4 Gun Data:
If section 2 or 4 gun test data is available, tick this box and enter the data. See Guns
Database for information on this data.
Calculated Data:
Click the "Calculate" button to calculate the actual Lp and EHD. If you wish to use these
values, click the "Transfer" button to copy these calculated values to the IPR data.
Note that the calculated casing ID is also shown. This is calculated from the casing OD
and density.
2.6.10.3SPOT: Model inputs
In order to use the SPOT inflow model, select | System | Inflow Performance and select |
SPOT from the list of the available Reservoir Models in PROSPER:
User Guide 312
In order to fully describe the SPOT reservoir model, select | Input Data at the top right
corner of the screen to access the various tabs (below listed from left to right) required
to enter the model inputs:
- Options
- Layers
- Log Data
- Completion Data
313
PROSPER
2.6.10.3.1 SPOT: Model inputs - Options
Lp Correlation Type:
API19B Section 1- API 19B Section II or IV Conventional Correlations- these
correlations assume that effective stress applied in a Section II or Section IV test
setup reaches the centre of the sample. The correlation should also be used for a
Section 1 test (no effective stress applied)
API 19B Section 1- API 19B Section II or IV Synthetic Rock Correlations- these
correlations are based on Shell laboratory tests in which it is believed that effective
stress applied in a Section II or Section IV type test setup does not reach the centre of
the core sample. These adjustments are made to reflect the fact that the perforation
User Guide 314
depth of penetration under effective stress measured at surface in conventional
Section II and IV setups is not the perforation depth that would be expected downhole
under the same effective stress condition.
It should be highlighted that effective stress applied using a triaxial test approach is
believed to be valid and as such the API 19B Section 1- API 19B Section 2
conventional correlations option should be selected.
Calculate Non-Darcy Skin:
Yes: a quadratic is used to account for high velocity flow
No: the quadratic (non-Darcy skin) term is not taken into account.
The only option for gas/condensate wells is Yes.
Activity:
The user has two choices:
New well: the well is being perforated for the first time or
Workover / Re-perforation: an already perforated and producing well needs to
be re-perforated.
Well type:
The well type can be:
Vertical
Deviated (up to 75 degrees deviation)
Horizontal (above 75 degrees deviation)
Inflow Equation:
For vertical or deviated wells the user has 2 IPR choices:
Vogel: SPOT uses a straight line inflow relationship above the bubble point and the
Vogel relationship below the bubble point to account for two phase flow. This equation
is based on an empirical relationship developed by Vogel using numerical
simulations.
Fetkovitch: the Fetkovich IPR model also accounts for two phase flow below the
bubble point. It was developed to improve Vogels correlation.
315
PROSPER
For horizontal wells the user has 4 IPR choices:-
Economides-Joshi: This model has been adopted from Economides (1990) and
Joshi (1988). It assumes the well is located in the center of the drainage volume. The
method is not appropriate for partially cased and perforated or partially openhole
perforated horizontal wells.
Borisov: This simple equation was developed by Borisov (1964) and has been found
to provide good results in many simple cases. The method is not appropriate for
partially cased and perforated or partially openhole perforated horizontal wells.
Babu-Odeh: This method treats a horizontal well as a vertical well turned sideways.
Despite being a simple concept, it has received wide acceptance. The method is not
appropriate for partially cased and perforated or openhole perforated horizontal wells.

Goode-Wilkinson: The method was adopted from Goode and Wilkinson. It is the only
horizontal well model in SPOT that can be used to calculate performance of a partially
cased and perforated horizontal well. The model also assumes that the horizontal well
has been drilled in a rectangular drainage area that is twice as long as it is thick (I.e.
reservoir length>>reservoir height). The method is not appropriate for partially
openhole perforated horizontal wells.
Note that Non Darcy skin effects are currently NOT considered in SPOT for horizontal
gas wells.
Log Data Input:
SPOT requires log data with porosity, permeability, UCS and TWC. However if not all
these types are available then the missing data can be calculated from correlations.
Also if other data such as FDC, shear & compressional sonic is available then it can be
used to calculate the required data.
In this combo-box, select the variables that you have available as log data. You will then
be able to enter them in the log data tab.
If no log data is available then select "None Available". The user will then be able to
generate log data with constant values in the log data tab.
Perforating Method:
For a new well there are two options:-
Single run perforating - Running in and perforating
One perforating gun is run into the well and fired. This is as per standard perforating
practices.
Double run perforating - Running in and perforating, then running in again and
perforating using the same gun
User Guide 316
An interval is perforated twice using the same gun. That is, the gun is run into the well
and fired, pulled out of the hole and the same gun is rerun into the well and fired.
SPOT takes into account the probability that old and new perforations will overlie
(assuming the perforating guns are not oriented).
For a workover/reperforation:-
Single run perforating - Running in and perforating
One perforating gun is run into the well and fired. This is as per standard perforating
practices.
Double run perforating Running in and perforating, then running in again and
perforating using the same gun
An interval is perforated twice using the same gun. That is, the gun is run into the well
and fired, pulled out of the hole and the same gun is rerun into the well and fired.
SPOT takes into account the probability that old and new perforations will overlie,
assuming the guns are not oriented.
For a double perforating run, SPOT will assume the same degree of mud invasion for
the first and second perforating run.
Re-perforating - You are re-perforating over existing perforations (old holes) that are
contributing to production
If this option is selected the user must fill out the Reperforating box in the Reservoir
layers screen. The user is presented with a drop down box that includes the following
options
New holes only- i.e. model the contribution from only the new perforation holes
New and Old holes- i.e. model the contribution from the new and old perforation
holes
Old holes only- i.e. model the contribution from only the old perforation holes.
Note that according to the option selected here, the user must also tick the
appropriate perforated interval in the Log Data screen
assuming guns are not oriented. As calculated reperforation results are qualitative, the
user should match/adjust these results using field data.
For a reperforation calculation, SPOT will assume the same degree of mud invasion for
the old and new perforating run.
In SPOT mud invasion is assumed to have a permanent effect on reservoir performance
that does not improve over time. Thus, when reperforating an existing zone or
perforating a new zone in an old well, SPOT will assume mud invasion properties do not
alter over time (i.e. the existing zone will contain the same amount and degree of mud
invasion as the new zone). In reality, if a mud has been ideally designed, it is likely the
317
PROSPER
effect of mud invasion will reduce over time. SPOT recognises the fact that most of the
drilling muds used in practice are not ideal. Despite this, if the user wishes to alter the
mud invasion properties for new and old perforating zones within a well, the Enter Mud
Invasion Log option should be selected. This will give the user the ability to specify
certain mud properties for different zones.
(Mud) Invasion method:
There are 4 methods available to capture the mud invasion:
1. "Calculate invasion"
This option will allow the user to calculate mud invasion using one of four options
developed by Shell. The model requires the following inputs:
Drilling fluid weight / density,
Total drilling time: This is the total drilling time (including downtime during drilling
of the well) which is used to calculate an equivalent rate of penetration.
Drilling downtime: This is downtime/well suspension time after the well has been
drilled i.e. the time that the total wellbore was exposed to drilling mud. Note that the
model accounts for equilibrium filtrate invasion through the filter cake.
2. "Enter Mud Invasion Log"
The user should enter a mud invasion petrophysical log. This is the most
accurate method of predicting mud invasion depth in a well.
Typically, a mud invasion log can be calculated using deep and shallow resistivity
data; resistivity data can provide a good indication of mud invasion depth and if
drilling filtrate has dissipated away from the near wellbore region (which is likely
for high permeability reservoirs). As mud invasion depth calculations are
resistivity tool dependant, the appropriate calculation method should be obtained
from the tool vendor or obtained from a Petrophysicist or Log Analyst.
In order to use this option, Log data Input must be selected as Yes and data
entered into the Log data screen. This option can also be used if conventional
petrophysical log data is not available but the user still wishes to import a foot-by-
foot description of mud invasion depth.
The effective permeability in the invasion zone must also be specified using the
Invasion tab on the Reservoir Layers screen (two invasion zone permeability
options are available- use of return permeability data or predicted return
permeability factors). Invasion should be entered for each individual layer if a
multi-layer reservoir is modeled.
3. "Enter discrete Invasion depth"
User Guide 318
The user should input a discrete mud invasion depth based on field knowledge,
information from deep and shallow resistivity petrophysical logs and/or well tests.
If this option is selected, the effective permeability in the invasion zone as well as
the discrete invasion depth should be specified using the Invasion tab on the
Reservoir Layers screen (two invasion zone permeability options are available-
use of return permeability data or predicted return permeability factors). Invasion
should be entered for each individual layer if a multi-layer reservoir is modeled.
4. "No Invasion"
In this case, the SPOT module will assume no mud invasion.
Sanding model:
There 2 choices: "None" and the "QinetiQ model".
The "None" option will not calculate any possible production of failed sand.
The "QinetiQ model" is an analytical model that calculates if failed sand will be
produced from a vertical or horizontal perforation:
For vertical perforations a suspension model is assumed in which solid particles
are maintained within the fluid
For horizontal perforations a conservative traction model is used in which sand
particles do not enter the fluid but move by rolling and sliding. This transport
mechanism requires the least energy for initiation.
Currently SPOT assumes:
in vertical wells, the horizontal perforation model is used
in deviated and horizontal wells both the horizontal and vertical transportation
models are used. If either model results in sand production SPOT will identify that
sand will be produced. The user should enter the perforation angle for the
perforation type of interest.
This model can also be used as a debris transport model. Thus, it can be used to model
debris flow if the debris diameter is entered (rather than the sand particle size
distribution diameter) and if the density of the debris is entered (rather than the sand
density).
Model limitations include:
The model is not valid for mud or clay
The model does not account for random fluctuations in velocity due to turbulence
that may, in reality, enable movement of particles even when no sand transport is
319
PROSPER
indicated.
The model assumes that the fluid of interest is the reservoir fluid (not the
completion fluid or drilling mud).
A perforation angle cutoff of 45 degrees is used to distinguish between
horizontal and vertical perforations
Validity is limited to rw/(perforation length+rw)<0.95. Beyond this, the equations
will be operating beyond the intended range
The following input parameters are required:
Particle diameter: average expected particle diameter from sieve or laser
particle size analysis
Density sand: the density of the sand grains
Perforation angle: defines the horizontal/vertical orientation of the perforation.
The perforation angle is measured relative to the horizontal axis. i.e. perforation
angle of a horizontal perforation equals 0 degrees. For vertical perforations the
model assumes that the perforation is oriented downwards. It is assumed that if
the perforation angle is oriented upwards (with an angle of 35 degrees-90
degrees from horizontal), the crushed zone material will fall out of the perforation
tunnel.
Roughness perforation wall: the roughness of the perforation. A suggested value
is one standard deviation greater than the average particle size to account for
the presence of loose fines and crushed material, which will roughen the
perforation tunnel.
It should be highlighted that the QinetiQ Sanding Model does not predict perforation
tunnel failure. It only predicts if sand production will occur assuming that failure has
already occurred. I.e. perforation tunnel cleanup.

Crushed zone Model:
The user has two models to choose from:
Entered
QinetiQ Test Results
If the entered crushed zone model is selected, the user needs to input:
o Permeability (impairment) factor, which represents the ratio of the crushed zone
permeability to the virgin reservoir permeability and
o (Crushed zone) thickness
User Guide 320
The QinetiQ Test Results" option will use a default crushed zone permeability
relationship which defines the thickness of the crushed zone and the crushed zone
permeability damage factor based on laboratory experiments using big hole charges.
Lower Completion Type:
If the well completion type has been set to "Cased Hole" in the System Summary then
the only option is "Cased and Perforated".
If the well completion type has been set to "Open Hole" in the System Summary then
there are two choices:-
Open Hole
Open Hole Perforated
Pressure Transform:
This option is only required for gas/condensate wells. It refers to the pressure transform
used in the IPR calculations.
Pressure Squared
Pseudo Pressure
Use Downhole Standoff:
Select "Yes" if you wish to enter a gun standoff. Otherwise select "No" in which case the
gun is assumed to be centralised.
Enter Gun per Layer:
Select "Yes" if you wish to select a different gun for each layer in the reservoir.
Select "No" if the same gun is to be used for the whole reservoir.
Use SPOT IPR Extensions:
Select "No" if you wish to use the same assumptions as other PROSPER IPR models.
Select "Yes" if you wish to use the same assumption as the original SPOT program
from Shell.
321
PROSPER
2.6.10.3.2 SPOT: Model inputs - Layers
This tab is used:-
to enter some basic data such as well radius
to split up the reservoir into layers and enter data per layer.
select a gun
It is not necessary to enter multiple layers but at least one layer must be entered. Only
one layer is allowed for horizontal wells.
Basic Data:
User Guide 322
Well Radius - Wellbore hole radius
Drainage Radius - Reservoir radius over which the well can drain/ inject reservoir
fluids. In general, the drainage radius for tight formations is small, while the drainage
radius for highly permeable formations is large. For the Joshi Economides and Borisov
horizontal well methods the equivalent horizontal drainage radius should be entered into
SPOT. That is, if the user nominates a drainage area, the shape of that drainage area is
either elliptic or rectangular with two half circles at both ends. Radius of a circle with an
equivalent area calculated and it is called the equivalent horizontal drainage radius.
Note that drainage radius does not need to be defined in the Babu Odeh or Goode
Wilkinson horizontal well method.
Mean Sea Level wrt Origin, Sea Bed Depth wrt Origin - Used to calculate the effect
of sea on in-situ effective stress (enter zero if on-shore).
Perforation Efficiency - In the past perforation efficiency was often a very low number
such as 0.2, 0.3. This was to take into account the much lower Lp than the gun test value
caused by the difference in test and in-situ conditions. Since the Lp is corrected to in-
situ conditions by the SPOT calculations one would normally use a much larger
perforation efficiency e.g. 0.8.
If a gun is selected per layer then this will appear as a per layer value in the layers grid
rather than the basic data.
Additional Reservoir Height - This information will only be required for a vertical or
deviated openhole or openhole perforated well. It defines the distance between the
bottom of the openhole well and the bottom of the reservoir layer (i.e. the bottom-most
reservoir layer in a multilayer reservoir). For example, if the openhole well fully
penetrates the reservoir (as depicted below) the additional reservoir height will equal
zero.
If the openhole well does not penetrate the Bottom Reservoir Layer, the distance
between the bottom of the well and the Bottom Reservoir Layer must be defined using
the additional reservoir height box.
323
PROSPER
In an openhole vertical or deviated well the top of the producing well section will be
defined by the bottom of the casing on the Completion Details screen. Thus the bottom
of the casing and the additional reservoir height will define the producing well length in
an openhole vertical or deviated well.
Select Gun:
If gun per layer has not been selected, click this button to select a gun from the guns
database.
Select Old Gun:
If gun per layer has not been selected and the user has chosen to reperforate existing
perforations, click this button to enter details of the gun used to create existing
perforations.
Layer Data:
Top MD - For all vertical and deviated wells this is the top of the specific reservoir layer
to be analysed, defined in terms of measured depth. Thus:
Bottom MD - Top MD = reservoir height for a vertical cased and perforated well.
Top MD must be used in conjunction with Additional Reservoir Height and Bottom
Well MD to define the reservoir height for an openhole or openhole perforated well.
Bottom MD - For vertical and deviated cased and perforated wells this is the bottom of
the reservoir layer to be analysed. Thus:
Bottom MD Top MD= reservoir height
Well length is defined by the perforated interval on the Log Data screen.
This is depicted below.
Cased and perforated vertical well:
User Guide 324
Layer Pressure - Average current layer pressure.
Under Balance Pressure - The total of static underbalance and dynamic
underbalance when the interval was perforated. This value is used to illustrate on the
Analysis Screen if the crushed zone around the perforation tunnel is likely to be removed
and to facilitate comparison of the desired underbalance to industry models.
Note:
SPOT does not automatically adjust perforation crushed zone properties according to
the specified underbalance value. A specific modelling package should be used for
this purpose.
Underbalance pressure can be static or dynamic or a total of static and dynamic
If a negative value is entered, SPOT assumes an overbalance has been applied.
The use of vertical effective stress (rather than horizontal effective stress) to determine
crushed zone removal is theoretically only valid for certain perforation orientations.
Overburden Pressure Gradient - This pressure gradient is used to calculate the
overburden pressure and subsequently the Near Wellbore Effective Vertical Stress
(NWEVS). The NWEVS is used in perforation depth of penetration calculations. A
common overburden pressure gradient (i.e.lithostatic pressure gradient) is 1psi/ft.
Water saturation - The total water saturation in the reservoir. This value is used to
predict the effect of associated water production on well productivity.
Relative Permeability - Click this button to enter the relative permeability curves for
oil&water (for oil wells) or gas&water (for gas/condensate wells) as Corey data.
Reperforating Options - If the user has selected to reperforate existing perforations,
they can chose whether the calculation is based on new & old holes, new holes only
or old holes only.
Invasion Data - If you have chosen Invasion model to be "Calculate Invasion" or "Enter
Discrete Invasion Depth", click this button to enter details of the invasion data.
325
PROSPER
Bottom HoleTemperature - Enter the average reservoir temperature over the
perforated interval of the layer.
Kv/Kh - The ratio of vertical to horizontal permeability. The ratio must be less than or
equal to 2.
m - If permeability information is unavailable, the user will need to enter a coefficient to
describe a porosity/permeability relationship. M is the gradient of the porosity/
permeability relationship
c - If permeability information is unavailable, the user will need to enter a coefficient to
describe a porosity/permeability relationship. C is the y-axis intercept of the porosity/
permeability relationship.
Downhole Rock Type - The rock type to be used in the perforation calculation must be
selected.(carbonate or sandstone). This will affect the perforation depth of penetration
calculation. It should be highlighted that SPOT does not take karsts and fractures into
account when modeling inflow performance of carbonates. This may result in unrealistic
flow results.
Reservoir Height - This defines the distance between the top and bottom reservoir
layer in which the horizontal well has been drilled. For the Economides Joshi and
Borisov horizontal methods, it is assumed that the well is positioned in the mid point of
the layer. The Babu-Odeh and Goode Wilkinson methods allow the height of the
reservoir to be specified relative to the well position.
The Economides Joshi, Borisov, Babu Odeh and Goode Wilkinson horizontal methods
allow the following type of horizontal well situation to be analysed:
The Babu Odeh and Goode Wilkinson horizontal methods allow the following type of
horizontal well situation to be analysed:
User Guide 326
Xwell - The distance to the well mid point in the direction of reservoir length. This
parameter only needs to be defined for the Babu Odeh and Goode Wilkinson
calculation methods
Ywell - The distance to the well mid point in the direction of reservoir width. This
calculation methods.
Zwell - The distance to the well mid point in the direction of reservoir height. This
calculation methods.
Reservoir Length - Length of the reservoir defined for Babu Odeh and Goode
Wilkinson methods.
Reservoir Width - Width of the box reservoir defined for Babu Odeh and Goode
Wilkinson methods.
2.6.10.3.2.1 SPOT: Model inputs - Rel Perm Data
327
PROSPER
The user must select Corey Function in the Reservoir Layer screen.
End points (residual saturations and corresponding relative permeabilities) as well as
Corey Exponents must be specified. A brief explanation of these terms is provided
below:
Relative permeability: Permeability of one phase in the presence of another
phase
Residual saturation: The irreducible saturation remaining in the pore space
when another phase flows through the reservoir rock
End point relative permeability: The permeability corresponding to the residual
saturation of the other phase/phases
Corey exponent: An exponent that describes the shape of the relative
permeability curve between endpoint saturations
For example, in the below graph:
Residual water saturation=0.2 (20%)
Residual oil saturation= 0.2 (20%) i.e. 1-0.8
Oil relative permeability end point at the residual water saturation of 20%= 0.8
Water relative permeability end point at the residual oil saturation of 20%= 0.3
If water saturation is less than or equal to 20% then it can be assumed that only
oil is flowing in the reservoir
If oil saturation is less than or equal to 20% then it can be assumed that only
water is flowing in the reservoir
User Guide 328
General rules to be used when specifying relative permeability values are provided
below (ideally, Corey Exponents would be obtained from laboratory experiments):
End point relative permeability <1
Residual saturations 0-1 (i.e.0-100%)
Recommended Corey Exponent for Gas/Oil Drainage
In order to estimate a Corey Exponent, the wettability of the reservoir must first be
determined.
Wettability describes the preference for fluid to adhere to the surface of the reservoir
rock (i.e., in water wet rocks water preferentially adheres to the rock surface,
conversely, in oil wet rocks oil preferentially adheres to the rock surface). In general,
most reservoirs are classified as being intermediate wet.
Guidelines for Wettability Determination:
WaterWet Oil-Wet
S
wi
>20 to 25% or more <15%, usually 10%
k
ro
=k
rw
@ S
w
>50% @ S
w
< 50%
k
rw
at S
orw
< 0.3 > 0.5
Approximate Corey Exponents vs. Wettability
329
PROSPER
Wettability Corey Exponent for k
ro
(no) Corey Exponent for k
rw
(nw)
Water Wet 2 to 4 5 to 8
Intermediate Wet 3 to 6 3 to 5
Oil Wet 6 to 8 2 to 3
Recommended Corey Exponents for Gas Production (an imbibition process)
Curve Corey Exponent
Water relative permeability curve 5 to 8
Gas relative permeability curve 2 to 4
Note: This assumes that the reservoir is water wet
Curve Corey Exponent
Gas relative permeability curve 2 to 4
The user can easily view the generated relative permeability curve by clicking Plot
Curves in the Corey Function data screen.
Relative permeability assumptions used in SPOT are outlined below:
-Oil production- oil, water and solution gas are assumed to be the only phases
present
-Gas production- gas and water are assumed to be the only phases present
-Water production- water is assumed to be the only phase present
-Water injection into an aquifer- water is assumed to be the only phase present
-Water injection into oil reservoir- water and residual oil are assumed to be the only
phases present
-Gas injection into a gas cap- gas and irreducible water are assumed to be the only
phases present
-Gas injection into an oil reservoir- gas, oil and irreducible water are assumed to be
the only phases present
Thus, it is important that the user selects the correct reservoir type on the Corey
Function screen for injection. That is:
-For water injection if injecting in oil leg is not ticked, SPOT assumes that water is
being injected into a water aquifer
-For gas injection if injecting in oil leg is not ticked, SPOT assumes that gas is
being injected into a gas cap.
User Guide 330
2.6.10.3.2.2 SPOT: Model inputs - Mud Invasion
SPOT contains four mud invasion data entry options on the New well data and Re-
perforation data screens:
1. No Invasion: The SPOT calculation assumes no mud invasion.
2. Enter discrete invasion depth: The user should input a discrete mud
invasion depth based on field knowledge, information from deep and shallow
resistivity petrophysical logs and/or well tests.
If this option is selected, the effective permeability in the invasion zone as well as
the discrete invasion depth should be specified using the Invasion tab on the
331
PROSPER
Reservoir Layers screen (two invasion zone permeability options are
available- use of return permeability data or predicted return permeability
factors). Invasion should be entered for each individual layer if a multi-layer
reservoir is modeled.
3. Enter mud invasion log: The user should enter a mud invasion petrophysical
log. This is the most accurate method of predicting mud invasion depth in a
well.
Typically, a mud invasion log can be calculated using deep and shallow
resistivity data; resistivity data can provide a good indication of mud invasion
depth and if drilling filtrate has dissipated away from the near wellbore region
(which is likely for high permeability reservoirs). As mud invasion depth
calculations are resistivity tool dependant, the appropriate calculation method
should be obtained from the tool vendor or obtained from a Petrophysicist or
Log Analyst.
In order to use this option, Log data available? must be selected as Yes
and data entered into the Log data screen. This option can also be used if
conventional petrophysical log data is not available but the user still wishes to
import a foot-by-foot description of mud invasion depth.
The effective permeability in the invasion zone must also be specified using the
Invasion tab on the Reservoir Layers screen (two invasion zone
permeability options are available- use of return permeability data or predicted
return permeability factors). Invasion should be entered for each individual layer
if a multi-layer reservoir is modeled.
4. "Calculate invasion": This option will allow the user to calculate mud invasion
using one of four options developed by Hans Vans Velzen (Royal Dutch Shell)
and the Shell Perforating Global Delivery Team. If mud invasion is to be
calculated in SPOT, the user must input:
o Total drilling time: This is the total drilling time (including downtime during
drilling of the well) which is used to calcuate an equivalent rate of penetration.
o Downtime: This is downtime/well suspension time after the well has been
drilled i.e. the time that the total wellbore was exposed to drilling mud. Note
that the model accounts for equilibrium filtrate invasion through the filtercake.
Calculation specifics and the effective permeability in the invasion zone must
also be specified using the Invasion tab on the Reservoir Layers screen
(two invasion zone permeability options are available- use of return permeability
data or predicted return permeability factors). Invasion should be entered for
each individual layer if a multi-layer reservoir is modeled. The four calculation
methods available on that screen are:
o Ability to estimate mud/ filtrate invasion if fluid loss data from laboratory
experiments were recorded as a function of time. Common experiments
User Guide 332
include measuring High Temperature High Pressure filtration behavior (under
static conditions using a ceramic disk with appropriately sized pores) and
Core Flood tests.
o Ability to estimate mud/ filtrate invasion if only the total fluid loss volume from
laboratory experiments was recorded. Common experiments include
measuring High Temperature High Pressure filtration behavior (under static
conditions using a ceramic disk with appropriately sized pores) and Core
Flood tests.
o Ability to estimate mud invasion if no test data is available-Option 1
o d) Ability to estimate mud invasion if no test data is available- Option 2. In
many circumstances, a user will only have information available for this
calculation. It should be highlighted that this method is only valid within the
following ranges: mud weights of 1sg to 1.8sg, brine densities of 1.05sg to
1.25sg for oil based mud and 1sg to 1.25sg for water based mud. This will
provide a very similar answer to Option 1. The difference between Option 1
and Option 2 is the data input requirements.
Mud Invasion Model- Background Information
The SPOT mud invasion model is appropriate for the following scenarios:
Oil based and water based drilling muds
Oil production wells
Gas injection and production wells
Water injection and production wells
Sandstone and carbonate reservoirs
Vertical, deviated and horizontal wells
Different completion types including cased and perforated wells, openhole
completions and openhole perforated wells.
The model assumes the drilling mud has been correctly designed and that appropriate
laboratory tests have been undertaken (tests may include, but not be limited to return
permeability, filtercake pop off and core flood). Correct mud design is especially
important as:
In general, deep mud filtrate invasion depths depend on filtercake thickness and
permeability. 1. Filtercake permeability depends on the solid size used to create
a filtercake. 2. Filtercake thickness depends on the tendency to be eroded under
specific conditions (based on initial thickness and mud flow/ dynamic filtration
333
PROSPER
effects). Thus, if drilling mud solid particles are not correctly sized, the formation
will experience deeper mud filtrate invasion. The SPOT mud model assumes
that all drilling mud solids have been optimally sized.
Return permeability tests can be used to define the permanent permeability
reduction due to mud filtrate and solids invasion. It should be highlighted that
solids invasion should be negligible if a mud has been correctly designed.
Filtercake pop off/ flow back tests can be used to define the differential pressure
required for filtercake removal. Note that residual solids at the surface of the
wellbore will have a much larger impact on return permeability than filtrate
invasion so it is important to ensure the filtercake has been removed (Francis,
1997, SPE Paper 38182). If a drilling mud has been properly designed, the
filtercake should easily lift off and no residual solids should remain at the surface
of the wellbore.
It should also be highlighted that the mud calculation model in SPOT can only be used
to obtain a first pass estimate of mud invasion depth. If the depth of penetration of the
perforating gun and mud invasion depth is similar, more detailed studies and/or
laboratory testing should be undertaken. Such studies can account for additional
factors such as dynamic filtration effects. An example of such a study using a fine scale
3D reservoir simulator is described by Suryanarayana et. al in SPE Paper 95861.
Users should always conduct an After Action Review to compare the mud invasion
depth predicted by the model to that in the actual well (e.g. mud invasion depths in the
well can be measured using deep and shallow resistivity logs). This information will
assist design and interpretation of mud invasion depths in adjoining fields/wells. It
would be appreciated if results of any such comparison are sent to Petroleum Experts
for future improvement of the SPOT mud invasion model.
Some recognised limitations of the SPOT mud invasion model include:
It is possible to generate inconsistent skin and flow results when using high 'mud
filtrate zone' factors. If this occurs we recommend increasing the filtrate factor to
100percent or reducing the filtrate factor below 50percent. A model to rectify this
problem will be avaliable in the next version of SPOT. The correct behaviour is
that flow reduces (and skins increase) as mud invasion depth increases.
It assumes the mud has been correctly designed including sizing of mud solids.
Athough it can be applied to oil, gas and water flow, the model assumes piston
like displacement of filtrate. This is in general valid for gas wells, however, may
not be appropriate for oil wells. If the viscosity of the filtrate is lower than the
viscosity of the reservoir fluid, fingering may occur, resulting in much higher
invasion depths than predicted by the SPOT model. In order to correctly model
this effect, multiphase flow effects must be taken into account.
It is a static model and neglects dynamic effects such as filter cake erosion.
User Guide 334
Dynamic effects (constant removal and relayering of the filtercake) may be
significant in horizontal wells during the drilling and completion process.
A constant mud filtrate damage permeability is assumed in the mud invasion
zone. There are varying opinions in the industry if the mud invasion zone should
be modeled with a constant or varying permeability. The assumption in SPOT is
that permeability of the filtrate invasion zone is not depth dependant. The
alternate belief is that permeability should vary within the mud invaded zone from
a low value (closest to the wellbore) to virgin reservoir permeability (at the edge
of the invasion zone), reference: SPE 95861.
The following analysis assumes that the filtrate invasion into the reservoir has a
permanent effect on well productivity, which does not improve over time. The
degree of permanent reservoir permeability reduction due to filtrate and solids
invasion is captured in SPOT in the specification of invaded reservoir
permeability (Ks and Kl- permeability of the solids and liquid invaded zones
respectively). Thus it is very important that these values are reasonable and if
possible, return permeability testing has been undertaken (return permeability
tests demonstrate the difference in pre and post mud invaded permeability i.e.
the amount of permanent mud damage). To obtain realistic return permeability
results, the test should be continued until a constant flow rate is achieved and the
drawdown pressure used in the laboratory should be representative of the
maximum pressure experienced in the field (this pressure must be downscaled
for core-reservoir size effects). In addition, test conditions like temperature,
overbalance pressure and pore sises of the disk and/or the permeability of the
core plug sample, should be comparable with field conditions. If specific,
remedial attempts are undertaken to remove mud damage, the effect of these
processes should be included in the final estimate of return permeability.
Equivalent Circulating Density (ECD) effects during mud circulation are ignored.
ECD effects may increase the differential pressure across the formation during
filtercake formation and filtrate invasion.
Formation composition (e.g. clay presence, mineralogy) is ignored.
Mud Invasion Model Input Requirements
Input data for calculating mud invasion, specifying a discrete mud invasion depth or a
mud invasion log is specified under the New Well/Reperforation screen:
Once an option is selected, additional mud invasion data must be entered on the
Reservoir Layers screen, Invasion Data.
Irrespective of the option selected on the New Well/Reperforation screen (except for
the No invasion option), the effective permeability in the mud filtrate and mud
335
PROSPER
filtercake invaded zones must be specified. Two options are available for specifying
the effective permeability of the invaded zone:
1. Input return permeability from core tests. This option should be selected if return
permeability laboratory testing was undertaken. Simplistically, the test involves
measuring the initial permeability of the sample at irreducible water saturation,
dynamically exposing the core to drilling mud so a filter cake forms, statically
exposing the filter cake to drilling fluid, cleaning up the sample using drawdown
and finally, measuring the return permeability of the core sample. The damaging
effect of the drilling mud is quantified by the difference between the initial and
final permeability of the core sample.
To use this option, the following inputs are required:
Fluid loss at end of test= total mud fluid loss
Cross sectional area= cross sectional area of core sample
Fractional porosity of core sample= average porosity of core sample
Length of core plug sample=length along the axis of the core sample
S
wi
of core sample= irreducible water saturation of core sample
K
return
= return permeability of the core sample after conducting the laboratory
test (%)
K
initial
= initial permeability of the core sample i.e. 100% by definition
This information is used to determine a linear fluid invasion depth, and thus the
effective permeability of the fluid invaded zone.
2. Input factor for permeability in mud invaded zone: If return permeability
laboratory testing was not undertaken, the effective permeability if the solid and
filtrate invaded zones must be estimated. This is inputted into SPOT is the form
of mud invasion zone permeability factors, K
s
and K
l
,:
K
s
= factor to describe the final permeability of the solid invasion zone following
mud invasion
K
l
= factor to describe the final permeability of the filtrate invasion zone following
mud invasion
Suggested values based on research by Hans Van Velzen (Royal Dutch Shell) are as
follows:
K
l
(OBM) = 52% K
l
(WBM) =62%
(90% probability that the invaded zone permeability will be greater than this)
K
l
(OBM) = 89% K
l
(WBM) =91%
(50% probability that the invaded zone permeability will be greater than this)
K
s
(OBM & WBM)= 5%
User Guide 336
Research suggests that a cut-off may exist for mud invasion damage depending
on initial permeability(i.e. high permeability reservoirs are not greatly affected by
mud invasion). The mud invasion model used in SPOT accounts for irreducible
water saturation and, as such, a permeability cutoff is not recommended for
gas reservoirs. However, a permeability cutoff could be applied to oil
reservoirs.
Alternate work by Francis (1997) suggests: K
s
(OBM & WBM)= 0.1%
(Reference: Francis, 1997, Dominating Effect Controlling the Extent of Drilling
Induced Formation Damage, SPE Paper 38182)
If the drilling mud is inappropriate or has been poorly designed, permeability in
the mud invaded zone may be very low due to pore plugging by solids, fluid/ fluid
and fluid/ rock interactions, changes in saturation, phase blockage, clay swelling
in the formation, wettability alterations and in situ emulsification and/or
precipitation. The mud invasion model in SPOT does not explicitly consider
these factors.
In addition, the user must enter an irreducible water saturation or irreducible gas
saturation value. This is the irreducible fluid saturation of the reservoir interval.
If Enter Discrete Invasion Depth was selected in the New Well/Reperforation
screen, a value should be entered into the Discrete invasion depth box on this
Invasion Data screen. This option will assume a constant invasion depth over the entire
reservoir interval.
If Calculate invasion was selected in the New Well/Reperforation screen, one of the
following four mud invasion depth calculation options should be selected:
1. Fluid loss vs time
2. Total fluid loss time and volume
3. No fluid loss data-option 1
4. No fluid loss data- option 2
Most accurate calculation method is Option 1, followed by Options 2, 3 and 4.
However the option that requires the least data and thus is most easily applied by the
user is Option 4. In many circumstances (especially for high permeability gas and oil
reservoirs), the user will only have data available for Option 4.
1. Fluid loss vs time
This option should be selected if core flood tests and/or HTHP-fluid-loss-tests
(using a ceramic disk) were conducted and if fluid loss behaviour during the
duration of the test is avaliable. It will predict the amount of spurt loss as well as
the external filter cake build-up process (excessive spurt loss will occur if the
drilling fluid is not properly designed, in this case the drilling fluid should be
redesigned). The user will need to enter additional data in the Fluid loss data
screen:
o Area of lab sample= cross sectional area of ceramic disk or core sample
337
PROSPER
o Differential pressure applied across the lab sample= differential pressure
applied across ceramic disk or core sample during the mud invasion test
o The user will also need to enter Time and Fluid Loss data into the table. A
minimum of two data sets is required. If more than two data sets are entered,
SPOT will input a best fit line through the data. Reasonable values for t
1
and t
2
are 300s and 1800s or the end time of the static filtration period
respectively.
2. Total fluid loss time and volume
This option should be selected if core flood tests and/or HTHP-fluid-loss-tests
(using a ceramic disk) were conducted and if only the total fluid loss volume was
recorded at the conclusion of the test. SPOT thus assumes that no spurt loss has
occurred during the test (there should be minimal spurt loss if a drilling fluid has
been optmally designed). As a consequence the solids invasion depth cannot
be predicted and only the liquid invasion can be estimated. If the user is
interested in spurt loss effects, they should obtain appropriate measurements
using laboratory tests.
The user will need to enter additional data in the Fluid loss data screen:
o Area of lab sample= cross sectional area of ceramic disk or core sample
o Differential pressure applied across the lab sample= differential pressure
applied across ceramic disk or core sample during the mud invasion test
o Total lab sample exposure time= time that the ceramic disk or core sample
was exposed to drilling mud
o Total fluid loss through the lab sample= total amount of drilling fluid lost
through the lab sample during all testing stages (the volume should
correspond to the total lab sample exposure time specified)
3. No fluid loss data-option 1
If no fluid loss data is available, empirical equations are used. This method
assumes no spurt loss has occurred and that:
o Fractional porosity of filtercake (f
cake
) [-] = 0.05
o Permeability of filtercake (K
cake
) [m
2
] = 80E-21 for OBMs
o Permeability of filtercake (K
cake
) [m
2
] = 160E-21 for WBMs
User Guide 338
As these values are highly approximate, it is recommended that mud testing is
undertaken to allow one of the more accurate methods (Option 1 or 2 above) to
be used to estimate mud invasion depths.
The user will need to enter additional data in the Drilling mud properties
screen:
o Oil based mud or water based mud. If Oil based mud is not selected, SPOT
will assume the use of water based mud
o Viscosity of drilling fluid filtrate
o Density of drilling fluid filtrate, if you have an OBM this will be the density of the
oil phase in the mud, if you have a WBM this will be the density of the water
phase in the mud
o Mass fraction of solids in the drilling fluid, if you have an OBM, this will be the
mass fraction of solids and water i.e. mass fraction= [((%oil+%water+%
solids)*drilling weight)-(%oil*densityoil)]/( (%oil+%water+%solids)*drilling
weight), if you have a WBM, this will be the mass fraction of solids only i.e.
mass fraction= [((%oil+%water+%solids)*drilling weight)-(%oil*densityoil)-(%
water*densitywater)]/( (%oil+%water+%solids)*drilling weight)
o Density of solids in the drilling fluid, if you have an OBM, this will be the
density of solids and water i.e. density= [((%oil+%water+%solids)
*drillingweight)-(%oil*densityoil)]/ (%water+%solids), if you have a WBM, this
will be the density of solids only i.e. [((%oil+%water+%solids)*drilling weight)-
(%oil*densityoil)-(%water*densitywater)] / (%solids)
4. No fluid loss data- option 2
This method assumes no spurt loss has occurred. It should give a very similar
result to Option 3 (it is based on similar empirical correlations). It should be
highlighted that this method is only valid within the following ranges: mud weights
of 1sg to 1.8sg, brine densities of 1.05sg to 1.25sg for oil based mud and 1sg to
1.25sg for water based mud. The method will also not work for some low weight
water based muds (with brine densities between 1sg and 1.25sg).
The user will need to enter additional data in the Drilling mud properties
screen:
o Oil based mud or water based mud. If Oil based mud is not selected, SPOT
will assume the use of water based mud
o Brine density
o If an oil based mud, is the oil water ratio closer to 80/20 or 75/25
o Is the mud barite weighted or calcium carbonate weighted?
339
PROSPER
o Drilling fluid weight
In addition to selecting one of the four above options, the irreducible fluid saturations
must be specified. Depending on the reservoir fluid, the following parameters may be
required:
a. Irreducible water saturation
b. Irreducible gas saturation
c. Irreducible oil saturation
SPOT will always assume that the mud invasion zone is measured from the wellbore
radius. That is:
in a cased and perforated well, invasion depth is measured from the wellbore
radius (or if caliper data is entered, the effective wellbore radius)
in an openhole well the invasion depth is measured from the wellbore radius (or
if calliper data is entered, the effective wellbore radius)
in an underreamed gravel packed well the invasion depth is measured from the
underreamed wellbore radius (or if caliper data is entered, the effective wellbore
radius)
2.6.10.3.2.3 SPOT: Model inputs - Old Gun
User Guide 340
assuming guns are not oriented. It is assumed that there is a negligible effect of the few
shots which may overlay. As calculated reperforation results are qualitative, the user
should match/adjust these results using field data.
If the option of Old holes only or New and Old holes is selected, the user will be required
to input the following data on the Reservoir Layer screen for the existing holes:
Most of the required information can be obtained from the Vendor Database:
Gun size
Shot density
Gun phasing
DoP Section 1: the depth of penetration measured during the API RP19B Section 1
test
Entrance hole diameter
Perforation efficiency: perforation efficiency is the number of holes that are
contributing to production. E.g. 80% efficiency would mean that 8 out of 10 holes are
contributing to production as 2 hole are blocked due to debris, perforation collapse
etc. Rough rules of thumb for perforation efficiency are:
o 80% for a current perforation gun in a vertical well.
o 50% for vertical perforations in a horizontal well (the gun sitting on the low side of
the hole will prevent tunnel cleanup)
o 80% efficiency for casing conveyed perforating
o 80% efficiency for casing conveyed perforating
o <80% efficiency if a large dynamic or static drawdown is applied to consolidated
sand (i.e. tunnel collapse is not a concern)
o 50% for old perforation guns (greater than or equal to 20 years old)
o 50% for very tight reservoir
Deep Penetrating/ Big Hole: the type of gun must be selected and if the gun is
classified as a deep penetrating or big hole charge. In general, a deep penetrating
gun will have an entrance hole less than or equal to 0.5in.
Standoff during test: This is the distance from the outside of the perforating charge
case to the inside of the casing that applies to the specified Section 1 DoP value
provided above.
Downhole standoff: This is the distance from the outside of the perforating charge
case to the inside of the casing when the gun was originally fired in the well.
Casing material: Select between J55, L80, P105 or P110. If a different material was
used in the test, pick the material with the closest hardness. i.e.:
341
PROSPER
2.6.10.3.3 SPOT: Model inputs - Log Data
The Shell PGDT recommends that the following set of log data is inputted in SPOT to
improve perforation and inflow performance predictions (i.e. answer YES to Log data
available?):
Porosity
Permeability
Unconfined Compressive Strength (UCS)
Thick Walled Cylinder Strength (TWC)
If UCS and TWC data is not available, the following information should be entered:
Formation Density Compensated (FDC)
User Guide 342
Compressional Sonic
Shear Sonic
Petrophysical data should be entered on a typical data acquisition scale (i.e. 0.5-1ft).
Additional data that may also be entered in the Log data screen is listed below (these
are not used in the SPOT calculations):
Gamma-ray: to identify different formation types e.g. sand, shale, coal
Resistivity: to identify hydrocarbon intervals
Cement Bond Log (CBL): to identify poorly cemented zones
Caliper: the caliper diameter should be entered. This will be used to identify washed
out and slumped zones. Any caliper data entered in SPOT will be used to define the
wellbore radius in inflow performance calculations
Net/Non Net reservoir: to identify net pay or sand zones
The best method to get log data into PROSPER is to first import it into Excel and
preprocess it to the format of the log data tab. Then copy and paste it into PROSPER.
Once all the data has been entered, click the "Fill-in" button to calculate any columns
that were not entered (these are shown in blue).
Perforation Zones
The tick box in the "Perforated" column allows each row to be perforated or not. If the
perforated tick box is blue and disabled then it means the log row depth does not
intersect any of the entered layers so it can not produce/inject.
Obviously it can be time-consuming to tick or untick each log row as there may be
thousands or rows. So there are several methods to make this process easier:-
Multiple Selection:
Select a number of rows by clicking and dragging over the rows. Then right click on the
selected rows and select either "Perforated - On" or "Perforated - Off" to tick or untick
the Perforated tick box for all the selected rows.
Perf by cutoff:-
Click this button to display a dialogue that allows rows to be perforated by cutoff e.g.
perforate all rows with a permeability grater than 10 md.
Perf by depth:-
Click this button to display a dialogue that allows rows to be perforated or not over a
range of entered depths e.g. perforate all rows between a MD of 10105 and 10674 feet.
Note that if the Goode-Wilkinson horizontal well model is not selected for a cased and
perforated analysis, the user will be unable to update the perforation interval in the Log
Data screen (the entire interval will be automatically selected as being perforated).
Unconfined Compressive Strength (UCS) and Thick Walled Cylinder (TWC) Data
343
PROSPER
The user should input a UCS petrophysical log into SPOT. UCS is a very important
parameter as it affects the perforation depth of penetration. There are four options for
determining UCS:
1. Determine a UCS log for your field using petrophysical measurements (UCS is
usually a function of density and sonic logs) and match the generated UCS log to
laboratory core UCS measurements at specific depths. The complete UCS log
should be easily acquired from a Petrophysicist or Log Analyst. This is the most
accurate method of creating a UCS log as the predictive correlation will have been
match against actual field core UCS measurements. For example:
2. Determine a UCS log for your field using petrophysical measurements (UCS is
usually a function of density and sonic logs). The UCS log is NOT matched against
core data. The complete UCS log should be easily acquired from a Petrophysicist or
Log Analyst.
3. Determine a UCS log for your field using information/ data from nearby wells/fields
4. Use correlations in SPOT to estimate UCS. The following correlation types are
available in SPOT to estimate UCS under the UCS Relation column in the layer
data tab:
Sandstone Reservoirs
- Equation 1: UCS as a function of density and compressional sonic (uncertainty factor
2)
- Equation 2: UCS as a function of density and shear sonic (uncertainty factor 2)
- Equation 3: UCS as a function of porosity (valid for porosity>7%)
- Equation 4: UCS as a function of TWC (uncertainty factor of 2)
Carbonate Reservoirs
- Equation 5: UCS as a function of porosity (valid for porosity 4-37%)
- Equation 6: UCS as a function of TWC (uncertainty factor of 3)
SPOT may request more information than required by the selected UCS correlation. For
example, the user may select Porosity, Permeability, FDC and Compressional Sonic
from the Log data input drop down menu in the options tab, however if Equation 1 is
selected, only FDC and Compressional Sonic will be used to calculate UCS (porosity
and permeability values are required for other calculations in SPOT). If the user wishes
to use petrophysical log data to calculate UCS but only average values to calculate
inflow performance, they should enter petrophysical FDC and Sonic logs and constant
porosity and permeability values in the columns in the log data tab.
Although it is possible to internally calculate porosity in SPOT for oil and water wells, it is
recommended that porosity values are not calculated within SPOT and that porosity
information is always entered by the user after it has been determined by a Log Analyst/
Petrophysicist (as it can have a large effect on mud invasion depth calculations and
permeability correlations, and subsequently inflow values). To internally calculate
porosity in SPOT for an oil or water well a FDC (density) Petrophysical log and a Rock
Bulk Density value must be provided. Mud invasion effects are ignored in the SPOT
porosity calculation. SPOT does not allow the user to internally calculate porosity for gas
wells as density logs measure electronic density (which can be significantly less than
actual density in gas).
User Guide 344
Many of these correlations are based on trend lines and as such, there is uncertainty
surrounding each correlation. The user should assess the appropriateness of calculated
values to determine if the correlation is reasonable compared to expected UCS ranges.
A relationship should not be used if it produces negative or very large values. If
uncertainty exists regarding the UCS estimation it is recommended to conduct a
sensitivity analysis.
Indicative UCS ranges that can be used to assess the reasonableness of calculated
values are:
Unconsolidated/extremely weak <130 psia
Loosely consolidated/ very weak/soft 130-550 psia
Friable/weak 550-1300 psia
Consolidated/low strength 1300-4500
psia
Hard >4500 psia
Medium Strength 4500-7200
psia
High Strength 7200-17000
psia
Extreme Strength >17000 psia
These ranges should be appropriate for both sandstones and carbonates.
After UCS values have been defined, TWC must also be defined (accurate TWC
estimation is not as important as UCS prediction in SPOT as TWC is only used to
predict perforation tunnel strength). The following correlation types are available in
SPOT to estimate TWC under the TWC Relation column:
Sandstone Reservoirs
- Equations 1 & 2: TWC as function of density and compressional sonic (uncertainty
factor 1.5-2.5)
- Equation 3: TWC as a function of density and shear sonic (uncertainty factor 1.5-
2.5)
- Equation 4: TWC as a function of porosity -
- Equation 5: TWC as a function of UCS (uncertainty factor of 2)
Carbonate Reservoirs
- Equation 6: TWC as a function of porosity
- Equation 7: TWC as a function of UCS (uncertainty factor of 3)
SPOT may request more information than required by the selected TWC correlation.
For example, the user may select Porosity, Permeability, FDC and Compressional
Sonic from the Log data input drop down menu in the options tab, however if Equation
1 is selected, only FDC and Compressional Sonic will be used to calculate TWC
(porosity and permeability values are required for other calculations in SPOT). If the
user wishes to use petrophysical log data to calculate TWC but only average values to
calculate inflow performance, they should enter petrophysical FDC and Sonic logs and
constant porosity and permeability values in the columns in the log data tab.
No Log Data Available
345
PROSPER
If the "Log Data Input" in the options tab was set to "None Available" then synthetic log
data must be generated. The screen to generate this data will be displayed
automatically the first time the log data tab is accessed. To regenerate the log data
again, click the generate button.
2.6.10.3.3.1 SPOT: Model inputs - Generate Log Data
This dialogue is used to generate synthetic log data if none is available. This will create
log data with constant values entered in the average properties data.
The log depth increment should be a small number (e.g. 1 ft).
2.6.10.3.3.2 SPOT: Model inputs - Perforation Cutoff
User Guide 346
This dialogue allows the perforated state of the log rows to be set depending on the
values of the log data.
For example, if you wish to only perforate log rows where the permeability is greater
than 10 mD, enter a value of 10 mD for the "Lower Permeability" and then click the
"Apply Cut-off" button. Log rows with a permeability greater than 10 mD will have the
"Perforated" tick box selected and any with a permeability lower than 10 mD will have
the "Perforated" tick box de-selected.
Alternatively if you wish to only perforate log rows with a UCS less than 7000 psia, enter
a value of 7000 psia for the "Upper UCS" and then click the "Apply Cut-off" button. Log
rows with a UCS less than 7000 psia will have the "Perforated" tick box selected and
any with a UCS higher than 7000 psia will have the "Perforated" tick box de-selected.
Leave fields blank if you do not want to them to be applied in the cut-off.
2.6.10.3.3.3 SPOT: Model inputs - Perforation Depth
This dialogue is used to select or deselect the perforate tick box for all log rows over a
certain depth range. The depths are always MD rather than TVD.
For example, if you wish to perforate between 12050 and 12100 feet, enter "Upper
Depth" = 12050 ft and "Lower Depth" = 12100 ft. Then click the "Set Perforated" button.
347
PROSPER
2.6.10.3.4 SPOT: Model inputs - Completion
This tab is used to enter completion details for the SPOT calculations. Only the
completion over the producing zone is required.
This data is used to correct the Lp. API 19B/43 tests are performed through a casing
defined in the test data. So if if a thicker casing is used then it will decrease the Lp as
more of the gun energy is lost perforating the casing. Or if a thinner casing is used then
the Lp will be higher.
Appropriate completion details will need to be entered for the selected option. This may
include:
User Guide 348
Casing diameter, type and weight
Casing drift to account for variations in diameter during manufacture. The total drift in
casing internal diameter (ID) should be entered. This is defined in SPOT as the
difference between the maximum and minimum casing ID.
Tubing diameter, type and weight
Tubing drift to account for variations in diameter during manufacture. The total drift in
tubing internal diameter (ID) should be entered. This is defined in SPOT as the
difference between the maximum and minimum tubing ID.
Minimum tubing restriction diameter: this limits the gun size that can be run using
through tubing conveyance.
Hold up depth; this is effectively the end of the well. You will not be allowed to perforate
below the hold up depth
Casing material type: select between J55, L80, P105 or P110. If a different material
was used in the test, pick the material with the closest hardness. i.e.:
SPOT will always assume that the casing of a well is cemented. It cannot calculate the
effect of perforating an uncemented liner or tubing.
Multiple casing strings (2 or 3 casing strings only) can be entered into SPOT and an
adjusted perforation depth will be calculated using empirical correlations.
The holdup depth is effectively the bottom of the well. No perforations are allowed below
the holdup depth. The holdup depth is a measured depth (not TVD).
349
PROSPER
2.6.10.3.5 SPOT: Model inputs - Gravel Pack
Gravel pack information can be entered to model an internal or external (i.e.
underreamed) gravel pack. The following options are available:
Cased and Perforated Well- internal or external gravel pack. In this scenario the internal
gravel pack represents a conventional internal gravel pack. The external gravel pack
represents where the casing has been underreamed and the perforations and
underreamed area are filled with gravel. This option assumes that all other intervals in
the well contain a traditional cased and perforated completion.
Openhole Perforated Well- internal or external gravel pack: In this scenario the internal
gravel pack represents an openhole perforated well that has been completed with a
gravel pack within it (it is extremely unlikely that this case would be selected in practice,
User Guide 350
but is provided here for flexibility). The external gravel pack represents where the casing
has been underreamed, the interval has been perforated and the perforations and
underreamed area are filled with gravel. This option assumes that all other intervals in
the well contain a traditional openhole perforated completion.
Openhole well- internal or external gravel pack: In this scenario the internal gravel pack
represents an openhole well that has been completed with a gravel pack within it (it is
extremely unlikely that this case would be selected in practice, but is provided here for
flexibility). The external gravel pack represents a conventional external gravel pack
where the casing has been underreamed and the underreamed area is filled with
gravel.
This option assumes that all other intervals in the well contain a traditional openhole
completion.
Gravel pack permeability: the permeability of the gravel pack can be estimated using
the following recommendation by Golan and Whitson (1991)
US Mesh size Approx Mean Diameter (in) Permeability (md)
40/60 0.014 1.2E5-1.7E5
20/40 0.025 1.2E5
10/20 0.056 5E5-6.5E5
8/12 0.080 1.7E6
Top of gravel pack: the top depth of the gravel pack
Bottom of gravel pack: the bottom depth of the gravel pack
Gravel pack outer diameter: the outer diameter of the gravel pack.i.e. the under
reamed diameter in an external gravel pack, the casing ID in an internal cased and
perforated gravel pack or the wellbore diameter in an internal openhole gravel pack.
Gravel pack inner diameter: the inner diameter of the gravel pack. i.e. the diameter of
the gravel screen. Note that this value is not used in the gravel pack calculations, it is
only used in generating the SPOT Well Schematic
Calculation method: three options are presented to calculate the non Darcy flow
through the gravel pack; Golan 1 phase, Geertsma 1 phase and Geertsma 2
phase. The Golan 1 phase calculation is recommended for single phase flow. The
Geertsma 1 phase calculation is recommended for single phase flow. The
Geertsma 2 phase calculation is recommended for two phase flow.
2.6.10.4SPOT: Model Results
Enter topic text here.
351
PROSPER
2.6.10.4.1 SPOT: Model Results - Layer Results
SPOT initially does all the calculations of corrected Lp's, skin, rates etc for each log row.
For reporting purposes it then calculates representative values for the layers for some of
these variables. For example it will use the results of the log rows belonging to each
layer to calculate an equivalent skin for the layer.
Click on the Log Results button to display the detailed results for each log row. Some of
these results are at a specific FBHP so a value needs to be entered before displaying
the log results.
User Guide 352
2.6.10.4.2 SPOT: Model Results - Log Results
This dialogue displays the detailed results for each log row. Some of the data (such as
rates) are calculated at the FBHP that was entered in the layer results.
Notes on some of the variables are as follows:-
Underbalance Behrmann, Underbalance King - Recommended underbalance as
calculated by Behrmann & King.
Qo, Qw, Qg - rates from the log row at the entered FBHP
Qo Aof, Qw Aof, Qo Aof - rates from the log row if FBHP = atmospheric pressure
Qo Cum, Qw Cum, Qg Cum - the total rate from this log row plus all log rows below this
log row at entered FBHP.
Qo Cum Aof, Qw Cum Aof, Qg Cum Aof - the total rate from this log row plus all log
353
PROSPER
rows below this log row if FBHP = atmospheric pressure.
Beyond Zone - This is ticked if the perforation is beyond the invasion zone for this log
row.
Sand Production - This is ticked if the sanding model has predicted that sand has been
produced for this log row.
2.6.11 Multi-Lateral Interface
2.6.11.1Network Interface
2.6.11.1.1 Motivation
Multilateral wells are different than single wells because they have a variable structure.
Both the number of branches and the way that they are connected is variable. Hence, a
flexible network data structure is appropriate for modelling these wells. Furthermore, to
provide a consistency with other Petroleum Experts products the interface has the same
look and feel as the one in GAP.
2.6.11.1.2 Interface Overview
The multilateral data entry screen is accessed by choosing System | Inflow Performance
from the PROSPER main menu, as with the single well IPR. However, before that the
multilateral option must be chosen in the Options screen, also accessed from the main
menu.
The user interface consists of a framework window that contains several child windows,
as well as the menu and toolbar from which commands are issued. The child windows
include the network windows that contain the system network drawing, the navigator
window that can assist in the viewing of large networks and up to three visualisation
windows, which can show the multilateral network drawn to scale from three orthogonal
points of view.

User Guide 354
Four main components of the interface are identified, as indicated on the diagram
above, which are described in more detail in the following sections:
1. Network window the window on which the system network is drawn.
2. Navigator window contains a full schematic that can be used to help navigation
about large systems.
3. Menu bar and toolbar. The menu bar is used for issuing commands to PROSPER and
the interface; it contains an abridged set of commands compared to a normal
application framework window because it is a subsidiary window of the main
programme. The toolbar contains menu accelerators, icons for selecting and
manipulating network nodes and links, and icons for zooming or unzooming on the
network window.
4. Visualisation screen up to three windows showing front, side and top views of the
multilateral network.
355
PROSPER
2.6.11.1.2.1 Network Window
The network window is the main window on which the multilateral network is displayed
and manipulated. More than one network window can be displayed at one time; this
means that different views of the same system are available simultaneously, which can
be of help in editing large networks.
The system window is used to draw, edit, and view the system. The network nodes are
represented by coloured icons. The different actions that can be performed on this
window are obtained by clicking the right hand mouse button within the area of the
system window, which brings up a menu. Alternatively, the same set of actions can be
performed using the toolbar or the menu, which are described below.
Addition of Network Nodes and Links
To add an item to the system, activate the required network item type from the toolbar or
by using the right hand mouse button menu. The cursor will change to indicate that a
network item selection has been made. Click on the screen at the point to insert the
element. A network node will be created and an icon to represent it. A label dialogue
will appear prompting for a name. If the element is not labelled, a default label is
provided which can be edited later using the icon right hand mouse button menu.
Only the four left most items in the toolbar (tie-point, junction, completion and tank/
reservoir) are nodes: links, the fifth item, are added differently by dragging between two
nodes. Depending on a set of connection rules, the connection will be made or not and
the correct type of link will be chosen. For example, reservoirs can only be attached to
completions and the type of link is logical; in other cases the link is a piece of tubing.
These rules are reviewed in the description of toolbar items. The network is
hierarchical and arrows drawn on the links indicate the direction of the connections
(which is normally the same direction as increasing vertical depth). Each icon is given a
characteristic colour, depending on the network item it represents. The colours and
items are: red (tie-point), green (junction), yellow (completion), blue (reservoir) and pink
(tubing).
Zoom/Unzoom
To zoom or unzoom, first select the appropriate icon from the toolbar or from the right
hand mouse menu, as described above. To zoom in on an area, hold the left hand
mouse button while sweeping the mouse cursor over the area of interest. Alternatively,
click once at a point in the system, and the programme will zoom or unzoom on that
point using a fixed scaling factor (which may be adjusted using the Preferences
dialogue in the Preferences menu).
To revert to a full system view at any time, double-click the left hand mouse button at any
point in the window (except on an icon). The view will re-scale to show the whole of the
system.
Mask/Unmask
To mask or unmask, first select the appropriate icon from the toolbar or from the right
User Guide 356
hand mouse menu, as described above. To mask a node, click on itwith mask
selected; to unmask it click on it with unmask selected. Masking removes a node from
the calculation without removing it and its associated data from the network (which
deleting does). Masking is useful for simulating the effect of removing or adding in
completions. Note that masking a branch will have the effect of masking those below it
in the hierarchy.
Moving Items
Select the move option from the toolbar or from the right hand mouse menu. To move a
single item, place the mouse cursor above it and hold down the left mouse button while
dragging the mouse cursor to the desired new location. To move a group, select an
area as with the zoom option and then hold down the left mouse button with the mouse
cursor in the window before dragging the whole group to a new location. Items stay
selected after a group move but can be de-selected using the select option.
Deletion of Items
Select the delete icon from the toolbar or from the right hand mouse menu. Groups of
items may be deleted by group-selecting them as above, but with the delete option
chosen. NB: deletion of a node deletes the data associated with it so this option
should be used with caution. To delete a pure (non data-carrying) link re-do it.
Selection of Items
To select an item or items, first choose the select icon (black arrow) from the toolbar or
from the right hand mouse menu, the selected item will change colour. Group selections
can be achieved by first selecting the select icon then drag the left hand mouse button
over the area of interest. The select option is a toggle, so it can select or de-select
items. Group selections can be used to turn off the selection actioned by a group move.
Editing of Items
If a network item carries data it has an icon associated with it and can be edited by
double clicking on it provided that none of zoom/unzoom, move, delete or select are
chosen. Editing of network item data is covered in the section on Data Entry.
Right Hand Mouse Button Actions
Utility menus will appear when the right hand mouse button is clicked anywhere in the
system view. The normal menu appears when the button is clicked over an empty
space. It contains the commands to add and manipulate network items as well as
commands to bring up dialogue screens to change fonts and icon sises. If it is clicked
over a network icon, a shorter menu will appear with a number of network item specific
functions, such as the ability to change the icon size and label, and delete and select.
Panning
To move the view around the system, move the cursor close to the edge of the view in
the direction the system will be moved. The cursor will change to an arrow. Clicking the
left hand mouse button will move the system view by a fixed amount depending on the
current scaling factor. To pan quickly, hold the mouse button down and, after a short
357
PROSPER
time, the pan action will 'auto-repeat'.
Popup Status Information
If no toolbar (or equivalent menu item) is chosen as the mouse is moved over the
network icons, a small window will appear and show basic status information for the
node in question. The pop-up status window allows the validity status of a network item
to be checked without entering the data entry screen. This is optional: to switch this
function off go to the Preferences screen. To select nothing, toggle the currently
selected toolbar or menu items, or choose the blank option from the drop-down list box
in the toolbar.
Changing Icon Sises / System Fonts
These functions are also available from the right hand mouse menu. See the section on
menu details for more information.
Other Window Actions
Minimise: Click this button to minimise the window in the multilateral main
window.
Maximise: Click this button to maximise the window to fill the multilateral main
window.
Close: Click this button to remove the window from the workspace.
System menu: This contains various functions allowing the window to be
maximised, minimised, moved, etc.
2.6.11.1.2.2 The Navigator Window
This window can be used to aid in navigation about a large system. It will always consist
of a system schematic that is independent of any zooming on a system window. In
addition to the network, it contains a tracking rectangle that encloses the portion of the
system currently under view in the system window.
The tracking rectangle has two functions. If the focus is currently on a network window,
this rectangle surrounds the area of the network that that view is displaying.
Alternatively, the rectangle may be used to create new views of the network if the
navigator window is currently in focus. When the mouse is moved over the rectangle, the
cursor changes to allow resizing of the rectangle. In this way, the navigator window
facilitates creating views in areas of interest. Double-clicking the left hand mouse button
in the area will create a new system view displaying the selected area, although resised
to preserve a sensible aspect ratio.
Right Hand Mouse Button Menu
Clicking the right hand mouse button within the navigator window will produce a utility
User Guide 358
menu. This contains the following functions:
Navigator On Top: By default, the navigator is always on top of all system views. This
can be changed by selecting this item from the menu.
Hide Window: The navigator can be hidden using this option and, once removed, will
not appear in subsequent sessions until reopened from the Window menu. The
navigator can also be hidden by clicking on the cross button at the top right hand corner
of the window or by using the Window menu option.
New Window: Another way of producing a new view (see above).
Icon Sises: Invokes the Icon Sises dialogue (see below).
2.6.11.1.2.3 Toolbar Details
The toolbar is located below the main menu at the top of the main window. It consists of
a row of icons (described below) which act as accelerators to the menu functions
accessed from the Tools menu or most of those called from the right hand mouse button
in the network window.
The functions of the various buttons are described below. A quick description can be
gained for a given button by holding the mouse cursor over the button for a moment. A
small yellow box with a short description will appear.
Network Item Set-up
The functionality of the network items buttons is duplicated in the drop-down list: a
selection from this list will cause the appropriate button on the toolbar to be shown as
depressed. When a network item button is selected, the cursor, when over a system
window, will be drawn to represent the current selection. Click once on the system
window to cause a new node of the required type to be created at the chosen point. A
label dialogue will appear to allowing the node to be labelled; leaving the label blank
results in default node naming. This can be edited later by clicking the right hand mouse
button on the icon created.
Connections between nodes are created by choosing the Link button and holding
down the mouse left hand button whilst dragging between the nodes. There is a
connection hierarchy, which is represented by the branching of a parent branch into one
or more child branches, in the same way that the multilateral well branches out
physically. Indicate the direction of the hierarchy for junction-completion or completion-
completion connections by the order in which they are joined up.
Tie-point. This is the node for which the IPR is solved and is located at the
top of the system (in vertical depth and hierarchically). Hence, the tie-point
can only be a start point.
359
PROSPER
Junction. The main purpose of the junction is to be a branching node. It can
only have one link into it (from a tie-point, completion or other junction) but
any number coming out.
Completion. This contains both tubing and completion information. It is
attached below a tie-point, junction or another completion. It can only have
one link into it and branches out to either a junction or another completion. It
can also be logically attached (no direction implied) to any number of
reservoirs (but at least one).
Tank/reservoir. This represents a reservoir source and is logically attached
to any number of completions (but at least one).
Link. Connecting to a junction, the link becomes a tubing node and contains
data. Going into a completion, the tubing information is in the completion
and the link is blank only indicating the hierarchical relationship between
the nodes it connects with an arrow. Finally, when connecting a completion
and a reservoir, the link is logical and not hierarchical. Note that re-doing a
link between two nodes will delete it.
2.6.11.1.2.4 Network Manipulation
Zoom in/out. When 'zoom in/out' is selected, a zoom can be achieved either
by clicking the mouse on the system window, which will zoom in/out a fixed
amount and set the centre of the view to the position clicked. If zoom in is
selected, sweeping an area with the mouse will zoom in on the area
selected. The aspect ratio will be retained when an area zoom is performed.
Mask/Unmask an item. After masking is selected specific items can be
removed from the network for calculation purposes without deleting them.
This is particularly useful for seeing the effect of removing a completion
item.
Delete a node. After this is selected, the node may be deleted by clicking on
the item in the system window. The icon automatically becomes unselected
following a deletion to prevent accidental deletion of further nodes. To
delete a pure (non data-carrying) link re-do it.
Move a node. After this is selected, a node may be moved by clicking on the
item in the system window and then, with the mouse button depressed,
dragging the item to the new position. A group of nodes may also be
selected and moved.
Select a node. After this is pressed, a node may be selected/de-selected by
clicking on the item in the system window. The item will reverse its colour to
indicate selection/de-selection.
User Guide 360
2.6.11.1.2.5 Menu Details
Finish
Done exits the screen but validates the multilateral structure and data first. If the
structure is not valid a warning message appears providing the opportunity to remain in
the multilateral screen. One can exit the data screen, however, the data are marked
invalid.
Cancel leaves the multilateral screen, restoring the network to its state at the start of
the edit session.
Tools
These are equivalent to items to the right of, and indeed inside, the drop-down list box in
the tool bar and have been explained above.
Analyse
This menu contains options to plot and report the IPR results in a similar way to those in
the Single Well IPR. The multi-lateral is treated as one reservoir model option, such as
the multi-layer with dP friction loss. There is also a Calculate option, which brings up the
dialogue in the following figure.
361
PROSPER
The Calculate screen gives the option of calculating one IPR point or a curve. In the
former case pressure can be calculated from a rate or rate from a pressure. In the latter
case, pressure is calculated for a range of rates up to the AOF, as with other IPR
calculations. From this screen it is possible to specify the number of IPR points
(maximum 20) and the minimum pressure to calculate to. These are to help speed up
calculations if appropriate. Results of the points for curve calculation will be reported at
the bottom section of the screen. Also, having a bearing on calculation speed is the
switch between infinite and finite conductivity modes of calculation. In the latter case the
pressure drop in the tubing is taken into account. Before carrying out the calculation, the
network structure is validated and any errors are reported in the white list box in the
middle section of the screen. If the structure is not valid the calculation is not carried out.
The Details button is used to display pressure and rate-related parameters with respect
to the measured and vertical tubing depths of each branch.
During a calculation, diagnostic information is reported to the list box. Also, a Cancel
button is placed above the Calculate button to allow stopping the calculation. The
buttons to the left of the list box perform the functions in the Analyse menu, except Help,
which brings up this section. The push button Done exits the screen.
Visualise
These items are dealt with in the section on visualisation screens.
Preferences
The preferences dialogue is gained from the Preferences item of the frame window
menu. It allows customisation of a set of user-interface variables for subsequent
PROSPER sessions. The following options are available:
Enable Flyover Status Information. If this is checked then a status box appear as
the mouse is moved over the network item icons.
Auto-repeat delay when panning. When panning, the left-hand mouse button may be
held down to auto-repeat the action. The value given in this field represents the time
(in ms) before the auto-repeat action starts from when the mouse button is clicked.
Fraction of screen to pan per click. This represents the resolution of panning.
Zoom/unzoom factor. A single click in a system window while the zoom or unzoom
icons are active results in a fixed scaling to be applied to the view, while the centre
of the view is changed to the position in which the mouse was clicked. The value
entered in this field is the fixed scaling factor, and as such should be greater than
one.
Background. The background bitmap that is displayed on the background of the
main window (by default this is a PE logo with contact information) may be changed.
Select the required bitmap by pressing the button to the right of the field. The bitmap
will only be loaded after shut down and restarting the multilateral main screen.
Output
User Guide 362
Printer Setup - to set up the printer if not already done.
Print - prints the current child window as a hard-copy, metafile or to the clipboard,
whether a network window or a visualisation screen.
Window Menu
New Window. This creates a new system view. The new view is zoomed out to
include all the components.
Close All. Shuts down all system windows in the application.
Cascade. This reorganises the system windows into a cascade.
Tile. Tiles the system windows.
Toggle toolbar display. This will remove the toolbar if it is currently displayed, and
vice-versa. If the toolbar is not displayed, toolbar commands can be accessed via
the right hand mouse button on the system view window.
Toggle navigator display. Displays or hides the navigator window.
Below this is a list of currently active system windows. The current focus window may be
changed by clicking on one.
Help
Brings up this information on the network interface.
Other Items
Apart from the preferences it is possible to change other aspects of the user interface:
namely font and icon sises.
Network Fonts
Fonts used in the network drawing may be changed. To do this, select the Fonts option
from the menu obtained following a right hand mouse button click in the system window.
This will bring up a font selection dialogue. Select the required font and style and press
OK. The new font will be applied to all network drawings and also to labels in the
visualisation windows.
Icon Sises
The sises of the icons used to represent the network nodes can be changed. Select the
Icon Sises option from the menu obtained following a right hand mouse button click in
the system window. The following dialogue will appear:
363
PROSPER
The dialogue consists of a slider with a data entry field, which contains the current icon
size (this defaults to 50 out of an arbitrary 0 100 range for a new file). Change the icon
size by adjusting the slider or entering a new size in the entry field. Check the Automatic
Update box to update the system window with the new size as the slider is moved.
When the new icon size is entered, click on This View or All Views. In the latter case
the change will be applied to all network windows. In the former case, only the currently
active network view will be changed. The new icon size will not be saved; i.e. all
changes will be lost when the current file is exited.
2.6.11.1.2.6 Visualisation Screens
These screens supply three 2-D views (front, side and top) of the 3-D multilateral object.
The salient visual objects (tie-points, junctions, tubing, completions and reservoirs) are
drawn symbolically but they are spaced to scale. The screens are updated whenever a
network item is edited and has a valid data set and whenever an item is deleted or
becomes invalid. The visualisation objects are given the same colour as their
equivalent network objects (e.g. blue for reservoirs), and are identified by the same
labels as in the network structure.
The geometry used is left-handed Cartesian. It is assumed that the positive x axis is
along the direction of zero azimuth, positive y is at 90 degrees and positive z is in the
direction of increasing depth. The front view shows the (x, z) plane, where y is
increasing going into the screen and consequently positive z corresponds to moving
down the screen and positive x corresponds to moving to the right. The side view
shows the (y, z) plane, where x increases coming out of the screen, z increases going
down the screen and y increases going to the right. The top view shows the (y, x) plane
where z is increasing going into the screen, x increases going down the screen and y
increases going to the right.
The screens are brought up using the Visualise menu. One of the three views (front,
side and top) or all of them can be activated using the appropriate menu command. If
all the views are shown then they are tiled with any active network windows. The title bar
of each view window shows the extent of the network for the plane in question. The co-
ordinates are shown with respect to the start of a (hypothetical) straight tubing, which
User Guide 364
enters the tie-point in the direction of zero azimuth and has measured and vertical
depths equivalent to those of the tie-points. In a similar way to the network window one
can pan across a visualisation window by moving the mouse cursor close to one of the
window edges and clicking on the left button when the panning cursor appears. The
fraction of the screen traversed and the auto-repeat delay are controlled by the same
options as in the network window (chosen from the Preferences dialogue).
Right-hand Mouse Button Menu
Using the right hand mouse button on a view screen one can choose to display the co-
ordinates of any of the visual objects. The displayed coordinates can be written over
one another, it is sometimes better to view them separately. By default, the reservoir
depths are displayed at the start of a session. The next group of functions from this
menu contains zoom, unzoom and restore. The latter option resets the scale factor and
the view origins (which can be moved by panning) to the default values. The zoom
factor is the same as that used for the network window and is set in the Preferences
dialogue. Finally, the way the picture is drawn can be altered. Normally, the zooming
not only changes the extent of the drawing seen but also magnifies the objects (network
items and text) drawn. Switch off the magnify mode if zooming into a cluttered area as
this will allow more objects to fit in. Also, the network drawing is normally scaled to fit
the window, irrespective of the relative extents to the two axes. Choosing the draw to
scale option stretches the drawing in the direction with the greater physical extent (so it
no longer fits in the window).
2.6.11.2Data Entry
2.6.11.2.1 Overview
The data associated with any network item is accessed by double-clicking on its icon
when none of the network manipulation options (zoom/unzoom, delete, move and select)
have been chosen. This brings up a screen with editable data fields in it.
Apart from the tie-point and junction data screens, the main data entry screen for each
node is similar to that of the single well main data entry screen (see Section 7.1).
However, the reservoir data input child screen does not have any tab buttons in it. The
main data screens differ from the single well case in the action buttons: only the left-
most group - Done, Cancel, Reset, Validate and Help - are available. Their function is
the same as in the single well case. Hence, the differences between the single well IPR
data entry and the similar multilateral ones lie in the model selection and data input child
screens.
Given the hierarchical nature of the network, editing a parent branch causes the starting
points (e.g. depths) of child branches to be initialised. Those data fields that are
initialised from outside a particular network item are set read-only (coloured cyan) when
the screen to edit that net item is brought up. Hence, in order to edit a net item and fill it
with valid data it is normally necessary to have edited the parent branch first. However,
it is not a requirement to edit the network in hierarchical order as any child net item can
365
PROSPER
be filled with invalid data and saved before editing its parent.
Another difference from the single well IPR is that in each screen, on the right hand side,
there is a list box containing a drawing of the network where the data carrying nodes are
sorted hierarchically, by type or alphabetically according to a right-hand mouse button
menu selection. By clicking on the line corresponding to a node the given screen is
closed and the screen belonging to the node clicked on is opened.
2.6.11.2.2 Tie-point and Junction Data
The tie-point data consist of a measured and vertical depth, with an implied azimuth of 0
. The junction data are the same but are read-only. A junction must always be
hierarchically below another network item, so its data are entered automatically from its
parent. As mentioned earlier a junction mainly forms a branching point.
2.6.11.2.3 Tubing Data
Model Selection Screen
The model selection screen for tubing has options to select horizontal and vertical
correlations, choke models, flow types (tubing or annular) and correlation threshold
details. None of the options affect the general format of the data input screen but the
flow type affects the details of the equipment tabbed dialogue in the data input screen.
Data Input Screen
There are two tabbed dialogues in this data input screen, which allow the entry of a
deviation survey and equipment descriptions. These dialogues contain tables very
similar to the ones encountered by selecting System | Equipment from the PROSPER
main menu and then the Deviation Survey and Downhole Equipment push buttons. In
the case of the deviation survey there is an additional azimuth entry.
2.6.11.2.4 Completion Data
The completion data screen represents tubing and a completion. Hence, it is a
superset of the tubing data screen and is the same except for one extra tabbed
dialogue in the data input screen, for completion data. This dialogue has fields in it
similar to the single well IPR Wong-Clifford model for describing a deviated completion
(completion zone start and end measured and true depths) as well as a field for entering
a local (mechanical/geometric) skin value. There is a drop-down list box in the fifth
column, which allows the skin to be calculated using the Karakas & Tariq method. The
selection of Karakas and Tariq enables the push button in the last column, which brings
up an appropriate data entry screen when clicked upon with the mouse left button. On
entering valid data and exiting that screen with Done the skin value is calculated and
entered in the skin data column.
User Guide 366
2.6.11.2.5 Reservoir Data
Model Selection Screen
The model selection screen contains a model selection list box for selecting a Darcy-
like reservoir model as well as several data entry fields for entering PVT and
geometrical data used by all the models.
Data Input Screen
The data input screens contain a single sub-dialogue pertaining to the model chosen.
These are similar to the equivalent models in the single well case.
Consistency Validation
Beyond the consistency enforced by the validation of individual network items as they
are edited and the automatic entry of some child branch data from parents, there are
other checks carried out on a complete structure whose nodes are individually valid:
There must be no more than one tie-point in a network; other loose items are
ignored.
The top node must be a tie-point.
All branches must end in a completion; completions must be attached to at least one
reservoir.
Reservoirs should not overlap in depth (in the current model they are assumed to be
layers).
2.6.11.3Multilateral Example
For an example of how to set up a Multilateral Well model please refer to Tutorial 12 in
Section 3 of this User Guide.
2.7 Artificial Lift Data Input
This section describes how to enter the description of artificial lift equipment in a well for
calculating a systems analysis from the System | ... menu.
The Design section describes how to design suitable gas lift, ESP, HSP, PCP and jet
pump equipment for new or existing wells.
2.7.1 Continuous Gas Lift Input Data
This option is used to input data for a gas lifted system and is available in System |
Gaslift Data when the 'Gaslift (Continuous)'is selected in the Options | Options
screen.
367
PROSPER
If the gas lifted system is still to be designed, then this screen can be skipped and
returned to after the design has been carried out in Design | Gaslift Design screen.
The required input depends on the choice of casing pressure calculation method.
These are the options available that can be selected in the Options | Options screen:
No Friction Loss in Annuls
No flowing pressure losses occur in the annulus. A static gas gradient in
the casing is assumed. This model should be used for the majority of gas
lift installations.
Friction Loss in Annulus
The friction pressure drop in the casing is calculated assuming that the
gas lift gas has the same temperature as the producing fluid at any given
depth. Input of both tubing O.D. and casing I.D. is required to define the
annulus geometry.
Safety Equipment
Friction pressure losses are calculated in the surface piping, tubing/
casing annulus and an annular safety valve where fitted. This acts to vary
the casing head pressure with injection rate.
To analyse an existing installation, the gas lift details that need to be entered will
depend upon the particular gas lift method that has been selected.
Firstly select the gas lift system type on the Options menu, then enter the gaslift data by
selecting System | Gaslift data.
2.7.1.1 General Options
Regardless of the specific gas lift model used, a number of inputs are always required
these are detailed below.
Fluid Properties
The gas gravity and impurities of the injected gas stream are required to be entered.
It is possible to model CO
2
or N
2
as the injected gas. For example, to model CO
2
injection enter Gaslift Gas Gravity = 1.53 and Mole percent CO
2
= 100%.
Injection Rate Method
It is possible to select whether to use by default GLR Injected or Injected Gas Rate as
User Guide 368
mode of gas injection.
Injection Rate/GLR
Once the injection rate method has been selected, the value of the gas to be injected
can be entered. If the 'GLR injected' method is selected, then the program will use the
GLR injected value in this screen unless a sensitivity is carried out on either the GLR
injected or the Gas Injection Rate. If either of these sensitivities are performed, the
options and values selected in this screen will be superseded.
When generating tables of lift curves for other programs (such as GAP) it is
recommended that the GLR Injected option is used.
Injection Model
Three injection models are available:
- Fixed Depth of Injection
- Optimum Depth of Injection
- Valve Depths Specified
More information on each option can be found in the following sections.
2.7.1.2 Fixed Depth Of Injection
When this method is selected, only the depth of injection will be asked for:
369
PROSPER
The program assumes that the casing pressure is sufficient to inject lift gas at
the specified depth to achieve the GLR Injected or the Injected Gas Rate.
2.7.1.3 Optimum Depth of Injection
When this method is selected enter the maximum depth of injection, the dP across the
gas lift valve and the top casing pressure.
PROSPER will now calculate the maximum depth which can be injected at. This is done
by finding the casing pressure along the annulus and if the casing pressure is higher
than the tubing pressure at that point plus the dP across the valve value inserted, then
injection can take place. If the casing pressure is less than the tubing pressure plus the
dP across the valve then injection cannot take place.
For the Gas lifted (safety equipment) option, the compressor discharge pressure is
requested instead of the casing pressure.
Use Optimum Depth of Injection to evaluate the potential increase in
production due to gas lift without the need to perform a detailed design and
spacing the unloading valves.
User Guide 370
2.7.1.4 Valve Depth Specified
Enter the measured depth of the gas lift valves as well as the casing pressure and dP
across the valves.
The deepest possible point of injection is calculated using the casing pressure and the
dP across the valves. Based upon this deepest injection depth, PROSPER will cross
check to see which is the deepest valve which can be injected at. Only valves which are
less deep than this 'deepest injection depth' can be injected into and PROSPER will
injected all of the gas into the lowest valve which can be reached.
If a gas lift design has already been done, or the mandrel depths have been entered for
a Gaslift QuickLook Calculation, the valve details can be copied across using the T
ransfer button.
The Casing pressure entered should be the available injection system
pressure for the current operating conditions If calculating sensitivities for a
new casing pressure operated design, always subtract the dP to close
valves for each unloading valve above the operating valve from the design
casing pressure.
2.7.1.5 Gas Lift (Safety Equipment)
For the Gas Lifted (safety equipment) option, the annular safety valve pressure losses
are calculated using the valve depth and bean diameter entered on the System Gaslift
371
PROSPER
Data screen as follows:
The safety equipment data can be entered by accessing the Safety Equipment button
in this screen:
The details of the surface injection system are used to calculate the casing head
User Guide 372
pressure as a function of gas injection rate and compressor output pressure. Frictional
losses in the annulus are taken into account when calculating the casing pressure at
each gas lift valve depth. The safety valve pressure loss is clearly seen on the following
gradient plot:
2.7.1.6 Gas Lift (Allow injection in Pipe Line above wellhead)
This option, when implemented allows to model gas injection in a pipeline. To enable
this option, select 'Pipeline Only' in the 'Options Summary' and 'Gas Lift' in the Artificial
Lift method.
To specify the position of the gas lift valve, in the surface equipment data select this
feature in the equipment type combo box , as shown below:
373
PROSPER
And in the Gas Lift Data enter the properties of the gas and the gas rate method and
quantity:
2.7.2 Gas Lift For Gas Wells
When producing a large amount of liquid in a gas well, if the gas rate is not high enough,
liquid loading can occur. To avoid this loading occurring within the well, it is possible to
inject more gas and therefore increase the velocity in the well to lift the fluid. The
increase in gas rate can also act to reduce the hold-up in the well.
This option can be activated within the Options | Options screen when the fluid type is
User Guide 374
set to Retrograde Condensate.
2.7.2.1 Gas Lift For Gas Wells Input
When the option has been selected, the required input data can be inserted into the
System | Gas Lift Data screen:
The required data is detailed below:
Gas lift gas gravity Gas gravity of the injected gas
Mole Percent H
2
S Enter the percent of H
2
S in the injected gas.
Mole Percent CO
2
Enter the percent of CO
2
in the injected gas.
Mole Percent N
2
Enter the percent of N
2
Injected Gas Ratio The rate of gas to be injected is defined based upon the ratio
with the produced gas. A gas fraction of 1 will inject the same
rate of gas as is being produced.
Gaslift Valve Depth
(Measured)
This is the depth at which the gas lift gas will be injected
375
PROSPER
Gaslift Method At this time, the only method which can be selected is the
Fixed Depth of Injection.
2.7.3 Intermittent Gas Lift
If intermittent gas lift is selected as artificial lift method in Options | Options , the
following input data are required to be inserted System | Intermittent Gas Lift:
Surface injection
pressure
Gas Lift injection pressure at the casing head.
Injection depth Depth of the injection valve
Gas lift gas gravity Gas gravity of the injected gas
Wellhead Pressure Pressure at the well head
Valve Port Size Size of the injection valve port
Water Cut Water cut of the produced well stream
Tubing Liquid Level Depth of liquid in the tubing to be lifted
This model does not use the usual concept of nodal analysis and is instead based upon
the intermittent gas model. Calculations can be carried out by selecting Design |
Intermittent Gas Lift.
2.7.4 ESP Input Data
If Electrical Submersible Pump has been selected as the well lift method on the
Options | Options screen, then the pump parameters can be inserted into the System
| Electrical Submersible Pumps input screen.
If a new ESP design is being performed, the equipment has not yet been sized, and so
this screen can be skipped and the user can move directly to Design on the main
User Guide 376
PROSPER tool bar.
Please note that when an ESP lifted well is being modelled, the annulus space must
also be defined within the System | Equipment | Downhole Equipment screen.
For analysis and optimisation of an existing ESP installation, enter the data on the ESP
input data screen as requested:
The screen is split into four sections:
Top Left This section is where the input data for the model is inserted
Top Right Once a pump has been selected, the performance curves will
be displayed here.
Bottom Left If the 'Allow Tapered ESPs' option is selected, then the
different ESPs to be used are selected here.
377
PROSPER
Bottom Right Once a motor has been selected, the performance curves
will be displayed here.
Input Data
Pump Depth
(Measured)
The depth at which the pump is located within the well. This is
defined with the measured depth used in the deviation survey
Operating Frequency Frequency of the pump.
Maximum Pump OD Sets the maximum outer diameter which the pump can have
and acts as a filter to remove all larger pumps from the
selection options.
Cable Length Length of the power cable from the surface to the motor. This
is used to calculate the voltage drop along the cable and the
voltage delivered to the motor.
Gas Separator
Method
There are now three different models which can be used to
model gas separation at the pump inlet:
- Enter Separator Efficiency
- Calculate - Petroleum Experts
- Calculate - Natural
More information on these model can be found in the Gas
Separator Modelling section.
Gas Separator
Efficiency
This input will change depending upon the model selected.
For more information please refer to the Gas Separator
Modelling section.
Liquid Level This option is activated if the Model Produced Oil and Gas
in Annulus options is selected in the Options | Options
screen.
Allows the user to 'Decide to Enter' or 'Calculate the Liquid
Level' in the annulus.
Liquid Level/Casing
Head Pressure
Depending on the option selected above, either the liquid
level or the casing head pressure will be inserted here. The
program will calculate the other value based upon this input.
Number of Stages Number of stages in the pump.
If Allow Taper ESPs is selected, this value will be ignored
as the number of stages of each different tapered ESP is
entered.
Voltage at the
Surface
This is the voltage at the top of the cable.
Pump Wear Factor This is used to account for deviation from the manufacturer's
published curves due to wear. Please refer to the Pump
User Guide 378
Wear Factor section for more details.
Gas DeRating Model The de-rating effects that having free gas within the pump
has on the performance curves of the pump can be taken into
account using an external *.dll. For more information on
adding user defined models to PROSPER please refer to
the User Correlation section.
Allow Tapered ESPs PROSPER can now model different pump types in series.
This allows the first 50 stages of the pump to use the
performance curves of ESP A and the second 25 stages to
use the performance curves of ESP B. For more details on
setting this up, please refer to the Tapered ESP section.
Current Pump Select the pump which is to be used within the model.
If Allow Taper ESPs is selected, this pump will not be
included in the system. Only those pumps entered in the
Tapered ESP section will be modelled.
Current Motor Select the motor which is to be used within the model.
Current Cable Select the cable which is to be used within the model.
2.7.4.1 Gas Separator Modelling
It is often necessary to install a gas separating unit below an ESP in order to stop free
gas from entering the pump and damaging it or decreasing its efficiency.
Traditionally the gas separator efficiency has been entered as a single value which is
independent of rate, however, it is now possible to select one of three models to capture
the response of the unit as detailed below:
2.7.4.1.1 Enter Separator Efficiency
If this option is selected, a single, constant gas separator efficiency is entered which will
control the percentage of the free gas which is passed up through the annulus.
2.7.4.1.2 Calculate - Petroleum Experts
The Petroleum Experts calculation can be used to model the change in gas separator
efficiency with flow rate. The method assumes that the main constraint on the separation
process is the ability to vent gas to the annulus.
The entire fluid is passed through an inducer which is modelled as a single stage of the
selected main pump. The added pressure from the inducer is then used to drive gas
through the outflow port to the annulus and the maximum possible venting rate is
computed from the choke equation.
The separation efficiency is the ratio of the maximum possibly gas rate to the annulus to
the free gas rate below the separator based upon the fluid PVT and calculated
conditions.
379
PROSPER
When using the model it is possible to enter a Port size directly or have the port size
calculated based upon the pump OD. This port size is used in the calculations as the
port through which the separated gas will pass to reach the annulus.
Additional Inputs
Port Diameter to
Annulus
The port size can be chosen to be entered directly by the
user or calculated by PROSPER.
Diameter of Port to
Annulus
If the port size has been selected to be entered by the user
then the port size can be entered here.
2.7.4.1.3 Calculate - Natural
This model is based upon the natural buoyancy of the gas in the fluid and gives a
decreasing trend in the gas separation efficiency with increasing liquid rate.
User Guide 380
It is based on part of the work by Al Hanati in 'A Simple Model For The Efficiency Of
Rotary Separators' (SPE28525) 1994.
2.7.4.1.4 Comparison of Separator Models
Below is a plot comparing the three methods and test results (obtained by Alhanati in
SPE28525) for a particular gas separator:
2.7.4.1.5 Separator Efficiency Calculation
At the top left hand corner of the ESP Input Data screen it is possible to select the
Separator Efficiency button to carry out a calculation and see the separator efficiency
over a range of rates.
Once in the screen, the relevant model and data to be used can be entered in the top
left corner:
381
PROSPER

2.7.4.2 Pump Wear Factor
The Pump wear factor is used to account for deviation from the manufacturer's
published performance curves due to wear etc.
For example, entering 0.05 causes the program to scale the pump head curves
down by 5% (i.e. head is 95% of the database value).
Entering 0 causes the program to use the database curves directly.
A negative number can be entered to simulate a particular pump that performs
better than the database curve.
Note: to be able to enter negative wear factors, modify the range of validity of
the wear factor parameter in the Units section. To do that, access the menu
Units/Units and enter for the 'Pump Wear Factor' a 'Minimum Validation value'
User Guide 382
equal to -1 (fraction):
2.7.4.3 Tapered ESPs
PROSPER now allows stages from different pumps to be entered in series within a
single well. This is done by selecting the 'Allow Tapered ESPs' option.
383
PROSPER
Up to ten different ESPs can be selected and each have have a set number of stages
associated with it. The fluid will pass through the pump labelled '1' first and then work
through the other pumps in numerical order until either no pump is entered or the tenth
pump is reached.
The power required for each Tapered ESP stage is added up and this total power is
then used for the motor calculations as would normally be done for a single ESP unit.
Once the different pumps and stages have been entered, calculations can be carried
out as would normally be done for an ESP lifted system.
Please note that the values entered in Current Pump and the Number of Stages in
the main input section will be ignored when Allow Tapered ESPs has been selected.
2.7.4.4 ESP in Pipeline
As well as placing an ESP down-hole, it is possible to place the pump within the surface
equipment.
The pump can be entered into the pipeline in the System | Equipment (Tubing etc) |
User Guide 384
Surface Equipment screen by selecting 'Pump' from the drop down menu:
When entering the pump data in System | Electrical Submersible Pump the input
data is the same as for a down hole except that no 'Pump Depth' is required:
385
PROSPER
This is because the pump location has already been defined in the Surface
Equipment screen.
2.7.5 HSP Input Data
If Hydraulic Drive Downhole Pump has been selected as the well lift method on the
Options | Options screen, then the pump parameters can be inserted into the System
| Hydraulic Submersible Pumps input screen.
If a new HSP design is being performed, the equipment has not yet been sized, and so
PROSPER tool bar.
For analysis and optimisation of an existing HSP installation, enter the data on the HSP
input data screen as requested:
User Guide 386
Input Data
Pump Depth
(Measured)
Enter the depth at which the pump is located within the well.
This is defined with the measured depth used in the
deviation survey
Pump Maximum
Allowable OD
This sets the maximum Outer Diameter which the pump can
have and acts as a filter to remove all larger pumps from the
selection options.
Turbine Maximum
Allowable OD
This sets the maximum Outer Diameter which the turbine can
have and acts as a filter to remove all larger turbines from the
selection options.
Pump Speed Enter the speed of the pump. The turbine speed is assumed
to be the same as this Pump speed.
% of Fluid of
Reservoir Fluid
The % Power Fluid of Reservoir Fluid defines what fraction
of the total produced liquids the power fluid represents. A
figure of 100% means that the amount of power fluid used to
drive the turbine is the same as the amount of produced
reservoir fluids.
Number of Pump
Stages
Enter the number of Stages in the pump.
387
PROSPER
Number of Turbine
Stages
Enter the number of Stages in the turbine.
Pump Select the pump which is to be used within the model.
Turbine Select the turbine which is to be used within the model.
2.7.6 Progressive Cavity Pumps
If Progressive Cavity Pump has been selected as the well lift method on the Options |
Options screen, then the pump parameters can be inserted into the System |
Progressive Cavity Pumps input screen.
If a new PCP design is being performed, the equipment has not yet been sized and so
PROSPER tool bar.
Please note that no PCP data is available when PROSPER is first installed. Any PCP
data should be obtained from the manufacturer and inserted into the Artificial Lift
Database using the steps detailed in the 'Add Pump' Section of this Guide.
For analysis and optimisation of an existing PCP installation, enter the data on the PCP
input data screen as requested. Depending on the options selected, different data will
be required.
2.7.6.1 Sucker Rod Drive
When Sucker Rod Drive has been selected, then the following input data is required:
User Guide 388
Pump Depth
(measured)
This is the depth of the pump in the well using the measured
depth.
Pump Speed Enter the speed of the pump.
Maximum OD The maximum OD is used as a filter to exclude any pumps
which would not fit inside the casing.
Gas Separator
Method
Gas Separator
Efficiency
Modelling section.
Total Rod Length Enter the total length of the sucker rod.
screen.
Allows the user to Decide to Enter or Calculate the Liquid
Level in the annulus.
389
PROSPER
Liquid Level/Casing
Head Pressure
Current Rod Select the Rod to be used in the model.
Please note that when Sucker Rod Drive is selected, the produced fluid will be
produced in the annulus between the sucker rod pump and the inner wall of the tubing.
The outer annulus between the tubing and casing should also be defined in the
downhole equipment although the fluid will not travel up this annulus.
2.7.6.2 Downhole Motor Drive
When Downhole Motor Drive has been selected, then the following input data is
required:
Pump Depth
(measured)
This is the depth of the pump in the well using the measured
depth.
Pump Speed Enter the speed of the pump.
Maximum OD The maximum OD is used as a filter to exclude any pumps
which would not fit inside the casing.
Gas Separator
Method
User Guide 390
Gas Separator
Efficiency
Modelling section.
Cable Length Enter the total length of the cable. This is used to calculate
the total voltage drop between the surface and the motor.
Voltage @ Surface Enter the voltage at the surface. This is used to calculate the
voltage at the motor based upon the voltage drop in the
cable.
screen.
Allows the User to Decide to Enter or Calculate the Liquid
Level in the annulus.
Liquid Level/Casing
Head Pressure
Current Motor Select the Motor to be used in the model.
Current Cable Select the Cable to be used in the model.
2.7.7 Coiled Tubing Gas Lift
If Coiled Tubing Gas Lift has been selected as the well lift method on the Options |
Options screen, then the pump parameters can be inserted into the System | Coiled
Tubing Data input screen.
If a new 'Coiled Tubing Gas Lift design' is being performed, the equipment has not yet
been sized, and so this screen can be skipped and the user can move directly to
Design on the main PROSPER tool bar.
For analysis and optimisation of an existing Coiled Tubing Gas Lift installation, enter the
data on the Coiled Tubing Gas Lift input data screen as requested:
391
PROSPER
Input Data
Gaslift Gas Gravity Enter the Gas Gravity of the injected gas.
GLR Injected Enter the Gas to Liquid ratio to be injected into the well.
Mole Percent H
2
S Enter the mole percentage of H
2
Mole Percent CO
2
Enter the mole percentage of CO
2
Mole Percent N
2
Enter the mole percentage of N
2
Coiled Tubing Inside
Diameter
Enter the inside diameter of the coiled tubing.
Coiled Tubing
Thickness
Enter the thickness of the coiled tubing.
Coiled Tubing Inside
Roughness
This is the roughness of the inside wall of the coiled tubing
which will be used in the pressure drop calculation of the
injected gas.
Coiled Tubing
Outside Roughness
This is the roughness of the outside wall of the coiled tubing
which will be used in the calculation of the pressure drop
experienced
Two methods for the calculation of the injected are available: Specified Injection Depth
and Optimum Injection Depth. Depending upon the method, different input data will be
required.
Specified Injection Depth
User Guide 392
Coiled Tubing
Specified Depth
This is the fixed depth at which the coiled tubing will inject if it
is feasible to do so.
Gas Injection
Pressure
This is the pressure of the injected gas at the casing head.
dP Across Valve This is the pressure drop which the injected gas will
experience when it enters the production tubing.
When using the specified depth of injection, a single injection depth is specified by the
user. As the pressure of the injected gas at the casing head is entered by the user, it is
possible to calculate the gas pressure at the point of injection from the roughness of the
coiled tubing, the rate being injected and the depth of the injection point.
In order to injection, the gas pressure at the point of injection must be greater than the
pressure within the production string by at least the value given in the 'dP Across Valve'
field. If it is less than this value, then injection cannot occur and no gas will be injected.
The system will therefore either inject at the specified depth or not inject at all.
Optimum Injection Depth
Coiled Tubing
Specified Depth
This is the maximum depth that the gas can be injected at.
Gas Injection
Pressure
This is the pressure of the injected gas at the casing head.
dP Across Valve This is the pressure drop which the injected gas will
experience when it enters the production tubing.
When using the optimum depth of injection, the maximum depth which can be injected at
is specified by the user. As the pressure of the injected gas at the casing head is
entered by the user, it is possible to calculate the gas pressure at every point within the
tubing from the roughness of the coiled tubing, the rate being injected and the depth at
that point.
In order to injection, the gas pressure at the point of injection must be greater than the
pressure within the production string by at least the value given in the 'dP Across Valve'
field. If it is less than this value, then injection cannot occur and no gas will be injected.
The optimum point of injection is the deepest point at which the system is able to inject
and therefore the depth of injection can be any depth less than the maximum depth
depending upon the pressure within the system.
2.7.8 Diluent Injection
Diluent Injection is used to enhance the production of heavy, viscous crude oil, in some
cases making previously not producible hydrocarbon reserves economically
recoverable. The injected light hydrocarbon diluent reduces crude viscosity and
improves its flow characteristics.
393
PROSPER
The 'Diluent Injection' feature can also be used to inject fresh water into wells producing
very salty water. This reduces the salinity of the fluid and therefore also reduces the
likelihood of salt deposition occurring and plugging the well or pipelines. As the injection
of water will increase the overall mixture density of the produced fluid, gas is also often
injected simultaneously to help decrease the flowing bottom hole pressure of the well.
PROSPER now allows both diluent and gas lift injection to be modelled simultaneously
at different specified depths.
The properties of the Diluent are defined in the PVT | Input Data screen.
If Diluent Injection has been selected as the well lift method on the Options | Options
screen, then the pump parameters can be inserted into the System | Diluent Injection
input screen.Depending upon the options selected the input screen will be different.
Diluent Injection
Diluent Injection
Depth
This is the depth at which the diluent will be injected
Diluent Injection Rate This is the rate of diluent to be injected
Diluent Injection with Gas Lift Injection
User Guide 394
Diluent Injection
Depth
This is the depth at which the diluent will be injected.
Diluent Injection Rate This is the rate of diluent to be injected
Injected Gas Gravity Enter the Gas Gravity of the injected gas
Mole Percent H
2
S Enter the mole percent of H
2
Mole Percent CO
2
Enter the mole percent of CO
2
Mole Percent N
2
Enter the mole percent of N
2
GLR Injected This is the gas to liquid ratio which will define the rate of gas
lift gas to be injected.
Gaslift Valve Depth This is the depth at which the gas lift gas will be injected.
2.7.9 Jet Pumps
If Jet Pump has been selected as the well lift method on the Options | Options screen,
then the pump parameters can be inserted into the System | Jet Pumps input screen.
If a new Jet Pump design is being performed, the equipment has not yet been sized,
and so this screen can be skipped and the user can move directly to Design on the
main PROSPER tool bar.
For analysis and optimisation of an existing Jet Pump installation, enter the data on the
Jet Pump input data screen as requested:
395
PROSPER
Pump Depth
(Measured)
The depth at which the pump is located within the well. This is
defined with the measured depth used in the deviation survey
Maximum OD Sets the maximum Outer Diameter which the pump can have
and acts as a filter to remove all larger pumps from the
selection options.
Surface Injection
Rate
Rate of injection fluid given at standard conditions
Surface Injection
Pressure
Pressure of the injection fluid at the surface.
Nozzle Loss
Coefficient
This coefficient is a measure of the energy loss due to
friction in the nozzle and should be provided by the Jet Pump
manufacturer.
Suction Loss
Coefficient
friction in the suction element and should be provided by the
Jet Pump manufacturer.
Throat Loss
Coefficient
friction in the throat and should be provided by the Jet Pump
manufacturer.
Diffuser Loss
Coefficient
friction in the diffuser and should be provided by the Jet
Pump manufacturer.
Current JET Pump Select the pump which is to be included in the current model.
User Guide 396
2.7.10 Multiphase Pumps
When Multiphase Pump | FRAMO Pumps has been selected as the well lift method on
the Options | Options screen, then the pump parameters can be inserted into the
System | Multiphase Pumps input screen:
Power Available Enter the maximum power available when operating the
pump. If the available power is not sufficient, the pump head
produced will be reduced until the power available is met.
Pump Wear Factor For more information please refer to the Pump Wear Factor
Section.
Frame size This value is read only and is determined from the inserted
power available.
Pump Configuration Can select either a single pump or a number of pumps in
parallel
Current Pump Select the pump which is to be included in the model.
The specifications of all Framo Multiphase Pumps can be found in the Design |
Database option from the main menu. It is also possible to define a new pump into this
database using the Add option.
2.7.11 Sucker Rod Pumps
If Sucker Rod Pump has been selected as the well lift method on the Options |
Options screen, then the pump parameters can be inserted into the System | Sucker
Rod Pumps input screen.
397
PROSPER
If a new Sucker Rod Pump design is being performed, the equipment has not yet been
sized, and so this screen can be skipped and the user can move directly to Design on
the main PROSPER tool bar.
For analysis and optimisation of an existing Sucker Rod Pump installation, enter the
data on the Sucker Rod Pump input data screen as requested:
The input data screen is directly connected to the database for the Sucker Rod Pumps
and requires the following data:
Anchored Tubing Can be set to either 'Yes' or 'No' depending if anchor is
present
User Guide 398
Pump Depth Defines depth that pump operates to.
Pump Volumetric
Efficiency
Enter the volumetric efficiency of the pump
Pump Diameter Diameter of the pump
Surface Stroke
Length
Enter the stroke length of the pump at the surface
Pumping Speed Enter the operating speed of the pump
Rod Number Select the rod number which represents the pump currently in
use in the field
Gas Anchor - Method The efficiency of the gas anchor can be calculated or
entered.
Gas Anchor -
Efficiency
If the Method is set to 'Entered', the efficiency must be
defined.
Gas Anchor - Type The type of gas anchor can be selected from the list of:
- Cup Type
- Packer Type
- Poor Boy
Gas Anchor -
Annulus Area
The annulus area is also required to be entered.
2.8 Matching Menu
The PROSPER 'Matching' menu is used to achieve the following objectives:
Compare the results of the model to the actual data received from the field
If required, adjust parameters within the model to reproduce and match the observed
field data
In the case of artificial lift, run calculations to assist with system diagnostics and
troubleshooting.
A properly matched model is a pre-requisite for accurate performance prediction and
therefore time should always be taken to ensure that a good match is achieved.
The quality control exercises like 'Correlation comparison' are based on what is
possible according to the principles of fundamental physics.
The Matching menu offers the following calculation options:
VLP / IPR Matching
This option enables the user to tune the well bore multiphase flow correlations to fit
measured down hole pressures and rates. When the rough approximation temperature
399
PROSPER
model is being used, this method also allows the U value to be estimated to match the
wellhead temperature recorded in the field. Up to 1000 well tests can be stored and
used for matching purposes.
Once the VLP is matched, the IPR can be adjusted to match observed rates and
pressures also.
Gradient Matching
Existing correlations can be modified using non-linear regression to best fit a gradient
survey (i.e. a number of pressure readings taken at different depths down the well bore).
Comparison of the fit parameters will identify which correlation required the least
adjustment to match the measured data.
This should be used only if for a given rate more than one measurement is
available along the production string. If a single reading is available, the VLP/
IPR Matching option should be used.
Pipeline Matching
The program uses actual wellhead and manifold pressures together with temperature
data points to match surface pressure drop correlations. Separate screens allow the
match parameters to be viewed and the best match selected.
Correlation Comparison
This is the primary step in quality control of measured well test data.
This option allows pressure gradient plots to be generated with different correlations to
be compared with measured gradient survey data. The comparison enables the user to:
- Understand if the measurements make sense, that is to say, violate or adhere
to the principles of physics
- Select the flow correlation that best fits the experimental measurement
-
'Correlation Comparison' is a fundamental step in the quality check of the model and is
used as the second step within the VLP/IPR Matching process.
QuickLook
This feature is active only if an artificial lift method (Gas Lift, ESP or HSP) is selected.
It allows calculation of the pressure gradient in an artificially lifted well for a quick check
of lift performance.
For gas lifted wells, valve opening and closing pressures are calculated to permit
troubleshooting gas lift installations.
For ESP and HSP wells, the performance of the ESP and HSP can be checked.
Correlation Parameters
User Guide 400
The tubing and pipeline match parameters can be inspected reset or entered by hand
using this menu option. This capability is useful for troubleshooting, or to input match
parameters determined previously.
Correlation Thresholds
This option allows the User to specify a threshold angle for both tubing and pipeline
correlations at which the program will automatically change to another (specified)
correlation. This option will enable vertical risers in sub sea completions to be modelled
more accurately.
2.8.1 VLP/IPR Match and Quality Check
This feature enables the user to adjust the multiphase flow correlations to match flowing
bottom hole pressure surveys or production logging runs.
Up to 1000 pressure tests can be stored and used for matching. VLP/IPR Match allows
data to be matched over a range of rates as well as depths.
The Matching Procedure follows 4 main steps as detailed at the top of the screen:
1. Estimate U Value - If the 'Rough Approximation' temperature model is being
used the U value required to match the well head temperature can be calculated.
2. Correlation Comparison - This section allows the different correlations to be
compared and the best suited to be selected. For an oil well, it is also possible to carry
out a quality check of the data.
3. Match VLP - Once the closest matching correlation has been found, a
regression is carried out to find the parameters required to match the test data.
4. VLP/IPR - Once the VLP has been accurately matched, it can be used to
ensure that the IPR is also representative of the test.
These four steps are carried out in sequence and the different sections can be
accessed by moving through the buttons at the top of the screen from left to right.
401
PROSPER
The required input data for each well test are:
Test Point Date and
Comment
Each test can have a date and comment associated with it to
help identify each test.
Tubing Head
Pressure
The flowing pressure at the well head for the test conditions
entered
Tubing Head
Temperature
The recorded flowing temperature at the well head at the
time of the test. This is used to match the U value when using
the rough approximation.
Water Cut / WGR The water cut (WGR for gas wells) at the time of the test
should be entered.
Liquid/Oil/Gas Rate For an oil well, the liquid or oil rate of the test can be entered
depending on the 'Rate Type' selected at the top of the
screen.
For a gas well, the gas rate is entered.
The rate is entered at standard conditions
Gauge Depth
(Measured)
Depth of the pressure point reading. This is entered as a
measured depth.
Gauge Pressure The pressure of the gauge at the time of the test.
Reservoir Pressure The is the reservoir pressure when the test was taken and is
used during the IPR matching section of the workflow.
This is not entered if the IPR model is set to Multilayer or
Multilateral.
Gas Oil Ratio/ CGR/
Separator GOR
Enter the solution GOR for an oil, the CGR for a gas or the
Separator GOR for a condensate
User Guide 402
GOR Free Free gas production from a gas cap or injection
breakthrough. The measured total GOR during the test
(including the tank gas) must equal GOR + GOR Free.
Please note that any value entered in this column will remain
free gas even if the oil is calculated to be under saturated.
(Oil Wells Only)
Gas Lift Rate The gas lift injection rate at the time of the test. (Gas Lifted
Wells Only)
Injection Depth The depth at which the gas lift gas is being injected. This is
entered as a measured depth. (Gas Lifted Wells Only)
Operating Frequency The operating frequency of the pump at the time of the test.
(ESP Wells Only)
Pump Wear Factor Enter the pump wear factor to control the operation of the
pump at the time of the test. For more information please
refer to the Pump Wear Factor Section (ESP Wells Only)
Pump Intake
Pressure
The pressure at the intake to the pump. (ESP Wells Only)
Pump Discharge
Pressure
The pressure at the discharge point of the pump. (ESP
Wells Only)
The Gas Oil Ratio is the solution GOR. If the reservoir is under-saturated, there
is no free gas production at the sand face and the GOR free should be set to
zero.
The Gas Oil Ratio can also be entered as Total GOR (Solution + Free GOR). In
this case the GOR Free can be entered as nil. The program will determine how
much gas is in solution and how much in the free phase according to the PVT.
If a value is entered as Free GOR, this will remain free even if the pressure
calculated is above the bubble point of the fluid.
The Test Point Date and Comment fields are provided to allow the optional entry of
notes to identify the match data set. Examples would be test date, source of pressure
data, comments on test quality etc.
Accessing QuickLook
When Gas Lift, ESP, or HSP artificial lift method is in use, from the VLP/IPR
matching screen it is possible to access the QuickLook section
403
PROSPER
2.8.1.1 Estimate U Value
As the PVT properties of a fluid are dependent not only on pressure but also on
temperature, it is important to ensure that the modelled temperature in the well is
representative of the actual temperature in the well.
If the temperature prediction method is set to Rough Approximation, the User can use
the Estimate U value button to estimate the overall heat transfer coefficient for the
selected well test.
The procedure is:
Click on the button to the left of the well test data that we wish to estimate the
overall heat transfer coefficient. If no test is selected, all of the enabled tests will
be carried out an averaged U value determined.
Click on the Estimate U value button
PROSPER will estimate the overall heat transfer coefficient that matches the
wellhead temperature of the well test.
The option to save this new U value to the Geothermal Gradient section is then
given. If 'yes' is selected, the new calculated U value will be used within the model
while if 'no' is selected, the previous value will be used.
2.8.1.2 Correlation Comparison
Selecting Correlation Comparison will move the user to the correlation comparison
screen. If more than one test has been entered and is enabled, each one will be done in
sequence.
When the screen is opened, the data entered in the VLP/IPR matching screen for the
relevant test will automatically populate the input fields.
The Correlation Comparison screen is detailed in the Correlation Comparison Section.
The concept of this section of the VLP/IPR matching process is to find which
correlations give the closest match to the test point before the matching regression is
carried out. To do this, select a number of different correlations from the bottom left
hand corner of the correlation comparison screen. Once the correlations have been
selected, select calculate to run the comparison.
Selecting Plot will allow the user to see how close each correlation is to the test point:
User Guide 404
2.8.1.2.1 VLP Quality Check
For an oil well, in addition to providing information on the best correlation to use for the
matching process, the Correlation Comparison section can be used to quality check the
test data to ensure that it is consistent with the physics of the model.
Two of the correlations available in PROSPER are specifically included to allow this
quality checking procedure to be carried out; Fancher Brown and Duns and Ros
Modified.
- Fancher Brown - This is a no-slip correlation which means that the gas
and liquid are assumed to be travelling at the same
velocity. Due to buoyancy, we know that in reality, the
gas will be travelling faster than the gas and as such
the area through which it flows will be smaller in order
to maintain mass balance. As the hold-up (used to
calculate the mixture density of the fluid) is dependent
upon the area which is occupied by liquid defined by
the total area of the pipe, the smaller the area which
gas travels through, the larger the area with liquid
travels and therefore the larger the hold-up.
The no-slip conditions, therefore, will predict the
lowest possible hold-up and this will have the impact
of calculating the lowest pressure drop which is
physically possible.
405
PROSPER
- Duns and Ros Modified - The Original Duns and Ros Modified
correlation has been modified by Petroleum Experts
to over predict the pressure drop when the well is
producing in the slug-flow regime.
These two correlations can be used as limits (Fancher Brown being the lower and Duns
and Ros Modified being the higher) which create an envelope inside which any test data
should fall. If the test point were to fall outside of the envelope created, this would be a
sign that either the test data is incomplete or that the the model is inconsistent with the
reality of the system. This quality check cannot point the user towards which parameters
are causing the model to fall outside of the physical bounds but it does highlight
inconsistencies between the test data and the modelling data which should be
reviewed.
Please note that the Duns and Ros modified correlation will over-predict the pressure
drop in wells producing in the slug flow regime. This means that in cases where the test
point falls to the right of the correlation the flow regime should be checked to see which
regime it is in. If the Duns and Ros Modified correlation is predicting the flow to be in
slug flow, then the test point must fall inside the envelope to be valid. If the correlation
predicts that the flow regime is mist flow, then the correlation can no longer be used as
an upper boundary for quality checking purposes.
To carry out the quality check on any test point, select the Fancher Brown and Duns and
Ros Modified from the correlation list in the bottom left of the screen:
After the calculation has been run select Plot to see if the point falls within the envelope
between the two correlations:
User Guide 406
In the screenshot shown above, the test point (shown as a black point) can be seen to
fall between the two correlations and therefore can be said to pass the quality check.
This does not necessarily mean that the test point is correct, only that it is physically
feasible.
2.8.1.3 VLP Matching
Before proceeding to this screen, an idea of the best correlation to use for matching
purposes should have been obtained by running a Correlation Comparison calculation.
To compute the VLP match, click Match VLP to display the VLP matching screen.
Select the correlations to match or just click Match to match all the selected
correlations.
An example screen is shown below:
407
PROSPER
Click the Statistics button to examine the match parameters as shown on the example
screen below:
User Guide 408
If necessary, match parameters can be edited or directly entered on this screen. This
should be done with extreme caution and only if previous work on similar wells has
yielded consistent match parameters or to apply match parameters for the same well in
a different PROSPER application.
PROSPER uses a non-linear regression to tune the VLP correlations to best match the
measured data. It does this by calculating a pressure traverse using a correlation and
determining the error between measured and calculated pressures. The gravity and
friction terms of the pressure loss equations are then adjusted and the process
repeated until the measured and calculated results agree within 1 psi, or 50 iterations
have been completed.
Notes on Matching Parameters
409
PROSPER
Parameter 1 is the multiplier for the gravity term in the pressure drop
correlation
Parameter 2 is the multiplier for the friction term.
If all the data is consistent, these two parameters should be within a 10%
tolerance from the unity.
If PROSPER has to adjust Parameter 1 by more than +-10%, then there is probably
an inconsistency between the fluid density predicted by the PVT model and the
field data (rates/pressures).
In cases in which the PVT has been correctly matched, the greatest source of
uncertainty in the VLP calculation for oil wells is usually the hold-up correlation.
PROSPER will attempt to make a gravity component (Parameter 1) match by adjusting
the hold-up correlation. If a match is not obtained with a Parameter 1 more than 5%
away from 1.0, the density is adjusted. For single phase applications, no hold-up
correction is possible, so any significant deviation from 1.0 for Parameter 1 indicates
inconsistencies in the PVT.
If Parameter 2 requires a large correction, then it is possible that the equipment
description is in error, or the flow rates are incorrect. As the effect of a shift in the
friction component on the overall pressure loss is less than for the gravity term, a larger
range in the value of Parameter 2 is expected. If scaling or some other build up occurs
in the well to increase the roughness or decrease the flowing radius, then this will also
act to increase parameter 2.
Once the matching process is complete, the match parameters will be shown alongside
each of the correlations that have been matched. Use the standard deviations and the
magnitude of corrections made to both parameters to aid the selection of matched
correlation.
Use the Correlation Comparison option of the Matching menu to compare the
optimised (matched) correlations with measured test data. To ensure that the process
has been successful, check that the matched VLP traverses plot close to the measured
pressure data points.
PROSPER VLP matching provides a logically consistent means to adjust flow
correlations to reproduce field measured pressures. Combined with IPR
matching, PROSPER provides the means to create a robust well model that is
capable of reproducing observed pressures and rates. This is a necessary
condition for making accurate performance predictions and optimisation studies.
User Guide 410
2.8.1.3.1 VLP Correlation Applications
Fancher Brown is a no-slip hold-up correlation that is provided for use as a quality
control. It gives the lowest possible value of VLP since it neglects gas/liquid slip it
should always predict a pressure, which is less than the measured value. Even if it
gives a good match to the measured down hole pressures, Fancher Brown should not
be used for quantitative work. Measured data falling to the left of Fancher Brown on the
correlation comparison plot indicates a problem with fluid density (i.e. PVT) or field
pressure data. This is thus essentially, a correlation for quality control purposes.
For oil wells, Hagedorn Brown performs well for slug flow at moderate to high
production rates but well loading is poorly predicted. Hagedorn Brown should not be
used for condensates and whenever mist flow is the main flow regime. Hagedorn
Brown under predicts VLP at low rates and should not be used for predicting minimum
stable rates.
Duns and Ros Modified The Duns and Ros Modified correlation is derived from the
Duns and Ros Original correlation. The original correlation was modified by Petroleum
Experts to overestimate the pressure drop in oil wells for the slug flow regime. This
correlation should not be used for calculating the pressure drop in the wellbore or
pipelines and hence should not be used for lift curve generation either. This correlation
should only be used for quality checking of the input well test data.
Duns and Ros Original The Duns and Ros Original Correlation is derived from the
original published method. In PROSPER the original Duns and Ros correlation has been
enhanced and optimised for use with condensates. This correlation performs well in
mist flow cases and may be used in high GOR oil wells and condensate wells.
Petroleum Experts correlation combines the best features of existing correlations. It
uses the Gould et al flow map and the Hagedorn Brown correlation in slug flow, and
Duns and Ros for mist flow. In the transition regime, a combination of slug and mist
results is used.
Petroleum Experts 2 includes the features of the PE correlation plus original work
on predicting low-rate VLPs and well stability.
Petroleum Experts 3 includes the features of the PE2 correlation plus original work
for viscous, volatile and foamy oils.
Petroleum Experts 4 is an advanced mechanistic model for any angled wells
(including downhill flow) suitable for any fluid (including Retrograde Condensate).
Petroleum Experts 5. The PE5 mechanistic correlation is an advancement on the
PE4 mechanistic correlation. PE4 showed some instabilities (just like other mechanistic
models) that limited its use accross the board. PE5 reduces the instabilities through a
calculation that does not use flow regime maps as a starting point.
PE5 is capable of modelling any fluid type over any well or pipe trajectory. This
correlation accounts for fluid density changes for incline and decline trajectories. The
411
PROSPER
stability of the well can also be verified with the use of PE5 when calculating the gradient
traverse, allowing for liquid loading, slug frequency, etc. to be modelled.
Petroleum Experts 6 includes the features of the PE3 correlation plus original work
on the affects that water cut can have on a viscous oil.
Orkiszewski correlation often gives a good match to measured data. However, its
formulation includes a discontinuity in its calculation method. The discontinuity can
cause instability during the pressure matching process; therefore its use is not
encouraged.
Beggs and Brill is primarily a pipeline correlation. It generally over-predicts pressure
drops in vertical and deviated wells.
Gray correlation gives good results in gas wells for condensate ratios up to around 50
bbl/MMscf and high produced water ratios. Gray contains its own internal PVT model
which over-rides PROSPERs normal PVT calculations.
Hydro 3P (internal) is a mechanistic model and considers three phase flow.
There is no universal rule for selecting the best flow correlation for a given
application. It is recommended that the Correlation Comparison always be
carried out. By inspecting the predicted flow regimes and pressure results,
the User can select the correlation that best models the physical situation.
Further details can be found in the PROSPER Appendix B | Multiphase Flow
Correlations.
2.8.1.4 IPR Matching
In order to match the IPR curve, the matching process should be completed on the VLP.
This is because the results from the VLP calcualtion are used as the basis of the IPR
matching. If the VLP results do not represent the reality of the system, then the matching
process will be based upon incorrect data and as such will itself be erroneous.
This feature allows the user to check the consistency of the flowing bottom hole pressure
data used in the VLP match and to adjust the IPR, if required, to match measured data.
Inconsistencies in test data resulting from changing reservoir pressures, for example,
can be easily identified.
Clicking VLP/IPR from the VLP/IPR Matching screen will display the following screen:
User Guide 412
The screen is split into four main areas:
Top Left The correlations which are to be used for the matching
process can be selected in this section.
Bottom Left The test points which are to be used for the matching
process can be selected in this section.
Top Right The results for the highlighted test and correlation can be
seen in this section.
Bottom Right The System Plot for the highlighted test and correlation can
be seen in this section.
The correlations and test points can either be selected (by clicking on the box next to
the name and a tick will appear) or highlighted (by clicking on the name of the
correlation or test point so that that name is highlighted bya grey box).
When the Calculate button is selected the following options become available to allow
the combinations of correlations and test points to be calculated:
413
PROSPER
This allows the selected, highlighted or all of the correlations and test points to be calculated.
Once this calculation is completed, the system plots can be viewed by selecting Plot
from the top of the screen:
The plots shows two points; The square shows the operating point of the model (the VLP/IPR intersection)
while the cross shows the test rate on the VLP curve. In order for the model to calculate the same rate as
the test, the square and cross should be at the same point on the plot.
An IPR is required when automatic rate calculation is used for VLP or system
calculations. IPR data must be present before commencing a VLP/IPR Match.
The errors between calculated and measured data are shown on the side of the plot. If
the test points are not consistent with the IPR model, the skin, etc. can be adjusted until
User Guide 414
a match is obtained.
To modify the data of the IPR scree, select IPR, which will access the IPR input screen.
It is also possible to run a regression to find the PI (if the PI IPR model is being used),
Skin (if the Skin Entered by Hand model is being used) or Reservoir Pressure required
to match the test point. This can be done using the Adjust IPR feature.
2.8.1.4.1 Adjust IPR
The Adjust IPR screen is accessed by selecting Adjust IPR from the VLP/IPR matching
main screen.
If the current IPR is found to be inconsistent with when the VLP/IPR match is carried out
the Adjust IPR function can be used to automatically find the values which allow a
match. The available parameters which can be matched are:
- Adjust PI (If the PI Entry IPR model is being used)
- Adjust Skin (If the Enter Skin by Hand skin model is being used)
- Adjust Pres (Reservoir Pressure)
Selecting any option will find the mathematical solution which will allow the IPR to match
the test data by changing only the selected variable. In reality it may be a combination
of factors which need to be adjusted and it is up to the judgement of the engineer to
decide which option best represents the actual case.
The Adjust IPR screen is shown below.
415
PROSPER
When running a calculation, first the correlation to be used should be selected from the
drop down menu at the top of the screen.
Next the test (or tests) which are to be considered should be selected. This can be done
by either selecting the test (clicking on the box to the left of the name will 'tick' the box to
indicate it has been selected) or highlighting the test (clicking the name of the test will
mark a grey box around it to indicate it is highlighted).
Depending upon the matching calculation to be performed, select either Adjust PI,
Adjust Pres or Adjust Skin. Alternatively, select Calculate to calculate the current
VLP/IPR intersection point. When one of these options is selected, a number of options
are presented:
Once the calculation has been completed, the new value can be added to the main PROSPER file or simply
ignored depending upon the option selected:
User Guide 416
Once the matching has been carried out, the main VLP/IPR Matching screen can be
accessed by selecting Done.
2.8.2 Gradient Matching
This facility enables the user to modify the existing correlations to fit to a measured
pressure gradient survey. It can also be used, as a quality control to identify which
correlation required the least adjustment to obtain a fit.
Selecting Matching | Matching | Gradient (traverse) will bring up the following screen:
The 'Gradient Matching' screen is split into three different sections:
Left Hand Side This section of the screen is used to inserted the test data
and select the correlations to be matched.
Middle The middle section is used to report the results of the
gradient calculation using the selected correlation.
417
PROSPER
Right Hand Side This section of the screen displays a plot of the pressure and
temperature gradient of the selected correlation.
The first node pressure is entered in the 'Input Parameters' section - do not include it in
the 'Match Data' table. The Transfer button copies the measured gradient data from
the 'Correlation comparison' data. The same guidelines for GOR apply as for VLP/IPR
Matching.
Select the correlations to be matched by clicking on them, and then click Match to start
the matching routine. Parameter 1 is the correction factor applied to the gravity
component of pressure drop whilst Parameter 2 is the factor applied to the frictional
element of pressure drop. The match algorithm continues until the standard error is less
than 1 psi, or 50 iterations have been performed. The adjusted correlation and
measured pressures can be visually compared by clicking Plot. A graph similar to the
following is displayed:
The match points appear as black squares in the figure reported above.
Returning to the Gradient Matching screen, click the Statistics button to display the
match parameters. Use the statistics and knowledge of well conditions and correlation
performance to guide the choice of VLP correlation.
Once a correlation has been matched, the match parameters are appended to the
correlation name for all subsequent operations. Should it be necessary to adjust or
clear the match parameters, click the Reset button for a particular correlation, or use the
User Guide 418
Reset All button to reset all correlations to their un-matched state.
Best results are usually obtained by using VLP matching. VLP matching is
the preferred option. Gradient matching is only to be considered for
specialised artificial lift applications and where many (reliable) pressure Vs
depth data points are available.
2.8.3 Surface Pipe Matching
This option is used to match measured data with the calculated pressure drop from the
wellhead to the manifold. This option is used only if surface equipment has been
entered in System | Equipment (tubing etc).
Select Matching | Matching | Pipeline to bring up the 'Surface Pipe Matching' screen:
Test Point Date and
Comment
Each test can have a date and comment associated with it to
help identify each test.
Manifold Pressure The flowing pressure at the manifold for the test conditions
entered. The manifold is the furthest downstream point in the
system.
Manifold
Temperature
The recorded flowing temperature at the manifold at the time
of the test.
should be entered.
419
PROSPER
screen.
Tubing Head Match
Pressure
The tubing head pressure at the time of the test.
Gas Oil Ratio/ CGR/
Separator GOR
(including the tank gas) must equal GOR + GOR Free. (Oil
Systems Only)
Gas Lift Rate The gas lift injection rate at the time of the test. (Gas Lifted
Pipelines Only)
The workflow for the Surface Pipeline Matching is very similar to the VLP/IPR matching
procedure. First the data is entered in this screen. Once the data has been entered, the
Correlation Comparison button should be selected to run the pipeline correlation
comparison. This will bring all of the test data into the Pipeline Correlation matching
screen. The process to compare the correlations for a surface pipeline is the same as
for the VLP and more information can be found in the Correlation Comparison Section.
The objective of the Correlation Comparison is to find the correlation which best fits the
test data. Once this has been completed, select Match to open up the matching screen:
Select the pipeline correlations which are to be matched on the left hand side of the
User Guide 420
screen and then press Match to run the regression. If any of the matching parameters
are to be reset, this can be done by selecting Statistics at the top of the screen and then
selecting Reset for the given correlation which is to be reset.
If the system description has no elevation difference between the wellhead
and manifold, there can be no gravitational component of the correlated
pressure drop. Therefore, Parameter 1 cannot be optimised, so it remains at
the default value of 1.0 for such cases.
2.8.4 Correlation Comparison
This module allows a pressure gradient (traverse) to be calculated at a specified
surface rate using any of the standard correlations. Actual measured pressures can be
input and plotted on the same graph for comparison with the pressure calculated from
the correlations. The correlations may be modified or unmodified (Matched or
Unmatched).
Click Matching | Correlation Comparison | Tubing to display the following data entry
screen:
The screen can be split into three main elements:
Left Hand Section Input Data Screen
Middle Section Gradient Results
421
PROSPER
Right Hand Section Gradient Plot
Input Data Screen
The top left corner of the screen should be filled with the data to be used in the
correlation comparison as shown below:
First Node Pressure The flowing pressure at the first node for the test conditions
entered.
Note that in Correlation comparison, the first node is the
wellhead only if there is no surface equipment or it has been
disabled.
The surface equipment is automatically disabled if this
screen is accessed through the VLP/IPR Matching screen.
should be entered.
Gas Oil Ratio/ CGR/
Separator GOR
(including the tank gas) must equal GOR + GOR Free.
Please note that any value entered in this column will remain
free gas even if the oil is calculated to be under saturated.
(Oil Wells Only)
User Guide 422
screen.
Rate Type For oil wells, select to enter either liquid or oil rate.
Pipeline Correlation Enter the correlation to be used for the pipeline if surface
equipment is activated.
Barnea Criteria The Barnea criteria can be set to 'Yes' or 'No'
Slug Method The method to calculate the slugging properties of the well
can be set here. Three options are available:
- Brill
- RCS Mechanistic
- Worst Case (Hernandez-Perez
Frequency)
More details on the slugging calculations can be found here.
For information on the additional options available when steam is being modelled,
please refer to the Steam Calculation Section.
For gas lifted wells, both the injection depth and gas lift injection rate are
required to be input.
Note that the producing GOR should not include the lift gas injection.
The centre section of the left hand section of the screen is used to insert pressure data
at different depths. Pressure data from a gradient survey can be entered versus depth in
these rows. The Transfer button at the top of the screen copies the measured depths
and pressures from the Gradient Match section. This data will be plotted with the
correlations to help see which is closest to the measured data:
Before the calculation is run, the correlations to be used should be selected from the list
in the bottom left corner of the screen.
423
PROSPER
When the input data is complete, click on Calculate to button to compute the pressure
gradient. The results will appear in tabular form in the centre section of the screen and
as a plot in the right hand side.
The results of individual correlations can be examined sequentially by highlighting the
correlation to be viewed in the bottom left of the screen.
PROSPER displays the following parameters as a function of depth:
Temperature, Pressure.
Total Pressure Gradient, Static gradient, Friction Gradient.
Flow regime, Liquid Hold up, Water Hold up, cumulative hold ups.
Slip Liquid Velocity, Superficial Liquid Velocity, Slip Gas Velocity, Superficial
Gas Velocity, Slip Water Velocity, Superficial Water Velocity.
Mixture Density, Gas density, Oil density, Water density.
Frictional Pressure Loss, Gravity Pressure Loss
Pipe Diameter, Angle of the tubing From Vertical, calculation Node Length
Liquid Viscosity, Gas Viscosity, water viscosity, oil viscosity, Gas-Liquid IFT,
Gas-Water IFT, Gas-Oil IFT, Oil-Water IFT
C Factor and the max size of sand grain that can be transported
Cumulative volumes of phases till that depth.
A visual comparison of all selected correlations and the test data is easily made by
clicking on the Plot button. An example comparison plot is shown below:
User Guide 424
The plot will automatically plot both the pressure and temperature of each correlation.
Summary Plot
From the main Correlation Comparison screen, it is possible to view a summary plot
which compares the total dP and the components of the dP calculated by the various
correlations. It also compares the difference between each correlation and the gauge
pressure.
This can be accessed by selecting Summary:
425
PROSPER
2.8.5 QuickLook for Gas Lift
The Quicklook feature is used to analyse well test data for artificially lifted wells. From
the measured field data, it is possible to calculate the well production and injection
gradients from the surface downwards and from the sand-face upwards. If the
assumptions regarding well conditions (e.g. gas injection rates and depth, water cuts,
IPR etc.) are correct, the two calculated traverses should overlay. If these two traverses
are not overlaying, then this implies that the model is not representative of the reality of
the system.
Troubleshooting a gas lifted well is performed by considering a range of assumptions,
User Guide 426
until a consistent calculation model can be obtained. By varying artificial lift and
production parameters in turn, the experienced user can determine if the well is
behaving as designed, or identify potential reasons to explain the deviation from design
conditions.
A Quicklook calculation can be carried out for a gas lifted well by selecting Matching |
Quicklook.
2.8.5.1 Calculation Details
The Quicklook calculation consists of two parts:
- The Top Down Calculation
- The Bottom Up Calculation
2.8.5.1.1 Top Down (Measured)
The Top Down (or Measured) calculation uses the measured well head pressure and
measured casing head pressure as starting points of a gradient calculation. As the total
GOR (including the injected gas lift gas rate), water cut and liquid rate are inserted by
the User, it is possible to perform the calculations using the following steps:
1. From the measured well head pressure, the pressure gradient is calculated down to
the injection point using the Total GOR, water cut and liquid rate entered in the
Quicklook screen. This allows the 'Measured' tubing pressure at the injection depth to
be calculated.
2. From the injection point to the bottom hole depth, the gradient is calculated assuming
that only the produced gas (the Total GOR minus the injected GOR) is present. This
allows the 'Measured' bottom hole pressure to be calculated.
3. From the measured casing head pressure, the pressure gradient within the casing
can be calculated down to the injection point. The difference between the 'Measured'
casing pressure and 'Measured' tubing pressure at the injection depth allows the
'Measured' pressure drop across the injection valve to be calculated.
2.8.5.1.2 Bottom Up (Calculated)
The Bottom Up (or Calculated) calculation uses the Bottom Hole Pressure calculated
from the IPR as starting points of a gradient calculation. As the total GOR (including the
injected gas lift gas rate), water cut and liquid rate are inserted by the user, it is possible
to perform the calculations using the following steps:
1. The measured liquid rate is used to read the bottom hole pressure from the IPR curve
in the PROSPER file.
2. From this bottom hole pressure, the gradient up to first the injection point and then the
well head can be calculated using the fluid properties entered. This calculates the
'Calculated' well head pressure.
427
PROSPER
3. The 'Calculated' pressure at the injection point is then used, along with the injected
gas rate and port size to calculate the pressure drop across the injection valve. Adding
this dP to the tubing pressure allows the 'Calculated' casing pressure at the injection
depth to be found. A gradient calculation is then completed to find the 'Calculated'
Casing Head Pressure.
2.8.5.2 Input
The gas lift QuickLook is accessed from the Matching | Quicklook for Gas Lift menu.
Selecting this menu will display the following screen:
The screen is split into five different parts:
- Red - Surface Measurements
- Yellow - Flowing Measurements
- Blue - Input Data
- Green - Static Measurements
User Guide 428
- Black - Valve Details
Surface Measurements
The surface measurements section contains two columns for data input. For analysing a
particular well at a particular flowing condition, enter data in the Minimum column only.
For unstable wells, enter the minimum and maximum conditions to be considered. The
program will calculate using average values.
The parameters required to be entered are:
Tubing Head
Pressure
This is the tubing head pressure measured at the time of the
test.
Tubing Head
Temperature
This is the temperature of the fluid at the tubing head at the
time of the test.
Liquid Rate The liquid rate recorded for the test should be entered.
Water Cut The water cut at the time of the test should be entered.
Total Gas Rate This is the total gas rate measured at the time of the test.
This includes both the injected gas rate and the gas
produced from the reservoir.
Gas Injection Rate Enter the gas rate which is being injected into the well.
Casing Head
Pressure
This is the pressure at the top of the injection casing.
Flowing Measurements
Pressure survey data can be entered in the flowing measurement table. This allows any
downhole pressures measured in the field to be compared to the downhole pressures
calculated by PROSPER. The purpose of this section is to check that all the data is
consistent. Downhole measurement entry is optional.
Input Data
The input data section is used to input the depth of injection, injection port size as well
as the correlations and corrections to be used in the calculations.
Orifice Diameter Enter the diameter of the orifice through which the gas lift gas
is being injected. This will be used to calculate the pressure
drop across the orifice during the 'bottom up' calculation.
Injection Depth
(measured)
This is the expected depth of injection. Quicklook will use this
depth as the injection depth even if it is calculated that this
depth cannot be reached by the casing pressure. Care
429
PROSPER
should therefore be taken during the analysis process to
ensure that the depth specified is the actual depth.
Thornhill-Craver
DeRating
This coefficient is used to scale down the maximum gas
injection rate that can be flowed through a valve or the orifice.
As the maximum gas rate is decreased, this means that to
flow the same gas rate as the original case (with no de-
rating), larger valve or orifice should be used
Vertical flow
correlation
Select the most appropriate correlation for the application.
Use a matched correlation where available.
Dome Pressure
Correction above
1200 psi
When set to Yes, the improved high-pressure dome pressure
temperature method is used.
Static Measurements
In addition to plotting flowing measurements on the plot, it is also possible to enter the
static reservoir pressure. To do this enter the bottom hole pressure and
If a static pressure is entered on the downhole measurement screen, this will be used to
calculate the sand face pressure from the IPR.
Valve Details
For PROSPER to determine which gas lift valves should be open and closed for the
current producing conditions, the valve depths and characteristics must first be entered
into the 'Valve Details' section.
The valve type (casing or tubing sensitive), setting depth, port size, R-value and dome
pressure at 60 F are required to calculate whether valves are open or closed. Opening
pressure etc. fields will be blank until a Quicklook calculation has been performed.
Entering the valve data for the Quicklook is optional.
As an alternative to entering them by hand, gas lift valve characteristics can be
transferred from other sections of PROSPER. Click the Transfer button on the input
entry screen, and the User will be prompted to select the source of valve data. Select
From Gas lift valves to transfer the valves from the Equipment | Gas Lift screen or
From Gas lift design to pick up the valves from the design screen. After transferring
the valve depths, select the valve type for each depth. To manually investigate the
effects of changing R-values and dome pressures, these values may be edited or
entered by hand.
2.8.5.3 Performing the QuickLook Calculation
Once the required (diagnostic) and optional (Downhole & Valves) data have been
entered, click Calculate to display the calculation screen:
User Guide 430
Calculate again to begin the computation of the gradients. PROSPER begins by
calculating from the top down, and then repeats the calculation from the sand face up.
More details on these calculations can be found in the Calculation Details Section.
The results of the 'Top Down' or 'Bottom Up' gradients can be seen in the centre of the
screen by selecting them from the bottom left of the screen.
In the Results section, the following results are given:
Flowing Bottom Hole
Pressure
This is the FBHP calculated from the IPR.
Static Bottom Hole
Pressure
This is the reservoir pressure used in the calculation. This will
be either taken from the IPR section or from the 'Static
Measurements' if entered.
Tubing Pressure at
Valve
Fluid pressure at the outlet of the injection valve.
431
PROSPER
Casing Pressure at
Valve
Gas pressure at the inlet of the injection valve
Gas Oil Ratio GOR of the produced fluid as calculated from the total GOR,
injected gas rate and fluid PVT.
GOR free Free GOR entering the well as calculated from the total GOR,
injected gas rate and fluid PVT.
dP Across Valve Pressure drop calculated across the valve.
Calculated Casing
Head Pressure
Casing head pressure calculated using the 'Bottom Up'
calculation method.
Draw Down Difference in static and flowing sand face pressures.
Equivalent
Calculated PI
When calculating above the bubble point, this is found by
dividing the production rate by the calculated draw down.
Calculated Critical
Flow Rate
The injection rate required for the sonic velocity to be
reached through the orifice.
Percentage of Critical
Flow Rate
The actual flow rate as a percentage of the calculated critical
flow rate.
Fitted Thermal
Coefficient
The U value required for the model to have the same well
head temperature as was recorded during the test.
Click Plot to display the two computed gradients plus the valve opening and closing
pressures on the same graph:
User Guide 432
This plot enables the user to see at a glance which valves should be open or closed,
and how changes in operating pressures would impact on the valves. If the model is
representative of the test, then the 'Bottom Up' and 'Top Down' gradient lines should
overlay each other. If they do not, then the results should be analysed and the model
changed until the model becomes representative.
2.8.5.4 Notes on Quicklook for Gas Lift
Analysing the differences in the models and concluding the likeliest reasons for these
differences is an engineering judgement which should be taken by the user. Below is
some comments regarding the workflow which can be followed:
When carrying out the Quicklook calculation for a gas lifted well, the objective is to both
quality check the model and also understand more about the flowing conditions within
the well.
The first stage is to clarify the depth at which the gas lift gas is being injected. When the
Plot feature is used, the point of injection maybe marked with an 'Injection Not Possible'
tag. This indicates that the injection cannot occur at this depth as the measured casing
pressure is less than the measured tubing pressure at the same depth. The injection
depth specified in Quicklook should therefore be changed to the next deepest valve to
see if injection could occur at this depth.
Each valve on the plot is labelled as either OPEN or CLOSED depending upon the well
conditions and gauge settings inserted into the model. If the valves above the injection
point are labelled as OPEN, then this means that the pressure in the casing is greater
than the opening pressure of the valve (this is true for casing sensitive valves). To
operate the gas lift system to its optimum, only the valve at the injection depth should be
open. If other valves are open, this may lead to multi-pointing where the fluid is injected
at a number of different depths. Please note, PROSPER does not model multi-pointing
and so does not inject the fluid at different depths when the valves are found to be open.
All of the gas is always injected at the specified injection depth. Checking which other
valves may be open can be used to troubleshoot reasons for unexpected production
results and confirm a hypothesis that multi-pointing may be occurring.
Once the depth of injection has been found, if downhole pressure data is available then
this can be compared to the measured gradient. If the pressure from the 'measured'
gradient at the gauge depth does not match the reading from the field, then this means
that the VLP is not representative of the pressure drop been seen. In this case, the VLP/
IPR Matching workflow should be carried out to ensure that the pressure drop calculated
by the model is consistent with the pressure drop measured. More information on the
'VLP/IPR Matching' workflow can be found in the following Section.
If the 'measured' gradient is found to match the pressure gauges then the next stage is
to make the 'calculated' and 'measured' gradients overlap and give the same results.
The 'calculated' gradient is based upon the FBHP obtained from the IPR for the given
test rate. If this does not match the FBHP calculated by the 'measured' gradient then the
433
PROSPER
System | Inflow Performance screen should be reviewed to ensure that the modelled
IPR is consistent with the real IPR of the well.
The final part of the model to review is the casing gradients. The 'measured' casing
gradient is calculated downwards from the measured casing head pressure to the
injection depth. This gives the 'measured' dP across the valve or orifice. The 'calculated'
casing gradient starts at the pressure at the injection point from the 'measured' tubing
gradient and calculates the dP across the valve or orifice based upon the entered port
size and gas rate. The 'calculated' casing head pressure is then calculated from the
casing pressure at the injection point using the gas gradient.
If these two methods do not match up, then either the pressure drop calculated across
the valve/orifice or the pressure drop calculated down the annulus are not correct. If a
blockage has occurred at the valve, the effective port size may be smaller than when the
valve was initially installed. Alternatively, a blockage in the annulus may be leading to a
greater pressure drop than is currently being modelled.
2.8.6 QuickLook for ESP
The Quicklook feature is used to analyse well test data for artificially lifted wells. The
ESP QuickLook principle is identical to that for gas lift wells, i.e. pressure traverses are
calculated from top to bottom and vice-versa. If the assumptions regarding well and
ESP conditions (e.g. pump frequency, wear factor, water cuts, wellhead pressure, IPR
etc.) are correct, the two calculated traverses will overlay. If these two traverses are not
overlaying, then this implies that the model is not representative of the reality of the
system. In addition, an energy balance is performed across the electrical system
allowing surface voltage and power to be calculated and compared to measured data.
This function should not be used if the ESP has been placed within the surface
equipment rather than downhole.
Historically, ESP wells have been difficult to diagnose (particularly with limited down
hole pressure data) because of uncertainties below (IPR), across (pump head) and
above (tubing hydraulics) the pump. Using the ESP QuickLook, conditions in each of
these areas can be analysed separately.
A Quicklook calculation can be carried out for an ESP lifted well by selecting Matching
| Quicklook.
2.8.6.1 Calculation Details
The Quicklook calculation consists of two parts:
- From Fixed WHP
- From Static BHP
User Guide 434
2.8.6.1.1 From Fixed WHP
PROSPER always calculates from the bottom up for ESP systems since, in order to find
the tubing GOR above the pump, conditions at the pump intake where gas separation
takes place must be known. Therefore, rather than start with the fixed WHP and working
downwards, this calculation is an iterative process which estimates the bottom hole
pressure and then calculates upwards until the calculated wellhead pressure matches
measured wellhead pressure from the field.
The following steps are preformed:
1. The bottom hole pressure is estimated and a gradient is calculated to find the pump
inlet conditions.
2. Based upon the pump inlet conditions, any free gas which is to be separated is
passed up the annulus.
3. The resulting fluid is passed through the pump and the pressure increase is
calculated from the pump performance curves. This gives the pump outlet pressure.
4. From the pump outlet pressure, a gradient is calculated to give a well head pressure.
5. This well head pressure is compared to the measured well head pressure. If this is
different, the calculation returns to step 1 and uses a new bottom hole pressure to begin
the calculation. If the pressure matches the measured value then the calculation stops
and the bottom hole pressure used at step one becomes the 'Measured' bottom hole
pressure.
2.8.6.1.2 From Static BHP
The Bottom Up (or Calculated) calculation uses the Bottom Hole Pressure calculated
from the IPR as starting points of a gradient calculation. As the total GOR, water cut and
liquid rate are inserted by the User, it is possible to perform the calculations using the
following steps:
1. The measured liquid rate is used to read the bottom hole pressure from the IPR curve
in the PROSPER file.
2. From this bottom hole pressure, the gradient up to the pump inlet is calculated.
3. If a gas separator has been specified, then a percentage of the free gas at the inlet
will be removed from the production string and passed up the annulus. The free GOR is
dependent upon the inlet pressure and temperaure and the fluid's PVT.
4. The increase in pressure across the pump is calculated for the given conditions and
the pump outlet pressure is now known.
435
PROSPER
5. From the pump outlet pressure, a gradient is performed up to the well head to
calculate the 'Calculated' well head pressure.
2.8.6.2 Input
The ESP QuickLook is accessed from the Matching menu. Selecting Design |
Quicklook displays the following screen:
The following sections of the Quicklook input data screen should be filled in.
Input Data
The data from the test should be entered in this section:
User Guide 436
Tubing Head
Pressure
test.
Produced GOR This is the GOR of the fluid produced from the reservoir.
Static Bottom Hole
Pressure (measured)
Enter the static reservoir pressure at the time of the test.
Pump Depth
(Measured)
This is depth of the pump expressed as a measured depth.
Operating Frequency Enter the operating frequency of the pump at the time of the
test.
Length of Cable This is the length of cable from the surface to the motor. The
length is used to calculate the total voltage from the surface
to the motor.
Gas Separation
Efficiency
This is the percent of free gas at the pump inlet which is
separated and so does not pass through the pump.
Number of Stages The number of stages that the pump had during the test.
Selecting Transfer Wear Factor at the top of the screen will
transfer the pump wear factor from the System | Electrical
Submersible Pump screen.
Downhole Data
calculated by PROSPER. This allows the measured pump inlet and outlet pressures to
be plotted to ensure that the model is representative of the reality. Downhole
measurement entry is optional.
Surface Data
This section allows surface power data to be entered. These value do not affect the
hydraulic calculations, however, entering them will allow the motor calculations to be
completed.
Select the required pump, motor and cable from the buttons at the top of the screen.
Current This is the current at the surface.
437
PROSPER
Surface Voltage This is the voltage at the surface.
Power This is the power at the surface.
Correlation
Select the multiphase correlation to be used to calculation the pressure gradients above
and below the pump. Preferably, a matched correlation should be used where possible.
Equipment
The bottom of the screen is used to select the equipment which was installed in the well
at the time of the test.
Select Pump Select the pump which has installed at the time of the test.
Select Motor Select the motor which has installed at the time of the test.
Select Cable Select the cable which has installed at the time of the test.
Once the required data has been inserted, select Calculate to proceed to the
calculation screen:
User Guide 438
Select Calculate to run the gradient traverses.
To see the results of each calculation, select 'From Static BHP' or 'Fixed Top Node
Pressure' from the left hand side of the screen.
Select Results to see the results of the calculations:
439
PROSPER
When the results have been reviewed, select Done to return to the calculation screen.
Click Plot to display the pressure traverses and the calculated pump intake and
discharge pressures:
User Guide 440
If the well bore, inflow and ESP assumptions are all correct, the two pressure traverses
will overlay and the measured and calculated intake and discharge pressures and
surface voltages should coincide.
2.8.6.4 Notes on ESP Quicklook Matching
When the pressure gradients of the Quicklook plot don't match, the model is not
representative of the actual system. Analysing the differences in the models and
concluding the likeliest reasons for these differences is an engineering judgement which
should be taken by the User.Below are some comments regarding how to analyse the
possible causes:
The pump discharge pressure is the tie point for the system. If the gradient from the
measured WHP to this point is controlled solely by the multiphase correlation used and
if the gradient from the measured WHP does not match up with the measured pump
discharge pressure, this implies that the multiphase flow correlation does not represent
the reality of the system and should be matched. The Matching | Matching | VLP/IPR
(Quality Check) can be used to match the correlation so that the measured discharge
pressure matches the calculated discharge pressure. If matching has been carried out
previously, the gas separator efficiency entered may also be incorrect. If the separation
is not modelled correctly, the fluid above the pump will be different to reality and
therefore even if the correlation has been matched it will not predict the correct
pressure.
Next match the pump intake pressure from the 'Fixed WHP' traverse. The pump intake
pressure for the 'Fixed WHP' approach is dependent upon the duty provided by the
441
PROSPER
pump which is a function of the fluid properties, the pump performance curves,
frequency and wear factor.
If these two points are matched, the 'Fixed WHP' traverse should now give the resulting
bottom hole flowing pressure.
When reviewing the 'From Static BHP' traverse, the starting point is the inflow
performance. For the given rate, the IPR is used to calculate the bottom hole pressure. If
it is found that this bottom hole pressure is not consistent with the measured data, the
IPR should be reviewed.
2.8.7 QuickLook for HSP
The HSP QuickLook principle is identical to that for ESP wells, i.e. pressure traverses
are calculated from top to bottom and vice-versa. If the assumptions regarding well and
HSP conditions (e.g. pump and turbine speed, wear factor, water cuts, wellhead
pressure, IPR etc.) are correct, the two calculated traverses will overlay.
A Quicklook calculation can be carried out for an HSP lifted well by selecting Matching
| Quicklook.
2.8.7.1 Input
The HSP QuickLook is accessed from the Matching menu. Selecting Design |
Quicklook displays the following screen:
User Guide 442
The following sections of the Quicklook input data screen should be filled in.
Input Data
The data from the test should be entered in this section:
Tubing Head
Pressure
test.
Produced GOR This is the GOR of the fluid produced from the reservoir.
443
PROSPER
Static Bottom Hole
Pressure (measured)
Enter the static reservoir pressure at the time of the test.
Pump Depth
(Measured)
This is depth of the pump expressed as a measured depth.
Pump Speed Method The pump speed can either be entered by the user or
calculated by PROSPER. The differences in these methods
are discussed further in the Pump Speed Method Section.
Power Fluid Rate This is the total power fluid rate and includes the balance
supply rate.
If the Pump Speed Method is set to 'Calculated' then this
value will be used as the power fluid rate to calculate the
pump speed.
If the Pump Speed Method is set to 'Entered' then this value
will not be used and the power fluid rate will be calculated
based upon the pump speed.
Power Fluid Surface
Back Pressure
This is the pressure of the power fluid at the top of the casing
i.e. the surface.
Number of Pump
Stages
The number of stages that the pump had during the test.
Selecting Transfer Wear Factor at the top of the screen will
transfer the pump wear factor from the System | Hydraulic
Submersible Pump screen.
Number of Turbine
Stages
The number of stages that the turbine had during the test.
Downhole Data
calculated by PROSPER. This allows the measured pump inlet and outlet pressures to
be plotted to ensure that the model is representative of the reality. Downhole
measurement entry is optional.
Correlation
Select the multiphase correlation to be used to calculation the pressure gradients above
and below the pump. Preferably, a matched correlation should be used where possible.
Equipment
User Guide 444
The bottom of the screen is used to select the equipment which was installed in the well
at the time of the test.
Select Pump Select the pump which has installed at the time of the test.
Select Turbine Select the turbine which has installed at the time of the test.
2.8.7.1.1 Pump Speed Method
When an HSP is operating, the pump and turbine are required to be balanced. This
means that as well as operating at the same speed, the power required by the pump to
give the calculated head to the produced fluid needs to be generated by the turbine from
the power fluid.
The power provided by a given turbine is dependent upon both the speed of the turbine
(which is the same as the pump speed) and the rate of power fluid entering the turbine.
Therefore, if we fix either the turbine speed or the power fluid rate, then the other can be
calculated which will balance the system.
The two options for the Pump Speed Method are:
Entered The pump speed is entered by the user and is used by the
program to determine the power fluid rate that is able to
satisfy the condition that the power consumed by the pump is
equal to the power produced by the turbine.
This method is the standard to calculate the gradient (or VLP
curves for simulators like GAP) as in general the pump
speed is known.
Calculated This method calculates the speed required in order to
operate the pump at the maximum overall efficiency for the
value of the power fluid rate entered and suitable to satisfy
the condition that the power consumed by the pump is equal
to the power produced by the turbine.
For some cases, more than one possible solution may be possible. In such cases, the
conditions with the maximum efficiency will be selected. This means that if the power
fluid rate calculated by the 'Entered' pump speed is entered when the pump speed is
set to 'Calculated', the original pump speed which was entered will be calculated.
Once the required input data has been entered, selecting Calculate will bring up the
Calculation screen:
445
PROSPER
Select Calculate to run the gradient traverses.
To see the results of each calculation, select 'From Static BHP' or 'Fixed Top Node
Pressure' from the left hand side of the screen.
Note that PROSPER always calculates from the bottom up for HSP systems since, if the
power fluid is mixed with the production fluid, the resultant mixture properties can only
be known if the flow fluid rate is also known. When calculating the 'Fixed Well Head
Pressure' traverse, the process is therefore iterative as an estimated bottom hole
pressure is used until the resultant well head pressure which is calculated matches the
User Guide 446
measured well head pressure.
Select Results to see the results of the calculations:
Click Plot to display the pressure traverses and the calculated pump intake and
discharge pressures:
447
PROSPER
If the well bore, inflow and pump and turbine assumptions are all correct, the two
pressure traverses will overlay and the measured and calculated intake and discharge
pressures should coincide.
2.8.8 Tubing Parameters
This option allows the match parameters for the tubing pressure drop correlations to be
accessed. They can be reset to their un-matched values, or new values entered directly.
2.8.9 Pipeline Parameters
This option allows the match parameters for the surface piping pressure drop
correlations to be accessed. They can be reset to their un-matched values, or new
values entered directly.
2.8.10 Correlation Thresholds
This option allows the User to specify alternative correlations to use for tubing or
pipeline when the angle (from the vertical for tubing and from the horizontal for pipelines)
exceeds a user-specified threshold value. This option is useful for modelling the riser for
a long sub sea tieback or for a highly deviated surface pipeline.
Enter the appropriate angles and correlations which are to be used and then select Yes
to the question 'Use Threshold Angle' to enable the feature.
User Guide 448
When enabled, the calculation screens will indicate that this option is active:
2.9 Calculation Menu
This chapter describes all the calculation methods available in PROSPER and how to
calculate system production rates, run sensitivity analyses, generate lift curve tables etc.
The available calculation types are:
Inflow (IPR)
This option calculates the IPR, that is to say, the relationship between tubing intake rate
and the bottomhole flowing pressure (BHFP). The Inflow calculation allows to quickly run
sensitivities without the need to calculate the system solution rate. This is especially
convenient for e.g. frac program design, gravel pack design, perforation programming.
System (Ipr+Vlp)
This option will calculate both the tubing outflow (VLP) and tubing inflow (IPR) curves
and determine the system operating rate and bottom hole flowing pressure. It also
allows to perform sensitivity analyses with a wide range of variables. Sensitivity plots
can easily be generated.
Gradient (Traverse)
This option enables the user to generate gradient plots. If the correlations have been
matched, the gradients will be generated using the tuned correlations.
VLP (Tubing curves)
449
PROSPER
This option enables the generation of VLP curves that can be exported for use in
various commercial reservoir simulators and Petroleum Experts' MBAL and GAP programs.
Choke Performance
This is a convenient choke calculator for flow rates, pressure drop or choke settings.
Choke Performance Curves can be visualised.
ESP Performance
This is a convenient way of calculating the operating conditions of an ESP based upon
a given set of flow conditions.
Generate for GAP
Allows to automatically calculate well performance data for gas lifted or naturally flowing
wells for use in Petroleum Experts GAP production system network modelling program. Not
available when 'Enthalpy Balance' is in use.
Bottom Hole Pressure from Wellhead Pressure
This option allows to calculate flowing bottom hole pressure from the wellhead pressure.
This method is only available when using the 'Pressure and Temperature' and 'Rough
Approximation' options.
2.9.1 Inflow (IPR)
The Calculation | Inflow (IPR) calculation allows the user to determine the productivity
of the reservoir based upon the IPR curve. This screen can also be used to run
sensitivity studies to see the impact that certain parameters have on the deliverability of
the inflow and how the IPR changes with varying parameters.
The steps to take to generate an IPR plot are:
- Select Calculation | Inflow (Ipr) to enter the IPR calculation screen.
- Enter the Input data to be used to calculate the IPR curve(s).
- If a range of different IPR curves are to be generated for different variables, the
different sensitivity variables to be used can be defined using Cases.
- The IPR curves can then be generated by selecting Calculate.
- The plots can be viewed by selecting Plot or the results can be viewed on the
calculation screen.
The following section gives the user more details about each screen and option
available.
2.9.1.1 IPR Calculation Screen
Selecting Calculation | Inflow (IPR) from the main menu toolbar will bring up the
following screen:
User Guide 450
Along with the top toolbar, there are four different areas of the screen:
- Data Input (Top Left)
- Sensitivity Cases (Bottom Left)
- Results (Top Right)
- System Plot (Bottom Right)
2.9.1.1.1 IPR Data Input
In the top left hand corner of the screen the user should insert the data to be used in the
calculation:
The following data should be entered:
Water Cut/Water Gas
Ratio
Enter the water cut (oil well) or WGR (gas well) of the well at
the conditions to be calculated.
If a sensitivity study is carried out on the top node pressure
then this value will be ignored.
GOR/CGR Enter the producing GOR or CGR of the well.
451
PROSPER
Rate Method The System calculation requires a number of rates to be
selected so that the VLP and IPR pressures corresponding to
these rates can be calculated.
The rates can be specified in three ways:
- Automatic Linear - The program calculates the AOF
(IPR Absolute Open Flow) for various sensitivity
variables entered and for each AOF creates 20 evenly
spaced rates.
- Automatic Geometric - As for Automatic Linear, it
works out the AOF for various sensitivity variables
entered and for each AOF creates 20 geometrically
spaced rates.
- User Defined - One can either enter a table of up to 20
rates directly or use PROSPER to Generate them. To
generate the rates select Generate on the top toolbar
to bring up the following menu:
Enter values for the first and last rates in the table plus the
number of entries required. Depending on the selection of
Linear or Geometric spacing, PROSPER will calculate the
required rate table.
2.9.1.1.2 IPR Sensitivity Cases
The bottom left of the screen holds the sensitivity cases:
User Guide 452
If a sensitivity study is being carried out, the different sensitivity cases can be selected
in this section. This will then change the results and the plot to those of the selected
case.
2.9.1.1.3 IPR Results
The top right of the screen is used to display the results of the IPR calculation in tabular
form.

2.9.1.1.4 IPR Plot
The bottom section of the screen will be filled by the IPR plot. The plot contains both the
pressure and temperature variation with rate:
453
PROSPER
2.9.1.1.5 IPR Toolbar
The toolbar at the top of the IPR Calculation screen can be usd to carry out the following
functions:
Done Returns to the main PROSPER screen and saves any
changes made.
Cancel Returns to the main PROSPER screen and removes any
changes made to the System Calculation screen.
Cases This can be used to run sensitivity studies. See the Sensitivity
Study Section for more details.
Calculate Will calculate the IPR for the input data and if any sensitivity
study cases have been selected, these will also be
calculated.
Plot This option will plot the IPR.
Export The table of results can be exported to an external source.
Help Will bring up the online Help section.
2.9.1.1.5.1 Cases
It is often very useful to run multiple cases to see what the effect of changing one or
more variable will have on the results generated. This can be done by running a
sensitivity study.
To enter data for a sensitivity study select Cases on the top toolbar. This will bring up
the sensitivity screen:
User Guide 454
Up to 10 variables can be selected with 10 values for each inserted. The values of each
variable can be inserted manually or using the 'Generate' feature. Letting 'Generate' will
bring up the following screen:
Enter values for the first and last rates in the table plus the number of entries required.
Depending on the selection of Linear or Geometric spacing, PROSPER will calculate
the required values. Select Generate to add the calculated values to the table.
Select Done to return to the main calculation screen where the calculations can be
performed.
Please note, when running PROSPER 32 BIT, it is not possible to perform in
excess of 32000 sensitivity combinations. If PROSPER 64 BIT is being run, the
455
PROSPER
calculation can be performed, however, a message will be displayed to alert the
user that this may take a long time to complete.
2.9.1.1.5.2 Calculate
Once the appropriate data has been inserted into the Data Input section of the screen
(and sensitivity variables selected if relevant), the IPR can be calculated by selecting the
Calculate button on the top toolbar.
The option to 'show' or 'hide' the calculating results will be given.
If 'Show Calculating Data' is selected, the data will be printed to the screen as soon as it
is calculated by the program.
If 'Hide Calculation Data' is selected, the data will only appear on the screen once all of
the calculations have been completed.
Once the calculation has been completed, the results and plot will be shown on the main
IPR Calculation screen. If more than one case has been run, then the results can be
scrolled through by selecting the different cases in the bottom left section.
2.9.1.1.5.3 Plot
After a calculation has been performed, the resultant IPR can be displayed by selecting
Plot:
User Guide 456
2.9.2 System (IPR + VLP)
The Calculation | System (IPR + VLP) calculation allows the user to determine the
production of a well for a set of conditions by combining the VLP and IPR curves in one
plot. The principles of nodal analysis dictate that any single point (in this case the
bottom hole) must observe mass balance and can only have one pressure associated
with it. This means that the rate at which the VLP and IPR curves across is the rate
which the well will produce under these conditions.
The steps to take to generate a System plot are:
- Select Calculation | System (Ipr + Vlp) to enter the System calculation
screen.
- Enter the Input data and Multiphase Flow correlation to be used to calculate the
IPR and VLP curves.
- If a range of different System Plots are to be generated, the different sensitivity
variables to be used can be defined using Cases.
- The System Plots can then be generated by selecting Calculate.
- The plots can be viewed by selecting Plot or the results of the sensitivity can be
seen by selecting Sensitivity. If the gradient for a solution point is to be calculated,
select Sensitivity TvD.
available.
2.9.2.1 System Calculation Screen
To perform a System Calculation select Calculation | System (IPR + VLP) from the
main toolbar to bring up the System Calculation screen.
457
PROSPER
Along with the top toolbar, there are four different areas of the screen:
- Sensitivity Cases (Bottom Left)
- Results (Top Right)
- System Plot (Bottom Right)
2.9.2.1.1 Data Input
calculation:
User Guide 458
Top Node Pressure This is the fixed pressure at the top node (most downstream
point) of the system. If the system includes a pipeline then the
top node will be the manifold at the end of the pipeline and if
no pipeline is present the top node will be the well head.
Water Cut/ Water
Gas Ratio
Enter the water cut of the well (WGR for a gas well) at the
conditions to be calculated.
GOR/CGR Enter the producing GOR/CGR of the well.
Surface Equipment
Correlation
If surface equipment has been added to the system, select
the multiphase correlation to be used. If no surface equipment
is present, then this input will be ignored.
Vertical Lift
Correlation
Select the multi-phase flow correlation to be used in the
wellbore.
Solution Node This selects the node which will be used as the solution node.
Everything upstream of the node will be treated as the IPR
and everything downstream of the node will be part of the
VLP.
There are three options:
459
PROSPER
- Bottom Node This will select the node at the bottom
of the surface equipment as the solution node. This
means that the solution node pressure will correspond
to the FBHP.
- Top Node This will select the top node (either the
well head or manifold depending if surface equipment
is activated) as the solution node.
- Well Head This will select the well head as the
solution node.
spaced rates.
spaced rates.
The Solution Rate reported is given by the VLP and IPR
curves intersection. These curves are interpolated between
User Guide 460
the selected calculation rates and so the result may change
according to the rate values used.
It is important that an appropriate rates range and distribution
is selected according to each case in order to avoid
significant interpolation errors.
An IPR is required for both Automatic rate methods. For
wells having very high AOFs (e.g. horizontal wells) the well
rate is determined mainly by the tubing size. Manual rate
selection may give better results in such cases.
Left - Hand
Intersection for VLP/
IPR curves
Normally VLP/IPR intersections that occur when the tubing
pressures are declining (on the Left-Hand Side) are
considered to represent unstable flow and are usually
ignored.
When gas coning occurs, however the GOR is changing
constantly for different rates and it is possible to have two
solutions and for the Left-Hand Side intersection to represent
stable flow. This option allows to consider or not the left-hand
intersection.
Select either Allow or Disallow.
2.9.2.1.2 Sensitivity Cases
case.
461
PROSPER
2.9.2.1.3 Results
The top right of the screen is used to display the results of the system calculation:
These results are made up of the plot results (on the left) which detail the results of every
point in the curves and the solution results (on the right) which give details of the solution
point.
The solution results are obtained through interpolation of the VLP and IPR curves.
When artificial lift is enabled, additional results will be displayed related to the operation
of the lift system. When a pump is selected, the Free Gas In Pump (V/V) reported is the
free GLR in the pump.
2.9.2.1.4 System Plot
The bottom of the screen is used to show the System plot and here the intersection
point of the VLP and IPR curves can be seen:
2.9.2.1.5 Toolbar
The toolbar at the top of the System Calculation screen can be used to carry out the
following functions:
User Guide 462
changes made.
Study section for more details.
Calculate Will calculate the system plot and solution point for set
conditions or series of cases if a sensitivity study is being
carried out.
Plot Can plot either the 'System Plot' or the 'Wellhead Plot'.
Sensitivity Plot Will bring up a plot showing the results of the sensitivity
calculations.
Sensitivity PvD Allows the user to carry out a gradient calculation (generally
plotting a variable such as pressure against depth) for
conditions equal to the solution point of the selected cases.
Options This will bring up the associated option screens relevant to
the System Calculation such as:
- Maximum Grain size
- Erosional velocity
- Liquid Loading
- Pigging
For more information on these options and the calculations
they affect please refer to Section 2.9.3.1 of this User Guide.
Lift Curves Will generate a lift curve file which can be exported to a
number of different file types so that it can be used in other
programs.
This function is not available if a pump is installed.
(and sensitivity variables selected if relevant), the System Plot can be calculated by
selecting the Calculate button on the top toolbar.
463
PROSPER
System Calculation screen. If more than one case has been run, then the results can be
2.9.2.1.5.2 Running Sensitivity Studies
It is often very useful to run multiple cases to see what effect changing one or more
variable will have on the results generated. This can be done by running a sensitivity
study.
User Guide 464
performed.
Once the calculations have been completed, if a sensitivity study has been carried out
on a certain variable, then a sensitivity plot can be created which plots how other
variables change as the sensitivity variable changes. This can be seen by selecting
Sensitivity Plot.
This plot allows to graph a 2D slice in any direction of the 3D space created by the
solution variables from the sensitivity analysis.
Select the Y-axis variable, parameter variable and fixed variable as required. The
program will automatically select the other variables:
465
PROSPER
In the screenshot above, the effect that increasing the GOR of the well has on the oil rate
produced can be seen for a series of different water cuts. The variables shown on the
axis can be changed by selecting Variables at the top of the plot.
Here the Y axis and X axis variables can be selected.
The sensitivity plot enables to see more clearly the effects of each of the sensitivities on
User Guide 466
bottom hole flow rate or pressure.
Each plot consists of an x axis variable that is one of the sensitivity variables. Each
curve represents a different value of another of the sensitivity variables (called the
parameter variable) and this is described in the legend box to the right of the plot. As
this plot represents a 2-D slice of a (possible) 3-D space the third variable must be
fixed (called the fixed variable) and its value is described in the plot title. Each sensitivity
variable can be any of the x-axis, parameter or fixed variables.
Done to plot with your new selection of variables
Variables to select the variable choices you require
The following options are common to all plots
Finish Close plot and return to the previous screen.
Main Close plot and return to the main PROSPER screen.
Annotate Add annotations to your plot.
Scales
Rescale your plot. You will need to enter new minimum and maximum
values for the X and Y axes.
Labels Change the plot labels
Replot
Redraw the plot, using the original settings. Use this after you have
zoomed the plot.
Output
Use this option to generate a printer, plotter or file copy of your plot, or
to transfer it to the clipboard.
Colours
This option enables you to change the colours of the plot background,
outline, axes and plot lines and/or labels to generate a screen display
more to your liking. Once you have made your selection, make sure
you use the Save option to save your selection.
Options
Use this option to change plotting defaults such as number of grids per
axis, grid line types, scaling methods etc.
Help View this Help screen
If you wish to view a particular section of your graph more closely, you can magnify or
zoom in on any portion of the plot. To magnify, first place the plot cross-hair cursor over
the area of interest. Next , press down the mouse left hand button and keep the button
depressed. A rectangle will appear which you can "stretch" or drag over the area you
want to magnify. Release the mouse button and you will automatically zoom in on the
area inside the rectangle.
When selecting the area to magnify, first place the cross-hair cursor on any outside
467
PROSPER
corner of the box you wish to draw, drag the mouse in the diagonally opposite direction.
When the magnifying rectangle is large enough, release the mouse button.
2.9.2.1.5.3 Plot
There are three possible options when selecting 'Plot':
- System Plot
- Wellhead Plot
- Pump Plot (only activated when a pump is installed)
System Plot
Selecting the 'System plot' will show a plot of the VLP and IPR curves generated for the
given conditions:
If different sensitivity study cases have been run these will also be plotted.
If additional variables are to be plotted, these can be selected from the bottom left of the
screen. Double clicking on the variable will add it to the plot for the case currently
selected. If it is to be added for more than one case, this can be done by selecting the
multiple add button at the bottom of the screen.
User Guide 468
Wellhead Plot
This will plot the wellhead pressure and temperature against rate. If the wellhead is the
end point of the system then this will be a fixed value. If surface equipment has been
defined, then the WHP and WHT will vay with rate:
Pump Plot
When a pump has been included in the model, the operating point for the solution rate
can be displayed on the pump plot using this feature:
469
PROSPER
2.9.2.1.5.4 Gradient Calculations
Once the system calculation has been completed, it is possible to run a gradient
calculation using the solution rate to find the pressure versus depth plot. If multiple cases
have been run, the solution point of any of the cases can be used.
The data will automatically be populated and then the steps to carry out the calculation
are the same as for a standard Calculation|Gradient calculation.
2.9.2.1.5.5 Export Lift Curves
It is possible to export the generated lift curves to an external file format using this
function. Press Lift Curves on the top toolbar to bring up the option screen to select the
export format:
User Guide 470
Please note that this function is not available in the System Calculation when a
down-hole pump has been installed as the solution node is moved from the
bottom hole depth to the pump outlet.
2.9.3 Gradient (Traverse)
The Calculation Gradient (traverse) feature allows the user to calculate flowing
pressure gradient curves at a specified flow rate for varying reservoir and fluid
conditions.
These curves can be compared with published pressure traverse curves or actual well
data. Pressure traverses can also computed for combinations of sensitivity variables.
The effect of changing tubing sizes, SSSV I.D. etc. can be evaluated visually by plotting
the gradient results.
The steps to take for performing a gradient calculation are:
- Select Calculation | Gradient (traverse) to enter the calculation screen.
- Enter the Input data and Multiphase Flow correlation to be used in the gradient
calculation.
- If a series of sensitivity cases are to be calculated, then these can be detailed
in Cases.
- The gradient can be performed by selecting Calculate.
- The results of each gradient calculation can be reviewed on the calculation
screen or plotted using the Plot feature.
available.
471
PROSPER
2.9.3.1 Gradient Calculation Screen
To commence the gradient calculation, click Calculation | Gradient (traverse) from
the main menu and the following screen will be displayed:
As shown above, this screen can be split into four main sections:
- Sensitivity Study Cases (Bottom Left)
- Gradient Results (Middle)
- Gradient Plot (Right)
2.9.3.1.1 Data Input
calculation:
User Guide 472
First Node Pressure This is the fixed pressure at the top node (most downstream
Water Cut Enter the water cut of the well at the conditions to be
calculated.
Total GOR Enter the producing GOR of the well.
Rate This option will change depending upon the 'Rate Type'
entered. Enter the rate of the appropriate phase which is to
be calculated.
Rate Type Select the fluid on which the rate is to be based. From this
rate, the other rates will be calculated.
The options are:
- Liquid Rate
- Oil Rate
- Gas Rate
- Hydrocarbon Mass Rate
First Node Select the node at which the calculation is to be started. By
default this is the top node within the system.
Last Node Select the node at which the calculation is to be finished. By
473
PROSPER
default this is set to the last node in the down-hole equipment
but it can be set to any node within the system.
Tubing Correlation Select the multi-phase flow correlation to be used in the
wellbore.
Pipeline Correlation If surface equipment has been added to the system, select
Barnea Critera The Barnea criteria can be set to 'Yes' or 'No'
Slug Method The method to calculate the slugging properties of the well
can be set here. Three options are available:
- Brill
- RCS Mechanistic
- Worst Case (Hernandez-Perez
Frequency)
More details on the slugging calculations can be found here.
2.9.3.1.1.1 Barnea Critera
The Barnea criteria is a 'Flow Pattern Prediction' method developed by D. Barnea to
cover the entire range of inclination angle in hilly pipelines.
It is applied on the Taitel-Dukler flow regime map and does not affect the gradient
results.
Ref: Barnea, D.: 'A Unified Model for Predicting Flow-Pattern Transition for the
Whole Range of Pipe Inclinations' Int. J. Multiphase Flow (1987) 13, No. 1.
2.9.3.1.1.2 Slugging Methods
When steady-state flow occurs in a pipeline, time-averaged mass flow rate at the
pipeline inlet and outlet are constant.
If slug flow occurs through this pipeline, gas and liquid rates and pressures are NOT
constant: liquid slugs and following gas bubbles will vary in velocity and length.
Two slug calculations method can be applied in PROSPER: Brill, or RCS.
The Brill method is the most common one, and a more detailed description of the
parameters used to describe the slug characteristics can be found below.
The slug model is assuming that the slug period includes:
- A gas bubble included within a liquid film.
- A liquid slug containing small gas bubbles.
The association of the gas bubble and the liquid slug forms the slug period.
User Guide 474
The following assumptions have been taken to develop the hydrodynamic model:
1. Small gas bubbles and liquid in the liquid slug travel at the same velocity.
2. The Liquid film does not contain any gas bubbles.
3. Negligible liquid droplets exits in the gas bubble.
The hydrodynamic model is based on mass balance relationships for both the liquid and
the gas phase.
This will state for instance that the mass of liquid flowing out of the pipe section
considered during one specific period of time is equal to the sum of:
- the mass of liquid in the liquid slug : m
1
.
- the mass of liquid in the liquid film associated with the gas bubble : m
2
.
- the mass of liquid that is bypassed by the gas bubble following the liquid slug
m
3
.
m
total
= m
1
+ m
2
- m
3

An equivalent mass balance principle will be applied to the gas phase flowing out of the
pipe section considered.
Empirical correlations relating the holdups in the different sections of the slug period
considered to the phase velocities as well as empirical correlations relating the slug
lengths to the mixture velocity are then used to estimate the slug properties.
The output variables that can be found in PROSPER are the following:
Mean Slug Length and 1/1000 Mean Slug Length
Mean Bubble Length and 1/1000 Mean Bubble Length
Slug Liquid Rate and Slug Gas Rate
475
PROSPER
Bubble Liquid Rate and Bubble Gas Rate
Mean Slug Frequency and 1/1000 Slug Frequency:
Slug Hold-up (HLS) and Equilibrium Hold-up (HLE):
Slug Surge Factor (Liquid) and Slug Surge Factor (Gas)
Bubble Surge Factor (Liquid) and Bubble Surge Factor (Gas)
These are standard characteristics parameters for slug analysis, and their description
can be found in the references below.

The Taitel-Dukler flow map that is used in PROSPER to assess the extent of the
slugging phenomenon in the system. This flow map is accessible for each calculation
row by clicking on the row number in the gradient calculation.
A description of these slug calculation methods can be found for instance in
the following publications:
Beggs, H.D.
and Brill, J.P
A study of two phase flow in
inclined pipes
Journal of Petroleum technology,
13 (October 1973). p.607
Brill, J.P. and
Beggs, H.D.
Two phase flow in pipes Tulsa: University of Tulsa (1978)
Beggs, H.D. Production Optimization using
Nodal Analysis
OGCI publications (1991). p.88-90.
Brown, K.E The technology of artificial lift
methods
vol.4 - p83-85.
Crowley C.J.
and Sam R.G.
Investigation of Two-Phase
Flow in Horizontal and Inclined
Pipes at Large Pipe size and
High Gas Density
AGA report TN-399 (Feb. 1986).
Crowley C.J.
and Rothe P.H.
State of the Art Report on
Multiphase Methods for Gas
and Oil Pipelines (Volume 2)
Guide to Computerised
Calculations Creare Inc. Report
TN-409 vol.2 (1986).
Hill, T.J. and
Wood D.G.
(RCS
Mechanistic
Slug Method).
A new approach to the
prediction of slug frequency
SPE 20629. (1990).
Pigging Calculations in PROSPER
The gradient traverse calculations in PROSPER can include pigging calculations which
can be used to describe the pigging characteristics of the flow in pipelines.
These pigging calculations can be adapted to the system through the pigging efficiency
factor.
User Guide 476
The pigging calculations are assuming that a sphere with a 100% removal efficiency
travels in the pipeline and that all the liquid removed by the sphere is in the form of a
continuous slug.
The pigged slug volume can be then estimated by integrating the difference between
the liquid holdup and the no-slip holdup in the pipeline.
The pigging efficiency factor will correct the initial assumption to model a more realistic
situation where as the sphere travels along the pipeline, some amount of liquid will be
bypassed, affecting the sphere velocity, outlet liquid velocity and slug characteristics.
The additional results reported in the gradient traverse results and related to the pigging
calculations are pigged slug length, pigged slug volume, slug production time,
slug residency time, time to produce pigged slug length and time for the pigged slug to
reach the pipeline outlet.
2.9.3.1.2 Sensitivity Cases
case.
2.9.3.1.3 Results
Once a calculation has been carried out, the results for the different calculated depths
are shown in the centre of the screen:
477
PROSPER
The bar at the bottom of the screen can be used to scroll along to see more results such
as slugging results, fluid properties etc.
2.9.3.1.4 Gradient Plot
Once a gradient calculation has been completed, the right hand side of the screen will
show the pressure and temperature profiles against depth for the given conditions:
User Guide 478
2.9.3.1.5 Toolbar
The toolbar at the top of the 'System Calculation' screen can be usd to carry out the
changes made.
479
PROSPER
Calculate Will calculate the gradient for set conditions or series of
cases if a sensitivity study is being carried out.
Plot Allows the user to plot the calculated data
Options This will bring up the associated option screens relevant to
the System Calculation such as:
- Maximum Grain size
- Erosional velocity
- Liquid Loading
- Pigging
For more information on these options and the calculations
they affect please refer to the Options Section of this User
Guide.
Layout Changes the columns of calculated data which are displayed
in the Results section.
(and sensitivity variables selected if relevant), the Gradient (Traverse) can be calculated
by selecting the Calculate button on the top toolbar.
Gradient Calculation screen. If more than one case has been run, then the results can be
2.9.3.1.5.2 Sensitivity Cases
It is often very useful to run multiple cases to see what effect changing one or more
variable will have on the results generated. This can be done by running a sensitivity
study.
User Guide 480
Up to 3 variable can be included in a sensitivity study at any one time. The values of
each variable can be inserted manually or using the 'Generate' feature. Letting
'Generate' will bring up the following screen:
performed.
Alternatively, the sensitivities can be carried out on a case by case basis. This can be
481
PROSPER
done by selecting Combinations at the top of the screen:
This allows up to ten cases to be set up each with different values for the selected
variables.
Once the cases have been set up, select Done to return to the calculation screen.
2.9.3.1.5.3 Plot
Once a gradient calculation has been carried out the results can be plotted by selecting
Plot from the top toolbar:
User Guide 482
Automatically, the pressure gradient will be displayed on the plot. If other variables are
to included in the plot, they should be selected from the list in the bottom left hand corner
of the screen and added to the plot using the 'Add variable' button (represented by a
clock with an arrow beside it).
2.9.3.1.5.4 Options
Every time a gradient calculation is performed, a number of post-process calculations
are carried out for example: maximum grain size, erosional velocity, liquid loading
(Turner velocity) and pigging calculations.
The parameters affecting these calculations can be accessed in any Calculation screen
by means of Options button.

This screen can also be accessed from the main menu toolbar by selecting System
Solids.
More information on these options can be found in the Calculation Options section.
2.9.3.2 Note on HSP
Two options of 'Pump Speed Method' are available:
Entered The pump speed is entered by the user in the HSP input data and is used
by the program to determine the power fluid rate that is able to satisfy the
condition that the power consumed by the pump is equal to the power
produced by the turbine.
This method is the standard to calculate the gradient (or VLP curves for
simulators like GAP) as in general the pump speed is known
Calculated This method calculates the speed required in order to operate the pump
at the maximum overall efficiency for the value of the power fluid rate
entered in the HSP input data section and suitable to satisfy the condition
that the power consumed by the pump is equal to the power produced by
the turbine
In some cases there could be multiple solutions: PROSPER will determine the one with
highest overall efficiency. This means that once the pump operating parameters (pump
speed, power fluid rate, etc.) have been defined, both modes of calculation will be
equivalent.
2.9.4 VLP (Tubing Curves)
An important PROSPER application is generating tubing lift curves for use in reservoir
and total system simulators. The Calculation | VLP (Tubing Curves) option will allow
the user to generate vertical lift performance (VLP) curves for ranges of different
483
PROSPER
variables which can then be exported to a number of different formats and used in
conjunction with other software.
The steps to take for generating VLP curves are:
- Select Calculation | VLP (Tubing Curves) to enter the VLP calculation
screen.
- Enter the input data and multiphase flow correlation to be used in the VLP
generation
- If a table of VLP curves are to be generated, the different sensitivity variables to
be used can be defined using Cases.
- The lift curves can then be generated by selecting Calculate.
- The generated lift curves can then be exported to the appropriate format by
selecting Export Lift Curves.
available.
2.9.4.1 VLP Calculation
VLP curves report the flowing bottom hole pressure (and various other results
depending on the well type) for various rates at a given set of flowing conditions (WHP,
GOR and Water Cut).
At each reported rate, a gradient calculation is carried out to find the FBHP and then
these pressures are joined together to form a curve.
An example curve for a multiphase naturally lifted well is shown below:
User Guide 484
The curve above shows the typical shape of a VLP curve which can be split into two
sections; Right or left of the minimum inflexion point.
To the left-hand side of the minimum point is called the gravity dominated or unstable
region of the curve. In this section of the curve, an increase in the rate sees a decrease
in the FBHP required to lift the fluid to the surface. This may seem counter-intuitive but is
in part caused by the high phase slip between the gas and liquid phases because of the
low liquid velocity. The high slip leads to a higher mixture density and therefore larger
pressure drop.
The right hand side of the minimum point is called the friction dominated or stable
region of the curve. In this section of the curve, an increase in rate leads to an increase
in the FBHP required to lift the fluid to surface. The increased velocity (and therefore
increased friction) caused by the increase in rate acts to 'stabilise' the well and reduces
the likelihood of heading and other instabilities.
Due to these stability issues, the minimum point of the VLP curve is also often referred
to as the 'minimum point of stability' as any rate below this point will be within the
unstable region.
2.9.4.2 VLP Calculation Screen
To commence the generation of VLP tables, click Calculation | VLP (tubing curves)
from the main menu and the following screen will be displayed:
485
PROSPER
As shown above, this screen can be split into four main sections:
- Sensitivity Study Cases (Bottom Left)
- VLP Results (Top Right)
- VLP Plot (Bottom Left)
2.9.4.2.1 VLP Input Data
Before any calculations can be carried out the conditions to be calculated as well as the
correlation to be used must be defined. This is done in the top left corner of the VLP
screen. The values entered for first node pressure, water cut and GOR will be ignored if
the same parameters are selected as sensitivity variables.
User Guide 486
Top Node Pressure This is the fixed pressure at the top node (most downstream
Water Cut/ Water
Gas Ratio
Enter the water cut of the well (WGR for a gas well) at the
conditions to be calculated.
Total GOR/CGR Enter the producing GOR/CGR of the well.
Surface Equipment
Correlation
If surface equipment has been added to the system, select
Vertical Lift
Correlation
Select the multi-phase flow correlation to be used in the
wellbore.
487
PROSPER
spaced rates.
spaced rates.
First Node Define the first node of the system. This will be the node
which corresponds to the first node pressure also defined in
this screen.
Last Node Defines the last node of the system. This will be the node at
which the VLP pressure is calculated and is most commonly
the bottom hole depth.
Calculate (Available when using a pump)
When calculating with a pump, the First and Last node
options are no longer provided. Instead, one of two options
must be selected:
- Tubing Curves (Standard)
- Lift Curves for Simulators
When generating VLP curves for external simulator such as
ECLIPSE, the Lift Curves for Simulators option must be
User Guide 488
selected.
2.9.4.2.2 VLP Sensitivity Cases
If sensitivity study cases have been set, then the list of cases will be shown in the bottom
left hand corner of the screen. Selecting one of the cases will display the results and plot
in the right hand side of the screen.
2.9.4.2.3 VLP Results
Once the calculation has been run, the top right hand side of the screen will show the
results of the VLP calculation. The results shown match the sensitivity case which has
been selected in the bottom left hand side of the screen:
489
PROSPER
2.9.4.2.4 VLP Plot
Once the calculation has been run, the bottom right hand side of the screen will show the
plot of the VLP curve. The curve shown match the sensitivity case which has been
selected in the bottom left hand side of the screen:
2.9.4.2.5 VLP Toolbar
The toolbar at the top of the System Calculation screen can be used to carry out the
changes made.
Calculate Will calculate the VLP curves for set conditions or series of
cases if a sensitivity study is being carried out.
Plot Will plot the generated VLP curves.
Export Lift Curve When the VLP curves have been generated, they can be
User Guide 490
exported to an external format using this option.
2.9.4.2.5.1 Sensitivity Cases
When generating VLP curve tables for use in simulators or other programs, a series of
variables are required to be calculated. This can be done using the Sensitivity Cases
screen.
491
PROSPER
performed.
2.9.4.2.5.2 VLP Recommended Variables
A number of settings and variables have been found to improve the quality of the curves
which are generated for use in other programs. This is especially true for VLP curves
which are generated for the use in GAP as the derivatives of the curves benefit from
being smooth in order to help the solver and optimiser to calculate.
Rate Method
Geometric - The geometric rate method (either User Selected or Automatic) places
more rate values at lower rates. This gives more definition to the Unstable region of the
VLP curves and allows the minimum stable rate to be more accurately captured.
Naturally Flowing Wells
For naturally flowing wells, it is normal to generate lift curves for ranges of well head
pressure, GOR and water cut. Below is some guidelines for the ranges and spacing
methods which should be used for each variable:
WHP - Normally generated between the separator pressure and the reservoir
pressure. The linear spacing option can be used.
GOR - The first value should be a value lower than the solution GOR and the
User Guide 492
second value should be a high value such as 25000 scf/day. Geometric spacing is
recommended.
Water Cut - Generate from 0% to 95-99% with linear spacing.
For all these variables, it is recommended that the maximum number of values (10) be
generated.
Gas Lifted Wells
GLR Injected - When generating lift curves for Gas Lifted wells, the GLR Injected option
should be used as apposed to the Gas Injection Rate option. This is because at low
rates in the VLP curve, a fixed injection rate may cause an unrealistic value of FBHP to
be calculated. Using a fixed GLR injected for each curve ensures that they remain
smooth and without any significant discontinuities.
The recommended GLR Injected values are: 0, 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400,
12500, 25000 scf/STB.
Fully Compositional VLPs for ECLIPSE
When exporting VLP curves for use with fully compositional ECLIPSE (E300) it is
important that the new Total Molar Rate option is used to specify the fluid rates as this is
compatible with the reservoir simulator.
2.9.4.2.5.3 Export Lift Curves
Once the lift curves have been generated, the next step is to export them in a format
which can be imported into a simulator or other program. This can be done using the
Export Lift Curves button.
This will bring up the export screen on which the format to be exported can be selected.
493
PROSPER
Once the format has been selected, click Continue to save the file.
2.9.5 Choke Performance
This is a general purpose choke performance calculator. Only PVT data input is
required to calculate flow rates given the choke size and pressures, choke setting to
achieve a specified flow rate etc. To access the choke performance calculator, click C
alculation Choke Performance and the following selection screen may be displayed
(depending on the choke method selected):
User Guide 494
Calculation Options
Select the required calculation option from the following:
Predict Mass Flow Rate
PROSPER determines the flow rate for specified choke opening and inlet
and outlet pressures
Predict Pressure Drop
PROSPER calculates the pressure drop across a specified choke opening
for a given flow rate and inlet pressure
Predict Choke Valve Setting
PROSPER finds the choke size for a specified rate and inlet an outlet
495
PROSPER
pressures.
Choke Method
Select a choke calculation method from the following options:
Petroleum Experts
This is an in-house developed choke model about which more information can
be found in the Appendix of this guide.
HYDRO
There are 3 distinct methods for modelling specific choke equipment. Please
note that the Cd term inserted cannot be equal to the Ct term as typically Cd is
less than 1 as it is the Vena Contracta value.
ELF
A model based on Perkins (SPE 20633) approach along with discharge
coefficients determined by the author (Stephane Rastoin of ELF Aquitaine at
TUALP). This is also the recommended method used to calculate pressure
drops down hole for SSSVs and restrictions. It should be used for the
majority of applications.
Enter the following data:
GOR This value overrides the GOR entered on the PVT data
screen.
Water cut
Inlet Pressure Pressure upstream of the choke
Inlet Pressure Temperature upstream of the choke
Outlet Pressure Pressure downstream of the choke
Outlet Temperature Temperature downstream of the choke
Choke Setting Orifice size
Click Calculate, and PROSPER will calculate the liquid and mass flow rates. Similar
screens are used to enter data for the dP and Choke Setting prediction options. For
critical flow conditions, it may take some time for the calculation to converge.
If the ELF choke model is selected, after a calculation the choke
performance curve is plotted at the bottom of the screen
Selecting the choke model in PROSPER
To select the choke model to be used to model chokes, SSSVs and
User Guide 496
Restrictions, access the 'Surface Equipment' screen and select from the drop-
down menu 'Choke Method' the desired model
When one of the enthalpy balance temperature models (Improved
Approximation or Enthalpy Balance) is selected, the choke calculation
will account for changes of temperature due to Joule-Thomson effect
2.9.6 ESP Performance
The ESP Performance calculation can be used to discharge conditions of an ESP
installation.
Select Calculation | ESP Performance to up the ESP performance input screen:
The ESP performance screen is split into three different sections.
- Data Input (Left hand side)
- Results (Top Right hand side)
497
PROSPER
- Pump Operating Plot (Bottom Right hand side)
After the required input data has been inserted, select Calculate from the top toolbar to
calculate the performance of the pump. The discharge conditions, pump results and
motor results are shown in the top right hand side of the screen and the operating point
is shown on a plot of the performance curve in the bottom left hand side.
2.9.7 Generate for GAP
This option is used to calculate well performance curves for Petroleum Experts General
Allocation Program (GAP).
PROSPER can be run from within GAP in a batch mode for generating performance
curves for groups of wells or independently of GAP by selecting this option.
PROSPER will automatically calculate solutions for gas lifted or naturally flowing wells. If
the solutions are then saved in a .OUT file, GAP can pick up the data required to
calculate performance curves at a later time. For more information, refer to the GAP
documentation.
The performance curves are generated by carrying out a system calculation for a range
of wellhead pressures and set values of water cut, GOR and reservoir pressure.
The solution rates from these System Calculations are then combined to form a plot of
liquid rate against wellhead pressure.
Select Calculation | Generate for GAP to bring up the Generate for GAP main screen:
User Guide 498
The top left hand corner of the screen is used to insert the data required to generate the
well performance curves. Single values for GOR, water cut and Reservoir Pressure
should be entered and the suitable multiphase correlations should also be selected.
A range of wellhead pressure should also be inserted and these will form the basis of
the calculates and resultant curve.
When all of the data has been inserted select Calculate. This will carry out the
calculation and fill the right hand side of the screen with the results and plots of the
different 'System Calculations' at the various wellhead pressures.
The system plots for the different pressures can be viewed by selecting Plot:
499
PROSPER

The resultant Well Performance Curve can be plotted by selecting PC Plot:
User Guide 500
2.9.8 Bottom Hole Pressure from Wellhead Pressure
This calculation is possible when modelling a well using the 'Rough Approximation'
temperature model.
The BHP from WHP calculation is used to calculate the flowing bottom hole pressure
from a set of surface conditions. Unlike the Gradient (Traverse) calculation, the BHP
from WHP calculation does not use the U value from the geothermal gradient screen but
rather calculates the required U value to match the wellhead temperature entered in the
calculation.
The screen below shows the calculation screen which can be accessed by selecting
Calculations | BHP from WHP:
The data to be entered can be entered in a number of different formats and these can
be selected from the drop down menus at the top of the screen. If data has already been
inserted when the format is changed, the values will also change accordingly.
The required input data is:
Time This time is used to order the different tests.
Liquid/Oil/Gas Rate Enter the Liquid/Oil/Gas Rate which is to be used in the
calculation
Wellhead Pressure Pressure at the wellhead at the time of the test
Wellhead
Temperature
This temperature is used to calculate the Heat Transfer
Coefficient for use in the calculation.
GOR/Gas Rate/CGR Enter the GOR/Gas Rate/CGR at the time of the test
Water Cut/Water
Rate/WGR
Enter the Water Cut/Water Rate/WGR at the time of the test
501
PROSPER
Before the calculation is carried out, the flow correlations to be used for both the tubing
and the pipeline should be selected at the top of the screen.
Selecting the Calculate button will calculate the bottom hole pressure for all of the
inserted tests. If any tests are to be ignored in the calculation, they can be disabled by
selecting the row and pressing Disable at the top of the screen. If a previously disabled
test is to be calculated, it must first be enabled by selecting the disabled row and
pressing Enable. The Sort button will sort the tests in order of increasing Time.
Once the tests have been calculated two results will be presented:
Bottom Hole
Pressure
This is the calculated BHP from the test for the given
conditions and calculated U value.
Heat Transfer
Coefficient
This is the U value which needs to be used to achieve the
given wellhead temperature for the given rates and fractional
flows.
Once the data has been calculated it can be plotted against time by selecting Plot:
The plot shows a trend of the wellhead pressures, calculated bottom hole pressures and
liquid rates against time.
User Guide 502
2.9.8.1 References
SPE PAPER 22870
Modelling of Well bore Heat Losses in Directional Wells Under Changing Injection
Conditions
K Chu and S Thakur, Amoco Production Co.
2.9.9 Reset Results
In the calculation menu the Reset Results option has the objective to erase any results
previously calculated in the model.
After accessing this option, select the calculation to reset and then select Reset: the
program will erase the desired results.
503
PROSPER
2.9.10 Note on Enthalpy Balance Model
The Predicting Pressure and Temperature analysis option can be used to generate
temperature and pressure profiles in producing wells.
This rigorous thermodynamic model Enthalpy Balance considers heat transfer by
conduction, radiation, forced and free convection. Heat transfer coefficients are
calculated using thermodynamic data held in a User-definable database. The
temperature prediction calculations are transient, allowing sensitivities against flowing
time to be run for both wells and pipelines. This temperature model requires
considerably more input data and computation time for either Predicting Pressure Only
or the Rough or Improved Approximation temperature models. Enthalpy Balance
should be applied only when the desired result is the temperature. The additional
computational effort cannot be justified for pressure loss calculations.
Both pressure and temperature losses across chokes and restrictions are accounted
for. A theoretical outline of the Enthalpy Balance model is given in Appendix B.
Temperature prediction is useful for generating temperature profiles in:
pipelines
sub sea wells
predicting temperature/pressure profiles to help predict wax/hydrate
deposits.
accounting for Joule-Thompson effects
PROSPER 's Enthalpy Balance temperature model is one of the most accurate
temperature prediction methods available.
The Enthalpy Balance (or Improved Approximation) temperature
calculations must commence from a known condition. This is usually the
reservoir pressure and temperature. As a consequence, calculating from a
downstream node (unknown temperature) to an upstream node (known
temperature) is not meaningful. For injectors, calculations commence from
the known wellhead pressure and temperature.
2.10 Design Menu
The 'Design Menu' enables the user to perform various artificial lift designs.
From this menu the user can access the design modules for the following artificial lift
User Guide 504
technologies:
Gas Lift (continuous)
Hydraulic Drive Downhole Pump
Progressive Cavity Pump
Coiled Tubing GasLift
Jet Pump
Sucker Rod Pump
Gas lift (intermittent)
The design menu is active only if an artificial lift method has been selected in the
main 'Options' screen.
The design option will correspond to the artificial lift method selection in the main
option screen.
Artificial lift design is not enabled when the Enthalpy Balance temperature
model is in use.
From the 'Design' menu the Database containing all the information about gas lift
valves, ESP pumps, motors, cables, etc. is accessible. A dedicated section is reported
at the end of the chapter.
In the following sections each of the design options are illustrated.
2.10.1 Continuous Gas Lift Design
The gas lift design can be used to design and optimise the design of gas lifted wells.
The program can be used to determine the spacing and size of unloading valves and
calculate the valve test rack setting pressures for a new well or, alternatively, designs
can also be performed for existing wells having mandrels installed at fixed depths.
2.10.1.1Menu Options
If gas lift was selected as a lift method in the Options menu the following additional
options will be available in the Designs | Gaslift menu:
New Well
Existing Mandrels
Gas Lift Adjustments
The gas lift design section of the program can be used to determine the optimum gas lift
equipment for a given well. PROSPER calculates the maximum production rate
possible, the corresponding optimum gas lift rate, the valve spacing and size to unload
505
PROSPER
the well and the test rack setting pressure for each valve for surface calibration.
Designs can also be prepared for wells having mandrels already set at fixed depths.
Before the user can proceed ahead with artificial lift design, PVT, downhole equipment
and IPR information must be input. Where possible, VLP matching should also be
carried out on the well to ensure that the multiphase flow correlation selected calculates
a pressure gradient which is consistent with the actual well.
2.10.1.2New Well
Selecting Design Gas Lift New Well from the 'Design' menu will display the 'Gas Lift
Design' input screen:
In this screen it is possible to enter the input data for the gas lift design task.
The input data screen is divided into several areas. The Input parameters panel is
used to enter the design operating conditions while the other panels allow the user to
enter the design options for a given application.
User Guide 506
2.10.1.2.1 Setting Up the Design Problem
Setting the artificial lift design problems is defining the various parameters in the figure
above. These are described below:
Design Rate Method
Entered By User Use this option when designing for a given production rate
and gas lift gas injection rate or when modelling the
performance of an existing installation. If the Check
Conformance with IPR option is selected, the program will
modify the rate and the gas injection rate, if necessary, to
honour the IPR.
If a maximum production calculation has been previously
done, the lift gas and design production rates can be User
Entered. The design rate can be entered either in terms of
liquid or oil production only. The design lift gas injection is
entered as the Maximum gas available.
Calculated from
Maximum Production
PROSPER will find the maximum possible oil production
rate by determining both the optimum gas injection rate and
depth. This is achieved by calculating the oil production for a
given GLR injected and increasing the GLR until the optimum
is found.
Calculated from
Maximum Revenue
Using user-entered economic parameters for oil and sales
gas revenue, produced water processing and lift gas cost,
the program will find the gas lift design that maximises total
revenue (oil and gas revenue less water and injection gas
processing costs). The same search procedure as for
Maximum production is carried out using the cost function in
place of the oil production rate.
For both Maximum production and Maximum revenue design methods, a
maximum liquid rate is required to be input. This allows the user to honour
production constraints imposed by surface facilities or off take targets.
Input Parameters
Having set up the calculation options, enter values for the following variables on the
'Input Parameters' panel:
Maximum Gas
Available
Set to the maximum gas available at normal operating
pressure for maximum rate or revenue methods.
For Entered by User designs, set to the actual injection for
the design production rate.
507
PROSPER
Maximum Gas During
Unloading
Enter the maximum gas available at the unloading pressure
for unloading the shallowest valve.
Flowing Top Node
Pressure
If surface equipment has been entered, this is the manifold
pressure Otherwise, enter the flowing wellhead pressure.
Unloading Top Node
Pressure
Enter a lower unloading pressure if for example the
separator is bypassed during unloading. Otherwise leave the
same as flowing top node pressure.
Operating Injection
Pressure
Available gas injection system pressure available at the
casing head. This is not the final operating injection
pressure.
If the 'Safety equipment' option has been selected, pressure
losses along surface pipes are computed also.
Kick Off Injection
Pressure
Leave set to normal injection system pressure unless an
auxiliary source of high pressure kick off gas is available.
This pressure is used to space the first unloading valve. If a
sufficiently high pressure is entered, then no unloading valves
will be needed.
Desired dP Across
Valve
User selected design pressure loss across valve orifice to
ensure well and gas injection system pressure stability.
Usually in the order of 100-200 psi.
Maximum Depth of
Injection
Constrains the maximum injection depth to be shallower than
the production packer.
Watercut Design producing water cut.
Minimum Spacing Sets the minimum spacing between valves. If the next valve
in the calculation is found to be less than this value then this
valve will not be added and the calculation will stop.
Usually between 200-400 ft.
Static Gradient of
Load Fluid
Static gradient of load fluid to be balanced by casing
pressure during unloading.
Minimum Transfer dP Only active when Use IPR for Unloading has been
selected as No and is used to size the valve trim.
During the unloading process, the optimum injection rate is
found at each valve by running a sensitivity study on the
injection rate. This injection rate is then used to size the
valves.
When the Use IPR for Unloading feature is selected as No,
the IPR is not used to calculate the production rate and
instead it is assumed that the full design rate is produced.
This leads to a larger injection rate being required to reach
the minimum pressure within the tubing and therefore the
resultant valve trim sizes are overestimated.
User Guide 508
To compensate for this overestimation, the Minimum
Transfer dP is used to alter the pressure to which tubing
pressure has to be lowered to. This means that less gas is
required and so the valve trim sizes which are calculated are
no longer overestimated.
The new pressure which is to be reached becomes:
(P
transf er
) = P
min
*(1- % minimum transfer dP /100)
If set to zero, unloading valve trims will be sized to inject
sufficient gas to lower the unloading tubing pressure to the
minimum possible pressure at the valve depth.
Increasing the value of Minimum transfer dP will lower the
unloading GLR injected and reduce trim sizes.
Values of 5 to 25% are commonly used.
Maximum Port size Depends on valve series selected. PROSPER will select
multiple orifice valves for high gas injection rates if the
design injection cannot be passed by one valve of Maximum
port size.
Safety For Closure of
Last Unloading Valve
Extra dP to ensure that the last unloading valve before the
orifice is closed.
Thornhill-Craver
DeRating Percentage
for Valves and for
Orifice
This coefficient is used to scale down the maximum gas
injection rate that can be flowed through a valve or the orifice.
As the maximum gas rate is decreased, this means that to
flow the same gas rate as the original case (with no de-
rating), larger valve or orifice should be used
Valve Type
Casing Sensitive
Valves
Enter the minimum casing pressure drop to close valves.
Tubing Sensitive
Valves
Enter the percentage difference in Pcasing - Pwh to close
valves.
Proportional
Response Valves
PROSPER determines the closing pressure as part of the
design calculations.
Valve Settings (Casing pressure operated valves only)
For casing pressure operated valves, there are 4 options for setting valve dome
pressures:
Pvc = Gas Pressure PROSPER in this case sets valve dome pressures to balance
509
PROSPER
the casing pressure at depth. Unloading valves will close
when the casing pressure drops below this value. A small
value of Casing Pressure to Close Valves will ensure that
the unloading valves will remain shut.
This design method ensures maximum injection depth and
hence maximises production rates.
All Valves Pvo = Gas
Pressure
Dome pressures are set so that valves open with the design
casing pressure at depth. The casing pressure must be
reduced by at least R(P
vo
- P
t
) to close valves for this option.

PROSPER designs using the maximum of either the dP to
close valves or the calculated closing pressure drop. As this
method is more conservative and will help ensure that valves
do not close before they are intended to, however, it reduces
the available injection pressure and will result in lower
production rates.
This is the recommended design setting when designing
new wells.
First Valve Pvo = Gas
Pressure
The first valve dome pressure is set to open on the design
casing pressure at depth. Subsequent valves are set to
close on design casing pressure. This method gives
additional safety for the opening of the first unloading valve
without sacrificing available pressure for the deeper
unloading valves.
Pmin - Pmax Enter fraction of TEF.
Injection Point
Before the gas lift design is performed, the user can decide if the operating valve is a
gas lift valve or an orifice.
Dome Pressure Correction above 1200 psi
There are two equations for dome pressure temperature correction for dome pressures
above 1200 psi.
No PROSPER will use the standard API temperature correction
method for all pressures. This method is known to be
inaccurate at high pressures. The option is provided for
convenience in comparing results from hand calculations etc.
Yes The API method is used below 1200 psi, and an improved
algorithm is used above 1200 psi. This is the default and
recommended option.
User Guide 510
Check Rate Conformance with IPR
When selected, PROSPER will re-calculate the system solution rate at each step in the
design process to ensure that the design rate can be met. This prevents for example, a
design being done for an unrealistic Enter by User rate. If the design rate cannot be
produced, the design process will start again with a lower rate.
For speed in comparing designs, this option can be set to No. However, the
user must be aware that the design rate may not be able to be met by the well.
For more information on the 'Check Rate Conformance with IPR' option please refer to
the Notes on Gas Lift Design.
Vertical Lift Correlation
Select the most appropriate correlation for the application. Matched VLP correlations
should be used when available.
Surface Pipe Correlation
Select the most appropriate correlation for the application. Surface pipes (when
entered in surface equipment) form part of the gas lift system in PROSPER and are
accounted for when calculating unloading pressures and flowing pressure losses. This
can be important for sub-sea systems where the flow line head can be significant.
Use IPR for Unloading
Yes This is the recommended PROSPER unloading valve trim
sizing method.
When each valve depth is calculated, the optimum injection
rate is found by running a sensitivity on the injection rate at
the valve depth. The rate which provides the minimum flowing
pressure in the tubing at that depth is used to size the valve.
When the Use IPR for Unloading feature is selected as Yes,
the IPR is used to calculate the well production rate which is
produced from the well at each injection rate. This ensures
that the injected gas rate used for the valve trim sizing
calculation is an accurate representation of the actual flowing
conditions.
Minimum transfer dP is ignored for this option.
No This is the standard hand-calculation method.
As with the Yes method, the optimum injection rate is found
at each valve by running a sensitivity study on the injection
rate. As the injection rate increases the density of the column
511
PROSPER
above decreases (lowering the pressure) until a rate is
reached at which the This injection rate is then used to size
the valves.
When the Use IPR for Unloading feature is selected as No,
the IPR is not used to calculate the production rate and
instead it is assumed that the full design rate is produced.
This leads to a larger injection rate being required to reach
the minimum pressure within the tubing and therefore the
resultant valve trim sizes are overestimated.
To compensate for this overestimation, the Minimum
Transfer dP is used to alter the pressure to which tubing
pressure has to be lowered to. This means that less gas is
required and so the valve trim sizes which are calculated are
no longer overestimated.
For more information on the Using IPR for Unloading method please refer to the Notes
on Gas Lift Design
Orifice Sizing On
Two options are available:
Calculated dP at Orifice
Min dP Across Orifice
2.10.1.2.2 Gas Lift Valve Selection
Once the design problem has been set, the next stage is to tell PROSPER the kind of
valves that will be picked up from database for design.
On the right-hand side of the input Gas Lift Design input screen there is a navigator
window that allows selecting the type of valves to use in the design from an internal
database.
Please refer to the end of this chapter for an illustration of how to access
and edit the database for the gas lift valves
2.10.1.2.3 Performing the Design (New Well)
Once the input data has been defined and the valve type selected, click Next to access
the Gas Lift design screen. The following example is for casing sensitive valves:
User Guide 512
A screen similar to that above will be displayed if design for Maximum Rate or
Maximum Revenue has been selected.
If the design rate is Entered by User, the upper (Rate calculation) part of the screen is
not displayed.
2.10.1.2.3.1 Calculation of the Design Rate
The first step is to find the design production rate.
Click Get Rate. PROSPER will calculate the Gas Lift Performance
Curve and determine the optimum Gas Lift injection rate and maximum oil
production rate. The Get Rate process calculates oil production as a
513
PROSPER
function of gas injected.
When the calculations have finished, the results can be displayed in the form of a well
performance curve by clicking Plot. A graph similar to the following will appear:
The target design oil rate and gas injected can be read off the performance curve plot.
The design rate is:
The maximum oil production shown in the 'Performance curve' plot, provided that
the available gas injection and liquid production rate limits have not been
exceeded.
In case the maximum gas available is exceeded by the highest oil rate on the
plot, the oil rate corresponding to maximum available gas is taken as design
rate.
PROSPER will design for the maximum oil production rate entered in the main
input screen, if it exceeds the rate calculated from the performance curve.
The performance curves can span several flow regimes. Discontinuities in
some flow correlations may cause occasional curve fitting problems. In such
cases, a correlation such as Hagedorn Brown may give better results.
On the design screen, the values at the top of the screen will now be filled in:
User Guide 514
The GLR Injected, Liquid Rate, Oil Rate, VLP Pressure and IPR Pressure all
relate to the final point calculated in the performance curve generation. By
themselves they contain little value to the User.
The Standard Deviation is the standard deviation between the calculated points
and the fitted curve displayed on the plot.
The Design Rate is the optimum injection rate based upon the design criteria
which produces the Oil Production. These calculations have yet to consider the
unloading process.
2.10.1.2.3.2 Calculating the Valve Spacings
To perform the valve spacing, click Design.
For more information on the design calculations please refer to the Notes on Gas Lift
Design.
When Check Rate Conformance with IPR is set to Yes, PROSPER re-
calculates the solution rate and reduces the design rate if necessary. The final
design production and Gas Lift injection rates are displayed on the design
gradient plot.
2.10.1.2.3.3 Plotting the Gas Lift Design
To display the position of the unloading valves and the final design condition, click Plot.
A plot similar to the following will be displayed:
515
PROSPER
The plot shows the tubing and casing pressure gradients for the design rate plus the
position of the operating and unloading valves. For casing sensitive valves, the casing
pressure gradient shown is that of the final unloading stage (to reach the orifice) and
therefore the casing head pressure will be lower than the value entered in the previous
screen. The unloading fluid gradient is also plotted. The design data box lists the actual
production and injection rates together with the operating surface casing pressure.
2.10.1.2.3.4 Design Results
To display the valve details click Results and the table with the results will be displayed.
User Guide 516
Click on Calculate to calculate the Dome Pressure and the Test Rack Opening
Pressure (valve setting pressure at 60 C).
The valve depths, tubing pressure, unloading gas injection rate and trim sizes
are shown in the left screen panel.
The Dome pressure corresponds to the Dome Pressure at 60 deg F and not
at the valve operating temperature.
The test rack opening pressure is calculated using the relationship
Ptro = (Pd @ 60 deg F) / (1 R)
Where:
Ptro = Test Rack Opening Pressure
Pd @ 60 deg F = Dome Pressure at 60 deg F.
R = Ratio of Port Area to Bellow Area of Valve.
Valve types are identified as Valve for unloading valves or Orifice for the last
mandrel if the injection point is selected as orifice. No opening or dome
pressure calculations are made for the orifice.
The design parameters such as valve depth, opening and closing pressures, orifice size
517
PROSPER
etc. are displayed in the table. Use the scroll thumb below the table to scroll right to see
items e.g. R-value, not visible in the display window.
Design Sensitivity on Port size
By selecting Change Valve it is possible to re-calculate the parameters associated to
the valve sises.
If access to the Valve Clearing House database is available the Valve Performance
option can be used to validate the performance of each valve in the newly designed
system. More information can be found in the Gaslift Valve Performance Section.
Once a design has been carried out, a study of the gas lift system's stability can be
performed using the Stability option. This stability criteria is based upon 'Criteria for
Gas-Lift Stability' by Harald Asheim, SPE, U. of Trondheim (JPT November 1988).
This paper describes two explicit stability criteria. The first quantifies stabilisation as a
function of the inflow responses of the reservoir fluid and the injected gas. The second
quantifies stabilisation as a function of the depletion of the casing pressure.
User Guide 518
F1 should be reviewed first. If F1> 1, then F2 can be ignored as the predicted
well behaviour will be considered stable
If F1<1 then F2 must be reviewed and F2>1 for the well to be considered
stable
If both F1 and F2 <1 then the well is considered unstable
Inflow Response
If the reservoir fluid rate is more sensitive to pressure than the lift-gas rate, then the
average density of the mixture will increase in response to a decrease in tubing
pressure. This causes the tubing pressure to increase, which stabilises the flow. This
Criterion (F1) is calculated as
Size Port Injection
0.9) to equal (assumed Factor Efficency Orifice
Index ty Productivi
condtions standard at rate flow Liquid
conditions standard at rate flow gas - Lift
point injection at gas of FVF
condtions standard at density gas - Lift

where
1 *
2
2
1
i
Lsc
gsc
g
gsc
i Lsc
gsc g gsc
A
E
J
q
q
B
EA
J
q
q B
F
Pressure-Depletion Response
If the first criterion is not fulfilled, tubing pressure decrease will cause the injected gas
flow rate to increase more than the liquid flow rate. This will cause the tubing pressure to
decrease as well as the casing pressure. If the casing pressure decreases faster than
the tubing pressure, then the pressure difference between the casing and the tubing will
decrease and so will the injected gas rate. This stabilises the flow. This Criterion (F2) is
calculated as
519
PROSPER
Criterion Stability Response Inflow
point injection at rate flow gas - Lift
point injection at rate flow Liquid
point injection at density gas - Lift
point injection at density fluid Reservoir
Pressure Tubing
point injection depth to Vertical
gravity to due on Accelerati
volume Casing
point injection of downstream volume Tubing

where
1
) 1 (
) (
*
) (
*
1
*
1
1
2
F
q
q
P
D
g
V
V
F q
q q
P
gD V
V
F
gi
fi
gi
fi
t
c
t
fi
gi fi
gi fi
t
c
t
2.10.1.2.3.5 Transferring Design to Model
Once a design has been completed, its performance should be checked over the range
of expected well conditions. Before this can be done, it should be transferred to the
Equipment | Gas Lift section. Details of how to transfer a completed design into the
main model can be found in the Gas Lift Input Data section.
Once the design has been transferred, then use Calculation | System option to
compute sensitivities or, alternatively, Matching | Quicklook can be used to evaluate a
design.
2.10.1.3Existing Mandrels Design
This option enables the User to design gas lifted artificial lift systems for existing
installations.
To perform the fixed mandrel depth design, click Design | Gas lift | Existing
Mandrels. The following input screen will be displayed:
User Guide 520
This screen is similar to the Design | Gas lift | New well screen, except that the
variables relating to spacing the valves have been removed.
The following steps detail how to carry out a design when existing mandrels are in
place.
2.10.1.3.1 Setting Up the Design Problem
For more information on the majority of the input data please refer to the New Well
Design Section
For this design type options for the choice of the first valve can be selected:
First Valve Choice
Completion Fluid to
Surface
Unloading valves will be placed assuming that the
completion fluid fills up the entire well and thus must be
unloaded from the entire well.
This is the most conservative unloading requirement and is
the default option.
521
PROSPER
Completion Fluid
Level Calculated
PROSPER will estimate the standing liquid level from the
reservoir pressure and static pressure gradient. Any
mandrels above this depth will be set as 'Dummy valves'.
This approach can save valves for low pressure reservoirs.
However, the user must be certain that work over fluids can
leak off to balance the reservoir pressure.
Minimum Squeeze PI
Method (ELF)
This method can be used when the well productivity is
sufficient to ensure that completion fluids can be squeezed
into the formation during unloading. An unloading tubing
gradient is calculated by taking the static reservoir pressure
and increasing the injected GLR, until the gradient arrives at
the design top node pressure. Unloading valves are spaced
by comparing this tubing gradient with the available casing
pressure at depth.
This method can be used when the well productivity is
sufficient to ensure that completion fluids can be squeezed
into the formation during unloading.
2.10.1.3.2 Defining the Depths of Existing Mandrels
After setting up the input for the design parameters, next, click Mandrels.
This table is effectively a list of the potential valve depths and can be used to prepare
designs for new wells where equipment limitations determine the available mandrel
depths.
User Guide 522
Enter the depth of all mandrels in the well, including those fitted with dummy
valves.
PROSPER will select the best depths for the operating and unloading valves
from this list.
When more mandrels are available than needed for the current design,
PROSPER will automatically set dummies at the intermediate depths.
The valve type initially entered is unimportant.
PROSPER will overwrite the valve type when it performs the design.
If entries are made in the Casing Pressure drop or Max. Gas Injected fields
on the mandrel depth screen shown in the figure above, these values will
overwrite the values entered on the main design screen.
Leave these fields blank to design using the same values of pressure drop or
gas injection for each unloading valve.
The mandrel depths can be picked up from either Matching | QuickLook or
Equipment | Gas Lift using the Transfer button, or they can be entered by
523
PROSPER
hand. The usual PROSPER editing facilities are available for manipulating
the table entries.
Once the mandrels have been entered, select Done to return to the previous screen.
2.10.1.3.3 Gas Lift Valve Selection
Having entered the mandrel depths, select a valve series using the navigator window on
the right, as for the 'New Well Gas Lift Design' case. This will define the set / type of
valves that will be used for design.
2.10.1.3.4 Calculating the Design Rate
Click Next to access proceed to the gas lift design. First, the mandrels screen will
again be shown to ensure that the correct depths have been entered. The
If a calculated rate design method has been selected, a screen similar to the following
will be displayed:
User Guide 524
Click Get Rate, and the program will calculate the Gas Lift Performance Curve and
determine the optimum gas injection rate and production rate for the well given the
available injection gas rate and pressure limits. This performance curve can be plotted
by selecting Plot.
Once the calculation has been completed, the values at the top of the screen will now be
filled in:
525
PROSPER
The GLR Injected, Liquid Rate, Oil Rate, VLP Pressure and IPR Pressure all relate to
the final point calculated in the performance curve generation. By themselves they
contain little value to the user.
The 'Standard Deviation' is the standard deviation between the calculated points and
the fitted curve displayed on the plot.
The 'Design Rate' is the optimum injection rate based upon the design criteria which
produces the 'Oil Production'. These calculations have yet to consider the unloading
process.
2.10.1.3.5 Designing Gas Lift System (Existing Mandrels)
The design is performed for the target rate by clicking Design. Once the calculation
has finished, the design can be checked graphically by clicking the Plot button to
display a plot similar to the following:
User Guide 526
For details of the design process, please refer to Notes on Gas Lift Design.
2.10.1.3.6 Design Results
To display the valve setting calculations, click Results from the 'Design' screen. This
screen shows all of the values calculated during the design such as the tubing pressure/
casing pressure at each valve as well as the valve sizes which were selected. These
can be viewed by using the scroll bar at the bottom of the screen.
Click Calculate, and PROSPER will determine the dome pressures and test rack
setting pressure for the selected valves as in the following example:
Information on the Change Valve, Valve Performance and Stability options can be
found in the Gas Lift Design (New Well) section.
2.10.1.4Gas Lift Design Sensitivity
When carrying out a gas lift design for either a new or existing well, it is possible to do
these designs for a range of different sensitivity variable values.
To access the sensitivity screen, select the Sensitivity button on the main design
screens:
527
PROSPER
This will bring up the Gas Lift Design Sensitivity screen:
The Gas Lift Sensitivity screen allows variables to be changed to see the effect on the
gas lift design.
- The top left hand corner of the screen shows the different cases which have
been calculated. Selecting each one will show the corresponding results in the rest of
the screen.
- The top right of the screen shows the valve depths and properties of the design.
- The bottom left hand corner shows the calculated data used in the design.
- The plots at the bottom of the screen show the final design and also the
performance curve for the well.
Performing A Gas Lift Design Sensitivity
User Guide 528
To carry out a sensitivity calculation, first the variable which are to be changed can be
selected in the Cases screen.
To carry out a sensitivity on the Gas Lift design, the sensitivity variables which are being
altered need to be set.
529
PROSPER
performed.
Once these have been selected, a gas lift design can be carried out for each
permutation of variables by selecting Calculate.
The criteria entered on the previous Design Parameters screen will be used to carry out
the design of each case. If the design rate has been set to be calculated, then this will
come from the well performance curve which will be plotted in the bottom right hand
corner of the screen. The gas lift design plot (with mandrel depths and unloading
gradients) will be shown at the centre of the bottom section of the screen.
To see the plots in more detail, select Plot from the top ribbon.
For more details on the steps being performed in the design, please refer to the
Unloading with Gas Lift Section.
2.10.1.5Gas Lift Adjustments
The existing 'Gaslift Design' sections allow the user to select and size gas lift equipment
for specified design conditions. 'Gaslift Adjustments' provides additional calculations for
testing gas lift designs under operating conditions. Surface casing pressures when re-
starting production are presented in addition to input parameters needed for setting up
automatic well controllers.
To set up a 'Gaslift Adjustments' calculation, enter the following items:
User Guide 530
These are the required input data:
Downstream
Pressure Constraint
Surface pressure the well must flow against.
Kick off Casing Head
Pressure
Absolute maximum available casing injection pressure.
Lift Gas Network
Normal Pressure
Normal operating pressure of the gas injection system.
Safety Margin For Lift
Gas Control
This controls the pressure drop across the gas injection
choke.
Maximum CHP Under
Normal Operation
Injection pressure available downstream of the control choke.

Minimum CP
decrease to Close
Last Unloading Valve
Specified pressure drop to close deepest unloading valve.
Lift Gas Temperature Temperature of the injected gas at the casing head.
Target Liquid
Production Rate
Design production rate for gaslift adjustment calculations.
531
PROSPER
Water Cut Design water cut for gaslift adjustments calculations.
Production (Total)
GOR
Solution and free gas production (does not include injection
gas).
Vertical Flow
Correlation
Select appropriate multiphase correlation. Matched
correlations should be used where available.
Dome Pressure
Correction (above
1200 psig)
When Yes is selected, an improved dome pressure
correction is used. The API temperature correction is
recommended to be used below 1200 psi.
Once the input data entry is complete, the user has to make sure that the correspondent
valves are transferred. Select Valves and then Transfer to transfer the valve info from
the Gas Lift Design or from QuickLook:
Once the gaslift equipment details are entered the flowing gradient or static gradient
can be estimated:
Flowing
User Guide 532
Calculations are made for flowing conditions at the User-entered target production rate.
PROSPER calculates well performance curves for gas injection at each mandrel depth.
Production rates and pressures at surface and mandrel depth are determined.
Annulus volume and bottoms up times are also calculated. The flowing gradient for the
operating condition can be plotted with opening and closing pressures for each
unloading valve displayed.
The performance plot for each individual valve can be plotted by selecting the Plot
button on each row. Alternatively, all of the curves can be viewed on a single plot by
selecting Plot All:
533
PROSPER
Static
Calculations are made for shut-in conditions. The static tubing gradient is determined
using the liquid density calculated for the producing water cut. When the reservoir
pressure cannot support a full liquid column, a gas gradient is used back to surface.
User Guide 534
The static gradient plot can be viewed by selecting Plot:
The pseudo flowing gradient represents the gradient in the tubing during the unloading
535
PROSPER
process, and corresponds to the point when the FBHP just reduces below the reservoir
pressure. In other words, during the unloading process for a well that has been shut in,
there will be a point when the FBHP starts reducing below the reservoir pressure and
the reservoir starts providing fluid. The pseudo flowing gradient is the gradient in the
tubing at that time.
2.10.1.6Gaslift Valve Performance
The Valve Performance Clearinghouse (VPC) is a non-profit making organisation
formed by a consortium of major oil companies. Its objective is to become a repository
for the collection, analysis and distribution of gas lift valve performance data and
correlations to member companies and licensees. This information has been made
available to Petroleum Experts and a framework to utilise it is included in PROSPER in
the Gaslift Valve Performance section.
The database required to implement this feature is not distributed by Petroleum
Experts and must be obtained from the VPC.
This implementation consists of two parts
Database inspection and valve performance curve calculation and display
Gaslift Design and QuickLook integration
2.10.1.6.1 Valve Performance Clearinghouse (VPC)
The Valve Performance Clearinghouse (VPC) is a non-profit making organisation
formed by a consortium of major oil companies. Its objective to become a repository
for the collection, analysis, and distribution of gas lift valve performance data and
correlations to member companies and licensees. Tests are conducted at the
Southwest Research Institute compliant to the API 11V2 RP specification. Test data
and correlations are proprietary to member companies, and are licensed to non-
members for a fee on a per-valve basis.
This information has been made available to Petroleum Experts and a framework to
utilise is included in this version of PROSPER.
The database required to implement this feature will not be distributed with PROSPER
by Petroleum Experts and must be obtained from VPC.
The Valve Performance Clearinghouse is a service offered by Decker Technology. Its
objectives are
Establish an independent source for the collection, consolidation, and distribution
of valve performance data and correlations to members.
Perform tests on gaslift valves selected by the members using the API 11V2 RP
Develop correlations using the Decker Technology proprietary method to predict
User Guide 536
gas passage for any pressure and temperature conditions with an accuracy of
better than +/-20%.
Provide a Valve Performance Reference manual containing performance data and
correlations for all valves tested by the VPC.
Decker Technology, Inc.
2238 McCurdy Road
Stone Mountain, GA 30087
Phone: 770-496-9680
Fax: 770-496-9681
E-mail: decktech@bellsouth.net
2.10.1.7Notes on Gas Lift Design
The following section is intended to give a back ground on the theory used during a gas
lift design.
2.10.1.7.1 Gas Lift Performance Curve
Gas lift is an artificial lift method which involves injecting gas at a given depth to lighten
the fluid column and reduce the bottom-hole pressure in order to increase oil production.
The reduction in the pressure results in an increase in the velocity of the fluid which
increases the pressure drop due to friction in the well. There is therefore a compromise
between the amount of gas injected and the optimum oil production as when too much
gas is injected the pressure drop due to friction becomes dominant and starts to impact
negatively on the oil production. This is represented by a performance curve which
provides the design rate used to construct the objective gradient along with the optimum
gas injection:
In PROSPER the performance curve is generated when the Get Rate option is selected
and the optimum oil rate/gas injection rate is calculated. The resultant performance
curve can be viewed by selecting plot:
537
PROSPER
Each point on the curve has a different maximum depth of injection associated with it
based on the gas rate. The objective of any gas lift design is to inject as deep as
possible. How deep injection can occur depends on the injection/casing pressure and
the gas available e.g. If the pressure is too low then there will not be enough energy to
inject the gas from the casing into the tubing and also if there is not enough gas then it
will not lighten the fluid column enough to lower the bottom-hole pressure so that fluid
can flow in from the reservoir.
To reproduce this manually in PROSPER modify the gas lift data to optimum depth of
injection and use the same input data as in the gas lift design input:
User Guide 538
Perform a system calculation with different gas injection rates and the results will show
an optimum depth of injection with each rate.
To generate the performance curve go to sensitivity and plot the Oil Rate vs. Gas
Injection Rate.
539
PROSPER
2.10.1.7.2 Unloading with Gas Lift
The following question then arises; is it physically possible to inject the gas at the
optimum injection depth? The deeper one goes then the higher the pressure that is
required for injection. For example the pressure at 8000ft with a kill fluid gradient of
0.45psig/ft is 3760psig. The pressure required at surface will be approaching the
structural limits of the casing and also the compressor outlet may not be able to reach
such high pressures.
This then introduces the concept of unloading. The objective remains the same (to inject
as deep as possible) but to reduce the amount of surface pressure required. This is
done by spacing valves down the well and triggering the shallower valves to close so
that the gas can be passed to the deeper valves.
Consider first a single valve located at a specified depth:
As the gas is injected through the valve, the original static fluid gradient line will change
as the gas fills the column and the well begins to flow again. Eventually the well will
stabilise to a rate which will be lower than the design rate.
Below the valve the original static fluid gradient in reality no longer applies as the well is
now flowing so there will be a slight pressure drop due to friction. Also, the effect of the
gas injected changes the distribution of pressure along the well which changes the
amount of solution gas evolving from the oil. The reality is that the column below the
valve will be lighter and therefore should be represented with a lower gradient.

All the spacing methods use the original static gradient to determine the location of the
subsequent valve including PROSPER. Depending on the spacing method or whether or
not the valves are casing or tubing sensitive determines how the static gradient line is
projected to find the valve depths.
User Guide 540
The advantages/disadvantages change with each method however most will
compensate in one way or another so that they conservatively select a valve depth that
will work.
2.10.1.7.2.1 Spacing Procedure for Casing Sensitive Valves in PROSPER
With casing sensitive valves the casing pressure has to be reduced in order to close the
valves and this is incorporated into the spacing method. To find the valve depth the
static fluid line is projected from the objective gradient until it intersects the
corresponding casing pressure curve.
There is an input that enables the user to specify the reduction in the casing pressure to
close the valve. This is typically around 50psig.
541
PROSPER
2.10.1.7.2.2 Spacing Procedure for Tubing Sensitive Valves in PROSPER
One of the advantages of tubing sensitive valves is that the casing pressure does not
need to be lowered and hence the valve spacing method uses a fixed casing pressure
gradient throughout. The transfer pressure line is defined by projecting a line between
the pressure at 0 depth given by the formula %(P
c
-WHP)+WHP to the pressure at the
maximum depth of injection on the objective gradient (where the objective gradient and
the Casing gradient intersect). The percentage chosen is a user input.
2.10.1.7.2.3 Valves
The next thing which has to be considered is the valve design and how this allows the
gas to be transferred to the deeper valve. A schematic diagram of a Casing Sensitive
Valve is shown below:
User Guide 542
From a force-balance the following expression can be derived:
The design consists of a charged dome, typically filled with pressured gas, which will
provide the energy to close the valve once the tubing pressure reduces. Nitrogen is
generally used as the properties will not change with time and it will not be subject to
fatigue effects that would have to be considered if for example a spring was used as a
replacement.
This particular design is a casing sensitive design due to the small ratio of the port area
to the bellow area, R. Reducing the area that the tubing pressure acts over minimises
the force due to the tubing pressure. By varying the R values it is possible to control
how the valve will respond to the tubing/casing pressure. A large R value is
synonymous with a tubing sensitive valve design.
The expression for the casing pressure at which the valve will close is given by the
formula:
543
PROSPER
The user can specify the closing pressure to equal the casing pressure at depth within
PROSPER.
This method as can be used to ensure the maximum injection depth. Once the dome
pressure is known then it is possible to calculate the opening pressure from:
The R value or the port size is chosen based on how much gas the valve will need to
pass. How this is chosen is explained further on but the gas rate for the individual
valves can be viewed in the design results window.
2.10.1.7.2.4 Unloading with Valves
Consider the valve when it is open due to the high casing pressure which is applying a
large enough delta P across the valve to inject gas. As the gas is injected and the static
fluid column lightens the tubing pressure will reduce. At this stage unless the casing
pressure is lowered there is no way to close the valve and increase the injection depth:
User Guide 544
To increase the injection depth by allowing gas to be injected through the next valve the
dome pressure is calibrated so that the top valve gradually closes as the lower valve
gradually opens. The pressure at which the tubing gradient allows injection into the next
valve is termed the transfer pressure.
The Pressure vs. Depth plot shows conceptually how the casing pressure must be
reduced so that the valves will close. The arrows indicate the opening/closing
pressures and the same convention is applied in PROSPER.
545
PROSPER
This is a critical feature of casing sensitive valves. The casing pressure must be
reduced in order to go deeper however reducing the casing pressure will reduce the
maximum depth of injection. This not the case for tubing sensitive valves as the design
is such that the valve will close due to the reduction in the tubing pressure and for this
reason they may be preferred over casing sensitive valves as it is possible to inject
deeper. However there is a lot less control over the tubing pressure which introduces a
lot more uncertainty into the design.
2.10.1.7.2.5 Sizing the Valves
A few points should be noted regarding the size of the trim (valve). The spread (which is
the difference between the opening and closing pressure) is given by the formula:
Where is known as the tubing effect factor (TEF).
The TEF increases significantly with port size and therefore increases the spread also:
The greater the spread the more the gas can flow however this can result in instabilities
during the unloading process. Also a larger spread requires a greater reduction in
valuable casing pressure.
User Guide 546
The port size needs to be small enough so that critical flow is reached and changes in
tubing pressure do not effect the gas rate flowing through the valve but also should be
large enough to pass the right amount of gas so that the column is lightened.
So the port size is in fact an optimisation problem. To calculate the port size requires
the flow rate performance curves of the valves which display how much gas can be
passed through the valve at a corresponding tubing pressure. This can be expressed
more generally as,
Where,
In the original API method the gas rate through the valve was found by determining GLR
required to lower the static gradient to a predefined transfer pressure which is input into
the PROSPER window as shown below:
547
PROSPER
In the original method this was based on the design rate as it was done by hand as the
VLPs would have to be completely re-generated if it was based on the actual rate that
would be flowing through the well if a valve was injecting gas into it. This meant the gas
rate was over-estimated and too large a port size was calculated. To compensate for
this the transfer pressure was introduced so that a lower port size would be chosen.
The idea is simply to correct the delta P across the valve so that the magnitude of the
valve diameter that is calculated is reduced.
This correction is done via the transfer pressure.
User Guide 548
This new, adjusted dP is used to calculate the port size using the equation below:
Where,

549
PROSPER
2.10.1.7.2.6 Use IPR for Unloading
The transfer pressure is not used when the Use IPR for Unloading is activated which is
the method developed by PETEX. The in house method calculates the gas rate based
on the actual rate that would occur ensuring that the valve is not oversized.

With the Use IPR for Unloading method the gas injection rate at the valve is optimised
to find the minimum tubing pressure taking into account the actual flow rate in the well
which is given by the VLP/IPR intersection. The optimised gas injection rate along with
the minimum tubing pressure is then used to determine the port size.
This can be done manually by specifying a fixed depth of injection (at the depth
corresponding to the valve) and carrying out a sensitivity on gas rate using the SYSTEM
calculation.
The gradient that corresponds to each gas lift rate can be reproduced by selecting the
Sensitivity PvD option.
The tubing pressure can then be read off at the corresponding valve depth.
The performance plot is built by plotting the tubing pressure (at the valve depth) against
the corresponding gas injection. The gas rate that gives the minimum tubing pressure
is the gas rate that is then used to size the valve.
User Guide 550
2.10.1.7.2.7 Check Rate Conformance with IPR
The final feature within PROSPER is the 'check rate conformance with IPR'. When the
maximum depth of injection of the design is determined and it differs from the initial
estimate of maximum depth of injection then the bottom-hole pressures will be different
and therefore the rates cannot be the same. This will change the shape of the gradient
curve:
551
PROSPER
PROSPER then recalculates the maximum rate for the new depth of injection and redoes
the whole design based on a new objective gradient. This process is then repeated
until the difference in the injection depths is minimised.
2.10.1.7.3 Proportional Valves
Merla proportional valves are a hybrid of tubing- and casing- sensitive characteristics.
User Guide 552
Some points to note about proportional valves are:
a) The dome is not charged with any gas. As such dome pressure is 0 psig.
553
PROSPER
b) The closing pressure for the valve is provided by a spring which is set to apply a
certain compression force.
c) The valve stem has a tapered end which fits into the tapered end of the port.
d) As such even when the valve is in the open position, the tubing pressure will have
an influence on the opening or closing of the valve.
Advantages of a Proportional Response Valve:
a) Since there is no gas charge, the valve is unaffected by well temperature. As
such the design of these valves becomes simpler. Errors due to inconsistent
flowing temperature are also eliminated.
b) The valves proportional response to production pressure fluctuations makes it
automatically maintain tubing pressure gradient and the right gas injection rate.
In the database of PROSPER for a Proportional Valve, a number of parameters are
required. The following describes these various parameters
a) Fe: this represents the dynamic value of the Av / Ab ratio (Av = Valve Port Area
User Guide 554
& Ab = Bellow Area), which is calculated from experimental data by solving the
valve opening / closing pressure equations. The parameter Fe corresponds to
the term R for a Casing Sensitive Valve.
b) SMALL, MEDIUM, LARGE: there are three configurations for the same valve.
For each configuration a value of Fe and the slope of K and M are defined
c) Pcf: this corresponds to the Injection Pressure i.e. the Gas pressure in the casing
annulus.
d) Pvc: this corresponds to the Spring Adjustment Pressure
e) K: this is a correction parameter that is used to quantify the maximum possible
rate that can be injected through the valve.
f) M: represents the slope of throttling line. (The throttling line represents the rate
that can be injected through the valve for reducing values of tubing pressure for a
constant Injection pressure)
Further information about these various parameters can be found in Gas Lift Manual
by Gabor Takacs. (PennWell Corp).
2.10.2 Electrical Submersible Pump Design
If a ESP lifted system is to be designed, the Design | Electrical Submersible Pump
menu should be selected. The following section details the steps a user should take to
complete the design.
Designing an ESP installation using PROSPER is divided into three phases:
1. Input Data
Enter the design criteria and conditions which are to be considered.
2. Calculate
The head and power requirements are found by using a gradient calculation.
3. Design
This is where, on the basis of the calculations, the equipment is selected.
The following description assumes that input of the well details and PVT data have
already been correctly completed and that where applicable, pressure drop correlations
have been matched to field data.
ESP data entered in System Electrical Submersible Pumps is not utilised by the
ESP design section and will be overwritten by the design.
555
PROSPER
2.10.2.1ESP Design Parameters
In the main ESP Design screen the design parameters can be entered:
The input parameters are very similar to those from the ESP Input Data screen.
2.10.2.2ESP Calculate
Once the design parameters have been entered, select Calculate to enter the
calculation screen:
User Guide 556
This section determines the head required to be supplied by the pump to achieve a
specified production rate. This is found by carrying out the following steps:
PROSPER uses the IPR from System | Inflow Performance to calculate the
flowing pressure at the sand face from the design rate.
The specified VLP correlation is then used to find the pump intake pressure for
Based upon the pump inlet conditions, the percentage of gas specified will be
separated from the produced stream.
The program then works down from the specified top node pressure to arrive at
the required pump discharge pressure using the fluid properties calculated after
the gas separation.
The difference between the intake and discharge pressures represents the
required pump head.
PROSPER compresses the liquid and gas as the pressure increases across the
pump, so the volumetric rate will be less at the discharge than at the pump inlet.
The mass flow rate and the required head are used to determine the pump fluid
power requirement.
557
PROSPER
This process is shown in the diagram below:
Select Calculate to carry out this calculation and see the results of the gradient
traverses.
If Emulsions have been selected on the Options screen, viscosity corrections
are applied to pump capacity and head. Otherwise, no ESP viscosity
corrections will be applied.
If an inlet gas separator is to be used, enter the separator efficiency before
carrying out the calculation. The program allows the percentage of free gas set
by the separator efficiency to be produced up the annulus, and the remainder to
be compressed through the pump. Hence, the PVT properties of the well fluids
can be different below and above the pump.
For wells where the ESP pump is landed high up in the well it is possible that
the fluid can not reach the pump intake. For such cases, PROSPER will report a
pump intake pressure (PIP) of 10 psi. Therefore the user should be cautious
when the calculated PIP = 10 psi as this indicates that the fluid can not reach
the pump intake and the design can not be completed.
User Guide 558
2.10.2.2.1 Checking Suitability of Separator Efficiency
Once the ESP calculation has been completed, the separator efficiency chosen in the
input can be check against the Dunbar Criterion to ensure it is acceptable.
To view the Dunbar plot, select Sensitivity on the calculation screen:
This displays a plot of the 'Intake Pressure' against the 'Intake GLR' for a range of
different gas separator efficiency curves. Check that the design operating point lies
above the empirical limit represented by the Dunbar Factor line.
The reference for the Dunbar plot is:
Dunbar C E, 'Determination of Proper Type of Gas Separator', Microcomputer
Applications in Artificial Lift Workshop, SPE Los Angeles Basin Section, October 1989.
2.10.2.3ESP Design (Pump, Motor and Cable Selection)
Having determined the required pump duty and ensured that the separator efficiency is
acceptable, click on Done to go back to the ESP Design Parameters.
The next step is to select the pump, motor and cable capable of providing the calculated
duty at the given conditions.
Select Design in the ESP Design Parameters screen to bring up the below screen:
559
PROSPER
Select Pump
PROSPER lists pumps that can meet the following criteria:
The inlet rate calculated by PROSPER falls within the range of the performance
curves
The discharge rate calculated by PROSPER falls within the range of the
performance curves
Pump outer diameter is less than the maximum pump O.D. specified in the
design parameters screen.
Pump outer diameter is less than the casing inner diameter.
The user must select a pump from those listed. The suitability of the selected pump can
be reviewed by selecting Plot to see where the design operating point falls on the pump
performance curve. More information on this plot can be found in the Checking the
Pump Design Section.
Please note, it is the users responsibility to ensure that the pump selected is
representative of the information provided by the manufacturer.
User Guide 560
Select Motor
Once a pump has been selected, the pump efficiency and required power are known;
the motor power requirement can now be calculated.
Proceed to the motor drop-down box and select a motor from those listed.
PROSPER lists pumps and motors on the basis of diameter and performance
characteristics. It is the users responsibility to ensure that the motor selected is
physically compatible with the pump and that the most economical
combination of operating voltage and current is chosen.
Select Cable
Once the motor power and voltage option have been determined, a suitable cable must
be selected.
PROSPER displays those cables capable of passing the required current.
2.10.2.3.1 Checking the Pump Design
Click Plot to display the design operating point on the pump performance curve as
shown below:
561
PROSPER
Normally, the first pass design will have an operating point fairly close to the
selected pump's optimum efficiency. However, as well conditions change with
time, this may not be the best design for the life of the installation
Different combinations of pump and motor can be quickly experimented with in
the ESP design section until an optimum design is obtained.
A report can be generated which gives details of the pump selection and design
conditions
The robustness of the first pass design must then be checked over the range of
expected well operating conditions by running System sensitivities in the
Calculation | System (VLP+IPR) menu.
PROSPER allows sensitivities to be run on both well performance and pump
parameters such as pump setting depth and operating frequency
The ESP system design process is completed by iterating between the Calculation
and Design sections until the final design is optimised over the projected pump run life.
Viscosity corrections, if enabled, will be considered in choice of available pumps and
the number of stages required.
2.10.3 Hydraulic Pump Design
If a HSP lifted system is to be designed, the Design | Hydraulic Submersible Pump
Designing an HSP installation using PROSPER is divided into three phases:
1. Input Data
2. Calculate
The head and power requirements are found by using a gradient calculation.
3. Design
This is where, on the basis of the calculations, the equipment is selected.
HSP data entered in System Hydraulic Submersible Pumps is not utilised by the
HSP design section and will be overwritten by the design.
2.10.3.1HSP Design Parameters
In the main HSP Design screen the design parameters can be entered:
User Guide 562
The input parameters are discussed below:
Pump Depth
(Measured)
Gas Lift injection pressure at the casing head.
Pump Maximum
Allowable OD
The maximum diameter of the pump. This will be used to
filter out pumps which can be selected for use in the design.
Turbine Maximum
Allowable OD
The maximum diameter of the turbine. This will be used to
filter out turbines which can be selected for use in the design.
Design (Liquid) Rate The liquid rate to be used in the design.
Water Cut Water cut of the produced well stream.
Top Node Pressure Pressure at the well head.
Pump Speed Enter the design speed of the pump.
Total GOR Enter the total GOR being produced.
% Power Fluid of
Reservoir Fluid
This factor represents the ratio (in %) between the power
fluid and the produced reservoir fluid. A value of 100%
means that the rate of power fluid is equal to the rate of
produced reservoir fluid.
This is used in the 'Calculate' section of the design as the
true power fluid rate can only be known once the pump and
turbine have been selected.
563
PROSPER
Pipe Correlation Select the multiphase flow correlation to be used when the
fluid is in the surface equipment. If no surface equipment has
been entered, this correlation will not be used.
Tubing Correlation Select the multiphase flow correlation to be used when the
fluid is in the down hole equipment.
2.10.3.2HSP Calculate
calculation screen:
User Guide 564
specified production rate. This is found by carrying out the following steps:
PROSPER uses the IPR from System | Inflow Performance to calculate the
flowing pressure at the sand face from the design rate.
The specified VLP correlation is then used to find the pump intake pressure for
The program then works down from the specified top node pressure to arrive at
the required pump discharge pressure. If the power fluid is commingled with the
production fluid, the % Power Fluid of Reservoir Fluid input is used to add
power fluid. This new commingled fluid is used to calculate the pressure drop
from the wellhead down to the pump discharge.
The difference between the intake and discharge pressures represents the
required pump head.
pump, so the volumetric rate will be less at the discharge than at the pump inlet.
The mass flow rate and the required head are used to determine the pump fluid
power requirement.
traverses.
For certain configurations, the produced and power fluids can be commingled above
the pump. Hence, the PVT properties of the well fluids can be different below and above
the pump.
If Emulsions have been selected on the Options screen, viscosity corrections are
applied to pump capacity and head. Otherwise, no HSP viscosity corrections will be
applied.
2.10.3.3HSP Design (Pump and Turbine Selection)
Having determined the required pump duty and ensured that the separator efficiency is
acceptable, click on Done to go back to the HSP 'Design Parameters'.
The next step is to select the pump, motor and cable capable of providing the calculated
duty at the given conditions.
Select Design in the HSP design parameters screen to bring up the below screen:
565
PROSPER
In the select drop-down boxes, PROSPER lists the equipment in its database that is
capable of meeting the design requirements.
Select Pump
PROSPER presents pumps that can meet the following criteria:
The entered pump speed is within the range of the performance curves
The discharge rate is within the range of the performance curves
Pump outer diameter is less than the maximum outer diameter set by the user in
the design parameters screen.
The user must select a pump from those listed.
Please note, it is the users responsibility to ensure that the pump selected is
consistent with the information provided by the manufacturer
Select Turbine
Once a pump has been selected, the power required to be provided by the turbine is
known. When a turbine is selected, the number of stages required can be calculated.
This is done by dividing the total power required by the power provided per stage on the
performance curve. The flow rate passing through the turbine (and therefore the rate
User Guide 566
used in the performance curve) is taken from the design rate and the % Power Fluid of
Reservoir fluid defined in the 'Design Parameter' screen.
Proceed to the turbine drop down box and select a turbine from those listed.
PROSPER lists pumps and turbines on the basis of diameter and performance
characteristics. It is the users responsibility to ensure that the turbine selected is
physically compatible with the pump.
2.10.3.3.1 Checking the Pump/Turbine Design
Click Pump Plot or Turbine Plot to display the design operating point on the
performance curve as shown below:
567
PROSPER
The robustness of the first pass design must then be checked over the range of
expected well operating conditions by running sensitivities in the Calculation | System
(VLP+IPR) menu.
To access the system calculation from the design screen, select the System button
within the HSP design parameters screen.
The HSP system design process is completed by iterating between the Calculation
and Design sections, until the final design is optimised over the projected pump run life.
Viscosity corrections, when activated, will be considered in choice of available pumps
and the number of stages required.
2.10.4 Progressive Cavity Pump Design
If a PCP lifted system is to be designed, the Design | Progressive Cavity Pump
Although the PCP is a positive displacement pump, the design process follows the
same steps as an ESP or HSP design. The major difference is that the pump speed
controls the rate which can be produced and so this is calculated during the design
rather than being entered as a design parameter. The head required is then used as a
selection criterion to ensure that it does not exceed the maximum head of the selected
pump which is provided by the manufacturer.
Designing an PCP installation using PROSPER is divided into three phases:
User Guide 568
1. Input Data
2. Calculate
A gradient calculation is performed to calculate the inlet and outlet conditions
required to meet the design. From these results, the conditions within the pump
can also be calculated.
3. Design
Based upon the conditions found by the calculations, the equipment is selected by
the user.
PCP data entered in System Progressive Cavity Pumps is not utilised by the PCP
design section and will be overwritten by the design.
2.10.4.1PCP Design Parameters
Select Design | Progressive Cavity Pumps to display the PCP Design screen:
The input parameters are discussed below:
Pump Depth This is the measured depth at which the pump is located.
569
PROSPER
(Measured)
Maximum OD The maximum diameter of the pump. This will be used to
filter out pumps which can be selected for use in the design.
Gas Separator
Efficiency
This is the percent of free gas at the pump inlet which is
separated and so does not pass through the pump.
Design Rate The liquid rate to be used in the design.
Water Cut Water cut of the produced well stream.
Top Node Pressure Pressure at the well head.
Total Rod Length If the PCP drive method is selected to be 'Sucker Rod', the
rod length must be entered.
Cable Length If the PCP drive method is selected to be 'Down-hole Motor',
the length of the cable must be inserted. This is used in the
voltage drop calculations.
Voltage @ Surface If the PCP drive method is selected to be 'Down-hole Motor',
the available voltage at surface should be entered.
Motor Power Safety
Margin
If the PCP drive method is selected to be 'Down-hole Motor',
this is the safety margin used when selecting a motor.
For example, if a pump requires 500 hp and the Safety
Margin has been entered as 10%, then only motors which
can provide 550 hp will be listed. Entering '0%' means that
only the required power needs to be provided.
Pipe Correlation Select the multiphase flow correlation to be used when the
fluid is in the surface equipment. If no surface equipment has
been entered, this correlation will not be used.
Tubing Correlation Select the multiphase flow correlation to be used when the
fluid is in the down hole equipment.
2.10.4.2PCP Calculate
calculation screen:
User Guide 570
This section determines the volumetric rate which will pass through the pump to achieve
a specified production rate and also the subsequent head which will be deliver to the
fluid. This is found by carrying out the following steps:
PROSPER uses the IPR from System | Inflow Performance to calculate the flowing
pressure at the sand face from the design rate.
The specified VLP correlation is then used to find the pump intake pressure for the
design production rate.
Based upon the pump inlet conditions, the percentage of gas specified will be
separated from the produced stream.
The program then works down from the specified top node pressure to arrive at the
required pump discharge pressure using the fluid properties calculated after the gas
separation.
The difference between the intake and discharge pressures represents the required
pump head. This is used as a limit when selecting the pump.
pump, so the volumetric rate will be less at the discharge than at the pump inlet. These
in-situ volumetric rates will later be used to calculate the speed required for the pump.
571
PROSPER
traverses.
Clicking Done will result the user to the Design Parameters screen.
Emulsions
If Emulsions have been selected on the Options screen, viscosity corrections
are applied to pump capacity and head. Otherwise, no HSP viscosity
corrections will be applied.
2.10.4.3PCP Design (Sucker Rod Drive)
Depending on the drive method selected in the Options | Options screen, the user will
select a PCP and either a sucker rod or down-hole motor. Below details the steps
required when Sucker Rod Drive has been selected.
Having calculated the average down-hole rate through then pump and the head
required, select Design on the design parameters screen to select the appropriate
equipment:
In the select drop-down boxes, PROSPER lists the equipment in its database that is
User Guide 572
It is important to ensure that any pump selected has a maximum head value which is
higher than the head required calculated by the design.
When the pump has been selected, the required pump speed will be calculated which
will allow the calculated down-hole rate to be produced.
In order to calculate the dynamic loading, a Sucker Rod must also be selected. The
stresses, stretches and torques for the selected rod at the design conditions are then
displayed.
characteristics. It is the users responsibility to ensure that the pump selected is
consistent with the information provided by the manufacturer and to ensure
that the rod selected is physically compatible with the pump.
Select Done and then Done on the Design Parameters screen to exit to the main
screen. When the design has been completed, the newly selected pump and sucker rod
will automatically be transferred to the System | Progressive Cavity Pump screen.
This setup will then be part of the model and will be used in any subsequent calculations.
As seen for ESP and HSP installations, the PCP design should be checked by
performing sensitivities in system calculation, in order to verify the design against the
expected change of conditions along the life of the well. This can be carried out in the
Calculation | System (IPR+VLP) screen and more information on this calculation can
be found in the System Calculation Section.
2.10.4.4PCP Design (Down-hole Motor)
Depending on the drive method selected in the Options | Options screen, the user will
select a PCP and either a sucker rod or down-hole motor. Below details the steps
required when down-hole motor has been selected.
Having calculated the average down-hole rate through then pump and the head
required, select Design on the design parameters screen to select the appropriate
equipment:
573
PROSPER
In the 'Select' drop-down boxes, PROSPER lists the equipment in its database that is
It is important to ensure that any pump selected has a maximum head value which is
higher than the head required calculated by the design.
When the pump has been selected, the required pump speed will be calculated which
will allow the calculated down-hole rate to be produced.
The next step is to select a motor which can meet the power requirements of the pump.
If a motor power safety margin has been entered, the power which is required to be
generated by the motor will be greater than the power required by the pump.
Finally, the cable should be selected from the drop down list. The cable defines the
voltage drop in the cable which is used to define the required surface voltage.
characteristics. It is the users responsibility to ensure that the pump selected is
consistent with the information provided by the manufacturer. It is also the
users responsibility to ensure that the motor selected is physically compatible
with the pump and that the most economical combination of operating voltage
User Guide 574
and current is chosen.
Select Done and then Done on the Design Parameters screen to exit to the main
screen. When the design has been completed, the newly selected pump, motor and
cable will automatically be transferred to the System | Progressive Cavity Pump
screen. This setup will then be part of the model and will be used in any subsequent
calculations.
As seen for ESP and HSP installations, the PCP design should be checked by
performing sensitivities in System Calculation, in order to verify the design against the
expected change of conditions along the life of the well. This can be carried out in the
Calculation | System (IPR+VLP) screen and more information on this calculation can
be found in the System Calculation Section.
2.10.5 Coiled Tubing GasLift Design
The gas lift design can be used to design and optimise the design of Coiled Tubing gas
lifted wells. The initial and maximum depths of injection for a given set of design
conditions can be found.
The Design Coiled Tubing Gas Lift section allows the user to perform a design of
gas lift using coiled tubing.
2.10.5.1Coiled Tubing Design Parameters
Once the gas lift gas has been defined, select Design Coiled Tubing GasLift to
display the following screen:
The input data and the options to enter in this screen are exactly the same as for the
normal gas lift design (design for a User Entered Rate, or for Maximum Production, etc).
575
PROSPER
Please refer to the Gas Lift Design section for a detailed explanation.
2.10.5.2Coiled Tubing Design Rate
Once the design parameters have been entered, select Continue to show the Design
screen:
Before the design is carried out, the optimum injection rate must be found. This is done
by calculating the oil rate which will be produced when different gas injection rates are
used to form a injection performance curve. This can be calculated by selecting Get
Rate:
User Guide 576
On the design screen, the values at the top of the screen will now be filled in:
The GLR Injected, Liquid Rate, Oil Rate, VLP Pressure and IPR Pressure all relate to
the final point calculated in the performance curve generation. By themselves they contain
little value to the user.
The Standard Deviation is the standard deviation between the calculated points and the
fitted curve displayed on the plot.
The Design Rate is the optimum injection rate based upon the design criteria which
produces the Oil Production. These calculations have yet to consider the unloading process.
2.10.5.3Coiled Tubing Design
Once the design rate has been found, select Design to calculate the initial depth of
injection, maximum depth of injection, design injection rate and design oil rate.
To visualise this calculation select Plot:
577
PROSPER
The design screen also shows the results of the design at the bottom:
Once the design has been carried out, the resultant depth of injection can be manually
transferred to the System | Coiled Tubing Gas Lift section.
2.10.6 Intermittent Gas Lift
If a Intermittent gas lifted system is to be designed, the Design | Intermittent Gas Lift
2.10.6.1Intermittent Gas Lift Theory
Intermittent gas lift may be considered for wells at low reservoir pressure or wells with
high pressures but low productivity.
User Guide 578
The method is transient and complex. Today, the various approaches still rely on
approximations and rules of thumb.
It is also suitable for wells with relatively high formation pressure but low productivity.
Method of Operation
Lift gas is periodically injected into the well at a depth close to the perforations. This gas
is used to displace the column of liquid that accumulated while the gas lift valve was
closed. If the correct amount of gas is injected, the liquid slug of oil is lifted to the well
head and into the surface flow line. Efficient operation occurs when the slug arrives at
the surface intact, in advance of gas bubble breakthrough.
Basic Operation of 1 cycle
A. Operating Valve is closed formation fluids are accumulating above it. Casing &
tubing pressures at depth increase until desired slug length has accumulated.
B. Lift gas is injected at a high instantaneous rate, creating a large gas bubble.
C. This gas bubble lifts the slug to surface
D. After the slug enters the flow line, high pressure gas produces entrained liquid
droplets until pressure falls to separator pressure; the operating valve closes; the
standing valve re-opens and the cycle commences again.
579
PROSPER
The Intermittent cycle
Accumulation period starts as soon as the standing valve opens and allows wells
fluids to accumulate in the well adding to the slug remaining from the previous cycle of
fluid that did not reach surface
Injection-lifting period starts as soon as the gas lift valve opens and gas enters
the well and lasts until the slug has completely entered the flowline
After flow period when the slug leaves the wellhead, the well contains high
pressure gas column with entrained liquid droplets and the high velocity gas also lifts
part of the liquid film wetting the tubing inside wall thus adding to the amount of well
fluid produced. This period ends when the decreasing gas pressure allows the
standing valve to re-open and the accumulation period commences again.
During the whole of the lifting period, the slug length is reduced by liquid fallback and
gas breakthrough.
Since the lifting of liquid slugs in intermittent gas lift is a transient process accurate
analytical solutions do not exist. The approaches used require some assumptions.
Daily Production = Production per cycle * no. of cycles per day
Slug length is user-determined, but one should consider that a long slug requires a long
production time and fewer cycles per day, whereas a shorter slug length allows more
cycles per day. This relationship is not necessarily linear. In practise, it has been found
that maximum daily production is obtained when a starting slug length equal to 40-50%
of the static liquid column is used.
Liquid FallBack
This needs to be determined in order to be able to design an accurate Intermittent Gas
Lift installation. Empirical studies of liquid slug and gas bubble velocity (e.g. White et al
JPT 1963) showed that gas velocity was fairly constant whereas slug velocity varies with
the ratio of injection and production pressures but reaches an essentially constant value
very rapidly. Liquid fallback is minimised if slug velocity is maximised.
Liquid Fallback is determined by
b
s
V
V
D
FB
1
Bubble velocity is assumed constant and slug velocity is determined by solving
simultaneously, the flow rate through an orifice and the equation of the forces acting on a
liquid slug in motion up the tubing.
User Guide 580
Valve Spacing
In order to use normal gas lift pressure, it is usually necessary to design a valve
unloading string to allow the stepwise transfer of the injection point from the surface
down to the operating valve
Constant surface closing pressure commonly used for single-point injection
systems assumes a constant surface closing pressure for all valves in the unloading
valve string
Optiflow design procedure is suited for wells with poor information on well
potential. Assuming that the operating point as well as the production rate are unknown
this permits injection of gas at the deepest possible point at all times. This is done by
moving the operating point down the well such that the inflow is sufficient to prevent
operation of the next lower valve. Assumes 50% of the lift gas pressure at depth as the
tubing pressure at each valve depth.
2.10.6.2Design Parameters
Selecting Design | Intermittent Gas Lift will bring up the design input data screen:
581
PROSPER
The input data consists of the following fields:
Surface Injection
Pressure
Pressure of the gas lift gas at the top of the casing.
Injection Depth The depth at which the gas lift gas is being injected.
Gaslift Gas Gravity Enter the gas gravity of the injected gas.
Wellhead Pressure Enter the wellhead pressure for the design.
Valve Port size The diameter of the injection port should be entered.
Water Cut Enter the water cut of the well.
Tubing Liquid Level Enter the liquid level in the well.
User Guide 582
The flowing conditions of the well can be calculated by selecting Calculate. The results
of this calculation will be shown in the 'Results' section at the bottom of the screen.
It is also possible to find the estimated valve depths using on of the following options:
- the constant surface closure method and the
- the optiflow design procedure.
Please refers to "Gas Lift Manual" by Gabor Takacs, for more details about the theory
behind both options.
2.10.6.3Valves
To carry out the valve depth calculations select Valves.
When selected the option of 'Constant Surface Closing Pressure' and 'Optiflow Design
Procedure' is given:
Select the method which is to be used.
Constant Surface Closing Pressure
583
PROSPER
Enter the design data in the 'Input Data' section and then select Calculate to find the
valve depths.
The 'Spacing Factor' indicates the slope of the green line on the plot, which represents
the pressure gradient in the tubing string. This is the minimum tubing pressures during
the production cycle. The spacing factor is a function of the wells production rate and
tubing size and can be obtained from figure 6.25 of 'Gas Lift Manual' by Gabor Takacs.
The value varies between 0.04 and 0.2 psi/ft.
Optiflow Design Procedure
User Guide 584
Once the design data has been entered into the 'Input Data' , select 'Calculate' to carry
out the design. The resultant valve depths can be seen in the 'Results' section at the
bottom of the screen.
2.10.7 Jet Pump Design
If a Jet Pumped system is to be designed, the Design | Jet Pump menu should be
selected. The following section details the steps a user should take to complete the
design.
The design is performed in three steps:
1. Enter the design conditions.
2. Determine the required pump head to achieve a specified production rate.
3. Select a suitable pump for the application.
585
PROSPER
Any Jet Pump data entered in System | Jet Pumps screen is not utilised by the design
section and will be overwritten when the design has been completed.
The Jet Pump Power Fluid properties are entered into the PVT section as detailed in
the PVT Section of this manual.
2.10.7.1Jet Pump Theory
This is a type of pump which operates on the principle of a high-pressure fluid jet and
the venturi effect it creates. Jet pumps can be relatively inefficient but can tolerate a
wide range of operating conditions, including easily handling sand-laden or abrasive
fluids. The jet pump employs no moving parts and achieves its pumping action by
means of momentum transfer between the power fluid and the produced fluid. One of
the main drawbacks for jet pumping is the need for a relatively high suction pressure to
avoid cavitation. This phenomenon can cause severe damage and it is important to be
able to predict and avoid this when designing a system using jet pumps.
Below is a diagram detailing the parts of a Jet Pump:
Pressure Rate Total Head
Power Fluid P
1
Q
1
H
1
Produced fluid P
3
Q
3
H
3
Discharge Fluid P
2
Q
2
H
2
The following section details how the Jet Pump Design is carried out.
1. From the design Surface Injection Pressure and Rate, a gradient is calculated down
to the Nozzle Inlet using the Power Fluid properties. This determines P
1
and Q
1
.
2. From the IPR curve and using the Design Rate, the BHP can be calculated. From this
value, a gradient calculation can be performed using the reservoir fluid properties to
User Guide 586
the Pump Inlet. This determines P
3
and Q
3
.
3. From the design Wellhead Pressure, and the combined production and power fluid
rates and properties, the pump discharge pressure (P
2
) can be found. This assumes
that Q
2
=Q
1
+Q
3
.
4. The Dimensionless Flow Rate (M) and Dimensionless Head Recovery Ratio (H)
can now be calculated using the equations below:
5. The value for N can be calculated from H and M using the equation given below:
6. Using the equation below, it is possible to iteratively determine the value for R by
solving for an estimated R and comparing the newly calculated N value to the known N
value calculated above.
Where:
Throat of area Flow A
Nozzle of area Flow A
/A A Ratio Area R
(0.1) t Coefficien Loss Diffuser K
(0.28) t Coefficien Loss Throat K
(0.0) t Coefficien Loss Suction K
(0.15) t Coefficien Loss Nozzle K
t
j
t j
d
t
s
j
7. Finally the theoretical limit of M to avoid cavitation (M
c
) is found using the following
equation:

3 3 1
3
) (
1
1
P P P I
P
K
R
R
M
c
j c
587
PROSPER

Where
Ic = Experimentally determined Cavitation Index

Numerous tests by different investigators have placed the value of Ic between 0.8 and 1.67,
with 1.35 being a conservative design value.
References:
'The Technology of Artificial Lift Methods - Volume 2b' Chapter 6, Kermit
Brown
SPE 19713 - 'Modelling and Design of Jet Pumps', D.T. Hatziavramidis
2.10.7.2Jet Pump Design Parameters
In the main Jet Pump Design screen the design parameters can be entered:
The majority of these As far as the loss coefficient are concerned, these coefficients
are a measure of the energy loss due to the friction in the above quoted sections of the
pump and are provided by the Jet Pump manufacturers.
User Guide 588
2.10.7.3Jet Pump Calculate
After the design parameters have been entered, select Calculate from the top ribbon.
specified production rate.
By clicking on Calculate the program calculates the pump duty necessary to achieve
the design production rate. PROSPER will display the pump duty solution, as shown in
the figure above.
The steps taken by the calculation are detailed in the Jet Pump Theory Section.
Once the calculation of these parameters has been completed, select Done to return to
the previous input data screen.
2.10.7.4Jet Pump Design (Pump Selection)
The next step is to select the pump suitable to provide the calculated duty.
To do so, select Design from the Input Data screen. The will display a pump design
screen similar to that shown below:
589
PROSPER
Select a pump from the database whose actual performance (in green in the figure
above) is close to the desired performance.
PROSPER lists pumps on the basis of diameter and performance
characteristics.
It is the users responsibility to ensure that the pump selected is
coherent with the information provided by the manufacturer
As seen for ESP, HSP and PCP installations, the Jet Pump design should be checked
by performing sensitivities in Calculation | System (VLP+IPR), in order to verify the
design against the expected change of conditions along the life of the well.
2.10.8 Sucker Rod Pump Design
If a Sucker Rod Pumped system is to be designed, the Design | Sucker Rod Pump
menu should be selected. The following section details both the theory behind the
design process and the steps a user should take to complete the design.
User Guide 590
2.10.8.1Background
The schematic of a conventional Sucker Rod Pump installation is sketched in the
following figure along with the downhole pump:
Working principle:
A prime motor moves the gearbox, which rotates the crank. The crank is attached to a
counterweight and is connected to the Pitman arm. The Pitman arm is then connected
to the walking beam.
The rotary movement of the crank is propagated and translated into a reciprocating
movement of the rod connected to the downhole pump.
From the figure above it is possible to see that as the crank rotates, the rod shifts the
plunger up (upstroke) and down (downstroke) in the pump barrel.
The downhole pump is composed of a barrel with a ball-and-seat valve at the bottom
(standing valve) and a plunger with another ball-and-seat valve (traveling valve).
During the downstroke the plunger is lowered in the barrel, the traveling valve is opened
and standing valve is closed; in this way the fluid is displaced in the tubing above the
plunger.
During the upstroke, the traveling valve is closed, whilst the standing valve is opened,
letting the fluid flow from the formation into the barrel. The fluid that was in the tubing in
the previous step is pushed towards the surface.
591
PROSPER
Troubleshooting the performance of the Pump
It is possible to monitor the pump performance by measuring the variation of the rod
load against the position of the rod itself by means of a dynamometer.
The resulting plot is called "dynamometer card". This plot is a very useful method to
verify that the pump is working fine and to diagnose eventual problems.
The example reported below illustrates the shape of a dynamometer card for the ideal
case of pump and rod perfectly rigid, no friction, perfect pump action:
User Guide 592
With reference to the figure above:
- Point A: the plunger is in the lowest point. This is the starting point of the upstroke
- A-B: The travelling valve closes and the standing valve opens. As this is an ideal case,
the total load of the fluid above the plunger is taken over by the sucker rod
- B-C: The plunger travels all the way to the highest point the distance between points B
and C represents the stroke length
- C-D: The travelling valve opens and the standing valve closes. This is the starting
point of the downstroke. The rod unloads
- D-A: The plunger travels back to the lowest point of the stroke A
As mentioned above, the dynamometer illustrated in the figure represents an ideal
situation. However, the examination of actual dynamometer cards allows the Engineer
to identify problems related to pump operative problems, like leaking valves, fluid
pounding, gas locking, etc.
Details about the use of dynamometers cards for pump performance diagnostics can
be found in the references reported in Appendix A.
Design
The design of a Sucker Rod Pump installation is a trial and error procedure that
consists of:
- starting from assumptions on the pump hardware (pump and rod type, depth,
size), flow conditions and design stroke rate or production rate, and then
- determining the operating parameters, like: pump displacement, peak polished
593
PROSPER
rod load, minimum polish rod load, peak torque, polished rod horsepower,
counterbalance effect (CBE) etc.
- verifying how the pump installation behaves through the dynamometer card and
torque chart
This is achieved by solving the wave equation:
g
t
t) u(x,
c
x
t) u(x,
a
t
t) u(x,
2
2
2
2
2
Solutions to this equation have been provided by Gibbs (ref. Appendix A).
The solutions to the equation above allow to determine the surface and downhole
dynamometer card and then a torque analysis can be performed to determine the
torque.
These diagnostic plots can be used to verify the working conditions of the designed
pump and sucker rod and in the case the design can be reviewed by changing
assumptions and restarting the design.
2.10.8.2Design Sucker Rod Pump
The Design Sucker Rod Pump section allows the User to perform a design of a
sucker rod pump installation.
Also, along with the design, a series of diagnostic plots (the Dynamometer card, the
Torque and Rod Speed plot) are provided, which can be used to verify the actual pump
operating regime and in the case troubleshoot the design itself.
The design consists of the following steps:
1. Enter design input parameters (PVT, pump data, design input data)
2. Perform the design
3. Perform Rod Sensitivity
Below is a screenshot of the Sucker Rod Pump Design screen:
User Guide 594
2.10.8.2.1 Enter Design Parameters
The input parameters consist of:
PVT Data Enter the PVT data for the produced fluid.
Calculation Mode Two different design modes are possible:
- Enter Stoke Rate and Calculate Production Rate
- Enter Production Rate and Calculate Stroke Rate
Pumping Unit and
Rod Selection
These options allow the pumping unit and rod to be used in
the design to be selected. These units and rods are taken
from the Artificial Lift Database.
Service Factor Three options are available:
- Non-Corrosive
- Salt Water
- Hydrogen Sulphide
Pump Intake The pump intake pressure can be calculated in one of three
595
PROSPER
Pressure ways depending upon the option selected:
- Entered Value
- Calculated from IPR
- Calculated from Fluid Level
More details on these three options are given below.
Design Input These inputs specify the design operating conditions such as
FWHP, FWHT, FWBT, pump position, characteristics and
efficiencies.
Pump Intake Pressure
It is possible to specify the pump intake pressure in one of three ways as discussed
below:
Entered Value The pump intake pressure is defined directly by the User.
Calculated from IPR From the entered or calculated design production rate, the
bottom hole pressure is calculated from the IPR curve. This is
then corrected to the pump intake depth.
Calculated from
Fluid Level
The casing head pressure, fluid level and annulus size are
used to calculate the pump intake pressure based upon the
height of the column.
2.10.8.2.2 Perform Design
After entering the input data, select Calculate to perform the design of the Sucker Rod
Pump.
The program will calculate the production rate and all the information related to rod load,
torque, stress, etc.
On the right hand side of the screen the plots related to Rod Load, Torque and Pump
velocity are reported.
User Guide 596
The Top Rod Loading and Top Rod % Of Goodman Diagram are measurements of
the stress in the top rod based upon the peak polished rod load and the cross-sectional
area of the top rod. The API RP11BR paper discusses the Modified Goodman
Diagram and its construction.
PROSPER will display in red any parameters which exceed 100%. There are two ways
of lowering those values below 100%; the first is to increase the area of the sucker rods
and the second is to reduce the peak load.
The Index of Torsional Effectiveness (ITE) is a measurement of the ability of the
beam pump unit type to smooth out and idealise the net crankshaft torque load (under
normal conditions handling a full pump barrel of incompressible fluid). The ITE is ratio of
the average net torque to the peak net torque expressed as percentage and the higher
the ITE is, the more effective the unit geometry is in converting the polished rod load
into a smoother and more ideal torsional load.
597
PROSPER
ITE Beam Pump Unit
Performance
Under 15% Very Poor
20-25% Fair
25-30% Average
30-35% Good
35-40% Very Good
2.10.8.2.3 Rod Sensitivity
To perform a sensitivity to see the impact that selecting different types of rods will have
on production, press the Rod Sensitivity button at the top of the screen.
Select Calculate to carry out the calculations and see the comparison plots:
The chart can to viewed in one of three different visualisations:
User Guide 598
Production Rate by Rod Type
HorsePower Required by Rod Type
Production Rate Per HorsePower by Rod Type
2.10.9 Artificial Lift Database
The Artificial Lift Database contains all the information concerning the artificial lift
equipment used in PROSPER.
The Database contains:
Gas Lift Valves
ESP pumps, motors, cables
HSP pumps and turbines
PCP pumps, sucker rods, motors, cables
Jet pumps
MultiPhase pumps
In the following sections there is a description of the information stored in the Artificial
Lift Database and how to update with new data.
To access the database select Design | Database.
The Options tab screen collect information on the location of the database and its
version:
599
PROSPER
An initial database is distributed along with the software.
EQUIPMENT DATABASE DISCLAIMER
Every effort is made to ensure that the sample equipment databases supplied
are correct, however, it is the User's responsibility to ensure they are both
accurate and up-to-date. For critical design work, always refer to the equipment
supplier for the latest performance data.
To improve the quality of the Artificial Lift Database, Petroleum Experts is more
than happy to accept the contribution of users who have updated data.
2.10.9.1Database Toolbar
A number of different options are available to the User when the artifical lift database is
accessed. A screenshot is shown below:
Done Will exit out of the Database and save any changes made.
Cancel Will exit out of the Database without saving the changes
made.
Add This option can be used to Add new equipment to the
database. Please refer to each individual equipment type to
see how to add a new entry.
Amend This option can be used to amend existing entries in the
Database.
Delete Will delete the currently selected entry from the Database.
All Will select all of the current equipment type.
Import It is possible to Import a previously created Database into
PROSPER. This allows many new pieces of equipment to be
imported quickly.
Export Allows the equipment to be exported to a file, the clipboard,
the screen or the printer.
Report Will create a report of the currently selected equipment
section.
Create Import File This option can be used to create an Import File which can
then be shared with other Users.
Selecting this option will allow the User to save the database
as a *.Dat file.
User Guide 600
Help Opens the PROSPER Online Help.
Select Previous Entry Will move to the previous piece of equipment.
Select Next Entry Will move to the next piece of equipment.
2.10.9.2Gas Lift Valve Database
To perform a Gas Lift design, PROSPER must have appropriate valve data loaded in
its database. To enter and maintain the valve data that PROSPER requires for Gas Lift
design, select the Gas Lift tab button in the database:
The database is completely editable: it is possible to Add, Amend or Delete any record.
The Create Export File option allows to create back-ups of the database in format .
GLD, which can be recalled by PROSPER to restore the database using the 'Import'
button.
2.10.9.2.1 Adding a New Valve
To add a gas lift valve select Add. An entry screen is displayed, where the valve specs
can be entered:
601
PROSPER
An new valve entered requires the following data to be included:
Manufacturer
Valve type
Type
Specification
Port size
R value
The sample gas lift valve database is provided to allow the User to run
the examples. Before designing for field installation, the User must
first ensure that the database contains current and accurate valve
characteristics.
2.10.9.3ESP Database
The ESP Database contains the performance curves of pumps and motors and the
characteristics of the cables.
2.10.9.3.1 Pump Database
Select the tab screen ESP in the Database to access the ESP database:
User Guide 602

The performance curves are provided in the form of coefficients for a polynomial
equation fitted to actual performance data.
The database is completely editable: it is possible to add, amend or delete any record.
The performance curve for each pump can be viewed by selecting the desired pump
and clicking Plot:
603
PROSPER
Select Variables to select between Head, Horsepower and Efficiency on the plot.
2.10.9.3.1.1 Adding a New Pump
To add a new pump select Add when in the ESP section of the database and enter the
required information into the Operating Data Section:
The following inputs are required:
User Guide 604
Pump Size The diameter of the pump. Will be used for filtering purposes
to ensure that it will not be selected if it is too large to fit in the
casing.
Number of Stages Enter the number of stages which the performance curve
represents.
Frequency Enter the frequency of the pump which the performance curve
represents.
The performance curves for all other pump frequencies will
be calculated using the Affinity Laws.
Min Rate Enter the minimum operating rate (at pump conditions) for
the entered frequency of the pump.
Max Rate Enter the maximum operating rate (at pump conditions) for
the entered frequency of the pump.
If the coefficients for the polynomials which describe the head and horsepower for the
pump are known, these can be directly inserted into the program.
If these coefficients are not available, the next step is to enter the performance data for
head and power as per manufacturers performance curves and fit them to a polynomial.
To do so, select either Head Coefficients and HP Coefficients and enter the
operating rate and corresponding head or horsepower data:
605
PROSPER
Select Fit to calculate the polynomial coefficients which best fit the input data. Selecting
Done will go back to the previous panel and also transfer the newly calculated
coefficients:
The Horse Power coefficients can be calculated in the same way.
User Guide 606
If the performance curves of the pump are only known in the form of Outlet Pressure
curves, then these would need to be converted to Head curves externally using the fluid
properties of the fluid used during their generation.
To prevent errors, it is recommended that a plot be made and checked
against published curves whenever new data is entered or alterations
are made to existing entries.
2.10.9.3.2 Motor Database
Select the tab screen 'Motors' in the database to access the motors database:
Motor characteristics are entered in form of polynomials fitted to performance data.
Coefficients are required for Nameplate Amps, RPM, and Efficiency and Power factor.
As plotted, motor speed curves may exceed synchronous speed at low %
power values. This is a characteristic of the polynomial fitting technique used.
The accuracy of motor (and pump) performance curve fits is optimised in the
usable efficiency range.
The motor performance curves can be viewed by selecting Plot. An example of a motor
efficiency plot is shown below:
607
PROSPER
Select Variables to select between Nameplate Amps, Pump Speed, Efficiency and
Power Factor on the plot.
2.10.9.3.2.1 Adding a New Motor
To add a new motor select Add when in the ESP Motor section of the database and
enter the required information into the Motor Data Section:
User Guide 608
Size (OD) The diameter of the motor. Will be used for filtering purposes
casing.
Speed Enter the speed which the entered performance curve
represents.
Frequency Enter the frequency of the motor which entered the
performance curve represents.
If the coefficients for the polynomials which describe the Name Plate Amps, Speed,
Efficiency and Power Factor for the motor are known, these can be directly inserted into
the program.
each as per manufacturers performance curves and fit them to a polynomial. To do so,
select one of Name Plate Amps, Speed, Efficiency or Power Factor and enter the
Percentage Name Plate Power and corresponding curve data:
609
PROSPER
Select Fit to calculate the polynomial coefficients which best fit the input data. Selecting
Done will go back to the previous panel and also transfer the newly calculated
coefficients:
User Guide 610
This same process should be carried out for each of the required variables.
On the right hand side of the screen above, enter the different Power, Voltage and
Current the motor is compatible with into the Power Options section by selecting Add.
2.10.9.3.3 Cables Database
To access the 'Cables' section of the database, select the Cables tab:
611
PROSPER
2.10.9.3.3.1 Adding a New Cable
To add a new cable type to the database, select Add.
The voltage drop per 100ft of cable (per Amp when the cable is at 20
o
C) and the
maximum current which can be passed through the cable are required to be inserted.
Selecting Done will add the new cable to the database.
It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the data being entered
is accurate and representative of the actual equipment being used.
2.10.9.4HSP Database
The HSP Database contains the performance curves of Hydraulic Submersible Pumps
and Turbines.
2.10.9.4.1 Pumps Database
Select the tab screen HSP in the Database to access the HSP database:
User Guide 612

The performance curves are provided in the form of coefficients for a polynomial
equation fitted to actual performance data.
Clicking on Plot displays the pump performance curve:
A new HSP can be added to the database by selecting Add and inserting the required
operating data:
613
PROSPER
Pump Size The diameter of the pump. Will be used for filtering purposes
casing.
Speed Enter the speed which the entered performance curve
represents.
The performance curves for all other pump speeds will be
calculated using the Affinity Laws.
Minimum Speed The minimum speed at which the pump can operate.
Maximum Speed The maximum speed at which the pump can operate.
Minimum Rate Enter the minimum operating rate (at pump conditions) for
the entered performance curve of the pump.
Maximum Rate Enter the maximum operating rate (at pump conditions) for
the entered performance curve of the pump.
Number of Stages Enter the number of stages which are represented by the
entered performance curves.
Max Number of
Stages
The maximum number of stages which can be set when this
pump is modelled.
If the coefficients for the polynomials which describe the head and horsepower for the
pump are known, these can be directly inserted into the program.
User Guide 614
head and power as per manufacturers performance curves and fit them to a polynomial.
This can be done by following the steps described in the ESP - Adding a New Pump
Section.
2.10.9.4.2 Turbines Database
Select the 'Turbines' tab to display the turbines database:
The performance data are provided as polynomials fitted to performance data.
The turbine database can be altered using the Add, Amend or Delete buttons on the
top toolbar.
Select Plot to see the turbine performance curves:
615
PROSPER
2.10.9.4.2.1 Adding a New Turbine
To add a new turbine to the database, select Add and enter the required data:
The required inputs for the turbine constraints are:
User Guide 616
Reference Speed Enter the speed which the entered performance curve
represents.
The performance curves for all other turbine speeds will be
calculated using the Affinity Laws.
Maximum Speed The maximum speed at which the turbine can operate.
Maximum Test
Pressure
Maximum Working
Pressure
Minimum Stage
Pressure
Maximum Number of
Stages
The maximum number of stages which can be set when this
pump is modelled.
Maximum Turbine
Supply Flow
The maximum supply fluid rate which can pass through the
turbine.
Maximum Total Shaft
Torque
The maximum torque which the shaft can operate under.
Maximum Stage
Torque
Maximum torque to be produced by any stage
Turbine Casing
Outside Diameter
The diameter of the turbine. Will be used for filtering
purposes to ensure that it will not be selected if it is too large
to fit in the casing.
Max Velocity Over
Turbine Casing
The Turbine performance is entered by selecting 'Add' in the Turbine Settings area:
617
PROSPER
The steps to enter the performance data and fit the curves to polynomials is the same
as that for entering the ESPs and HSPs. Please refer to the ESP-Adding a New Pump
section for more details.
2.10.9.5PCP Database
The PCP database contains data concerning the performance of pumps and the
characteristics of sucker rods, motors and cables.
2.10.9.5.1 Pumps Database
Select the PCP tab in the database to access the PCP database:

User Guide 618
In the database parameters concerning the pump configuration are stored.
Clicking on Plot displays the pump performance curve:
To add a new pump select Add and enter the required data as per manufacturers'
specs:
619
PROSPER
For a new pump, the following data should be included:
Manufacturer Company Name Of The Manufacturer
Pump Series Series Of The Pump
Pump Model Model Of The Pump
Pump size External Diameter Of The Pump
Maximum Head Maximum Head That The Pump Can Achieve
Reference Speed Best Efficiency Pump Rotational Speed
Reference Rate Pump Rate At Reference Speed
Pump Volume Volume Of Pump Cavity from One Revolution Of The Rotor
Pump Length Length Of The Stator
Stator Pitch Length Between Two Consecutive Similar structures Of The
Stator e.g. Two Stator Highs Or Two Stator Lows
User Guide 620
Rotor ID Diameter Of The Area Covered By The Rotor During One
Complete Revolution.
Rotor Elements Number of Cavities Created By the Rotor/Stator Combination
Within The Pump.
The Optional Data input section in the above screen shot is used to calculate the
frictional torque and shaft axial load. If no data is input in the optional data section,
results will not be displayed for the given parameters.
The "Optional Data" may be proprietary, and can be obtained from the given
pump manufacturer.
Please note that the pump displacement is expressed in volume and can directly be
calculated from the nominal pump displacement.
As far as the stator pitch is concerned, this should be provided by the manufacturer.
Some of the definitions/calculations used in PROSPER to define the PCP performance
are described below.
Diameters and Eccentricity Definitions
The definitions of the different parameters considered in the PCP database and in the
PCP design procedure are illustrated using one of the most common type of rotor /
stator association.
The following definitions are used:
Specific Rotor ID Internal diameter of the pump rotor.
Specific Stator ID Internal diameter of the pump stator.
Specific Rotor
OD
External diameter of the pump rotor.
Specified Stator
OD
External diameter of the pump stator.
These different diameters are represented in the graphic below, for an elliptical rotor.
621
PROSPER
The pump eccentricity factor is then calculated according to the following relationship:
e = (Specific Stator OD - Specific Stator ID) / 4
This eccentricity factor will be used to calculate the pump volume, as described below.
Calculation of the Fluid Volume Displaced by the Pump
The fluid volume displaced by the pump will be a function of the following parameters:
The stator pitch, which will be noted p.
The pump eccentricity factor e.
The rotor specific diameter D.
The area occupied by the fluid between the starting point and the ending point of
one rotor revolution, noted A.
The pump volume could then be calculated using this area and the distance covered by
one cavity during one revolution, noted h.
The pump volume will then obey the following relationship:
V = A h
If we consider the rotor / stator association described before, the following stages can
be considered during one rotor revolution:
User Guide 622
It is possible to notice that when the rotor made a half turn, the fluid cavities originally
described are located vertically to their initial position, therefore each fluid cavity has
been submitted to a translation corresponding to the rotor pitch.
Therefore, the distance covered by each cavity during one revolution will be equal to
twice the rotor pitch:
(i) h = 2 p
In this case, the area A can be expressed as follows:
(ii) A = (6 3 - 2 ) e D + e
2
623
PROSPER
Both i and ii relationships lead to the pump volume relationship:
(iii) V = ((6 3 - 2 ) e D + e
2
) 2p
This relationship can be generalised to every type of rotor / stator association by
defining a new variable, m.
This variable will be defined as follows: a fluid cavity will be translated by a length
equivalent to the rotor pitch after 1/m rotor revolution.
Therefore, the (i) relationship can be generalised as follows:
(iv) h = m p
And the following relationship can be obtained for the pump volume:
(v) V = (4 + (m - 1) 2e) 4e p
where E = 2 e
2.10.9.5.2 Sucker Rods Database
Select the Sucker Rods tab to display the corresponding database:
2.10.9.5.2.1 Adding a New Sucker Rod
To add a new sucker rod select Add and enter the required data:
User Guide 624
2.10.9.5.3 Motor and Cable Databases
The motor and cable databases for use with the PCP are the same as those which can
be used with the ESPs. Information on these databases, and how to add new motors
and cables can be found in the Motor Database Section and Cable Database Section.
2.10.9.6Jet Pumps Database
The Jet Pumps database contains the characteristics of the pumps.
Select the tab screen 'Jet' in the database to access the Jet Pump database:

625
PROSPER
2.10.9.6.1 Adding a New Pump
specifications:
2.10.9.7MultiPhase Pumps Database
The MultiPhase database contains the characteristics of the FRAMO Pumps.
Select the tab screen 'MultiPhase' in the database to access the FRAMO Pumps
database:
User Guide 626

Click on Plot, to view the performance curves of the selected pump:
2.10.9.7.1 Adding a New Pump
specifications:
627
PROSPER
2.10.9.8Sucker Rod Pump
The Sucker Rod Pumps database contains the characteristics of pumps and sucker
rods.
2.10.9.8.1 Pump database
Select the SRP tab in the Database to access the Sucker Rod Pump database:

To add a new pump select Add and enter the required information:
User Guide 628
API Sizes of Pumping Unit Designations
Pumping unit sizes and the load that can be suspended safely from the sucker rods are
reduced to 5 designations that can be written in a single coded line. A permanent metal
plate is attached to the gearbox with these identifying numbers printed on them. This
code takes the form:
X-pppD-III-sss
where:
X Enter the type of pumping unit from:
A - Air balanced
C - Conventional (standard)
M - Mark II UniTorque
ppp Peak Torque Rating (Thousands of Inch Pounds)
D Double Reduction Gear Reducer
III Polished Rod Load Rating (Hundreds of Pounds)
sss Stroke Length (Inches)
The following schematic illustrates the above required inputs for a conventional type
pump:
629
PROSPER
The inputs required for Air balanced pumps and Mark II pumps are related to the
conventional pumps by the following schematics:
Conventional:
User Guide 630
Air balanced:
631
PROSPER
Mark II:
User Guide 632
2.10.9.8.2 Sucker Rods Database
Select the Sucker Rods tab button to display the correspondent database:
633
PROSPER
2.10.9.8.2.1 Adding a New Sucker Rod
To add a new Sucker Rod select Add and enter the required data:
The rod can be tapered by selecting different percentages of different rod diameters.
The total should always add up to 100%.
2.11 Output
The 'Output' menu is used to report, export and plot input data entered into PROSPER
and the results generated by the various calculation options in the program:
Report
This option generates reports about input data and results.
Export
This option transfers input data and results to different locations (printer,
spreadsheets, screen, etc.)
Plot
This option generates plots for input data and results
These functions are available also in any of the input/output screens of the program.
User Guide 634
2.11.1 Report
The 'Report' option is used to prepare reports and plots from a current analysis. This
section describes how to use the reporting system with the templates provided with the
system and how to customise these templates.
2.11.1.1Setting Up the Reporting System
The set up of the reporting system begins with defining the default locations where the
reports will be created. To define the directories, select File | Preferences:
In the File tab, enter the Location Of Report Output Files. This is the default directory
where reports printed to file are to be placed. Also enter the Location Of User-Created
Reports. This is the path to a directory where User-defined report templates are to be
stored.
2.11.1.2Reports
The reporting interface gives the user complete control over how the reports are
formatted and what information is utilised to make up the report. This is facilitated by the
use of report templates, which can be edited to suit the specific requirements. It is
635
PROSPER
possible to choose to use the default report templates provided with the system or to
choose to create slightly different versions of these reports. The selected templates can
then be used to generate the actual reports, which can be sent to a variety of places
(printer, file or screen). The report templates are displayed in a hierarchy and all
templates which have been selected (by double-clicking on it) show an X in the check-
box beside the template name.
To access the 'Reports' area, select Output Reports form the menu toolbar.
There are two modes for the editing of report templates: System and User. System
mode does not allow the user to change any template whereas user mode allows
creating new user-defined templates from scratch or based on an already existing
system report template and also allows editing an existing user-defined report template.
Selecting user mode also makes the User Reports section of the template hierarchy
visible. The User Reports hierarchy contains all report templates which have been
tagged as being a derivation of a system report template as well as any free standing
User-defined templates.
User Guide 636
The reporting main window consists of four main parts: The command segment at the
top of the dialogue containing the buttons, the report selection hierarchy, the output
device selection group and the template type selection group. The output device group
is only used when printing from selected report templates.
The available commands are:
OK Print the selected reports to the selected output device and
terminate the dialogue
Cancel Exit the Report screen without generating a report.
Help Access the on-line help.
Setup Select a printer if report is to be printed.
User Switches between System and User edit mode. This shows
or hides the User Reports section of the report hierarchy and
637
PROSPER
enables or disables the Create and Edit buttons. If in User
mode this button shows the text System and vice-versa.
View View a previously saved native format file on-screen. This
brings up a file selection box for choosing the appropriate
report and passes this file name to the Report Executor.
Print Print the selected reports to the selected output device.
Create Create a new user report (only visible in User edit mode).
Edit Edit an existing user report template or create a new
template from a system template (only visible in User edit
mode)
Group Allows the grouping of report templates references and the
storing of the group information in a file for later recall. This
allows batch printing of reports for any analysis.
The available output types are:
Printer Sent the report to the current printer.
Screen The reports are displayed on-screen in a report executor
window.
Native File The reports are saved as .FR files in the output reports
directory.
RFT File The reports are saved as .RTF files in the output reports
directory.
Text File The reports are saved as tab delimited text files for easy
spreadsheet import.
The native (.FR) file format can only be read by the reporting system whereas the RTF
format can be read by many Windows word processing applications. When printing to
file the user will be presented with the following dialogue:
User Guide 638
The default directory will be set to the default output directory but this can be altered
using the Select Directory button. This can then be applied to all output files by using
Change All. If it is necessary to change the output directory of one of the files, this can
be achieved by using the Browse button (this is the button to the right hand side of the
filename box labelled '...') associated with each report. The filenames can themselves
be edited in the text box, which contains them.
For any given report in the system hierarchy the user can choose to view or print a
report using either the system report template provided or a user-defined report
template based on that system report template (or at least that position in the hierarchy)
or it is possible to choose a report grouping which can be made up from a combination
of userand system reports. Choose between these options using the report template
type selection group at the bottom right of the main window. If the user report template
option for any hierarchy position is selected and there are multiple User-defined report
templates for that position, then a dialogue appears which allows selecting the desired
template.
639
PROSPER
Double clicking on any of the report templates (or selecting and pressing OK) will cause
it to become the User-defined report template for that hierarchy position for the current
reports session. The default choice is the topmost user defined report template. It is
possible to stop a User-defined report template from being associated with that
hierarchy position by selecting it and then pressing Delete. This does not actually delete
the report template (it can still be seen within the User Reports section of the hierarchy).
If a report grouping is selected, then a similar dialogue appears and the user can select
the appropriate group file. After selecting a file all the reports referenced in the group
will appear checked in the hierarchy and then it is possible to press print for all of these
reports to be sent to the selected output device.
Template Editor Commands
The template editor works on the principle of moveable fields or groups of fields where
the inputs to these fields can be any value from PROSPER. Headers and footers can be
defined, which can be shown on each page, have fields which have a value which is the
result of a calculation or even have groups of fields which are displayed only if a
condition is met.
User Guide 640
Data fields from PROSPER are added using the F2 key, selecting the data items
required and then pressing Ok when finished. The selected data items will then appear
as fields, one by one, as the left mouse button is clicked. The fields can be roughly
positioned in this way. The useris not limited to one pass at adding data items to the
report template. More items can be added at any time in the same manner.
Once a field has been added to the report template the usercan edit some of the
properties of the text which will be shown in the field and assign a group number to the
field by double clicking the left mouse button on it and the font properties can be
changed by double clicking the right mouse button on it. Other properties, such as
whether the field has a box around it, etc., can be changed through the menu options, a
full description of which are given below.
641
PROSPER
The template editor commands can be selected by using the menu, toolbar or keyboard
shortcuts. Help can be obtained on any menu item by highlighting the menu item and
then pressing the F1 key or by consulting the index of help topics under the help menu.
File Menu
This menu contains commands for saving the current report template file and specifying
the report template parameters.
Save:
Use this selection to save the current report template to the current file name. If a file is
not yet specified, the form editor will prompt for a file name. If a file extension is not
provided, the editor automatically appends an .FP extension to the report file. If a file
with the same name already exists on the disk, the form editor will save the previous file
with a backup extension (.RE).
Save As:
This selection is similar to Save File. In addition, it allows saving the report template to a
new file name.
User Guide 642
Report Parameters:
This option allows setting certain report parameters. Firstly, it allows specifying the
name of the report. The margin for the printed page can be set. It is possible to instruct
the report executor to print trial records for adjusting forms such as labels and invoices
and set the default date format for input. The date format that specified here will be
enforced for parameter input during the report execution session, and any date constant
used in expressions.
Report Filter:
This option allows entering a filter criterion for the report. Each data record will be tested
with the expression provided here. A record is selected only if this expression evaluates
to a TRUE value. For example, if the expression was sales->amount>100, then only the
records with the sales amount more than 100 will be selected.
Printer Setup:
This option allows selecting a printer from a list of installed printers and invoking a
printer specific dialogue box for the selected printer. Select the parameters from a set
of printer specific options. These options include page size, page orientation,
resolution, etc. The printer options selected here determine the width and height of the
report.
Exit:
Use this function to exit from the form editor session. If the current file is modified, a
prompt will ask to save the modifications.
Edit Menu:
This menu contains commands to edit the report objects. One or more report objects
must be selected before using this option.
Cut:
Use this option to copy the current item or all the items in the current selection to the
clipboard. The copied items are deleted from the form.
Copy:
Use this option to copy the current item or all the items in the current selection to the
clipboard.
Paste:
Use this option to paste the items from the clipboard to the current form.
Position Text:
Use this option to position the text within the item boundaries. The text can be justified
on the left, right, top, or bottom edges or it can be centred horizontally or vertically. This
option is valid for the label and field type items only.
Item Outlines:
643
PROSPER
Use this option to specify the item boundaries (left, right, top, and bottom) to draw for
one or more selected items. The colour and width of the boundary lines can be
specified too.
Item Background:
Use this option to set the background colour or pattern for one or more selected items.
Centre Horizontally:
This option is used to centre horizontally one or more selected items. When more than
one item is selected, the form editor first centres the selection rectangle and then moves
the selected items such that the position of the selected items relative to the selection
rectangle does not change.
Delete Item:
Use this option to delete one or more currently selected items. If the current section is
being deleted, the program asks for confirmation before the deletion. All items within the
section are also deleted.
Fonts:
Use this function to change the font and colour for the text for one or more selected
objects. This option is valid for the field and label type objects only.
When selecting this option, the form editor shows the font and colour selection dialogue
box. The current font and colours are pre-selected in the dialogue box. Use this dialogue
box to specify the selections.
Snap to Grid:
This option allows turning on or off the invisible grid on the form. When the grid is turned
on and an item is moved, it automatically aligns to the closest grid location. This option
also allows setting the grid width.
Report size:
The following options shrink or elongate the report in the horizontal or vertical direction
by the amount equal to the width or the height of the selection rectangle.
Expand Horizontally
Use this option to create horizontal space by moving items horizontally. For example,
consider three items, A, B, and C placed horizontally. If a new item between the items A
and B is to be inserted, it is possible to use this function to create the desired space
between these two items and place the new item in the newly created space. To move
the items B and C toward right, create a selection rectangle after the item A and select
this option. The width of the selection rectangle specifies the movement of the items B
and C toward right (noted that the selection rectangle does not need to include all items
to be moved). All items toward the right of the selection rectangle and with the vertical
placement between the vertical spaces spanned by the selection rectangle are moved.
Expand Vertically
Use this option to create additional vertical space by moving the items downward. For
User Guide 644
example, consider three items, A, B, and C placed vertically. If a new item between
items A and B is to be inserted, it is possible to use this function to create the desired
space between these two items and place the new item in the newly created space. To
move items B and C downward, create a selection rectangle below the item A and
select this option. The height of the selection rectangle specifies the downward
movement of items B and C (noted that the selection rectangle does not need to include
all items to be moved). All items below the selection rectangle are moved.
This option also expands (vertically) the current section by the height of the selection
rectangle.
Compress Horizontally
Use this option to delete extra horizontal space by moving items horizontally. For
example, consider three items, A, B, and C placed horizontally. The usercan use this
function to bring items B and C closer to the item A. To move items B and C toward left,
create a selection rectangle after the item A and select this option. The width of the
selection rectangle specifies the movement of items B and C toward left (noted that the
selection rectangle does not need to include all items to be moved). All items toward the
right of the selection rectangle and with the vertical placement between the vertical
spaces spanned by the selection rectangle are moved.
Compress Vertically
Use this option to delete vertical space by moving the items upward. For example,
consider three items, A, B, and C placed vertically. It is possible to use this function to
bring items B and C closer to the item A. To move items B and C upward, create a
selection rectangle below the item A and select this option. The height of the selection
rectangle specifies the upward movement of items B and C (noted that the selection
rectangle does not need to include all items to be moved). All items below the selection
rectangle are moved.
This option also shrinks (vertically) the current section by the height of the selection
rectangle.
Field Menu:
This menu contains options to insert, modify, delete and maintain fields.
Insert New Fields:
Data Field: This option is used to paste a new data field to the report template. This
option will display a list of data files and data fields to choose from. When selecting a
field, the form editor displays a positioning rectangle. Use the mouse to position the
field rectangle and click any mouse button. The current field attributes can be changed
using the Edit Current Field Option.
Calculation Field: This option is used to paste a calculation field to the report
template. This option will prompt for the name of the field, and the field expression. The
field expression can contain any number of valid operators, functions, system fields,
dialogue fields, and data fields. The field type is determined by the result of the
execution of the field.
After entering the field expression, the form editor displays a positioning rectangle. Use
645
PROSPER
the mouse to position the field rectangle and click any mouse button. The current field
attributes can be changed using the Edit Current Field Option.
System Field: This option is used to paste a system field to the report template. This
option will display a list of system fields (date, time, page, etc.) to choose from. When
selecting a field, the form editor displays a positioning rectangle. Use the mouse to
position the field rectangle and click any mouse button. The current field attributes can
be changed using the Edit Current Field Option.
Dialogue Field: This option is used to paste a dialogue field to the report template. A
dialogue field must have been created using the Edit Dialogue Field Table before using
this option. The dialogue fields are used to prompt the userfor data during the report
execution session.
The option will display a list of dialogue fields to choose from. When selecting a field,
the form editor displays a positioning rectangle. Use the mouse to position the field
rectangle and click any mouse button. The current field attributes can be changed using
the Edit Current Field Option.
Edit Current Field: This option is used to edit the field attributes for the current field.
This option is available only when a 'field' type object is selected.
Edit Field Expression: This option is used to edit the field expression for the current
calculation field. This option is available only when a 'calculation field' type object is
selected (see Insert Calculation Field). The option shows the existing calculation
expression and allows making any modifications.
Edit Dialogue Field Table:
Create: This option is used to create a new dialogue field. Once a dialogue field is
created, it can be inserted in the report by using the Insert Dialogue Field selection.
A dialogue field is used to prompt the user for data during report execution. For
example, it can allow the user to set the begin and end dates for the report. A dialogue
field can be used in the field expressions and can be inserted in the report template for
information purposes. A dialogue field in the report filter can be used to reject records
not meeting a specific user criterion.
Modify: This option is used to modify the user prompt, width and prompt order of a
dialogue field. The prompt order determines the order at which the dialogue fields are
presented to the user for data input.
Delete: This option is used to delete a dialogue field from the dialogue field table. The
user cannot delete a dialogue field that is being currently used in the report.
Section Menu:
This menu contains commands to insert, edit and delete report sections.
New: This option is used to create a new section. A section is identified by the section
banner and the separation line at the bottom of a section. There are three basic types of
User Guide 646
sections. A header section displays the data that remain constant or changes only when
a sort field changes. The detail section displays the transaction record fields. A footer
section is used to display totals and summary information. ReportEase allows up to 9
header and footer sections. A higher numbered header section is allowed only when all
the lower numbered headers are already selected. Similarly, a footer section is allowed
only when the corresponding header section is already selected.
Edit Current: This option is used to modify the properties of the currently selected
section. For the 'detail' section, the user can specify the number of records to print
across the page. This option can be used to print multiple address labels across the
page.
Sort Field: This option is used to specify a sort field for a header section. A sort field is
used to sort the data records.
Break Field: This option is used to specify a break field for a header section. The
break field is used to determine a sort break. Typically, the break field would be the
same as the sort field. However the break field can be specified differently from the sort
field. A calculation expression can also be specified for a break field.
Filter: This option is used to enter a filter criterion to print a section. Normally, every
section included in the report template is printed in its appropriate sequence. However,
if the user wishes to print a section depending upon a condition, he can enter this
condition expression using this option. The expression must evaluate to a logical value
(TRUE or FALSE). During the report execution, the section will be printed only if the
expression evaluates to a TRUE value.
Line: This menu contains commands to create and edit a line object:
Create a Line: Use this option to draw a line. When selecting this option, the form
editor displays a positioning rectangle. Use the mouse to position the rectangle and
click any mouse key. The line will be drawn within the position rectangle. The line size
can be changed using the sizing tabs.
Edit Current Line: Use this option to edit the angle, colour, and thickness of a 'line' type
object.
Label: This menu contains commands to create and edit a label object:
Create a Label: Use this option to create a new label. When selecting this option, the
form editor displays a positioning rectangle. Use the mouse to position the rectangle
and click any mouse key. The 'label' object will be created within the positioning
rectangle. By default, the form editor inserts the text 'label' in the label item. The label
text can be edited in the editing window.
Edit Current Label: A label text can be edited by simply selecting the desired label
item and clicking on the edit window.
As the user inserts or deletes the text, the length of the label text changes. Normally, the
647
PROSPER
form editor will automatically adjust the item box boundaries to completely enclose the
new text. However, this automatic size adjustment ceases if the user manually resizes
the item boundary by pulling on the sizing tab. This feature can be used to enclose the
text in an item box larger than the default size.
Picture: This menu contains picture import functions:
Import Picture from Clipboard
Use this command to copy a picture bitmap from the clipboard.
When selecting this option, the form editor creates a positioning rectangle equal to the
dimensions of the picture. Use the mouse to position the picture rectangle and click any
mouse key. The picture will be placed within the position rectangle. The picture size can
be changed using the sizing tabs.
Import Picture from Disk File
Use this command to read in a picture bitmap from a disk file.
When selecting this option, the form editor creates a positioning rectangle equal to the
dimensions of the picture. Use the mouse to position the picture rectangle and click any
mouse key. The picture will be placed within the position rectangle. The picture size can
be changed using the sizing tabs.
Arrange:
This menu contains commands to align size and space a set of selected objects:
Alignment At:
Horizontal Top Edge:
Use this option to horizontally align the top edge of the selected items to the top edge of
the leftmost item in the selection.
Horizontal Bottom Edge:
Use this option to horizontally align the bottom edge of the selected items to the bottom
edge of the leftmost item in the selection.
Horizontal Centre Line:
Use this option to align the horizontal centre line (imaginary) of the selected items to the
centre line of the leftmost item in the selection.
Vertical Left Edge:
Use this option to vertically align the left edge of the selected items to the left edge of
the topmost item in the selection.
Vertical Right Edge:
Use this option to vertically align the right edge of the selected items to the right edge of
the topmost item in the selection.
Vertical Centre Line:
Use this option to align the vertical centre line (imaginary) of the selected items to the
User Guide 648
centre line of the topmost item in the selection.
Even Spacing:
Horizontally:
Use this option to place the selected items horizontally at an equal distance from each
other. The inter-item distance is equal to the distance between the first two leftmost
items.
Vertically:
Use this option to place the selected items vertically at an equal distance from each
other. The inter-item distance is equal to the distance between the first two topmost
items.
Even Sizing:
Width:
Use this option to change the width of the selected items to the width of the topmost
item.
Height:
Use this option to change the height of the selected items to the width of the leftmost
item.
Undo Previous Arrangement Command:
Use this function to undo the previous arrangement command.
Report Executor Commands:The report executor allows viewing reports that have
been generated and saved to a native format file. It is invoked by using the View option
from the reporting main window and selecting a file from the file selection box. The file
selection box will point to the default data directory and will have the filter extension set
to the correct file type (.FR).
649
PROSPER
User Guide 650
The options available on this window are:
Jump Go to a particular page in the document.
Print Send the document to the defined printer.
Preview Look at the page layout of the document.
Save Save the document to a file (native or RFT)
Exit Leave the current window.
2.11.2 Export
An export can be made either directly from the individual sections of the program, or
from the Options | Export menu option. This section describes how to customise
exports.
2.11.2.1Export Setup
Use the main menu Output | Export option to export data from a current analysis, or
from a previously saved .OUT file. When selected, a series of screens leads the
userthrough the process of selecting the data required for the export. To include a
section of data, click the check box to the left of a particular item and, depending on the
selection, further input screens will be presented. This process ensures that only
relevant sections are exported. A sample export dialogue box is shown below:
651
PROSPER
After entering the choices, click Done to return to the main export dialogue box. The
usermust then select a destination for the export data. Clicking Print initiates generation
of the data and sends it to the selected destination. Setup accesses a screen for
selecting fonts, margins etc. The font selections made for export data are independent
of the plotting fonts.
Exported data can be sent to the following locations:
Printer Prints the Export data to the currently selected printer.
File Creates an ASCII data file and saves it. Selecting Print
displays a dialogue box that requests a file name and
destination. Enter a suitable file name (PROSPER
automatically appends a .PRN extension) and click OK to
save the file.
The Fixed Format option saves a file in a printer ready
format that can be imported into a DOS based word
processor. Use the Tab Delimited format to save a file
suitable for importing directly into a spreadsheet such as
EXCEL.
Clipboard Selecting Print after selecting this option copies the
exported data onto the Windows clipboard. From the
Clipboard, the user can view, edit and paste the data directly
into another Windows application. e.g. a word processing
program.
Screen Clicking Print after selecting this option allows viewing the
exported data on the screen. Scroll through the data using
the scrolling thumbs or arrows. When finished viewing, click
OK to return to the main menu.
Once a .PRN file has been saved, further copies of the exported data can be made
using a word processor from outside PROSPER. To ensure that printed exports are
correctly formatted, only non-Proportional fonts can be selected for export data. The
fonts on the export setup screen are independent of those selected on the plot setup
screen.
PROSPERs default font selection will give good results on most
printers. Choose another font if there are problems printing reports.
Calculation and Export Data Layout
Screen and hardcopy exports can be customised to display only the required variables.
For complex calculations, this can save printing large amounts of irrelevant data and
detailed reports can still be produced when required. To use the Layout feature, firstly
User Guide 652
complete a set of calculations. The following example is for PVT calculations.
Enter the PVT screen by selecting PVT | Input Data and run a calculation by selecting
Calculate.
Enter a range of pressures and temperatures which are to be calculated over:
653
PROSPER
Select Calculate to run the calculations.
User Guide 654
Click the Layout button on the calculation results screen and select the variables to
display from the layout screen:
The Show All and Hide All buttons are used to make changes to the entire list of
variables. Individual variables can be selected or de-selected by clicking them directly.
When clicking OK, only the selected variables will be displayed on the calculation
screen.
655
PROSPER
In addition to the calculation results screens, Layout also controls the variables which
will be exported in Output Export .
2.11.3 Plot
A plot can be made either directly from individual parts of the program, or from the
Output | Plot menu option:
User Guide 656
From this window select the plot to view by highlighting it in the list of available plots and
then press the Plot button or simply double-clicking on the appropriate plot. Selecting
Setup will allow the user to change the printer options if a hard copy is created.
Zooming
Plots can be zoomed in simply by placing the mouse pointer (which changes to a pair of
cross hairs over the active plot area) at the corner of the region to enlarge, and then
dragging until the area of interest is enclosed by the zoom box. Release the mouse
button and the outlined area will be zoomed to fill the entire plot area.
For more information on the new plotting which is available in PROSPER v12.0 please
refer to the Plotting Section.
2.12 Units
This chapter describes the system of units which is used by PROSPER. The built in
flexibility of the units system enables the user to select any variable and define the unit of
measurement to be used. This feature allows the units system to be modified so that it
corresponds to data reports supplied by a service company or customise the units
657
PROSPER
system to suit the users own personal preferences.
PROSPER always works internally in Field units. To facilitate data entry and output
display in any units system, PROSPER accepts data in the specified Input units and
converts it to Oilfield units for calculation. The results (in Field units) are converted back
to the specified Output unit set if necessary. By making selections from the different
categories, it is possible to work in the preferred units and save the results in the units
required by company policy.
The changes made to the units system are retained in the program memory and apply
to all files opened during the current processing session. The program allows to create
a custom units system.
2.12.1 Units Summary
To access the units system, select Units Units form the menu toolbar. This will display
the 'Units Summary' screen:
User Guide 658
This units summary screen contains the list of parameters and their units options:
Unit selections
Select the units for the input and output of the variables
Validation
This sets up the validation range for each variable. If the user enters a value outside of
this range in a model, a warning message will be displayed. For most purposes, the
default validation limits are adequate; however, for particular applications, the user can
change the validation limits if required by entering new values directly from the units
definition screen.
Click on the Details buttons to the right of each variable name in order to view the
conversion values and precision of each particular variable.
2.12.1.1Unit Systems
The user can change the global units' system from tool bar menu Units | ...
659
PROSPER
The following default Units Systems are provided:
Oilfield Units
Norwegian S.I.
Canadian S.I.
German S.I.
French S.I.
Latin S.I.
Selecting on of these options will change units of EVERY variable to that which is used
in the selected system.
Customised unit systems can be created and saved under new names. Different units
can be selected for both input and output.
2.12.1.2Changing Unit Systems for some Variables
It is possible to change the units for an individual variable (rather than the entire unit
system) by right clicking the mouse cursor on the unit to be changed; this option is
available at screen for any input variable:
User Guide 660
2.12.1.3Changing the Units
The Input and Output units for each variable on the list can be changed on the Units |
Units screen.
To change or customise the default Units System:
Scroll through the measurement variables list until the unit item to modify is
visible on the screen.
Select the unit category (Input and/or Output) to modify.
Select the unit field corresponding to the measurement item and click on the
arrow to its right to display the list of unit options.
Select the preferred measurement unit.
To save changes, click Save. A prompt will be displayed to enter a name for the new
Units System:
661
PROSPER
This new system can now be recalled and applied to any file. Custom unit sets can be
erased by clicking the Delete button, then selecting the unwanted units system. The
ability to have separate input and output unit systems allows the user to work with
familiar units and to create reports or export data in any required unit system.
As PROSPER carries out calculations internally in Oilfield Units the unit conversion
factors can be validated by clicking the button located to the right of the particular
variable (labelled Sh/Mu):
The multiplier and shift used for unit conversion will be displayed.
Clicking Report | Print will create a summary report of conversion factors in use.
If some particular units have been modified during the course of a PROSPER session,
the changes will be written into the .SIN and .OUT files when the input data are saved.
User Guide 662
Irrespective of the current units system settings, recalling a previously saved .SIN (or
OUT) file will cause PROSPER to revert to the units saved in the recalled file. To
permanently impose a new set of units on the recalled file, open a custom units file (or
use one of the internal unit sets) and then save the file. The new units settings will be
used whenever the file is loaded.
2.12.1.4Validation Limits
To reduce the possibility of entering incorrect data, PROSPER checks that input data
falls within predetermined validation limits. For most purposes, the default validation
limits are adequate. For particular applications, the user can change the validation limits
if required by entering new values directly from the units definition screen.
Find the required variable by scrolling through the list, and then enter required changes
in the low and high validation limit boxes.
Enter the custom validation limits in the units currently in use. To permanently attach the
new validation limits to a custom units system, click Save before leaving the validation
screen by clicking OK.
2.12.1.5Units Details
The purpose of the 'Units Details' screen is to allow adjustment of the precision of data
displayed for both the input and output of each unit type. To set the display precision,
select Details on the row of the unit to be changed:
The precision of the input and output units can be set from this screen from 1 to 7 or
also set to free:
663
PROSPER
The screen also shows the multiplier and shift used to convert each unit to the equivalent
value in oilfield units for the internal calculations in PROSPER.
2.12.1.6Units Reset
Use the Reset button at the bottom of the Units | Units screen to quickly reset the units
system back to default values. To specify what Units System is default are please go to
the Units tab in the Preferences screen (File | Preferences).
2.13 Wizard
This feature allows the user to set up models and perform certain tasks following a pre-
defined sequence.
The use of Wizards is of particular benefit to inexperienced users, as it allows to easily
set up a model based on active wizard examples by advancing through the input
screens in the correct sequence and asking at any step the user for the required
information. In this way the user will familiarise with PROSPER windows as well as with
the essential steps required to set up, match and use the models.
2.13.1 Running the Wizard
A few wizard examples are available when installing PROSPER. These examples are
step-by-step guides to build typical models, like naturally flowing wells, ESP, etc.
In order to run wizard examples follow first of all select Wizard from the main menu
toolbar:
User Guide 664
Then select the desired Wizard and click on Run to start it. The user will then be
presented with a number of prompt screens and input data screens which will act as a
guide through the selected task.
2.13.2 Creating/Editing a Wizard
From the main Wizard window it is possible to access a series of functions that allow
the user to create his own wizard or edit an already existing one.
To modify an existing wizard select Edit. This will access the wizard script window:
665
PROSPER
To create a new wizard select instead New. This will display an empty script window.
The script consists of a series of Visual Basic commands using OpenServer strings to
set the values of the input parameters, perform calculations, and retrieve results.
Please refer to the OpenServer User Guides for further details about the basic
OpenServer functions.
On the top part of the script window there is the Commands list window, which provides
immediate access to all the OpenServer variables. This window allows selecting the
desired variable and getting a copy of it, which can be pasted in the script window
below.
2.13.2.1Notes of OS strings
A class of OpenServer strings - the so-called menu commands - allow displaying each
of the input screens. The structure of these commands is in general:
DoCmd(PROSPER.MENU.<tag>)
User Guide 666
If <tag> is for example Options, the command will display the main PROSPER options.
To display a plot, instead, the command is:
DoCmd(PROSPER.PLOT.<number>)
If <number> is 1, for example, the command will display the IPR plot.
2.13.2.2Wizard examples
As above mentioned, a number of Wizards are available along with the software. These
examples lead the user step-by-step through the screens in order to build typical
models.
The example scripts can also be used by experienced Users as templates to build their
own scripts.
Recommendation
Petroleum Experts recommends that models be set up according to the worked
examples shown in the Examples Guide. Introducing new users to PROSPER This will
allow the user to have a better understanding of the physics that is behind the software
and the importance of the matching process.
2.14 Plotting
New plots and graphs have been implemented within PROSPER v12.0 and the following
section is intended to guide the user around these plots and see how different cases
and variables can be viewed.
2.14.1 Selecting Plotting Method
While the new plotting method has been added to PROSPER, it is still possible to select
the old plotting method if this is preferred. This can be done in the File | Preferences
menu and going to the Plot tab:
667
PROSPER
If the new plots are to be used, set Display New Plots to Yes while if the old plotting
method is to be used, select No. A third option is also possible; Choose; this option will
give the user the choice of which plot to use every time a plot is selected.
2.14.2 New Plot Screen
An example of the new plotting screen is shown below:
The screen can be split into 5 main sections as detailed below:
- Red - Sensitivity Cases
- Yellow - Variables available to plot
- Green - The Plot
- Blue - Plotting Options
- Black - General Plot Data (Only present within certain plots)
User Guide 668
2.14.2.1Sensitivity Cases
The top left of the plotting screen shows the different sensitivity cases which have been
run. Selecting a given case will allow the saved variables to be added to the plot.
If previously saved plots have been loaded, these will also be seen in this screen.
669
PROSPER
2.14.2.2Variables
The bottom left of the plot screen displays the different variables which can be plotted
for the sensitivity case selected in the box above. How to add single or multiple
variables is discussed in the subsequent sections of this manual.
2.14.2.3Plotting Options
The top of the plotting screen has a number of different plotting options available. These
are shown above and more details about each are given in the table below:
Edit Plot Settings This option accesses the Tee-Chart Editor. From here the
fonts, scales, legends etc. can be changed.
Redraw Select to zoom out to the original scale and redraw plots.
User Guide 670
Remove Single
Series from Plot
If a single series is to be removed from the plot this option
can be used and the series to be removed selected from the
drop down list.
Remove Multiple
Series from Plot
If a group of series are to be removed, this option can be
used to remove them in a single operation.
Save Current Plot
Results to File
If the results from a model are to be compared with another
model, the current plot results can be saved using this option.
Reload Saved Plot
Results from File
If previous results have been saved, they can be reloaded
into the current plot using this option.
Save Current Plot
Setup
If a certain plot setup (for example axis and variables) is
used often, it is good to be able to recall it quickly and easily.
This option allows a plot setup to be saved so it can be
recalled at a later time.
Reload Saved Plot
Setup
If a plot setup has previously been saved, this option can be
used to recall it.
Access Online Help Select to access the online help.
Edit Scales, Legend
etc
The scales, legends, colours etc can be edited from within
PROSPER by selecting this option.
Print Hard Copy Select to print a hard copy of the plot.
Edit/Enter Test Data Test Points can be entered which will be shown on the plot.
View Plot Results (Available in certain plots) If results are available for the plot
(for example in the IPR plot) these can be viewed by
selecting this option.
671
PROSPER
2.14.2.4Plot
The centre of the screen is taken up by the plot itself. Above or to the side of the plot
resides the legend which shows which case is represented by each coloured line on the
plot. If a certain curve is to be removed, the box next to the case name in the legend can
be unticked.
User Guide 672
2.14.2.5General Plot Data
In certain plots (such as the IPR calculation plot) the right hand side of the screen is filled
with additional information. If the information cannot be seen in the screen space, the
scroll bar at the bottom of the screen can be used.
2.14.3 Plotting Variables
The purpose of the plots is to visualise the results of the calculations so as to better
understand them and aid in analysing them. In order to do this, different variables can be
plotted against each other depending upon the situation to be modelled.
2.14.3.1Plotting Variables for Single Case
If a single case is to be plotted, then the variable to be plotted can be selected from the
bottom left hand corner of the screen:
673
PROSPER
Double clicking on a variable will add it to the plot (if there is a free axis to add it to) or
alternatively, a variable can be right clicked on and then the option of adding it to the
right or left axis is presented.
Variables can be plotted on the same axis if they share the same units. For example
User Guide 674
pressure, dP Total Skin and dP Gravel Pack could all be plotted on one axis but
temperature would require to be added to the second axis.
Adding Variables to the Bottom Axis
If the variable is to be added to the bottom axis (for example when performing a
gradient calculation to see temperature against depth) then it can be dragged and
dropped onto the bottom axis.
2.14.3.2Plotting Variables for Multiple Cases
Sometimes it will be necessary to plot the same variable for multiple cases so that the
different results can be compared. Rather than doing this for each individual case
multiple times, it is possible to do this in one batch operation. This is detailed below
using the example of Bottom Measured Depth.
The Bottom Measured Depth for multiple cases can be plotted by selecting Bottom
Measured Depth from the bottom left corner of the plotting screen and then selecting
the 'clock' button:
This will bring up all of the different result streams which contain this data. If a certain
case is to be added to the plot, place a tick next to that case while if it is not to be
included then do not place a tick. If multiple streams have been saved and reloaded
these can also be selected.
675
PROSPER
In this case all the possible cases are selected:
To plot the curves for each, select OK.
User Guide 676
2.14.4 Saving and Recalling Plots
When running different cases which require different options to be enabled within the
model, it is not always possible to simply run a sensitivity and compare plots directly.
Instead, plots from one model can be saved and then recalled to be compared against
the altered model. The models are saved for as long as PROSPER remains open. If the
instance of PROSPER is closed, the saved plots will also be lost.
The steps to do this are shown below.
2.14.4.1Saving a Plot
To save a plot, first select the variable(s) which are to be plotted using the methods
discussed above.
677
PROSPER
When the plot which is to be saved is displayed select the left hand red disk above the
plot:
This will bring up the save plot screen:
User Guide 678
Enter the name under which the plot is to be saved and then select Add. This will
transfer the results stream to the Master List which can be called back at any time.
When this has been done select OK to return to the previous screen.
2.14.4.2Recalling a Plot
Once a plot has been saved it will appear in the left hand side of the screen along with
the current plot results:
679
PROSPER
The results can be recalled to the plot using the methods described in the Plotting
Variables Section.
2.15 Help
PROSPER has an on-line Help facility which enables the user to get information quickly
about a menu option, input field or function command. This facility enables to display
instructions for completing a particular task or input field without exiting from the current
screen. The help windows offer a list of topics which not only include definitions and
functions specific to PROSPER, but details on using some features of Windows as well.
To use the PROSPER on-line help system, the help file must be located in the same
directory as the program. If the user is new to Windows, information on using the Help
system can be made available when selecting the Help option in the PROSPER main
menu and choosing 'Using Help'. This will display a help screen from which the
information required can be selected from a list of topics.
The Help facility has function buttons located at the top of the windows, which can be
used to navigate within the help system. If a particular feature is not currently available,
the button associated with that function is dimmed. Information on specific help topics
may lead to other related topics. Some words in the Help windows are marked with a
solid underline and appear in colour (green) if the user uses a colour screen.
These words are called jump terms and can be used to move around Help more quickly.
When clicking a jump term, Help will move directly to the topic associated with the
User Guide 680
underlined word(s).
2.15.1 Finding Information in Help
2.15.1.1Use the Search feature in Help
This facility is useful for finding specific information about using the keyboard. For
example, the keys used for text selection. Type in the phrase "text selection" and search
the system for the phrase or select the topic from the list displayed.
2.15.1.2Use the Help Index
This option is useful for viewing specific sections listed in the Help index. Go to the topic
or command of interest and select the item required.
2.15.1.3Context Sensitive Help
This feature can be used while working to give information about a particular menu
option.
2.15.2 Accessing Help
To get information quickly about a specific menu option or entry field in PROSPER, the
following methods will display the help facility:
2.15.2.1Help Through the Menu
From the menu bar in PROSPER, click on Help (or ALT H) and select Index. From the
list of help topics, select the topics to see by pointing to the specific item.
2.15.2.2Getting Help Using the Mouse
Press SHIFT+F1
The pointer will change to a question mark.
Choose the menu command or option.
or
Click the Menu command or option, and holding the mouse button down press F1.
2.15.2.3Getting Help Using the Keyboard
Press the ALT key plus the first letter of the menu name, option and press F1.
681
PROSPER
2.15.2.4To Minimise Help
If using the mouse, click the minimise button in the upper-right corner of the help
window. If using the keyboard, press ALT SPACEBAR N. This procedure will close the
help window, but keep the help icon on the Windows desktop.
2.15.3 Flow Correlations
Click Help | Flow Correlations to access a detailed generalised discussion about the
history and theory behind flow correlations and issues that relate to their use in
PROSPER.
2.15.4 Open Server
Click Help | Open Server to access the complete lists of OpenServer variables,
commands and functions.
2.15.5 Help About PROSPER
Click Help | About PROSPER and the following screen will be displayed:
If the user needs to contact Petroleum Experts about a problem with the program, please
have the version number and licence number shown on this screen available should it
User Guide 682
be required.
2.15.6 Web Options
From the Help menu it is possible to access to the following on-line services:
Web Home Page. This option accesses the Petroleum Experts website www.
petroleumexperts.com
Web User Area. This options accesses a dedicated area of the Petroleum Experts
website containing technical information about the IPM Suite and news about the new
developments
Technical Support. This option accesses the section of the Petroleum Experts
website on which it is possible to post technical support requests to the Petroleum
Experts Technical Support Service
2.16 Appendix
The following appendix contains the references used through this manually and also
details some of the equations derived within PETEX for use in the tools.
2.16.1 A - References
2.16.1.1PVT Calculations
1 Sutton, R.P.
& Farshad, F.
F.
'Evaluation of Empirically Derived PVT Properties
for Gulf of Mexico,' (Used for Glaso, Lasater,
Standing & Vazquez-Beggs)
SPE Reservoir Engineering,
(Feb. 1990), 79-86.
2 Beal, C. 'The Viscosity of Air, Water, Natural Gas, Crude
Oil and its Associated Gases at Oil Field
Temperatures and Pressures,'
Trans., AIME (1946) 165, 94-
98.
3 Beggs, H.D. &
Robinson, J.
R.
'Estimating the Viscosity of Crude Oil Systems,' JPT (Sept. 1975), 1140-
1144.
4 Carr, N.L., et
al
'Viscosity of Hydrocarbon Gases Under
Pressure,'
Trans., AIME (1954), 264-
268.
5 Eilerts et al 'Phase Relations of Gas Condensate Fluids,' Monograph 10, U.S. Bureau
of Mines, Washington D.C.
(1957).
6 Brinkman, F.
H. & Sicking,
J.N.
'Equilibrium Ratios for Reservoir Studies', SPE (Nov. 1959), SPE
reprint series No. 15, 240-
246.
7 Katz, D. &
Kurata, F.
'Retrograde Condensation', Ind. Eng. Chem. (June,
1940) 32, No. 6, 817-827.
8 Katz, D.,
Monroe, R. &
Trainer, R.
'Surface Tension of Crude Oils Containing
Dissolved Gases,'
Trans., AIME (1943), 1624,
285-294.
683
PROSPER
9 Lee, et al 'The Viscosity of Natural Gases' Trans., AIME (1966), 997-
1002.
10 Lohrenz et al 'Calculating Viscosities of Reservoir Fluids From
Their Compositions'
JPT (Oct. 1964), 1171-1176.
11 Coats, K.H. 'An Equation of State Compositional Model' SPE 8284 SPE ATCE, Las
Vegas, Nevada, Sept. 23-26,
1979.
12 Nghiem, L.X.,
Fong, D.K. &
Aziz, K.
'Compositional Modelling with an Equation of
State'
SPE 9306 SPE ATCE,
Dallas, Texas, Sept. 21-24,
1980.
13 Winkler, H.W.
& Eads, P.T.
'Algorithm for More Accurately Predicting
Nitrogen-Charged Gas-Lift Valve Operation at
High Pressures and Temperatures'
SPE 18871 SPE POS,
Oklahoma City, March 13-14,
1988.
14 Peng, D.-Y.
and
Robinson, D.
B.
'A New Two-Constant Equation of State' I.&E.C. Fundamentals (1976)
15, No.1, 59-64.
15 Bradley et al 'Effect Of Pressure On The Viscosity Of Water' Petroleum Engineering
Handbook. SPE 1987
16 Bukacek,
Richard F.
'Equilibrium Moisture Content Of Natural Gases' Research Bulletin Vol 8,
Institute of Gas Technology,
Chicago USA, 1955.
17 Muhammad
All Al-
Marhoun
"PVT Correlations for Middle East Crude Oils" JPT (May 1988), 650-666
18 E. O.
Egbogah & J.
T. Ng
"An Improved Temperature-Viscosity Correlation
For Crude Oil Systems"
Journal of Petroleum
Science and Engineering, 5,
(1990), 197-200
2.16.1.1.1 CO2 Injection
The best approach to model CO
2
Injection is to use an Equation Of State PVT Model
and set the Fluid Type as "Retrograde Condensate" and not "Dry And Wet Gas". The
reason behind this is that the "Dry And Wet Gas" models considers the fluid as a single
phase throughout the entire system and modifies the gas properties to account for the
condensate. The "Retrograde Condensate" model assumes multiphase flow modelling
allowing for gas and/or liquid phases to be present anywhere in the system (depending
on the prevailing pressure and temperature).
N.B. In CO
2
Injection, depending on the conditions of pressure and temperature, it is
possible to have phase changes somewhere in the system (Gas-.Liquid->Gas)
The Gray (and Modified Gray) correlation uses its own internal PVT calculator that
overrides the Prosper-calculated pvt properties and therefore this should not be used to
model CO
2
Injection.
User Guide 684
2.16.1.1.2 PVT Separator Pressure
The dry-wet gas model in PROSPER assumes that the condensate drops out at the
separator and therefore treats the fluids as a single phase (gas) in the tubing. (Besides
any possible water produced which will give two-phase flow).
The objective is to obtain the properties of the Well stream gas from the separated gas,
tank vented gas and condensate. (Please see next diagram).
The ideal way to do this is to perform a compositional analysis where the composition
of the gas separated, condensate and the gas vented are known. Then these fluids are
recombined to get the well stream composition and properties.
However most of time the compositions are unknown, and also the quantity and gas
specific gravity of the stock tank gas vented are often not measured.
In those cases, correlations can be used to calculate the gas specific gravity and the GE
(Gas equivalent) or VEQ (volume equivalent).
The VEQ or GE represents the volume of gas vented in the tank plus the volume in scf
that would be occupied by a barrel of stock-tank liquid if it were gas.
PROSPER is using a correlation that depends on the separator pressure to calculate
685
PROSPER
the GE.
The GE is added to the gas rate and used to calculate the pressure losses in the tubing
using the energy balance equation.
In fact from the diagram above we can see the separator pressure dependency, for
instance if the separator pressure is 0 psig, the tank vented gas will be zero, if the
separator pressure is higher then more gas will pass in solution with the liquid towards
the tank. So the separator pressure has an impact on GE.
Other correlations of GE available in the literature that depends on the separator
pressure can be found in the following references: An Improved method for the
determination of the Reservoir gas specific gravity for retrograde gases Gold et.al.,
also the in the book The properties of Petroleum Fluids W. McCain (Chapter 7:
Properties of Wet Gases) explains and show some these correlations available.
2.16.1.2IPR Calculations

1 Dietz 'Determination of Average Reservoir
Pressure From Build Up Surveys,'
Trans., AIME.(1965).
2 Fetkovich M.J. 'The Isochronal Testing of Oil Wells,' SPE 4529 SPE ATCE, Las
Vegas, Sept. 30-Oct. 3.
3 Forcheimer et
al
Zeits V. Dutching, (1901),
45, 1782-1786.
4 Goode P.A. &
Kuchuk F.J.
'Inflow Performance of Horizontal
Wells,'
SPE 21460 Reservoir
Engineering (Aug. 1991) 6,
No. 3, 319-323.
5 Jones L.G.,
Blount, E.M. et
al
'Use of Short Term Multiple Rate Flow
Tests to Predict Performance of Wells
Having Turbulence,'
SPE 6133 SPE ATCE, New
Orleans, Oct. 3-6.
6 Vogel J.V. 'Inflow Performance Relationships for
Solution Gas Drive Wells,'
JPT (Jan. 1968), 83-92.
7 Houz, O.P.,
Horne, R. &
Ramey, H.J. Jr.
'Infinite Conductivity Vertical Fracture
in a Reservoir with Double Porosity
Behaviour'
SPE 12778 SPE Regional
Meeting, Long Beach,
California, April 11-13, 1984.

8 Karakas, M. &
Tariq, S.
'Semi-Analytical Productivity Models
for Perforated Completion'
SPE 18271 SPE ATCE,
Houston, Texas, Oct. 2-5,
1988.
9 Dikken, B.J. 'Pressure Drop in Horizontal Wells and
its Effect on Their Production
Performance'
Technology, November,
1990; Trans., AIME, 289.
10 Chaperon, I. 'Theoretical Study of Coning Towards
Horizontal and Vertical Wells in
Anisotropic Formations'
SPE 15377 SPE ATCE,
New Orleans, Oct. 5-8.
User Guide 686
11 Goode, P.A. &
Wilkinson, D.J.
'Inflow Performance of Partially Open
Horizontal Wells'
SPE 19341 1989 SPE
Eastern Region Meeting,
Morgantown, WV, Oct. 24-
27. Also JPT, August 1991,
pp 983-985.
12 Papazatacos,
P., Herring, T.
R., Martinsen, R.
& Skjaeveland,
S.M.
'Cone Breakthrough Time for Horizontal
Wells'
SPE 19822 SPE ATCE,
San Antonio, Texas, Oct. 8-
11.
13 Cinco-Ley, H.,
Samanieogo, F.
& Dominguez,
N.
'Transient Pressure Behaviour For a
Well With a Finite-Conductivity vertical
Fracture '
SPE 6014 SPE ATCE, New
Orleans, Louisiana, Oct 3-6
1976
14 Mavor, M.J. &
Cinco Ley, H
'Transient Pressure Behaviour of
Naturally Fractured Reservoirs'
SPE 7977 California
Regional Meeting SPE,
Ventura, California, April
1979
15 Wong, D.,
Harrington, A. &
Cinco Ley, H
'Application of the Pressure Derivative
Function in th Pressure Transient
testing of Fractured Wells'
SPE 13056 SPE ATCE,
Houston, Texas, Sept. 16-
19, 1984
16 Warren, J.E. &
Root, P.J.
'The behaviour of Naturally Fractured
Reservoirs'
SPE 426, SPEJ (Spet
1963), 245-255
17 Hegre, T.T. &
Larsen, L.
'Productivity of Multifractured
Horizontal Wells'
SPE 28845 SPE European
Petroleum Conference,
London, UK, October 1994
18 Urbanczyk, C.H,
& Wattenbarger,
R.A
'Optimization of Well Rates under Gas
Coning Conditions.'
SPE Advanced Technology
Series, Vol. 2, No. 2, April
1994.
19 Larsen, L. 'Productivity Evaluations of Wells in
Long Rectangular Drainage Areas.'
20 H. Cinco, F. G.
Miller, H. J.
Ramey, Jr.
'Unsteady-State Pressure Distribution
Created by A Directionally Drilled Well'
SPE 5131
21 Pucknell, J. K.
and Clifford, P. J.
'Calculation of Total Skin Factors' SPE 23100 (1991)
22 Marting, V.E
and Brons, F.
'The Effect of Restricted Fluid Entry on
Well Productivity'
Technology, February 1961
2.16.1.3Multiphase Flow Calculations
1 Anand, et al, Predicting Thermal Conductivities of
Formations from Other Known
Properties,
JPT (Oct. 1980).
2 Ashford, F.E,
and Pierce, P.E.
The Determination of Multiphase
Pressure Drops and Flow Capacities in
Downhole Safety Valves (Storm
Chokes)
SPE paper 5161 presented
at the 1974 SPE Annual Fall
Meeting, Houston Oct. 6-9.
687
PROSPER
3 Beggs, H.D. and
Brill, J.P.
A Study of Two Phase Flow in Inclined
Pipe'
JPT (May 1973), 606-617.
4 Churchill-Chu Correlating Equations for Laminar and
Turbulent Free Convection from a
Horizontal Cylinder,
International Journal Heat
Mass Transfer (1975) 18,
1049-1053
5 Fancher, and
Brown, G.G
Prediction of Pressure Gradients for
Multiphase Flow in Tubing,
SPE Journal (Mar. 1963),
59-64.
6 Fortunati Two Phase Flow Through Well-head
Chokes,
at 1972 SPE European
Spring Meeting, Amsterdam,
May 17-18.
7 Hagedorn, A.R.
and Brown, K.E
Experimental Study of Pressure
Gradients Occurring During Continuous
Two-Phase Flow in Small-Diameter
Vertical Conduits,
JPT (Apr. 1965), 475-484.
8 Mandhane et al, A Flow Pattern Map for Gas-liquid
Flow in Horizontal Pipes,
International Journal
Multiphase Flow, 1, 537-541.
9 Moody Friction Factor for Pipe Flow, Trans., AIME (1944), 66,
671-675.
10 Mukherjee, H.
and Brill, J.P
Liquid Holdup Correlations for Inclined
Two-Phase Flow,
JPT (May 1983), 1003-1008.
11 Oranje Condensate Behaviour in Gas Pipeline
is Predictable,
Oil and Gas Journal (July
1973), 39-43.
12 Orkiszewski Predicting Two Phase Pressure Drop
in Vertical Pipes,
JPT (June 1967), 829-833.
13 Duns, H. Jr and
Ros, N.C.J.
Vertical Flow of Gas and Liquid
Mixtures in Wells,
Proc., Sixth World
Petroleum Congress,
Frankfurt (1963) 451.
14 Tansev, E.
Startzman, R.A.
and Cooper, A.
M.
Predicting Pressure Loss and Heat
Transfer in Geothermal Wellbores,
at the 1975 SPE Annual Fall
Meeting, Dallas, Sept. 28-
Oct. 1.
15 Gould, T.L, Tek,
M.R. and Katz,
D.L
Two-Phase Flow Through Vertical,
Inclined, or Curved Pipe,
JPT, August, 1974, 915-
925.
2.16.1.4Temperature Calculations

1Chiu, K. and
Thakur, S.C.
'Modeling of Wellbore Heat Losses in
Directional Wells Under Changing Injection
Conditions,'
SPE 22870 1991 SPE Annual Fall
Meeting, Dallas, Oct. 9-9. pp 517 -
528.
2Hasan, A.R.
and Kabir, C.
S.
'Heat Transfer During Two-Phase Flow in
Wellbores: Part I - Formation
Temperature,'
478.
User Guide 688
3Hasan, A.R.
and Kabir, C.
S.
'Heat Transfer During Two-Phase Flow in
Wellbores: Part II - Wellbore Fluid
Temperature,'
708.
4Carslaw, H.S.
and Jaeger,
J.C.
'Conduction of Heat in Solids,' Oxford Science Publications, Oxford,
U.K., 1959.
2.16.1.5Artificial Lift Design
1Gibbs S.
G.
'Predicting the Behavior of Sucker-
Rod Pumping Systems'
SPE 588 SPE Rocky Mountain Regional Meeting,
May 27-28, 1963, in Denver, Colorado, 769-788.
2Schmidt
Z., Doty
D.R.
'System Analysis for Sucker-Rod
Pumping'
SPE 15426 SPE ATCE, October 5-8, 1986, in New
Orleans, Louisiana, 125-130.
3Gibbs S.
G., Neely
A.B.
'Computer Diagnosis of Down-Hole
Conditions in Sucker Rod Pumping
Wells'
SPE 1165 SPE Annual Fall Meeting, October 3-6,
1965, in Denver, Colorado, 91-98.
4Patton L.
D.
'A Computer Technique for
Analyzing Pumping Well
Performance'
SPE 1986 SPE 38th California Regional Meeting,
October 26-27, 1967, in Los Angeles, California,
243-249.
5Jennings
J.W.
'Design of Sucker-Rod Pump
Systems'
SPE 20152 Petroleum Technology in the Second
Century, October 16-19, 1989, in Socorro, New
Mexico, 77-87.
6Gibbs S.
G.
'A Review of Methods for Design
and Analysis of Rod Pumping
Installations'
SPE 9980, December 1982, 2931-2942.
7Gabor
Takacs
'Gas Lift Manual" Penn Well Corporation Tulsa, Oklahoma 2005
8Gabor
Takacs
'Sucker-Rod Pumping Manual' Penn Well Corporation Tulsa, Oklahoma 2003
689
PROSPER
2.16.2 B - Equations
2.16.2.1Black Oil Model for Condensate
GOR
sep
GOR
tnk
PSEP
TSEP
TANK
gsep
gtnk
gtot
Total GOR is the total of separator and tank GOR.
R R R
tot sep tnk
Feed gas gravity (
g
tot
) is the weighted average of separator and tank gas gravities.

) + (
=

tot
tnk tnk sep sep
tot
R
R g R g
g
2.16.2.1.1 Mass Balance Calculations
Based on the principles of mass balance the following equations can be derived.
Known Parameters:
Produced Gas Gravity g
gt
Condensate specific gravity
c
The condensate to gas ratio CGR STB/SCF
Air Mol. Wt. 28.966 lb/lb.mol
Water density 62.43 lb/cu.ft
Air density @ SC 0.0764 lb/Scf
User Guide 690
Mol.wt of condensate M
c
lb/lb.mol
Basis of calculations : 1 SCF of Produced gas.
The gas gravity of the mixture g can be evaluated using the following equation
Total inlet mass calculation:
Mass of Produced gas = Vol of gas @SC x Density of gas @SC
= Vol of gas @SC x Gas gravity x Density of air @SC
=
=
Mass of Condensate = Vol of Cond @SC x Density of Cond. @SC
= Vol of Cond.@SC x sp.gravity x Density of water @SC
=
=
Thus, Total mixture mass = Mass of Produced gas + Mass of
Condensate
691
PROSPER
Total inlet moles calculation:
Moles of Produced gas = Mass of gas/ Mol.Wt.of gas
= Mass of gas / Gas gravity x Mol.Wt. air
=
=
Moles of Cond. = Mass of Cond./ Mol.Wt.of Cond
=
=
Thus, total mixture moles = Moles of Produced gas + Moles of
Condensate
Thus the gas gravity of the inlet mixture is
User Guide 692
This expression thus gives, the average gas gravity of a mixture, which has
a condensate to gas ratio of CGR STB/SCF, with the gas having a gas
gravity of g
gt
and the condensate having a specific gravity of
c
and
molecular weight of M
c
.
This also can be used to work out the condensate to gas ratio of a mixture
gas if the gas gravity is known as shown in the following equation.
2.16.2.1.2 Using the mass balance results to define Condensate Model
Based on this formulation, the separator gas gravity and the average total gas gravity,
the effective CGR vaporised in separator gas is estimated as follows
c c sep c
tot sep
sep
M g
g g
CGR
/ 132904 - 3 . 4588
-
=
Separator liquid/gas ratio ( ) referred to separator liquid.
Also assuming that the condensate is above dew point, the initial CGR under reservoir
conditions is,
tnk sep
res
R R
CGR
+
1
=
693
PROSPER
Thus, the gas gravity under reservoir conditions can be found as
c res c
res c tot
res
M CGR
CGR g
g
/ 132904 + 1
3 . 4588 +
=
Thus, we can have two independent equations, which are
At Reservoir conditions:
c res
res t
res
M CGR
CGR g
g
/ 132904 + 1
4588 +
=
csc
csc
At Separator Conditions:
c csc sep csc
tot sep
sep
/M g 132904 - 3 . 4588
g - g
= CGR
NOTE:
gt > gsep CGRsep negative
At and above Dew Point:
tnk sep
res
R R
CGR
+
1
=
The CGR at pressures lower than dew point is estimated by a second degree
polynomial as shown
2
dewpoint
min min
1
) (
f
f
P
P
CGR CGR CGR CGR
res
where
Pmin being the maximum liquid dropout pressure and a function of the dewpoint
pressure.
i.e.
User Guide 694
dewpoint min
P F P
Pdew is an input to the model.
The vaporised CGR curve as a function of pressure looks as below:
1
comp
f
P
Pdew
f
is from maximum liquid dropout or mix condensate in solution.
) - ( + =
min min
CGR CGR CGR CGR
res
*

2
int
- 1
-
f
f
P
P
dewpo
2.16.2.1.3 Estimation of CGRmin
First calculate condensate mole fraction:
Condensate
T
f
RES
% * 45 . 1 +
161 -
08 . 7
+ 15 . 0 =
(From Eilerts et al)
695
PROSPER
o
g
res
B
B
L CGR CGR
5 . 561
- =
max min
Where
L
max
is the maximum liquid dropout percentage.
Thus we need to estimate Bo and Bg to find CGRmin from the following equation
o
g
B
B L
CGR
5 . 561
CGR

max res =
min
2.16.2.2Multiphase Pseudo Pressure
r
P k
rh q
o
o
o
2
r
P
k
rh q
g
g
g
2
r
P k
rh q
w
w
w
2
Total Mass Flow Rate:
r
P k
k
k
rh m
w
w
w
g
g
g
o
o
o r
2
Change of Mass Flow Rate Across Annulus:
r
P k
k
k
r
r
h
r
m
w
w
w
g
g
g
o
o
o
r
2
......................1
User Guide 696
Change in Mass Flow Rate = Change in Density / Mass accumulation in Annulus
rh 2 =
t r
m
r
..............................................................2
w w g g o o
S S S

1 and 2
t
r
r
P k
k
k
r
r
w
w
w
g
g
g
o
o
o
.....................
3
By Definition:
Equation 3 becomes:
t
P
c r
r
P
k k k r
r
w
w
w
g
g
g
o
o
o
_
To Linearise this Equation:
P
B
B WOR
B
B GOR
k
P
q
q
q
q
k
P
k
k
k
k
k
P k k
k
p m
p
w
o
w out
g
o
g out
o
o
o
p
w
o
w
g
o
g
o
o
o
p
w
w
o
o
w
g
g
o
o
g
o
o
o
p
w
w
w
g
g
g
o
o
o
0
0
0
0
) (
Combining we get:
t
p m
F
c r r
r
p m
k r
r
o
o
) ( ) (
Where
697
PROSPER
w
o
w out
g
o
g out
o
B
B WOR
B
B GOR
F

t
p m
B
c
r
p m
r r
p m
o
o
) (
=
) (

1
+
) (
_
2
2
F
S S S
w w g g o o
+ +
c = C
For Condensates:
t
p m
k r
p m
r r
p m
g
g
) (
c =
) ( 1
+
) (
2
2
g
w g o
F
S S S
c C
w g o
+ +
=
w
g
w
g o
g
out o
g
B
WGR B
B
CGR B
F + + =
2.16.2.3Temperature Models
User Guide 698
2.16.2.3.1 Rough Approximation Temperature Model
The diagram above shows the ambient temperature varying along the length of the well.
This allows us to calculate the ambient temperature at any point along the well (x) using
the following equation:
The Rough Approximation temperature model assumes that the heat transferred
between fluid and the surroundings by all the different heat transfer mechanisms can be
captured using an Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient (also called the U Value). This U
value has the units BTU/h/ft2/oF where the area is referenced to the internal wall of the
tubing or casing (depending which the fluid is travelling through). This means that the
heat transferred is equal to:
699
PROSPER
The A refers to the area of the inner tubing or casing wall and will be equal to the inner
diameter multiplied by pi multiplied by the height of the segment. The T
Surroundings
is the
formation temperature at the segment depth (T
a
(x)) and is found from the geothermal
gradient as shown above. TFluid, average is the average temperature of the fluid within
the segment.
Once the heat transferred to the surroundings is known, we assume that the energy
transferred is obtained from the heat generated when the fluid drops in temperature.
This can be calculated by multiplying the average heat capacity of each phase by the
mass flow rate of the phase and then by the temperature drop in the fluid:
If we equate the heat transferred with the heat obtained from the drop in temperature we
get get a single equation which implies that the rate of change of temperature with depth
is:
Where:
T
a1
= Ambient temperature at L
1
T = Average fluid temperature in the segment.
= Deviation angle
= Fluid mass flow rate
C
p
= Weighted average specific heat capacity for all the phases
U = Overall heat transfer coefficient referred to pipe inside diameter
D = Pipe inside diameter
G = Geothermal gradient
2.16.2.3.1.1 Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient
This value is used to calculate heat loss in surface or downhole equipment. This should
not be confused with the thermal conductivity for a particular type of pipe. The overall
heat transfer coefficient accounts for the heat flow through the pipe, annulus (in a well)
and insulation (if present) to the surroundings and is referenced to the pipe inside
diameter. Heat transfer by forced and free convection, conduction and radiation must
all be accounted for in the value of the overall heat transfer coefficient. Insulated buried
flowlines can have heat transfer coefficients as low as 0.1 (BTU/hr/ft
2
/
0
F) whereas
uninsulated, unburied flowlines can be higher than 100.
User Guide 700
Typical values for individual flowlines are :-
Buried Carbon Steel Flowlines 1.0
Unburied Carbon Steel
Flowlines
16.0
Carbon Steel Risers in Water 18.0
Carbon Steel Risers in Air 5.6
Flexible Pipe in Water 2.8
The overall heat transfer coefficient (U value) used to determine the heat exchange in
the Surface Equipment (Xmas Tree to Manifold) is entered in the Surface Equipment
section of the Equipment Data input area.
The overall heat transfer coefficient entered in the Geothermal Gradient section is the
one used to determine the heat exchange in the Downhole Equipment (Xmas Tree
downward).
The U values entered in the two sections mentioned above will be used throughout the
model when running a calculation like System, Gradient, VLP calculation, or also the
VLP matching itself.
As rule of thumb we suggest to use as starting values of U the following:
Dry and Wet Gas
1-3 BTU/(hrft
2
0
F)
Retrograde Condensate
5-7 BTU/(hrft
2
0
F)
Oil and Water
8-10 BTU/(hrft
2
0
F)
The values of the heat transfer coefficient above reported are the ones that we suggest
to use as starting point during the temperature matching process, as we found out that
in many cases they are not too far from the actual values. The actual value should always
be estimated as part of the VLP/IPR Matching process.
Please, note that the heat transfer coefficient, which accounts at the same time for the
different mechanisms of heat transfer, may have very different values, depending on
all the factors affecting the heat transfer (the packer fluid, fluid characteristics, flow
regime, type of completion, materials used, thickness of tubing and casing etc.).
2.16.2.3.2 Enthalpy Balance
Enthalpy Balance temperature model in PROSPER applies the general energy
equation for flowing fluid:
701
PROSPER
In terms of Enthalpy
,
this is written:
In other terms:
If heat transfer with the surroundings (Q) is neglected, the usual pressure equation
solved in multiphase flow results. PROSPER solves the general energy equation by
considering the enthalpy balance across an incremental length of pipe. The enthalpy
term includes the effects of pressure (including Joule-Thomson effect) and phase
changes.
The algorithm commences by calculating the
enthalpy at the known pressure and
temperature of the first calculation node. i.e.
H
1
at (T
1
,P
1
)
For a given pipe increment, the enthalpy (H
2
)
at the other end of the pipe is estimated. The
difference (H
2
-H
1
) is compared to H.
Where

User Guide 702
If previous calculations exist, then:
P P G L T T
dt
dz
L
2 1 2 1
;
to give the first estimate of H2
We now deal with a piece of tubing of pipe length L,
and
P
P P T T
1 2 1 2
2 2
; T
The total heat transfer coefficient is estimated for the T, P of the iteration step to
calculate the heat exchanged. Using the energy equation, we can find dh. If dh does not
equal H
2
-H
1
, the iteration continues until convergence. The Enthalpy Balance method
solves the energy equation simultaneously for both temperature and pressure. The
solution temperature at the downstream side of the pipe increment is therefore the value
of T
2
when the iteration has converged.
The heat transfer coefficient is used to calculate dQ within the enthalpy balance
iterations and not the temperature.
The heat transfer coefficient is itself a function of the temperature of both the fluid and
the surroundings; therefore iteration is required to find both the heat transfer coefficient
and the enthalpy balance. The formation is a thermal sink at temperature T
e
. The
temperature profile near the wellbore is dependent upon producing time and the thermal
diffusivity of the formation. The heat diffusivity equation accounts for localised heating
(or cooling) of the formation by the well fluids.
For a pipe increment, the heat flow is calculated using:
Where: is the temperature difference between the fluid and the formation at
infinity.
is the effective thermal conductivity of the formation (including allowance for well
fluids in porous formations)
703
PROSPER
is the solution of the heat diffusivity equation
The exact solution of heat diffusivity equation is:
(Carslaw and Jaeger Page 336)
This integral poses numerical problems as u0 and is slow. This equation is evaluated
for very early times only.
For intermediate times, PROSPER uses a fit of the TD vs tD generated using the exact
solution. At later times a logarithmic approximation is used:
Where thermal diffusivity
This formulation approximates the exact solution with less than 1% error. (From Kwan-
Chu and Subash Thakur).
is the overall heat transfer coefficient.
The overall heat transfer coefficient takes into account forced convection inside the pipe
and free convection outside the pipe plus radiation and conduction.
User Guide 704
Heat transfer from the pipe is in three terms:
Conduction
Forced Convection
Free Convection
and Radiation
705
PROSPER
Now, let us examine the components of the overall heat loss coefficient individually:
is due to forced convection inside the pipe
Where k is the average conductivity.
= mixture Reynolds number
(depends on VLP correlation used)
i.e.
mixture Prandtl number
In the annulus, the free convection term is:
where: i.e. mixture Grashof number
and mixture density
thermal expansion coefficient
The convection terms are themselves a function of temperature. Iteration is therefore
required to find the annulus temperature for the convection term and determine the
overall heat transfer coefficient
User Guide 706
ti
r
to
r
ci
r
co
r
cem
r
H
2
H
1
H
1
P
1
T
1
,
The radiation term is given by:
where is the Stefan-Boltzman constant and is emissivity.
The Conduction Terms can be expressed as (considering the tubing), where:
h = heat transfer coefficient in W / (K m2)
k = effective thermal conductivity in W / (m K)
Similar expressions are used for each casing string and each term combined to find the
total conductivity term .
707
PROSPER
2.16.2.3.2.1 Default Thermal Properties Database
The data listed below is at standard conditions. Correlations are used to estimate
thermal properties at other temperatures and pressures.
Dry Rock Properties
Cp Conductivity
Specific
Gravity
BTU/lb/
deg F
BTU/hr/ft/deg F
Sandstone 0.183 1.06 2.64
Shale 0.224 0.7 2.4
Limestone 0.202 0.54 2.71
Dolomite 0.219 1.0 2.87
Halite 0.219 2.8 2.17
Anhydrite 0.265 0.75 2.96
Gypsum 0.259 0.75 2.32
Lignite 0.3 2.0 1.5
Volcanics 0.2 1.6 2.65
Rock In Situ Fluids
Cp Conductivity
BTU/lb/deg
F
BTU/hr/ft/deg F
Water (Low
salinity)
1.0 0.35
Water (High
Salinity)
1.02 0.345
Heavy Oil 1.04 0.34
Medium Oil 0.49 0.083
Light Oil 0.5 0.0815
Gas 0.26 0.0215
The dry rock properties are modified to wet rock properties using the in-situ porosity,
permeability and rock consistency.
User Guide 708
Downhole Equipment
Conduction
Heat Transfer
Coefficient
Emmissivity
BTU/ft/hr/deg F
Mild Steel Tubing 26 0.65
Plactic Coated
Tubing
20 0.65
Stainless Steel
(13%)
18 0.4
Stainless Steel
(15%)
15 0.3
Line Pipe 27 0.9
Plactic Coated Pipe 20 0.9
Flexible 0.3 0.95
Bitumen 0.6 0.95
Foam 0.02 0.8
Concrete 0.1 0.9
2.16.2.4Choke Calculation
From Bernoulli:
709
PROSPER
From Mass Conservation:
In the throat, the maximum velocity is the speed of sound. Under critical conditions, the
choke becomes independant of the downstream pressure and temperature.
Vms : 2 phase sound velocity from FORTUNATI, Vms will be much lower than the
velocity of either phase. Critical conditions are reached at much lower velocities.
For a mono phase
2.16.2.5Sand Control Calculations
This section is intended to review the calculations used in PROSPER to determine the skin as
a function of the available sand control methods.
These methods are:
Gravel Pack
Pre-Packed Screen
Wire Wrapped Screen
Slotted Liner
User Guide 710
Before addressing each method individually, it is best to understand the objectives and
reasons for which the sand models are defined as in PROSPER.
Skin values are traditionally applied as constant values by assuming constant fluid properties
at any place in the reservoir. These values are designed to account for an added pressure
drop around the wellbore due to non-radial flow (as assumed by Darcy).
This results in the following relationship for a radial reservoir:
S being the constant skin value.
Looking at a radial reservoir, the pressure drop is a function of the velocity at which the fluid
travels from the outer drainage area to the wellbore:
By implementing a constant skin, it is assumed that the same fluid properties will be
observed whether the fluid is at the initial reservoir pressure or at bottomhole pressure.
Having accounted for the log term in the pressure drop calculation allows for the pressure
profile towards the wellbore to be analysed:
When applying sand control, the permeability directly around the wellbore is therefore known.
711
PROSPER
The gravel pack thickness and permeability are known which means that the pressure drop
across it can be calculated.
Knowing the above information and with such a drastic change in conditions (having
established that constant fluid properties are unrealistic), the pressure drop across the sand
control would be most reliably determined if the fluid properties at Prwsf were known.
When calculating the pressure drop between the sandface and the gravel pack, there are two
options in PROSPER:
These two options regard the how the fluid properties are to be modelled, should the bubble
point be reached at the sandface.
If Single Phase is selected, the fluid properties will be recalculated assuming that the same
proportions of the same phases will always be present.
If Multi Phase is selected, should the bubble point be reached; the fluid properties of any new
phases (i.e. gas) will also be calculated and their impact on the pressure drop will be
accounted for.
It is important to note the presence of these options.
One of the assumptions made by analytical inflow models is that they are single phase.
User Guide 712
By calculating the pressure drop between the sandface and the gravel pack, the following
relationship for a radial reservoir can now be used:
This means that for each change in the pressure around the wellbore (and corresponding
change in rate), a new Pskin can be calculated.
For those who are still more comfortable with overall skin values, these are also calculated
and displayed:
The overall relationships used to determine the Pskin remains the same regardless of
which sand control method is in use:
P sf= AQ + BQ
The rates (Q) entered in the pressure drop equation are a function of whether two-phase or
three-phase fluids are to be accounted for.
For oil and water:
If gas is also present and a three phase liquid is to be accounted for:
The overall relationships used to determine the Darcy and non-Darcy components entered in
the above relationship remains constant, the input data will however vary depending on the
type of system being modelled.
For Oil and Water:
713
PROSPER
For Gas:
It is of importance to note that these parameters are calculated at the sandface and
across the sand control with respect to the conditions at the sandface and sand
control.
So the viscosities, gravities etc. have been recalculated at the pressures at the
sandface and sand control before calculating the above values.
2.16.2.5.1 Pressure Drop Across Sand Control
The following text describes the overall methodology applied to each sand control method to
determine the skin.
2.16.2.5.1.1 Gravel Pack
1. Fluid PVT at initial reservoir conditions is known (already as user entered values).
2. The IPR to the sandface is calculated, so the objective is now to calculate the dP
across the gravel pack:
User Guide 714
3. Having determined the sandface pressure and dP across the gravel pack;
Pw = Pw1 dP (gravel pack).
The steps taken to determine the dP (gravel pack) remain the same as previously
defined.
4. Fluid properties are recalculated at Pw.
5. Skin due to the gravel pack can then be defined using the newly calculated PVT at
Pw:
2.16.2.5.1.2 Pre-Packed Screen
across the screen:
715
PROSPER
3. Having determined the sandface pressure, the skin due to the pre-packed screen is
calculated and is made up of a Darcy and non-Darcy components.
Total Skin = S + DQ:
(Darcy skin at rw + Darcy skin between rw and rwsf)
User Guide 716
+ (non-Darcy skin at rw + non-Darcy skin between rw and rwsf)Ql
4. Fluid properties are recalculated at Pwsi (pressure at inside of screen).
Pwsi:
6. Bottomhole pressure can now be calculated: Pw = Pwsf Pscreen
2.16.2.5.1.3 Wire-Wrapped Screen
across the screen:
3. Having determined the sandface pressure, the skin due to the wire wrapped screen is
calculated and is made up of Darcy and non-Darcy components:
717
PROSPER
Total Skin (wire wrapped) = S + DQ:
(Darcy skin at rw + Darcy skin between rw and rws)
+ (non-Darcy skin at rw + non-Darcy skin between rw and rws)Ql
4. Fluid properties are recalculated at Pw.
Pw:

6. Bottomhole pressure can now be calculated: Pw = Pwsf Pscreen
2.16.2.5.1.4 Slotted Liner
across the slotted liner:
User Guide 718
3. Having determined the sandface pressure, the skin due to the liner is calculated and
is made up of a Darcy and non-Darcy components.
4. The following definitions are used
R
s
Screen outer radius (ft)
R
i
Inner Radius Of Slotted Liner (ft)
R
o
Outer Radius Of Slotted Liner (ft)
R
w
Wellbore Radius (ft)
R
se
Radius such that between R
s
and R
se
, radial flow centred on the well is
assumed
R
oe
Radius such that between R
oe
and R
w
, radial flow centred on the well is
assumed
R
isl
Radius of Flow centred on the inner side of the slot
R
osl
Radius of Flow centred on the outer side of the slot
W
slot
Width Of Slot (ft)
H
slot
Height Of Slot (ft)
DARCY COMPONENTS
When determining the Darcy skin, there are a few more components which need to
be accounted for when referring to slotted liners.
719
PROSPER
- SPF = The number of slots per foot (Slot Density)
- the average number of slots around the circumference of the liner:
S
pc
= SPF * H
slot
- We then consider 2 cases
o where the half distance between slots is greater than the distance to R
s
or R
o
o where it is not.
- if SL
o
/2 > (R
w
R
o
)
R
osl
= R
w
R
o
Else
R
osl
= SL
o
/2
- if SL
i
/2 > (R
i
R
s
)
R
isl
= R
i
R
s
Else
R
isl
= SL
i
/2
R
oe
and R
se
are calculated by assuming that the whole area is covered by radial flow into
the slot or radial flow centred on the well. R
se
is assumed zero if no screen present.
R
oe
= ( (R
o
) + 0.5* (S
pc
) * (R
osl
) )
0.5
R
se
= ( (R
i
) + 0.5* (S
pc
) * (R
isl
) )
0.5
User Guide 720
The skin due to linear flow through the slot and radial flow on each side of the slot is
made up of three components:
Overall Darcy skin = skin due to linear flow +skin due to radial flow
NON-DARCY COMPONENTS
The non-Darcy skin due to linear flow through the slot
The non-Darcy skin due to radial flow centred on the slot is made up of two
components:
i. This D value is required for the inside of the slotted liner and as such is corrected
with respect to the properties specific to the inside of the slotted liner:
721
PROSPER
ii. This D value is required for the outside of the slotted liner and as such is
corrected with respect to the properties specific to the outside of the slotted liner:
The non-Darcy factor due to radial flow centred on the well is also made up of two
components:
i. With respect to the fluid travelling between the liner and wellbore:
ii. With respect to the fluid travelling across the screen:
Overall non-Darcy skin = D
e
= D
sl
+ D
osl
+ D
isl
+ D
oe
+ D
se
Total Skin (S
sl
) = S + DQ : (linear flow skin + Radial flow skin) + (non-Darcy
skin)Ql
5. Fluid properties are recalculated at P
w
.
6. The Pressure Drop due to the Slotted Liner Skin can then be defined using the newly
calculated PVT at Pw:

User Guide 722
7. Bottomhole pressure can now be calculated: P
w
= P
wsf
P
slotted liner
2.16.2.6Multi-Phase Flow Correlations
The flowing pressure gradient in a producing well comprises 3 terms:
Gravity due to density of the produced fluid mixture
Friction from shear stress between the flowing fluids and the pipe wall
Acceleration as a result of expansion of fluids as the pressure reduces
For oil wells, the main component of pressure loss is the gravity or hydrostatic term.
Calculation of the hydrostatic pressure loss requires knowledge of the proportion of the
pipe occupied by liquid (holdup) and the densities of the liquid and gas phases.
Accurate modeling of fluid PVT properties is essential to obtain in-situ gas/liquid
proportions, phase densities and viscosities.
Calculation of holdup is complicated by the phenomenon of gas/liquid slip. Gas, being
less dense than liquid flows with a greater vertical velocity than liquid. The difference in
velocity between the gas and liquid is termed the slip velocity. The effect of slip is to
increase the mixture density and hence the gravity pressure gradient.
Multi-phase flow correlations are used to predict the liquid holdup and frictional pressure
gradient. Correlations in common use consider liquid/gas interactions - the oil and
water are lumped together as one equivalent fluid. They are therefore more correctly
termed 2-phase flow correlations. Depending on the particular correlation, flow regimes
are identified and specialised holdup and friction gradient calculations are applied for
each flow regime.
As yet, no single correlation performs better than others for all flow conditions.
Fancher
Brown
The Fancher Brown correlation is a no-slip hold-up correlation that is
provided for use as a quality control. It gives the lowest possible value of
VLP since it neglects gas/liquid slip it should always predict a pressure
which is less than than the measured value. Even if it gives a good
match to measured downhole pressures, Fancher Brown should not be
used for quantitative work. Measured data falling to the left of Fancher
Brown on the correlation comparison plot indicates a problem with fluid
density (i.e PVT) or field pressure data. Please see the VLP Quality
Check Section for mode information.
Hagedorn
Brown
The Hagedorn Brown correlation performs well in oil wells for slug flow at
moderate to high production rates (well loading is poorly predicted).
Hagedorn Brown should not be used for condensates and whenever
mist flow is the main flow regime. It under predicts VLP at low rates and
should not be used for predicting minimum stable rates.
723
PROSPER
Duns and
Ros
Modified
The Duns and Ros Modified correlation is derived from the Duns and
Ros Original correlation. The original correlation was modified by
Petroleum Experts to overestimate the pressure drop in oil wells for the
slug flow regime. This correlation should only be used for quality
checking of the input well test data and should never be used for
calculating the pressure drop in the wellbore or pipelines and hence
should not be used for lift curve generation either.
Duns and
Ros
Original
The Duns and Ros Original Correlation is derived from the original
published method. In PROSPER the original Duns and Ros correlation
has been enhanced and optimised for use with condensates. This
correlation performs well in mist flow cases and may be used in high
GOR oil wells and condensate wells.
Petroleum
Experts
The Petroleum Experts correlation combines the best features of
existing correlations. Petroleum Experts correlation uses the Gould et al
Flow Map and for the various flow regimes we use the following:
Bubble flow: Wallis and Griffith
Slug flow: Hagedorn and Brown
Transition: Duns and Ros
Annular Mist flow: Duns and Ros
Petroleum
Experts 2
The Petroleum Experts 2 correlation includes the features of the PE
correlation plus original work on predicting low-rate VLPs and well
stability.
The PE2 correlation has been tested for numerous high flow rate cases
and found to provide a good estimate of the pressure drops. Examples
include oil wells exceeding 40000STB/d and gas wells with 7in casing
capable of producing up to 1Bscf/day.
PE2 has also been externally tested as the most reliable well flow
correlation irrespective of fluid type, flow regime or pipe specification.
J.E. Norman Liley; Stuart Oakley; "Downhole Pressure Boosting in
Natural Gas Wells: Well Candidate Selection and Project Progress"
SPE 96037-PA
Shah Kabir et al, SPE109868
Petroleum
Experts 3
The Petroleum Experts 3 correlation includes the features of the PE2
correlation plus original work for viscous, volatile and foamy oils. This
attempts to model the impact that shear dependent properties have on
the flowing conditions.
User Guide 724
Petroleum
Experts 4
The Petroleum Experts 4 model is an advanced mechanistic model
which was derived to be suitable for any angled wells (including downhill
flow) suitable for any fluid (including Retrograde Condensate). Due to
the advancements made in the Petroleum Experts 5 it is recommended
that this correlation is not used within integrated production models and
instead Petroleum Experts 5 can be used.
Petroleum
Experts 5
The PE5 mechanistic model is an advancement on the PE4 mechanistic
correlation. PE4 showed some instabilities (just like other mechanistic
models) that limited its use across the board. PE5 reduces the
instabilities through a calculation that does not use flow regime maps as
a starting point.
PE5 is capable of modelling any fluid type over any well or pipe trajectory.
This correlation accounts for fluid density changes for incline and decline
trajectories.
The stability of the well can also be verified with the use of PE5 when
calculating the gradient traverse, allowing for liquid loading, slug
frequency, etc. to be modelled.
Orkiszews
ki
The Orkiszewski correlation often gives a good match to measured
data. However, its formulation includes a discontinuity at velocity = 10
ft/s in its calculation method. The discontinuity can cause instability
during the pressure matching process and VLP generation and
therefore its use is not recommended.
Beggs and
Brill
The Beggs and Brill correlation is primarily a pipeline correlation. It
generally over-predicts pressure drops in vertical and deviated wells.
Gray The Gray correlation gives good results in gas wells for condensate
ratios up to around 50 bbl/MMscf and high produced water ratios. Gray
contains its own internal PVT model which over-rides PROSPER's
normal PVT calculations.
For very high liquid dropout wells, use a Retrograde Condensate PVT
and the Duns and Ros Original correlation.
Petroleum
Experts 6
The Petroleum Experts 6 correlation is an alteration of the Petroleum
Experts 3 correlation which accounts of the effect that changing water
cuts have on the possible shear effects experienced by the fluid.
For the references to the papers on which these models are based, please refer to the
References Appendix.
Barnea Criteria
Slugging Calculations
Note
There is no universal rule for selecting the best flow correlation for a given application.
It is recommended that a Correlation Comparison always be carried out. By
725
PROSPER
inspecting the predicted flow regimes and pressure results, the user can select the
correlation that best models the physical situation.
2.16.2.6.1 Multiphase Flow Fundamentals
The following section considers some the fundamental elements which constitute multi-
phase phase.
2.16.2.6.1.1 Single-Phase Energy Balance Equation
Consider an element of pipe through which a fluid is flowing at a steady-state rate.
The energy associated with a unit mass of fluid entering the element plus any shaft work
done by the fluid plus any heat exchanged with the surroundings plus change of energy
with time must equal the energy leaving the pipe element. The energy balance can be
expressed as:
d(PV) + dU + d(1/2 u2) + d(gCosL) = Q -
W
Pressure Internal Kinetic Potential Heat
External
energy energy energy energy added
work done
The energy per unit mass entering the element is the sum of the internal and kinetic
energy terms at that point. This must equal the sum of the internal and kinetic leaving
the element plus the heat loss (or gain) from the element plus any work done by the fluid.
For single phase conditions, the terms can be expressed as follows:
d(PV) = PdV + VdP
dU = (Q + F - PdV) (F is a frictional dissipation term)
d(1/2 u2) = udu
d(gCosL) = gCos.dL
the energy balance can be written:
(PdV + VdP) + (Q + F - PdV) + udu + gCos.dL = Q - W
which simplifies to:
VdP + udu + gCos.dL + F + W = 0
Assuming no external work is done on the system
dP
dL
gCos
dF
dL
G
du
dL
(G is the mass flow rate)
This is the single phase pressure gradient expression:
User Guide 726
dP
dL
dP
dL
dP
dL
dP
dL
Total Gravity Friction Acceleration
2.16.2.6.1.2 Multi-Phase Energy Balance Equation
For MultiPhase flow of oil, water and gas, the energy balance is derived in a similar
manner.
The energy per unit mass entering the pipe element is the sum of internal and kinetic
energy at point L:
g g g
g
o o o
o
w w w
w
L
q U
u
q U
u
q U
u
2
2 2
2 2 2
The energy per unit mass leaving the pipe element is the sum of internal and kinetic
energy at point L+L:
g g g
g
o o o
o
w w w
w
L L
q U
u
q U
u
q U
u
2
2 2
2 2 2
Heat exchange to or from the pipe is proportional to the temperature difference between
the well fluids and the surroundings, the heat transfer area and the overall heat transfer
coefficient Uc:
dQ
dt
U T T D L
c f e
.
The rate of work done by the system is the change in potential energy plus the change of
enthalpy (h = U + /). Defining the mass flow rate in the pipe as:
m
D
u u u
g g g o o o w w w
2
4
The energy balance can be written for multi-phase flow as follows:
d
dL
q h u q h u q h u
DU T T mgCos
g g g g o o o o w w w w
c
f
e
( / ) ( / ) ( / )
( )
2 2 2
2 2 2
Summing the enthalpies for all phases, this can be simplified to:
dH
dL
u
du
dL
gCos
m
dQ
dL
1
0
The pressure traverse for a well or pipeline can be computed by numerical integration of
727
PROSPER
the pressure gradient equation over the length of the pipe. This requires knowledge of
the proportion of each phase present and its density for the pressure and temperature
of each incremental pipe segment. The densities and gas/liquid proportions are found
from a PVT model. To find the total pressure gradient requires the above equation to
be simultaneously solved for pressure and temperature.
If the flowing temperature profile is available, then the equation can be evaluated directly
for pressure. In the majority of applications, the flowing temperature has a minor effect
on the calculated pressure drop. If the flowing temperature profile is available, the
pressure gradient can be evaluated directly.
Total Pressure Gradient Components
The total pressure gradient is the sum of 3 terms:
Gravity
Cos
The gravity term reflects the fluid density and the angle of deviation from vertical.
Evaluation of the fluid density is straightforward for single-phase applications. For
MultiPhase flow, the mixture density is required. This requires knowledge of the density
of each phase and the proportion of the pipe occupied by each (holdup).
Friction
f
u
D
2
2
The frictional pressure gradient is proportional to the friction factor f and the square of
the flow velocity. The frictional pressure gradient comprises a greater proportion of the
total pressure drop as the flow velocity increases.
Acceleration
u
du
dL
The magnitude of the acceleration component of the total pressure gradient is
insignificant except when the produced fluid is rapidly changing in velocity e.g. in a gas
well operating with low well head pressure.
In a properly designed oil well completion, the gravity component comprises around
75% of the total pressure gradient. The accuracy of liquid density and holdup values are
the main factors affecting the accuracy of the total pressure gradient calculations.
2.16.2.6.1.3 Multi-Phase Flow
The density difference between gas and either water and oil is far greater than the
density difference between oil and water. So-called multi-phase flow correlations lump
oil and water together as liquid and calculations are based on liquid/gas interactions.
Such flow correlations are more accurately described as 2-phase methods.
The calculation errors resulting from lumping the water and oil together have been found
to be insignificant for the majority of oil well pressure calculations. Errors have been
observed for large diameter tubing in deviated wells.
User Guide 728
Holdup
Holdup is the proportion of the pipe cross-section occupied by liquid as shown in the
following sketch:
Since the sum of the area occupied by liquid plus that occupied by gas must equal the
total pipe cross-section, the following relation must always be obeyed:
h h
l g
( ) 1
The mixture density is calculated from the phase densities and the liquid holdup.
m l l g l
h h ( ) 1
The liquid density is that of the mixture of oil and water.
Estimation of the liquid holdup (and hence the mixture density) for a wide range of flow
conditions is a main goal of flow correlations.
Superficial Velocity
The superficial velocity is the velocity of each phase if it were flowing alone in the pipe.
For the prevailing pressure and temperature, the superficial velocities are calculated
from the volumetric flow rate and pipe cross-sectional area as follows:
V q A
V q A
l l p
g g p
sup
sup
/
/
Defining the mixture velocity as the sum of the phase superficial velocities (Vm = Vsupl
+ Vsupg), the 'no-slip' holdup can be calculated:
h
V
V V
no slip
l
l g
sup
sup sup
Slip
The density difference between gas and liquid results in a buoyancy force between
them. In inclined flow, the gas will rise up through the liquid. This increases the gas flow
velocity relative to the liquid. Since the gas is travelling faster than the oil, a smaller
area of the pipe will be required to produce the same mass flow of gas. The effect of
slip is therefore to increase the liquid holdup, and hence the mixture density.
The amount of gas/liquid slip depends on factors such as density difference, the relative
proportions of oil and gas, flow velocities and pipe diameter. A major factor is the flow
regime.
729
PROSPER
Gravity vs Friction Head
At low flow rates, the increase in mixture density due to gas/liquid slip can be significant.
As rates increase, the flowing velocity increases and the liquid 'catches up' with the
gas. At very high flow rates, slip is insignificant since both phases are travelling with
virtually the same velocity. On the other hand, the frictional loss increases rapidly with
flow velocity.
The total gradient is the sum of gravity, friction and acceleration terms. The flowing
bottom hole pressure displays a minimum when the rate of change of the gravity
gradient equals the rate of change of friction gradient.
The rate corresponding to the minimum flowing bottom hole pressure is termed the
minimum stable rate. Rates less than this are termed 'head dominated'. Higher rates
are termed 'friction dominated'. Wells cannot sustain steady state flow for rates less
than the minimum stable rate. The unstable production is termed 'heading' where
alternate slugs of oil and gas are produced. While some wells may be able to continue
unstable production for rates below the minimum stable rate, VLP correlations cannot
be used, since they apply only to steady state flow conditions.
2.16.2.6.1.4 Flow Regimes
Observation of flow loop experiments has identified characteristic patterns that occur
under varying conditions of multi-phase flow. Different flow patterns occur depending on
many factors including the proportion of phases present, flow velocity, viscosities and
interfacial tension. Most methods use 'flow maps' to identify flow regimes. A flow map
is a presentation of flow regime as a function of dimensionless liquid and gas velocity
parameters. The correlating parameters vary between authors.
Gould et al Flow Map
Frictional losses and liquid holdup can vary widely between flow regimes. Most
pressure loss correlations require accurate flow regime prediction so that the
appropriate calculation methods can be applied.
The major flow regimes encountered in producing wells are discussed below:
Single Phase Oil
An undersaturated reservoir producing above bubble point pressure will have single
phase oil production at the sand face. As the oil is produced towards surface, the
wellbore pressure will decline in response to the reduction in hydrostatic head and
frictional losses until the bubble point pressure is reached.
Bubble Flow
When the bubble point is reached, small evenly dispersed gas bubbles within the liquid
will form. As both the liquid and gas expand, the flowing velocity will increase. This
relatively well ordered flow regime can be modelled with a good degree of precision.
Slug Flow
As the pressure reduced further, more gas is evolved. The gas bubbles interact and
coalesce to form slugs of gas that can occupy most of the pipe cross-section.
Production is by alternate slugs of liquid and gas. This moderately chaotic flow regime
User Guide 730
can be modelled with acceptable precision.
Annular Mist
As the pressure decreases, both the volumetric proportion and the flow velocity of the
gas increases greatly. A liquid film forms on the walls of the pipe and gas production
occurs through the central pipe core. Some fine liquid droplets can be entrained in the
gas as a mist.
Transition Flow Regimes
For conditions that fall between the main flow regimes described above, transitional
flow regimes may be observed. The onset of highly chaotic flow regimes can be difficult
to predict. Pressure drop correlations generally handle transition flow regimes by
averaging results calculated using the adjacent fully developed flow regime methods.
Although many methods have been proposed, the prediction of flow regimes is
imprecise and remains the subject of on-going research.
2.16.2.6.1.5 PVT
Pressure loss correlations require values for the in-situ gas/liquid ratio, flow velocities,
fluid densities and viscosity for the entire range of temperatures and pressures in the
calculations. The accuracy of pressure gradient calculations critically depends on the
accuracy of fluid density values used.
The following example (in field units) illustrates how surface flow rates and PVT data are
used to calculate densities and velocities at downhole conditions.
Densities
If the surface densities of oil, water and gas are o ,w and g. at standard conditions, the
corresponding densities at downhole conditions are:
o
o
s g
o
w
w
w
g
g
g
R
B
B
B
( . )
( . )
.
( . )
62 4
00764
56146
00764
Velocities
Superficial velocities are calculated from the surface oil production at standard
conditions, solution GOR and the water cut. Defining:
WOR = qw / qo and GLR = Rs * (1 - Water cut)
and Ap = d2 / 4
731
PROSPER
V
q
WCut
A
B
WOR
B
WOR
WOR
sL
o
p
o w
561
86 400
1
1 1
.
,
V
q
WCut
GLR R
WOR
A
B
sg
o
s
p
g
1
1
86 400 ,
These basic parameters at downhole conditions, together with gas and liquid
viscosities are passed to the flow correlation for calculation of the pressure gradient
terms.
Black oil and compositional methods may be used to predict PVT properties. For
oil wells, the liquid density is the most important PVT parameter. Prediction of
liquid density is a weakness of compositional PVT methods. The use of
compositional PVT cannot be recommended for the majority of oil well pressure
loss calculations.
2.16.2.6.2 Historical Development
Methods of modeling vertical two-phase flow can be divided into 3 classes in order of
complexity:
1. Liquid holdup and friction losses are expressed an equivalent single phase
energy loss factor. The flowing mixture density is used in place of the in-situ mixture
density to calculate the gravity component. No attempt is made to identify flow regimes.
2. The effect of two-phase holdup and friction losses are evaluated separately. No
attempt is made to identify flow regimes.
3. Flow regimes are identified and correlations specialised to flow regimes are
used to estimate holdup and friction losses.
The first experimental work in the field of multi-phase flow is generally credited to Davis
and Weidner. Most pressure loss correlations have been developed from laboratory
experimental work with air-water mixtures in short lengths of small diameter tubing.
Thus the effects of large scale inter-phase mass transfer are not included. The results
attempt to correlate liquid holdup and tubing wall friction with measured fluid properties
and flowing phase fraction. Table 1 shows those correlations that have made some
contribution to the problem of vertical MultiPhase flow.
Poettmann and Carpenter developed a simple practical model, but its simplicity limits
its accuracy. They related the irreversible energy losses of 49 well tests with a Fanning
type friction factor term which was in turn related to the Reynolds number of the fluid
mixture. This correlation is typical of a Category 1 method as defined above.
Baxendall extended the Poettmann and Carpenter method to higher flow rates and
Fancher and Brown applied the same method to 94 tests from an experimental well .
Fancher and Brown introduced produced gas-liquid ratio as an additional parameter in
the friction factor correlation.
User Guide 732
Much of the early work in developing both flow maps and correlations have been
attributed to Griffith and Wallis and Duns and Ros. They concentrated on the
definition of the flow boundaries of the flow regimes and presented the results in the
form of a flow pattern map. Ros and also Duns and Ros gathered laboratory data on
pressure drop for two-phase flow and they considered the dependency of the flow
regimes on dimensionless parameters.
Hagedorn and Brown developed a correlation from 475 tests in a 1,500 foot
experimental well using fluids with viscosities up to 110 centipoise. An average mixture
density corrected for downhole conditions was used for calculating friction and
acceleration pressure losses. Liquid holdup was not measured directly - it was
calculated from the total measured pressure loss. Further work by Brill and Hagedorn
has improved the correlation prediction of holdup and slip and included the Griffith
bubble flow correlation.
Orkiszewski developed a pressure drop prediction method based on a new flow
pattern map and a combination of features from existing correlations. He combined the
work of Griffith for bubble flow and that of Griffith and Wallis for slug flow together with
the Duns and Ros correlation for mist flow. In addition, new friction and density
correlations for slug flow based on a liquid distribution parameter were developed. The
data of Hagedorn was used to develop a correlation with tubing size, superficial mixture
velocity and liquid viscosity.
Aziz et al developed a mechanistically based model and concentrated their research
on the bubble and slug flow regimes. Predictions for 48 wells were compared to field
data and with the predictions from Orkiszewski, Duns and Ros and Hagedorn and
Brown with favourable results.
Beggs and Brill developed a correlation for prediction of pressure gradient and holdup
from experiments carried out in 1 inch and 1 1/2 inch smooth circular pipes at any angle
of inclination. They found that in inclined flow, the liquid holdup reaches a maximum
about 50 from horizontal and a minimum at around -50 from horizontal. The result that
the holdup is approximately equal at 90 and 20 confirms the observation that vertical
flow correlations can often be successfully used in horizontal flow. The Beggs and Brill
correlation is the first method to explicitly account for the effect of deviation on holdup.
Cornish developed a simple homogeneous flow model which assumes no slippage
occurs in high flow rate wells. However for two-phase Reynolds numbers <105, slip will
be significant and the method may not apply.
2.16.2.6.3 VLP Flow Correlations
The primary purpose of a flow correlation is to estimate the liquid holdup (and hence the
flowing mixture density) and the frictional pressure gradient. This section details the
methods used by some of the most widely applied correlations.
733
PROSPER
2.16.2.6.3.1 Hagedorn Brown
The Hagedorn-Brown correlation is probably the most widely applied of all oil well VLP
correlations. It works well for bubble and slug flow regimes in a wide range of
applications. At low flow rates it under-predicts flowing pressures. This can result in
optimistic predictions for minimum stable flow rates.
The Hagedorn-Brown correlation was developed from data obtained from a 1500 ft test
well using fluids with a wide range of viscosities. The liquid holdup was not measured,
but was back-calculated to satisfy the measured pressure gradient after the pressure
drop due to friction and acceleration were accounted for. The liquid holdup is not a true
indicator of the proportion of the pipe occupied by fluid, it is merely a correlating
parameter.
Hagedorn and Brown found the liquid holdup could be correlated to four dimensionless
parameters:
NLV = 1.938 VSL (L/L)1/4 Liquid Velocity Number
NGV = 1.938 VSG (L/L)1/4 Gas Velocity Number
Nd = 120.872 d (L/L)1/2 Pipe Diameter Number
NL = 0.15726 L (1/LL3)1/4 Liquid Viscosity Number
The above expressions are dimensionless when the parameters are expressed in the
appropriate field units as shown below:
VsL = ft/sec Liquid superficial velocity
VsG = ft/sec Gas superficial velocity
L = lbm/ft3 Liquid density
L = dyne/cm Interfacial tension
L = centipoise Liquid viscosity
d = feet Pipe diameter
The liquid comprises both oil and water, therefore the issue of calculating mixture
properties arises. In the Hagedorn-Brown correlation a weighted average approach is
used:
L = O f
O
+ W f
W
L = O f
O
+ W f
W
L = O f
O
+ W f
W
Where the fractional flow of oil and water are defined as follows:
f
O
= q
O
/(q
O
+q
w
)
f
W
= q
W
/(q
O
+q
w
) = 1 - f
O
The correlating function is entered with a value of CNL. The corrected liquid number is
read from a plot of CNL vs NL:
The secondary holdup correction factor is determined from a correlation of NGV, NL
and Nd. Once the correction factors have been determined, the holdup can be
calculated. The pressure gradient due to elevation change (gravity term) is calculated
from:
User Guide 734
dP
dL
g
g
h h
Gravity c
l l g l
( ) 1
The pressure gradient due to friction is given by:
dP
dL
f
V
g d
Friction
f m
c
2
2
where:
f
n
s
s l l g l
n l l g l
M SL SG
l SL M
h h
V V V
V V
2
1
1
( )
( )
/
The friction gradient can be written in terms of the mass flow rate (w) as follows:
dP
dL
f
w
g dA
Friction c s
2
2
2
This expression simplifies to:
dP
dL
f
w
d
Friction s
2
11 5
2 9652 10 .
Where:
w = mass flow rate lbm/day
s = density based on liquid holdup lbm/ft3
d = pipe inside diameterfeet
f = two phase friction factor dimensionless
The two-phase friction factor is correlated with a two-phase Reynolds number using the
standard Moody diagram. The two-phase Reynolds number is defined as follows:
N
V d
n m
s
Re
where:
s L
h
g
h
L L
( ) 1
The acceleration due to acceleration is given by:
dP
dL
V
g dL
Acceleration
s m
c
( )
2
2
Where Vm is the difference in mixture velocity between the inlet and outlet ends of a
pipe element. The Acceleration gradient is applied as a correction (Ek) to the sum of
the Gravity and Friction gradients as follows:
E
dL
dP
dP
dL
V
g dP
k
s m
c
( )
2
2
the total pressure drop can be calculated from:
735
PROSPER
dP
dL
dP
dL
dP
dL
E
Total
Gravity Friction
k
1
The refinements suggested by Brill and Hagedorn have been implemented in PROSPER
:
Griffith correlation for bubble flow.
Limit on liquid holdup to be always greater than the no-slip holdup.
Some additional refinements have been added to the basic Hagedorn-Brown
correlation:
Beggs and Brill deviation correction for liquid holdup.
Explicit calculation of Acceleration term instead of using the Ek correction
method.
Field experience has shown that Hagedorn Brown gives excellent results for oil wells in
bubble and slug flow away from the gravity dominated flow region. Errors are greatest
for large bore deviated wells in the 35-70 range with moderate water cuts where water/
oil slip may be significant.
2.16.2.6.3.2 Duns and Ros
Duns and Ros
The Duns and Ros correlation is the result of an extensive laboratory study in which
liquid holdup and pressure gradients were measured. Correlations were developed for
slip velocity (from which the holdup can be calculated) and friction factor for 3 distinct
flow regimes. The flow regimes are defined as functions of the dimensionless
quantities NGV, NLV, La, Ls, Lm and Nd where:
N V
g
N V
g
N d
g
N
g
GV sg
L
LV sL
L
d
L
L L
L
1
4
1
4
1
2
3
1
4
Ls = 50 + 36 NLV
Lm = 75 + 84 NLV0.75
Flow regimes are determined using the following relations:
Region I (Bubble) 0 <= Ngv <= ( L1 + L2 * NLV )
Region II (Slug) ( L1 + L2 * NLV < Ngv < ( 50 + 36NLV )
User Guide 736
Region III (Mist) Ngv > ( 75 + 84NLV0.75 )
Duns and Ros Flow Map
Duns and Ros developed a dimensionless slip velocity correlation from which the actual
slip velocity and liquid holdup can be calculated using the following relations:
S V
g
s
L
L
1
4
where:
V V V
V
h
V
h
s g l
sg
L
sL
L
( ) 1
Solving for liquid holdup yields:
h
V V V V V V
V
s
s m m s s sL
s
( )
2
2
4
2
The procedure for calculating the gravity pressure gradient is:
1. Calculate the dimensionless slip velocity S using the appropriate correlation.
The correlation for S is different for each flow regime.
2. Solve for the slip velocity, Vs
3. Solve for the liquid holdup hL
4. Calculate the mixture density, s = LhL + g(1-hL)
5. Calculate the gravity pressure gradient
dP
dL
g
g
Gravity c
s
Bubble Flow Regime
The Bubble Flow regime is defined by a Gas Velocity number falling between zero and
an upper limit (0 <= Ngv <= L1 + L2NLV).
For bubble flow, the parameters are calculated as follows:
Dimensionless slip velocity:
S F F N F
N
N
LV
gv
Lv
1 2 3
2
1
'
The bubble slip velocity numbers F1 F2 F3 and F4 are correlated with the liquid
viscosity number NL. F3' is obtained from:
F F
F
N
d
3 3
4 '
The Duns and Ros friction term for bubble flow is given by:
dP
dL
f
V V
g d
Friction
m
L SL m
c
2
From experimental data, Duns and Ros obtained the following expression for fm:
f f f f
m 1 2 3
/
f1 is obtained from the Moody diagram as a function of the liquid Reynolds number:
737
PROSPER
N
V d
L
L SL
L
Re
Note that for low values of Reynolds number corresponding to laminar flow conditions
that the friction factor becomes independent of pipe roughness.
The factor f2 is a correction for the in-situ gas - liquid ratio.
The factor f3 is an additional correction for both liquid viscosity and in-situ gas-liquid
ratio. It becomes important for viscosities greater than approximately 50 centistokes.
f f
V
V
sg
sL
3 1
1
2
1
50
The acceleration term is insignificant for the bubble flow regime and is therefore not
calculated.
Slug Flow Regime
For the slug flow regime ( L1 + L2 * Nlv < Ngv < ( 50 + 36nlv )) the dimensionless slip
velocity is calculated as follows:
S F
N F
F N
gv
Lv
( )
( )
( )
. '
1
1
5
0 982
6
7
2
The slug slip velocity numbers F5, F6 and F7 are found from a plot as a function of liquid
viscosity number NL:
The friction pressure gradient is calculated using the same procedure as for bubble
flow.
The acceleration term is considered to be negligible in the slug flow regime.
Mist Flow Regime
For the Mist flow regime ( Ngv > ( 75 + 84 Nlv0.75 )), the slip velocity is taken as zero.
This is because with the high gas flow rates, the liquid and gas travel with essentially
the same velocity. With no slip, the mixture density can be calculated directly from:
n L L g g L
sL
m
g
sg
m
V
V
V
V
In the mist flow regime, the friction term is based on the gas phase only:
dP
dL
f
V
g d
Friction
g sg
c
2
2
The friction factor f is read from the Moody diagram as a function of the gas Reynolds
number:
N
V d
g sg
g
Re
In mist flow, there is a film of liquid on the pipe wall. The ripples of the wall film cause a
drag on the gas. This process is governed by a form of the Weber number:
User Guide 738
N
V
We
g sg
L
2
Liquid viscosity also has an influence which is accounted for by making Nwe a function
of a dimensionless number containing the liquid viscosity:
N
L
L L
2
The value of pipe roughness may be very small, but /d never becomes smaller than the
value for the pipe itself. At the transition to slug flow, /d approaches 0.5. Between these
limits, /d can be calculated from the following equations:
N N
d V d
We
L
g sg
0 005
0 0749
2
. :
.
Values of f for the mist flow regime can be found for /d > 0.05 from:
f
Log d
1
4 0 27
4
10
1 73
( . / )
.
As the wave height on the walls increases, the actual area available for flow of gas is
reduced to d-. Duns and Ros suggested that the prediction of friction loss could be
refined by substitution of (d-) for d and
V d
d
sg
2
2
( )
for Vsg throughout the calculation of friction gradient. In this case, the determination of
roughness is iterative.
In mist flow, the acceleration term can be written as:
dP
dL
V V
g pdL
Acceleration
m sg n
c
Define an acceleration parameter Ek as follows:
E
V V
g p
k
m sg n
c
then the total pressure gradient can be calculated from
dP
dL
dP
dL
dP
dL
E
Gravity Friction
k
1
Transition (Slug-Mist) Flow Regime
For the region (Ls < Ngv < Lm) linear interpolation of the total pressure gradients is
used to determine the total pressure gradient. This means that when Ngv falls between
739
PROSPER
Ls and Lm, pressure gradients must be calculated using both slug flow and mist flow
correlations as follows:
dP
dL
A
dP
dL
B
dP
dL
Slug Mist
where:
A
L N
L L
B
N L
L L
A
m gv
m s
gv s
m s
, 1
The Duns and Ros correlation has been found to perform better in mist flow than most
others. It is particularly useful for condensate wells. Although the accuracy of pressure
gradient predictions in slug flow is generally inferior to Hagedorn-Brown, prediction of
minimum stable flow rates using the minimum value of the Duns and Ros flowing bottom
hole pressure is generally accurate.
In PROSPER additional refinements have been made to the basic Duns and Ros
method:
Beggs and Brill deviation correction for holdup is implemented
Gould et al flow map which more accurately predicts the onset of mist flow for
some conditions
Explicit calculation of the Acceleration term
2.16.2.6.3.3 Gray
Gray is a gas and gas condensate multi-phase correlation used in the API 14B
Subsurface Safety Valve sizing program. The Gray correlation contains an internal
Black Oil PVT model this internal PVT routine will override the primary PROSPER PVT
model in use.
This correlation gives good results in gas wells for condensate ratios up to around 50
bbl/MMscf and high produced water ratios. For very high liquid dropout wells, use a
Retrograde Condensate PVT and the Duns and Ros correlation.
In condensate wells, the liquid holdup is small or zero at the sand face, and increases as
the pressure reduces towards the surface. Depending on the condensate PVT
properties, the liquid holdup can reduce to zero as the pressure is further reduced. This
is in contrast to oil wells where the gas fraction always increases towards the surface.
The effect of holdup on the friction gradient can be adequately expressed as a change
in pipe wall roughness rather than rely on a Moody friction factor. The Gray correlation
utilises the following parameters:
N
V
g
N
g D
R
V V
V
v
m sm
m L g
d
L g
m
so sg
sg
2 4
2
( )
;
( )
;
where:
m = Mixture density
Vsm = Superficial mixture velocity
m = Mixture surface tension
User Guide 740
L,g = Liquid and gas densities
D = Pipe diameter
Vso,w,g = Oil, water, gas superficial velocity
The gas volume fraction is estimated using:
fg = (1 - ec) / (R + 1)
where:
C = -2.314 AB
A = Nv (1 + 205.0 / Nd)
B = 0.0841 (1 - 0.0554 ln (1 + 730 R / (R + 1)))
The mixture surface tension is defined as:
m
o o w w
o w
q q
q q
0 617
0 617
.
.
The Katz correlations for oil and water surface tensions are as follows:
w = (2.115 - 0.119 ln P) * (0.174 - 2.09 * 10-4 * (T - 460))
o = 0.044 - 1.3 * 10-4 (T - 460) * ( PD - P) / (PD - 2120)2.5
where:
PD = Dew point pressure
T = Temperature (R)
The Colebrook-White equation is used to calculate the friction factor with roughness
evaluated as follows:
r = rL = 28.5 m / m V2sm R >= 0.007
r = rg + (rL - rg) R / 0.007 R < 0.007
subject to the limit r >= 2.77 * 10-5
Gray gives good results in gas wells for condensate ratios up to around 50 bbl/MMscf
and high produced water ratios for pressure loss and prediction of minimum stable flow
rates.. For very high liquid dropout wells, use a Retrograde Condensate PVT and the
Duns and Ros correlation.
2.16.2.6.3.4 Aziz Govier and Fogarisi
The Aziz et al correlation recognises four flow regimes. The Duns and Ros method is
used for mist flow and new correlations are presented for bubble and slug flow. The
slug-mist transition is handled using the Duns and Ros interpolation method. The Aziz
et al correlation can be classed as a 'mechanistic' model. This tag is applied since
some aspects of the holdup are calculated in a manner that assigns a physical
significance to parameters such as the bubble rise velocity. These parameters are then
used to enter empirical correlations as in other methods.
Flow regimes are defined using the following variables:
741
PROSPER
N V
N V
X sg
g
Y sL
L
L
0 0764
72
62 4
1
3
1
4
.
.
Flow regime numbers are defined as follows:
N1 = 0.51 (100 NY)0.172
N2 = 8.6 + 3.8 NY
N3 = 70 (100 NY)-0.152
where:
VsL = ft/sec Liquid superficial velocity
VsG = ft/sec Gas superficial velocity
L = lbm/ft3Liquid density
g = lbm/ft3Gas density
L = dyne/cm Gas/liquid interfacial tension
Bubble Flow
For the bubble flow regime, (NX < N1) liquid holdup is given by:
h
V
V
L
sg
bf
1
where:
Vbf = Bubble rise velocity in the flowing stream
Vbf = 1.2 Vm + Vbs
and
V
g
bs
L L g
L
141
2
1
4
.
( )
The bubble flow friction term is given by:
dP
dL
f
V
g d
Friction
s m
c
2
2
f is obtained from the Moody diagram using the Reynolds number:
N
V d
L m
L
Re
The acceleration is considered to be negligible in the bubble flow regime.
Slug Flow
The slug flow regime is defined by (N1 < NX < N2 for NY < 4; N1 < NX < 2.65 for NY >
4). In the slug flow region, the liquid holdup is given by:
User Guide 742
h
V
V
V V V
V C
gd
C N
N
m
L
sg
bf
bf m bs
bs
L g
L
V
E
1
12
0 345 1 0 029 1
337
1
2
.
( )
. exp( . ) exp
.
N
gd
N
d g
E
L g
L
V
L L g
L
2
3
( )
( )
and m is evaluated from the following table:
NV m
>250 10
250 > NV > 18 69 NV-0.35
<=18 25
The slug flow friction term is given by:
dP
dL
f
h V
g d
Friction
L L m
c
2
2
f is obtained from the Moody diagram using the same Reynolds number as for Bubble
flow.
Slug-Mist Transition Regime
The transition regime is defined by (N2 < NX < N3 and NV < 4; transition flow does not
exist for NY > 4). Pressure gradients are calculated using both slug and mist flow
correlations. Linear interpolation is used to determine the total pressure gradient:
dP
dL
A
dP
dL
B
dP
dL
Slug Mist
where:
A
N N
N N
B
N N
N N
A
X X 3
3 2
2
3 2
1 ,
Mist Flow Regime
743
PROSPER
The mist flow regime is defined by (NX > N3 and NY < 4; NX > 26.5 and NY > 4). In mist
flow, the Duns and Ros technique is used.
2.16.2.6.3.5 Beggs and Brill
The Beggs and Brill correlation can be used in both horizontal and inclined flow. It was
developed from experimental data in 1 inch and 1 1/2 inch acrylic pipe which could be
inclined at any angle. Air and water were the fluids used. Liquid and gas rates were
varied to enable all flow patterns to be observed with the pipe horizontal.
With a flow rate set up, the pipe inclination was varied so that the effect of angle on
holdup could be observed. Holdup correlations were developed for each of three
horizontal flow regimes. The liquid holdup is first calculated as if the pipe were
horizontal and then corrected for pipe inclination. Beggs and Brill found that the holdup
was a maximum at approximately +50 from the horizontal and a minimum at
approximately -50.
Beggs and Brill modified their flow map from that originally published to include a
transition zone between the segregated and intermittent flow regimes (see below). The
following dimensionless parameters are used to identify the flow regime that would exist
if the pipe were horizontal.
N
V
gd
FR
m
2
L
SL
m
V
V
The Beggs and Brill flow regime numbers are:
L1 = 316 L0.302
L2 = 0.0009252 L-2.4682
L3 = 0.5 L-6.738
The horizontal flow regimes are determined as follows:
Segregated flow
L < 0.01 and NFR < L1
L >= 0.01 and Nfr < L2
Transition flow
L >= 0.01 and L2 <= NFR <= L3
Intermittent flow
0.01 <= L < 0.4 and L3 <= NFR <= L1
or
L >= 0.4 and L3 <= NFR <= L1
Distributed flow
User Guide 744
L > 0.4 and NFR >= L1
or
L >= 0.4 and NFR > L4
When the flow falls in the transition regime, the liquid holdup is calculated using both the
segregated and intermittent expressions and linearly interpolated using the following
weighting factors:
A = (L3 - NFR) / (L3 - L2)
B = 1 - A
The same equations are used to calculate liquid holdup for all flow regimes. The
coefficients and exponents used in the equations are changed for each flow regime.
Liquid holdup is given by:
h h
L l ( ) ( )
where hL() is the holdup which would exist for the same flow conditions in a horizontal
pipe. The equivalent horizontal holdup is given by:
h
a
N
L
L
b
FR
c
( )
where a, b and c are taken from the following table according to flow regime:
Flow Pattern a b c
Segregated 0.98 0.4846 0.0868
Intermittent 0.845 0.53351 0.0173
Distributed 1.065 0.5824 0.0609
with the constraint that hL() >= L.
The effect of pipe inclination is accounted for using the parameter , the value of which is
defined as follows:
1 18 0333 18
3
C(sin( . ) . sin ( . ))
where is the actual angle of the pipe from horizontal. For vertical upward flow, = 90
and becomes:
= 1 + 0.3 C
where:
C d N N
L L
e
LV
f
FR
g
( ) ln( ) 1
where d, e, f and g are determined for each flow regime from the following table:
Horizontal Flow Pattern d e f g
Segregated uphill 0.011 -3.768 3.539 -1.614
Intermittent uphill 2.96 0.305 -0.4473 0.0978
Distributed uphill No correction C=0
All flow patterns downhill 4.70 -0.3692 0.1244 -0.5656
with the restriction that C >= 0.
745
PROSPER
The friction loss term is defined as:
dP
dL
f
V
g d
Friction
TP
n m
c
2
2
where:
n = n L + g g
f f
f
f
TP n
TP
n
The no-slip friction factor is determined from the smooth pipe curve on the Moody
diagram or calculated using:
f N N
n n n
1 2 4 5223 38215
2
/ log / ( . log . )
Re Re
using the following Reynolds number:
N
V d
n
n m
n
Re
where:
n L L g g
The ratio of the two phase to no-slip friction factor is calculated from:
f
f
e
TP
n
s
where:
S = ln (y) / (-0.0523 + 3.182 ln (y) - 0.8725 ln (y)2 + 0.01853 ln(y)4)
and
y
h
L
L( )
2
S becomes unbounded at a point in the interval 1 < y < 1.2. In this region, S is
calculated using:
S = ln ( 2.2 y - 1.2)
Although the acceleration pressure gradient is small, it is included for increased
accuracy.
dP
dL
V V
g P
dP
dL
Acceleration
s m sg
c
If the acceleration term is defined as:
E
V V
g P
k
s m sg
c
The total pressure gradient can be expressed as:
User Guide 746
dP
dL
dP
dL
dP
dL
E
Total
Gravity Friction
k
1
where
dP
dL
g
g
Gravity c
s
The approach of including the acceleration term as an overall correction factor to the
total gradient is convenient and sufficiently accurate when the acceleration term is small.
To improve accuracy when acceleration is large, PROSPER calculates the acceleration
term explicitly and adds it to the Gravity and Friction terms to find the total pressure
gradient.
2.16.2.6.3.6 Orkisewski
Orkisewski conducted an extensive study of existing correlations, comparing field data
and calculated results. The Orkisewski correlation combines the Griffith and Wallis
method for bubble flow with a new correlation for slug flow and the Duns and Ros
method for mist flow. The data of Hagedorn and Brown was used as the basis for the
slug flow correlation.
Bubble Flow
The bubble flow regime is defined by:
Vsg / Vm < LB
where:
LB = 1.071 - (0.2281 Vm2 / d)
The value of LB is constrained to be greater than 0.13.
Liquid holdup in the bubble flow regime is given by:
h
V
V
V V V V
L
m
s
m s sg s
1
1
2
1 1 4
2
1
2
( / ) /
The value of the bubble slip velocity Vs is taken to be constant at 0.8 ft/sec.
The friction term is given by:
dP
dL
f
V h
g d
Friction
L sL L
c
( / )
2
2
The friction factor f, is read from the Moody diagram using a Reynolds number defined
as:
N
dV
h
L sL
L L
Re
The acceleration term is considered to be negligible in the bubble flow regime.
Slug Flow
The slug flow regime is defined by: Vsg / Vm > LB, and Ngv Ls. For slug flow, the two
747
PROSPER
phase density is given by:
s
L sL b g sg
m b
L
V V V
V V
( )
where
is the liquid distribution coefficient
and
Vb = C1 C2 (gd)1/2
C1 and C2 are presented as functions of NReb and NReL
where:
N
V d
N
V d
b
L b
L
L
L m
L
Re
Re
Vb can be calculated using the following expressions:
For NReb <= 3000
Vb = (0.546 + 8.74 * 10-6 NRel ) (gd)1/2
For NReb >= 8000
Vb = (0.35 + 8.74 * 10-6 NRel ) (gd)1/2
For 300 < NReb < 8000
V
d
b
L
L
1
2
1359
2
1
2
.
where
= (0.251 + 8.74 * 10-6 NReL ) (gd)1/2
Since Vb is a function of NReb and NReb is in turn a function of Vb, an iterative solution
is required for Vb.
The value of is calculated using different expressions depending on the mixture velocity
and the continuous liquid phase as shown in the following table:
Continuous Liquid Phase Mixture Velocity Equation
water <10 1
water >10 2
oil <10 3
oil >10 4
Orkisewski did not define criteria for determining whether oil or water is the continuous
phase. In a water / oil emulsion, water will generally be the continuous phase above a
water cut of approximately 75%.
Liquid distribution coefficient expressions:
1. = (0.013 log L) / d1.38 - 0.681 + 0.232 log Vm - 0.428 log d
2. = (0.045 log L) / d0.799 - 0.709 + 0.162 log Vm - 0.888 log d
3. = (0.0127 log (L + 1)) / d1.415 + 0.284 + 0.167 log Vm + 0.113 log d
User Guide 748
4. = (0.0274 log (L + 1)) / d1.371 + 0.161 + 0.569 log d + X
X = -log Vm (0.01 log (L + 1) / d1.371) + 0.397 + 0.63 log d
The value of is constrained by the following limits:
For Vm < 10 , >= -0.065 Vm
For Vm > 10 , >= -
V
V V
b
m b
s L
( / ) 1
0.065 Vm
These constraints are designed to eliminate pressure discontinuities between flow
regimes. However, significant discontinuities still occur at Vm of 10 ft/sec. This can
cause significant problems, especially in large diameter pipes. Although Orkisewski
can give excellent results in many wells, the use of Orkisewski is discouraged due to the
danger of encountering a pressure discontinuity during pressure matching and VLP
calculations.
The friction term for slug flow is given by:
dP
dL
f
V
g d
V V
V V
Friction
L m
c
sL b
m b
2
2
where f is taken from the Moody diagram using the Reynolds number:
N
dV
L
L m
L
Re
Transition Flow
The transition flow regime is defined by Lm > Ngv < Ls. The total pressure gradient is
found by linear interpolation between the slug and mist flow boundaries using the
interpolation scheme of Duns and Ros.
Mist Flow
The mist flow regime is defined by Ngv > Lm. The method of Duns and Ros is used for
mist flow.
2.16.2.6.4 Pipeline Correlations
Enter topic text here.
2.16.2.6.4.1 Dukler
The Dukler correlation was based on similarity analysis. The friction factor and liquid
holdup correlations were developed from field data. Dukler's friction factor is given by:
dP
dL
f
V
g d
Rriction
k m
c
2
2
where:
k
L
L
g g
L
L
h h
2
1
A normalised friction factor f / fn was correlated with a Reynolds number.
749
PROSPER
The correlation can be expressed as:
fn = 0.0056 + 0.5 NRek-0.32
where:
N
V d
V V V
k
k m
n
m sL sg
n L L g g
Re
The normalised friction factor is calculated from:
f
f
y
y y y y
n
1
1281 0478 0444 0094 000843
2 3 4
. . . . _ .
where:
y = -ln (L)
An iterative procedure is required to find the liquid holdup. The holdup is a function of
liquid fraction and Reynolds number. However, the Reynolds number is also a function
of the holdup. NRek is plotted vs hL and L.
The acceleration pressure gradient is given by:
dP
dX g dX
V
h
LV
h
Acceleration c
g sg
l
sL
l
1
1
2
2
or
E
g dP
V
h
LV
h
k
c
g sg
l
sL
l
1
1
2
2
The total pressure gradient is corrected using the Ek factor:
dP
dX
dP
dX
E
Total
Friction
k
1
2.16.2.6.4.2 Dukler Flanigan
The Dukler Flanigan correlation calculates the friction gradient using Dukler's technique
and applies Flanigan's inclined flow method.
Flanigan developed a correlation from data taken on a 16 inch diameter pipeline.
Liquid holdup in the uphill sections of the pipeline were correlated with superficial gas
velocity.
Pressure recovery in downhill sections is ignored. The pressure drop due to the hills is
calculated from:
dP
dX
g
g
h Z
Gravity c
L l
where Z is the sum of the vertical heights of all the hills. The holdup factor hL is a
function of the superficial gas velocity and is determined from:
User Guide 750
h
V
L
sg
1
1 03264
1
.
.006
The Dukler-Flanigan total pressure gradient is found by summing the Dukler friction
gradient and the Flanigan elevation pressure gradient then applying an acceleration
correction.
Dukler Flanigan has been found to give good results in a wide range of conditions.
2.16.3 C - Dietz Shape Factors
List of the Dietz Shape factors:
751
PROSPER
User Guide 752

2.16.4 D - File Formats
2.16.4.1Introduction
This appendix contains examples of some file formats used by PROSPER. For further
details and advice regarding interfacing PROSPER with other applications, please
contact Petroleum Experts Limited customer support.
2.16.4.2External PVT Tables
PROSPER can directly import proprietary PVT table files generated by Petroleum Experts
PVT Package. The following file format description can be followed to re-format PVT
tables obtained from other sources.
* TEST EXAMPLE OF AN OIL PVT TABLE IMPORT FILE
* (BLANK LINES AND LINES WITH AN ASTERISK (*) IN COLUMN 1
* ARE IGNORED)
*
* UNITS for the imported PVT variables must be defined in
field units
* NUMBER OF TABLES (MAX 10)
5
* DATA COLUMN IDENTIFIERS
* - CAN BE IN ANY ORDER
* - COLUMNS CAN BE MISSING
* - ANY INDIVIDUAL ITEM > 3.4e35 = missing item
*
*
* PRES - Pressure
* GOR - Gas-Oil Ratio]
* OFVF - oil Formation Volume Factor
* OVIS - oil Viscosity
* ODEN - oil Density
* OCOM - oil Compressibility
* GFVF - gas Formation Volume Factor
* GVIS - gas Viscosity
* WVIS - water Viscosity
753
PROSPER
* WCOM - water Compressibility
* ZFAC - Z Factor
* GDEN - gas density
* CGR - Reservoir CGR
*
OFVF GOR OVIS ODEN PRES
*
* TABLE IDENTIFIER RECORD
*
* N LINES TEMP BP
*
* N - Table Number
* LINES - Number of lines in the table (max 15)
* TEMP - Table Temperature
* BP - Table Bubble Point Pressure (Dew Point for
condensate)
1 3 100 1300
1.21 453 .99 46 2000
1.31 454 .98 47 2010
1.41 455 .97 49 2020
2 3 200 1310
2.21 553 .89 56 3000
2.31 554 .88 57 3010
2.41 555 .87 59 3020
3 3 300 1390
3.21 653 .79 76 4000
3.31 654 .78 77 4010
3.41 655 .77 79 4020
4 3 400 1400
4.21 753 .69 86 5000
4.31 754 .68 87 5010
4.41 755 .67 89 5020
5 3 500 1800
5.21 853 .59 96 6000
5.31 854 .58 97 6010
5.41 855 .57 99 6020
Note:
Import table units must be defined in field units. Once the data has been imported the
PROSPER units system can be used to display the values in any desired units.
User Guide 754
2.16.4.3Lift Curves
The following is an example of a flowing well lift curve in ECLIPSE format:
-- VFP TABLE for PRODUCER --
VFPPROD
1 10430 'LIQ' 'WCT' 'GOR' /
100 1000 10000 /
114.696 514.696 5014.7 /
0 0.5 0.9 /
0.8 1 5 /
0 /
1 1 1 1 2002.17 1258.71 2733.66 /
1 1 2 1 1479.42 1083.09 2655.25 /
1 1 3 1 413.537 806.953 4503.13 /
1 2 1 1 3948.98 2376.35 3439.27 /
1 2 2 1 3619.42 1985.43 3270.18 /
1 2 3 1 494.134 928.339 3352.16 /
1 3 1 1 4913.94 4485.14 4672.16 /
1 3 2 1 4895.27 4343.38 4563.92 /
1 3 3 1 3925.4 2141.93 3460.48 /
2 1 1 1 3629.53 2559.11 3358.56 /
2 1 2 1 3539.7 2209.16 3216.7 /
2 1 3 1 1098.95 1408.86 4038.35 /
2 2 1 1 4817.47 3863.58 4190.39 /
2 2 2 1 4746.81 3540.81 3985.01 /
2 2 3 1 1916.92 1594.64 3434.72 /
2 3 1 1 5347.77 5166.94 5283.46 /
2 3 2 1 5337.64 5102.83 5210.6 /
2 3 3 1 5138.74 3590 4155.85 /
3 1 1 1 8202.54 8206.84 8494.42 /
3 1 2 1 8081.09 8085.64 8397.43 /
3 1 3 1 7436.73 7142.24 8450.65 /
3 2 1 1 9393.27 9014.22 9196.49 /
3 2 2 1 9308.64 8911.21 9105.01 /
3 2 3 1 8567.24 7774.64 8436.27 /
3 3 1 1 9912.37 9798.83 9952.61 /
3 3 2 1 9906.65 9776.86 9924.11 /
3 3 3 1 9813.74 9404.22 9463.37 /
Gas Lifted Well (4 Variable) Lift Curves
-- VFP TABLE for PRODUCER --
VFPPROD
1 10430 'LIQ' 'WCT' 'GOR' /
100 1000 10000 /
114.696 1014.7 /
0.5 0.9 /
755
PROSPER
0.82 5 /
0 0.2 0.5 /
1 1 1 1 4236.42 2633.35 3373.19 /
1 1 1 2 3825.95 2143.51 3274.85 /
1 1 1 3 3124.78 1852.12 3267.76 /
1 1 2 1 679.721 1006.21 3341.52 /
1 1 2 2 663.546 996.833 3405.81 /
1 1 2 3 641.284 977.228 3341.56 /
1 2 1 1 4983.68 4569.28 4613.82 /
1 2 1 2 4855.84 3445.19 4260.77 /
1 2 1 3 4234.42 2708.11 3888.35 /
1 2 2 1 4324.78 2288.63 3403.99 /
1 2 2 2 3770.29 1978.18 3361.59 /
1 2 2 3 2893.22 1811.06 3390.73 /
2 1 1 1 5416.3 4901.7 4903.34 /
2 1 1 2 5416.24 4900.79 4902.04 /
2 1 1 3 5416.15 4899.42 4900.17 /
2 1 2 1 4853.52 2622.82 3962.47 /
2 1 2 2 4853.36 2606.9 3962.25 /
2 1 2 3 4853.12 2591.41 3961.94 /
2 2 1 1 5925.14 5771.07 5819.76 /
2 2 1 2 5925.09 5770.6 5819.25 /
2 2 1 3 5925.01 5769.9 5818.5 /
2 2 2 1 5814.71 4954.63 4912.08 /
2 2 2 2 5814.64 4953.02 4911.18 /
2 2 2 3 5814.53 4950.61 4909.88 /
2.16.4.4IPR
*
* This is an example IPR input file
*
The format is pressure, rate, curve value
*
The numbers can be space, tab or comma delimited
* Up to twenty points per curve, up to five curves
*
*Blank lines or lines with an asterisk (*) in the first
* column are ignored.
*
0 5000 1000
1000 4000 1000
2000 3000 1000
3000 2000 1000
4000 1000 1000
User Guide 756
5000 0 1000
*
* Next curve
*
0 3000 2000
1000 2000 2000
2000 1000 2000
3000 0 2000
2.16.4.5ESP PUMPS
* Blank lines or lines begining with an asterisk are ignored.
* The format for the pump data is
* Line 1 Manufacturer pumpname size (ins) frequency(hz) Min. rte Max. rate No. of
Stages
* Line 2 six coefficients for head curve (ft of water)
* Line 3 six coefficients for power curve (HP)
* Curves are polynomials of the form
* Y = AO + A1*x + A2*x*2 + A3*x**3 + A4*x**4 + A5*x**5
****************************
****************************
****************************
*** CENTRILIFT PUMPS ***
****************************
****************************
****************************
CENTRILIFT DC-800 3.38 60 550 950 1
* A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
-1.695826E-14 3.474714E-11 -3.873426E-08 8.776504E-06 -7.290256E-04
2.06500E+01
3.389608E-16 -6.347699E-13 1.397720E-10 1.695927E-07 1.838891E-05
9.70000E-02
CENTRILIFT DC-1000 3.38 60 700 1300 1
0.0000000000 1.629606E-13 -3.038773E-09 -4.764406E-07 -2.538143E-03
2.05000E+01
-1.535787E-17 8.375897E-14 -1.485183E-10 4.492726E-08 1.474800E-04
8.501001E-02
757
PROSPER
2.16.4.6ESP MOTORS
*Manufacturer
Reda
* Number of motors, rpm, frequency
2 3450. 60.0
*Series OD
456 4.56
*amps
6.53822E-01 -1.34128E+00 8.86349E-01 -1.06114E-01 5.61883E-01 3.43896E-01
*
*rpm
-6.24718E+01 2.04999E+02 -3.03911E+02 1.45552E+02 -1.15803E+02
3.58291E+03 *
*efficiency
-5.57129E-01 1.60591E+00 -7.30540E-01 -1.98693E+00 2.49918E+00 1.91886E-
03 *
* power factor
-5.44220E-01 2.16557E+00 -2.81504E+00 7.11957E-01 1.04810E+00 2.49609E-
01 *
*Series OD
540 5.4
*amps
-2.16508E-01 6.79101E-01 -5.79651E-01 3.59379E-01 5.24583E-01 2.26834E-01
*
*rpm
-2.14557E+01 8.55182E+01 -1.66122E+02 9.44086E+01 -1.44510E+02
3.58175E+03 *
*efficiency
3.67150E-01 -1.64327E+00 3.01018E+00 -3.02514E+00 1.72215E+00 4.17187E-
01 *
* power factor
4.64765E-01 -2.48102E+00 5.12024E+00 -5.23541E+00 2.71560E+00 2.75835E-
01 *
*Series Type HP VOLTS AMPS
456 S 100.0 1075 51
User Guide 758
456 S 100.0 1355 46
456 S 100.0 2205 29
456 S 110.0 1190 60
456 S 120.0 1255 70
456 S 120.0 1295 59
456 S 120.0 2245 35
456 T 200.0 2710 46
456 T 220.0 2380 60
456 T 240.0 2250 70
456 T 240.0 2590 59
540 S 180.0 945 120
540 S 180.0 1945 59
540 S 200.0 1100 115
540 S 200.0 2140 54
540 S 225.0 1135 127
540 S 225.0 2235 64
540 T 450.0 2270 127
540 T 480.0 2475 122
540 T 480.0 3345 89
540 T 540.0 2835 120
540 T 600.0 3300 115
2.16.4.7ESP CABLES
* Cable Type
* Volt drop coefficient Maximum ampage
#1 Copper
0.26 115
#2 Copper
0.33 95
#4 Copper
0.53 70
#6 Copper
0.84 55
#8 Copper
1.32 50
#10 Copper
2.08 50
#12 Copper
3.32 50
#1 Aluminium
0.33 95
#2 Aluminium
0.53 70
759
PROSPER
#4 Aluminium
0.84 55
#6 Aluminium
1.32 50
#8 Aluminium
2.08 50
#10 Aluminium
3.32 50
2.16.4.8HSP PUMPS
*
* H Y D R A U L I C D R I V E D O W N H O L E P U M P S* =================
========= =============== =========
* This is a sample pump import file. Blank lines or lines begining
* with an asterisk are ignored. The format for the pump data is
* Line 1 Manufacturer pumpname size (mm) reference Speed(rpm) Min.
* operating rate Max. operating rate No. of stages Max no. of Stages Min
* Speed Max Speed
* Line 2 six coefficients for head curve (ft of water) (a0 to a5)
* Line 3 six coefficients for power curve (HP) (a0 to a5)
* This data is supplied FOR EXAMPLE PURPOSES ONLY
********** DO NOT USE FOR SYSTEM DESIGN
* Contact the pump supplier for current performance data
****************************
****************************
****************************
*** WEIR PUMPS ***
****************************
****************************
****************************
WEIR TPL115 118 11500 2000 12200 1 18 3825 11500
439.726 -0.0145605 1.7487e-7 -4.0609e-11 -1.2e-15 6.7794e-20
15.0445 0.00470131 -8.1656e-7 9.018e-11 -5.0595e-15 9.7463e-20

User Guide 760
2.16.4.9HSP TURBINES
Turbine Manufacturer
WEIR* Number of Turbines1***************** ** WEIR T30 **
****************** Turbine TypeT30* Reference Speed (rpm)
15000.0
* Maximum Speed (rpm)
15000.0
* Maximum Test Pressure (psi)
8910.00
* Maximum Working Pressure (psi)
5940.00
* Maximum Stage Pressure (psi)
370.00
* Maximum Number Of Stages
50
* Maximum Turbine Supply Flow (bbl/day)
3911.67
* Maximum Total Shaft Torque (lb.ins)
843
* Maximum Stage Torque (lb.ins)
128
* Turbine Casing OD (inches)
3.46
* Max. Velocity Over Turbine Casing (ft/sec)
25.000
* Number of Settings
4
* Setting should be an alphanumeric string with NO embedded spaces (up to 8
characters)
* Setting Efficiency Mininum Maximum Head Head Head Power
Power Power
* Rate Rate (a1) (a2) (a3) (a1) (a2) (a3)
* (percent) (bbl/day) (bbl/day)
761
PROSPER
A 52.750 1235.26 2038.18 0.000311733 -0.53145 447.209 2.2765e-
6 -0.00245738 0.551433
B 56.000 1523.49 2460.23 0.000146428 -0.163852 184.132 1.6612e-
6 -0.00126675 -0.431372
C 60.460 1873.48 3232.27 0.000116043 -0.281785 395.769
1.8284e-6 -0.0037038 2.46547
D 64.000 2367.59 3788.14 6.97987e-5 -0.150449 243.193 2.0903e-
6 -0.00670166 7.15005
2.16.5 E - Glossary
Bott
om
Hole
Flowi
ng
Pres
sure
Pressure measured at the producing formation. Intake node pressure.
Com
pres
sibilit
y
A volume ratio that indicates the deviation of the actual volume from that which
has been determined by the Ideal Gas Laws. The Compressibility Factor is
a multiplier
Dew
Point
The temperature at which the vapour will start to condense. Dew point of a gas
mixture is the temperature at which the highest boiling point constituent will start
to condense.
Dime
nsio
nless
Fract
ure
Con
ducti
vity
(FCD
)
Dimensionless fracture conductivity is a key design parameter in well
stimulation that compares the capacity of the fracture to transmit fluids down the
fracture and into the wellbore with the ability of the formation to deliver fluid into
the fracture.
Dry
Gas
Any gas or gas mixture which contains no water vapour, and where all of the
constituents are substantially above their respective saturated vapour pressure
at the existing conditions.
Ener
gy
A substance's capacity, either latent or apparent, to exert a force through a
distance.
Enth
alpy
The sum of the internal and external energies. Enthalpy is defined as
H = U + P*V
User Guide 762
where U is the energy of a system, P the pressure, and V the volume. At
constant volume and temperature, the differential change in enthalpy as
pressure and entropy S are varied is therefore
dH = TdS + VdP
Entr
opy
A measure of the unavailable energy in a substance. The concept of entropy in
thermodynamics is central to the second law of thermodynamics, which deals
with physical processes and whether they occur spontaneously. Spontaneous
changes occur with an increase in entropy. Spontaneous changes tend to
smooth out differences in temperature, pressure, density, and chemical
potential that may exist in a system, and entropy is thus a measure of how far
this smoothing-out process has progressed. Entropy change is defined as a
change to a more disordered state at a molecular level. In recent years, entropy
has been interpreted in terms of the "dispersal" of energy. Entropy is an
extensive state function that accounts for the effects of irreversibility in
thermodynamic systems.
Quantitatively, entropy, symbolised by S, is defined by the differential quantity
dS = Q / T, where Q is the amount of heat absorbed in a reversible process
in which the system goes from one state to another, and T is the absolute
temperature. Entropy is one of the factors that determines the free energy of the
system.
Exter
nal
Ener
gy
The energy represented by the product of pressure and volume. It may be
regarded as the energy a substance possesses by virtue of the space it
occupies.
Form
ation
Gas-
Oil
Ratio
Quantity of oil dissolved in 1 stock tank barrel of oil at prevailing pressure and
temperature. Also known as the Solution GOR. See the GOR Definitions for
more details.
Form
ation
Volu
me
Fact
or
(Bo)
Volume occupied by 1 barrel of stock tank oil and its associated solution gas at
a given pressure and temperature.
Gas
Gravi
ty
Ratio of the gas density to density of air. Equal to ratio of molecular weight to
that of air (28.97).
Geot
herm
al
Gradi
Rate of increase in earth temperature with depth. One example: 1.8 degrees F
per 100 feet of TVD.
763
PROSPER
ent
GOR
When oil is brought to surface conditions it is usual for some gas to come out of
solution. The gas/oil ratio (GOR) is the ratio of the volume of gas that comes out
of solution, to the volume of oil. A point to check is whether the volume of oil is
measured before or after the gas comes out of solution, since the oil volume
will shrink when the gas comes out. In fact gas dissolution and oil volume
shrinkage will happen at many stages during the path of the hydrocarbon
stream from reservoir through the wellbore and processing plant to export. For
light oils and rich gas condensates the ultimate GOR of export streams is
strongly influenced by the efficiency with which the processing plant strips
liquids from the gas phase. Reported GORs may be calculated from export
volumes which may not be at standard conditions.Can refer to solution GOR or
Total GOR (i.e. including free gas production). See the GOR Definitions for
more details.
Heat
The energy transferred because of a temperature difference. There is no
transfer of mass.
Heat
Tran
sfer
Coeff
icient
(HTC
)
Coefficient describing the total resistance to heat loss from a producing pipe to
its surroundings. Includes heat loss by conduction, convection and radiation.
Hold
up
(Liquid holdup). Proportion of pipe area occupied by liquid. Equal to 1.0 for
single phase liquid and 0.0 for single phase gas.
Ideal
Gas
A gas which perfectly obeys Boyle's Law (unlike any gases dealt with in the oil
and gas industry). This gas obeys the equation of state PV=RT/m where V is
specific volume, T is absolute temperature, R is the universal gas constant and
m is the molecular weight. Real gases deviate from ideal behaviour at
atmospheric pressures.
Inflo
w
Perfo
rman
ce
Relat
ions
hip
(IPR)
The relation between reservoir pressure, flowing bottom hole pressure and
production rate. Can be calculated from reservoir properties (reservoir
pressure, permeability, skin) or fitting an empirical relation to measured
pressures. See IPR Definition
Inject
ion
Gas
Gas injected into a reservoir for pressure maintenance. Not to be confused
with gas lift injection.
User Guide 764
Inject
ivity
Inde
x
Slope of inflow performance relation for injection. Expressed as injection
volume per unit of injection pressure. (BBL/psi, Sm3/Bar).
Inter
nal
Ener
gy
The energy which a substance possesses because of the motion and
configuration of its atoms, molecules and sub atomic particles.
Isent
ropic
Proc
ess
(Adia
batic
)
A process during which there is no heat added to or removed from the system.
Isoth
erma
l
Proc
ess
A process during which there is no change in temperature.
Joul
e-
Tho
mso
n
Coeff
icient
The Joule-Thomson effect, or Joule-Kelvin effect, is a process in which the
temperature of a real gas is either decreased or increased by letting the gas
expand freely at constant enthalpy (which means that no heat is transferred to
or from the gas, and no external work is extracted). It's named after James
Prescott Joule and William Thomson, 1st Baron Kelvin who established
the effect in 1852 following earlier work by Joule on Joule expansion in which
a gas expands at constant internal energy.
The relationship between temperature, pressure and volume of a gas is simply
described by the various gas laws. When volume is increased in an irreversible
process, the gas laws do not uniquely determine what happens to the pressure
and temperature of the gas. Reversible adiabatic expansion, in which the gas
does positive work in the process of expansion, always causes a decrease in
temperature. However, when a real gas (as differentiated from an ideal gas)
expands freely at constant enthalpy, the temperature may either decrease or
increase, depending on the initial temperature and pressure. For any given
pressure, a real gas has a Joule-Thomson (Kelvin) inversion temperature,
above which expansion at constant enthalpy causes the temperature to rise,
and below which expansion at constant enthalpy causes cooling. For most
gases at atmospheric pressure, the inversion temperature is fairly high (above
room temperature), and so most gases at those temperature and pressure
conditions are cooled by isenthalpic expansion.
The change of temperature with respect to a change of pressure in a Joule-
Thomson process is the Joule-Thomson (Kelvin) coefficient
765
PROSPER
Definition of the Joule-Thomson Coefficient
The value of depends on the specific gas, as well as the temperature and
pressure of the gas before expansion. For all real gases, it will equal zero at
some point called the inversion point and the Joule-Thomson inversion
temperature is the temperature where the coefficient changes sign (i.e., where
the coefficient equals zero).
In any gas expansion, the gas pressure decreases and thus the sign of P is
always negative. The following table explains when the Joule-Thomson effect
cools or heats a real gas
If the gas
temperature
is
then is since P is T must be so the gas
below the
inversion
temperature
positive
always
negative
negative cools
above the
inversion
temperature
negative
always
negative
positive heats
It should be noted that is always equal to zero for ideal gases (i.e., they will
neither heat nor cool upon being expanded at constant enthalpy).
User Guide 766
Kinet
ic
Ener
gy
The energy a substance possesses by virtue of its motion or velocity.
Meas
ured
Dept
h
Depth measured along the flow path from the depth reference to a point in the
well.
Node
A reference point in the well. A calculation node is inserted whenever there is a
change of I.D., deviation angle or temperature gradient.
Parti
al
Pres
sure
The absolute pressure exerted by a constituent portion of the mixture.
Perm
eabili
ty
Permeability (commonly symbolised as , or k) is a measure of the ability of a
material (typically, a rock or unconsolidated material) to transmit fluids. It is of
great importance in determining the flow characteristics of hydrocarbons in oil
and gas reservoirs. The intrinsic permeability of any porous material is:
k = C * d
2
where
k is the intrinsic permeability
C is a dimensionless constant that is related to the configuration of the flow-
paths
d is the average, or effective pore diameter
Permeability needs to be measured, either directly (using Darcy's law) or
through estimation using empirically derived formulas.
A common unit for permeability is the darcy (D), or more commonly the
millidarcy (mD) (1 darcy 10- 12m). Other units are cm and the SI m
2
.
Permeability is part of the proportionality constant in Darcy's law which relates
discharge (flow rate) and fluid physical properties (e.g. viscosity), to a pressure
gradient applied to the porous media. The proportionality constant specifically
for the flow of water through a porous media is the hydraulic conductivity;
permeability is a portion of this, and is a property of the porous media only, not
the fluid. In naturally occurring materials, it ranges over many orders of
magnitude. For a rock to be considered as an exploitable hydrocarbon
reservoir, its permeability must be greater than approximately 100 mD
(depending on the nature of the hydrocarbon - gas reservoirs with lower
permeabilities are still exploitable because of the lower viscosity of gas with
respect to oil). Rocks with permeabilities significantly lower than 100 mD can
form efficient seals. Unconsolidated sands may have permeabilities of over
5000 mD.
Phas
e
A homogeneous body of material which differs in its intensive properties from
that of its neighboring phases. e.g. Gas, liquid.
767
PROSPER
Pote
ntial
Ener
gy
The energy a substance possesses because of its elevation above the earth or
above some chosen datum plane.
Pres
sure
Trav
erse
Calculation of well pressure vs depth by integrating the pressure gradient for
increments of pipe.
Prod
uced
Gas/
Oil
Ratio
Gas production divided by oil production. Includes gas in solution and any free
gas production. Excludes lift gas returned to surface with the produced fluids.
Prod
uctivi
ty
Inde
x (PI)
Measure of a well's ability to flow. Expressed in bbl/psi (Sm3/day / Bar) of
drawdown. Applies above the bubble point.
Pseu
do-
Critic
al
Tem
perat
ure
The Critical Temperature is defined as the highest temperature at which a
gas can be liquefied. When calculated for a mixture it is called the Pseudo-
Critical Temperature.
Pseu
do-
Critic
al
Pres
sure
The Critical Pressure of a gas is defined as the saturation pressure at the
Critical Temperature. It is the highest vapour pressure the liquid can exert.
Critical conditions must be determined experimentally for each gas. When
calculated for a mixture, it is called the Pseudo-Critical Pressure.
Quali
ty
Weight percent of vapour present in a two-phase mixture.
Redu
ced
Pres
sure
The ratio in absolute units of the actual gas pressure to the critical pressure of
the gas.
Redu
ced
temp
eratu
The ratio in absolute units of the actual gas temperature to the critical
temperature of the gas.
User Guide 768
re
Rese
rvoir
Accumulation of hydrocarbon in permeable rock.
Resi
dual
Oil
Liquid remaining in a PVT cell at the completion of a differential liberation
experiment.
Retr
ogra
de
Con
dens
ate
Hydrocarbon existing as a gas at reservoir conditions from which liquid drops
out as the pressure drops. The liquid may evaporate as the pressure drops
further.
Satur
ated
Oil
Oil in equilibrium with its vapour at a specified temperature and pressure.
Satur
ated
Vapo
ur
Pres
sure
The pressure existing at a given temperature in a closed volume containing a
liquid and a vapour from that liquid after equilibrium conditions have been
reached. It is dependent only on temperature and must be determined
experimentally.
Satur
ation
Pres
sure
Pressure at which vapor and liquid are in equilibrium. For oils this is equivalent
to bubble point and for condensates, the dew point.
Shrin
kage
Decrease in volume of oil from reservoir conditions to the stock tank.
Shrinkage occurs as oil gives up solution gas and temperature drops.
Shrin
kage
Fact
or
Reciprocal of Formation Volume Factor.
Solut
ion
Gas
Gas dissolved in oil at elevated pressure and temperature.
Solut
ion
Gas
Oil
Ratio
(Rs)
Volume of gas dissolved in stock tank unit of oil at saturation pressure (scf/
STB, Sm3/Sm3). See the GOR Definitions for more details.
769
PROSPER
Spec
ific
Gravi
ty
(Liqu
id)
Ratio of fluid density to that of water at 60 degrees F. For gases, ratio of gas
density to that of air at standard conditions.
Spec
ific
Gravi
ty
(Gas)
Ratio of the density of a given gas to the density of dry air, both measured at
the same specific conditions of pressure and temperature. These conditions
are usually 14.696 psiA and 60F, or 1 barA and 0C.
Spec
ific
Heat
or
Heat
Capa
city
The rate of change in enthalpy with temperature. It may be measured at
constant pressure or at constant volume. The values are different and are
known as Cp and Cv, respectively.
Spec
ific
Volu
me
The volume of a given weight of gas usually expressed as cubic feet per pound,
or cubic meters per kilogram (cubic centimeters per gram).
Stati
c
Rese
rvoir
Pres
sure
Stabilised reservoir pressure if all wells were shut in and built up.
STB Stock Tank Barrel.
Stea
dy-
State
A state of the system in which none of the variables (such as pressure,
temperature, flow rates) varies with time.
Stoc
k
Tank
Oil
Oil in equilibrium with its surrounding conditions of temperature and pressure.
Tem
perat
ure
The property of a substance which gauges the potential or driving force for the
flow of heat.
True
Verti
Vertical displacement from reference depth to a point in a well.
User Guide 770
cal
Dept
h
Unde
r
Satur
ated
Oil
Oil capable of dissolving additional gas at a specified temperature and
pressure. i.e current pressure is above the fluid's bubble point.
Voge
l
Equa
tion
Empirical inflow performance relation that accounts for reduced oil permeability
when producing below bubble point due to gas breakout.
Wate
r Cut
Ratio of water production to total fluid production. (Water Rate) / (Oil Rate +
Water Rate)
Wate
r
Form
ation
Volu
me
Fact
or
(Bw)
Volume occupied at prevailing pressure and temperature by 1 stock tank unit of
water.
Wate
r / Oil
Ratio
(WO
R)
Ratio of oil production to water production (stock tank conditions)
Wet
Gas
Any gas or gas mixture in which one or more of the constituents is at its
saturated vapour pressure. The constituent at saturation pressure may or may
not be water vapour.
Work
The energy transition and defined as force times distance. Work cannot be
done unless there is motion.
2.16.6 F - Importing Data from Text Files
This Section describes how to import data from a text file to a PROSPER model.
It is assumed that the data to be imported is saved in a text file. It is also assumed that
the data is imported for the tables in PVT section of PROSPER. The technique can
however be applied at any place where data import is required to be done.
771
PROSPER
1) After clicking on the Import tab, select the particular text file where the data is
saved on screenshot below.
2) When the import file is selected, press Continue to see the next screen shown
below.
User Guide 772
3) Select the particular File format in which the data is saved. The following
example is for a Comma Separated format. Press Continue to proceed to the
next screen shown below.
773
PROSPER
4) To select a particular column for a Field Name, one can directly click on the
column and this will assign that column to that field.This can also be checked by
the column number that is appended to the field name.
5) Make sure that the units for each column are correctly selected according to the
input data.
6) The procedure can be repeated for all the columns.
User Guide 774
7) By selecting continue, PROSPER will update the data in the corresponding
columns in the tables.
775
PROSPER
Chapter
3
777
PROSPER
3 Examples Guide
3.1 Prosper Tutorials
This chapter contains a collection of tutorials designed to help jump-start the use of
PROSPER. The tutorials are grouped by subjects:
Integrated Oil Well Model
Basic Tutorials for Naturally Flowing Wells
PVT Matching Tutorials
Pipeline Tutorial
Artificial lift design tutorials
Tutorials on Trouble-shooting Artificially Lifted Wells
Tutorials on Compositional Modelling
Tutorials on Temperature Modelling and Flow Assurance Studies
Integrated Well-bore Model
Tutoria
l
00 Integrated oil well model T00_Integrated_Oil_Well.OUT
Basic tutorials for naturally flowing wells
Tutoria
l
01 Modelling an Naturally Flowing Oil Producer T01_Basic_Oil_Well.OUT
02 Modelling a Dry Gas Producer T02_Basic_Gas_Well.OUT
03 Modelling a Water Injection Well T03_Water_Injector.OUT
04 Modelling a Gas Injection Well T04_Gas_Injector.OUT
PVT Matching
Tutoria
l
05 Modelling an Naturally Flowing Oil Producer T05_PVT_Match_Oil_Well.OUT
06 Modelling a Dry Gas Producer T06_PVT_Match_Gas_Well.OUT
Examples Guide 778
Pipeline Tutorial
Tutoria
l
07 Modelling a Surface Pipeline T07_Modelling_Surface_Pipeline.
OUT
Tutoria
l
08 Modelling a Darcy IPR T08_Darcy_IPR_Model.OUT
09 Modelling an IPR using SPOT T09_SPOT_lPR_Model.OUT
10 Modelling a Horizontal Well T10_Modelling_A_Horizontal_Well.
OUT
11 Modelling a Multilayer Well with dP Loss in
Wellbore
T11_Modelling_A_Multilayer_Well.
OUT
12 Modelling a Multilateral Gas Producer T12_Modelling_A_Multilateral_Wel
l.OUT
Tutoria
l
13 Modelling Skin T13_Modelling_Skin.OUT
14 Modelling an oil well with gravel-pack T14_Modelling_A_GravelPack.OUT
15 Modelling a 'frac and pack' well T15_Frac_And_Pack_Oil_Well.OUT
16 Modelling a well with wire-wrapped screens T16_Modelling_Wire_Wrapped_scr
een.out
17 Modelling a well with pre-packed screens T17_Modelling_PrePacked_Screen.
OUT
18 Modelling a well with slotted liners T18_Modelling_A_Slotted_Liners.
out
Tutoria
l
19 Matching a Naturally Flowing Oil Well Test T19_Matching_Well_Test_For_Oil_Wel
l.OUT
20 Matching a Gas Well Test T20_Matching_Well_Test_For_Gas_We
ll.OUT
21 Matching a Water Injection Well Test T21_Matching_Water_Injection_Well_
Test.OUT
22 Matching a Gas Injection Well Test T22_Matching_Gas_Injection_Well_Tes
779
PROSPER
ts.OUT
Artificial Lift Design Tutorials
Tutoria
l
23 Continuous Gas lift design T23_Continuous_GasLift_Design.OUT
24 Intermittent Gas Lift Design T24_Intermittent_GasLift_Design.OUT
25 Coiled Tubing Gas lift Design T25_Coiled_Tubing_Gas_Lift_Design.
OUT
26 Design of an ESP system for an oil
producer
T26_ESP_Design.OUT
27 Design of an HSP system for an oil
producer
T27_HSP_Design.OUT
28 Design of a Sucker Rod Pump for an oil
producer
T28_Sucker_Rod_Design.OUT
29 Design of a PCP lift system for an oil
producer
T29_PCP_Design.OUT
30 Diluent Injection tutorial T30_Diluent_Injection_with_GasLift.
OUT
31 Multiphase pump in a pipe connected to a
single well
T31_Modelling_Surface_Multiphase_P
ump.OUT
32 Design of a Jet Pump system for an oil
producer
T32_Designing_A_Jet_Pump.OUT
Tutorials on Trouble-shooting of Artificially Lifted Wells
Tutoria
l
33 Troubleshooting a Gas Lifted Well T33_GasLift_QuickLook.OUT
34 Trouble-shooting an ESP-Lifted Well T34_ESP_Quicklook.OUT
35 Trouble-shooting an HSP-Lifted Well T35_HSP_Quicklook.OUT
36 Trouble-shooting a Sucker Rod Lifted Well No reference file
Compositional Modelling Tutorials
Tutoria
l
37 Fully Compositional Retrograde Condensate
Well
T37_Compostional_Condensate_We
ll.Out
38 Validation of the Black Oil PVT Model for a
Retrograde Condensate Producer
T38_BO_Condensate_Validation.
Out
39 Fully compositional CO2 injection well T39_Compostional_CO2_Injector.
Out
Examples Guide 780
Tutorials on Temperature Modelling and Flow Assurance studies
Tutoria
l
40 Full Enthalpy Balance Example T40_Enthalpy_Balance.OUT
41 Improved Approximation Tutorial T41_Improved_Approximation.OUT
42 Modelling a Steam Injection Well T42_Steam_Injector.OUT
43 General Flow Assurance Features T43_Flow Assurance.OUT
Tutoria
l
44 Modelling Non-Newtonian Fluids T44_Modelling_Non_Newtonian_Fl
uids.OUT
45 Modelling a Coal Bed Methane (CBM) Water
Producer
T45_CBM_Dewatering_Well.OUT
46 Modelling Emulsions T46_Modelling_An_Emulsion.OUT
47 Gas Lift in a Gas Well T47_Gas_Lift_For_Gas_Wells.OUT
3.1.1 Introduction to Tutorials in PROSPER
This tutorial section is aimed at introducing the different capabilities of PROSPER to
the user through a series of interlinked tutorials. This tutorial section is aimed at
introducing the different capabilities of PROSPER to the user through a series of
interlinked tutorials.
The tutorials are envisaged to tell the story of a new field, the Logie field, so as to show
how the different elements within PROSPER can be combined during the different
stages of a wells life.
The tutorials have therefore been created to continue on from each other and so the files
become more advanced as the tutorials progress. Using the completed tutorial files
located in the ~/Petroleum Experts/IPM 8/Samples/Prosper/ folder, it is possible to
pick up and start any tutorial without having already completed the previous steps but
there is also the option to start from the beginning to see how the whole well model has
been created.
The tutorials have been grouped into different topics:
Naturally flowing producer and injector wells
Inputting PVT data
IPR Modelling
781
PROSPER
Skin and Sand Control Modelling
Matching Models to Well Test Data
Design of Artificial Lift Methods
Troubleshooting of Artificial Lift Methods
Temperature Modelling
Compositional Modelling
Pipeline and Flow Assurance Modelling
Other Specialist Topics
3.1.1.1 Advise on Input Data
Depending on the information available to the user, different approaches may be more
advantageous in order to build a more robust well model. Below are a number of
considerations the user may wish to make when inserting different sets of data into
PROSPER.
3.1.1.1.1 PVT Data
When building a PROSPER well model, there are in general two possible situations to
consider with respect to the PVT data. There can be a situation where enough PVT
data is available and a second contrasting situation when there is very little PVT data
available.
If comprehensive black oil PVT data is available, then it is recommended to match the
PVT data to the black oil correlations.
The advantages of matching the black oil data to correlations are:
The PVT matching process offers an opportunity to check the quality of the PVT
data themselves by analyzing the magnitude of the correction required to
reproduce the various PVT data: GOR, Oil FVF, Bubble point pressure and oil
viscosity.
At the end of the PVT matching process, the most suitable black oil correlation
for the particular crude is selected and used for further calculations.
Unlike PVT look-up tables, carefully matched black oil correlations may generally
Examples Guide 782
be used for operating conditions beyond the values used for the PVT matching.
In the event no extensive PVT data or no reliable PVT data are available, the black oil
correlation may generally be used directly without any matching to start with. The
selection of the appropriate black oil correlation is a matter of engineering judgment that
is at the discretion of the project engineer. For details about the published validity range
of each black oil correlation in PROSPER, the relevant references listed in the appendix
of this manual may be consulted.
It is strongly recommended to match the black oil correlations against lab
measurements as soon as a PVT report becomes available.
If PVT tables are used in PROSPER, it is imperative that the range of the tables (for
both temperature and pressure) cover every possible operating condition within the
model. If conditions within the model fall out with the range of the tables, PROSPER will
extrapolate fluid properties based on the tables. These may be unrepresentative of the
actual fluid and lead to errors within the model.
3.1.1.1.2 Reservoir Data
The purpose of each specific study determines the type of reservoir model to be
selected and consequently the parameters required.
In the absence of typical reservoir properties such as permeability, net pay, skin etc, the
simple Productivity Index (PI entry ) or its equivalent for gas (C & n) may be used.
If extensive reservoir and skin parameters are available, then an alternative inflow model
that better fits the purpose of the study should be considered.
3.1.1.1.3 Well Equipment Data
The well equipment data (deviation survey, surface equipment, down-hole equipment
and geothermal gradient) are generally available from well bore schematic and
temperature logs.
The overall heat transfer coefficient in the surroundings of the well bore can be either
computed with the enthalpy balance model or derived from well test data.
When the rough approximation method is being used, the following overall heat transfer
coefficients values may be considered as starting values:
For oil and water wells: 8 Btu/h/ft
2
/F.
For retrograde condensate wells: 5 Btu/h/ft
2
/F.
783
PROSPER
For gas wells: 3 Btu/h/ft
2
/F.
It is recommended to fine-tune the overall heat transfer coefficient with well test data as
soon as well test are available.
It is advised that the default average heat capacities displayed in the program under
System | Equipment | Average Heat Capacities are kept unaltered for the vast majority
of cases.
3.1.1.1.4 Well Test Data
Well test data are generally used to:
Back-calculate the overall heat transfer coefficient in the surroundings of the well
when the rough approximation temperature method is selected.
Select the multiphase correlation most suitable for the particular well model
fine-tune the inflow performance parameters like reservoir pressure, skin,
permeability and so on.
It can be noted that it is perfectly possible to develop a PROSPER model in the
absence of well test data. In this case, reasonable assumptions are to be made based
upon the specific operating conditions of the well and based upon existing relevant
experiences.
Generally, the use of the Petroleum Experts 2 multiphase correlation may be considered
when no well test data is available as the Petroleum Experts 2 multiphase correlation
has so far consistently given reasonable results in very diverse operating conditions.
However, since there is no universal multiphase correlation, it is recommended to verify
the suitability of the selected multiphase correlation (Petroleum Experts 2) as soon as
well test data become available.
PROSPER offers a coherent and consistent VLP matching procedure that helps the user
to select the most suitable correlation for any particular well. This consistent VLP
matching procedure will be described and applied in the Matching Models to Well Test
Data section of tutorials.
Examples Guide 784
3.1.2 Tutorial 00 Integrated Oil Well Model
The work flow in PROSPER is to move from the left of the top toolbar to the right
accessing each drop down menu in turn. Each menu should be completed by starting at
the top and moving to the bottom. This simple left to right, top to bottom work flow
should always be followed to ensure that all of the required data for a model is entered.
3.1.2.1 Statement of the Problem
A new field, the Logie field, has been located and is currently being produced. As an
engineer in the operating company, you have been asked to create a well model for the
1
st
well of an oil reservoir using PROSPER.
The well has been producing for some time and so information is available on the fluid
being produced, tubing which has been installed, the completion into the reservoir and
also for a number of well tests which have already been carried out.
A model should therefore be built using the basic data available and then matched to
the test data to ensure that it is representative of the actual flowing conditions of the well.
Once this matching has been carried out, management would like to have an idea of
the impact that water-cut will have on production if the reservoir pressure is maintained
at 4000 psig. This should be carried out for wellhead pressures of 250, 500 and 750
psig.
3.1.2.2 Objectives
The objectives of the tutorial are to:
Create a robust well model which can be used with confidence.
Learn what the input data required to build a PROSPER model is.
Learn how to input PVT data and match a black oil correlation to lab data.
Learn how to input data to generate an IPR curve for the well.
See how skin can be modelled using an analytical approach.
Install a gravel pack to see the impact that this has on the production.
Learn which data is required to generate a VLP curve for the well.
Match the VLP and IPR curves to well test data.
Estimate the reservoir pressure at the time of each test by matching the IPR to
the measured data.
785
PROSPER
Calculate the impact of increasing water cut on production if the reservoir
pressure is maintained at 4000 psig for WHPs of 250, 500 and 750 psig.
3.1.2.3 General Approach
In PROSPER there are three main sections that need to be calculated; the PVT, the VLP
and the IPR. The PVT section defines the fluid properties such as density and viscosity
which are used in the calculations throughout PROSPER. The VLP is the vertical lift
performance and is controlled by the data in the 'Equipment Data' section of PROSPER.
These VLP curves define how much fluid can be lifted by the well at given conditions.
Finally, the IPR (or Inflow Performance Relationship) defines how much fluid can flow
from the reservoir into the wellbore at given conditions.
The general approach which will be taken to achieve these objectives is:
a. PVT data will be used with black oil correlations to predict the properties of the
fluid at the different conditions within the model. To ensure that they are
recreating the actual fluid, the correlations will be matched to laboratory data.
b. The drilling and equipment information will be inserted into the model to define
the down-hole equipment. This will be used to define the VLP curves.
c. Reservoir information will be inserted based on the completion and geological
data which is available. The skin will be approximated using an analytical skin
model and the impact of a previously installed gravel pack will also be assessed.
d. Test data will be inserted and a multi-phase flow correlation will be matched to
his data to ensure that it is recreated the conditions which we have observed in
our field.
e. Find the reservoir pressure for each test so that the VLP/IPR intersection point
gives the same rate as the measured data.
f. Run a sensitivity study using the system calculation to see the impact of water cut
on production at different WHPs.
3.1.2.4 Available Data
The following data has been provided by the different departments of the company.
3.1.2.4.1 Basic Data
This data will be used to set up the model in the options screen.
Fluid Oil and Water
Examples Guide 786
Method Black Oil
Separator Single-Stage Separator
3.1.2.4.2 PVT Data
This is the preliminary PVT data which has been received from the lab to characterise
the fluid as well as results from a flash calculation.
GOR 800 scf/STB
Oil Gravity 37 API
Gas Gravity 0.76 Specific Gravity
Water Salinity 23000 ppm
Mole % H
2
S 0%
Mole % CO
2
0%
Mole % N
2
0%
Flash Experiment Data
Temperature of Test
210
o
F
Bubble Point at Test Temperature 3500 psig
Pressure GOR Oil FVF Viscosity
4000 800 1.42 0.364
3500 800 1.432 0.35
3000 655 1.352 0.403
2400 500 1.273 0.48
1000 190 1.12 0.7205
3.1.2.4.3 Equipment Data
This data has been passed on by the drilling and geology departments to help model
the well.
787
PROSPER
3.1.2.4.3.1 Deviation Survey
The deviation survey is a reflection of the path the well takes to surface. The deviation
survey can start at any reference depth (sea level, well head, platform etc) but the
important idea is that all equipment in the well is describe in a consistent manner with
respect to the reference depth selected.
MD (ft) TVD (ft)
0 0
600 600
1005 1000
4075 4000
7700 7500
9275 9000
3.1.2.4.3.2 Downhole Equipment
The down-hole equipment specifies the path through which the fluid will travel to surface.
The final depth from this data will be used as the solution node where the bottom-hole
pressure is calculated. It is also the depth at which the static reservoir pressure is
defined and as such is normally defined as the top of the reservoir or the top of the
perforations.
Type MD (ft)
Inside
Diameter
(Inches)
Inside
Roughness
(Inches)
Rate Multiplier
X-mas Tree 600 1
Tubing 1000 4.052 0.0006 1
SSSV 3.72 1
Tubing 9000 4.052 0.0006 1
Casing 9275 6.4 0.0006 1
Examples Guide 788
3.1.2.4.3.3 Geothermal Gradient Data
The geothermal gradient is the temperature gradient of the surrounding rock or
atmosphere around the well. It is used to calculate the temperature difference between
the fluid and its surrounding and is used in the calculation of the heat loss. The ambient
temperature at the wellhead and the temperature at the last node (reservoir
temperature) are the minimum data required. More data points can be inserted if they
are known as this will improve the accuracy of geothermal gradient.
When using the 'Rough Approximation' temperature model, the overall heat transfer
coefficient is also required to be inserted to allow PROSPER to calculate the heat
transferred for a given temperature difference.
MD (ft) Temperature (
o
F)
0 60
600 40
9275 210
Overall Heat Transfer coefficient = 8 BTU/hr/ft
2
/
o
F
3.1.2.4.3.4 Average Heat Capacity Data
The default values for the heat capacities of the fluids will be used for this well but they
can be altered if necessary.
Heat Capacity (BTU/lb/
o
F)
Oil 0.53
Gas 0.51
Water 1
3.1.2.4.4 IPR Data
There is a number of different IPR models which can be used in PROSPER and the
model used is dependent on the purpose of the study. In this case the Darcy model will
789
PROSPER
be used to calculate the IPR of the well.
Below is the data required for entry for the Darcy model:
IPR Model Darcy Model
Reservoir Pressure 4000 psig
Reservoir Temperature
210
o
F
Water Cut 0%
Total GOR 800 scf/STB
Skin Model Karakas+Tariq / Martin(2)CincoBronz
Reservoir Permeability 50 md
Reservoir Thickness 100 ft
Drainage Area 500 acres
Dietz Shape Factor 31.6
Wellbore Radius 0.354 ft
The following completion data is available for use within the analytical skin model:
Shot Density
8 ft
-1
Perforation Diameter 0.43 inches
Perforation Length 9.2 inches
Perforation Efficiency 0.9
Damaged Zone Thickness 8 inches
Damaged Zone Permeability 25 md
Crushed Zone Thickness 0.2 inches
Crushed Zone Permeability 12.5 md
Examples Guide 790
Shot Phasing
120
o
WellBore Radius 0.354 ft
Vertical Permeability 5 md
Deviation
13
o
Penetration 1
3.1.2.4.6 Sand Control Data
The following data has been provided by the service company installing the gravel pack:
Gravel Pack Permeability 35000 md
Gravel Pack Length 6 inches
Perforation Interval 100 ft
Beta (Turbulence) Calculated
Method Multiphase
3.1.2.4.7 Test Data
Test Date 16/03/2011 21/05/2011 07/10/2011
Tubing Head Pressure
(psig)
230 521 765
Tubing Head
Temperature (
o
F)
143.8 134.2 118
Water Cut (%) 0 0.5 1.9
Liquid Rate (STB/day) 9784.1 7915.3 5636.9
Gauge Depth (ft) 6250 6250 6250
Gauge Pressure (psig) 1322.6 1623.8 1962.6
Reservoir Pressure
(psig)
4000 4000 4000
Gas Oil Ratio (scf/STB) 800 800 800
GOR Free (scf/STB) 0 0 0
3.1.2.5 Step-by-Step Guide
791
PROSPER
3.1.2.5.1 Setting Up the Model
A new file should be opened in PROSPER from File | New. If PROSPER has just been
opened, then a new file will have been automatically opened and therefore there is no
need to select a new file.
The first step in any PROSPER model is to set up the type of well which is to be
modelled. The option screen can be accessed by selecting Options | Options and in
this case, the fluid type is Oil and Water using the Black Oil PVT method. We know that
a gravel pack has been installed in this well and therefore Sand Control option should
be set to Gravel Pack:
When this section has been completed, select Done to return to the main PROSPER
screen.
3.1.2.5.2 Inserting PVT Data
The next stage is to insert the available PVT data into the model. The PVT input screen
can be accessed by selecting the PVT | Input Data tab. The PVT data to be entered
can be seen below:
Examples Guide 792
GOR 800 scf/STB
Oil Gravity 37 API
Mole % H
2
S 0%
Mole % CO
2
0%
Mole % N
2
0%
3.1.2.5.2.1 PVT Matching
PVT data from a laboratory flash test has been provided to help us ensure that the fluid
properties calculated by the black oil correlations are representative of the actual fluid:
Flash Experiment Data
Temperature of Test
210
o
F
793
PROSPER
4000 800 1.42 0.364
3500 800 1.432 0.35
3000 655 1.352 0.403
2400 500 1.273 0.48
1000 190 1.12 0.7205
To insert the match data, select Match Data from the top of the screen:
This will open the match data screen into which the laboratory data can be entered:
Select Match to proceed to the regression screen.
Examples Guide 794
3.1.2.5.2.2 Matching the Correlations
Having selected Match, the following screen will be displayed:
Selecting Match All at the top of the screen will match all of the correlations to all of the
available data. If Match is selected then only the correlations selected will be matched
and this will be done to which ever properties are selected in the Match On box to the
left of the screen.
In this case select Match All to match all of the correlations and data.
By selecting the Plot option it is possible to see the graph of the matched correlation
compared to the laboratory data points. The correlation which will be shown in the
plotting is the correlation which has been selected in the Correlations section of the
above screen. The option of plotting the data either By Pressure or By Temperature is
given. Selecting By Temperature will plot each different variable against pressure and
have a different trend line for each temperature, while the By Pressure option will show
trend lines depending on pressure and plot against temperature. In this case select By
Temperature:
795
PROSPER
To plot the required variable, first select the PVT Matching Plot - Temperature = 210
(deg F) stream in the top left hand corner of the plot. Once the stream has been
selected, double click the variable Gas Oil Ratio in the bottom left hand corner. This
should also be carried out for the PVT Matching Data - Temperature = 210 (deg F)
stream to plot the test data:
Examples Guide 796
The different properties can be plotted by selecting them from the bottom left hand
corner. It can be seen from these plots that the Glaso and Beal et al correlations give
good matches with the test data. To exit the plot, select the red cross in the top right
hand corner of the screen.
It is possible to plot other correlations against the test data by selecting them in the
Correlations section of the screen and selecting Plot:
From the regression screen it is possible to view the resultant matching parameters by
selecting Parameters:
797
PROSPER
For a good match, parameter 1 should be as close to 1 as possible and parameter 2
should be as close to 0 as possible. Upon reviewing the parameters it can be seen that
the best correlations to select are the Glaso and Beal et al correlations:
Examples Guide 798
Select Done at each screen until the main PVT screen is seen.
3.1.2.5.2.3 Selecting the Correlation
Now that the correlations have been matched and the parameters and plots reviewed, it
is necessary to select the correlation which is most representative of the laboratory
data. This is done on the main PVT 'Input Data' screen. The correlations in the drop
down menu are those which will be used in the model and for this oil the Glaso and Beal
et al correlations should be selected:
799
PROSPER
A green banner can also be seen which tells the user that the correlations have been
matched.
Select Done to return to the main PROSPER screen.
3.1.2.5.3 Specifying Equipment Data
In order to calculate the VLP curves for the well, PROSPER must have a description of
the well and the path through which the fluid flows from the bottom of the well to the
wellhead. This is done in the 'Equipment Data' section, which can be accessed by
selecting System | Equipment (Tubing etc).
This will bring up the 'Equipment Data' screen. In order to fill in data for all of the
appropriate sections select All from the top ribbon and this will bring up ticks next to
each section:
Examples Guide 800
The Edit button can now be selected to bring up each input section one at a time.
If only one section is to be edited, the required section can be accessed by selecting
the square to the left of the ticked box corresponding to that section.
801
PROSPER
In this screen the well deviation survey can be added:
Examples Guide 802
It should be noted that if the deviation survey to be entered has more than 20 data
points, it is possible to reduce the number of points using a filter algorithm. This option
is accessible by selecting the Filter button. For more information on the filtering option,
please refer to the Filter Section of the User Guide.
To move onto the next input screen, select Done
3.1.2.5.3.2 Surface Equipment
As there is no surface equipment in this model, this section can be left blank. In order to
proceed select the Cancel button:
803
PROSPER
The down-hole equipment section defines the path through which the fluid will flow as it
is produced up the well bore. Details of the equipment to be installed can be found in
the table below:
Type MD (ft)
Inside
Diameter
(Inches)
Inside
Roughness
(Inches)
Rate Multiplier
X-mas Tree 600 1
Tubing 1000 4.052 0.0006 1
SSSV 3.72 1
Tubing 9000 4.052 0.0006 1
Casing 9275 6.4 0.0006 1
This can be inserted as shown in the screenshot below:
Examples Guide 804
The final depth from the down-hole equipment will be used as the solution node depth
which splits the well into the VLP and IPR. This depth is also therefore the depth at
which the static reservoir pressure is defined in the IPR section. It is normally defined as
the top of the perforations and thus this equipment description should stop at the top of
the perforations.
When the data has been inserted, the next input screen can be accessed by selecting
Done.
3.1.2.5.3.4 Geothermal Gradient
The geothermal gradient which is entered is the geothermal gradient of the rock around
the well. It is used to calculate the temperature difference that the fluid experiences as it
travels up the well and is used in the calculation of heat transfer. The Overall Heat
Transfer Coefficient is also input into this screen and the value should account for the
heat transfer from the fluid to the surroundings. The geothermal gradient and U value
entered can be seen below:
805
PROSPER
Selecting Done will exit the geothermal gradient screen and enter the final equipment
input screen.
3.1.2.5.3.5 Average Heat Capacities
The average heat capacities of water, oil and gas are used in the Rough
Approximation temperature model to calculate the energy which is provided when the
fluid changes temperature. These are to be kept equal to the default values:
Selecting Done will move the user on to the final input screen.
3.1.2.5.3.6 Gauge Details
It is possible to enter the depths of different gauges in the PROSPER file. If gauges are
added, the pressure and temperature at the gauge depth will be given as a reported
result when calculations such as VLP are completed.
Examples Guide 806
In this case no gauge depths have yet been specified and so select Done to return to
the main 'Equipment Data' screen:
3.1.2.5.3.7 Equipment Summary
From the equipment input screen it is possible to see a summary of the equipment by
selecting the Summary button on the top right of the screen:
This brings up the equipment summary screen:
807
PROSPER
It is then possible to see a drawing of the down-hole equipment by selecting Draw
Downhole:
To gain direct access to the main PROSPER screen, the Main button can be selected
from the plot ribbon bar.
3.1.2.5.4 Inputting IPR Data
The IPR section of PROSPER is used to describe the inflow from the reservoir and into
the bottom of the well. A relationship between the flow rate which will come into the well
and the pressure at the bottom of the well will be developed.
Examples Guide 808
Select System | Inflow Performance to bring up the IPR input screen:
The different models can be selected on the Select Model screen and in this case the
reservoir model should be set to Darcy, the Mechanical/Geometrical skin should be set
to Karakas+Tariq and the Deviation and Partial Penetration skin should be set to Cinco
(2)/Martin Bronz. The reservoir pressure, temperature, water cut and total GOR should
be entered as shown above.
When the Darcy model is selected, the Input Data button in the top right hand corner
will turn red. This signifies that there is missing data which must be filled in. Press the
Input Data button to see which data must be included.
3.1.2.5.4.1 Entering Data for the Darcy Model
The IPR Data screen can be seen below and should be filled with the new IPR data:
809
PROSPER
Insert the reservoir properties which were provided into the table to complete the model.
If the Dietz Shape Factor is not known, it is possible to calculate the value for a given
shape by selecting Calculate Dietz. Selecting Validate will alert the user to any fields
which have not yet been completed or values which fall outside of the validation ranges.
3.1.2.5.4.2 Entering Data for Skin Models
At the bottom of the screen, two tabs can be seen; the Mech/Geom Skin tab and the
Dev/PP Skin tab.
Selecting the Mech/Geom Skin tab will bring up the input screen for the Karakas and
Tariq model:
Examples Guide 810
The Karakas and Tariq model requires the damaged zone, crushed zone and vertical
permeabilities. These values are not always known and so the Karakas and Tariq
paper gave a set of guidelines to estimate there values:
Damaged
Zone
Permeability
50% of
Reservoir
Permeability
Crushed Zone
Permeability
25% of
Reservoir
Permeability
Vertical
Permeability
10% of
Reservoir
Permeability
Once these values have been inserted, the next tab can be accessed to see the
deviation and partial penetration skin inputs:
811
PROSPER
During the process of inserting data into the model it may be noticed that some values
are already inserted. If a value, such as well bore radius has been inserted into a
different screen in the IPR section, the value will be copied across to ensure the
consistency of the model. If the value is changed, it will also be changed on the other
screens as well.
Please note that the Cinco model is based upon correlations and is not valid for
wells with deviations of greater than 65
o
. For highly deviated wells, the Wong
Clifford skin model should be selected.
3.1.2.5.4.3 Entering Data for Sand Control
The final tab at the bottom of the screen which is still red will be the 'Sand Control' tab:
Select this tab and enter the required data as shown below:
Examples Guide 812
Some of this data (which has previously been entered in earlier screens) will already be
present. When variables are repeated in the different screens (such as shot density or
perforation diameter) in order to keep the model consistent the same value is used for
each. Therefore, changing it in one screen will also change it on all other screens.
When the data has been inserted select Calculate:
813
PROSPER
Exit the plot and select Done to return to the main PROSPER screen. The IPR curve
should now be displayed in the top left hand corner of the main screen.
3.1.2.5.5 VLP/IPR Matching
Now that all of the well data has been inserted, and the PVT has been matched to
ensure that it recreates the laboratory experiments, well test data can be used to see if
the current model can recreate the conditions measured in the field. We can match the
VLP and IPR correlations to this data so that the model becomes representative of the
actual flowing conditions of the well.
To access the VLP/IPR Matching screen, select the Matching | Matching | VLP/IPR
(Quality Check) menu from the top ribbon. This will bring up the screen shown below:
Examples Guide 814
3.1.2.5.5.1 Entering Well Test Data
The test data below should be entered into the matching screen:
Test Date 16/03/2011 21/05/2011 07/10/2011
(psig)
230 521 765
Tubing Head
Temperature (
o
F)
143.8 134.2 118
Water Cut (%) 0 0.5 1.9
Gauge Depth (ft) 6250 6250 6250
Reservoir Pressure
(psig)
4000 4000 4000
815
PROSPER
3.1.2.5.5.2 Matching U Value
Once the data has been entered, the Overall heat Transfer Coefficient required to
match the measured well head temperature can be found for each test. To carry out this
calculation select Estimate:
The calculated U value for each test will be displayed:
Examples Guide 816
Select OK at each screen to continue. When all three values have been shown, the
average will be calcualted:
This value is to be used in the model and therefore select Yes to transfer it to the
Geothermal Gradient screen.
817
PROSPER
Select OK to return to the matching screen.
3.1.2.5.5.3 VLP Quality Check
With the U value matched, we can be confident that the temperature profile in the well is
being captured accurately. The next step is to carry out a quality check to ensure that the
model, test data and gauge pressure which has been measured are consistent.
For the quality check we use two correlations, the Fancher Brown and the Duns and
Ros Modified, to create an envelope inside which a test point should fall. The Fancher
Brown correlation is a no slip correlation (as it assumes that the gas and liquid travel at
the same velocity in the tubing) and therefore will under predict the pressure drop for an
oil well. The Duns and Ros Modified correlation has been adapted to over predict the
pressure drop for oil wells producing in the slug flow regime. Therefore, if a test point
falls either below the Fancher Brown or is greater than the Duns and Ros Modified then
we can consider the quality of the test point or model to be in question. If it falls between
the two we can say that it has passed this initial test.
To carry out the quality check, select the Correlation Comparison button from the top
of the VLP/IPR Matching screen:
When the prompt is shown, select OK:
Examples Guide 818
The measured data for the first test will be automatically bought into this screen:
In order to carry out the quality check, select the Duns and Ros Modified and Fancher
Brown correlations from the bottom left hand corner of the screen:
Select Calculate to carry out the calculations for each correlation:
819
PROSPER
To see if the test point falls between the two gradients, select Plot:
For the case of test point one, we can see that it does indeed fall between these two
correlations and can therefore be said to have passed the quality check.
After exiting the plot, select Done in the Correlation Comparison screen:
A prompt will now appear for the second test point. Select OK to enter the correlation
comparison with the test data from test two:
Examples Guide 820
The exact same steps as shown above should be carried out for test points two and
three. When this is done, the points will also be found to fall within the envelope and
therefore pass the quality check:
821
PROSPER
When all three have been completed, selecting Done will return the user to the VLP/IPR
Matching screen.
3.1.2.5.5.4 Correlation Comparison
All three test points have been found to pass the quality check test and so the next step
is to find the correlation which best represents the measured pressure drop. This can be
done by selecting Correlation Comparison:
Examples Guide 822
This will transfer the first set of test data into the Correlation Comparison screen:
At the bottom left corner of the screen, the correlations to be used in the comparison
can be selected. In this case we will select Hagedorn Brown, Beggs and Brill,
Petroleum Experts 2, Petroleum Experts 3 and Petroleum Experts 4:
Next, select Calculate to perform the gradient calculation for each of the selected
correlations:
823
PROSPER
Select Plot to see how close each correlation comes to the measured data point:
In this case, the Petroleum Experts 2 correlation is the closest to the measured gauge
pressure.
Select the red cross in the top right hand corner to exit from the plot and then select
Done to return to the Correlation Comparison screen:
Selecting Done again will leave the Correlation Comparison screen and a prompt
screen will appear so that the same process can be carried out for the next test:
Examples Guide 824
Select OK to return to the Correlation Comparison screen with the 2nd set of test data.
The same steps as shown above should be performed to see the plot:
For the second case, the Petroleum Experts 2 correlation is still the closest to the test
data.
screen will appear so that the same process can be carried out for the final test. Select
OK to return to the Correlation Comparison screen with the 2nd test's data. The same
steps as we performed for the first and second tests should also be carried out for the
third and the correlations are compared to the test data:
825
PROSPER
For the final case, both the Petroleum Experts 2 and Petroleum Experts 3 correlations
are close to the test data.
Based upon these three test, therefore, we can say that the correlation which gives the
most consistently close results when compared to the gauge pressures is Petroleum
Experts 2.
Done on the next two screens to return to the VLP/IPR Matching screen.
3.1.2.5.5.5 VLP Matching
The correlation which was found to be closest to all three test data points was found to
be Petroleum Experts 2. This correlation will now be matched so that it recreates each
point exactly. This can be done by selecting Match VLP:
This will display the matching screen:
Examples Guide 826
Select the correlation to be matched (in this case Petroleum Experts 2) on the left hand
side of the screen and then select Match to carry out the regression:
When the match has been completed, the match parameters are displayed in the centre
of the screen. Parameter 1 is a multiplier applied to the pressure drop due to gravity
while Parameter 2 is a multiplier applied to the pressure drop due to friction. These
parameters are now also added to the end of the correlation name which is now
Petroleum Experts 2 1.03 1.01.
827
PROSPER
The right hand side of the screen shows the both the measured gauge pressure and the
pressures which are calculated with the newly matched correlations. As can be seen,
the correlation now recreates the gauge pressures.
Select Done to return to the previous screen.
3.1.2.5.5.6 IPR Matching
The pressure and temperature profiles in the well have now been matched to the test
data. The next step is to see where the VLP and IPR curves will intersect for the given
model. If the model is correct, they should intersect at the same rate as was measured
during each test.
We have been told that based on other tests, we are confident that the IPR curve is
accurate for this well and so if the IPR and VLP curves do not intersect at the correct
rates we can use this information to estimate the reservoir pressure at the time of the
test.
Select VLP/IPR to enter the VLP/IPR Matching screen:
On the left hand side of the screen, select all three tests (by ticking the boxes next to
them) and also select the Petroleum Experts 2 correlation:
Examples Guide 828
Select Calculate and a prompt box will appear asking which tests and correlations are
to be calculated:
As all of the tests and the required correlation have been selected (with a tick placed
next to them) select Calculate SELECTED Correlations, SELECTED Tests. After the
calculation has been completed, select Plot to see if the intersections match the test
rates:
829
PROSPER
The screen above shows that the test points (represented by the blue crosses) and
calculated intersection points (represented by the blue squares) do not match up. It
appears that in each case a different reservoir pressure will be required to match each
test. This can be done using the Adjust IPR option.
Select Finish to exit the plot and then Done to return to the VLP/IPR Matching screen.
In order to calculate the reservoir pressure at the time of each well test, select Adjust
IPR:
This will bring up the 'Adjust IPR' screen:
Examples Guide 830
On the top of the screen, the Petroleum Experts 2 correlation should be selected.
It is possible to match each test one at a time, or select multiple tests to be matched at
the same time. If multiple tests are matched, an average reservoir pressure will be
calculated which would imply that the tests were all carried out at the same pressure. As
the tests here were carried out months apart, the reservoir pressure is most likely
different and so each test should be matched individually and the reservoir pressure
calculated saved.
In the top left of the screen, select test 1 by placing a tick in box next to it:
Once it is selected, press Adjust Pres. A prompt will appear asking which test is to be
matched. The selected test should be matched:
831
PROSPER
When the match has been carried out, a new reservoir pressure will be calculated. This
should be transferred to the VLP/IPR Match screen by selecting the option and pressing
OK:
This same process should be carried out for tests 2 and 3. When this has been
completed press Done to return to the VLP/IPR Matching screen and see the
calculated reservoir pressure at the time of each test:
Examples Guide 832
Select VLP/IPR and then Done, followed by Plot to see that the VLP/IPR intersection
points now match up with the test rates:
This completes the VLP/IPR matching process as the model is now recreating the test
results measured in the field. Select Main from the top of the plot to return to the main
PROSPER screen.
833
PROSPER
3.1.2.5.6 Water Cut Sensitivity
Now that the model has been adjusted to match field data, we can use the model to
predict what may happen over various operating conditions.
The objective of this sensitivity is to find the impact of increasing water cut on production
if the reservoir pressure is 4000 psig. This should be carried out for first node pressures
of 250, 500 and 750 psig.
This can be achieved by running a System Calculation by selecting Calculation |
System (Ipr + Vlp).
3.1.2.5.6.1 Setting Variables
The top left hand side of the screen should be filled with the relevant data for these
calculations:
As the Top Node Pressure and Water Cut are to be used in the sensitivity study, the
values entered here will be overwritten.
Ensure that the matched correlation is selected and that the rate method is changed to
Automatic - Geometric as this will give us more definition within the unstable region of
the VLP curve.
Select Cases to enter the different sensitivity variables. Each variable can be selected
from the drop down lists on the left hand side and then the values to be used can be
entered on the right hand side:
Examples Guide 834
835
PROSPER
When these values have been inserted, select Done to return to the calculation screen.
3.1.2.5.6.2 System Calculation
Select Calculate to carry out the System Calculation:
After the calculation has been completed, select Sensitivity Plot. Press Variables at
the top of the screen to change the values being plotted:
Examples Guide 836
To see the intended plot, we should select to see Liquid Rate on the y-axis, Water Cut
on the X-axis and have First Node Pressure as the parameter variable:
837
PROSPER
This plot shows us the impact of the water cut on the production as the increasing water
cut leads to a lower production rate. When the first node pressure is 750 psig, the well
will stop producing at between 60 and 70% water cut while first the pressure is dropped
to 500 psig then it will stop producing between 80 and 90%. With a well head pressure
of 250 psig, the well is able to produce all the way up to 90% water cut when the
reservoir pressure is 4000 psig.
This marks the end of Tutorial 00. This is the equivalent to completing tutorials
01, 05, 08, 12, 14 and 19. After completing this tutorial the user should be able to:
Build an integrated oil well which represents the real flowing conditions of the
well.
Insert and match PVT data to reproduce the results of laboratory experiments.
Insert the required equipment data to build a VLP curve.
Build a Darcy IPR model and include an analytical skin model to account for
the differences between the 'ideal' Darcy reservoir model and the real life well.
Insert the required data to include the impact of a gravel pack on the IPR.
Match the VLP curve to test data.
Use the matched VLP curve to estimate the reservoir pressure at the time of
the test when the productivity is known.
Carry out a sensitivity to see the impact that water cut has on well production.
Examples Guide 838
3.1.3 Tutorial 01 Basic Oil Well Model
A new field, the Logie field, has been located and is currently being drilled. As an
engineer in the operating company, you have been asked to create a well model for the
first well of an oil reservoir using PROSPER.
Limited information is available at this time but as the well is completed and tested this
will change and the extra data will allow the model to be progressively improved.
Currently, it is known that the well will have a subsea well head and is slightly deviated.
The casing and tubing sizes to be used are also known and it is envisaged that a
subsea safety valve will be located beneath the well head.
From other wells in the area, an initial estimation of the reservoir productivity has also
been made.
Management would also like to have an initial idea of what the flow rate of the well would
be if no water was produced and the flowing well head pressure was 500 psig.
3.1.3.2 Objectives
Create a preliminary well model to which more information can be added.
Learn what the basic input data required to build a PROSPER model is.
Learn to perform a system calculation to estimate the flow rate of the well.
These VLP curves define how much energy is required to lift the fluid at given
conditions. Finally, the IPR (or Inflow Performance Relationship) defines how much fluid
can flow from the reservoir into the wellbore at a range of different bottom hole
pressures.
839
PROSPER
a. Basic fluid PVT data will be used with black oil correlations to predict the
properties of the fluid at the different conditions within the model.
the down-hole equipment. This will be used to calculate the VLP curves.
c. Basic IPR information will be inserted based on other fields within the area.
d. A system calculation will be performed to assess the likely production at the
given conditions by combining the VLP and IPR curves.
Fluid Oil and Water
Method Black Oil
3.1.3.4.2 PVT Data
the fluid.
GOR 800 scf/STB
Oil Gravity 37 API
Mole % H
2
S
0%
Mole % CO
2
0%
Mole % N
2
0%
Examples Guide 840
the well.
MD (ft) TVD (ft)
0 0
600 600
1005 1000
4075 4000
7700 7500
9275 9000
perforations.
Type MD (ft)
Inside
Diameter
(Inches)
Inside
Roughness
(Inches)
Rate Multiplier
X-mas Tree 600 1
Tubing 1000 4.052 0.0006 1
SSSV 3.72 1
841
PROSPER
Tubing 9000 4.052 0.0006 1
Casing 9275 6.4 0.0006 1
temperature) are the minimum data required. More data points can be inserted if they
are known as this will improve the accuracy of geothermal gradient.
o
F)
0 60
600 40
9275 210
2
/
o
F
o
F)
Oil 0.53
Gas 0.51
Water 1
Examples Guide 842
3.1.3.4.4 IPR Data
model used is dependent on the purpose of the study. In this case the 'PI Entry' model
will be used until more information on the reservoir becomes available.
Reservoir Model PI Entry
210
o
F
Water Cut 0%
Productivity Index 5 STB/day/psi
The following section presents a step-by-step guide to how to complete this tutorial.
this case, the data is kept as the default for all the options with the fluid being Oil and
Water:
843
PROSPER
screen.
The next stage is to insert the available PVT data which will be used to calculate our
fluid's properties in the model. The PVT input screen can be accessed by selecting the
PVT | Input Data tab and the PVT data to be entered can be seen below:
GOR 800 scf/STB
Examples Guide 844
Oil Gravity 37 API
Mole % H
2
S 0%
Mole % CO
2
0%
Mole % N
2
0%
Select Done to return to the main screen.
845
PROSPER
each section:
Examples Guide 846
847
PROSPER
Examples Guide 848
the table below:
Type MD (ft)
Inside
Diameter
(Inches)
Inside
Roughness
(Inches)
Rate Multiplier
X-mas Tree 600 1
Tubing 1000 4.052 0.0006 1
SSSV 3.72 1
Tubing 9000 4.052 0.0006 1
Casing 9275 6.4 0.0006 1
849
PROSPER
the perforations.
Done.
Examples Guide 850
input screen.
851
PROSPER
Examples Guide 852
Downhole:
The IPR section of PROSPER defines the inflow of the well and therefore how
productive the reservoir is. There are over 20 IPR models available in PROSPER and
853
PROSPER
each is applicable to a different situation or series of conditions.
The IPR input screen can be accessed by selecting System | Inflow Performance. On
the Select Model screen, the IPR model can be selected as well as the current
reservoir properties such as reservoir pressure and temperature, water cut and
producing GOR. In this case, the PI reservoir model should be selected and the
remaining IPR data entered as shown below:
By selecting the Input Data tab at the top right corner, the model data can also be
inserted. In this case, the only parameter required to be entered is the Productivity Index
of the well:
Examples Guide 854
When this data has been inserted, click Calculate to view the IPR curve:
855
PROSPER
The plot shows how both the bottom hole pressure and bottom hole temperature vary
with flow rate.
The IPR should be recalculated any time the properties are changed as the AOF of the
well is used in many calculations to obtain the maximum range of rates to be used.
Close the plot window by selecting the 'X' in the top left of the window to return to the IPR
screen and the select Done to return to the main PROSPER screen. Please note that if
this window is exited using Cancel, none of the changes made will be saved.
The main screen will now display an IPR curve to show that the calculation has been
completed:
Examples Guide 856
3.1.3.5.5 Running System Calc
Now that the well data has been inserted into PROSPER, the next step is to calculate the
rate at which the well can flow at a given set of conditions. This can be done with the use
of a System Calculation which will combine the VLP and IPR plots to find the system
point at which the well will flow.
The System Calculation screen can be accessed by selecting Calculations | System
(VLP + IPR):
857
PROSPER
The screen is split into 4 main elements;
- The top left corner contains the input data which will be used for the calculation.
- The bottom left corner will contain any information on the sensitivity study cases
being considered.
- The top right corner will contain information on the system calculation and the
solution point which is obtained.
- The bottom right corner will contain the system plot itself (consisting of the VLP
and IPR curves).

3.1.3.5.5.1 Inserting Calculation Conditions
At this time, we wish to calculate the liquid rate which will be produced if the wellhead
pressure is set to 500 psig and the water cut and GOR are left as 0% and 800 scf/STB
respectfully. This data should therefore be added to the top left hand corner of the
screen:
Examples Guide 858
The rate method should be changed to Automatic - Geometric as this will give us more
definition within the unstable region of the VLP curve.
3.1.3.5.5.2 Running a System Calculation
It is now possible to run a system calculation. Select Calculate to run the calculation:
859
PROSPER
The results screen will now show the System Plot at the bottom of the screen. The
details of the solution point can be seen in the top right of the screen.
It can be seen from this screen that if the Well Head Pressure is 500 psig and the Water
Cut is 0% then the model predicts that the well will flow at approximately 12145 STB/day
and that the corresponding solution node pressure (which is equivalent to the FBHP) is
2684 psig.
We can also view the System Plot by selecting Plot | System Plot from the top ribbon:
Close the plot and select Done to return to the main PROSPER screen.
To save the file select File | Save As...
This marks the end of Tutorial 1. After completing this tutorial the user should be
able to:
Build a basic PROSPER model using the different sections to input data about
the well.
Carry out a system calculation to estimate the production from a well at a given
set of conditions.
Examples Guide 860
3.1.4 Tutorial 02 - Basic Gas Well Model
A new over-pressured gas field, the Powderhall field, has been located and has just
been drilled. As an engineer in the operating company, you have been asked to create
a well model for the first well of a gas reservoir using PROSPER.
Limited information is available at this time but as the well is completed and tested this
will change and the extra data will allow the model to be progressively improved. The
reservoir is on-land, and as the well has been drilled, the deviation survey is known. The
casing and tubing sizes to be used are also known and it is envisaged that a safety
valve will be located beneath the well head.
Currently the well is producing 1 STB/MMscf of water and it is believed that part of this
water is vaporised within the gas when it is travelling up the well. The model should
therefore be set up to take into account the condensation or vaporisation of this water
within the wellbore.
It is foreseen that the well will produce at approximately 1500 psig flowing well head
pressure and therefore an estimate of the gas rate which will be produced in this case is
sought.
3.1.4.2 Objectives
Create a preliminary gas well model to which more information can be added.
Learn what the basic input data required to build a PROSPER model is.
Insert an IPR Model for the well.
861
PROSPER
a. Basic fluid PVT data will be entered to be used with PVT correlations to predict
the properties of the fluid at the different conditions within the model.
c. An IPR is to be built using the Petroleum Experts IPR Model.
given conditions.
Fluid Dry and Wet Gas
Method Black Oil
Water Vapour Calculate Condensed Water Vapour
3.1.4.4.2 PVT Data
the fluid.
Separator Pressure 200 psig
Condensate Gas Ratio 1 STB/MMscf
Condensate Gravity 50 API
Water Gas Ratio 1 STB/MMscf
Examples Guide 862
Mole % H
2
S 0%
Mole % CO
2
0.5%
Mole % N
2
2%
important concept is that all equipment in the well is describe in a consistent manner
with respect to the reference depth selected.
Measured Depth
(ft)
Total Vertical
Depth (ft)
0 0
1500 1500
2000 1980
2500 2450
3000 2883
3500 3300
4000 3721
4500 4140
5000 4560
5400 4900
863
PROSPER
perforations.
Type Measured
Depth (ft)
Inside
Diameter
(inches)
Inside
Roughness
(inches)
Rate
Multiplier
Xmas Tree 0
Tubing 1000 3.958 0.0006 1
SSSV 3 1
Tubing 5000 3.958 0.0006 1
Casing 5400 6 0.0006 1
atmosphere around the well. It is used to calculate temperature difference between the
fluid and its surrounding and is used in the calculation of the heat loss. The ambient
temperature) are required. More data points can be inserted if they are known as this
will improve the accuracy of geothermal gradient.
o
F)
0 45
1500 75
5400 166
Examples Guide 864
2
/
o
F.
3.1.4.4.4 IPR Data
The following information can be used to generate a Petroleum Experts IPR Model.
Inflow Model Petroleum Experts
Skin Model Enter Skin By Hand
166
o
F
CGR 1
WGR 1
Time Since Production Started 50 days
Reservoir Porosity 0.15
Connate Water Saturation 0.25
Non-Darcy Flow Factor (D) Calculated
Permeability Entered Total Permeability
SKIN 2
865
PROSPER
3.1.4.5.1 Setting Up The Model
this case, the data is kept as the default for all the options with the fluid being Dry and
Wet Gas and the Water Vapour option set to Calculate Condensed Water Vapour:
screen.
can be seen below:
Separator Pressure 200
Examples Guide 866
Mole % H
2
S 0%
Mole % CO
2
0.5%
Mole % N
2
2%
As the Calculate Condensed Water Vapour option has been enabled, the PVT screen
is also used to calculate the Minimum WGR. This Minimum WGR is the WGR which is
vaporised within the gas at the reservoir conditions which therefore must be produced
even if no other free water is produced. If a WGR value lower than the calculated
Minimum WGR is input for use in a calculation, then this will be replaced by the
Minimum WGR. In this case, when the reservoir conditions (5300 psig and 166
o
F) are
entered the Minimum WGR is found to be 0.27114 STB/MMscf.
It is also possible to see how this Minimum WGR changed with pressure and
temperature by selecting Plot:
867
PROSPER

To exit the plot, select Finish and then select Done to return to the PROSPER main
screen.
each section:
Examples Guide 868
869
PROSPER
Examples Guide 870
871
PROSPER
the table below:
Type MD (ft)
Inside
Diameter
(Inches)
Inside
Roughness
(Inches)
Rate Multiplier
X-mas Tree 0 1
Tubing 1000 3.958 0.0006 1
SSSV 3.0 1
Tubing 5000 3.958 0.0006 1
Casing 5400 6.0 0.0006 1
Examples Guide 872
the perforations.
Done.
873
PROSPER
input screen.
Examples Guide 874
875
PROSPER
Downhole:
Examples Guide 876
The IPR section of PROSPER defines the inflow of the well and therefore how productive
the reservoir is. There are over 20 IPR models available in PROSPER and each is
applicable to a different situation or series of conditions.
The IPR input screen can be accessed by selecting System | Inflow Performance.
The IPR data can be seen below when the Select Model screen is selected:
877
PROSPER
The reservoir model selected should be Petroleum Experts and the Skin model should
be Enter Skin by Hand. The basic reservoir properties should also be inserted in the
bottom right hand corner.
inserted:
Examples Guide 878
Select the Mech/Geom Skin tab at the bottom of the page to input the skin data for the
well:
879
PROSPER
Examples Guide 880
The IPR curve shows both the variation in bottom hole pressure and bottom hole
temperature as rate changes.
To close the plot, select the red cross in the top right hand corner. Selecting Done will
return the user to the main PROSPER screen.
completed:
881
PROSPER
(VLP + IPR):
Examples Guide 882
being considered.
and IPR curves).
pressure is set to 1500 psig and the CGR and WGR are both set as 1 STB/MMscf. This
data should therefore be added to the top left hand corner of the screen:
883
PROSPER
Examples Guide 884
It can be seen from this screen that if the Well Head Pressure is 1500 psig and the
WGR is 1 STB/MMscf then the model predicts that the well will flow at approximately
83.14 MMscf/day and that the corresponding solution node pressure (which is
equivalent to the FBHP) is 2724 psig.
able to:
Build a PROSPER model for a gas well using the different sections to input
data.
Build an IPR using the Petroleum Experts IPR model.
set of conditions.
885
PROSPER
3.1.5 Tutorial 03 - Basic Water Injection Model
The Logie field has now been producing for some time and the development team has
begun to run field development strategies to calculate the optimum way to obtain the
most from the field.
One of the strategies being considered is to use water to maintain the reservoir
pressure. In order to see if this strategy is feasible, the injection capabilities of a water
injection well needs to be considered. The team expects that as water is injected, the
cool water will act to decrease the temperature of the near well bore region and may
lead to fracturing in the reservoir. The best place to carry out this analysis would be a
numerical simulator which can calculate the dynamic stresses within the system and
model both the initial fracture, its propagation through the reservoir and the impact that
the fracture has on the production.
The objective of this tutorial is therefore to build a PROSPER file from which lift curves
representing the water injection well can be generated and then exported.
An additional objective has been set to estimate the initial injection rate if the reservoir
pressure is 4100psig, the Thermally Induced Fracture IPR model and the well head
pressure is 1250 psig.
3.1.5.2 Objectives
Create a preliminary water injection well model.
Learn the basic input data required to build a PROSPER model.
Use the Thermally Induced Fracture IPR model to predict the injectivity of the
well..
Examples Guide 886
a. Insert 'dummy' PVT data for the hydrocarbon fluid as the water cut of this well will
be 100%. Also enter the correct water salinity which will be used to model the
water properties.
c. An IPR is to be built using the Thermally Induced Fracture IPR Model to model
the inflow at a certain instance in time.
given conditions.
Fluid Oil and Water
Method Black Oil
Well Type Injector
3.1.5.4.2 PVT Data
the fluid.
GOR 0 scf/STB
Oil Gravity 37 API
887
PROSPER
Mole % H
2
S
0%
Mole % CO
2
0%
Mole % N
2
0%
It can be assumed for the time being that the temperature of the injected fluid at the
wellhead will be 60
o
F.
In this case, we have a vertical well.
Measured Depth (ft) Total Vertical Depth (ft)
0 0
9000 9000
perforations.
Type Measured
Depth (ft)
Inside
Diameter
Inside
Roughness
Rate Multiplier
Examples Guide 888
(inches) (inches)
Xmas Tree 600
Tubing 8500 5.2 0.0006 1
Casing 9000 6.4 0.0006 1
When using the Rough Approximation temperature model, the overall heat transfer
o
F)
0 60
600 40
9000 210
2
/
o
F
3.1.5.4.4 IPR Data
The following information can be used to generate a Thermally Induced Fracture
Model.
Inflow Model Thermally Induced Fracture
210
o
F
889
PROSPER
Water Cut 100%
GOR 0
Injected Fluid Temperature
120
o
F
Skin 3
Please note: In reality, the temperature of the injected fluid will be dependent upon the
rate which is being produced and is a results which is calculated by the VLP curves. If a
thermal reservoir simulator is used to model the inflow of an injector, this will be taken
into account and becomes a more robust model as a result.
Injectivity Data:
Time 20 days
Mean Historical Injection Rate 12000 STB/day
Thermo-Mechanical Data:
Initial Reservoir Stress 5300 psig
Sweep Efficiency 0.75
Injected Fluid Specific Heat
Capacity
1 BTU/lb/F
Overall Reservoir Conductivity 2.5 BTU/hr/lb/F
Overall Reservoir Specific Heat
Capacity
0.25 BTU/lb/F
Overall Reservoir Density
140 lb/ft
3
Top and Bottom Surroundings
Conductivity
0.9 BTU/hr/lb/F
Examples Guide 890
Specific Heat Capacity
0.2 BTU/lb/F
Density
200 lb/ft
3
Reservoir Thermal Expansion
5e
-6

o
F
-1
Biot's Constant 0.7
Poisson's Ratio 0.2
Reservoir Young's Modulus 3000000 psi
this case, the fluid type should be altered to Oil and Water and the well type to Injector:
891
PROSPER
screen.
can be accessed by selecting the PVT | Input Data tab.
As we are injecting water, no gas or oil will be present within the system. However, as
we are going to use the Thermally Induced Fracture IPR model, a description of the fluid
in the reservoir is required. When modelling, the water cut will be set to 100% and so
only the water salinity will be used in the calculations in the wellbore (VLP). The PVT
data to be entered can be seen below:
GOR 800 scf/STB
Oil Gravity 37 API
Examples Guide 892
Mole % H
2
S 0%
Mole % CO
2
0%
Mole % N
2
0%
the well and the path through which the fluid flows. This is done in the Equipment Data
section. This can be accessed by selecting System | Equipment (Tubing etc).
This will bring up the 'Equipment Data' screen. The injected fluid temperature (at the
wellhead) should be inserted into this screen. In order to fill in data for all of the
each section:
893
PROSPER
Examples Guide 894
is accessible by selecting the Filter button.
As this well is vertical, only two points are required.
To move onto the next input screen, select Done.
895
PROSPER
is injected down the well bore. Details of the equipment to be installed can be found
below:
The final depth from the down-hole equipment will be used as the depth at which the
static reservoir pressure is defined in the IPR section. It is normally defined as the top of
the perforations and thus this equipment description should stop at the top of the
perforations.
Done.
Examples Guide 896
the well. It is used to calculate the temperature difference that the fluid experiences and
so is used in the calculation of heat transfer. The Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient is
also input into this screen. The geothermal gradient can be seen below:
input screen.
The heat capacities of water, oil and gas are to be kept equal to the default values:
897
PROSPER
Selecting Done will return the user to the Equipment Input screen as all the equipment
data has been inserted.
If we have any gauges downhole, we can define their depths on this screen. The
pressure and temperature at these points will be reported when calculations are carried
out so they can be compared to any real data which may be available:
This well has no gauges therefore the screen can be left blank.
Selecting Done will return to the equipment screen and then selecting Done again will
return us to the main PROSPER screen.
Examples Guide 898
The IPR section of PROSPER defines the inflow of the well or in the case of an injection
well, it defines the relationship between the bottom hole pressure and the rate which can
be injected into the reservoir.. There are over 20 IPR models available in PROSPER and
each is applicable to a different situation or series of conditions.
When dealing with injection systems, due to the changing conditions around the well, it
is normally best to carried out the injectivity modelling with a reservoir simulator which
can account for the effects of the cooled region around the well bore and also consider
the impact of rock mechanics and water chemistry on our ability to inject over time.
If the modelling is to be carried out using PROSPER, it is recommended that water
injector wells be defined using the Thermally Induced Fracture IPR model.
The IPR data can be seen below:
The reservoir model selected should be the Thermally Induced Fracture model and the
899
PROSPER
skin model should be selected as Enter Skin by Hand. The reservoir properties can be
inserted in the bottom right hand corner of the screen. The injected temperature of the
fluid is a required input and this is the fluid temperature at the bottom hole depth. As the
fluid will gain heat from the surroundings as it travels down the wellbore, the temperature
at the bottom hole will be dependent upon the rate which is to be injected. When using
VLP curves with a numerical simulator, this temperature and rate relationship is known
and will be used by the simulator to ensure that the correct fluid temperature is used in
subsequent calculations. In this case, a single value will be entered which is
independent of rate, as shown above.
By selecting the Input Data tab at the top right corner, the injectivity data can also be
inserted:
When this data has been inserted, select the Thermo-Mechanical tab at the bottom of
the screen:
Examples Guide 900
This screen allows the reservoirs geo-mechanical and thermo-mechanical properties to
be entered which will be used by the model to predict if a fracture is likely to occur for
the given conditions. When the data has been inserted, select the Mech/Geom Skin
tab to enter the skin value:

901
PROSPER
Click Calculate to view the IPR curve:
From this plot we can see that the AOF is reported as 410000 STB/day. As this is an
injector, the principle of the AOF no longer has a physical meaning as there is no limit to
what the bottom hole pressure can be (unlike a production well which is limited by 0
psig). As the range of values used is so wide, the curve shown may not be
representative of the actual injectivity at lower rates. We will see this in more detail when
the system calculation is performed.
Examples Guide 902
Selecting Main will return the user to the main PROSPER screen.
completed.
rate which the well can inject at a given set of conditions. This can be done with the use
(VLP + IPR):
being considered.
and IPR curves).
903
PROSPER
The conditions which are to be studied should be inserted into the top left hand corner of
the screen and the first node pressure is set to 1250 psig and the water cut and GOR
are set as 100% and 800 scf/STB respectfully.
The rate method should be changed to User Selected. As mentioned previously, the
AOF of an injection well has no physical meaning and if used to generate the rates to be
used in the calculations can reduce the accuracy of the results. Instead, it is possible to
generate a range of rates manually to be used in the system calculation. This can be
done by selecting Generate:
When the ranges have been inserted, select Generate to calculate the values and then
Done to return to the calculation screen.
Examples Guide 904
It can be seen from this screen that if the Well Head Pressure is 1250 psig then the
model predicts that the well can inject at approximately 8412 STB/day and that the
corresponding solution node pressure (which is equivalent to the FBHP) is 5430 psig.
905
PROSPER
Now that the resolution is better on the lower rates of the IPR curve, we can see the
different shapes it takes. The curve can be seen to have three distinct sections. The first
(at low rates) shows that an increase in pressure is required to inject a higher rate. The
second region is a flat shape which shows that the rate being injected can increase
without a rise in the bottom hole pressure. This is the point at which the modelling is
predicting that a thermally induced fracture may occur. In the third section (at higher
rates) the relationship of increasing pressure being required to inject a higher rate is
reestablished.
As our intersection occurs within the third section, the model is predicting that at these
conditions the reservoir rock may fracture. To analyse this in more detail, calculate the
propagation of the fracture through the reservoir and to judge the impact that this
fracture will have on our injection rate over time, we would have to consult a reservoir
simulator which can deal with both the thermal and fracture mechanics aspects that
have been highlighted here.
able to:
Build a PROSPER model for a water injection well using the different sections
to input data.
Examples Guide 906
Build an IPR using the Thermally Induced Fracture IPR model.
Carry out a system calculation to estimate the injection rate for a well at a
907
PROSPER
3.1.6 Tutorial 04 - Basic Gas Injection Model
A new gas condensate field has been discovered and is currently under development.
For the first five years of production, there is no market for the gas being produced and
so it cannot be sold on. One development strategy under consideration is to produce
the gas for the first five years so that the condensate can be sold. The resultant dry gas
will then be re-injected into the reservoir to help maintain the pressure and also in the
hope that any condensate which has dropped out in the reservoir may be vaporised and
produced to increase the yield. Due to the complexity of injecting a cooler fluid into a
reservoir, the best way to obtain an accurate idea of the injectivity of the well would be to
use a numerical simulator which can account for the effects of changing temperature
and the chemical reacts which may results from introducing a different composition into
the reservoir.
The current objective is to create a PROSPER file which can be used to create the lift
curves which can then be imported into the reservoir simulator to run predictions. Using
the Petroleum Experts IPR model, management would also like an idea of the volume
of gas which can be injected if the reservoir pressure was 2750 psig and the wellhead
pressure of the well is 2000 psig.
3.1.6.2 Objectives
Create a preliminary gas injection well model.
Learn what the basic input data required to build a PROSPER injection well model
is.
These VLP curves define the relationship between the top node pressure and the
bottom hole pressure for various flow rates at given conditions. Finally, the IPR (or Inflow
Examples Guide 908
Performance Relationship) defines how much fluid can flow into the reservoir from the
wellbore at given conditions.
a. Basic fluid PVT data will be used with PVT correlations to predict the properties
of the fluid at the different conditions within the model.
c. An IPR is to be built using the Petroleum Experts IPR model.
d. A system calculation will be performed to assess the likely injection when the
reservoir pressure is 2750 psig and the well head pressure is 2000 psig.
Fluid Dry and Wet Gas
Method Black Oil
Well Type Injector
3.1.6.4.2 PVT Data
the fluid.
909
PROSPER
Mole % H
2
S 0%
Mole % CO
2
0.368%
Mole % N
2
4.005%
Measured
Depth (ft)
Total Vertical
Depth (ft)
0 0
1500 1500
1982 1980
2460 2450
2905 2883
3335 3300
4650 4560
5010 4900
The down-hole equipment specifies the path through which the fluid will travel from the
surface to the bottom hole. The final depth from this data will be used as the solution
node where the bottom-hole pressure is calculated. It is also the depth at which the
static reservoir pressure is defined and as such is normally defined as the top of the
reservoir or the top of the perforations.
Examples Guide 910
Type Measured
Depth (ft)
Inside
Diameter
(inches)
Inside
Roughness
(inches)
Rate Multiplier
Xmas Tree 0
Tubing 1000 4.5 0.00006 1
SSSV 4.0 1
Tubing 4800 4.5 0.00006 1
Casing 5010 6.13 0.00006 1
o
F)
0 45
1500 75
5010 166
2
/
o
F
3.1.6.4.4 IPR Data
911
PROSPER
166
o
F
CGR 0
WGR 0
SKIN 2
this case, the fluid is set to Dry and Wet Gas and the well type is changed to Injector:
Examples Guide 912
screen.
can be seen below:
913
PROSPER
Mole % H
2
S 0%
Mole % CO
2
0.368%
Mole % N
2
4.005%
When the data has been inserted, select Done to return to the main screen.
This will bring up the 'Equipment Data' screen. The injected fluid temperature is the
temperature of the injection fluid at the top node of the well. In this case, this is the fluid
temperature at the wellhead and the value to be entered is 100
o
F. In order to fill in data
for all of the appropriate sections select All from the top ribbon and this will bring up
Examples Guide 914
ticks next to each section:
915
PROSPER
Examples Guide 916
917
PROSPER
is injected down the well bore. Details of the equipment to be installed can be found in
the table below:
Type MD (ft)
Inside
Diameter
(Inches)
Inside
Roughness
(Inches)
Rate Multiplier
X-mas Tree 0 1
Tubing 1000 4.5 0.00006 1
SSSV 4.0 1
Tubing 4800 4.5 0.00006 1
Casing 5010 6.13 0.00006 1
Examples Guide 918
the perforations.
Done.
travels down the well and is used in the calculation of heat transfer. The Overall Heat
919
PROSPER
input screen.
Examples Guide 920
added, the pressure and temperature at the gauge depth will be reported when
calculations such as VLPs are completed.
From the main Equipment Data screen, select Done to return to the main PROSPER
screen.
921
PROSPER
The IPR section of PROSPER defines the inflow of the well and therefore when modelling
an injector, it is the relationship between the bottom hole pressure and the flow rate of
fluid which can be injected into the reservoir. There are over 20 IPR models available in
PROSPER and each is applicable to a different situation or series of conditions.
The IPR data can be seen below:
The reservoir model selected should be Petroleum Experts and the skin model should
be set to Enter Skin by Hand. Care should be taken if using this model for predictive
purposes as the injectivity of the well may change over time as the thermal and chemical
effects of injecting a cooler fluid with a different composition is felt by the reservoir. In
this case, as an initial study is being carried out, the model can be selected. It is
recommended that a reservoir simulator which can consider the complex interactions of
the rock mechanics, temperature variation and water chemistry be used when more
detailed analysis is required for gas injection wells.
Examples Guide 922
The reservoir properties (such as pressure, temperature) and the fluid's properties can
be inserted into the lower right hand corner of the screen.
inserted:
Selecting the Mech/Geom Skin tab, the skin value can be entered:
923
PROSPER
temperature as rate changes. From this plot we can see that the AOF is reported as
2991 MMscf/day. As this is an injector, the principle of the AOF no longer has a physical
meaning as there is no limit to what the bottom hole pressure can be (unlike a
production well which is limited by 0 psig). As the range of rates is so high, the IPR
pressure can be seen to be very high. To get an accurate representation of the
relationship between FBHP and rate at lower rates, a sensitivity could be performed
Examples Guide 924
with User Selected rates.
Exit the plot and the select Done to return to the main screen.
completed.
Now that the well data has been inserted into PROSPER, the next step is to calculate
the rate which the well can inject at a given set of conditions. This can be done with the
use of a System Calculation which will combine the VLP and IPR plots to find the
system point at which the well will flow.
(VLP + IPR):
925
PROSPER
being considered.
and IPR curves).

The conditions which are to be studied should be inserted into the top left hand corner of
the screen and the first node pressure is set to 1250 psig and the water cut and GOR
are set as 100% and 0 scf/STB respectfully.
The rate method should be changed to User Selected. As mentioned previously, the
AOF of an injection well has no physical meaning and if used to generate the rates to be
used in the calculations can reduce the accuracy of the results. Instead, it is possible to
generate a range of rates manually to be used in the system calculation. This can be
done by selecting Generate:
Examples Guide 926
When the ranges have been inserted, select Generate to calculate the values and then
Done to return to the calculation screen.
It can be seen from this screen that if the Well Head Pressure is 2500 psig then the
model predicts that the well can inject at approximately 9.46 MMscf/day and that the
927
PROSPER
able to:
Build a PROSPER model for a gas injection well using the different sections to
input data.
Carry out a system calculation to estimate the injection rate for a well at a
Examples Guide 928
3.1.7 Tutorial 05 - Matching PVT of an Oil
This tutorial starts from the file created in Tutorial 01. A copy of this completed model
can be found in '~/Petroleum Experts/IPM 8/Samples/PROSPER/'.
If the user is new to PROSPER, it may be beneficial to first complete the tutorial on which
this model is based so as to understand the steps taken to get to this point.
The Logie field has now been drilled and samples of the reservoir fluid have been
tested in the laboratory.
In Tutorial 01 a black oil correlation was used to calculate our fluid properties based on
the black oil properties of the fluid. As more data is now available, the objective is to
ensure that the PVT data being calculated by the correlation is consistent with that of the
laboratory tests. This is done through a process called PVT Matching.
When the PVT has been matched, the flow rate of the well when the well head pressure
is 500 psig is required.
3.1.7.2 Objectives
Ensure that the PVT data in PROSPER is representative of the laboratory data.
Learn to match the black oil correlations to laboratory data.
Carry out a system calculation to see the impact of the new PVT properties.
As the base PROSPER file has already been created it is not necessary to input new
data for the VLP or the IPR. Instead, only the PVT section will be reviewed.
a. The available laboratory PVT data will be entered into the model.
b. This data will be used as the basis of a matching calculation to ensure that the
PVT properties calculated are representative of the actual fluid.
c. A system calculation will be performed to assess what effects these changes in
929
PROSPER
PVT will have on the likely production at the given conditions.
The laboratory report has provided data which can be used in the matching process.
3.1.7.4.1 PVT Match Data
Temperature of Test
210
o
F
4000 800 1.42 0.364
3500 800 1.432 0.35
3000 655 1.352 0.403
2400 500 1.273 0.48
1000 190 1.12 0.7205
To start this step by step guide, open the file created in Tutorial 01. A copy of the file
3.1.7.5.1 Inserting Match Data
From the main PROSPER screen, open the PVT section by selecting PVT | Input Data
from the main ribbon bar:
Select Match Data from the top of the screen.
Examples Guide 930
3.1.7.5.2 Matching the Correlations
left of the screen.
931
PROSPER
Temperature:
selected, double click the variable Gas Oil Ratio in the bottom left hand corner. This
should also be carried out for the PVT Matching Data - Temperature = 210 (deg F)
stream to plot the test data:
Examples Guide 932
corner. It can be seen from these plots that the Glaso and Beal et al correlations give
good matches with the test data. To exit the plot, select the red cross in the top right
hand corner of the screen.
It is possible to plot other correlations against the test data by selecting them in the
Correlations section of the screen and selecting Plot:
933
PROSPER
the best correlations to select are the Glaso and Beal et al correlations:
Examples Guide 934
3.1.7.5.3 Selecting the Correlation
data. This is done on the main PVT input data screen. The correlations in the drop down
menu are those which will be used in the model and for this oil the Glaso and Beal et al
correlations should be selected:
935
PROSPER
matched.
Now that the PVT used in the model has been matched to laboratory data, the next step
is to calculate the impact that this has had on the rate that our model will predict. This
can be done with the use of a System Calculation which will combine the VLP and IPR
plots to find the system point at which the well will flow.
(VLP + IPR).
screen:
Examples Guide 936
937
PROSPER
2677.85 psig.
able to:
Match the Black Oil correlations to laboratory data.
Select the most suitable Black Oil correlation for use within the model.
set of conditions.
Examples Guide 938
3.1.8 Tutorial 06 - Matching PVT of a Gas
The Powderhall gas field has now been drilled and samples of the reservoir fluid have
been tested in the laboratory.
In Tutorial 02, a correlation was used to calculate our fluid properties based on the gas
gravity and black oil properties of our fluid. As more data is now available, the current
objective is to ensure that the PVT data being calculated by the correlation is consistent
with that of the laboratory tests. This is done through a process called PVT Matching.
When the PVT has been matched, the flow rate of the well when the well head pressure
is 1500 psig is required.
3.1.8.2 Objectives
Ensure that the PVT data in PROSPER is representative of the laboratory data.
Learn to match the PVT correlations to laboratory data.
Carry out a system calculation to see the impact of the new PVT properties.
As the base PROSPER file has already been created it is not necessary to input new
data for the VLP or the IPR. Instead, only the PVT section will be reviewed
a. The PVT correlations used to predict the properties of the fluid at the different
conditions within the model will be matched to ensure they are representative of
the laboratory data.
b. A system calculation will be performed to assess the affects that these changes
in PVT will have on the likely production at the given conditions.
939
PROSPER
The laboratory report has provided data which can be used in the matching process.
3.1.8.4.1 PVT Match Data
Temperature of Test
166
o
F
Pressure (psig) Z Factor Gas Viscosity (cp) Gas FVF
(ft3/scf)
5300 1.03183 0.024644 0.0034174
3020 0.9053 0.01869 0.005239
2140 0.89365 0.01648 0.06733
1000 0.9287 0.014213 0.016213
3.1.8.5.1 Inserting Match Data
From the main PROSPER screen, open the PVT section by selecting PVT | Input Data
from the main ribbon bar:
Examples Guide 940
Select Match Data from the top of the screen.
Once the data has been entered, select Match to proceed to the regression screen.
3.1.8.5.2 Matching the Correlations
and this will be done to whichever properties are selected in the Match On box to the
left of the screen.
941
PROSPER
Temperature:
selected, double click the variable Z Factor in the bottom left hand corner. This should
also be carried out for the PVT Matching Data - Temperature = 166 (deg F) stream to
plot the test data:
Examples Guide 942
corner. To exit the plot, select the red cross in the top right hand corner of the screen.
It is possible to select the viscosity correlation to used in the generation of these plots
against the test data by selecting it in the Correlations section of the screen and
selecting Plot:
943
PROSPER
should be as close to 0 as possible. For this case the correlations are all within a
reasonable range of these conditions:
For the viscosity correlation, we can see that the Carr et al correlation has match
parameters of exactly 1 and 0. When these numbers are exactly equal to 1 and 0 this
implies that the regression has failed to find a solution. Therefore, the Lee et al
correlation should be selected and it was seen in the earlier plots that this gives a very
good match to the test data.
Examples Guide 944
3.1.8.5.3 Selecting the Correlation
data. This is done on the main PVT input data screen. The correlations in the drop down
menu are those which are to be used. For this gas the Lee et al viscosity correlation
should be selected:
matched. Select Done to return to the main PROSPER screen.
(VLP + IPR).
945
PROSPER

pressure is set to 1500 psig and the CGR and WGR are both set as 1 STB/MMscf. This
data should therefore be added to the top left hand corner of the screen:
Examples Guide 946
WGR is 1 STB/MMscf then the model predicts that the well will flow at approximately 68
MMscf/day and that the corresponding solution node pressure (which is equivalent to
the FBHP) is 3462.7 psig.
947
PROSPER
able to:
Insert PVT test data and match the gas correlations to ensure that they
reproduce this test data.
set of conditions.
Examples Guide 948
3.1.9 Tutorial 07 - Adding a Surface Pipeline
The Logie field is a sub-sea well with a pipeline which takes the fluid to the separator on
a near by platform.
The model currently in use has assumed that the well head pressure is constant when
the well rate is being estimated. However, as the well head pressure is dependent upon
the rate which will pass through the pipeline and riser to the platform, the pressure at the
well head is in fact dependent upon this additional pressure drop. Management would
like to understand the impact that varying the manifold pressure will have on the
production rate.
The liquid rate which can be produced for a range of different manifold pressures is to
be estimated.
3.1.9.2 Objectives
Learn how to add a surface pipeline to an existing PROSPER model.
Carry out a system calculation to see the impact of the additional pipeline.
Perform a sensitivity study to assess the impact of different manifold pressures
on our production.
As the base PROSPER file has already been created it is only necessary to add the
surface equipment to the model.
a. Add the surface equipment to the equipment data.
949
PROSPER
b. A system calculation will be performed to assess the affects that changing the
manifold pressure will have on production.
The following pipeline connects the wellhead to the surface manifold.
3.1.9.4.1 Pipeline Data
Surrounding Temperature
52
o
F
Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient 8.5
This corresponds to the the following input:
Type Pipe
Length (ft)
True
Vertical
Depth (ft)
Pipe Inside
Diameter
(inches)
Inside
Roughness
(inches)
Rate
Multiplier
Manifold 0
Pipeline 250 250 4 0.0006 1
Pipeline 500 475 4 0.0006 1
Pipeline 1000 475 4 0.0006 1
Pipeline 750 600 4 0.0006 1
Pipeline 1250 600 4 0.0006 1
Examples Guide 950
can be found in '~/Petroleum Experts/IPM 7.5/Samples/PROSPER/'.
3.1.9.5.1 Inserting Pipeline Data
From the main PROSPER screen, enter the surface equipment screen by selecting
System | Equipment (Tubing etc):
To enter the Surface Equipment screen, select the button to the left of Surface
Equipment. This will bring up the screen below:
951
PROSPER
Once the required data has been entered, select Done to return to the previous screen
and then Done to return to the main PROSPER screen.
Now that the gas lift system has been included in the PROSPER file, the next step is to
calculate the rate at which the well can flow at a given set of conditions. This can be
done with the use of a System Calculation which will combine the VLP and IPR plots to
find the system point at which the well will flow. In this case, the objective is to see how
the production rate will change when the gas injection rate is varied.
(VLP + IPR).
At this time, we wish to calculate the liquid rate which will be produced if the manifold
pressure is changed over a range of different values. The water cut for this test should
be 0% and the GOR should be set to 800 scf/STB. This can be entered in the top left
hand corner of the screen:
The Top Node Pressure in this case will represent the manifold pressure as this is the
furthest downstream point in our system. As this is to be used as a sensitivity variable,
the value entered on the main screen will be ignored by the program.
Examples Guide 952
Select Cases to enter the sensitivity variables. First Node Pressure (which is the same
as the Top Node Pressure and Manifold Pressure) can be selected from the drop
down lists on the left hand side and then the values to be used can be entered on the
right hand side:
This will run the System Calculation for each different injection rate. To see how the
production rate varies with injection rate, select Sensitivity Plot.
To view the oil rate against injection rate, select Variables from the top bar and then Oil
Rate:
953
PROSPER
Select Done to view the plot:
Examples Guide 954
As would be expected, as the manifold pressure is increased, the oil rate produced will
drop.
Selecting Variables again, allows the Wellhead Temperature to be selected:
Press Done to see the relationship between the temperature at the wellhead and the
manifold pressure:
955
PROSPER
The temperature at the wellhead can be seen to drop as the manifold pressure
increases. This is due to the fact that the higher pressure leads to a lower rate and
subsequently a lower velocity of the fluid. As the fluid is travelling more slowly up the
wellbore, it spends more time transferring heat with the surroundings and so the fluid
temperature at the wellhead reduces.
Select Finish and then Done to return to the main screen.
This marks the end of Tutorial 07 After completing this tutorial the user should
be able to:
Include a surface pipeline in a well model.
Carried out a sensitivity study to see the impact that the manifold pressure has
on the production rate and temperate.
Examples Guide 956
3.1.10 Tutorial 08 - The Darcy IPR Model
3.1.10.1Statement of the Problem
The fluid being produced from the Logie field has now been characterised and the black
oil correlations used within PROSPER have been matched to ensure that they are
representative of the actual fluid.
Now that more work as been carried out on the field additional information has become
available. Up to this point the PI Entry method has been used to define the IPR but now
the use of a Darcy model is to be investigated. The Darcy model is an analytical model
which uses the properties and dimensions of the reservoir to predict the relationship
between the bottom hole pressure and the flow rate. The impact that the water cut has
on this IPR model is also to be investigated.
Once the model has been implemented, an estimate of the flow rate when the well head
pressure is 500 psig is required.
3.1.10.2Objectives
Replace the PI Entry IPR model with a Darcy model.
Learn what data is required to build a Darcy IPR model in PROSPER.
Perform a sensitivity study to see the effect of increasing water cut on the IPR
model.
Run a system calculation to gain an estimate of the liquid rate.
3.1.10.3General Approach
As the base PROSPER file has already been created only the IPR section will be
modified in this example. For details of how the model was created up to this point,
Tutorials 01 and 05 should be consulted.
957
PROSPER
a. Replace the PI Entry IPR model with a Darcy model based on the reservoir
properties provided.
b. Use the Cases option in the IPR calculation screen to calculate the IPR curves
for various water cut values.
c. A system calculation will be performed to assess the affect this new IPR model
will have on the likely production at the given conditions.
3.1.10.4Available Data
From different reports and departments the following data has been collected which
details our reservoir inflow properties.
3.1.10.4.1 IPR Model Data
IPR Model Darcy Model
Skin 0
3.1.10.4.2 Sensitivity Study Data
The effects that water cut has on the IPR is to investigated over the following range of
values:
0%, 10%, 20%, 50%, 75% and 90%
3.1.10.5Step-by-Step Guide
3.1.10.5.1 Selecting the Darcy Model
When the file has been opened select System | Inflow Performance to bring up the
IPR input screen:
Examples Guide 958
The reservoir model selected should be Darcy and the Mechanical/Geometrical skin
should be set to Enter Skin By Hand. The reservoir pressure, temperature, water cut
and total GOR should be kept the same.
When the Darcy model is selected, the Input Data button in the top right hand corner
will turn red. This signifies that there is missing data which must be filled in. Press the
Input Data button to see which data must be included.
3.1.10.5.2 Inserting IPR Data
The IPR data screen can be seen below and should be filled with the new IPR data:
959
PROSPER
Insert the reservoir properties which were provided into the table to complete the model.
If the Dietz Shape Factor is not known, it is possible to calculate the value for a given
shape by selecting Calculate Dietz. Selecting Validate will alert the user to any fields
which have not yet been completed or values which fall outside of the validation ranges.
When the data has been inserted on this screen, select the Mech/Geom Skin tab at the
bottom of the screen:
Examples Guide 960
This screen allows the skin to be inserted by the user. In this case it is assumed that the
skin is currently zero.
Once this has been inserted, select Calculate and the IPR curve will be calculated and
displayed:
961
PROSPER
The Formation PI and AOF can be read from the top right of the screen.
To return to the PVT screen, select the red cross at the top left of the screen.
3.1.10.5.3 Performing a Sensitivity Study
Now that the IPR data has been inserted, the impact of increasing the water cut is to be
modelled by performing a Sensitivity Study. Select Sensitivity to start the process:
This will bring up the IPR Calculation screen where the user can insert the input data to
be calculated into the top left corner. The GOR is still the solution GOR (800 scf/STB)
and as the water cut is to form part of the sensitivity study, any value can be entered:
Examples Guide 962
Select Cases to enter the water cut values:
Select Water Cut in the Variables section of the screen and then enter the 6 water cut
963
PROSPER
values to be calculated in the Variable Data. Once the data has been entered, select
Done to exit.
Select Calculate to carry out the calculations.
The new IPR curves can be viewed by selecting Plot:
Examples Guide 964
In this case, the IPR Temperature curves have been removed from the plot by unticking
them at the top of the plot screen. This leaves only the IPR Pressures to be plotted.
The results show that as the water cut increases, the AOF of the well also increases.
This is because the increasing water cut decreases the effect that the gas has on the
model and therefore the Vogel curve below the fluid's bubble point is seen to have less
and less of an impact.
To return to the main PROSPER screen, click the red cross in the top right hand corner of
the plot and select Done on the next two screens.
Now that the new IPR data has been inserted into PROSPER, the next step is to
find the system point at which the well will flow.
(VLP + IPR).

965
PROSPER
screen:
Examples Guide 966
3096 psig.
967
PROSPER
able to:
Build an IPR using the Darcy inflow model.
Perform a sensitivity study on the IPR.
set of conditions.
Examples Guide 968
3.1.11 Tutorial 09 - The SPOT IPR Model
available. Up to this point the 'PI Entry' method has been used to define the IPR but now
a better understanding of the well completion and the impact that the perforations have
on production is required. In order to achieve this, the Shell Perforation Optimisation
Tool (SPOT) is to be used to generate an IPR.
Once the model has been implemented, an estimate of the flow rate when the well head
3.1.11.2Objectives
Replace the PI Entry IPR model with a SPOT model.
Understand the impact perforation skin has at different depths.
Carry out a System Calculation to estimate the production rate when the well is
flowing at 500 psig.
modified in this example.
a. Replace the PI Entry IPR model with a SPOT model based on the reservoir
properties provided.
969
PROSPER
b. Review the IPR results to see the impact of the perforation skin at different
layers.
c. A system calculation will be performed to assess the affect this new IPR model
From different reports and departments the following data has been collected.
IPR Model SPOT
SPOT Options:
Correction Type Conventional
Calculate Non-Darcy Skin No
Activity New Well
Well Type Deviated
Inflow Equation Fetkovich
Log Data Input None Available
Perforating Method Single Run
Invasion Method No Invasion
Sanding Model None
Crushed Zone Model Entered
Lower Completion Type Casing and Perforated
Use Down hole Standoff No
Enter Gun per Layer No
Use SPOT IPR Extensions Yes
Input Phase Ratios Yes
Crushed Zone Inputs:
Examples Guide 970
Permeability Factor 0.1
Thickness 1.2 inches
Deviated Survey:
Measured
Depth (ft)
True Vertical
Depth (ft)
9275 9000
9385 9100
Layer Data:
Drainage Area 4200 ft
Mean Sea Level wrt Origin 0 ft
Sea Bed Level wrt Origin 600 ft
Top MD 9275 ft
Bottom MD 9385 ft
Layer Pressure 4000 psig
Under Balance Pressure 100 psi
Overburden Pressure Gradient 1 psi/ft
Water Saturation 20 %
Bottom Hole Temperature
210
o
F
Kv/Kh 0.1
Downhole Rock Type Sandstone
Perforating Gun Baker - 2007 Predator XP LS (6
spf / 60
o
Phasing/ wireline)
971
PROSPER
Relative Permeability Curves:
Phase Oil Water
Residual Saturation 0.15 0.2
End Point Relative Permeability 0.8 0.6
Corey Exponent 1.5 1.5
Log Data:
Uniaxial Compressive Strength 8000 psig
Horizontal Permeability 50 md
Porosity 0.18
Top Reservoir MD 9275 ft
Bottom Reservoir MD 9385 ft
Log Depth Increment 1 ft
Completion Data:
Completion Type Casing
Outer Diameter 6.7 inches
Weight 10 lb/ft
Material J55
Top MD 9275 ft
Bottom MD 9385 ft
Drift 6.35 inches
Holdup Depth 9385 ft
Note: The holdup depth is the deepest point to which the perforating gun can be lower.
The Drift is the inside diameter which is guaranteed by the manufacturer and
may be lower than the nominal inside diameter. This is the diameter which should be
used for selecting tools to see if they will fit downhole.
Examples Guide 972
3.1.11.5.1 Selecting the SPOT Model
IPR input screen:
The reservoir model selected should be SPOT. When SPOT is used, the reservoir
pressure is entered by layer and the water cut is calculated on the basis of relative
permeability curves and so only the Total GOR needs to be entered.
When the SPOT model is selected the Input Data button in the top right hand corner will
turn red. This signifies that there is missing data which must be filled in. Press the Input
Data button to see which data must be included.
973
PROSPER
Once the Input Data button is selected, the user must insert data into four screens;
Options, Layers, Log Data and Completion. The tabs at the bottom of the screen can be
used to navigate through each one.
3.1.11.5.2.1 SPOT Options
The first screen to be filled is the SPOT options screen. This allows the different SPOT
calculation methods to be selected depending on which are suitable for the current case
to be modelled:
Once the above data has been selected and entered, press Deviation Survey to enter
the deviation survey of the completion:
Examples Guide 974
Select Done to return to the main SPOT screen.
3.1.11.5.2.2 SPOT Layers
The next screen to enter data into is the layers screen. This can be accessed by
selecting the Layers tab:
This screen contains the properties of each layer. For this well, only one layer is to be
defined using the data given below:
Layer Data:
Drainage Area 4200 ft
Mean Sea Level wrt Origin 0 ft
Sea Bed Level wrt Origin 600 ft
975
PROSPER
Top MD 9275 ft
Bottom MD 9385 ft
Layer Pressure 4000 psig
Under Balance Pressure 100 psi
Overburden Pressure Gradient 1 psi/ft
Water Saturation 20 %
210
o
F
Kv/Kh 0.1
Downhole Rock Type Sandstone
Perforating Gun Baker - 2007 Predator XP LS (6
spf / 60
o
Phasing/ wireline)
To enter the relative permeability curves (based upon which the water cut will be
calculated) select Edit:
Examples Guide 976
Select Done to exit the screen.
The final stage of the Layers screen is to specify the perforation gun to be used. Press
Select Gun:
977
PROSPER
This will bring up an empty perforation gun screen. To bring in the required gun, select
Select Gun from Database:
Examples Guide 978
The filter in the bottom left hand corner can be used to search through the database
more easily. Once the gun (in this case the Baker - 2007 Predator XP LS - wireline) has
been found, double click it to select it:
979
PROSPER
Select Done to return to the main SPOT screen.
3.1.11.5.2.3 SPOT Log Data
SPOT requires log data for its calculation as each producing layer is divided up into
smaller segments. No log data is currently available for this well and so a pseudo-log
will be created.
Examples Guide 980
Select the Log Data tab at the bottom of the screen to start the process:
When this is selected, layer data is required with which the log will be created:
The log will be generated with 1 foot deep increments. Select Generate to construct the
log:
981
PROSPER
3.1.11.5.2.4 SPOT Completion
The final screen that needs to be filled is the completion screen. This will detail the type
of completion (such as cased or open-hole) and also contains information on the
materials used.
Select the Completion tab at the bottom of the screen:
This screen should be filled with the following data:
Completion Type Casing
Outer Diameter 6.7 inches
Weight 10 lb/ft
Examples Guide 982
Material J55
Top MD 9275 ft
Bottom MD 9385 ft
Drift 6.35 inches
Holdup Depth 9385 ft
Once the data has been entered, select Calculate. This will bring up a plot of the new
IPR:
983
PROSPER
3.1.11.5.3 Viewing SPOT Skin Results
When the calculation has been completed, the IPR results can be viewed by selecting
the View Results button at the top of the plot:
The total IPR results can be viewed at the top of the screen. These are averaged results
for the whole layer:
Examples Guide 984
To see the log results of each different segment of the layer, enter a FBHP (in the
screenshot above this is 2750 psig) and select Log Results at:
985
PROSPER
This gives the IPR and skin results on a segment by segment basis for the layer. As can
be seen above, as the depth increases, the perforation length into the reservoir
decreases and this leads to an increase in the perforation skin. From these segment by
segment results, the average layer results shown on the previous screen are calculated.
To return to the main PROSPER screen, select Done | Done and then close the plot and
select Done.
(VLP + IPR).
Examples Guide 986
screen:
987
PROSPER
2063 psig.
Examples Guide 988
able to:
Build an IPR using the SPOT inflow model.
set of conditions.
989
PROSPER
3.1.12 Tutorial 10 - Horizontal Well IPR Model
available. Up to this point the 'PI Entry' method has been used to define the IPR but now
a horizontal well model should be used to better understand the relationship between
the flowing bottom-hole pressure and flow rate. It is thought that the well will produce a
high flow rate and therefore the impact that the pressure drop due to friction will have as
the fluid moves from the toe of the well to the heel should be taken into account.
This study should be carried out for the well when it is flowing at a WHP of 500 psig.
3.1.12.2Objectives
Replace the PI Entry IPR model with a Horizontal Well - dP Friction Loss in
Wellbore model.
Learn which data is required to build a Horizontal Well - dP Friction Loss in
Wellbore IPR model in PROSPER.
Perform a the System Calculation to estimate the well flow rate at the given
conditions.
Examples Guide 990
a. Replace the PI Entry IPR model with a Horizontal well - dP loss in wellbore
model based on the reservoir properties provided.
b. A system calculation will be performed to find the solution rate for the given
conditions.
The following data has be collected for use with the horizontal well model.
Reservoir Properties:
IPR Model Horizontal Well - dP Loss in the Wellbore
210
o
F
Water Cut 0%
Compaction Permeability
Reduction Model
No
Model Properties:
Horizontal Well model Kuchuk & Goode
Horizontal Anisotropy 1
Vertical Anisotropy 0.1
Well Length 800 ft
Reservoir Length 4200 ft
Reservoir Width 4200 ft
Length Distance to
Reservoir Edge
2100 ft
Width Distance to
Reservoir Edge
2100 ft
991
PROSPER
Bottom of Reservoir to
Well Centre
50 ft
Zone One:
Zone Type Perforated
Skin Method Enter by Hand
Zone Length 800 ft
Zone Permeability 50 md
Flowing Radius 0.3175 ft
Zone Roughness 0.0006
Skin 3
3.1.12.5.1 Selecting the Horizontal Well Model
IPR input screen:
Examples Guide 992
The reservoir model selected should be Horizontal Well - dP Friction Loss in Wellbore.
The reservoir pressure, temperature, water cut and total GOR should be kept the same.
When the horizontal well model is selected, the Input Data button in the top right hand
corner will turn red. This signifies that there is missing data which must be filled in.
Press the Input Data button to see which data must be included.
Data for both the reservoir and the different zones should be entered for this IPR model.
To enter all of the reservoir data, use the scroll bar at the right hand side of the upper
section of the screen:

993
PROSPER
To complete the insertion of the zone data, select Enter on the right hand side of the
zone row:
Examples Guide 994
This screen is used to the skin and the wellbore radius for the zone. Select Done to
save the inserted data.
Once this has been inserted, select Calculate and the IPR curve will be calculated and
displayed. The Formation PI and AOF can be read from the top right of the screen.
To return to the PVT screen, select the red cross at the top left of the screen. Select
Done to return to the main PROSPER screen.
Now that the new IPR data has been updated in PROSPER, the next step is to calculate
the rate at which the well can flow at a given set of conditions. This can be done with the
(VLP + IPR).

screen:
995
PROSPER
Examples Guide 996
3654 psig.
able to:
Build a Horizontal Well - dP loss in Wellbore IPR model.
set of conditions.
997
PROSPER
3.1.13 Tutorial 11 - Multilayer Well IPR Model
The fluid being produced from the Logie field has now been characterised and the
Black Oil Correlations used within PROSPER have been matched to ensure that they
are representative of the actual fluid.
It appears that the reservoir may in fact be a made up for a number of layers and
therefore this scenario is to be investigated using the Multi-layer IPR model in PROSPER
. While each layer is believed to have the same fluid in place (which can be presented
by the PVT matching which was previously performed) each layer does have different
reservoir properties and it is believed that each will produce a different water cut.
The management would like to know the total rate which would be expected if the well
was produced with a wellhead pressure of 500 psig and also the contribution which
each layer makes to this value.
3.1.13.2Objectives
The objectives for the tutorial are to:
Replace the PI Entry IPR model with a Multilayer - dP Loss in Wellbore model.
Learn what data is required to build a Multilayer - dP Loss in Wellbore IPR
model in PROSPER.
Find the contribution that each layer will give to the total production when the
wellhead pressure is 500 psig.
Examples Guide 998
a. Replace the PI Entry IPR model with a Multilayer - dP Loss in Wellbore model
based on the reservoir properties provided.
b. A system calculation will be performed to assess the affect this new IPR model
c. The contribution of each layer will be found from the results of the system
calculation.
From different reports and departments the following data has been collected.
250
o
F
Top Measured Depth 9275 ft
Top TVD 9000 ft
Perforated Layers:
Layer 1 Layer 3 Layer 5
IPR Model Darcy Darcy Darcy
Skin Model By Hand By Hand By Hand
Measured Depth of
Bottom
9305 ft 9350 ft 9405 ft
TVD to Bottom of
Layer
9025 ft 9060 ft 9100 ft
Layer Pressure 5200 5320 5325
Layer Flowing
Radius
0.3175 ft 0.3175 ft 0.3175 ft
Layer Roughness 0.0006 inches 0.0006 inches 0.0006 inches
Layer GOR 800 scf/STB 800 scf/STB 800 scf/STB
Layer Oil Gravity 37 API 37 API 37 API
Layer Gas Gravity 0.75 0.75 0.75
Layer Water Cut 5% 0.5% 7.4%
999
PROSPER
Permeability 71 md 65 md 100 md
Drainage Area 400 arces 400 acres 400 acres
Dietz Shape Factor 31.6 31.6 31.6
Wellbore Radius 0.354 ft 0.354 ft 0.354 ft
Skin 2.4 1 1.5
Blank Layers:
Layer 2 Layer 4
Layer Type Blank Blank Blank
Measured Depth of Bottom 9318 ft 9035 ft
TVD to Bottom of Layer 9035 ft 9075 ft
Layer Flowing Radius 0.3175 ft 0.3175 ft
Layer Roughness 0.0006 in 0.0006 in
3.1.13.5.1 Selecting the Multilayer Model
IPR input screen:
Examples Guide 1000
The reservoir model selected should be Multilayer - dP Loss in Wellbore. Each layer
will have a unique reservoir pressure, water cut and GOR and therefore only the
reservoir temperature needs to be added. This same temperature will be used for every
layer.
When the 'Multilayer' model is selected the Input Data button in the top right hand
corner will turn red. This signifies that there is missing data which must be filled in.
Press the Input Data button to see which data must be included.
The IPR Input Data screen can be seen below:
1001
PROSPER
The layer data can be shown on the screen shown above. The type of layer can be set
on the left hand side of the screen and then the layer properties can be entered
dependent upon the type selected. When the basic layer properties have been entered,
the PVT, reservoir model and skin data for each layer can be inserted by selecting the
appropriate button on the right hand side. Selecting PVT will allow the PVT properties
of each layer to be inserted. Below shows the input data for each producing layer in
order:
Examples Guide 1002
After entering data into each screen select Done to exit. Next, select Model to enter the
reservoir model properties for each layer in order:
1003
PROSPER
Again, select Done to exit each screen. The final input for each layer is the skin. Select
Skin to enter the skin of each layer in turn:
Examples Guide 1004
When data is entered in multiple screens, it is often easy to forget to enter it in one of
them by mistake. Using the Validate button on the IPR screen will check to see if data
has been inserted into every field and if it falls within the validation range of the variable.
If it does not, an error message will be displayed showing which values have been
missed:
Once the screen has been validated, select Calculate and the IPR plot will be
displayed:
1005
PROSPER
The three blue/purple/pink lines present the inflow of each individual layer while the red
line is the total IPR. To see the table of results for the each layer select the results button
at the top of the plot:
This will bring up the table of results:
The tabs at the top of the table can be used to change the layer which is being viewed.
The TOP layer shows the results of the total IPR.
If we switch to Layer 1 we can see that at high bottom node pressures (i.e. when the well
is shut in) the rate being produced is negative. This means that rather than producing
fluid, fluid is being injected into the layer. This is a sign that the layers are not at
equilibrium and that cross-flow will occur into layer 1 if the well is shut in. Further analysis
shows that the fluid being injected into layer 1 is coming from both layers 1 and 3.
When the results have been reviewed, select Main to return to the main screen.
Now that the new IPR data has been updated in PROSPER, the next step is to calculate
(VLP + IPR).
Examples Guide 1006
pressure is set to 500 psig. As both the water cut and GOR are dependent upon the
contribution of each layer, these are not inserted and become dependent upon the IPR
pressure. This data should therefore be added to the top left hand corner of the screen:
1007
PROSPER
It can be seen from this screen that if the Well Head Pressure is 500 psig the model
predicts that the well will flow at approximately 16325 STB/day. If the scroll bar on the
right hand side of the screen is rolled down, the different layer contributions can be seen
to be 4396 STB/day, 4870 STB/day and 7061 STB/day respectfully.
Examples Guide 1008
This marks the end of Tutorial 11. After completing this tutorial the user should
be able to:
Build a Multilayer - dP loss in Wellbore IPR model.
set of conditions and the contribution that comes from each layer.
1009
PROSPER
3.1.14 Tutorial 12 - Multilateral Well IPR
The Powderhall gas field is soon to be produced and different completion strategies are
being considered. One possible strategy is to drill a multilateral well with two different
branches which are produced up the same production string. The initial design is shown
below:
Management would like as assessment of the productivity of this design using a
preexisting PROSPER file as the base. An idea of the total possible flow from the well is
required as well as some additional information on the contribution of each branch and
how the production rate changes over the length of the two branches when the bottom
hole pressure is 5000 psig.
3.1.14.2Objectives
The Objectives of the tutorial are to:
Replace the Petroleum Experts IPR model with a Multilateral IPR model.
Learn what data is required to build a Multilateral IPR model in PROSPER.
Calculate the contribution and rate distribution along the length of each branch
when the well is producing at 5000 psig.
Examples Guide 1010
a. Replace the PI Entry IPR model with a Multilateral well model based on the
reservoir properties provided.
b. Within the Multilateral Well model, calculate the contribution of each branch and
the inflow long each branch.
The following data has be collected for use with the horizontal well model.
Reservoir Properties:
IPR Model Multilateral - Petroleum Experts
250
o
F
Gas Gravity 0.58
Reservoir Thickness 55 feet
Reservoir Top Depth
(TVD)
4900 feet
Vertical Permeability 2.5 md
1011
PROSPER
Tie Point:
Measured Depth 5400 feet
True Vertical Depth 4900 feet
T1 tubing:
Vertical Flow Model Petroleum Experts 2
Use Theshold Angle No
Measured
Depth (feet)
True Vertical
Depth (feet)
Azimuth
(degrees)
Start of Tubing 5400 4900 0
End of Tubing 5408 4905 0
Measured
Depth (feet)
Tubing Inside
Diameter
(inches)
Tubing Inside
Roughness
(inches)
Rate
Multiplier
Start of Tubing 5400
End of Tubing 5408 2.8 0.0006 1
Branch One:
Tubing
Section
Measured
Depth (feet)
True Vertical
Depth (feet)
Azimuth
(degrees)
1 5408 4905 0
2 5430 4920 54
3 5465 4940 58
Examples Guide 1012
4 5510 4945 62
5 5532 4940 68
6 5562 4930 74
Measured
Depth (feet)
Tubing Inside
Diameter
(inches)
Tubing Inside
Roughness
(inches)
Rate
Multiplier
End of Tubing 5562 2.8 0.0006 1
Perforati
on
Interval
Number
Perforatio
n Interval
MD Start
(feet)
Perforati
on
Interval
MD Start
(feet)
Perforati
on
Interval
TVD Start
(feet)
Perforati
on
Interval
TVD
Start
(feet)
Skin
Model
Choice
Non-
Darcy
Entry
Method
Local
Skin
1 5420 5470 4913.18 4940.56 By Hand Calculat
e
1
2 5510 5560 4945 4930.67 By Hand Calculat
e
1
Branch Two:
Tubing
Section
Measured
Depth (feet)
True Vertical
Depth (feet)
Azimuth
(degrees)
1 5408 4905 0
2 5435 4920 240
3 5454 4925 235
4 5480 4915 227
1013
PROSPER
5 5500 4910 221
6 5550 4920 214
7 5570 4935 210
Measured
Depth (feet)
Tubing Inside
Diameter
(inches)
Tubing Inside
Roughness
(inches)
Rate
Multiplier
End of Tubing 5570 2.8 0.0006 1
Perforati
on
Interval
Number
Perforatio
n Interval
MD Start
(feet)
Perforati
on
Interval
MD Start
(feet)
Perforati
on
Interval
TVD Start
(feet)
Perforati
on
Interval
TVD
Start
(feet)
Skin
Model
Choice
Non-
Darcy
Entry
Method
Local
Skin
1 5420 5470 4911.67 4918.85 By Hand Calculat
e
1
2 5510 5560 4912 4927.5 By Hand Calculat
e
1
3.1.14.5.1 Setting up the Model
In order to model a multilateral well, the corresponding option must be enabled in the
Options | Options screen on the main toolbar:
Examples Guide 1014
When the multilateral option is enabled, select Done to return to the main screen.
3.1.14.5.2 Multilateral IPR Model
The Multilateral IPR Model is built as a network which connects the different laterals
which may produce in the reservoir to a single point to be connected to a VLP curve
representing the well. The system can consist of four different element types:

Tie-Point This is the top of the system. It represents the solution
node which connects the IPR to the VLP and should
have the same measured and true vertical depth as the
bottom of the downhole equipment.
Tubing Connects the Tie-Point to a joint and has a defined
length and size. No production can occur within its length
but the pressure drop will be calculated.
Junction A joint acts as the connection for the multilaterals within
the reservoir. Even if there is only one completion, it still
needs to be connected to a joint before being joined to
the tie-point.
Completion A model can have a number of completions all
connected to the same joint and reservoir. Each
completion represents a different lateral within the
model.
1015
PROSPER
Reservoir This controls the layer properties such as reservoir
permeability, water cut, GOR etc.
The multilateral IPR model works on the principle of parent/child relationships. The tie-
point (the furthest downstream point in the system) acts as the first parent. When the
tubing is used to connect the tie-point to a junction, the depth of the tie-point becomes
the first point of the tubing. This is passed automatically and cannot be changed to
ensure that the model is consistent between the different elements. The end of the
tubing is then passed downwards to the next child (the junction) and this becomes the
depth of the joint. This passing of the last point in the parent to form the first point of the
child is continued all the way through the system.
To open the Multilateral interface, select System | Inflow Performance:
The steps to build the Multilateral network are detailed below.
3.1.14.5.2.1 Building the Multilateral Network
The different elements within the Multilateral network can be added by either selecting
them from the drop-down list in the top left hand corner or selecting the corresponding
button:
Examples Guide 1016
To place each element on the screen, click on the place where the element is to be
added.
The Tie-Point is the end of the IPR system and should correspond to the same depth as
the bottom of the downhole equipment. To add this element, select it from the drop
down menu and then click at the top of the blank page:
Name this element Tie-Point and then select Done to return to the main screen.
In order for two laterals to be modelled within the same layer, we need to add a joint at
which they can connect and commingle before travelling up the well-bore. This can be
done by selecting the Add Junction icon at the top of the screen and then selecting the
screen below the tie-point:
1017
PROSPER
Enter the name Joint and then select Done.
As we have two different laterals within the same reservoir, two different Completion
elements need to be added. Select the Add Completion option from the drop down
menu and select a space on the screen to add the first completion:
Name this Branch 1 and select Done. The same should also be done for the second
completion (Branch 2):
Examples Guide 1018
The final element to add to the model is the reservoir. Select Add Reservoir from the
drop down menu and then select at the bottom of the screen to add:
Name this Reservoir and select Done.
When adding links in the Multilateral model, they should be added in the direction from
parent to child. In this case that is in the direction opposite to flow. Select Add Link from
the drop down menu and then draw links from the tie-point downwards to the junction
and so on until the reservoir is reached:
1019
PROSPER
At the junction, two links are required; one going to each of the completions. The
reservoir also has both completions connected to it as both are going to produce from
this single tank.
When the links are connected, the building of the model has been completed. The next
step is to add the data.
3.1.14.5.2.2 Inputting Model Data
As mentioned above, the multilateral model is a parent child model and so the data
should first be entered to the highest parent and this will pass the information
downwards to each corresponding child.
To start inputting the model data, double click on the Tie-Point at the top of the page.
This will open the tie-point input data screen where the measured and true vertical
depths can be entered:
Once the data has been inserted, to move down to the next element (T1) select it from
the right hand screen.
Examples Guide 1020
The data is entered into the tubing screen in two main sections; Select Model and Input
Data. First enter the Select Model screen:
This screen is used to select the different correlations used in the model. The Threshold
Angle is used to decide the angle at which the model will change between the selected
horizontal and vertical flow correlations. In this case, as the Use Threshold Angle has
been set to No and therefore the Vertical Flow model will always be used for the
pressure drop calculations.
When the data has been inserted, select Input Data. The first screen is the deviation
survey screen where the deviation of the completion is entered. In this case the tubing is
vertical:
1021
PROSPER
As the tubing starts with the tie-point depth, this data has already been passed down
from the parent and therefore is set in the model. Only the remainder of the tubing
requires to be entered.
When the deviation has been entered, select the Equipment tab at the bottom of the
screen to enter the tubing size:
The tubing is 2.8 inches in diameter along the entire length with a roughness of 0.0006
inches. Again, the starting depth of the tubing has been passed from the tie point and
therefore cannot be altered. If any of these properties were to change along the length,
multiple sections can be entered.
When the data has been inserted, select Joint from the right hand side of the screen.
The joint is a single point in the system from which multiple branches can split and
continue into the reservoir. To define the joint the measured and true vertical depth of
the point requires to be entered:
Examples Guide 1022
As these depths must correspond to the last point in the T1 tubing, the data has already
been passed down and no changes need to be made.
Select Branch 1 from the menu on the right hand side of the screen.
pressure drop calculations. The Wellbore Radius of the completion and the equivalent
Dietz Shape Factor should also be included.
vertical:
1023
PROSPER
As the completion starts with the joint depth, this data has already been passed down
Examples Guide 1024
inches. Again, the starting depth of the tubing has been passed from the joint and
When the data has been inserted, select the Perforation Details tab:
Each section of perforations is entered in its own row and is defined by the start and
end depth of the perforations. When the measured depths are entered, the true vertical
depths are automatically entered.
If the Non-Darcy Entry Method is set to Calculate then additional data is required to be
entered in the Calculate screen:
1025
PROSPER
This should be done for both of the perforation intervals being entered. When the data
has been entered, select Branch 2 from the bar on the right hand side of the screen.
pressure drop calculations. The Wellbore Radius of the completion and the equivalent
Dietz Shape Factor should also be included.
Examples Guide 1026
vertical:
As the completion starts with the joint depth, this data has already been passed down
1027
PROSPER
inches. Again, the starting depth of the tubing has been passed from the joint and
When the data has been inserted, select the Perforation Details tab:
Each section of perforations is entered in its own row and is defined by the start and
end depth of the perforations. When the measured depths are entered, the true vertical
depths are automatically entered.
If the Non-Darcy Entry Method is set to Calculate then additional data is required to be
entered in the Calculate screen:
Examples Guide 1028
This should be done for both of the perforation intervals being entered. When the data
has been entered, select Reservoir from the bar on the right hand side of the screen.
This screen is used to describe the reservoir layer from which the fluid is being
produced. Once again, the main two screens to insert data into are the Select Model
and Input Data screens:
In this case the Petroleum Experts reservoir model is to be used however it is also
possible to select the Hydraulically Fractured Well model. The basic reservoir
properties (reservoir pressure/temperature) and fluid properties should be entered.
Once the data has been inserted, select the Input Data button to insert the specific
reservoir model data:
1029
PROSPER
Once this data has been inserted, the IPR data input has been completed. Select Done
to return to the main Multilateral Well screen.
3.1.14.5.2.3 Viewing the Well
Now that the well data has been inserted it is important to view the resultant wells to
ensure that the inserted data builds a well which represents the reality of the system.
This can be done by selecting Visualise | All:
This shows the well within the reservoir from 3 different views; Front View, Side View
and Top View. The red line represents the well while the yellow zones represent the
perforation intervals along each branch. The checkered zone is the reservoir which can
be produced from.
It is very important to ensure that all the completed (perforated) zones of the wells fall
within the bounds of the reservoir as it is not possible to produce from an undefined
Examples Guide 1030
zone.
In this case, the shape of the wells can be seen to fall within the reservoir and that the
shape matches that which was specified in the original objectives.
3.1.14.5.2.4 Calculating the IPR
Now that we are happy that the model geometry matches the reality we can continue to
calculate the IPR. It is possible to calculate either the well's response to a certain fixed
top node pressure or to calculate the entire IPR curve.
To carry out the calculations select Analyse | Calculate...
To carry out a calculation for a single pressure, select One Point from the Point or Curve
option:
If the Conductivity Switch is set to Finite Conductivity then this means that the pressure
drop due to friction will be considered along the pipeline lengths. If cross-flow is to be
modelled the Allow Crossflow options should be set to Yes. In this case it will be left as
No.
To carry out the calculation, insert the pressure to be analysed in the top right of the
screen. This is the pressure at the Tie-Point and corresponds to the bottom hole
1031
PROSPER
pressure. Select Calculate to carry out the calculation.
To view more details about the results select Details:
This screen shows the results along each branch and from each layer. The different
branches can be select from the drop down menu. To see a graph of the results select
Plot.
We are interested in seeing the rate which is being produced along the length of each
branch and therefore select Variables to change the results being viewed:
Examples Guide 1032
When the selects shown have been made select Done to return to the plot:
1033
PROSPER
This shows the rate per segment along each of the branches. When this data has been
viewed, select Finish and then Done to return to the calculation screen.
While we can carry out analyse of a single bottom hole pressure using the method
shown above, the objective of the model is often to carry out a System calculation to
estimate the flow rate of the well and therefore an IPR curve is required to be generated.
To do this, change the Point or Curve option to Curve on the calculation screen:
Examples Guide 1034
The range and number of pressures to be calculated should be set in the middle of the
screen. It is normal to run from reservoir pressure to a low value such as 100 or 50 psig.
For ihgh productivity systems, using low pressures can cause convergence issues as
the low pressures will allow a high rate to flow (due to high drawdowns) but the high rate
will lead to high friction pressure drops which will lead to lower drawdowns.
Once this data has been inserted, select Calculate to carry out the calculation. This IPR
plot will be automatically shown:
To save the file select Done and then Finish | Done to return to the main PROSPER
screen. Please note that if Finish | Cancel is selected, all the changes will be lost.
Once on the main screen, the file can be saved by selecting File | Save As...
be able to:
Build a Multilateral Well model for a well with multiple branches.
View the pressure and rates being produced in each branch for a given BHP.
Generate an IPR curve for a given set of FBHP values.
1035
PROSPER
3.1.15 Tutorial 13 - Modelling Skin
The well producing from the Logie field has now been drilled and perforated. Details of
the completion are now to be used to better model the inflow performance relationship
of the well.
The well model has now been modified to include a Darcy model to capture the inflow
response of the well based upon the available reservoir data.. However, during the
derivation of this model the reservoir is assumed to be a perfectly cylindrical reservoir
with uniform permeability which has a vertical well perforating the entire depth. This is
not the case in any real reservoir and hence the concept of skin was developed which
adds a pressure drop to attempt to take into account the effects the differences
between the ideal and real reservoirs would cause.
The skin of this well is to be modelled using the Karakas and Tariq skin model, which
will account for the mechanical and geometrical skin, and the Cinco (2)/ Martin-Bronz
model which will account for the partial penetration and deviation skins.
An idea of how this skin affects the IPR curve at different flow rates is also required.
3.1.15.2Objectives
Add a skin model to the IPR section to account for the assumptions made in the
derivation of the Darcy model.
Learn what data is required to build a Karakas and Tariq skin model in
PROSPER.
Learn what data is required to build a Cinco(2)/Martin-Bronz skin model in
PROSPER.
Learn to view the effects that the skin has on the IPR and how this varies with flow
rate.
Examples Guide 1036
a. Use an analytical model to account for the skin rather than enter a value by hand.
This is done by entering the completion data into the IPR section of PROSPER.
b. View the resultant IPR and see the effects that skin has on the model and how
this varies with flow rate.
c. Finally, a system calculation will be performed to see the impact that the skin has
on the produced rate.
Data on the completion has been provided by engineers within the company.
Shot Density
8 ft
-1
Perforation Diameter 0.43 inches
Perforation Length 9.2 inches
Damaged Zone Thickness 8 inches
Damaged Zone Permeability 25 md
Crushed Zone Thickness 0.2 inches
Crushed Zone Permeability 12.5 md
Shot Phasing
120
o
Vertical Permeability 5 md
Deviation
13
o
Penetration 1
1037
PROSPER
can be found in '~/IPM 8/Samples/PROSPER/'.
3.1.15.5.1 Selecting the Skin Models
To activate the skin model first open the IPR section by selecting System | Inflow
Performance:
The Mechanical/Geometrical skin option should be changed to Karakas + Tariq and the
Deviation and Partial Penetration Skin option should be selected as Cinco(2)/Martin-
Bronz.
Once these models have been chosen, select Input Data to proceed to the skin model
input screen.
3.1.15.5.2 Inserting Skin Data
Two tabs now become available at the bottom of the screen, the Mech/Geom Skin tab
and the Dev/PP Skin tab.
Examples Guide 1038
Selecting the Mech/Geom Skin tab will bring up the input screen for the Karakas and
Tariq model:
The Karakas and Tariq model requires the damaged zone, crushed zone and vertical
permeabilities. These values are not always known and so the Karakas and Tariq paper
gave a set of guidelines to estimate there values:
Damaged Zone Permeability 50% of Reservoir Permeability
Crushed Zone Permeability 25% of Reservoir Permeability
Vertical Permeability 10% of Reservoir Permeability
1039
PROSPER
Once these values have been inserted, the next tab can be accessed to see the
deviation and partial penetration skin inputs:
During the process of inserting data into the model it may be noticed that some values
are already inserted. If a value, such as well bore radius has been inserted into a
different screen in the IPR section, the value will be copied across to ensure the
consistency of the model. If the value is changed, it will also be changed on the other
screens as well.
Please note that the Cinco model is based upon correlations and is not valid for
wells with deviations of greater than 65
o
. For highly deviated wells, the Wong
Clifford skin model should be selected.
3.1.15.5.3 Viewing Calculated Skin
When the data has been inserted, the IPR curve can be plotted be selecting Calculate:
Examples Guide 1040
In order to reduce the number of variables being plotted, the IPR Temperature can be
removed from the plot by selecting the red cross icon highlighted above and selecting
IPR Temperature.
The dP Perforation Skin and dP Deviation Skin can now be added to the plot by
double clicking on the variable names in the bottom left hand corner of the screen:
1041
PROSPER
The pressure drop due to each one of these skins is then displayed on the plot. This
shows that the pressure drop caused by the Perforation skin increases as the flow rate
increases and that the pressure drop due to the Deviation skin is negative. This means
that it is assisting the flow rather than impeding it as the deviation leads to a longer
length of well being placed in the reservoir than if the well were vertical. This provides
more area for the fluid to flow into and is therefore an assistance.
For more details of the skin values, select the Results icon (highlighted at the top of the
screen in the screenshot above). This will show the table of rates, pressures and skin
values:
Examples Guide 1042
The impact of these different skins has now been plotted and reported for analysis.
Select Done to return to the plot and click the red cross in the top right hand corner to
exit the plot.
(VLP + IPR).
screen:
1043
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1044
2925 psig.
be able to:
Build a skin model to account for the assumptions made in the derivation of
the Darcy model.
View the effects that the different skins have on the IPR curve and how these
vary with rate.
1045
PROSPER
3.1.16 Tutorial 14 - Modelling a Gravel Pack
Now that production has started out of the well drilled in the Logie field, it has been
noticed that there is an increasing volume of sand being produced. An economic
assessment is being conducted and in order see if the revenue lost through the
reduction in production caused by the gravel pack is off set by the costs of replacing
pipelines and equipment damaged by erosion due to the sand..
In order to assist this assessment, a gravel pack is to be included within the PROSPER
file and the results compared with the previous example where no gravel pack is
present. The comparisons should include a direct comparison of the reduction in the
IPR as well as the reduction in rate achieved when the well is producing at a constant
well head pressure of 500 psig.
An estimate of the fluid's velocity through the gravel pack when the well head pressure is
500 psig, is also sought.
3.1.16.2Objectives
Learn to add a gravel pack to the model to pack into account the pressure drop
across the it.
Learn how to save plots from previous files and reload them to compare them
with new data.
Perform a calculation which allows the fluid velocity in the gravel pack to be
estimated.
Examples Guide 1046
a. Before the new gravel pack is added, the pre-gravel pack IPR should be
calculated and saved so that it can be compared to the IPR with the gravel pack.
b. Add a gravel pack to the IPR model and see this has changed the IPR.
c. Run a system calculation to obtain the fluid velocity through the gravel pack at set
conditions.
The company installing the gravel pack has provided the following data:
Method Multiphase
3.1.16.5.1 Saving a Previous Plot
Before the gravel pack is added to the file, the previous IPR (without gravel pack) is to
be saved so it can be recalled later. First, go to System | Inflow Performance and
select Calculate:
This will bring up the IPR plot. The IPR pressure is to be saved and compared, so first
the IPR Temperature curve can be removed from the plot by selecting the red cross
shown below which is located aboev the plot in the plotting options:
1047
PROSPER
To save the current plot (which now displays only the IPR Pressure) select the left hand
red disk shown above. This will bring up the Save/Delete Results Stream screen:
Add a new name of the stream (given above as 'Without Gravel Pack' and select Add.
Select OK to return to the plotting screen.
3.1.16.5.2 Setting up Sand Control
Before a gravel pack can be included in the PROSPER model, the sand control option
must be selected in the main options. The main options screen can be accessed by
selecting Options | Options:
Examples Guide 1048
3.1.16.5.3 Gravel Pack Input Data
Now that the Gravel Pack option has been enabled, the input data can be added to the
IPR section by selecting System | Inflow Performance:
Select Input Data and a new tab (the Sand Control tab) is now available:
1049
PROSPER
present. When variables are repeated in the different screens (such as shot density or
perforation diameter) in order to keep the model consistent the same value is used for
each. Therefore, changing it in one screen will also change it on all other screens.
Examples Guide 1050
3.1.16.5.4 Plotting Saved Streams
In the top left hand corner of the plot screen, two streams can now be seen; the present
IPR Input Section data and the saved stream called Without Gravel Pack:
To add the Without Gravel Pack stream, select the IPR Results which is reported under
the heading and then select Pressure from the variable list in the bottom left hand corner
of the screen:
1051
PROSPER
This now displays the current IPR and the previous IPR to see the impact that the newly
installed gravel pack will have on the inflow.
Now that the gravel pack data has been inserted into PROSPER, the next step is to
(VLP + IPR).

screen:
Examples Guide 1052
1053
PROSPER
From the previous example (Tutorial 13) we know that at these flowing conditions a well
without a gravel pack will produce 14500 STB/day.
We cab see from the results above that when a gravel pack is installed then the model
predicts that the well will flow at approximately 12160 STB/day and that the
This means that the gravel pack has lead to a decrease in production of 2340 STB/
day.
The results also report the pressure drop across the gravel pack is 630.85 psi and the
velocity at the gravel pack casing is 1.59 ft/sec.
We can then view the System Plot by selecting Plot | System Plot from the top ribbon:
be able to:
Add a gravel pack to the IPR model.
Save and Recall plots from previous calculations.
Report the calculated gravel pack conditions (such as dP lost across the gravel
pack and velocity in the gravel pack) for a given set of flowing conditions.
Examples Guide 1054
3.1.17 Tutorial 15 - Modelling a Frac and Pack Well
When producing some reservoirs, it is often necessary to fracture the reservoir around
the well to improve production. When this fracturing is carried out, the flow pattern into
the well changes considerable and to capture the effects that this has on the production,
an IPR model which accounts for a fracture should be used. When such fractures are
also filled with a gravel pack, the resulting completion is referred to as a 'Frac and Pack'
completion. This tutorial is intended to demonstrate how such a well can be modelled
within PROSPER.
In order to assess the impact of having a 'Frac and Pack' completion, a gravel pack is
to be included within the PROSPER file and the Hydraulically Fractured Well IPR model
should be used.
Once the model has been set up, an estimate of the fluid velocity through the gravel
pack is sought when the WHP is 500 psig, the water cut is 0% and the GOR is 800 scf/
STB.
3.1.17.2Objectives
Learn to add a gravel pack to the model to pack into account the pressure drop
across the it.
Input the required data to build a Hydraulically Fracture Well IPR model.
Perform a calculation which allows the fluid velocity in the gravel pack to be
estimated when the WHP is known.
1055
PROSPER
a. Activate the gravel pack option.
b. Add a gravel pack to the Hydraulically Fractured Well IPR model to account for
the 'Frac and Pack' completion.
c. Run a system calculation to obtain the fluid velocity through the gravel pack at the
given conditions.
The company carrying out the frac and pack completion has provided the following data:
3.1.17.4.1 Fracture Data
Drainage Area 320 areas
Time 5 days
Fracture Height 100 ft
Fracture Half-length 35 ft
Dimensionless Fracture Conductivity (F
CD
) 4500
Fracture Face Skin 0
Perforation Diameter 0.26
Shot Density 8
Examples Guide 1056
Method Multiphase
Before a gravel pack can be included in the PROSPER model, the sand control option
must be selected in the main options. The main options screen can be accessed by
selecting Options | Options:
3.1.17.5.2 IPR Input Data
Any equipment which will affect the flow of fluid from the reservoir into the well will be
defined in the IPR section of PROSPER. This means that both the fracture and the gravel
pack will be defined in this section and it can be accessed by selecting System |
Inflow Performance:
1057
PROSPER
On the Select Model screen, select the Hydraulically Fractured Well model and also
select Enter Skin by Hand. The basic reservoir properties, defined in the bottom right
hand corner of the screen, are kept the same as the previous example.
Selecting Input Data in the top right hand corner of the screen will allow the IPR data to
be inserted:
Examples Guide 1058
The Hydraulically Fracture Well model data can be entered on the Reservoir Model
tab as shown above. When this data has been entered, select the Mech/Geom Skin
tab to enter the skin data:
1059
PROSPER
The skin value entered in this screen is the Fracture Face Skin and therefore cannot
be negative.
This completes the entry of data for the IPR model; the next step is to enter the values
for the gravel pack.
3.1.17.5.3 Gravel Pack Input Data
Select the Sand Control tab and enter the required data as shown below:
Examples Guide 1060
1061
PROSPER
Now that the 'frac and pack' data has been inserted into PROSPER, the next step is to
(VLP + IPR).

screen:
Examples Guide 1062
1063
PROSPER
We cab see from the results above that when a 'frac and pack' is installed then the
model predicts that the well will flow at approximately 7843 STB/day and that the
corresponding solution node pressure (which is equivalent to the FBHP) is 2279.32
psig.
The results also reports the velocity at the gravel pack casing is 2.829 ft/sec.
be able to:
Model a well which has a 'frac and pack' completion by using both the
Hydraulically Fractured Well IPR model and a gravel pack.
Report the calculated gravel pack conditions (such as velocity in the gravel
pack) for a given set of flowing conditions.
Examples Guide 1064
3.1.18 Tutorial 16 - Modelling a Wire-wrapped Screen
reduction in production caused by the installation of a wire-wrapped screen is off set by
the costs of replacing pipelines and equipment damaged by erosion due to the sand.
In order to assist this assessment, a wire-wrapped screen is to be included within the
PROSPER file and the resultant pressure drop when the well is produced at a well head
pressure of 500 psig is to be calculated.
3.1.18.2Objectives
Learn to add a wire wrapped screen to the model.
Perform a calculation which allows the pressure drop across the screen to be
a. Activate the sand control option.
b. Add a wire-wrapped screen to the IPR model .
c. Run a system calculation to obtain the pressure drop across the screen at the
given conditions.
1065
PROSPER
The company installing the wire-wrapped screen has provided the following data:
Sand Control Type Wire-Wrapped Screen
Production Interval 100ft
Screen Outer Radius 0.28 ft
Outside Permeability Formation Sand
Outside (Turbulence) Calculated
Before a wire-wrapped screen can be included in the PROSPER model, the sand
control option must be selected in the main options. The main options screen can be
accessed by selecting Options | Options:
Examples Guide 1066
3.1.18.5.2 Wire-wrapped Screen Input Data
Now that the Wire-wrapped Screen option has been enabled, the input data can be
added to the IPR section by selecting System | Inflow Performance:
1067
PROSPER
present. When variables are repeated in the different screens (such as Reservoir
Thickness) in order to keep the model consistent the same value is used for each.
Therefore, changing it in one screen will also change it on all other screens.
In this case, both the Outside Permeability and Outside (Turbulence) are left blank.
This is because the area between the screen and the sandface has been said to be full
of formation sand and the turbulence factor is to be calculated by the program rather
than defined.
Examples Guide 1068
When the plot is exited, the input screen shows the calculated value for the Outside
(Turbulence) term:
1069
PROSPER
Select Done to exit to the main screen.
(VLP + IPR).

screen:
Examples Guide 1070
1071
PROSPER
We cab see from the results above that when a wire-wrapped screen is installed then
the model predicts that the well will flow at approximately 14400 STB/day and that the
The results also reports the pressure drop across the screen is 26.5 psi.
be able to:
Model a well which has a wire-wrapped screen completion.
Report the impact that this screen has on production for a given set of flowing
conditions.
Examples Guide 1072
3.1.19 Tutorial 17 - Modelling a Pre-Packed Screen
reduction in production caused by the installation of a pre-packed screen is off set by
the costs of replacing pipelines and equipment damaged by erosion due to the sand.
In order to assist this assessment, a pre-packed screen is to be included within the
PROSPER file and the resultant pressure drop when the well is produced at a well head
pressure of 500 psig is to be calculated.
3.1.19.2Objectives
Learn to add a pre-packed screen to the model.
b. Add a pre-packed screen to the IPR model .
given conditions.
1073
PROSPER
The company installing the pre-packed screen has provided the following data:
Sand Control Type Pre-Packed Screen
Screen Inner Radius 0.25 ft
Screen Outer Radius 0.33 ft
Screen Permeability 500 md
Screen Beta (Turbulence) Calculated
Outside Permeability Formation Sand
Before a pre-packed screen can be included in the PROSPER model, the sand control
option must be selected in the main options. The main options screen can be accessed
by selecting Options | Options:
Examples Guide 1074
3.1.19.5.2 Pre-Packed Screen Input Data
Now that the Pre-packed Screen option has been enabled, the input data can be added
to the IPR section by selecting System | Inflow Performance:
1075
PROSPER
In this case, the Screen Beta (Turbulence), Outside Permeability and Outside
(Turbulence) are left blank. This is because the area between the screen and the sand-
face has been said to be full of formation sand and the turbulence factors for the screen
and outside are to be calculated by the program rather than specified directly.
Examples Guide 1076
When the plot is exited, the input screen shows the calculated values for the Screen
Beta (Turbulence) and Outside (Turbulence) term:
1077
PROSPER
(VLP + IPR).
screen:
Examples Guide 1078
1079
PROSPER
We cab see from the results above that when a pre-packed screen is installed then the
model predicts that the well will flow at approximately 14480 STB/day and that the
The results also reports the pressure drop across the screen is 6.31 psi.
be able to:
Model a well which has a pre-packed screen completion.
Report the impact that this screen has on production for a given set of flowing
conditions.
Examples Guide 1080
3.1.20 Tutorial 18 - Modelling a Slotted Linear
reduction in production caused by the installation of a slotted liner is off set by the costs
of replacing pipelines and equipment damaged by erosion due to the sand.
In order to assist this assessment, a slotted liner is to be included within the PROSPER
file and the resultant pressure drop when the well is produced at a well head pressure of
500 psig is to be calculated.
3.1.20.2Objectives
Learn to add a slotted liner to the model.
b. Add a slotted liner to the IPR model .
given conditions.
1081
PROSPER
The company installing the slotted liner has provided the following data:
Sand Control Type Slotted Liner
Liner Inner Radius 0.32 ft
Liner Outer Radius 0.34 ft
Slot Height 4 inches
Slot Width 0.02 inches
Slot Density
4 ft
-1
Screen Linear Radius No screen
Outside Permeability 50000 md
Before a pre-packed screen can be included in the PROSPER model, the sand control
option must be selected in the main options. The main options screen can be accessed
by selecting Options | Options:
Examples Guide 1082
3.1.20.5.2 Slotted Liner Input Data
Now that the Pre-packed Screen option has been enabled, the input data can be added
to the IPR section by selecting System | Inflow Performance:
1083
PROSPER
In this case, the Screen Outer Radius has been set to zero as there is not one present
and the Outside (Turbulence) is left blank as it to be calculated by the program rather
than specified directly.
Examples Guide 1084
When the plot is exited, the input screen shows the calculated value for the Outside
(Turbulence) term:
1085
PROSPER
(VLP + IPR).

screen:
Examples Guide 1086
1087
PROSPER
We cab see from the results above that when a slotted liner is installed then the model
predicts that the well will flow at approximately 13619 STB/day and that the
The results also reports the pressure drop across the liner is 243 psi.
be able to:
Model a well which has a slotted liner completion.
Report the impact that this liner has on production for a given set of flowing
conditions.
Examples Guide 1088
3.1.21 Tutorial 19 - Matching an Oil Well Test
So far, we have built our model on the basis of reservoir parameters, completion data
and a PVT report. The next step is to ensure that the results we are getting from the file
are representative of the actual flow rates recorded in the field.
We have now been producing from our well from some time and a number of well tests
have been carried out on the well. It is important that we ensure that the models we have
created for the well are an accurate representative of the actual well. To do this the
measured well test data can be used to adjust the pressure drops calculated by the
multiphase correlations in our VLP calculations.
After the VLP has been matched to ensure that the pressure drop in the well is being
captured it is also possible to match the IPR so that when we combine the two together
in a System Calculation, the results are consistent. From previous test data it has been
confirmed that the IPR models being used are accurate, however, it is unclear what the
reservoir pressures were at the time each test was performed.
Once this matching has been carried out, management would like to have an idea of the
impact that water-cut will have on production if the reservoir pressure is maintained at
4000 psig. This should be carried out for wellhead pressures of 250, 500 and 750 psig.
3.1.21.2Objectives
Match our VLP curves to the measured well test data
Estimate the reservoir pressure at the time of each test by matching the IPR to
the measured data.
Calculate the impact of increasing water cut on production if the reservoir
pressure is maintained at 4000 psig for WHPs of 250, 500 and 750 psig.
1089
PROSPER
As the base PROSPER file has already been created the focus of this tutorial will be on
inputting the test data and matching the model to this data.
a. Insert the test data and match the U value so that the fluid temperature gradient is
representative of reality.
b. Compare the different flow correlations to see which gives the closest results to
the test point.
c. Match the closest correlation so that the calculated gauge pressure matches the
recorded pressure.
d. Find the reservoir pressure for each test so that the VLP/IPR intersection point
gives the same rate as the measured data.
e. Run a sensitivity study using the system calculation to see the impact of water cut
on production at different WHPs.
The following well test data has been reported for this well:
Test Date 16/03/2011 21/05/2011 07/10/2011
(psig)
230 521 765
Tubing Head
Temperature (
o
F)
143.8 134.2 118
Water Cut (%) 0 0.5 1.9
Gauge Depth (ft) 6250 6250 6250
Reservoir Pressure
(psig)
4000 4000 4000
Examples Guide 1090
The VLP/IPR matching process is intended to be used to match our model to field data.
This matching consists of four different stages:
1. From the measured Tubing Head Temperature, calculate the U value which will
result in the model predicting the same temperature for the well test conditions. When
this value has been found, it can be automatically transferred for use in the model.
2. A gradient calculation is carried out to see which correlation best represents the
measured pressure drops. This is done by seeing which correlation predicts a
pressure nearest to the gauge pressure measured.
3. Once the most representative correlation has been selected, a match is carried out
so that the gauge pressure calculated exactly matches the measured pressure. This
is done by applying a multiplier to both the gravity pressure drop term (parameter 1)
and the friction pressure drop term (parameter 2).
4. When the VLP has been matched, the IPR can also be matched. The IPR should be
adjusted so that the VLP/IPR intersection point matches the gas rate measured in the
field.
Once these four steps have been completed, the model will predict the correct test rate
at the given test conditions and can be said to be representative of the actual flowing
conditions in the well. Once we are happy that a model is reproducing results seen in
the field, we can use the model to run predictions to see how the well's response may
change when the boundary conditions are changed.
1091
PROSPER
Test Date 16/03/2011 21/05/2011 07/10/2011
(psig)
230 521 765
Tubing Head
Temperature (
o
F)
143.8 134.2 118
Water Cut (%) 0 0.5 1.9
Gauge Depth (ft) 6250 6250 6250
Reservoir Pressure
(psig)
4000 4000 4000
Examples Guide 1092
1093
PROSPER
average will be calculated:
Examples Guide 1094
3.1.21.5.1.3 VLP Quality Check
With the U value matched, we can be confident that the temperature profile in the well is
being captured accurately. The next step is to carry out a quality check to ensure that the
model, test data and gauge pressure which has been measured are consistent.
For the quality check we use two correlations, the Fancher Brown and the Duns and
Ros Modified, to create an envelope inside which a test point should fall. The Fancher
Brown correlation is a no slip correlation (as it assumes that the gas and liquid travel at
the same velocity in the tubing) and therefore will under predict the pressure drop for an
oil well. The Duns and Ros Modified correlation has been adapted to over predict the
pressure drop for oil wells producing in the slug flow regime. Therefore, if a test point
falls either below the Fancher Brown or is greater than the Duns and Ros Modified then
we can consider the quality of the test point or model to be in question. If it falls between
the two we can say that it has passed this initial test.
To carry out the quality check, select the Correlation Comparison button from the top
of the VLP/IPR matching screen:
1095
PROSPER
The measured data for the first test will be automatically bought into this screen:
In order to carry out the quality check, select the Duns and Ros Modified and Fancher
Brown correlations from the bottom left hand corner of the screen:
Select Calculate to carry out the calculations for each correlation:
Examples Guide 1096
To see if the test point falls between the two gradients, select Plot:
For the case of test point one, we can see that it does indeed fall between these two
correlations and can therefore be said to have passed the quality check.
After exiting the plot, select Done in the Correlation Comparison screen:
A prompt will now appear for the second test point. Select OK to enter the correlation
comparison with the test data from test two:
1097
PROSPER
The exact same steps as shown above should be carried out for test points two and
three. When this is done, the points will also be found to fall within the envelope and
therefore pass the quality check:
Examples Guide 1098
When all three have been completed, selecting Done will return the user to the VLP/IPR
Matching screen.
1099
PROSPER
This will transfer the first set of test data into the Correlation Comparison screen:
can be selected. In this case we will select Hagedorn Brown, Beggs and Brill,
Petroleum Experts 2, Petroleum Experts 3 and Petroleum Experts 4:
correlations:
Examples Guide 1100
pressure.
1101
PROSPER
Select OK to return to the Correlation Comparison screen with the 2nd test's data. The
same steps as shown above should be performed to see the plot:
data.
Examples Guide 1102
For the final case, both the Petroleum Experts 2 and Petroleum Experts 3 correlations
are close to the test data.
Experts 2.
The correlation which was found to be closest to all three test data points was found to
be Petroleum Experts 2. This correlation will now be matched so that it recreates each
point exactly. This can be done by selecting Match VLP:
1103
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1104
during each test.
test.
1105
PROSPER
to be calculated:
rates:
Examples Guide 1106
calculated intersection points (represented by the blue squares) do not match up. It
appears that in each case a different reservoir pressure will be required to match each
test. This can be done using the Adjust IPR option.
IPR:
1107
PROSPER
On the top of the screen, the Petroleum Experts 2 correlation should be selected.
the same time. If multiple tests are matched, an average reservoir pressure will be
calculated which would imply that the tests were all carried out at the same pressure. As
the tests here were carried out months apart, the reservoir pressure is most likely
different and so each test should be matched individually and the reservoir pressure
calculated saved.
In the top left of the screen, select test 1 by placing a tick in box next to it:
Once it is selected, press Adjust Pres. A prompt will appear asking which test is to be
Examples Guide 1108
When the match has been carried out, a new reservoir pressure will be calculated. This
should be transferred to the VLP/IPR Match screen by selecting the option and pressing
OK:
This same process should be carried out for tests 2 and 3. When this has been
completed press Done to return to the VLP/IPR Matching screen and see the
calculated reservoir pressure at the time of each test:
1109
PROSPER
Select VLP/IPR and then Done, followed by Plot to see that the VLP/IPR intersection
points now match up with the test rates:
This completes the VLP/IPR matching process as the model is now recreating the test
results measured in the field. Select Main from the top of the plot to return to the main
PROSPER screen.
Examples Guide 1110
3.1.21.5.2 Water Cut Sensitivity
The objective of this sensitivity is to find the impact of increasing water cut on production
if the reservoir pressure is 4000 psig. This should be carried out for first node pressures
of 250, 500 and 750 psig.
System (Ipr + Vlp).
calculations:
As the Top Node Pressure and Water Cut are to be used in the sensitivity study, the
values entered here will be overwritten.
the VLP curve.
1111
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1112
1113
PROSPER
To see the intended plot, we should select to see Liquid Rate on the y-axis, Water Cut
on the X-axis and have First Node Pressure as the parameter variable:
Examples Guide 1114
This plot shows us the impact of the water cut on the production as the increasing water
cut leads to a lower production rate. When the first node pressure is 750 psig, the well
will stop producing at between 60 and 70% water cut while first the pressure is dropped
to 500 psig then it will stop producing between 80 and 90%. With a well head pressure
of 250 psig, the well is able to produce all the way up to 90% water cut when the
reservoir pressure is 4000 psig.
be able to:
Match the VLP curve to test data.
Use the matched VLP curve to estimate the reservoir pressure at the time of
the test when the productivity is known.
Carry out a sensitivity to see the impact that water cut has on well production.
1115
PROSPER
3.1.22 Tutorial 20 - Matching a Gas Well Test
The Powderhall gas well has been producing for some time now and data from a
number of well tests is available. So far, our model has been built on the basis of
different models using the reservoir and completion properties as a basis. The next step
is to ensure that the models which have been built are representative of the actual
flowing conditions within the well and this can be done using the VLP/IPR Matching work
flow in PROSPER.
The reservoir pressure of the Powderhall field has been monitored very well and
therefore this is considered to be recorded accurately at the time of each test. The
productivity of the well, however, (which is captured in the IPR) is not as well known and
therefore may be required to be adjusted to match the well tests.
Once the model has been matched to the test data, management would like to obtain an
idea of how an increase in WGR may affect the production of the well.
3.1.22.2Objectives
Ensure that the IPR curves are an accurate representation of the actual well's
inflow
Predict the impact that an increasing WGR will have on the well if the wellhead
pressure is either 1500 psig or 1000 psig.
Examples Guide 1116
the test point.
c. Match the closest correlation so that the calculated gauge pressure matches the
recorded pressure.
d. Match the IPR so that the VLP/IPR intersection point gives the same rate as the
measured data.
e. Run a sensitivity study using the system calculation to see the inpact of the WGR
at different wellhead pressures.
Test Date 18/02/2007 20/03/2007 14/04/2007
(psig)
430 2680 1420
Tubing Head
Temperature (
o
F)
151.63 146.0 149.95
Water Gas Ratio (STB/
MMscf)
1 1 1
Condensate Gas Ratio
(STB/MMscf)
1 1 1
Gauge Depth (ft) 4250 4250 4250
Reservoir Pressure
(psig)
5300 5240 5200
1117
PROSPER
field.
To match the test data, select the Matching | Matching | VLP/IPR (Quality Check)
menu and insert the test data as shown below:
Examples Guide 1118
At the top right of the screen, the Tasks to be carried out during the matching process
can be seen. These four steps should be carried out in order and details of each
different task are given in the subsequent sections of this guide.
The first step is to match the Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient. This can be done by
selecting Estimate U Value:
Each test will be matched in turn and the estimated U value will be shown. Select Done
to continue to the next test:
1119
PROSPER
When all the tests have been matched, an average value for all the tests will be
calculated. For this data, all of the tests can be seen to have very similar U values and
therefore an average of these three would be the best representation of our model.
Select Yes, to transfer this new U value to the Geothermal Gradient screen:
Any calculation performed by this model from now on, will use this new U value.
Now that the temperature gradient within the well at the time of the test has been
matched, the next step is to find the correlation which best represents the measured
pressure drop. This can be done by selecting Correlation Comparison:
Examples Guide 1120
When the prompt is shown, select OK to transfer the first set of test data into the
Correlation Comparison screen:
can be selected. In this case we will select Hagedorn Brown, Mukerjee Brill, Beggs and
Brill, Petroleum Experts 2, Petroleum Experts 3 and Petroleum Experts 5:
1121
PROSPER
correlations:
Examples Guide 1122
pressure.
Select OK to return to the Correlation Comparison screen with the 2nd test's data. The
same steps as shown above should be performed to see the plot:
1123
PROSPER
data.
Examples Guide 1124
For the final case, the Petroleum Experts 2, Petroleum Experts 3 and Beggs and Brill
correlations are all close to the test data.
Experts 2.
The Petroleum Experts 2 multiphase correlation has been found to be the closest
representation of all three test points. This now has to be matched to ensure that it
reproduces our test points.
Select Match VLP from the top ribbon:
In the left hand side of the screen, select the correlation (in this case Petroleum Experts
2) which is to be matched. Select Match to carry out the regression to modify the
multipliers of the gravity and friction pressure drops:
1125
PROSPER
The match parameters in this case are found to be 0.99 and 0.98:
The right hand side of the screen also shows the newly calculated pressure at gauge
depth for each test which shows that each calculated value is now matched to the real
Examples Guide 1126
measured data.
Now that we are confident that the pressure drop calculated by our model is an accurate
representation of the pressure drop measured in the field, we can use the calculated
FBHP to ensure that the IPR is also representative of the performance of the well. If both
are representative, the intersection point of the IPR and VLP curves should match the
flow rate measured at the time of the test if the same conditions are used.
Select VLP/IPR from the matching screen:
to be calculated:
1127
PROSPER
rates:
calculated intersection points (represented by the blue squares) do not match up. As the
intersection points do not match up with the measured data, this implies that the IPR
model is not representative of the actual flowing conditions. In this case, we are
confident of the reservoir pressure measurements which have been taken but we are
unsure how representative the actual IPR is. We can therefore try to find a Skin value
which will match all of these points. Skin is a measure of the deviation of the reality from
the mathematical model which has been set up to predict the flow from the reservoir.
Examples Guide 1128
This can be done using the Adjust IPR option.
From the VLP/IPR Matching Screen, select Adjust IPR:
As we are basing our analysis on the matched VLP correlation, the first step is to select
it in the top right hand corner of the screen:
In this case, we want to find a single skin value which will be valid for all three of our
tests. Therefore all three tests should be on the left hand side of the screen. Select
Adjust Skin to carry out the calculation. A dialogue box will appear asking which tests
are to be considered:
Select Calculate For All SELECTED Tests and then select OK. Once the calculation
has been completed for all three tests, an average skin to match the points will be found:
1129
PROSPER
This is to be transferred to the IPR section and so select the Update Skin (in IPR
Section) With Calculated Value option. Select OK to confirm.
Return to the main VLP/IPR Matching screen by selecting Done and then recalculate
the VLP/IPR intersection points by going to VLP/IPR | Calculate. When the calculation
has been completed, select Plot to see if the matching has been completed correctly:
We can see that by using a skin value of 5.03, all three tests now match. The model can
now be said to be matched to the available test data and to be representative of the
actual flowing conditions within the well.
Select Main to return to the main PROSPER screen.
3.1.22.5.2 WGR Sensitivity
The objective of this sensitivity is to find the impact of increasing WGR on production if
the reservoir pressure is 4000 psig. This should be carried out for first node pressures
of 250, 500 and 750 psig.
System (Ipr + Vlp).
Examples Guide 1130
calculations:
As the Top Node Pressure and WGR are to be used in the sensitivity study, the values
entered here will be overwritten.
the VLP curve.
1131
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1132
1133
PROSPER
To see the intended plot, we should select to see Gas Rate on the y-axis and the Water
Gas Ratio on the X-axis:
Examples Guide 1134
This plot shows the deceasing trend in gas rate when the WGR is increasing. The
heavier fluid will be harder to lift and also the increase in mass within the tubing will
mean a higher velocity and hence higher frictional pressure drop.
The plot can be exited by selecting Finish and then Done to return to the main screen.
To save the file, select File | Save As...
be able to:
Match the VLP curve to test data for a gas well.
Use the matched VLP curve to find the skin value required to match the IPR to
the test data.
Carry out a sensitivity to see the impact that the water gas ratio has on well
production.
1135
PROSPER
3.1.23 Tutorial 21 - Matching a Water Injection Well Test
So far, we have built our water injection model on the basis of reservoir parameters,
completion data and a PVT report. The next step is to ensure that the results we are
getting from the file are representative of the actual flow rates recorded in the field.
Data from a number of well tests have now become available and it is possible to adapt
our model so that the results obtained for the same conditions match those measured in
the field. Once we have a model which can recreate the flowing conditions of the well
tests, lift curves are to be generated which can then be imported into GAP to form part
of an integrated field model which will use REVEAL to capture the conditions and
injectivity of the reservoir at each time step.
3.1.23.2Objectives
Use the well tests to see if the IPR conditions are changing over time.
Generate VLP curves for use in GAP for an injection well.
the test point.
Examples Guide 1136
c. Match the selected correlation so that the calculated gauge pressure matches
the recorded pressure.
d. Find the skin for each test so that the VLP/IPR intersection point gives the same
rate as the measured data.
e. Generate VLP tables for use within GAP.
Test Date 17/08/2011 23/09/2011 07/12/2011
Injected Fluid Pressure
(psig)
1250 1075 985
Downstream
Temperature (
o
F)
99.3 112.1 123.6
Water Cut (%) 100 100 100
Liquid Rate (STB/day) 8467 5897 4456
Gauge Depth (ft) 8000 8000 8000
Gauge Pressure (psig) 4910 4747 4662
Reservoir Pressure
(psig)
4100 4100 4100
1137
PROSPER
field.
Test Date 17/08/2011 23/09/2011 07/12/2011
(psig)
1250 1075 985
Downstream
Temperature (
o
F)
99.3 112.1 123.6
Examples Guide 1138
Water Cut (%) 100 100 100
Liquid Rate (STB/day) 8467 5897 4456
Gauge Depth (ft) 8000 8000 8000
Gauge Pressure (psig) 4910 4747 4662
Reservoir Pressure
(psig)
4100 4100 4100
1139
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1140
When the prompt is shown, select OK. This will transfer the first set of test data into the
1141
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1142
correlations and then select Plot to see how close each correlation comes to the
measured data point:
As this is a water injection well, the only phase present within the system is water and
therefore the fluid is in a single phase. As the multi-phase correlations are used to
estimate the hold-up (the ratio of the liquid to the total fluid) they will all predict the same
pressure drop as the hold-up is always going to be 1. This can be see in the plot above.
screen will appear so that the same process can be carried out for the next test. Select
steps as shown above should be performed to see the plot:
1143
PROSPER
Again, every correlation predicts the same pressure drop.
Examples Guide 1144
The objective of using the correlation comparison in the case of single phase fluids is
not to compare the different correlations (as there is no difference to compare) but
rather to see if the measured data is close to the calculated data. Based upon these
three test, therefore, we can say the pressure drop calculation is consistently over
estimating the pressure drop in the well but only by a very small amount each time.
As mentioned previously, as a single phase fluid is being modelled, any correlation can
be used in the pressure drop calculations as they all predict the same results. We have
to select a correlation to match to the test data and in this case, Petroleum Experts 2
will be used. This correlation will now be matched so that it recreates each point exactly.
This can be done by selecting Match VLP:
1145
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1146
during each test.
test.
1147
PROSPER
to be calculated:
rates:
Examples Guide 1148
calculated intersection points (represented by the blue squares) do not match up. For a
water injection well, we could assume that the conditions around the well bore are
changing (due to the cold water cooling the near wellbore region or scaling occuring
around the well) and therefore we will try to find the skin required for each test to match
the data using the Adjust IPR feature.
IPR:
1149
PROSPER
On the top of the screen, the Petroleum Experts 2 correlation should be selected as this
is the correlation which has been matched to the test data.
the same time. If multiple tests are matched, an average skin will be calculated which
would imply that the tests could be modelled with a single value. While this is often the
case for production wells, we are going to test to see if the skin is effectively time
dependent due to the changes in the reservoir which the injection is causing. We can
find a skin value for each test independently and if they are close, we can then carry out
the tests all together to find the average skin.
In the top left of the screen, select 'test 1' by placing a tick in box next to it:
Once it is selected, press Adjust Skin. A prompt will appear asking which test is to be
When the match has been carried out, a new skin will be calculated. Select the Do
Nothing option and pressing OK:
Examples Guide 1150
This same process should be carried out for tests 2 and 3. Doing this for all three tests
finds values of 3, 4.2 and 5.6 for the skin required to match each test. While we can use
PROSPER to match each test, we have no way of predicting how this skin is going to
change over time unless we model it in a numerical simulator. There the impact of the
cooler fluid can be taken into account and any resultant changes in fluid properties
(reductions in viscosity etc) or reservoir properties (fracture propagation etc) can be
seen.
The matching process has therefore allowed us to accurately recreate our test
conditions within the well (as the gauge pressures are now recreated by the VLP
calculation) however the changes in the injectivity of the well over time is not being
accurately captured. It is proposed, therefore, that these lift curves be linked to a
reservoir simulator which can model the changing conditions over time.
This completes the VLP/IPR matching process. Select Main from the top of the plot to
return to the main PROSPER screen.
3.1.23.5.2 Generating VLP Tables
Now that we are able to reproduce the gauge pressures of the well tests at the given
conditions, we want to generate VLP curve tables to be exported to GAP for use in an
Integrated Production Model.
VLP lift curves are used by GAP to calculate the flowing conditions of the well under any
conditions calculated by the model. Rather than calculate the pressure gradient or VLP
curve for each case, a table of values is generated and are used to interpolate between
to find the results of the model conditions. It is therefore very important that the ranges of
values that the tables are generated for cover all the possible values which may be
required in the model. If they do not, the results will be extrapolated and this can lead to
large errors in the results.
To generate VLP curves, select Calculation | VLP (Tubing Curves).
3.1.23.5.2.1 VLP Input Data
The top left hand corner of the VLP calculation screen should be filled with the required
data for generation:
1151
PROSPER
As the first node pressure is one of the variables we will be changing, the value entered
here will not be used. The water cut and GOR are not going to be used in the sensitivity
as they are always the same so should be left at 100% and 0 scf/STB. The vertical lift
correlation selected should be the one we have matched to real data.
The Rate Method should be changed to User Selected as this will allow us to define the
range of rates to use. To generate a range of values, select Generate on the top ribbon:
This will bring up the rate generation screen into which the following data can be
entered:
Examples Guide 1152
The rates should normally be entered from a low value to a value a little higher than the
maximum possible injection rate. When the values have been inserted, select Generate
and then Done.
Now that the rates have been specified, the next step is to set the ranges of variables
which are to be changed in the VLP tables. For a water injection well, these variables
should be the First Node Pressure (i.e. the wellhead pressure) and the Injected Fluid
Temperature (at the wellhead). To enter these ranges select Cases.
1153
PROSPER
The drop down menu on the left hand side can be used to select the variable and then
the range of values can be entered on the right. The values can be either inserted
manually (as was done above) or generated as was done for the liquid rates. This can
be done by selecting Generate:
This will bring up a dialogue box into which the ranges can be entered:
Select Generate to populate the range values:
Examples Guide 1154
When this has been done, select Done.
3.1.23.5.2.2 Calculating and Exporting VLPs
To calculate the VLP curves for each possible combination of the selected variables,
click Calculate:
Once the calculation has been completed, it is possible to view the curves by selecting
Plot or the tables can be exported from PROSPER be selecting Export Lift Curves.
When this is selected, a list of export options is given:
1155
PROSPER
In this case, the curves are to be exported into a format which can be imported into GAP
, however, many different options are available. When Petroleum Experts - GAP/MBAL
has been selected, click Continue:
Examples Guide 1156
The location that the file is to be saved to can be set and then saved by selecting Save.
When the file has been saved it will automatically be opened:
1157
PROSPER
This *.tpd file can now be imported into REVEAL or GAP to use in simulations.
be able to:
Examples Guide 1158
Match the VLP curve to test data for a water injection well.
the test data.
Generate lift curves which can be exported to GAP or REVEAL.
1159
PROSPER
3.1.24 Tutorial 22 - Matching a Gas Injection Well Test
So far, we have built our gas injection model on the basis of reservoir parameters,
completion data and a PVT report. The next step is to ensure that the results we are
getting from the file are representative of the actual flow rates recorded in the field.
Data from a number of well tests have now become available and it is possible to adapt
our model so that the results obtained for the same conditions match those measured in
the field. Once we have a model which can recreate the flowing conditions of the well
tests, lift curves are to be generated which can then be imported into GAP to form part
of an integrated field model which will use REVEAL to capture the conditions and
injectivity of the reservoir at each time step.
3.1.24.2Objectives
Use the well tests to see if the IPR conditions are changing over time.
Generate VLP curves for use in GAP for an injection well.
the test point.
Examples Guide 1160
c. Match the selected correlation so that the calculated gauge pressure matches
the recorded pressure.
d. Find the skin for each test so that the VLP/IPR intersection point gives the same
rate as the measured data.
e. Generate VLP tables for use within GAP.
Test Date 12/07/2011 19/08/2011 29/11/2011
(psig)
2500 2750 2450
Downstream
Temperature (
o
F)
112.9 106.4 119.8
MMscf)
0 0 0
(STB/MMscf)
0 0 0
Gauge Depth (ft) 4650 4650 4650
Gauge Pressure (psig) 2971.1 3242 2919
Reservoir Pressure
(psig)
2750 2750 2750
1161
PROSPER
field.
Test Date 12/07/2011 19/08/2011 29/11/2011
Examples Guide 1162
(psig)
2500 2750 2450
Downstream
Temperature (
o
F)
112.9 106.4 119.8
MMscf)
0 0 0
(STB/MMscf)
0 0 0
Gauge Depth (ft) 4650 4650 4650
Gauge Pressure (psig) 2971.1 3242 2919
Reservoir Pressure
(psig)
2750 2750 2750
1163
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1164
When the prompt is shown, select OK. This will transfer the first set of test data into the
1165
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1166
correlations and then select Plot to see how close each correlation comes to the
measured data point:
As this is a gas injection well, the only phase present within the system is gas and as it
is completely dry (i.e. both the CGR and WGR are zero) the fluid is in a single phase. As
the multi-phase correlations are used to estimate the hold-up (the ratio of the liquid to
the total fluid) they will all predict the same pressure drop as the hold-up is always going
to be zero. This can be see in the plot above.
screen will appear so that the same process can be carried out for the next test. Select
steps as shown above should be performed to see the plot:
1167
PROSPER
Again, every correlation predicts the same pressure drop.
Examples Guide 1168
The objective of using the correlation comparison in the case of single phase fluids is
not to compare the different correlations (as there is no difference to compare) but
rather to see if the measured data is close to the calculated data. Based upon these
three test, therefore, we can say the pressure drop calculation is consistently over
estimating the pressure drop in the well but only by a very small amount each time.
As mentioned previously, as a single phase fluid is being modelled, any correlation can
be used in the pressure drop calculations as they all predict the same results. We have
to select a correlation to match to the test data and in this case, Petroleum Experts 2
will be used. This correlation will now be matched so that it recreates each point exactly.
This can be done by selecting Match VLP:
1169
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1170
during each test.
test.
1171
PROSPER
to be calculated:
rates:
Examples Guide 1172
To see the intersection points in more detail, the plot can be zoomed in on by either
dragging a box around the points using the left mouse button or by entering the x and y
axis values using Scales.
calculated intersection points (represented by the blue squares) do not match up. For a
gas injection well, we could assume that the conditions around the well bore are
changing (due to the dry colder gas which is being injected cooling the near wellbore
region or scaling occurring around the well) and therefore we will try to find the skin
required for each test to match the data using the Adjust IPR feature.
IPR:
This will bring up the Adjust IPR screen:
1173
PROSPER
On the top of the screen, the Petroleum Experts 2 correlation should be selected as this
is the correlation which has been matched to the test data.
the same time. If multiple tests are matched, an average skin will be calculated which
would imply that the tests could be modelled with a single value. While this is often the
case for production wells, we are going to test to see if the skin is effectively time
dependent due to the changes in the reservoir which the injection is causing. We can
find a skin value for each test independently and if they are close, we can then carry out
the tests all together to find the average skin.
In the top left of the screen, select 'test 1' by placing a tick in box next to it:
Once it is selected, press Adjust Skin. A prompt will appear asking which test is to be
Examples Guide 1174
When the match has been carried out, a new skin will be calculated. Select the Do
Nothing option and pressing OK:
This same process should be carried out for tests 2 and 3. Doing this for all three tests
finds values of 2, 3.2 and 4.6 for the skin required to match each test. While we can use
PROSPER to match each test, we have no way of predicting how this skin is going to
change over time unless we model it in a numerical simulator. There the impact of the
dry, cooler fluid can be taken into account and any resultant changes in fluid properties
or reservoir properties (scaling etc) can be seen.
The matching process has therefore allowed us to accurately recreate our test
conditions within the well (as the gauge pressures are now recreated by the VLP
calculation) however the changes in the injectivity of the well over time is not being
accurately captured. It is proposed, therefore, that these lift curves be linked to a
reservoir simulator which can model the changing conditions over time.
This completes the VLP/IPR matching process. Select Main from the top of the plot to
return to the main PROSPER screen.
Now that we are able to reproduce the gauge pressures of the well tests at the given
conditions, we want to generate VLP curve tables to be exported to GAP for use in an
1175
PROSPER
As the first node pressure, WGR and CGR are all variables we will be changing, the
value entered here will not be used. The vertical lift correlation selected should be the
one we have matched to real data.
range of rates to use. To generate a range of values, select Generate on the top ribbon.
entered:
Examples Guide 1176
and then Done.
which are to be changed in the VLP tables. For a water injection well, these variables
should be the First Node Pressure (i.e. the wellhead pressure) and the Injected Fluid
Temperature (at the wellhead). To enter these ranges select Cases.
1177
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1178
The CGR and WGR values can be entered either manually or using the Generate
feature shown above:
1179
PROSPER
click Calculate:
Examples Guide 1180
1181
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1182
be able to:
1183
PROSPER
Match the VLP curve to test data for a gas injection well.
the test data.
Generate Lift Curves which can be exported to GAP or REVEAL.
Examples Guide 1184
3.1.25 Tutorial 23 - Designing a Continuous Gas Lift System
The oil well in the Logie field has been now producing for a number of years. Recently,
the water cut has increased and this, along with a drop in the reservoir pressure, has
lead to the well producing dropping significantly. It has been estimated that within three
months, the well will stop producing all together and will die.
Rather than allow the well to die, management would like a new gas lift system to be
designed and a sensitivity to be run to see what the optimum injection rate would be for
the well. It is assumed that the well will continue to produce at a well head pressure of
500 psig (due to a back pressure from other wells) but the water cut to be used during
the design is now 80%.
3.1.25.2Objectives
Update the model to consider the current operating conditions.
Learn how to design a continuous gas lifted system in PROSPER.
Learn how to transfer a gas lift design to the main model to be used in all
subsequent calculations.
Run a sensitivity study on the system calculation to estimate the optimum
injection rate for the given conditions.
As the base PROSPER file has already been created the core model will not be
dramatically altered.
a. Enable the gas lifted well option.
1185
PROSPER
b. Update the IPR and equipment sections to represent the current flowing
conditions in the well.
c. Carry out a gas lift design for the current design conditions.
d. Transfer the calculated valve depths in the System | Gas Lift Data section.
e. Run a sensitivity to find the optimum injection rate for the newly designed system.
3.1.25.4.1 Gas Lift Options
The following gas lift options should be used in the design:
Artificial Lift Method Gas Lift (Continuous)
Artificial Lift Type Friction Loss in Annulus
The gas lift gas to be injected is detailed below:
Gas Lift Gas Gravity 0.7 Specific Gravity
% H
2
S 0%
% N
2
0%
% CO
2
0%
The reservoir conditions have changed to the following conditions:
Water Cut 80%
The following data discribes the casing and annulus within the well:
Type
MD
(ft)
Tubing
Inside
Tubing
Inside
Tubing
Outside
Tubing
Outside
Casing
Inside
Casing
Inside
Rate
Multipli
Examples Guide 1186
Diamet
er
(Inche
s)
Roughn
ess
(Inches)
Diamete
r
(Inches)
Roughne
ss
(Inches)
Diamete
r
(Inches)
Roughne
ss
(Inches)
er
X-mas
Tree
600 1
Tubing 1000 4.052 0.0006 4.8 0.0006 6.4 0.0006 1
SSSV 3.72 1
Tubing 9000 4.052 0.0006 4.8 0.0006 6.4 0.0006 1
Casing 9275 6.4 0.0006 1
3.1.25.4.4 Gas Lift Design Criteria
The following criteria has been set for the gas lift design:
Input Parameters:
Design Rate Method Calculated From Max Production
Maximum Liquid Rate 10000 STB/day
Maximum Gas Available 4 MMscf/day
Maximum Gas During Unloading 4 MMscf/day
Flowing Top Node Pressure 250 psig
Unloading Top Node Pressure 250 psig
Operating Injection Pressure 1500 psig
Kick Off Injection Pressure 1500 psig
Desired dP Across Valve 100 psi
Maximum Depth of Injection 8500 ft
Water Cut 80%
Minimum Spacing 250 ft
Static Gradient of Load Fluid 0.43 psi/ft
Minimum Transfer dP 25%
Safety For Closure of Last
Unloading Valve
0 psi
1187
PROSPER
Minimum CHP Decrease Per Valve 50 psi
Design Options:
Valve Type Casing Sensitive
Valve Setting All Valves PVo = gas Pressure
Injection Point Injection Point is ORIFICE
Dome Pressure Correction
Above 1200 psig
Yes
Valve Spacing Procedure Normal
Check Rate Conformance
With IPR
Yes
Vertical Lift Correlation Petroleum Experts 2 (matched)
Surface Pipe Correlation Beggs and Brill
Use IPR For Unloading Yes
Orifice Sizing On Calculated dP @ Orifice
Valve Selection:
Manufacturer Camco
Valve Type R-20
Valve Spec Normal
3.1.25.5.1 Activating Gas Lift Option
In order to design a gas lifted well, the gas lift option should be enabled in the Options |
Options screen:
Examples Guide 1188
For this design, select Gas Lift (Continuous) and Friction Loss in Annulus from the
drop down menus. This means that the frictional pressure drop experienced by the gas
lift gas as it travels down the annulus will be considered.
3.1.25.5.2 Defining the Annulus
As the pressure drop experienced by the gas as it travels down the annulus is to be
considered, we must first define the annulus in our down-hole equipment section. The
equipment data screen can be displayed by selecting System | Equipment (Tubing
etc) from the ribbon at the top of the main screen:
1189
PROSPER
To enter the Downhole Equipment screen, select the button to the left of Downhole
Once the annulus has been defined, select Done to return to the Equipment Screen
and then Done to return to the main screen.
3.1.25.5.3 Updating the Reservoir Conditions
The current reservoir conditions (at which the design is to be carried out) have changed
from was previously inserted into PROSPER. These conditions should therefore be
updated in the System | Inflow Performance screen:
Examples Guide 1190
When the water cut and reservoir pressure have been updated, select Plot to see the
new IPR:
1191
PROSPER
Close the plot and then select Done to return to the main screen.
3.1.25.5.4 Designing a Gas Lifted System
Before the design is carried out, the gas lift gas properties should be set. This can be
done in the System | Gas Lift Data screen:
Examples Guide 1192
When this data has been inserted, select Done to return to the main screen.
3.1.25.5.4.1 Entering the Design Criteria
To enter the design criteria to be used for this well, select Design | Gas | New Well:
Enter the design data as shown above. To select the required valve in the right hand
side of the screen.
For more information on the options selected please refer to the Gas Lift Design
section of this User Guide.
To proceed to the next screen, select Next.
3.1.25.5.4.2 Finding the Design Rate
The first step of the design process is to find the design rate to be used during the
design. This can be done by selecting Get Rate:
1193
PROSPER
This will calculate the gas lift performance curve of produced oil rate against gas
injection rate. The Design Rate will be calculated from this plot on the basis of the
constraints placed in the previous screen. In this case, the maximum gas lift gas
available is our constraining factor and so the design rate is 4 MMscf/day and this is
estimated to produce 1484.4 STB/day of oil.
Examples Guide 1194
To see the performance curve, select Plot:
Exit the plot by selecting Finish.
3.1.25.5.4.3 Designing the Valve Depths
With the design rate now found, the valve depths can now be calculated which will
unload the well for the given conditions. This can be done by selecting Design:
1195
PROSPER
The valve depths calculated can be seen in the screen above and the results are also
shown on the screen. To see a plot of the completed design, select Plot:
Examples Guide 1196
Selecting Finish will exit the plot.

3.1.25.5.4.4 Results of Gas Lift Design
Detailed results of the valve placements and operating conditions can be seen by
selecting Results:
This will bring up the results screen.
1197
PROSPER
Using the scroll bar at the bottom left of the screen, the calculated port sizes for each
valve and the orifice can be seen.
It is also possible to calculate the Dome Pressure and Test Rack Opening Pressure of
each valve by selecting Calculate.
3.1.25.5.4.5 Checking the Design Stability
The stability of a gas lifted well can be analysed on the basis of the work by Harald
Asheim ( 'Criteria for Gas-Lift Stability'). This proposes two different criteria to assess
the stability; the Inflow Response Criterion and the Pressure-Depletion Response
Criterion. In order for the design to be considered stable, either of the criteria's values
should be greater than one.
Select Stability on the 'Results' screen to see the stability values for the present design:
Examples Guide 1198
While the first criterion value is very low, the second value is greater than 1 and
therefore the design can be considered to stable.
Select Done to return to the results screen and then Main to return to the main
PROSPER screen.
1199
PROSPER
3.1.25.5.5 Transferring Gas Lift Design
Now that the design has been completed, it is important to transfer this data to the
model. This can be done in the System | Gas Lift Data screen:
The Gas Lift Method should be changed to Valve Depths Specified in the bottom left
hand corner of the screen and then in order to transfer the valve depths from the design,
select Transfer:
This will bring up the option of transferring the data from either the Quicklook screen or
the Gas Lift Design screen. Select From Gas Lift Design and then when prompted, the
From New GasLift Design option:
Examples Guide 1200
Selecting OK will transfer the valves:
Finally, the casing pressure and dP across the valve should also be added.
1201
PROSPER
When this has been done, the gas lift design has been completed. Press Done to return
to the main screen.
(VLP + IPR).

screen:
Examples Guide 1202
Select Cases to enter the sensitivity variables. Gas lift injection rate can be selected
1203
PROSPER
Rate:
Examples Guide 1204
This therefore shows that the optimum injection rate at these conditions is
approximately 5 MMscf/day. Select Finish and then Done to return to the main screen.
be able to:
Design a Continuous Gas Lifted System.
1205
PROSPER
Transfer the valves from a Gas Lift Design to the main model.
Carry out a sensitivity to see how the production rate varies with different gas
lift injection rates.
Examples Guide 1206
3.1.26 Tutorial 24 - Modelling an Intermitent Gas Lifted Well
lead to the well being unable to produce. One possible solution is to install an
intermittent gas lifted system to help lift the fluid and a feasibility study is to be carried
out.
As part of this feasibility study, management would like to use the previously built
PROSPER file to find the required valve depths to unload the well and also the likely
production rate for a given set of conditions. For the design, it has been assumed that
the well will produce at 80% and that the reservoir pressure is 2000 psig.
3.1.26.2Objectives
Learn how to design the valve depths for an intermittent gas lifted system in
PROSPER.
Calculate the production rate from the well for a given set of conditions.
a. Enable the intermittent gas lifted well option.
1207
PROSPER
c. Carry out a Constant Surface Closing Pressure valve depth design for the current
design conditions.
d. Calculate the production rate using the Intermittent Gas Lift calculation.
Artificial Lift Method Gas Lift (Intermittent)
Artificial Lift Type Gas Lift
Water Cut 80%
Type
MD
(ft)
Tubing
Inside
Diamet
er
(Inches
)
Tubing
Inside
Roughne
ss
(Inches)
Tubing
Outsid
e
Diamet
er
(Inches
)
Tubing
Outside
Roughne
ss
(Inches)
Casing
Inside
Diamet
er
(Inches
)
Casing
Inside
Roughne
ss
(Inches)
Rate
Multipli
er
X-mas
Tree
600 1
Tubing 1000 4.052 0.0006 4.8 0.0006 6.4 0.0006 1
Examples Guide 1208
SSSV 3.72 1
Tubing 9000 4.052 0.0006 4.8 0.0006 6.4 0.0006 1
Casing 9275 6.4 0.0006 1
Input Parameters:
Surface Injection
Pressure
1500 psig
Injection Depth unknown
Gaslift Gas Gravity 0.68
Well Head Pressure 250 psig
Valve Port Size 80 64ths Inch
Water Cut 80%
Tubing Liquid level 4500 feet
Valve Depth Options:
Valve Depth Method Constant Surface Closing Pressure
Surface Injection
Pressure
1500 psig
Unloading Fluid
Gradient
0.46 psi/ft
Spacing Factor 0.1 psi/ft
Surface Closing
Pressure
800 psig
Maximum Depth of
Injection
7500 ft
1209
PROSPER
In order to design an intermittent gas lifted well, the gas lift option should be enabled in
the Options | Options screen:
For this design, select Coiled Tubing Gas Lift (Intermittent) and Gaslift from the drop
down menus.
from was previously inserted into PROSPER. The reservoir pressure has dropped to
2000 psig and the water cut has increased to 80%. These conditions should therefore
be updated in the System | Inflow Performance screen:
Examples Guide 1210
new IPR:
1211
PROSPER
3.1.26.5.3 Updating the Downhole Equipment
In order to design an intermittent gas lifted system, information on the well's annulus is
required. To access the downhole equipment section, select System | Equipment
(Tubing etc) and then select the button to the left of Downhole Equipment:
Examples Guide 1212
In the down-hole equipment screen, add the known annulus details as shown below:
When this has been inserted, select Main to return to the main PROSPER screen.
It is possible to find the maximum depth of injection for an intermittent gas lifted well
using either the Constant Surface Closing Pressure or Optiflow Design Procedure
methods. In this example, the Constant Surface Closing Pressure method will be used.
To carry out a calculation of the rate which can be produced form an intermittent gas
lifted well, select Design | Intermittent Gas Lift:
1213
PROSPER
At this stage, the depth of injection is not known and therefore should be estimated by
finding the optimum valve depths for the given conditions. This can be done by selecting
Valves | Constant Surface Closing Pressure.
3.1.26.5.4.1 Constant Surface Closing Pressure Method
The Constant Surface Closing Pressure method can be used to find the valve depths
required to unload an intermittent gas lifted well.
First, insert the design conditions as shown below:
Select Calculate and the valve depths will be found. The design finds that the maximum
depth of injection possible for these conditions is 7430 feet. This can now be used to
Examples Guide 1214
find the production rate for the design conditions.
3.1.26.5.5 Calculating the Rate from an Intermittent Gas Lifted Well
Now that the injection depth has been found, it can be included in our field conditions to
find the rate at which the well will flow. Enter the flow conditions as shown below:
Select Calculate to find the production rate.
1215
PROSPER
Under the current conditions, the well will flow at 1536 STB/day and require 52 Mscf/day
of gas to be injected.
Select Done to return to the main screen and File | Save As... to save the file.
be able to:
Built an Intermittent Gas Lifted System.
Find the valve depths for an Intermittent Gas Lifted System.
Calculate the production rate for a given set of conditions for an Intermittent
Gas Lifted System.
Examples Guide 1216
3.1.27 Tutorial 25 - Designing a Coiled Tubing Gas Lift System
The oil well in the Logie field has now been producing for a number of years. Recently,
lead to the well production dropping significantly. It has been estimated that within three
Rather than allow the well to die, management would like a new Coiled Tubing Gas Lift
system to be designed and a sensitivity to be run to see what the optimum injection rate
would be for the well. It is assumed that the well will continue to produce at a well head
pressure of 250 psig (due to a back pressure from other wells) but the water cut to be
used during the design is now 80%.
3.1.27.2Objectives
Learn how to design a coiled tubing gas lifted system in PROSPER.
Learn how to transfer a coiled tubing gas lift design to the main model to be used
in all subsequent calculations.
1217
PROSPER
c. Carry out a coiled tubing gas lift design for the current design conditions.
d. Transfer the calculated injection depth to the System | Gas Lift Data section.
e. Run a sensitivity to find the optimum injection rate for the newly designed system.
Artificial Lift Method Coiled Tubing Gas Lift
Artificial Lift Type No Friction Loss in Coiled Tubing
% H
2
S 0%
% N
2
0%
% CO
2
0%
Water Cut 80%
Input Parameters:
Examples Guide 1218
Design Rate Method Calculated From Max Production
Maximum Liquid Rate 25000 STB/day
Maximum Gas Available 5 MMscf/day
Maximum Gas During
Unloading
5 MMscf/day
Flowing Top Node
Pressure
250 psig
Unloading Top Node
Pressure
250 psig
Operating Injection
Pressure
2000 psig
Kick Off Injection
Pressure
2000 psig
Desired dP Across Valve 50 psi
Maximum Depth of
Injection
8500 ft
Water Cut 80%
Static Gradient of Load
Fluid
0.46 psi/ft
Design Options:
Check Rate
Conformance With IPR
Yes
Use IPR For Unloading Yes
Orifice Sizing On Calculated dP @ Orifice
Surface Pipe Correlation Beggs and Brill
1219
PROSPER
In order to design a coiled tubing gas lifted well, the gas lift option should be enabled in
For this design, select Coiled Tubing Gas Lift and No Friction Loss in Coiled Tubing
from the drop down menus.
Examples Guide 1220
new IPR:
1221
PROSPER
Before the design is carried out, the gas lift gas properties and the coiled tubing down
which it is to travel should be set. This can be done in the System | Gas Lift Data
screen:
Examples Guide 1222
3.1.27.5.3.1 Entering the Design Criteria
To enter the design criteria to be used for this well, select Design | Coiled Tubing Gas
Lift:
Enter the design data as shown above. To select the required valve in the right hand
side of the screen.
For more information on the options selected please refer to the Coiled Tubing Gas Lift
Design section of this User Guide.
To proceed to the next screen, select Next.
3.1.27.5.3.2 Finding the Design Rate
The first step of the design process is to find the design rate to be used during the
design. This can be done by selecting Get Rate:
1223
PROSPER
This will calculate the gas lift performance curve of produced oil rate against gas
injection rate. The Design Rate will be calculated from this plot on the basis of the
constraints placed in the previous screen. In this case, the maximum gas lift gas
available is our constraining factor and so the design rate is 5 MMscf/day and this is
estimated to produce 1397.9 STB/day of oil.
To see the performance curve, select Plot:
Exit the plot by selecting Finish.
3.1.27.5.3.3 Designing the Valve Depths
With the design rate now found, the injection depths can now be calculated which will
unload the well for the given conditions. This can be done by selecting Design:
Examples Guide 1224
The injection depths calculated can be seen in the screen above and the results are
also shown on the screen. The current design shows that the injection depth should be
set to 4959 feet. To see a plot of the completed design, select Plot:
1225
PROSPER
In this case, the first injection depth is the only injection depth so the unloading of the
well will be done in one go.
Selecting Finish will exit the plot.
3.1.27.5.4 Transferring Gas Lift Design
Now that the design has been completed, it is important to transfer this data to the
model. This can be done in the System | Gas Lift Data screen:
Examples Guide 1226
The Gas Lift Method should be changed to Specified Injection Depth in the bottom left
hand corner of the screen and the design depth, injection pressure and dP across the
valve should be manually copied across.
When this has been done, the gas lift design has been completed. Press Done to return
to the main screen.
(VLP + IPR).

pressure is set to 250 psig and the water cut and GOR should be set to 80% and 800
scf/STB respectfully. This data should therefore be added to the top left hand corner of
the screen:
1227
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1228
Rate:
1229
PROSPER
This therefore shows that the optimum injection rate at these conditions is
approximately 5 MMscf/day. Select Finish and then Done to return to the main screen.
be able to:
Design a Coiled Tubing Gas Lifted System.
Transfer the injection depth from a Gas Lift Design to the main model.
Examples Guide 1230
3.1.28 Tutorial 26 - Designing an ESP Lifted System
lead to the well production dropping significantly. It has been estimated that within three
Rather than allow the well to die, management would like a new Electrical Submersible
Pump (ESP) system to be designed. It is assumed that the well will continue to produce
at a well head pressure of 250 psig (due to a back pressure from other wells) but the
water cut to be used during the design is now 80%. Although the design rate is 80%, the
design should be capable of handling water cuts ranging from 60% to 90%.
3.1.28.2Objectives
Learn how to design an ESP lifted system in PROSPER.
Run a sensitivity study on the system calculation to see how the pump will
operate with water cuts between 60% and 90% at different operating
frequencies.
a. Enable the ESP lifted well option.
1231
PROSPER
c. Carry out an ESP design for the current design conditions.
d. Run a sensitivity to ensure that the operating points when the water cut is
between 60% and 90% fall within the operating range of the selected pump.
3.1.28.4.1 ESP Options
The following artificial lift options should be used in the design:
Artificial Lift Method Electrical Submersible Pump
Artificial Lift Type Model Produced Oil and Gas in Annulus
For the calculation of the liquid level, it is assumed that the casing head pressure will be
kept at the same pressure as the wellhead (250 psig).
Water Cut 80%
The following data describes the casing and annulus within the well:
Type
MD
(ft)
Tubing
Inside
Diamet
er
(Inches
)
Tubing
Inside
Roughne
ss
(Inches)
Tubing
Outside
Diamet
er
(Inches)
Tubing
Outside
Roughne
ss
(Inches)
Casing
Inside
Diamet
er
(Inches
)
Casing
Inside
Roughne
ss
(Inches)
Rate
Multipli
er
X-mas
Tree
600 1
Tubing 1000 4.052 0.0006 4.8 0.0006 6.4 0.0006 1
SSSV 3.72 1
Tubing 9000 4.052 0.0006 4.8 0.0006 6.4 0.0006 1
Examples Guide 1232
Casing 9275 6.4 0.0006 1
3.1.28.4.4 ESP Design Criteria
The following criteria has been set for the ESP design:
Input Parameters:
Pump Depth (Measured) 8500 ft
Operating Frequency 60 Hz
Maximum OD 6 inches
Length of Cable 9000 ft
Separator Efficiency 0
Design Rate 8000 STB/day
Water Cut 80%
Top Node Pressure 250 psig
Motor Safety Power
Margin
0
Pump Wear Factor 0
Vertical Lift Correlation Petroleum Experts 2
(matched)
3.1.28.5.1 Activating ESP Option
In order to design an ESP lifted well, the electrical submersible pump option should be
enabled in the Options | Options screen:
1233
PROSPER
For this design, select Electrical Submersible Pump and Model Produced Oil and
Gas in Annulus from the drop down menus. This means that the liquid level in the
annulus will be calculated as well as the produced fluid in the tubing.
As the liquid level in the annulus is to be considered, we must first define the annulus in
our down-hole equipment section. The equipment data screen can be displayed by
selecting System | Equipment (Tubing etc) from the ribbon at the top of the main
screen:
Examples Guide 1234
1235
PROSPER
new IPR:
Examples Guide 1236
3.1.28.5.4 Designing an ESP lifted System
Designing an ESP lifted system is split into two main sections:
1. Calculate - This section is used to calculate the flowing conditions of the test and the
pump duty required to meet the design.
2. Design - This section is used to select a pump which can meet the required
specifications calculated in the previous section.
To start the design process, select Design | Electrical Submersible Pump:
The following design input data is required:
1237
PROSPER
Be sure to select the correlation which has previously been matched to test data. This
will allow us to be more sure that the design conditions being calculated are
representative of the actual flowing conditions.
When the data has been inserted, select Calculate to continue the design.
3.1.28.5.4.1 ESP Calculation
The ESP Calculation screen is used to calculate the pump duty required to meet the
design conditions. This is done by first calculating a gradient downwards from the
wellhead pressure (to obtain the pump discharge pressure) and also a gradient from the
bottom hole pressure obtained from the IPR to the pump depth (to get the pump intake
pressure). The difference between these two pressures is the pressure rise that the
pump will be required to provide. Based upon the average conditions in the pump, this
can be transformed into a head required using the average fluid density in the pump.
To carry out the calculations, select Calculate:
Examples Guide 1238
After the calculation is completed, it is possible to see if a gas separator should be
installed by viewing the Dunbar plot. This can be done by selecting Sensitivity:
1239
PROSPER
As the design point is above the red line, according to the Dunbar criteria, no gas
separator is required.
Select Finish to exit the plot and then Done to return to the main design screen.
3.1.28.5.4.2 ESP Design
Now that the design conditions have bee calculated, the next step is to find a pump
which meets these requirements. The design screen can be accessed by selecting
Design:
Examples Guide 1240
The results from the calculation are shown at the top of the screen and these include the
Head Required and Average Downhole Rate which any selected pump will be required
to handle.
A pump can be selected from the Select Pump drop down menu. The criteria to select
a pump will vary depending upon the objective of the design. In this case, we wish to find
a pump which operates very near to its maximum efficiency at the design conditions.
From the pump list, select the Centrilift GC10000. We can see that it is 5.13 inches in
diameter (which is less than our maximum of 6 inches) and can handle a rate of 4400-
12000 rb/day. As the average downhole rate of our design is 9277.84 rb/day, this pump
can handle the design conditions and requires 113 stages in which to generate the
head. When the pump is selected, press Plot to see where the operating point is with
respect to the pump performance curves:
1241
PROSPER
As we can see, the operating point is very close to the Best Efficiency Line and
therefore this pump meets our design criteria.
A motor and cable also require to be selected which can meet the power requirements
of the pump:
Examples Guide 1242
The results of the design can be seen at the bottom of the screen once the different
equipment have been selected.
Select Main to complete the design and return to the main PROSPER screen.
3.1.28.5.5 Transferring ESP to Model
After a design has been completed, the selected pump, motor and cable will be
automatically transferred to the System | Electrical Submersible Pump screen:
1243
PROSPER
As we are also modelling the liquid level within the annulus, the Liquid Level should be
set to Calculated and the Casing Head Pressure changed to 250 psig. When this has
been done, select Done and now any calculation performed will include the impact of
the selected pump.
Now that the ESP has been included in the PROSPER file, the next step is to calculate
system point at which the well will flow. In this case, the objective is to see how the
production rate will change when the water cut changes and ensure that the selected
pump will be operating within its operating envelope.
(VLP + IPR).

pressure is set to 250 psig and GOR is left as 800 scf/STB. As the water cut is to be
varied, the value entered on this screen will not be used in the calculation. This data
should therefore be added to the top left hand corner of the screen:
Examples Guide 1244
Select Cases to enter the sensitivity variables. To clear previously entered data, select
Reset. Operating Frequency and Water Cut can be selected from the drop down lists
on the left hand side and then the values to be used can be entered on the right hand
side:
1245
PROSPER
This will run the System Calculation for each different water cut and pump frequency
combination. To see where the operating points of these calculations fall on the pump
performance curve, select Plot | Pump Plot:
Examples Guide 1246
For our selected pump, all of the operating points calculated between 60% and 90%
water cut fall within the operating envelope of the pump. This means that the pump can
perform over the entire desired range of conditions. To exit the plot select Finish.
To see how the production rate varies with water cut for the different operating
freqencies, select Sensitivity Plot.
To view the oil rate against water cut, select Variables from the top bar and then Oil
Rate for the Y axis and Water Cut for the X axis:
1247
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1248
This shows, as expected, that the higher the water cut, the lower the production rate
which is obtained. Increasing the speed of the pump will act to increase the head
provided and hence more oil is produced for any given water cut. Select Finish and
then Done to return to the main screen.
be able to:
Design an ESP Lifted System.
Include an ESP in the main model.
Carry out a sensitivity to see if the operating points calculated for different
water cuts fall within the operating envelope of the selected pump.
1249
PROSPER
3.1.29 Tutorial 27 - Designing an HSP Lifted System
Rather than allow the well to die, management would like a new Hydraulic Submersible
Pump (HSP) or Hydraulic Drive Downhole Pump system to be designed. It is assumed
that the well will now produce at a well head pressure of 150 psig (due to a back
pressure from other wells) but the water cut to be used during the design is now 40%.
Although the design rate is 40%, the design should be capable of handling water cuts
ranging from 30% to 80%.
3.1.29.2Objectives
Learn how to design an HSP lifted system in PROSPER.
operate with water cuts between 30% and 80% at different pump speeds.
a. Enable the HSP lifted well option.
Examples Guide 1250
c. Carry out an HSP design for the current design conditions.
d. Run a sensitivity to see the impact of increasing the water cut from 30% to 80%
for different pump speeds.
3.1.29.4.1 HSP Options
Artificial Lift Method Hydraulic Downhole Drive Pump
Artificial Lift Type Commingled Annular Supply
Type
MD
(ft)
Tubing
Inside
Diamet
er
(Inches
)
Tubing
Inside
Roughne
ss
(Inches)
Tubing
Outside
Diamet
er
(Inches
)
Tubing
Outside
Roughne
ss
(Inches)
Casing
Inside
Diamet
er
(Inches
)
Casing
Inside
Roughn
ess
(Inches)
Rate
Multipli
er
X-mas
Tree
600 1
Tubing 1000 4.052 0.0006 4.8 0.0006 6.8 0.0006 1
SSSV 3.72 1
Tubing 9000 4.052 0.0006 4.8 0.0006 6.8 0.0006 1
Casing 9275 6.4 0.0006 1
In this well, below 9000 feet, a liner has been inserted and hence the casing diameter is
smaller below this depth than it is above.
1251
PROSPER
Water Cut 40%
3.1.29.4.4 HSP Design Criteria
The following criteria has been set for the HSP design:
Input Parameters:
Pump Maximum Allowable
OD
6.8 inches
Turbine Maximum
Allowable OD
6.8 inches
Pump Speed 7500 rpm
Water Cut 40%
% Power Fluid of Resevoir
Fluid
100%
Pump Wear Factor 0
3.1.29.5.1 Activating HSP Option
In order to design an HSP lifted well, the hydraulic submersible pump option should be
Examples Guide 1252
For this design, select Hydraulic Drive Downhole Pump and Commingled Annular
Supply from the drop down menus. This means that the power fluid will travel down the
annulus to the turbine before commingling with the discharge of the pump and this
commingled fluid will be produced up the tubing.
3.1.29.5.2 Power Fluid Properties
In order to power the HSP, a power fluid is pumped down to a turbine and this fluid is
then mixed with the discharge of the pump to be produced to surface. The properties of
this power fluid are therefore required to be to known and can be entered by selecting
PVT | Input Data:
1253
PROSPER
Enter the power fluid type as Water and the salinity as 10000ppm.
When this has been entered, select Done to return to the main screen.
As the power fluid will travel down the annulus to reach the turbine, we must define the
annulus in our down-hole equipment section. The equipment data screen can be
displayed by selecting System | Equipment (Tubing etc) from the ribbon at the top of
the main screen:
Examples Guide 1254
This well has a liner placed below 9000 feet and hence the casing above this depth is
actually larger than the 'casing' below it as the casing represents the liner.
Once the annulus has been defined, select Main to return to the main screen.
1255
PROSPER
new IPR:
Examples Guide 1256
3.1.29.5.5 Designing an HSP lifted System
Designing an HSP lifted system is split into two main sections:
2. Design - This section is used to select a pump and turbine which can meet the
required specifications calculated in the previous section.
To start the design process, select Design | Hydraulic Submersible Pump:
1257
PROSPER
representative of the actual flowing conditions. The % Power Fluid of Reservoir Fluid
will control the ratio of the produced fluid to power fluid which is used during the design
process. 100% means that the same volume of each will be used.
3.1.29.5.5.1 HSP Calculation
The HSP Calculation screen is used to calculate the pump duty required to meet the
design conditions. This is done by first calculating a gradient downwards from the
wellhead pressure (to obtain the pump discharge pressure) and also a gradient from the
bottom hole pressure obtained from the IPR to the pump depth (to get the pump intake
pressure). The difference between these two pressures is the pressure rise that the
pump will be required to provide. Based upon the average conditions in the pump, this
can be transformed into a head required using the average fluid density in the pump.
Examples Guide 1258
After the calculation is completed, the calculated results are displayed on the screen.
Select Done to return to the main design screen.
3.1.29.5.5.2 HSP Design
Now that the design conditions have been calculated, the next step is to find a pump
Design:
1259
PROSPER
to handle.
A pump can be selected from the Pump drop down menu. The criteria to select a pump
will vary depending upon the objective of the design. In this case, we wish to find a pump
which operates very near to its maximum efficiency at the design conditions.
From the pump list, select the CLYDE UNION TP115AH. Our design speed is 7500
rpm which fits inside the given range of 4250-12325 rpm. This pump can handle the
design conditions and requires 30 stages in which to generate the head. When the
pump is selected, press Pump Plot to see where the operating point is with respect to
the pump performance curves:
Examples Guide 1260
As we can see, the operating point is very close to the Best Efficiency Line and
therefore this pump meets our design criteria.
A turbine can also selected from the drop down menu and requires to be able to meet
the power requirement while operating at the design speed.
Select the Clyde Union T68 - A turbine. This can be seen to be able to handle between
3750-15450 bbl/day of fluid which means our design rate will fall within this range. We
require 26 stages to generate the required power and the power fluid pressure at the
surface is required to be 2043.71 psig:
1261
PROSPER
To see the operating point of the selected turbine, select Turbine Plot at the top of the
screen:
Examples Guide 1262
Again, our turbine is operating near to its maximum efficiency and therefore we can be
happy with the selection.
Note: It is the responsibility of the engineer to ensure that the pump and turbine selected
are compatible in reality as PROSPER will allow selection based upon the whether the
head and power requirements can be met.
Exit the plot and the select Main to complete the design and return to the main
PROSPER screen.
3.1.29.5.6 Transferring HSP to Model
After a design has been completed, the selected pump and turbine cable will be
automatically transferred to the System | Hydraulic Submersible Pump screen:
1263
PROSPER
All of the other design parameters are also transferred across.
When this data has been checked, select Done.
Now that the HSP has been included in the PROSPER file, the next step is to calculate
(VLP + IPR).

Examples Guide 1264
Reset. Pump Speed and Water Cut can be selected from the drop down lists on the left
hand side and then the values to be used can be entered on the right hand side:
1265
PROSPER
This will run the System Calculation for each different water cut and pump speed
combination. To see how the production rate varies with water cut for the different
speeds, select Sensitivity Plot.
Examples Guide 1266
which is obtained. Increasing the speed of the pump will act to increase the head
provided and hence more oil is produced for any given water cut.
However, as the pump speed increases, the power fluid required will also increase. This
can be seen by selecting Power Fluid Rate from the Variables screen:
1267
PROSPER
As the water cut of the produced fluid increases, the additional energy required to be
supplied by the pump increases and so does the power fluid rate.
be able to:
Design an HSP Lifted System.
Include an HSP in the main model.
Carry out a sensitivity to see the impact of pump speed and water cut on the
production rate of the well.
Examples Guide 1268
3.1.30 Tutorial 28 - Designing a Sucker Rod Pump System
A new oil field, the Mill field, has been found onshore, however, due to a very low
productivity index, the well is going to have artificial lift installed to help it produce. A
study is to be carried out into the most efficient Sucker Rod Pump system which could
be installed for the current conditions.
Management would like a new PROSPER file to be created and then using this new file,
the performance of a sucker rod pump is to be evaluated. A study of the impact of using
different rods is also required so that this can form the basis of the feasibility study.
3.1.30.2Objectives
Create a new PROSPER file based upon the Mill well conditions.
Learn how to design a Sucker Rod Pump system in PROSPER.
Run a sensitivity study on the impact of using different rods in the design.
As the sucker rod pump is a positive displacement pump, the traditional approach of
nodal analysis does not apply in the same way. While data relating to the PVT, IPR and
VLP are still entered, the solution rate is not found through nodal analysis but rather the
implementation of the wave equation.
a. Set up the new well to have a Sucker Rod Pump.
b. Insert the well fluid's PVT properties and match it to test data.
c. Enter the equipment data which will be used for the Sucker Rod Pump design.
d. Insert the IPR data. This will be used to find the bottom-hole pressure which
would exist for our design rate.
e. Carry out a Sucker Rod Pump design and then a sensitivity study to see the
impact of using different rods in the design.
1269
PROSPER
3.1.30.4.1 SRP Options
Artificial Lift Method Sucker Rod Pump
3.1.30.4.2 PVT Data
Below is the basic PVT data which has been received from the lab to characterise the
fluid.
GOR 160 scf/STB
Oil Gravity 25 API
Mole % H
2
S 0%
Mole % CO
2
0%
Mole % N
2
0%
3.1.30.4.2.1 Match Data
Temperature of Test
130
o
F
1300 160 1.06 6.9
the well.
Examples Guide 1270
MD (ft) TVD (ft)
0 0
3500 3500
For a sucker rod pump, the final depth should correspond to the mid perforation depth
of the well.
Type MD
(ft)
Tubing
Inside
Diamet
er
(inches
)
Tubing
Inside
Roughn
ess
(inches)
Tubing
Outsid
e
Diamet
er
(inches
)
Tubing
Outside
Roughn
ess
(inches)
Casing
Inside
Diamet
er
(inche
s)
Casing
Inside
Roughne
ss
(inches)
Rate
Multipli
er
X-mas
Tree
0
Tubing 3500 2.441 0.0012 2.625 0.0012 6.3 0.0012 1
1271
PROSPER
MD (ft)
Temperature (
o
F)
0 60
3500 130
2
/
o
F
Heat Capacity
(BTU/lb/
o
F)
Oil 0.53
Gas 0.51
Water 1
The reservoir conditions are detailed below:
Reservoir Model PI Entry
130
o
F
Water Cut 80%
PI 0.5 STB/day/psi
Examples Guide 1272
3.1.30.4.5 SRP Design Criteria
The following criteria has been set for the Sucker Rod Pump design:
Input Parameters:
Calculation Mode Enter Production Rate, Estimate Stroke Rate
Target Production Rate 400 STB/day
Pumping Unit Selection LUFKIN C-320-305-100 LC044
Rod Type Steel Rods
Rod Number ROD99/05
Rod Grade D
Service Factor Non-corrosive
Pump Intake Pressure -
Method
Calculate from IPR
Unit Type Conventional Clockwise
Anchored Tubing Yes
Midpoint Perforation
Depth
3500 ft
Pump Depth 3500 ft
Pump Volumetric
Efficiency
80%
Unit Efficiency 75%
Pump Diameter 2 inches
Surface Stroke Length 48 inches
130
o
F
Well Head Temperature
90
o
F
1273
PROSPER
3.1.30.5.1 Setting up the Model
To open a new file, select File | New from the main PROSPER toolbar. If the program
has just been opened, a new file will automatically be generated and this step does not
need to be performed.
In order to design a Sucker Rod Pump well, the corresponding option should be
For this design, select Sucker Rod Pump from the drop down menus and also ensure
that the fluid type is set to Oil and Water.
3.1.30.5.2 Inserting the PVT
The first step in any model, is to define the PVT properties of the fluid. This data can be
entered in the PVT | Input Data screen:
Examples Guide 1274
3.1.30.5.2.1 Inserting Match Data
In order to be sure that the correlation we select will calculate fluid properties which are
consistent with those we have measured in the field or lab, we can carry out a matching
process. Select Match Data from the top of the screen to start this process.
1275
PROSPER
3.1.30.5.2.2 Matching the Correlations
left of the screen.
In this case select Match All to match all of the correlations and data. From the
regression screen it is possible to view the resultant matching parameters by selecting
Parameters:
Examples Guide 1276
the best correlations to select are the Glaso and Beal et. al. correlations.
3.1.30.5.2.3 Selecting the Correlation
data. This is done on the main PVT 'Input Data' screen. The correlations in the drop
down menu are those which will be used in the model and for this oil the Glaso and Beal
et al correlations should be selected:
1277
PROSPER
matched.
In order to calculate a design for the sucker rod pump, PROSPER must have a
description of the well and the path through which the fluid flows from the bottom of the
well to the wellhead. This is done in the 'Equipment Data' section, which can be
accessed by selecting System | Equipment (Tubing etc).
each section:
Examples Guide 1278
1279
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1280
1281
PROSPER
the table below:
Type MD
(ft)
Tubing
Inside
Diamet
er
(inches
)
Tubing
Inside
Roughn
ess
(inches)
Tubing
Outsid
e
Diamet
er
(inches
)
Tubing
Outside
Roughn
ess
(inches)
Casing
Inside
Diamet
er
(inche
s)
Casing
Inside
Roughne
ss
(inches)
Rate
Multipli
er
X-mas
Tree
0
Tubing 3500 2.441 0.0012 2.625 0.0012 6.3 0.0012 1
Examples Guide 1282
When modelling a Sucker Rod pump, the final depth from the down-hole equipment
should be entered as the depth of the mid perforations.
Done.
1283
PROSPER
input screen.
Examples Guide 1284
In this case no gauge depths have yet been specified and so select Main to return to the
main PROSPER screen:
The IPR input screen can be accessed by selecting System | Inflow Performance. On
1285
PROSPER
the Select Model screen, the IPR model can be selected as well as the current
reservoir properties such as reservoir pressure and temperature, water cut and
producing GOR. In this case, the PI reservoir model should be selected and the
remaining IPR data entered as shown below:
inserted. In this case, the only parameter required to be entered is the Productivity Index
of the well:
Examples Guide 1286
The plot shows how both the bottom hole pressure and bottom hole temperature vary
with flow rate.
The IPR should be recalculated any time the properties are changed as the AOF of the
well is used in many calculations to obtain the maximum range of rates to be used.
Close the plot window by selecting the 'X' in the top left of the window to return to the IPR
screen and the select Done to return to the main PROSPER screen. Please note that if
this window is exited using Cancel, none of the changes made will be saved.
completed.
3.1.30.5.5 Designing A Sucker Rod Pump System
Now that the basic model has been set up, the Sucker Rod Pump system can be
designed using the parameters previously mentioned in the Available Data section.
To begin the design, select Design | Sucker Rod Pump from the main menu. This will
bring up the design screen:
1287
PROSPER
The design screen is split into many different parts with different input data required for
each section. Starting in the top left hand corner, the PVT properties should
automatically be copied from the PVT section. Next, the Calculation Mode should be
set to Enter Production Rate, Estimate Stroke Rate and the Pumping Unit Selection
as LUFKIN C-320-305-100 LC044. The design rate is 400 STB/day.
Next, the design input data can be entered to the right. These parameters include the
pressures and temperatures in the system as well as the pump diameter and surface
stroke length. If Anchored Tubing is selected as Yes, then gas will be separated and not
passed into the pump.
The rod to be used also needs to be selected along with its grade. In this case we are
selecting the ROD99/05, grade D. The plunger diameter and rod thickness is displayed
when a rod is selected. Please note, the pump diameter entered in the Design Input
section cannot be smaller than the plunger diameter selected. The service factor for
this well is non-corrosive.
The final step is to find the pump intake pressure. As the pump intake depth is the same
as the mid perforation depth, we can use the design rate specified and IPR curve to
calculate the pressure which would be required to produce the design rate from the
reservoir. To find the intake pressure select the Calculate from IPR option, enter the
MidPoint Perforation Depth and then press Calculate Intake Pressure.
When this pressure has been found the design can be carried out by selecting
Examples Guide 1288
Calculate at the top of the screen.:
From this design it can be seen that the calculated liquid rate is 420 STB/day. The
torsional effectiveness has been calculated as 11.32% and as this is low it has been
flagged red. This is a warning from PROSPER that it may be good to check this value in
more detail to see the full impact of having such a low value. In this case, we will
continue with this as part of the design.
3.1.30.5.5.1 Rod Sensitivity
Now that the design conditions have been entered it is possible to carry out a sensitivity
on the rod type which was selected. This can be done by selecting Rod Sensitivity at
the top of the design screen:
1289
PROSPER
This brings up the Rod Sensitivity screen. Select Calculate to calculate the different
rates which can be extracted fro different rods. It can be seen that the ROD44/05 rod
type can produce a far higher rate, however, in this case this is greater than our well's
AOF and therefore even though theoretically the well could lift that much, the reservoir
could not produce that much into the well and the system could not be balanced. This is
a very important point which must be made with regards to the Sucker Rod Pump
design. The design considers the system in isolation to the IPR. Although we used the
IPR to calculate the BHP for our given design rate, when carrying out the sensitivity the
intake pressure remains a constant and therefore this may lead to unphysical results
unless care is taken.
Examples Guide 1290
It is also possible to plot the sensitivity in terms of the production rate per horse power
required by selecting a different chart:
The large difference in production rate between the rods can be seen to less when the
power required to run the pump is taken into account.
To exit this screen select Done and the Done again to return to the main screen.
1291
PROSPER
be able to:
Design an Sucker Rod Pump System.
Carry out a sensitivity to see the impact that different Rod types will have on
production.
Examples Guide 1292
3.1.31 Tutorial 29 - Designing a PCP Lifted System
Rather than allow the well to die, management would like a new Progressive Cavity
Pump (PCP) system to be designed. It is assumed that the well will continue to produce
at a well head pressure of 250 psig (due to a back pressure from other wells) but the
water cut to be used during the design is now 80%. Although the design rate is 80%, the
design should be capable of handling water cuts ranging from 60% to 85%.
3.1.31.2Objectives
Learn how to design an PCP lifted system in PROSPER.
operate with water cuts between 60% and 95% at different pump speeds.
a. Enable the PCP lifted well option.
1293
PROSPER
c. Carry out an PCP design for the current design conditions.
d. Run a sensitivity to see the impact of varying the water cut and pump speed on
production.
3.1.31.4.1 PCP Options
Artificial Lift Method Progressive Cavity Pump
Artificial Lift Type Downhole Motor Drive
Water Cut 80%
Type
MD
(ft)
Tubing
Inside
Diamet
er
(Inches
)
Tubing
Inside
Roughne
ss
(Inches)
Tubing
Outsid
e
Diamet
er
(Inches
)
Tubing
Outside
Roughne
ss
(Inches)
Casing
Inside
Diamet
er
(Inches
)
Casing
Inside
Roughne
ss
(Inches)
Rate
Multipli
er
X-mas
Tree
600 1
Tubing 1000 4.052 0.0006 4.5 0.0006 6.4 0.0006 1
SSSV 3.72 1
Tubing 9000 4.052 0.0006 4.5 0.0006 6.4 0.0006 1
Casing 9275 6.4 0.0006 1
Examples Guide 1294
3.1.31.4.4 PCP Design Criteria
The following criteria has been set for the PCP design:
Input Parameters:
Maximum OD 6.4 inches
Separator Efficiency 0
Pump Wear Factor 0
Cable Length 9000 ft
Voltage @ Surface 2500 Volts
Water Cut 80%
Motor Safety Power
Margin
0
3.1.31.5.1 Activating PCP Option
In order to design an PCP lifted well, the progressive cavity pump option should be
1295
PROSPER
For this design, select Progressive Cavity Pump and Downhole Motor Drive from the
drop down menus. This means that power will be provided to the pump by a downhole
motor. It is also possible to model the drive mechanism as a Sucker Rod.
It is assumed that the PCP will be positioned at the bottom of the tubing and therefore
any tubing which is defined below the specified pump depth will be removed. In order for
it to be removed, PROSPER needs to know the size of the casing which will replace it
and therefore the annulus needs to be defined for the model.
The equipment data screen can be displayed by selecting System | Equipment
(Tubing etc) from the ribbon at the top of the main screen:
Examples Guide 1296
Once the annulus has been defined, select Main to return to the main PROSPER screen.
1297
PROSPER
new IPR:
Examples Guide 1298
3.1.31.5.4 Designing a PCP Lifted System
Designing a PCP lifted system is split into two main sections:
To start the design process, select Design | Progressive Cavity Pump:
1299
PROSPER
representative of the actual flowing conditions.
3.1.31.5.4.1 PCP Calculation
The PCP Calculation screen is used to calculate the pump head required to meet the
design conditions. This will then be used as a constraint when selecting the pump to
install in the model.
The head is found by first calculating a gradient downwards from the wellhead pressure
(to obtain the pump discharge pressure) and also a gradient from the bottom hole
pressure obtained from the IPR to the pump depth (to get the pump intake pressure).
The difference between these two pressures is the pressure rise that the pump will be
required to provide. Based upon the average conditions in the pump, this can be
transformed into a head required using the average fluid density in the pump.
Examples Guide 1300
All of the calculated conditions are shown on the screen and the dT across the pump is
also calculated.
3.1.31.5.4.2 PCP Design
Design:
1301
PROSPER
to handle.
A pump can be selected from the Select Pump drop down menu. The criteria to select
a pump will vary depending upon the objective of the design. In this case, we wish to find
a pump which can handle the required head and also has an efficiency of over 70%.
From the pump list, select the National Oilwell Varco BUNA 210-600. We can see
that it the maximum head it can handle is 1968.5 feet which is greater than our design
head of 1860.94. In order to produce the required design rate, the pump would have to
operate at 1060 rpm and the efficiency of the pump at this speed would be 73.3%.
Note: It is the responsibility of the engineer to ensure that the pump can actually handle
the design conditions and speed which is calculated by PROSPER.
A motor and cable also require to be selected which can meet the power requirements
of the pump:
Examples Guide 1302
The results of the design can be seen at the bottom of the screen once the different
equipment have been selected.
Note: It is the responsibility of the engineer to ensure that the pump and motor which are
selected are compatible. PROSPER will allow any motor to be selected which can
provide the required power and will not consider if it can be applied in the field.
3.1.31.5.5 Transferring PCP to Model
After a design has been completed, the selected pump, motor and cable will be
automatically transferred to the System | Progressive Cavity Pump screen:
1303
PROSPER
The performance plots for both the pump and the motor which have been selected can
be seen on the right hand side of the screen.
Now that the PCP has been included in the PROSPER file, the next step is to calculate
(VLP + IPR).

Examples Guide 1304
Reset. Water Cut and Pump Speed can be selected from the drop down lists on the left
hand side and then the values to be used can be entered on the right hand side:
1305
PROSPER
To see how the production rate varies with water cut for the different pump speeds,
select Sensitivity Plot.
Examples Guide 1306
1307
PROSPER
which is obtained. Increasing the speed of the pump will act to increase the rate which
can pass through it, however, at very high water cuts the increase between the 1000rpm
and 12000 rpm reduces. Select Finish and then Done to return to the main screen.
be able to:
Design an PCP Lifted System.
Include an PCP in the main model.
Carry out a sensitivity to see the impact that increasing the water cut will have
on the oil rate for a range of different pump speeds.
Examples Guide 1308
3.1.32 Tutorial 30 - Modelling Diluent Injection with Gas Lift
Now that the Logie field has been producing for sometime and the water cut is
increasing, it has been noticed that the salinity of the produced fluid is greatly
increasing. This has the risk that this salt may begin to dropout of solution and form
deposits which may block and restrict the flow of fluid to be surface. To avoid this from
happening, it is proposed that water with a lower salinity be injected so as to reduce the
chances that the salt will form deposits. The disadvantage to this is that it effectively
increases the water cut of the well and makes it harder to produce. To counter this, gas
can also be injected to act to gas lift the well.
A separate department has carried out studies which suggest that the injected water
rate will have to be equal to 20-40% of the total water rate being produced from the well
in order to ensure that no salt deposition occurs. The PROSPER file is to be used to find
the optimum injection rate for the range of different of diluent injection ratios.
3.1.32.2Objectives
Update the model to include the diluent and gas lift injection.
Find the optimum gas lift GLR injected for different diluent injection rates.
a. Enable the Diluent Injection well option.
1309
PROSPER
c. Insert the diluent and gas lift injection conditions.
d. Run a sensitivity study using the System Calculation to find the optimum GLR to
inject.
3.1.32.4.1 Artifical Lift Options
Artificial Lift Method Diluent Injection
Artificial Lift Type Annular Injection with Gaslift
3.1.32.4.2 PVT Data
New Formation Water Data:
Salinity 180000 ppm
Diluent Data:
Power Fluid Water
Salinity 20000 ppm
Water Cut 54%
Type
MD
(ft)
Tubing
Inside
Diamet
er
Tubing
Inside
Roughne
ss
Tubing
Outsid
e
Diamet
Tubing
Outside
Roughne
ss
Casing
Inside
Diamete
r
Casing
Inside
Roughne
ss
Rate
Multipli
er
Examples Guide 1310
(Inches
)
(Inches)
er
(Inches
)
(Inches) (Inches) (Inches)
X-mas
Tree
600 1
Tubing 1000 4.052 0.0006 4.8 0.0006 6.4 0.0006 1
SSSV 3.72 1
Tubing 9000 4.052 0.0006 4.8 0.0006 6.4 0.0006 1
Casing 9275 6.4 0.0006 1
3.1.32.4.5 Diluent Injection Data
Input Parameters:
Diluent Injection Depth 9000 ft
Diluent Injection Rate 5000 STB/day
Injected Gas Gravity 0.7
Mole Percent H
2
S 0%
Mole Percent CO
2
0%
Mole Percent N
2
0%
GLR Injected 50 scf/STB
Gaslift Valve Depth 7500 ft
3.1.32.5.1 Activating Diluent Injection Option
In order to model a well with diluent and gas lift injection, the correct option should be
1311
PROSPER
For this design, select Diluent Injection and Annular Injection with Gaslift from the drop
down menus.
3.1.32.5.2 Define PVT Data
The salinity of the produced water has been measured as being higher than was first
thought. This therefore needs to be updated in the PVT section. The fluid properties of
the injected diluent also need to be defined.
To access the PVT screen, select PVT | Input Data:
Examples Guide 1312
Once the new data has been inserted, select Done.
As the diluent injection is down the annulus, we must first define the annulus in our down-
hole equipment section. The equipment data screen can be displayed by selecting
System | Equipment (Tubing etc) from the ribbon at the top of the main screen:
1313
PROSPER
Once the annulus has been defined, select Main to return to the main screen.
The current reservoir conditions have changed from was previously inserted into
PROSPER. These conditions should therefore be updated in the System | Inflow
Performance screen:
Examples Guide 1314
new IPR:
1315
PROSPER
3.1.32.5.5 Define the Injection Data
To insert the diluent and gas lift injection information select System | Diluent Injection:
Both the Diluent Injection Rate and GLR Injected are both going to be varied in the
sensitivity study and therefore will not be used in the calculations to be performed.
Examples Guide 1316
Now that the diluent and gas lift injection depths have been included in the PROSPER
file, the next step is to calculate the rate at which the well can flow at a given set of
conditions. This can be done with the use of a System Calculation which will combine
the VLP and IPR plots to find the system point at which the well will flow. In this case, the
objective is to find the optimum GLR injected for different diluent rate percentages.
(VLP + IPR).

At this time, we wish to calculate the optimum injection GLR for different diluent injection
rates when the well head pressure is 250 psig, the water cut is 54% and the GOR is 800
scf/day This data should therefore be added to the top left hand corner of the screen:
Reset. Diluent Rate Percent and GLR Injected can be selected from the drop down
lists on the left hand side and then the values to be used can be entered on the right
hand side:
1317
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1318
This will run the System Calculation for each different diluent rate percentage and GLR
injected value. To see the optimum gas injection GLR for each diluent injection ratio,
To view the oil rate against GLR injected, select Variables from the top bar and then Oil
Rate for the Y axis and GLR Injected for the X axis:
1319
PROSPER
This shows, that for each different Diluent Rate Percent the optimum GLR to inject is
between 850 and 950 scf/STB, which is equal to between 9 and 12 MMscf/day.
Select Main to return to the main screen.
be able to:
Set up a model with both diluent and gas lift injection.
Carry out a sensitivity to find the optimum injection rate for the system.
Examples Guide 1320
3.1.33 Tutorial 31 - Modelling a Surface Multiphase Pump
The Logie field has been producing for sometime and due to a decrease in the
reservoir pressure and an increase in the water cut, the well is producing a significantly
lower production rate than it previously was. It has therefore been proposed that a
multiphase pump be placed just downstream of the wellhead to help lower the wellhead
pressure.
As part of a feasibility study, management would like to use the current PROSPER file to
assess the increase in oil production which could be obtained when different amounts of
power are available to the pump.
3.1.33.2Objectives
Update the model to include the a surface pipeline with a multiphase pump.
Calculate the impact of varying the power available to the pump when the water
cut is 80% and manifold pressure is 500 psig.
a. Enable the Multiphase Pump option.
c. Insert information for the multiphase pump.
d. Run a sensitivity study using the System Calculation to assess the impact of
1321
PROSPER
available power on the multiphase pump.
3.1.33.4.1 Artifical Lift Options
Artificial Lift Method Multiphase Pump
Artificial Lift Type Framo Pumps
Water Cut 80%
3.1.33.4.3 Pipeline Data
Surrounding Temperature
52
o
F
Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient 8.5
This corresponds to the the following input:
Examples Guide 1322
Type Pipe
Length
(ft)
True Vertical
Depth (ft)
Pipe Inside
Diameter
(inches)
Inside
Roughness
(inches)
Rate
Multiplier
Manifold 0
Pipeline 250 250 4 0.0006 1
Pipeline 500 475 4 0.0006 1
Pipeline 1000 475 4 0.0006 1
Pipeline 750 600 4 0.0006 1
Pipeline 1000 600 4 0.0006 1
Pump - - - - -
Pipeline 250 600 4 0.0006 1
3.1.33.4.4 Pump Data
Input Parameters:
Power Available 350 hp
Pump Wear Factor 0
Pump Configuration Single Pump
Current Pump FRAMO - H800/65
3.1.33.5.1 Activating the Multiphase Pump Option
In order to build a model with a multiphase pump, the correct option should be enabled
in the Options | Options screen:
1323
PROSPER
For this design, select Multiphase Pump and Framo Pump from the drop down menus.

3.1.33.5.2 Defining the Surface Pipeline
As the pump is sitting within a surface pipeline, we must first define the surface
equipment in our equipment data section. The equipment data screen can be displayed
by selecting System | Equipment (Tubing etc) from the ribbon at the top of the main
screen:
Examples Guide 1324
Ensure that the Disable Surface Equipment option is set to No. To enter the Surface
Equipment screen, select the button to the left of Surface Equipment. This will bring up
the screen below:
1325
PROSPER
Once the surface pipeline and pump location have been defined, select Done | Done to
return to the main screen.
The current reservoir conditions have changed from was previously inserted into
PROSPER. These conditions should therefore be updated in the System | Inflow
Performance screen:
new IPR:
Examples Guide 1326
3.1.33.5.4 Define Pump Details
To insert the current pump information select System | Multiphase Pumps:
1327
PROSPER
The Power Available is going to be changed during the sensitivity study and therefore
even though we have placed a value here, it will be overwritten by those we insert later.
Now that the Surface pump has been included in the PROSPER file, the next step is to
the production rate will change when the available power changes.
(VLP + IPR).
At this time, we wish to calculate the impact that varying the available power for the
pump will have on the production rate when the manifold pressure is 250 psig, the water
cut is 80% and the GOR is 800 scf/day This data should therefore be added to the top
left hand corner of the screen:
Examples Guide 1328
Reset. Power Available can be selected from the drop down lists on the left hand side
and then the values to be used can be entered on the right hand side:
1329
PROSPER
This will run the System Calculation for each different Available Power values. To see
the impact of changing this value on the production rate, select Sensitivity Plot.
To view the oil rate against Available power, select Variables from the top bar and then
Oil Rate for the Y axis:
Examples Guide 1330
1331
PROSPER
This shows, as would be expected, the higher the available power, the greater than oil
rate which will be produced from the well.
The effect of the power on the calculated well head pressure can also be seen by
selecting it from the Variables screen:
Examples Guide 1332
The well is seeing a decrease in the wellhead pressure as the pump power is increased
and this is the reason why the oil rate is able to increase.
Select Main to return to the main screen.
be able to:
Set up a model with a surface multiphase pump.
Carry out a sensitivity to find the impact of pump power on the production rate
which can be obtained.
1333
PROSPER
3.1.34 Tutorial 32 - Designing a Jet Pump Lifted System
Rather than allow the well to die, management would like a new Jet Pump system to be
designed. It is assumed that the well can now produce at a well head pressure of 150
psig (due to a back pressure from other wells) but the water cut to be used during the
design is now 80%. Although the design rate is 80%, the design should be capable of
handling various other water cuts. Due to power constraints at the surface, there are
times when the injection pumps (for the jet pump power fluid) will not be running at their
peak and therefore the impact of reducing the surface injection pressure should also be
investigated.
3.1.34.2Objectives
Learn how to design a Jet Pump lifted system in PROSPER.
operate with water cuts between 0% and 90% at different power fluid injection
pressures.
a. Enable the Jet Pump lifted well option.
Examples Guide 1334
b. Insert the Power Fluid properties into the PVT Section
c. Update the IPR and equipment sections to represent the current flowing
d. Carry out a Jet Pump design for the current design conditions.
e. Run a sensitivity using the System Calculation for the range of water cuts and
injection pressures specified.
3.1.34.4.1 Jet Pump Options
Artificial Lift Method Jet Pump
Artificial Lift Type Annular Injection - Tubular Production
This means that the power fluid will be injected down the annulus and the discharge of
the pump will be produced up the tubing.
Type
MD
(ft)
Tubing
Inside
Diamet
er
(Inches
)
Tubing
Inside
Roughn
ess
(Inches)
Tubing
Outsid
e
Diamet
er
(Inches
)
Tubing
Outside
Roughne
ss
(Inches)
Casing
Inside
Diamet
er
(Inches
)
Casing
Inside
Roughn
ess
(Inches)
Rate
Multipli
er
X-mas
Tree
600 1
Tubing 1000 4.052 0.0006 4.5 0.0006 6.4 0.0006 1
SSSV 3.72 1
Tubing 9000 4.052 0.0006 4.5 0.0006 6.4 0.0006 1
Casing 9275 6.4 0.0006 1
1335
PROSPER
Water Cut 80%
3.1.34.4.4 Jet Pump Design Criteria
The following criteria has been set for the Jet Pump design:
Input Parameters:
Maximum OD 6.4 inches
Water Cut 80%
Surface Injection Rate 10000 STB/day
Surface Injection Pressure 2000 psig
Nozzle Loss Coefficient 0.15
Suction Loss Coefficient 0
Throat Loss Coefficient 0.28
Diffuser Loss Coefficient 0.1
3.1.34.5.1 Activating Jet Pump Option
In order to design a Jet Pump lifted well, the Jet Pump option should be enabled in the
Options | Options screen:
Examples Guide 1336
For this design, select Jet Pump and Annular Injection - Tubular Production from the
drop down menus. This means that the power fluid will travel down in the annulus and the
discharge from the pump will travel up the tubing.
3.1.34.5.2 Defining the Power Fluid
As well as the produced fluid now being in our well, we are also introducing a power
fluid which will pass through the jet pump and commingle with our production fluid above
the pump. The properties of the fluid should be set up in the PVT section by selecting
PVT | Input Data:
1337
PROSPER
The power fluid is a water with 75000 ppm salinity.
When this has been inserted select Done.
As the power fluid will be travelling down the annulus, we must define the annulus in our
down-hole equipment section. The equipment data screen can be displayed by
selecting System | Equipment (Tubing etc) from the ribbon at the top of the main
screen:
Examples Guide 1338
1339
PROSPER
new IPR:
Examples Guide 1340
3.1.34.5.5 Designing a Jet Pump lifted System
Designing a Jet Pump lifted system is split into two main sections:
1. Calculate - This section is used to calculate the flowing conditions at the design
conditions and the pump properties required to meet the design.
To start the design process, select Design | Jet Pump:
1341
PROSPER
representative of the actual flowing conditions. The loss coefficients are used to
calculate the pressure drops in the different sections of the pump and can normally be
obtained from the pump manufacturers.
3.1.34.5.5.1 Jet Pump Calculation
For more details on the calculation being carried out for the Jet Pump design, please
refer to the Jet Pump Design Section of this User Guide.
Examples Guide 1342
The program has calculated that there would be no cavitation problems with this design.
If a cavitation warning was given it would be worth adjusting the design conditions to find
a scenario when these will not occur.
3.1.34.5.5.2 Jet Pump Design
Design:
1343
PROSPER
The results from the calculation are shown as the Desired results while the Actual
results are those obtained for the currently selected pump. We want to find a pump
which is as close to our design as possible. In this case, the Test - Nozzle (1) Throat
(1) An 0.004 At 0.009 R 0.410 pump gives very close results and will be selected.
Examples Guide 1344
3.1.34.5.6 Transferring Jet Pump to Model
After a design has been completed, the selected pump will be automatically transferred
to the System | Jet Pump screen:
Now that the Jet Pump has been included in the PROSPER file, the next step is to
the production rate will change when the water cut changes and also the impact of
changing the power fluid injection pressure.
(VLP + IPR).

1345
PROSPER
Reset. Water Cut and Jet Pump Injection Pressure can be selected from the drop
down lists on the left hand side and then the values to be used can be entered on the
right hand side:
Examples Guide 1346
1347
PROSPER
This will run the System Calculation for each different water cut and injection pressure
combination.
To see how the production rate varies with water cut for the different injection pressures,
Examples Guide 1348
1349
PROSPER
which is obtained. Increasing the injection pressure of the power fluid will help more oil
be produced for any given water cut. When the injection pressure drops to 500 psig, we
can observe that somewhere between 40 and 50% water cut the well will no longer be
able to produce and will die. For the higher injection pressures, the well will be able to
produce all the way up to 90% but the rate will have significantly decreased.
Select Finish and then Done to return to the main screen. The file can be saved by
selecting File | Save As...
be able to:
Design a J et Pump Lifted System.
Include a J et Pump in the main model.
Carry out a sensitivity to see the impact of water cut and injection pressure on
the production rate of oil.
Examples Guide 1350
3.1.35 Tutorial 33 - Troubleshooting a Gas Lifted Well
The oil well in the Logie field has now been producing as a gas lifted well for some time.
A well test has now been performed and is to be analysed using the well model in
PROSPER to find out more information about the flowing conditions. Due to a problem
with one of the injection wells in the field, it is unclear what the reservoir pressure was at
the time of the test. If possible, management would like to estimate the reservoir
pressure during this analysis.
The well test should also be reviewed using Quicklook to get an indication of the actual
depth that the well is injecting at.
3.1.35.2Objectives
The objective of the tutorial is to:
Learn to use the Quicklook feature to troubleshoot a well test for a gas lifted
well.
a. Insert the test data into the Quicklook model.
b. Check that injection is possible at the depth of the bottom valve. If it is not, vary
the injection depth until a possible injection depth is found.
c. Once the injection depth as been established, the quality of the VLp match
should be reviewed and the pressure drop across the valve checked against the
measured data.
d. Ensure that the IPR pressure used in the 'Bottom Up' method matches that
1351
PROSPER
calculated by the 'Top Down' method.
e. If the file represents the actual well test, the two calculation gradients ('Top Down'
and 'Bottom Up') should overlie each other.
The following Well Test Data is available:
Liquid Rate 7488 STB/day
Wellhead Pressure 390 psig
Water Cut 35%
Total Gas Rate 5.3935 MMscf/day
Gas Injection Rate 1.5 MMscf/day
Casing Head Pressure 1395
Gauge Depth 6250 ft
Gauge Pressure 1440 psig
Depth of Bottom Hole 9275 ft
Static Reservoir Pressure 3800 psig
The valves and orifice in the well are those which were designed as part of tutorial 23
and should be transferred from the relevant section of the file.
3.1.35.5.1 Troubleshooting a Gas Lifted Well with Quicklook
The Quicklook feature is used to analyse and troubleshoot well test data for artificially
lifted wells. It works on the premise that we can compute the test both from the
measured pressure data and from the modelled data. If the model is reflective of the
Examples Guide 1352
actual flowing conditions of the well, then the two methods should be the same.
To start the Quicklook work flow, select Matching | Quicklook.
3.1.35.5.1.1 Inserting Test Data
When the Quicklook screen has been opened, the test data can be inserted:
When a static measurement is inserted at the bottom hole depth (as is done in this
case) this static pressure will be taken as the reservoir pressure at the time of the test.
Now that the test data has been inserted, the valves and orifice can be transferred from
the previously performed gas lift design. This can be done by selecting Transfer:
1353
PROSPER
Select From Gaslift Design:
Then select From New GasLift Design and then Done to transfer the valves to the
input screen:
Examples Guide 1354
The orifice is automatically entered as the injection point and the valves (with their dome
pressures port sizes etc) are transferred to the bottom of the screen.
Select Calculate to proceed to the calculation screen.
3.1.35.5.1.2 Calculate Quicklook Plot
The next step is to calculate the Quicklook plot. This can be done by selecting
Calculate:
Once the calculation has been completed, the plot can be seen selecting Plot:
1355
PROSPER
At the injection depth entered, we can see that the pressure in the casing is less than
the pressure in the tubing. This means that injection at these conditions cannot be
possible and we cannot be injecting at the depth we believed we were.
Exit the plot and then select Done to return to the Quicklook input screen.
3.1.35.5.1.3 Finding the Injection Depth
If we are not injecting at the orifice, the next deepest valve may be our injection point
instead. Manually transfer the depth and port size of the third valve into the injection
depth and orifice diameter fields:
Examples Guide 1356
When this has been transferred, select Calculate to return to the calculation screen.
Again, select Calculate and then Plot to see how this change the Quicklook plot:
1357
PROSPER
We now see that the casing pressure at the new injection depth is greater than the
tubing pressure at the same depth which means that injection can occur. The Fixed Top
Node Pressure gradient can now be seen to pass through the gauge pressure which is
included in the file. This implies that the flow correlation being used (which has
previously been matched to some naturally flowing well tests) is still representative of the
actual flowing conditions within the well.
The measured and calculated casing gradients can also be seen to overlap which
confirms that the currently selected injection depth and valve size are indeed being used
in the real well.
3.1.35.5.1.4 Analysing the From Static BHP Gradient
Now that the depth of injection has been established, and the Fixed Top Node
Pressure gradient has been confirmed as passing through the gauge pressure, the
bottom hole pressure from this calculation can be used to calibrate the From Static
BHP gradient.
The From Static BHP gradient is calculated from the bottom hole pressure to the well
head. The starting point (BHP) is obtained by finding the pressure which corresponds to
the test liquid rate from the IPR curve.
If we exit the current plot, we can read the FBHP of the Fixed Top Node Pressure by
selecting it from the bottom left hand side of the screen and reading the pressure at the
bottom hole depth:
Examples Guide 1358
We can see that the FBHP for this calculation is 2297.5 psig. Please note that the
flowing bottom hole pressure reported in the Results section is the flowing bottom hole
pressure from the IPR. As these two values do not match, we know that the model is not
currently reflective of the actual flowing conditions within the well. We can now use this
FBHP to find the reservoir pressure which matches it.
Select Main to return to the main screen and then Calculation | Inflow (Ipr). The well
test water cut and GOR can be entered in the top left hand corner of the screen:
1359
PROSPER
As we know the rate of the test, we can enter this single point by selecting the Rate
Method to be User Selected and then entering a value of 7198 psig. We have been told
that the calculated PI for the well is currently reliable, however, the reservoir pressure is
unknown. We can therefore run a sensitivity study and vary the reservoir pressure until
the IPR Pressure for the given rate matches the flowing bottom hole pressure from our
test (1984 psig).
To do this select Cases:
Examples Guide 1360
In the cases screen enter a range of reservoir pressures as shown above and then
select Done.
Carry out the calculation by selecting Calculate. The different results can be viewed by
selecting the reservoir pressure at the top left of the screen and then reading the IPR
Pressure from the results at the top right:
1361
PROSPER
We can see that the closest reservoir pressure which gives this IPR Pressure is 3680
psig. Select Done and then Matching | Quicklook to return to the Quicklook input data
screen:
Examples Guide 1362
When the new reservoir pressure has been inserted, select Calculate to move to the
next screen and then Calculate again to carry out the calculation. To see the current
Quickloook plot, select Plot:
1363
PROSPER
We can now see that both of the tubing gradients now overlie each other and so do the
casing gradients. This indicates that the changes have been made have now made our
model consistent with the test data. In order to match the data, we needed to reduce the
reservoir pressure to 3680 psig and inject in the 3rd valve rather than the lower orifice.
This gives us a good impression of how the actual field is operating and we can now be
happy that the model is indeed representative of the actual flowing conditions in the well.
be able to:
Troubleshoot a Gas Lifted well test using Quicklook.
Examples Guide 1364
3.1.36 Tutorial 34 - Troubleshooting an ESP Well
The oil well in the Logie field has now been producing as an ESP lifted well for
sometime. A well test has been performed and the data is to be analysed to see if any
additional information on the field and the pump can be obtained. At this point, the PI
generated by the IPR model is believed to be reliable, however, due to a malfunction in
one of the injection wells, it is unclear if the reservoir pressure is still being maintained at
3350 psig.
Management would like the well test to be analysed and the current reservoir pressure
to be established. The current operation of the pump should also be reviewed.
3.1.36.2Objectives
The objective of the tutorial is to:
Learn to use the Quicklook feature to troubleshoot a well test for an ESP lifted
well.
b. Check that the gradient calculated from the VLP matches the gauge pressure
and the pump discharge pressure for the 'Top Down' method.
c. Check that the pump model is predicting the correct inlet pressure (when
compared to the measured data) for the given discharge conditions.
1365
PROSPER
The following well test data is available:
Water Cut 74%
Pump Depth 8500 ft
Pump Frequency 60 Hz
Gauge Depth 6250 ft
Gauge Pressure 1957 psig
Pump Intake Pressure 1714 psig
Pump Discharge Pressure 2812 psig
Measured Current 110 amps
Measured Surface Voltage 1970 Volts
Measured Power 325 hp
The reservoir pressure at the time of the test is currently unknown, however, the previous
test showed it to be approximately 3350 psig.
Examples Guide 1366
3.1.36.5.1 Troubleshooting an ESP Well with Quicklook
To start the Quicklook workflow, select Matching | Quicklook.
3.1.36.5.1.1 Inputting Quicklook Data
When the Quicklook screen has been opened, the test data can be inserted into the
screen:
1367
PROSPER
The pump inlet and discharge pressures and the gauge pressure can be entered in the
DownHole Data section. The current pump, motor and cable selected in the file will
automatically be brought into the Equipment section.
When the data has been added, select Calculate to proceed to the next screen.
Examples Guide 1368
This screen is used to calculate the gradient within the well from both the top of the well
downwards and the bottom of the well upwards.
Select Calculate to carry out the calculation.
1369
PROSPER
3.1.36.5.1.3 Analysing the Fixed Top Node Pressure Gradient
The Fixed Top Node Pressure gradient is based upon the measured well head
pressure of the test. To do this, we should review the current Quicklook plot.
The Quicklook plot can be seen by selecting Plot.
Before we begin to analyse the calculated (From Static BHP) gradient (represented by
the red line above), we will first analyse the measured (Fixed Top Node Pressure)
gradient (represented by the green line above). From the plot we can see that the Fixed
Top Node Pressure gradient can be seen to pass through both the gauge pressure and
the pump discharge pressure. This implies that the flow correlation (which has
previously been matched) is representative of the actual flowing conditions within the
well. The calculated pump inlet pressure, however, can be seen to be different from the
measured value.
Exit the plot and then select the Fixed Top Node Pressure calculation stream on the left
hand side of the screen:
Examples Guide 1370
This allows us to review the pump intake and discharge pressures which have been
calculated for the Fixed Top Node Pressure gradient. We can see that the intake
pressure is 1623.6 psig and the discharge pressure is 2808.1 psig. The measured dP
across the pump is approximately 92% of this calculated value and so it can be
assumed for a first guess that the pump is operating with at 92% of its capability. This
can be modelled in PROSPER by increasing the Pump Wear Factor to 0.08. To do this,
select Done.
On the Quicklook Input screen, change the Pump Wear Factor to 0.08 and select
Calculate:
1371
PROSPER
The calculation should now be redone by selecting Calculate and the selecting Plot:
We can now see that the Fixed Top Node Pressure gradient passes through all three of
our test points and that the estimated pump wear factor allows for the calculation of the
Examples Guide 1372
correct pump dP.
The From Static BHP gradient is calculated up from the BHP to the wellhead. The BHP
used in the calcualtion is obtained from the current IPR model at the given test rate. In
this case, while the Fixed Top Node Pressure gradient has been shown to be a good
match, the From Static BHP gradient does not give the same results. This implies that
the IPR is not representative of the current flowing conditions.
Exit the plot and then from the Fixed Top Node Pressure results, read off the calculated
bottom hole pressure:
As we are happy that this curve is representative of the actual flowing conditions, we
1373
PROSPER
can use this point (1984 psig) to match the IPR curve.
To do this, select Main to exit to the main screen and then go to the Calculation |
Inflow (Ipr) screen. The well test water cut and GOR can be entered in the top left hand
corner of the screen:
As we know the rate of the test, we can enter this single point by selecting the 'Rate
Method' to be User Selected and then entering a value of 7198 STB/day. We have
been told that the calculated PI for the well is currently reliable, however, the reservoir
pressure is unknown. We can therefore run a sensitivity study and vary the reservoir
pressure until the IPR Pressure for the given rate matches the flowing bottom hole
pressure from our test (1984 psig).
Examples Guide 1374
select Done.
pressure from the results at the top right:
1375
PROSPER
We can see that the closest reservoir pressure which gives this IPR pressure is 3270
screen:
Insert this new reservoir pressure as the Static Bottom Hole Pressure and then select
Calculate.
Select Calculate on the next screen and then Plot to see the Quicklook plot:
Examples Guide 1376
The From Static BHP and Fixed Top Node Pressure gradients now overlap and both
pass through all three of the test points. We can therefore be happy that the updated
model is now representative of the actual flowing conditions in the well. In order to
achieve this, the performance of the pump was required to be decreased by 8% and the
reservoir pressure was reduced to 3270 psig.
3.1.36.5.1.5 Updating the Model
Now that the new reservoir pressure and pump wear factor are known, these can be
updated in our model.
To update the reservoir pressure, enter the System | Inflow Performance screen:
1377
PROSPER
Change the reservoir pressure to 3270 psig and then select Calculate to see the
impact of this change:
Examples Guide 1378
Exit the plot and then select Done to return to the main screen.
To update the pump wear factor, enter the System | Electrical Submersible Pump
screen:
Update the model with a Pump Wear Factor of 0.08.
Select Done to exit the plot and complete the update of the model.
1379
PROSPER
be able to:
Troubleshoot an ESP well test using Quicklook
Update the model to match the changes made in the Quicklook calculation.
Examples Guide 1380
3.1.37 Tutorial 35 - Troubleshooting an HSP Well
The oil well in the Logie field has now been producing as an HSP lifted well for
sometime. A well test has been performed and the data is to be analysed to see if any
additional information on the field and the pump can be obtained. At this point, the PI
generated by the IPR model is believed to be reliable, however, due to a malfunction in
one of the injection wells, it is unclear if the reservoir pressure is still being maintained at
4000 psig.
Management would like the well test to be analysed and the current reservoir pressure
to be established. The current operation of the pump should also be reviewed.
3.1.37.2Objectives
The Objective of the tutorial is to:
Learn to use the Quicklook feature to troubleshoot a well test for an HSP lifted
well.
b. Check that the gradient calculated from the VLP matches the gauge pressure
and the pump discharge pressure for the 'Top Down' method.
c. Check that the pump model is predicting the correct inlet pressure (when
compared to the measured data) for the given discharge conditions.
1381
PROSPER
The following Well Test Data is available:
Water Cut 24%
Pump Depth 8500 ft
Pump Speed 7545 rpm
Power Fluid Rate 6308 STB/day
Power Fluid Surface Back Pressure 2072 psig
Pump Intake Pressure 2619 psig
Pump Discharge Pressure 3273.5 psig
The reservoir pressure at the time of the test is currently unknown, however, the previous
test showed it to be approximately 3950 psig.
3.1.37.5.1 Troubleshooting an HSP Well with Quicklook
To start the Quicklook workflow, select Matching | Quicklook.
Examples Guide 1382
3.1.37.5.1.1 Inputting Quicklook Data
When the Quicklook screen has been opened, the test data can be inserted into the
screen:
The pump inlet and discharge pressures can be entered in the DownHole Data section.
The current pump and turbine selected in the file will automatically be brought into the
Equipment section.
When the data has been added, select Calculate to proceed to the next screen.
This screen is used to calculate the gradient within the well from both the top of the well
downwards and the bottom of the well upwards.
1383
PROSPER
Select Calculate to carry out the calculation.
3.1.37.5.1.3 Analysing the Fixed Top Node Pressure Gradient
The Fixed Top Node Pressure gradient is based upon the measured well head
pressure of the test. To do this, we should review the current Quicklook plot.
The Quicklook plot can be seen by selecting Plot.
Examples Guide 1384
Before we begin to analyse the calculated (From Static BHP) gradient (represented by
the red line above), we will first analyse the measured (Fixed Top Node Pressure)
gradient (represented by the green line above). From the plot we can see that the Fixed
Top Node Pressure gradient can be seen to pass through the pump discharge
pressure. This implies that the flow correlation (which has previously been matched) is
representative of the actual flowing conditions within the well. This is were not the case,
the VLP correlation matching would have to be reviewed as detailed in Tutorial 19.
The calculated pump inlet pressure, however, can be seen to be different from the
measured value. This implies that the head being generated by the pump model is not
representative of the head being generated in the field and in this case the real head
appears to be lower.
Exit the plot and then select the Fixed Top Node Pressure calculation stream on the left
hand side of the screen:
1385
PROSPER
This allows us to review the pump intake and discharge pressures which have been
calculated for the Fixed Top Node Pressure gradient. We can see that the intake
pressure is 2569.3 psig and the discharge pressure is 3273 psig. The measured dP
across the pump is approximately 93% of this calculated value and so it can be
assumed for a first guess that the pump is operating with at 93% of its capability. This
can be modelled in PROSPER by increasing the Pump Wear Factor to 0.075. To do
this, select Done.
On the Quicklook Input screen, change the Pump Wear Factor to 0.075 and select
Calculate:
Examples Guide 1386
The calculation should now be redone by selecting Calculate and the selecting Plot:
We can see the intake pressure of theFixed Top Node Pressure method matches the
measured value and the match can be said to be complete.
1387
PROSPER
The From Static BHP gradient is calculated up from the BHP to the wellhead. The BHP
used in the calcualtion is obtained from the current IPR model at the given test rate. In
this case, while the Fixed Top Node Pressure gradient has been shown to be a good
match, the From Static BHP gradient does not give the same results. This implies that
the IPR is not representative of the current flowing conditions.
Exit the plot and then from the Fixed Top Node Pressure results, read off the calculated
bottom hole pressure:
As we are happy that this curve is representative of the actual flowing conditions, we
can use this point (2853 psig when the liquid rate is 5770 STB/day) to match the IPR
curve.
To do this, select Main to exit to the main screen and then go to the Calculation |
Inflow (Ipr) screen. The well test water cut and GOR can be entered in the top left hand
Examples Guide 1388
As we know the rate of the test, we can enter this single point by selecting the Rate
Method to be User Selected and then entering a value of 5770 STB/day. We have been
told that the calculated PI for the well is currently reliable, however, the reservoir
pressure is unknown. We can therefore run a sensitivity study and vary the reservoir
pressure until the IPR Pressure for the given rate matches the flowing bottom hole
pressure from our test (2853 psig).
1389
PROSPER
select Done.
Pressure from the results at the top right:
Examples Guide 1390
We can see that the closest reservoir pressure which gives this IPR Pressure is 3850
screen:
1391
PROSPER
Insert this new reservoir pressure as the Static Bottom Hole Pressure and then select
Calculate.
Select Calculate on the next screen and then Plot to see the Quicklook plot:
Examples Guide 1392
The From Static BHP and Fixed Top Node Pressure gradients now overlap and both
pass through all three of the test points. We can therefore be happy that the updated
model is now representative of the actual flowing conditions in the well. In order to
achieve this, the performance of the pump was required to be decreased by 7.5% and
the reservoir pressure was reduced to 3850 psig.
3.1.37.5.1.5 Updating the Model
Now that the new reservoir pressure and pump wear factor are known, these can be
updated in our model.
To update the reservoir pressure, enter the System | Inflow Performance screen:
1393
PROSPER
Change the reservoir pressure to 3850 psig and then select Calculate to see the
impact of this change:
Examples Guide 1394
Exit the plot and then select Done to return to the main screen.
To update the pump wear factor, enter the System | Hydraulic Submersible Pumps
screen:
1395
PROSPER
Update the model with a Pump Wear Factor of 0.075.
Select Done to exit the plot and complete the update of the model.
be able to:
Troubleshoot an HSP well test using Quicklook
Update the model to match the changes made in the Quicklook calculation.
Examples Guide 1396
3.1.38 Tutorial 36 - Trouble-shooting a SRP-lifted well
There is no specific PROSPER file associated with this tutorial, however, Tutorial 28
details the steps required to design a Sucker Rod Pump system in PROSPER.
3.1.38.1Dynamometer Card Analysis
The tool widely used to analyse the performance of wells equipped with sucker-rod
pumps is the dynamometer card, often referred to as card. It represents rod load versus
rod displacement. The card has a "normal shape". The deviation from this normal shape
can reveal potential pumping problems.
In the pictures below:
Fo is the differential load on the plunger
MPT is the maximum plunger travel and
EPT, the effective plunger travel
A few typical shapes are presented below for an anchored tubing:
Anchored Tubing Description Unanchored Tubing
This is the idealised shape
of the dynamometer card
for a normally functioning
pump. Pump is full of liquid
without gas.
Leaking travelling valve or
excessive plunger slippage
1397
PROSPER
Leaking standing valve
Severe fluid pound, well is
being pump off.
Gas interference is causing
loss of effective pump travel
Pump is taping at the
bottom of stroke in the case
of anchored tubing. In the
case of unanchored tubing,
pump is tapping on top of
strokes.
These shapes are just basic as in the reality different effects may overlap. Experience
and knowledge of the specific operating conditions will be required to make a
successful diagnosis.
Examples Guide 1398
3.1.39 Tutorial 37 - Modelling a Fully Compositional Retrograde
Condensate Well
A new retrograde condensate field, the Spectrum Field, has been located and a new
well has been drilled. The reservoir is on-shore and the wellhead is to be placed on the
surface. From fluid samples taken from the reservoir, a fully compositional PVT model
has been characterised and this is to be incorporated into a new PROSPER model of
the well.
With the data available from the different department within the company, an estimate of
the flow rate which would be obtained when the well is producing against a back
pressure of 2500 psig is required.
3.1.39.2Objectives
Create a preliminary retrograde well model to which more information can be
added.
Import a characterised Equation of State model to define the fluid's properties at
the different conditions within the well.
Perform a system calculation to estimate the flow rate of the well.
performance and is controlled by the data in the Equipment Data section of PROSPER
and also the PVT. These VLP curves define how much fluid can be lifted by the well at
given conditions. Finally, the IPR (or Inflow Performance Relationship) defines how
much fluid can flow from the reservoir into the wellbore at given conditions.
a. Set up the model so that a fully compositional Equation of State can be imported.
1399
PROSPER
b. Import the previously characterised EoS model into the PVT section.
c. The drilling and equipment information will be inserted into the model to define
d. An IPR is to be built using the Petroleum Experts IPR Model.
e. A system calculation will be performed to assess the likely production at the
given conditions.
Fluid Retrograde Condensate
Method Equation of State
Equation of State PROSPER Internal EOS Model
3.1.39.4.2 PVT Data
The PVT is to be defined using a previously characterised Equation of State. This has
been characterised using PVTp (the IPM suite's fluid characterisation program) and has
been exported into the file T38_Retrograde_Condensate_EoS.prp. This file can be
found in the samples folder in the IPM installation directory - '~/Petroleum Experts/IPM 8/
Samples/PROSPER/'.
Some additional options and values are detailed below:
Equation of State Peng Robinson
Oil Viscosity Model Lohrenz, Bray Clark
Gas Viscosity Model Lohrenz, Bray Clark
Path to Surface Use Separator Train
Examples Guide 1400
Separator Train:
Pressure (psig)
Temperature (
o
F)
500 100
100 90
0 60
important concept is that all equipment in the well is describe in a consistent manner
0 0
12000 12000
perforations.
Type Measured
Depth (ft)
Inside
Diameter
(inches)
Inside
Roughness
(inches)
Rate Multiplier
1401
PROSPER
Xmas Tree 0
Tubing 11800 3.992 0.0018 1
Casing 12000 8.3 0.0018 1
o
F)
0 70
12000 300
2
/
o
F
3.1.39.4.4 IPR Data
300
o
F
GOR 6943.98 scf/STB
WGR 0 STB/MMscf
Examples Guide 1402
SKIN 5
This means that first the model options will be set up, then the PVT will be entered and
after this the downhole equipment will be inserted. Finally the inflow performance data
can be entered to complete the basic model and then this basic model can be matched
to field data to ensure that it is representative of the actual system. Once the model has
been built, calculations or designs can be performed.
opened, a new file will have been automatically generated. In this case, there is no need
to select File | New.
this case, the data is kept as the default for most of the options with the fluid being
changed to Retrograde Condensate and the method to Equation of State:
1403
PROSPER
To set up the Equation of State Options, select EOS Setup:
Examples Guide 1404
This screen is used to select the EoS model to be used as well as setting the path the
fluid will take to surface and other options.
The equation of state which was used during the characterisation process was the
Peng Robinson and therefore this should be selected at the top of the screen. During
the characterisation, the viscosity of the fluid was matched to laboratory data using the
Lohrenz, Bray Clark method. This should be selected for both the oil and gas viscosity
methods. If required, it is possible to model the viscosity of the fluid using other methods
such as the black oil correlations.
At the bottom of the screen, the path the fluid takes to surface can be entered. As we
are using an equation of state model, the composition will be flashed to standard
conditions to find the equivalent stock rate rates etc. As certain fluid properties (such as
GOR, Gas Gravity, Oil Gravity etc) are dependent upon the path taken to surface, it is
1405
PROSPER
important to enter a path to surface which is representative of the actual field values. In
this case, a three stage separator is entered.
When this section has been completed, select OK and the Done to return to the main
PROSPER screen.
can be seen below:
A file has previously been created in PVTp which is representative of our reservoir fluid.
This file is called T38_Retrograde_Condensate_EoS.prp and can be found in the
samples folder in the IPM installation directory - '~/Petroleum Experts/IPM 8/Samples/
PROSPER/'. Select Import...PRP to browse the file and import it:
Examples Guide 1406
When the file has been imported, enter the reservoir temperature and water salinity at
the bottom of the screen. To view the phase envelope of the fluid select Phase Env...:
1407
PROSPER
This will bring up the phase envelope screen. To the right hand side we can see that at
the reservoir temperature we have a dew point system. Select Plot to see the phase
envelope plot:
To exit the plot, select Exit and then select OK and then Done to return to the PROSPER
main screen.
each section:
Examples Guide 1408
1409
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1410
the table below:
Type MD (ft)
Inside
Diameter
(Inches)
Inside
Roughness
(Inches)
Rate Multiplier
X-mas Tree 0 1
Tubing 11800 3.992 0.0018 1
Casing 12000 8.3 0.0018 1
1411
PROSPER
the perforations.
Done.
input screen.
Examples Guide 1412
All of the downhole equipment and data has now been entered.
1413
PROSPER
inserted:
Examples Guide 1414
well:
1415
PROSPER
completed.
(VLP + IPR):
Examples Guide 1416
being considered.
and IPR curves).
pressure is set to 2500 psig, the GOR is set to 7432.66 scf/STB and WGR is set to 0
STB/MMscf. This data should therefore be added to the top left hand corner of the
screen:
1417
PROSPER
definition within the unstable region of the VLP curve. The flow correlation has also been
changed to Petroleum Experts 5 which is a mechanistic flow correlation.
Examples Guide 1418
The results screen will now show the system plot at the bottom of the screen. The details
of the solution point can be seen in the top right of the screen.
WGR is 0 STB/MMscf then the model predicts that the well will flow at approximately
36.8 MMscf/day and that the corresponding solution node pressure (which is equivalent
to the FBHP) is 5100.8 psig.
We can also view the system plot by selecting Plot | System Plot from the top ribbon:
be able to:
Build a PROSPER model for a fully compositional retrograde condensate well
using the different sections to input data.
set of conditions.
1419
PROSPER
3.1.40 Tutorial 38 - Validation of the Black Oil Retrograde Condensate
PVT Model
well has been drilled. PROSPER has been used to model the production from this well
using a characterised equation of state. The steps taken to build this file can be found in
Tutorial 37.
A new model is now required which, rather than using the EoS to model the fluid
properties, uses the 'Retrograde Condensate' black oil PVT model within PROSPER.
The black oil model for retrograde condensate fluids is a mathematical model which,
unlike other black oil models, should not be matched to laboratory data when using
PROSPER. This is because the match, while good at one given temperature, may cause
the equations to fall out of the boundaries they were original intended to operate in for
other temperatures and this could lead to unphysical results being calculated.
Rather than matching the model to data, instead we need to run a test to ensure that the
results calculated by the Black Oil model are the same as those calculated by the EoS
model. This procedure is referred to as the 'Validation' of the PVT model. This
validation is carried out by comparing the gradient calculation which results from each
PVT method for a number of different scenarios. If the two gradients are sufficiently
close for these cases we can be happy that the Black Oil model is representative of the
characterised EoS model and therefore also representative of the actual fluid.
3.1.40.2Objectives
Carry out the PVT Model Validation for the retrograde condensate well built in
Tutorial 37.
As the well model has already been created in a previous tutorial, this tutorial will focus
on the validation process.
Examples Guide 1420
a. While the model is set up with an EoS model, run a number of gradient
calculations and save the results to view later.
b. Extract the required data from the EoS model to build the Black Oil model.
c. Change the PVT Method from EoS to Black Oil and enter the Black Oil PVT
properties.
d. Run a number of gradient calculations over the same conditions as have
previously been performed for the EoS model.
e. Use the plotting system to compare the results of the two PVT methods to ensure
that both calculate the same values.
For the first part of this tutorial the following options will be used:
Later, these will be changed to:
Method Black Oil
3.1.40.4.2 PVT Data
The EoS model has already been imported into PROSPER during tutorial 38. From this
composition, we can find the following equivalent Black Oil properties:
Separator Temperature
60
o
F
Separator GOR 7432.66 scf/STB
1421
PROSPER
Separator Gas Gravity 0.74521
Tank GOR 1 scf/STB
Tank Gas Gravity 0.74521
Condensate Gravity 43.5668 API
Water to Gas Ratio 0
Mole Percent H
2
S 0%
Mole Percent CO
2
2.33%
Mole Percent N
2
0.31%
Dew Point at Reservoir Temperature 4897.24 psig
300
o
F
The separator pressure and temperature are set to standard conditions as the black oil
properties obtained from the EoS model are from a single stage flash. This means that
all of the gas is free in the separator and the tank GOR will be set to a very low value (1
scf/STB).
3.1.40.5.1 Calculating the Gradient with EoS PVT
Before changing the PVT method, we first have to calculate pressure gradients using
the Equation of State PVT model. Once the Tutorial 38 model has been opened, select
Calculation | Gradient (Traverse) from the top tool bar. In the top left hand corner of
the screen, the calculation parameters can be entered:
Examples Guide 1422
The First Node Pressure is coming to be used as a sensitivity variable and so the value
entered here will not be used in the calculations. When the data has been entered, and
the correlations selected, press Cases to enter the range of First Node Pressure
values which are to be performed:
The First Node Pressure can be selected from the first drop down list and then the
values entered in the fields below. When this has been completed, select Continue to
return to the previous screen.
1423
PROSPER
Select Calculate to perform the gradient calculations and then Plot to see the results
on a graph:
3.1.40.5.1.1 Saving the Plot Results
As these results are to be compared to results from another run, they need to be saved
so they can be recalled at a later time. This can be done by selecting the left hand red
disk above the plot:
Examples Guide 1424
Enter the name under which the plot is to be saved and then select Add.
This will transfer the results stream to the Master List. When this has been done select
OK to return to the previous screen and then Done to return to the main screen.
3.1.40.5.2 Extracting the PVT Data
In order to create an equivalent Black Oil PVT model, we first need to extract some of
the data from the EoS model.
1425
PROSPER
This can be done by selecting PVT | Input Data:
To find the equivalent Black Oil properties select Properties:
This gives the equivalent single stage flash properties for the fluid. Select OK to return
to the PVT screen.
Examples Guide 1426
We also need to know the dew point of this fluid and this can be calculated by selecting
Generate on the main PVT screen.
Once selected, enter the reservoir temperature into the temperature field and a
pressure into the pressure field. Select Calculate and then Calculate to find the
saturation pressure of the fluid at the reservoir temperature:
We now have data on the black oil properties and dew point of the fluid.
Select OK then OK and finally Done to return to the main PROSPER screen.
3.1.40.5.3 Changing the Model Set Up
Now that the calculations have been completed with the equation of state model (and
the equivalent black oil properties have been found) the model can be changed to be a
black oil model.
This can be done by entering the Options | Options screen.
1427
PROSPER
The Method field should be changed from Equation of State to Black Oil.
screen.
The next stage is to insert the new black oil PVT data into the model. The PVT input
screen can be accessed by selecting the PVT | Input Data tab. The PVT data to be
Examples Guide 1428
When the data has been entered, select Done to return to the PROSPER main screen.
3.1.40.5.5 Calculating the Gradient with BO PVT
To calculate the gradient calculations using the Black Oil PVT, select Calculation |
Gradient (Traverse) from the top tool bar. In the top left hand corner of the screen, the
calculation parameters can be entered:
1429
PROSPER
All of this data should be exactly the same as the previous calculation in order to allow a
fair comparison of the results.
The First Node Pressure is coming to be used as a sensitivity variable and so the value
entered here will not be used in the calculations. When the data has been entered, and
the correlations selected, press Cases to enter the range of First Node Pressure
values which are to be performed:
The First Node Pressure should still be here from the previous calculation and so
select Continue to return to the previous screen.
Examples Guide 1430
Select Calculate to perform the gradient calculations and then Plot to see the results
on a graph:
3.1.40.5.5.1 Recalling Saved Results
Now that the new results have been calculated, these need to be compared to the
previous results to see if they vary significantly. This can be done by selecting Bottom
the 'clock' button:
1431
PROSPER
This will bring up all of the different result streams which contain this data. Select all of
the results to be plotted, which in this case would be the EoS results which have been
saved and the current black oil results:
Examples Guide 1432
Select OK to plot these results:
1433
PROSPER
Now that all eight gradient calculations are plotted together we can see that the
difference between the results using the Black Oil PVT method and the EoS PVT
method is very small. At the bottom this is approximately 0.6% different. At this point we
can be happy that the two models will give approximately the same results and the
validation process can be said to have been completed.
Exit the plot and then select Done to return to the main screen. From the main screen,
select File | Save As.. to save the file.
be able to:
Perform the Validation process to see if the Black Oil Retrograde Condensate
PVT model is representative of a characterised Equation of State model.
Save result streams and recall them at a later point to compare the results of
two files together.
Examples Guide 1434
3.1.41 Tutorial 39 - Modelling a Fully Compositional CO2 Well
As part of a study into the storage of CO
2
in an underground reservoir, a PROSPER
model is to be built for an injector well which can estimate the pressure drop down the
well and also model the inflow into the reservoir. It is assumed that the reservoir fluid is
CO
2
, however, even when this is the case, it is normally best to model the IPR aspect of
the model using a numerical simulator. Numerical simulators should certainly be
consulted when injecting CO
2
into depleted hydrocarbon reservoirs as the immisciblity
of the injected fluid with the reservoir fluid and impact of temperature on the fluid may
have a large impact on the movement through the reservoir.
In order to capture the phase changes and fluid properties of the carbon dioxide at
different pressures and temperatures within the well, a fully compositional Equation of
State model has been developed in PVTp and this should be used to describe the PVT
properties. As it is possible that the fluid may be a liquid or a gas within different
segments of the well (depending upon the pressure and temperature) it is important that
the Retrograde Condensate fluid option is selected.
Once the model has been built, an estimate of the injection rate when the well head

3.1.41.2Objectives
Create a preliminary retrograde well model to which more information can be
added.
Import a characterised equation of state model to define the fluid's properties at
the different conditions within the well.
Perform a system calculation to estimate the flow rate of the well.
1435
PROSPER
performance and is controlled by the data in the 'Equipment Data' section of PROSPER
and also the PVT. These VLP curves define how much fluid can be lifted by the well at
given conditions. Finally, the IPR (or Inflow Performance Relationship) defines how
much fluid can flow from the reservoir into the wellbore at given conditions.
a. Set up the model so that a fully compositional equation of state can be imported.
b. Import the previously characterised EoS model into the PVT section.
c. The drilling and equipment information will be inserted into the model to define
d. An IPR is to be built using the Petroleum Experts IPR Model.
e. A system calculation will be performed to assess the likely production at the
given conditions.
Well Type Injector
3.1.41.4.2 PVT Data
The PVT is to be defined using a previously characterised equation of state. This has
been characterised using PVTp (the IPM suite's fluid characterisation program) and has
been exported into the file T40_CO2_EoS.prp. This file can be found in the samples
folder in the IPM installation directory - '~/Petroleum Experts/IPM 8/Samples/
Examples Guide 1436
PROSPER/'.
Some additional options and values are detailed below:
Equation of State Peng Robinson
Oil Viscosity Model Lohrenz, Bray Clark
Gas Viscosity Model Lohrenz, Bray Clark
Path to Surface Flash Straight to Stock Tank
Correct CO
2
Density Yes
important concept is that all equipment in the well is described in a consistent manner
0 0
14500 14500
perforations.
1437
PROSPER
Type Measured
Depth (ft)
Inside Diameter
(inches)
Inside Roughness
(inches)
Rate Multiplier
Xmas Tree 0
Tubing 1200 3.992 0.0006 1
SSSV 3.8 1
Tubing 14000 3.992 0.0006 1
Casing 14500 6.4 0.0006 1
When using the 'Improved Approximation' temperature model, the overall heat transfer
o
F)
Overall Heat Transfer
Coefficient (BTU/hr/ft
2
/
o
F)
0 60 3
14500 313 3
3.1.41.4.4 IPR Data
Inflow
Model
Petroleum
Experts
Skin Model Enter Skin
By Hand
Reservoir
Pressure
4500 psig
Examples Guide 1438
Reservoir
Temperatu
re
313
o
F
GOR 1e6 scf/
STB
WGR 0 STB/
MMscf
Reservoir
Permeabilit
y
35 md
Reservoir
Thickness
75 ft
Drainage
Area
450 acres
Dietz
Shape
Factor
31.6
WellBore
Radius
0.354 ft
Perforation
Interval
75 ft
Time Since
Production
Started
50 days
Reservoir
Porosity
0.19
Connate
Water
Saturation
0.2
Non-Darcy
Flow
Factor (D)
Calculated
Permeabilit
y Entered
Total
Permeabil
ity
SKIN 12
1439
PROSPER
This means that first the model options will be set up, then the PVT will be entered and
after this the downhole equipment will be inserted. Finally the inflow performance data
can be entered to complete the basic model and then this basic model can be matched
to field data to ensure that it is representative of the actual system. Once the model has
been built, calculations or designs can be performed.
opened, a new file will have been automatically generated. In this case, there is no need
to select File | New.
this case, the data is kept as the default for most of the options with the 'Fluid' being
changed to Retrograde Condensate and the Method to Equation of State and Well
Type to Injector:
To set up the Equation of State Options, select EOS Setup:
Examples Guide 1440
This screen is used to select the EoS model to be used as well as setting the path the
fluid will take to surface and other options.
The equation of state which was used during the characterisation process was the
Peng Robinson and therefore this should be selected at the top of the screen. If
required, it is possible to model the viscosity of the fluid using other methods such as
the black oil correlations.
New to IPM v8.0 (PROSPER v12.0) is the ability to model the CO
2
properties using the
Correct CO2 Density option. This will apply a volume shift to the EoS selected so that
the density calculated for CO
2
fluids match those which come from the field and also
uses new enthalpy values to ensure that the heat capacities etc of the fluid are captured
accurately. This new method has been shown to recreate the values obtained using the
Span Wagner EoS but is also able to handle CO
2
streams with high percentages of
1441
PROSPER
other impurities.
At the bottom of the screen, the path which the fluid takes to surface can be entered. As
we are using an equation of state model, the composition will be flashed to standard
conditions to find the equivalent stock rate rates etc. As certain fluid properties (such as
GOR, Gas Gravity, Oil Gravity etc) are dependent upon the path taken to surface, it is
important to enter a path to surface which is representative of the actual field values. In
this case, the values will be obtained by flashing the fluid straight to the stock tank
conditions and not passing though any separator trains.
When this section has been completed, select OK and the Done to return to the main
PROSPER screen.
When calculating CO
2
properties relatively small changes in pressure and temperature
can cause a large change in the fluid's properties as the phase can change. In order to
avoid these sudden changes in the fluid properties the step length can be reduced. This
will increase the time it takes to carry out the calculation however it should allow the
calculations to be more accurate. This can be done by selecting File | Preferences and
then selecting the Limits tab:
At the bottom of the screen the Calculation Step Length can be changed to 50 feet. In
order for the calculation to use this step length, also select Use Correlation Step Length
Examples Guide 1442
to Yes.
can be seen below:
A file has previously been created in PVTp which is representative of our reservoir fluid.
This file is called T40_CO2_EoS.prp and can be found in the samples folder in the IPM
installation directory - '~/Petroleum Experts/IPM 8/Samples/PROSPER/'. Select
Import...PRP to browse the file and import it:
1443
PROSPER
The reservoir temperature and water salinity should be inserted at the bottom of the
screen.
Select Done to return to the PROSPER main screen.
each section:
Examples Guide 1444
The Injected Fluid Temperature should be set as 75
o
F.
1445
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1446
the table below:
Type Measured
Depth (ft)
Inside Diameter
(inches)
Inside Roughness
(inches)
Rate Multiplier
Xmas Tree 0
Tubing 1200 3.992 0.0006 1
SSSV 3.8 1
Tubing 14000 3.992 0.0006 1
Casing 14500 6.4 0.0006 1
1447
PROSPER
the perforations.
Done.
travels up the well and is used in the calculation of heat transfer. The overall heat transfer
coefficient is also input into this screen and the value should account for the heat
transfer from the fluid to the surroundings. The geothermal gradient and U values
Examples Guide 1448
input screen.
1449
PROSPER
All of the downhole equipment and data has now been entered.
Examples Guide 1450
inserted:
1451
PROSPER
well:
Examples Guide 1452
completed.
(VLP + IPR):
1453
PROSPER
being considered.
and IPR curves).

pressure is set to 2500 psig, the GOR is set to 7432.66 scf/STB and WGR is set to 0
STB/MMscf. This data should therefore be added to the top left hand corner of the
screen:
Examples Guide 1454
definition within the unstable region of the VLP curve. The flow correlation has also been
changed to Petroleum Experts 2 which is a mechanistic flow correlation.
1455
PROSPER
It can be seen from this screen that if the well head pressure is 1250 psig and the WGR
is 0 STB/MMscf then the model predicts that the well will flow at approximately 40.5
the FBHP) is 5948 psig.
be able to:
Build a PROSPER model for a fully compositional carbon dioxide injection well
using the different sections to input data.
set of conditions.
Examples Guide 1456
3.1.42 Tutorial 40 Enthalpy Balance Temperature Model Example
using a characterised equation of state and also to validate the retrograde condensate
black oil model to ensure that the results of both were consistent with each other. These
steps were carried out in Tutorial 37 and Tutorial 38.
Now that the PVT has been robustly matched, the next step is to ensure that the
temperature model is calculating an accurate result for the temperature. It is believed
that as the fluid is travelling up the well, the temperature change is due not just to the
heat transfer with the surroundings but also due to the Joules Thompson effect where
the pressure drop can lead to a change in the temperature of the fluid. The previously
used temperature model (the 'Rough Approximation') calculates the temperature
independently of pressure and therefore such phenomena as this will not be captured. It
is therefore required to use a more robust temperature model such as the 'Enthalpy
Balance' temperature model which as well as considering pressure dependent
temperature changes, will calculate the heat transfer to the surroundings based upon the
conduction, convection (both natural and forced) and radiation. This model requires a
large additional amount of data to be inserted as it calculates these mechanisms from
the specific well properties and the lithology of the surroundings.
A down-hole temperature gauge reading is available to compare the results to when the
model has been completed. As the enthalpy balance calculation is more detailed and
rigorous, we would also like to gain an idea of how the equivalent over heat transfer
coefficient changes over the length of the well so that this can be inserted in an
'Improved Approximation' model at a later date.
3.1.42.2Objectives
Learn the required input parameters to build a well model using the 'Enthalpy
1457
PROSPER
Balance' temperature model.
Calculate the pressure and temperature gradient for a given set of conditions
and compare the measured gauge temperature to that calculated in the model.
See how the equivalent overall heat transfer coefficient changes over the depth
of the well.
As the basic file has already been built, and the PVT has been confirmed as being
representative of the actual fluid, this tutorial will concentrate on the additional input
fields which are required to build an 'Enthalpy Balance' temperature model. As the
temperature model is used to model the temperature as the fluid travels up the wellbore,
this additional data will affect the calculation of the VLP curve and will be inserted in the
Equipment Section.
a. Enable the 'Enthalpy Balance' temperature model.
the down-hole equipment. This will be used to calculate the VLP curves.
c. A system calculation will be performed to assess the likely production at the
given conditions by combining the VLP and IPR curves. From this intersection, a
gradient calculation will be run to see how the equivalent overall heat transfer
coefficient is changing with depth.
Calculation Type:
Predict Pressure and Temperature (on land)
Model Enthalpy Balance
Examples Guide 1458
the well.
important idea is that all equipment in the well is described in a consistent manner with
respect to the reference depth selected. In this case, the deviation has already been
entered in the previous file and can be seen below:
MD (ft) TVD (ft)
0 0
12000 12000
perforations.
Type
MD
(ft)
Tubing
Inside
Diameter
(Inches)
Tubing
Outside
Diameter
(inches)
Inside
Roughne
ss
(Inches)
Insulatio
n
Rate
Multiplier
X-mas Tree 0 1
Mild Steel
Tubing
1000 3.992 4.5 0.0018 None 1
SSSV 3.5 1
Mild Steel
Tubing
11800 3.992 4.5 0.0018 None 1
1459
PROSPER
3.1.42.4.2.3 Temperature Data
The following temperature data is available for the well.
Air Temperature 70
o
F
Humidity 25 %
Ground Level with respect to Origin 0 ft
Air Velocity 3 ft/sec
o
F)
0 70
12000 300
3.1.42.4.2.4 Drilling and Completion Data
Below is the available data on the completion:
Model Convection in Mud No
Completion Fluid Liquid Type Calcium Bromide
Completion Fluid 12 lb/US gal
Completion Fluid Gas Type Air
Packer Depth 11000 ft
Mid Production Depth 12000 ft
Annulus Liquid Level 0 ft
Lev
el
Drilling
Depth
Hole
Diameter
Casing
Shoe
Casing
Outside
Casing
Weight
Top
Cemen
Casing
Top
Mud
Density
Examples Guide 1460
(ft) (inches)
Depth
(ft)
Diameter
(inches)
(lb/ft
3
)
t Depth
(ft)
Depth
(ft)
(lb/US
gal)
1 5000 12 5000 11.5 90.7 0 0 11.7
2 8000 10.5 8000 8.5 56.4 5000 0 11.7
3 12000 8.5 12000 7.2 47.1 7500 0 11.7
3.1.42.4.2.5 Lithology Data
300
o
F
Lev
el
Formatio
n Type
Bottom
Depth
(feet)
Shaline
ss
(fractio
n)
Porosit
y
(fraction
)
Perme
ability
(md)
Rock
Consist
ency
In Situ
Fluid
Salinit
y
(ppm)
1 Shale 4000
2
Sandston
e
9750 0.1 0.12 5
Consolid
ated
Water 15000
3 Shale 12000
3.1.42.4.2.6 Gauge Data
Gauge Depth 8500 ft
Gauge Temperature
255
o
F
Gas Rate 35 MMscf
GOR 7432.66 scf/STB
CGR 0 STB/MMScf
1461
PROSPER
Days Since Production Started 50 days
As the main file has already been created, this tutorial will concentrate on the 'Enthalpy
Balance' temperature model and the required input data. The mode can be activated on
Examples Guide 1462
This well has been drilled on-land, therefore, as well as selecting Enthalpy Balance,
also select Pressure and Temperature (on land).
screen.
As the PVT data has already been entered, pass straight to the definition of the
equipment.
each section:
1463
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1464
1465
PROSPER
This has not been changed from the base file and therefore nothing requires to be
changed.
is produced up the well bore. A more detailed description of the well is now available as
shown below:
Type
MD
(ft)
Tubing
Inside
Diameter
(Inches)
Tubing
Outside
Diameter
(inches)
Inside
Roughne
ss
(Inches)
Insulatio
n
Rate
Multiplier
X-mas Tree 0 1
Mild Steel
Tubing
1000 3.992 4.5 0.0018 None 1
SSSV 3.5 1
Mild Steel
Tubing
11800 3.992 4.5 0.0018 None 1
Examples Guide 1466
Unlike the previous model, the casing is not inserted into the down hole equipment
screen. The casing will be defined based upon the bottom most point of the drilling
section. As the down hole equipment only now defines to the bottom of the tubing, it no
longer defines the bottom hole depth. This is set in the Drilling screen.
Done.
All of the data related to the temperature of the surroundings is entered in this screen:
1467
PROSPER
This includes both the downhole geothermal gradient and the surface conditions. If the
well had been selected as being off shore, information on the temperature and velocity
of the sea would also be required.
When this data has been inserted, select Done.
3.1.42.5.2.5 Drilling and Completion Data
The drilling depths and fluids are inserted into the next screen:
Examples Guide 1468
The drilling depth will now become the bottom of the well and this will also become the
solution node for the majority of calculations.
The different casing dimensions and fluid properties will be used during the calculation
of the heat transfer to the surroundings. Once this data has been inserted, select Done.
3.1.42.5.2.6 Lithology Data
Depending upon the rock past which the fluid flows, the heat transfer will change. It is
therefore important to capture the changes in the rock lithology at different depths. This
is done in the Lithology screen:
1469
PROSPER
The reservoir pressure and temperature are also inserted along with a description of
the different formation types which the well has been drilled through.
When the data has been inserted, select Done to proceed to the next screen.
3.1.42.5.2.7 Databases
PROSPER contains with the thermal properties of many different fluids and other
substances (cement/formation types etc). These databases are fully editable and so if
field data shows that certain values should be used, these can be entered by the user.
In this case, the default properties will be used and therefore select Done to continue to
the next screen:
In this case 1 gauge has been specified at 8500 ft and so once this has been inserted,
select Done to return to the main 'Equipment Data' screen:
Examples Guide 1470
From the main equipment data page, select Done to return to the main screen.
(VLP + IPR).

pressure is set to 2500 psig and the WGR and GOR are set as 0 STB/MMscf and
7432.66 scf/STB respectfully. The time since production started should be set to 50
days. This data should therefore be added to the top left hand corner of the screen:
1471
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1472
the FBHP) is 5076 psig. This is within 5% of our measured rate for the same conditions.
In order to get a closer match, the VLP/IPR matching process detailed in Tutorial 20
would have to be followed.
If we look at the results table in the centre of the screen, we can see that for a rate of 35
MMscf/day the gauge temperature is 261.6
o
F. This is approximately 2.5% different
from our measured temperature at the same conditions and so we can be happy that
the temperature is being modelled in line with reality.
1473
PROSPER
This shows the VLP/IPR intersection for the given set of conditions.
To exit the plot, press the red cross in the top right hand corner of the screen.
3.1.42.5.3.3 Calculating the Equivalent U Values
Now that the solution point for these conditions has been found, a gradient calculation
can be carried out using this rate and the set conditions. This can be done by selecting
Sensitivity PvD:
This will transfer the results to a gradient calculation screen. Select Calculate to carry
out the calculation:
Examples Guide 1474
From these results we can see that there is a marked difference in the heat transfer
coefficient (U value) between the depths of 9500 and 4000 ft compared to above and
below this section. If we look back to the lithology that was entered, this is due to the
formation being made up of limestone rather than shale at this depth. It is therefore
clear, that a single heat transfer coefficient would not be sufficient to model this well.
Instead, a table of tables could be used as shown below:
Measured Depth
(ft)
Formation
Temperature (
o
F)
U value
(BTU/h/ft
2
/F)
0 70
4000 146.67 2.63
1475
PROSPER
9500 253 4
12000 300 2
The U value is the after over the given length while the formation temperature is at that
given depth. This table could now be used in a different model if the 'Improved
Approximation' model were to be used.
Select Main to return to the main PROSPER screen. To save the file select File | Save
As...
be able to:
Build a PROSPER model using Enthalpy Balance temperature model.
set of conditions.
From the resultant solution point, calculate the equivalent Overall Heat
Transfer Coefficient.
Examples Guide 1476
3.1.43 Tutorial 41 Improved Approximation Temperature Model
Example
using a characterised equation of state and also to validate the retrograde condensate
black oil model to ensure that the results of both were consistent with each other. These
steps were carried out in Tutorial 38 and Tutorial 39.
Now that the PVT has been robustly matched, the next step is to ensure that the
temperature model is calculating an accurate result for the temperature. It is believed
that as the fluid is travelling up the well, the temperature change is due not just to the
heat transfer with the surroundings but also due to the Joules Thompson effect for which
the pressure drop can lead to a change in the temperature of the fluid. A previous model
used the Enthalpy Balance temperature model to predict the temperature of the fluid as
it travels up the well. This is a very detailed model which takes into account the different
heat transfer mechanisms which are present within the well; however, it requires a large
amount of input data and also the time taken to complete calculations is increased.
VLP curves are to be generated for this new well and it has been suggested that the
results which were found from the 'Enthalpy Balance' model (Tutorial 40) be used to
build a model with the Improved Approximation temperature model. Once this has
been checked to ensure that the test rate and gauge temperature reading using both
methods are the same then the new VLP curves can be generated.
3.1.43.2Objectives
Convert an 'Enthalpy Balance' model to an 'Improved Approximation' model
Calculate the pressure and temperature gradient for a given set of conditions
and compare the measured gauge temperature to that calculated in the model.
1477
PROSPER
Generate VLP curves to be used in GAP to build an Integrated Production
Model.
representative of the actual fluid, this tutorial will concentrate on the additional input
fields which are required to build an 'Enthalpy Balance' temperature model. As the
temperature model is used to model the temperature as the fluid travels up the wellbore,
this additional data will affect the calculation of the VLP curve and will be inserted in the
Equipment Section.
a. Enable the 'Improved Approximation' temperature model.
b. Enter the previously defined temperature data.
c. A system calculation will be performed to assess the likely production at the
given conditions by combining the VLP and IPR curves.
d. Check the gauge pressure at the solution rate to ensure that the same
temperature profile is being calculated.
e. Generate VLP curves to be imported into GAP.
Calculation Type:
Model Improved Approximation
Examples Guide 1478
This data has been found during Tutorial 41:
Measured Depth
(ft)
Formation
Temperature (
o
F)
U value
(BTU/h/ft
2
/F)
0 70 2.63
4000 146.67 2.63
9500 253 4
12000 300 2
As the main file has already been created, this tutorial will concentrate on the 'Improved
Approximation' temperature model and the required input data. The mode can be
activated on the Options | Options screen:
1479
PROSPER
For the temperature model select Improved Approximation.
screen.
As the PVT data has already been entered, pass straight to the definition of the
equipment.
This will bring up the 'Equipment Data' screen. As we are interested in only inserting
data into the Temperature Data section, select the button to the left of the title to open
the screen:
Examples Guide 1480
All of the data related to the temperature of the surroundings and the heat transfer
coefficients are entered in this screen:
1481
PROSPER
This information has been gathered directly from the 'Enthalpy Balance' model and so
we can be confident that the temperature is being accurately modelled.
When this data has been inserted, select Done to return to the Equipment screen and
the Done again to exit to the main screen.
Now that the new temperature data has been inserted into PROSPER, the next step is to
(VLP + IPR).
Examples Guide 1482

pressure is set to 2500 psig and the WGR and GOR are set as 0 STB/MMscf and
7432.66 scf/STB respectfully. This is exactly the same data as was used in the enthalpy
balance example so that the result can be compared. This data should therefore be
added to the top left hand corner of the screen:
1483
PROSPER
the FBHP) is 5077 psig. This is within 1% of the results obtained when the 'Enthalpy
Balance' model was used.
If we look at the results table in the centre of the screen, we can see that for a rate of 35
MMscf/day the gauge temperature is 262.2
o
F. This is approximately 0.25% from the
value which was calculated using the 'Enthalpy Balance' model (261.6
o
F). This means
that as the pressure and temperature is the same between the two models that the
model is representative of the enthalpy balance model.
Examples Guide 1484
This shows the VLP/IPR intersection for the given set of conditions.
To exit the plot, press the red cross in the top right hand corner of the screen and the
select Done to return to the main screen.
Now that we are able to reproduce the gauge temperature and pressure for a given set
of conditions, we want to generate VLP curve tables to be exported to GAP for use in an
1485
PROSPER
As the first node pressure is one of the variables we will be changing, the value entered
here will not be used. The Water Gas Ratio and Total GOR are also to be usd in the
sensitivity and so will be over written. The Inlet Fluid Temperature can be set to the
reservoir temperature.
entered:
Examples Guide 1486
and then Done.
which are to be changed in the VLP tables. For a condensate production well, these
variables should be the First Node Pressure (i.e. the wellhead pressure), the Total
GOR and the Water Gas Ratio. To enter these ranges select Cases.
be done by selecting Generate.
1487
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1488
1489
PROSPER
click Calculate:
Please note that this calculation will take some time (due to the models which have
been selected and number of calculations involved) and therefore if the User is doing
this tutorial for learning purposes, it may be best to follow the remainder of this example
without carrying out the steps
Examples Guide 1490
1491
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1492
be able to:
Build a PROSPER well using the Improved Approximation temperature model.
Generate lift curves which can be exported to GAP or REVEAL.
1493
PROSPER
3.1.44 Tutorial 42 Modelling a Steam Injection Well
In a number of reservoirs around the world, the viscous nature of the reservoir fluid
means that it can be very hard to produce due to the low mobility that results. In some of
these cases, one possible solution is to heat up the reservoir and in doing so reduce the
viscosity of the reservoir fluid. When the viscosity has been reduced, the mobility
increases and the fluid can be produced out of the reservoir.
The energy required to increase the temperature within the reservoir can be provided by
injecting steam into the reservoir. The steam is said to have a Quality which is the ratio
of the fluid which is steam to the total fluid. If the quality is 1 then the fluid is entirely
steam and if it is 0 then it is entirely water. For a given pressure, the quality can only be
between these two values at the saturation temperature. Under these conditions, the
quality is determined from the enthalpy of the fluid.
For this system, the previously created water injector model is to be converted into a
steam injector. The steam is to be injected at 2200 psig and therefore the saturation
temperature of the steam at this pressure should be calculated.
The impact that changing the quality of the steam at the wellhead has on the gradient
within the well is to be analysed.
The IPR section of the model will not be used as to model the impact of the steam
injection of the reservoir it is best to use a thermal numerical simulator such as REVEAL
.
3.1.44.2Objectives
Learn what is required to build a steam injection well.
Calculate the saturation temperature of steam at a given pressure and see how
enthalpy affects the quality.
Examples Guide 1494
Run a sensitivity to see the impact that changing the enthalpy (and therefore the
quality) of the steam at wellhead has on the gradient within the well.
As the basic file has already been built for the water injection example, the steps taken
in this tutorial will concentrate on what is required to build a steam injection model.
a. Enable the 'Improved Approximation' temperature model and steam calculations.
b. Calculate the saturation temperature of steam at 2200 psig and see what impact
changing the enthalpy of the fluid has on the quality of the steam.
c. A gradient calculation will be performed with different enthalpy values being
assigned to the fluid at the wellhead to see the impact of changing the steam
quality at the wellhead.
Calculation Type:
Model Improved Approximation
Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient
2 BTU/h/ft
2
/
o
F
1495
PROSPER
As the main file has already been created, this tutorial will concentrate converting this
water injection well into a steam injection well. In order to model steam either the
Enthalpy Balance or Improved Approximation temperature models must be selected.
In this case we will use the Improved Approximation model and this can be activated on
When the Improved Approximation model is selected, the second option of Steam
Calculation becomes available. This should be set to Allow.
screen.
When calculating the gradient for a steam well, small changes in pressure and
temperature can lead to sudden changes in the steam quality and properties. To avoid
this from disrupting the calculations performed in PROSPER, we can set the step length
especially for steam wells. The default step length will still be used for non-steam wells.
Examples Guide 1496
This step length can be set in the Limits tab of the File | Preferences screen:
Set the Steam Step Length to 20 feet and Use Steam Step Length to Yes and then
select Done to return to the main screen.
3.1.44.5.2 Calculating Saturation Temperature
When the steam modelling capabilities of PROSPER have been enabled, it is possible
to access the steam tables by selecting PVT | Steam Calculator:
The calculator can be used to generate at single condition or a range of values for
1497
PROSPER
different conditions. In this case select Calculate Single.
When the single calculation is used, the pressure and enthalpy of the fluid should be
entered. This will calculate the Saturation Temperature at the given pressure and also
calculate the Quality for the given enthalpy value. Insert the Pressure as 2200 psig and
the Enthalpy as 1100 BTU/lb:
Examples Guide 1498
This shows that for these conditions, the Saturation Temperature is 650.45
o
F and the
steam is two phase with a Steam Quality of 0.955.
If the enthalpy is decreased to 900 BTU/lb the temperature remains the same as the
Saturation Temperature and the fluid is still in two phases but not the Steam Quality
has dropped to 0.48:
1499
PROSPER
If the enthalpy is increased to 1200 BTU/lb, then the fluid becomes a single phase gas
and the temperature rises to 689.45
o
F, which is above the saturation temperature:
When the steam calculations have been completed, select OK and then OK to return to
the main screen.
Now that the 'Improved Approximation' model has been enabled the temperature data
required has changed. This therefore needs to be changed in the System | Equipment
(Tubing etc) screen.
This will bring up the 'Equipment Data' screen. First the saturation temperature of the
steam can be entered as the injection temperature (650
o
F). As we are interested in only
inserting data into the Temperature Data section, select the button to the left of the title
Examples Guide 1500
to open only this screen:
All of the data related to the temperature of the surroundings and the heat transfer
coefficients are entered in this screen:
1501
PROSPER
In this case the heat transfer coefficient entered for this well is assumed to be 2 BTU/h/ft
2
/
o
F.
When this data has been inserted, select Main to return to the main PROSPER screen.
3.1.44.5.4 Running a Gradient Calculation
Now that the steam data has been inserted into PROSPER, we can carry out a series of
gradient calculations to see the impact of steam quality on the injection profile.
Gradient calculations can be run by selecting Calculation | Gradient (traverse) from
the main toolbar.
At this time, we wish to calculate the pressure provides in the well when we inject a
certain fixed rate (4000 STB/day) with varying steam qualities. The injection pressure is
assumed to be 2200 psig and at this pressure the saturation temperature has been
found to be 650
o
F. As the injection fluid is water (in the form of steam) the Water Cut
should be entered as 100% while the GOR is set to 0 scf/STB. This data should
therefore be added to the top left hand corner of the screen:
Examples Guide 1502
The Steam Choice should be set to Enter Enthalpy although the enthalpy entered will be
over written by the sensitivity and therefore any value can be entered.
Once this data has been entered, select Cases to enter the sensitivity values for the
study. Select Steam Enthalpy from the drop down list and insert the values shown
below:
1503
PROSPER
When this has been entered select Continue to return to the main calculation screen.
3.1.44.5.4.2 Running a Gradient Calculation
It is now possible to run a gradient calculation for each of the sensitivity variables. Select
Calculate to run the calculation:
Once the calculation is completed, select Plot to see the gradient traverse for each
variable:
Examples Guide 1504
This shows that when the steam quality which enters the well is higher, the pressure
gained as the fluid travels down the well is smaller. This is due in part to the smaller
density which leads to a reduced hydrostatic head but also to an increased volume
which leads to increased velocity and therefore increased friction pressure drop which
acts against the hydrostatic head. If the enthalpy is increased further, in fact, the
pressure within the well can be seen to drop as the frictional pressure drop actually
exceeds the pressure gain from the hydrostatic head.
While we know the enthalpy of the fluid as it enters the well, what we are really interested
in the the steam quality both at the well head and also at the bottom hole as this will be
the fluid which enters the reservoir. To view the steam quality of each stream, first
remove the pressure gradients by selecting Remove All from the plot toolbar:
When the plots have been removed, select Steam Quality from the variable list in the
bottom left hand corner and select the clock icon:
1505
PROSPER
On the next screen select all of the streams and select OK:
Examples Guide 1506
This will bring up the plot of the quality variation with depth:
1507
PROSPER
From this plot we can see that the different enthalpy values mean that the steam enters
the well at 48%, 60%, 71.8%, 83.7% and 95.6% quality respectively. At the bottom of
the well, however, the lower three enthalpy values all have a steam quality of 0 meaning
that only water is being injected. Steam qualities of 38% and 55% are injected for the
higher enthalpy values. This shows that it is very important to consider the well when
modelling steam injection into a reservoir so as to ensure that actually steam will be
injected rather than just hot water.
Close the plot and then select Main to return to the main PROSPER screen. To save the
file select File | Save As...
be able to:
Build a PROSPER model to model a steam injector.
Calculate the saturation temperature and steam quality for a given set of
conditions using the steam calculator.
Carry out a gradient calculation to see the changes in the steam quality as it
travels through the network.
Examples Guide 1508
3.1.45 Tutorial 43 General Flow Assurance Features
Within PROSPER, there are a number of different features which can be used to help
assess the flow assurance issues that may arise during production. This tutorial looks
into three of the main areas of interest and shows how they can be identified. This three
main areas are:
Instability and Liquid Loading in the wellbore
Hydrate Formation and Inhibitors
Erosional Velocity Limits
Using the file created in Tutorial 41 as a starting point, this tutorial will give examples of
how each different issue can be identified using the different features available within
PROSPER. In the case of hydrate formation, the new features which allow the water
composition to be exploited as an inhibitor will also be explored.
3.1.45.2Objectives
Show and understand the different techniques which can be used for predicting
the onset of instability and liquid loading within the well.
Set up the model to predict the hydrate curve of a fluid for a certain water
composition and then use this hydrate curve to predict if a hydrate will form under
a certain set of conditions.
Compare the erosional velocity to the fluid velocity in the well to see if the limit is
being exceeded for the given conditions.
representative of the actual fluid, this tutorial will concentrate on how the built model can
1509
PROSPER
now be used to in flow assurance studies.
a. Use the test data provided to analyse if the flowing conditions are stable by
observing the shape of the VLP curve.
b. Use the test data provided to analyse if the flowing conditions are stable by
applying the Turner Velocity Crierion for the given condition.
c. Use the test data provided to analyse if the flowing conditions are stable by
checking the frictional gradient calculated by the PE5 model in a Gradient
Calculation.
d. After activating the Equation of State option, calculate the hydrate formation
curve for the given water compositions to view the impact of salt as an inhibitor.
e. Carry out a VLP calculation to see if the calculated hyrate formation conditions
are entered for the model.
f. Carry out a gradient calculation to see at what depth in the well, if any, hydrates
are likely to form.
g. Calculate a VLP curve to see at what rates the erosional velocity limit of the well
is exceeded.
The following data will be used in this tutorial.
3.1.45.4.1 Test Data
This data will be used to predict the onset of instability within the well.
Gas Oil Ratio 7432.66 scf/STB
Inlet Temperature
300
o
F
Gas Rate 4 MMscf/day
Examples Guide 1510
3.1.45.4.2 Water Salinity Data
Water 1 Water 2
NaCl 2.15% 4.52%
CaCl2 0.89% 0.94%
KBr 0.12% 0.24%
3.1.45.5.1 Instability and Liquid Loading
One objective which can be achieved using PROSPER is to try to determine when a well
will become unstable or begin liquid loading. While the program cannot model the
effects of liquid loading (as this is a transient phenomena) it can be used to predict the
onset using a number of different techniques.
To show how this different techniques can be used, a set of conditions have been
measured as shown below:
Gas Oil Ratio 7432.66 scf/STB
Inlet Temperature
300
o
F
Gas Rate 4 MMscf/day
Using the different instability methods, the objective is to calculate if these conditions
are likely to be producing in a steady manner or if the well is likely to be unstable.
1511
PROSPER
3.1.45.5.1.1 Unstable VLP Curves
This section will detail how to assess the stability of the well based upon the shape of
the VLP curves.
When a multiphase fluid is produced from a well, the pressure drop within the well is
calculated using the mixture density of the fluid. This mixture density is dependent upon
the hold-up (the ratio of the area taken up by the liquid to the total area of the section)
which in turn is dependent upon the difference in velocities between the two phases (the
slip). The higher this slip, the greater the area inhabited by the liquid and therefore the
greater the mixture density and pressure drop.
A typical VLP curve for a multiphase fluid is shown below:
This can be split into two main regions; the region to the left of the minimum pressure
point and the region to the right of the minimum pressure point.
The region to the left of the minimum point is called the Gravity Dominated or Unstable
Region. As the rate increases, the pressure or energy required to lift the fluid
decreases. This is because, at the low rates, the difference between the gas and liquid
velocities is high and therefore the hold-up increases. This increase in hold-up
increases the pressure drop as the mixture density will increase. This region of the
curve is inherently unstable and producing a rate within this region may cause liquid
loading to occur.
The region to the right of the minimum point is called the Friction Dominated or Stable
Region. Here, as the rate increases, the pressure or energy required to lift the fluid to
the surface increases. The increase in rate acts to increase the velocity of the two
Examples Guide 1512
phases and so the difference between the velocities is reduced. This is turn reduces the
pressure drop. The friction can be said to have a stabilising effect on the well as it
moves the solution point further away from the unstable region.
The minimum point of the curve is often referred to as the Minimum Point of Stability. If
the rate were to fall below this value, then the well may become unstable and liquid
loading may occur.
In order to see if the conditions of the test are predicted to be unstable the VLP needs
to be calculated. Once the curve has been calculated, if the rate falls within the unstable,
left hand side of the curve then we can say that the flow will be unstable.
Once the file for Tutorial 42 has been opened, the VLP can be generated by entering
the Calculation | VLP (tubing curves) screen.
In the top left of the screen, the test conditions should be entered:
Select the Vertical Lift Correlation to be Petroleum Experts 5 and the Rate Method as
Automatic - Geometric.
To generate the VLP curve select Calculate and then to view the curve select Plot:
1513
PROSPER
This shows that the test rate, 4 MMscf/day, is located to the left of the minimum stable
rate and therefore can be said to be unstable.
The plot can be exited by selecting the red cross in the top right hand corner.
3.1.45.5.1.2 Turner Velocity
This section will detail how to assess the stability of the well based upon the Turner
Criterion.
The Turner Equation can be used to predict the velocity of gas required to lift the
droplets of liquid up the well. This work is based upon a momentum balance of a single
droplet of liquid and calculates the minimum velocity required to provide the necessary
momentum to carry the liquid upwards.
More information (including a reference to the original paper) can be found in the
Calculation Options section.
When the VLP curves are generated, a gradient calculation is carried out for each rate
of the curve to find the flowing bottom hole pressure required to lift the fluid. At every
interval step, the Turner Velocity and the Total No-Slip Velocity are calculated. If at any
point, this No-Slip velocity falls below the Turner Velocity, it means that there is a risk
that the gas will not be able to lift the liquid droplet and therefore liquid loading will occur.
If this happens, the Liquid Loading Flag is raised for this point.
If the well were to produce a rate which has a Liquid Loading flag next to it, this would
imply that according to the Turner Equation, liquid loading may occur at these
Examples Guide 1514
conditions.
To see if the fluid velocity drops below the Turner Velocity for the given test rate, the
VLP curve can be analysed.
If this step is being performed directly from the section on the Unstable VLP Curve
tutorial then the VLP screen will already be open. If not, the VLP can be calculated by
selecting Calculations | VLP (tubing curves) from the main toolbar.
In the top left of the screen, the test conditions should be entered:
Select the Vertical Lift Correlation to be Petroleum Experts 5 and the Rate Method as
User Selected. In the rate section, enter rates of 3.8, 4, 4.2 and 4.4 MMscf/day. Select
Calculate to generate the VLP curve for these rates:
1515
PROSPER
From the VLP table in the centre of the screen, we can see that the Liquid Loading Flag
has been set to yes for the rates below 4.2 MMscf/day. This means that if the rate is
below 4.2 MMscf/day, the Turner Criterion suggests that the velocity of the gas will not
have the momentum to carry the liquid droplets up the well. Liquid loading would
therefore occur within the well.
This same analysis can be carried out when a system calculation is performed. If the
intersection point between the VLP and IPR curves was to occur at a rate with the flag
enabled, then the well may be unstable if produced.
3.1.45.5.1.3 Predicting Instability using Petroleum Experts 5
This section will detail how to assess the stability of the well using the Petroleum
Experts 5 multiphase model in a gradient calculation.
The Petroleum Experts 5 multiphase model is a mechanistic model which means that
rather than being built on the basis of empirical data, it uses fundamental physics
(momentum balances etc) to calculate the holdup within the well under different
conditions.
One additional feature which is present within Petroleum Experts 5 is the ability to
predict when a well will be unstable based upon the frictional gradient of the well. If the
model finds that the frictional gradient is negative for a production well, then this
implies that some of the fluid is falling downwards rather than being produced upwards
and this means that liquid loading is predicted to be occurring.
Petroleum Experts 5 can therefore be used to to calculate the pressure gradient within
a well for a given set of conditions, and if the frictional pressure gradient is found to be
negative, the well can be said to be unstable at these conditions.
To calculate the frictional pressure gradient within the well, a gradient calculation should
be performed. This can be done by selecting Calculation | Gradient (traverse) from
the main menu.
The test data should be inserted into the top left hand corner of the screen:
Examples Guide 1516
The correlation selected must be Petroleum Experts 5 in order to see this behaviour.
When the data has been inserted, select Calculate to carry out the pressure gradient:
1517
PROSPER
If the Friction Gradient and Friction Pressure Loss values are reviewed in the Gradient
results table in the centre of the screen, we can see that at the bottom of the well, where
the casing is larger and therefore the velocity of the fluids will be lower, both values are
negative. This implies that the model is predicting that some of the fluid will flow
downwards at this point and is therefore unstable.
Whenever a negative frictional gradient is seen in a production well using Petroleum
Experts 5, it is a sign that the well could be unstable under the current conditions.
3.1.45.5.1.4 Summary of Techniques
Using the well test conditions given at the start of the section, it has been shown using
three different methods that the flow in the well at these conditions would be unstable.
While not all cases will fail all three criteria, it is an advantage to be able to perform all
three tests to check if the well is likely to be unstable or not.
3.1.45.5.2 Hydrate Formation
Hydrate formation can cause serious flow assurance issues in certain wells and
pipelines. It is therefore important that we can calculate when conditions dictate that
these hydrates may occur and flag if these conditions are reached so that we can
design our system to avoid them.
This section will therefore detail how to first calculate the hydrate curve for fully
compositional model and also view the impact that salts have on the hydrate curves.
When the hydrate curve has been generated, a calculation can be performed and
checked to ensure that the conditions within the model do not mean that hydrates will
occur.
Examples Guide 1518
Hydrate formation is also a major issue in surface networks where it is sometimes
necessary to inject inhibitors to reduce the likelihood of hydrates forming. When the
inhibitors are injected, however, the pressures and temperatures within the system
change and this means that the calculation of inhibitor volumes required needs to be a
dynamic calculation rather than a post-calculation. A fully worked example of how to
model this in GAP is available in the Tutorial section of the GAP User Guide.
3.1.45.5.2.1 Setting Up the Model
In order to calculate the hydrate curve for a fluid, the PVT method should be set to
Equation of State. It is possible to enter a hydrate curve for a black oil, however, this
must be calculated externally and then entered into the program.
If this section is being performed as a continuation of the General Flow Assurance
tutorial, then a file should already be open. If not. the file being used for this example
should be T42_Improved_Approximation.OUT which is located in the installation
directory of IPM 8.0.
When the file has been opened, the PVT method should be set in Options | Options:
Select Equation of State from the menu and also enable the PVT warnings. Select
Done to return to the main PROSPER screen.
From the top toolbar, enter PVT | Warnings to enable the Hydrate warning in the
calculations:
1519
PROSPER
Once this has been enabled select Done.
3.1.45.5.2.2 Modelling the Impact of Salts on Hydrate Curves
To calculate the hydrate formation curve for a fluid, enter the PVT | Input Data screen:
Select Phase Env... from the top toolbar:
Examples Guide 1520
This will bring up the phase envelope and hydrate curve screen.
The hydrate curve which will be generated is dependent upon the inhibitors which are
present within the system. As salt is a naturally inhibitor, entering the correct water
composition is very important to ensure accurate hydrate curves are generated.
To see the impact that the salt has on the hydrate curve, two different water/salt
compositions are going to be entered:
Water 1 Water 2
NaCl 2.15% 4.52%
CaCl2 0.89% 0.94%
KBr 0.12% 0.24%
To enter the first composition, select Water Composition in the bottom right hand
1521
PROSPER
The Salt Mode option should be set to Use Water Composition to use the water
composition and then the different percentages of the salts can be entered at the
bottom of the screen. Enter the first salt composition:
Examples Guide 1522
When the has been entered, select Done and then Calculate Hydrate...Wax:
1523
PROSPER
The hydrate curve of the fluid with the first salt content can be seen above. To enter the
second composition, select Water Composition and then enter the data at the bottom
of the screen:
Examples Guide 1524
When this has been entered, select Done and then Calculate Hydrate...Wax to
calculate the second hydrate curve:
1525
PROSPER
We can see that the presence of the additional salt in the second calculation means that
the pressure at which the hydrates will form has increased.
For the remainder of this tutorial, the second hydrate curve will be used as the correct
curve to assess if hydrates will form under a range of conditions. This can be copied by
selecting the contents of the table and right clicking to select Copy. To exit to the main
screen select OK and then Done.
When on the main screen, return to the PVT | Warnings section and select Data so that
the curve can be included in the calculations:
Examples Guide 1526
When pasting the data, care should be taken as the columns are the opposite way
around from the previous table. For this reason it may be easier to paste the table into
another program such as EXCEL, switch teh columns around and then paste it into this
table:
1527
PROSPER
The data can be pasted by right clicking on the table and selecting Paste. To return to
the main screen select Main.
At this point it is worth pointing out that hydrate curves calculated in this manner can be
copied into Black Oil models to be used in calculations. This would also be pasted into
the table in PVT | Warnings. This means that if VLP curves are generated with the
hydrate curve in the calculation, then hydrate flags will be included as part of the VLP.
3.1.45.5.2.3 Calculating Hydrate Conditions
Now that the hydrate curve has been calculated, future calculations which are performed
will compare the pressure and temperature at each depth to the curve to predict if
hydrates will form. If the conditions dictate that hydrates will occur, a flag will be raised.
This can be seen in both the VLP calculations and the gradient calculations.
To carry out a VLP calculation, enter the Calculation | VLP (Tubing Curves) screen.
In the top right hand corner the following properties can be entered to calculate a single
Examples Guide 1528
VLP curve:
When this data has been inserted, select Calculate.
When the calculation is completed, the VLP results table will be displayed in the top
right of the screen. Within the table, each row has a Hydrate Formation Flag
designated:
If the flag reads Yes, then within the gradient calculation for that row's rate, the pressure
1529
PROSPER
and temperature within the well have fallen within the range which the hydrate curve
dictates hydrates would begin to form. If the column reads No, as is the case with all of
curve is this case, then no hydrates are predicted to form under these conditions.
These flags will also be exported as part of the lift curve file which can then be imported
into GAP to run an integrated production model. The actually rate which will be produced
by the well can then be calculated (or via a system calculation in PROSPER) to find out if
the solution rate falls within the range of a Yes flag or a No flag.
To return to the main screen, select Done.
Gradient calculations form the basis of VLP calculations but can also be performed on a
stand alone basis to calculate the conditions within a well for a set of given production
conditions.
To carry out a gradient calculation, select Calculation | Gradient (traverse) from the
main toolbar.
When this screen has been opened, enter the following input data into the top right of
the screen:
When the data has been entered, select Calculate to perform the gradient calculation.
Examples Guide 1530
When the calculation is completed, the gradient results are displayed in the centre of the
screen. One of the columns is the Hydrate Formation column which will be set to Yes or
No depending if the conditions at the given depth are predicted to cause hydrates to
form or not. In this case, as all the flags are set as No, the well, flowing under the given
conditions, will not have hydrate formation within it.
If hydrate formation is predicted, then the gradient calculation will also show the depths
which are at the most danger of this occurring.
3.1.45.5.3 Erosional Velocity Limit
When a well produces a fluid at a very high velocity, it is possible that the produced fluid
will cause damage to the tubing, casing or pipeline by erosion. This can be significant,
especially when producing fluid's which contain solids.
In order to reduce the damage done by this erosion, restrictions are often placed upon
the velocity at which the fluid can flow in the pipeline. These erosional velocity limits are
used to ensure that the rate being produced will not damage the equipment which is
being used to produce it.
In PROSPER, it is possible to compare the velocity of the produced fluid at each depth to
the erosional velocity calculated for the same conditions to see if the rate being
produced exceeds it or falls below it. For more information on the calculation of the
erosional velocity limit, please refer to the Calculation Options section of this User
Guide.
1531
PROSPER
3.1.45.5.3.1 Calculating the Erosional Velocity
The following section will show how to calculate if any conditions in the VLP curve will
exceed the erosional velocity limits calculated.
To carry out a VLP calculation, enter the Calculation | VLP (Tubing Curves) screen.
In the top right hand corner the following properties can be entered to calculate a single
VLP curve:
When this data has been inserted, select Calculate.
When the calculation is completed, the VLP results table will be displayed in the top
right of the screen. Within the table, each row has an Erosional Velocity Flag
designated:
Examples Guide 1532
If the flag reads Yes, then within the gradient calculation for that row's rate, the fluid's
'total no slip velocity' at some depth in the well has exceeded that of the erosional
velocity at the same depth. If the column reads No, then the limit has not been broken.
When the wellhead pressure is set to 100 psig, it can be seen that rates above 72.4
MMscf/day will exceed the velocity limit while rates of 50.36 MMscf/day and below will
not exceed the value. To get a more accurate idea of the maximum velocity (which at
this time is known to be between 50 abd 72 MMscf/day) a second calculation would
need to be performed over a range in which the maximum is known to lie.
If the wellhead pressure is increased to 500 psig, and the calculation is rerun, different
results are obtained:
We can now see that a rate of 72 MMscf/day does not exceed the erosional velocity
limit and now only 104 and 149 MMscf/day have the Yes flag next to them. This
highlights an important point; as the velocity of the fluid is dependent upon the in-situ
conditions, no single rate expressed at standard conditions can express the erosional
velocity limit for the well. The equivalent rate will be different for various different flowing
1533
PROSPER
conditions and we can only know if the limit has been exceeded for each case by
checking the erosional velocity flag.
These flags will therefore be exported as part of the lift curve file which can then be
imported into GAP to run an integrated production model. The actual rate which will be
produced by the well can then be calculated (or via a system calculation in PROSPER) to
find out if the solution rate falls within the range of a Yes flag or a No flag.
be able to:
Carry out a series of different tests to analyse the flow assurance of a well
under a certain set of flowing conditions.
Analyse the stability of a well using one of three techniques; the shape of the
VLP curve, the Turner Velocity Criterion and using the frictional gradient
calculated by the Petroleum Experts 5 multi-phase flow model.
Calculate the hydrate formation curve for a fully compositional model.
View the impact that different salt compositions in the production water have
on the hydrate formation curve.
Calculate if a set of well flowing conditions fall within the range of pressure
and temperature where hydrates are predicted to form.
Calculate if the erosional velocity limit has been exceeded for a certain set of
flowing conditions.
Examples Guide 1534
3.1.46 Tutorial 44 Modelling Non-Newtonian Fluids
A well has been producing an heavy oil (API 12) for some time. However, it has been
observed that the viscosity of the fluid appears to change depending upon the rate
being produced. Viscosity is defined as the relationship between the shear stress and
shear rate for a fluid. For the majority of fluids, this relationship is linear and we refer to
these fluids as Newtonian fluids. However, if the relationship between shear stress and
shear rate are not linear, we refer to the fluid as a non-Newtonian fluid. Heavy oils will
sometimes be found to be shear thinning which means that as the work done to the
fluid increases, the viscosity decreases.
The standard viscosity correlations do not account for this non-Newtonian behaviour and
therefore a secondary model can be enabled to capture the impact that this will have on
the fluid behaviour.
A laboratory report details the viscosity parameters for a set of pressures and
temperatures. This information is to be used within the model to see the effects that
shear rate will have on the viscosity of the fluid and therefore also on the pressure
gradients within the well.
It is unclear what the effects of the non-Newtonian fluid will be in the reservoir and
therefore a numerical reservoir simulator will be used to model the inflow into the well.
As such, no IPR will be included within the PROSPER model.
3.1.46.2Objectives
Build a model with PVT which is representative of a non-Newtonian fluid.
Compare the gradients for varying well head pressures with and without the non-
Newtonian corrections.
a. Set up the PVT data to ensure that the original oil is accurately modelled.
b. Insert the well deviation and tubing data to define a VLP curve.
1535
PROSPER
c. Run a series of gradients with the Newtonian fluid model.
d. Change the viscosity model to the non-Newtonian fluid model and insert the
laboratory data.
e. Run a new series of gradients with the non-Newtonian fluid and compare these to
the previous calculations.
Fluid Oil and Water
Method Black Oil
Viscosity Model Non-Newtonian
3.1.46.4.2 PVT Data
fluid.
GOR 10 scf/STB
Oil Gravity 12 API
Mole % H
2
S 0%
Mole % CO
2
0%
Mole % N
2
0%
Examples Guide 1536
3.1.46.4.2.1 Match Data
Temperature of Test
120
o
F
Bubble Point at Test
Temperature
170 psig
170 10 1.025 100
3.1.46.4.2.2 Non-Newtonian Data
Maximum Viscosity 10000 cp
Temperature
(
o
F)
Pressure
(psig)
Yield Stress
(TAU
o
) (psi)
Consistency
Index (K)
Shear
Thinning Index
(n)
60 100 0 1 0.9
60 3000 0 1 0.9
120 100 0 0.5 0.95
120 3000 0 0.5 0.95
the well.
MD (ft) TVD (ft)
0 0
2000 2000
1537
PROSPER
perforations.
Type MD (ft) Inside
Diameter
(inches)
Inside
Roughness
(inches)
Rate Multiplier
X-mas Tree 0
Tubing 1800 3.2 0.0006 1
Casing 2000 6.4 0.0006 1
MD (ft)
Temperature (
o
F)
0 80
1200 120
2
/
o
F
Examples Guide 1538
o
F)
Oil 0.53
Gas 0.51
Water 1
3.1.46.4.4 IPR Data
This file is going to be used to generate VLP curves only (and view the impact of the
non-Newtonian fluid model on the pressure drop) and therefore no IPR is required to be
entered.
modelled. For this example, we will first build the file as a Newtonian fluid and once the
results have been calculated, change the fluid type to non-Newtonian so that the impact
can be seen. The option screen can be accessed by selecting Options | Options and
in this case, the data is kept as the default for all the options:
1539
PROSPER
The fluid type should be kept Oil and Water.
screen.
can be seen below:
GOR 10 scf/STB
Oil Gravity 12 API
Mole % H
2
S 0%
Examples Guide 1540
Mole % CO
2
0%
Mole % N
2
0%
Once this data has been inserted, the next step is to match the fluid to laboratory data
by selecting Match Data.
The Water Cut inserted will be used for any calculations carried out using the Calculate
feature.
3.1.46.5.2.1 Matching PVT
Insert the available data for the oil into the match table.
Temperatur
e of Test
120
o
F
Bubble
Point at
Test
Temperatur
e
170
psig
1541
PROSPER
Press
ure
GOR Oil
FVF
Viscos
ity
170 10 1.025 700
When the data is inserted select Match to proceed to the matching screen.
Select Match All to carry out the regression on all of the correlations. The resultant
matching parameters can then be seen by selecting Parameters:
Examples Guide 1542
The criteria for selecting a correlation is to have a parameter 1 as close to 1 and a
parameter 2 as close to 0 as possible. Looking at the matches obtained, the best
matches as Vazquez-Beggs and Egbogah et al correlations:
1543
PROSPER
These correlations can be selected by returning to the main PVT screen and selecting
them from the drop down menus:
Examples Guide 1544
When the correlations have been selected, press Done to return to the main screen.
the well and the path through which the fluid flows. This is done in the 'Equipment Data'
each section:
1545
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1546
is produced up the wellbore. Details of the equipment to be installed can be found
below:
perforations.
Done.
1547
PROSPER
so is used in the calculation of heat transfer. The overall heat transfer coefficient is also
input into this screen. The geothermal gradient can be seen below:
input screen.
Examples Guide 1548
Select Done to proceed to the final 'Equipment' screen.
3.1.46.5.3.6 Gauge Data
This model will have no gauges therefore the screen can be left blank:
3.1.46.5.4 Pressure Gradient with Newtonian Fluid
Now that the PVT and well description have been entered, the pressure gradient within
the well for a given set of conditions can be found. This will first be done with the fluid
treated as a Newtonian fluid data and then later with the non-Newtonian data so that the
two can be compared. The pressure gradient within the well is to be calculated at
different first node pressures.
1549
PROSPER
To carry out the gradient calculation select Calculation | Gradient (Traverse).
3.1.46.5.4.1 Inserting Input data
To calculate the pressure gradient in the well, the well conditions must be set. This can
be done in the top left hand corner of the screen:
When the above data has been inserted select Cases:
Insert the three first node pressues to be calculated and then select Continue.
Examples Guide 1550
3.1.46.5.4.2 Calculating the Pressure Gradient
The pressure gradients can be calculated by selecting Calculate:
The results can then be viewed on a graph by selecting Plot:
3.1.46.5.4.3 Saving the Plot
1551
PROSPER
3.1.46.5.5 Enabling the non-Newtonian Model
Now that the gradients have been calculated with the fluid treated as a Newtonian fluid,
the same conditions are to be calculated with the model enabled. To enable the model,
enter the Options | Options screen:
Examples Guide 1552
Select Non-Newtonian Fluid for the 'Viscosity Model' and then Done to return to the
main screen.
To insert the new PVT data, enter the PVT | Input Data screen and select Rheological
Parameters:
1553
PROSPER
This allows the laboratory data which describes the non-Newtonian fluid to be entered:
Examples Guide 1554
This method uses the equivalent apparent viscosity method and more information on
this model can be found in the non-Newtonian fluid section of this guide.
When the data has been entered, select Done and then Done to return to the main
PROSPER screen.
3.1.46.5.6 Pressure Gradient with non-Newtonian Fluid
Now that the non-Netwonian fluid model has been enabled, the next step is to calculate
the pressure gradient within the well so that they can be compared with the gradients
calculated without the model enabled. The pressure gradient within the well is to be
calculated at different first node pressures.
1555
PROSPER
These should still remain from the previous calculation and therefore, with nothing
having been added, select Continue.
The pressure gradients can e calculated by selecting Calculate:
Examples Guide 1556
3.1.46.5.6.3 Comparing the Plots
the 'clock' button:
1557
PROSPER
the results to be plotted, which in this case would be the 'No Emulsion' results which
have been saved and the current 'Emulsion' results:
Examples Guide 1558
1559
PROSPER
We can see that for these cases, because the fluid is a shear thinning fluid (the viscosity
reduces when work is done to it) the pressure gradients are lower when the non-
Newtonian model is enabled.
be able to:
Enable and run calculations using the non-Newtonian fluid model.
two files together to view the impact of the non-Newtonian model on our
results.
Examples Guide 1560
3.1.47 Tutorial 45 CBM Water Well
During the initial stages of production from a Coal Bed Methane reservoir, it is often
necessary to go through a 'de-watering' stage where water is removed from the
reservoir in order to reduce the pressure and release methane which was adsorbed
onto the surface of the coal. During this stage, a pump is normally installed at the bottom
of the tubing to allow more fluid to be produced and a gas separator is used to pass any
produced gas up the annulus.
This tutorial will therefore go through the steps of setting up a water producing well which
has an ESP installed in it and also describe the steps to export the VLP curves so that
they can be used within a reservoir modelling software package such as MBAL or as
part of an integrated model in GAP.
3.1.47.2Objectives
Create a CBM water production well model.
Select an ESP to be used within the well.
Learn to export the lift curves for use in MBAL or GAP.
a. Select the CBM Producer and ESP from the main options screen.
b. Insert the available PVT data for the gas and water.
c. The equipment information will be inserted into the model to define the down-
hole equipment. This will be used to define the VLP curves.
d. An IPR model will be built which models the CBM behaviour.
e. An ESP will be included in the model which has already been selected.
f. The lift curves will be generated which can be used for a prediction within MBAL
or GAP.
1561
PROSPER
Fluid Oil and Water
Method Black Oil
Well Type CBM Producer
Artificial Lift
Method Electrical Submersible Pump
3.1.47.4.2 PVT Data
the fluid.
CBM GLR 0
Mole % H
2
S 0%
Mole % CO
2
0%
Mole % N
2
0%
the well.
Examples Guide 1562
MD (ft) TVD (ft)
0 0
2600 2600
perforations.
Type
MD
(ft)
Tubing
Inside
Diamet
er
(Inches
)
Tubing
Inside
Roughn
ess
(Inches)
Tubing
Outsid
e
Diamet
er
(Inches
)
Tubing
Outside
Roughn
ess
(Inches)
Casing
Inside
Diamet
er
(Inches
)
Casing
Inside
Roughn
ess
(Inches)
Rate
Multipli
er
X-mas
Tree
0 1
Tubing 2500 2.875 0.0006 3.25 0.0006 6.1 0.0018 1
Casing 2600 6.1 0.0018 1
1563
PROSPER
o
F)
0 60
2600 100
2
/
o
F
o
F)
Oil 0.53
Gas 0.51
Water 1
3.1.47.4.4 IPR Data
model used is dependent on the purpose of the study. In this case the 'PI Entry' model
will be used until more information on the reservoir becomes available.
Reservoir Model CBM Producer
100
o
F
Gas Liquid Ratio 10 scf/STB
Examples Guide 1564
Productivity Index 2 STB/day/psi
Water Gas
Residual Saturation 0.2 0
End Point Relative Permeability 0.8 0.8
Corey Exponent 1.5 2
3.1.47.4.5 ESP Data
Operating Frequency 60 Hz
Maximum Pump OD 6 inches
Length of Cable 2750 ft
Gas Separator Method Enter Separator Efficiency
Gas Separator Efficiency 100 %
Liquid Level Method Entered
Liquid Level 2000
Number of Stages 58
Voltage at Surface 465 Volts
Pump Wear Factor 0
Gas DeRating Model <none>
Allow Tapered ESPs No
Current Pump CENTRILIFT R7 4 inches (500-900 RB/day)
Current Motor Centrilift 562 KMH 38HP 435V 53A
Current Cable #1 Copper 0.26(Volts/1000ft) 123 (amps) max
1565
PROSPER
opened, a new file will automatically be created and this step does not require to be
taken.
modelled. The option screen can be accessed by selecting Options | Options:
Select the Fluid to be Oil and Water, the Well Type to be CBM Producer and the
Artificial Lift Method to be Electrical Submersible Pump. As this is a CBM Producer,
PROSPER will automatically calculate both the production up the tubing and the gas
production up the annulus.
screen.
can be seen below:
Examples Guide 1566
When this data has been entered, select Done to return to the main screen.
screen, which can be accessed by selecting System | Equipment (Tubing etc).
each section:
1567
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1568
1569
PROSPER
is produced up the wellbore. As fluid will be produced up both the tubing and the
annulus, both spaces need to be specified. Details of the equipment to be installed can
be found below:
perforations.
Done.
Examples Guide 1570
Selecting Done will exit the geothermal gradient screen.
1571
PROSPER
Select Done to proceed to the final input screen for the equipment section.
3.1.47.5.3.6 Gauge Data
The final equipment screen allows gauge depths to be entered. This well has no gauges
and therefore the screen can be left blank:
All of the equipment data has now been entered and so select Main to return to the
main screen.
Examples Guide 1572
When modelling CBM Producers, a specific IPR model becomes available; CBM
Producer. This models each phase for the IPR separately and also allows the impact of
the relative permeability of each phase on production to be captured. After selecting
the model, insert the reservoir properties in the bottom right hand corner of the screen:
By selecting the Input Data tab at the top right corner, the PI of the well can also be
inserted:
1573
PROSPER
Select the Rel Perms tab to enter the relative permeability curves for the well:
Examples Guide 1574
1575
PROSPER
Select the red cross in the top right hand corner to exit the plot and then Done to return
to the main PROSPER screen.
completed.
3.1.47.5.5 Inserting ESP Details
Now that the equipment and IPR data have been entered, the ESP data should be
entered into the model. For this tutorial, the ESP has been selected previously and
therefore no design is to be carried out. For the steps required to carry out an ESP
design, Tutorial 26 should be consulted.
To enter the ESP go to the System | Electrical Submersible Pumps screen:
Examples Guide 1576
The gas separator efficiency has been set to 100% so that all of the gas travels up the
annulus and only the water is produced through the ESP and up the tubing.
Now that model has been set up, we want to generate VLP curve tables to be exported
to GAP for use in an Integrated Production Model.
curve for each case, a table of values is generated and these values are used to
interpolate between to find the results of the model conditions. It is therefore very
important that the ranges of values that the tables are generated for cover all the
possible values which may be required in the model. If they do not, the results will be
extrapolated and this can lead to large errors in the results.
1577
PROSPER
As the top node pressure and CBM GLR are two of the variables we will be changing,
the value entered here will not be used in any calculations. It is very important that the Lift
Curves For Simulators option is selected as this will move the solution from the pump
discharge to the bottom hole which is required for use in simulators and GAP.
entered:
Examples Guide 1578
The rates should normally be entered from a low value to a value approximately equal to
the well AOF. When the values have been inserted, select Generate and then Done.
which are to be changed in the VLP tables. For a CBM Producer well, these variables
should be the First Node Pressure (i.e. the wellhead pressure), the Pump Frequency,
the CBM GLR and the Liquid Level in the Annulus. To enter these ranges select
Cases.
1579
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1580
The same process can be followed to add the values for the remaining two variables:
1581
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1582
click Calculate:
Please note that due to the number of variables used in this VLP table, this
calculation may take some time to complete.
1583
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1584
This *.tpd file can now be imported into MBAL or GAP to use in simulations.
be able to:
Build a CBM Producer Well which produces water through a ESP and gas up
the annulus.
Generate lift curves which can be exported to GAP or MBAL.
1585
PROSPER
3.1.48 Tutorial 46 Modelling Emulsions
A well has been producing a heavy oil (API 11) for some time. However, it has recently
begun producing water and from tests it appears that the fluid currently being produced
is an emulsion.
As the viscosity of emulsions can be very different to the individual water and oil phases'
viscosities, an additional model is required within PROSPER to take this into account.
A laboratory report details the emulsion's viscosities at different water-cuts for a set
pressure and temperature. This information is to be used within the model to see the
effects that an increasing water-cut will have on the pressure gradients within the well.
It is unclear what the effects of the emulsion will be in the reservoir and therefore a
numerical reservoir simulator will be used to model the inflow into the well. As such, no
IPR will be included within the PROSPER model.
3.1.48.2Objectives
Build a model with PVT which is representative of an emulsion.
Compare the gradients for varying water cuts with and without the emulsion
corrections.
a. Set up the PVT data to ensure that the original oil is accurately modelled.
b. Insert the emulsion lab data into the model and match the emulsion viscosity.
c. Insert the well deviation and tubing data to define a VLP curve.
d. Run a series of gradient calculations to predict what the impact of the water cut
increasing from 0% to 20% will be on the well's pressure gradient for with the
emulsion model selected and not selected.
Examples Guide 1586
Fluid Oil and Water
Method Black Oil
Emulsions Emulsion + Pump Viscosity Correction
3.1.48.4.2 PVT Data
fluid.
GOR 40 scf/STB
Oil Gravity 11 API
Mole % H
2
S 0%
Mole % CO
2
0%
Mole % N
2
0%
3.1.48.4.2.1 Match Data
Temperature of Test
200
o
F
Bubble Point at Test
Temperature
500 psig
1587
PROSPER
500 40 1.051 100
3.1.48.4.2.2 Emulsion Data
Experimental Pressure 2000 psig
Experimental
Temperature
200
o
F
Min Water Cut For
Maximum Viscosity
60%
Max Water Cut For
Maximum Viscosity
80%
Water Cut Viscosity (cp)
5 105
10 115
20 130
30 150
40 188
50 234
55 250
85 53
90 10.5
the well.
MD (ft) TVD (ft)
0 0
Examples Guide 1588
5000 5000
perforations.
Type MD (ft) Inside
Diameter
(inches)
Inside
Roughness
(inches)
Rate Multiplier
X-mas Tree 0
Tubing 4800 2.4 0.0006 1
Casing 5000 6.4 0.0006 1
MD (ft)
Temperature (
o
F)
0 80
5000 200
1589
PROSPER
2
/
o
F
o
F)
Oil 0.53
Gas 0.51
Water 1
3.1.48.4.4 IPR Data
This file is going to be used to generate VLP curves only (and view the impact of the
emulsion model on the pressure drop) and therefore no IPR is required to be entered.
this case, the data is kept as the default for all the options except Emulsions which is
set to Emulsion + Pump Viscosity Correction:
Examples Guide 1590
The fluid type should be kept Oil and Water.
screen.
can be seen below:
GOR 40 scf/STB
Oil Gravity 11 API
Mole % H
2
S 0%
1591
PROSPER
Mole % CO
2
0%
Mole % N
2
0%
Once this data has been inserted, the next step is to match the fluid to laboratory data
by selecting Match Data.
The Water Cut inserted will be used for any calculations carried out using the Calculate
feature.
3.1.48.5.2.1 Matching PVT
Insert the available data for the oil into the match table.
Temperatur
e of Test
200
o
F
Bubble
Point at
Test
Temperatur
e
500
psig
Examples Guide 1592
Press
ure
GOR Oil
FVF
Viscos
ity
500 40 1.051 100
When the data is inserted select Match to proceed to the matching screen.
Select 'Match All' to carry out the regression on all of the correlations. The resultant
matching parameters can then be seen by selecting Parameters:
1593
PROSPER
The criteria for selecting a correlation is to have a parameter 1 as close to 1 and a
parameter 2 as close to 0 as possible. Looking at the matches obtained, the best
matches as Vazquez-Beggs and Egbogah et al correlations:
Examples Guide 1594
These correlations can be selected by returning to the main PVT screen and selecting
them from the drop down menus:
1595
PROSPER
3.1.48.5.2.2 Adding Emulsion Data
We have now got a good match on our PVT when we are producing a pure oil, however,
we know that when water is introduced, we expect to see an emulsion forming. We can
choose where the effects of the emulsion are going to be seen in our model by selecting
from the Emulsion Occurrence drop down menu. So that a comparison can be carried
out to see the impact of the emulsion on a pressure drop first the calculations are to be
carried out with the additional emulsion correction. Therefore select :
To input the Emulsion data, select Flowline Emulsion Data.
The emulsion curve is made up of three distinct regions; the first region starts at a
viscosity equal to that of the oil (when the water cut is zero) and increases with
increasing water cut until it hits a plateau with a maximum viscosity. This plateau is the
second region of the curve. At the end of the plateau the curve drops back down until at
100% water cut the viscosity of the fluid is equal to that of water.
Examples Guide 1596
The user defines the profile by inserting a water cut for the maximum and minimum
points of the plateau and then test data is used to match the gradient of the curve in the
first regions. From this curve the viscosity of the plateau can be determined. Finally, if
data is available for water cuts above the plateau, the final curve can be tuned manually
by the user to match these points.
The following data should be inserted:
Experimen
tal
Pressure
2000
psig
Experimen
tal
Temperatu
re
200
o
F
Min Water
Cut For
Maximum
Viscosity
60%
Max Water
Cut For
Maximum
Viscosity
80%
Water Cut Viscosity (cp)
5 105
10 115
20 130
30 150
40 188
50 234
55 200
85 53
90 10.5
1597
PROSPER
Next select Match to carry out the regression on the curve in the first region:
If we select Plot the resultant profile can be seen:
Examples Guide 1598
In this case the viscosities at high water cut are also matched well. If this was not the
case, the user would manually vary match parameters 4 and 5 until a match is obtained.
To return to the main PVT screen select Done. When on the PVT screen, select Done
to return to the main PROSPER screen.
each section:
1599
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1600
1601
PROSPER
is produced up the wellbore. Details of the equipment to be installed can be found
below:
perforations.
Done.
Examples Guide 1602
input screen.
1603
PROSPER
Select Done to proceed to the final equipment screen.
3.1.48.5.3.6 Gauge Data
This model will have no gauges therefore the screen can be left blank:
3.1.48.5.4 Pressure Gradient without Emulsion
Now that the PVT and well description have been entered, the pressure gradient within
the well for a given set of conditions can be found. This will first be done without the
emulsion data and then later with the emulsion data so that the two can be compared.
Examples Guide 1604
The pressure gradient within the well is to be calculated at different water cuts.
1605
PROSPER
Insert the four different water cuts to be calculated and then select Continue.
3.1.48.5.4.3 Saving the Plot
Examples Guide 1606
3.1.48.5.5 Enabling the Emulsion Model
Now that the gradients have been calculated without the emulsion model, the same
conditions are to be calculated with the model enabled. To enable the model, enter the
PVT | Input Data screen:
1607
PROSPER
Select Tubing and Pipe for the 'Emulsion Occurrence' input and then Done to return to
the main screen.
3.1.48.5.6 Pressure Gradient with Emulsion Model
Now that the emulsion model has been enabled, the next step is to calculate the
pressure gradient within the well so that they can be compared with the gradients
calculated without the model enabled. The pressure gradient within the well is to be
calculated at different water cuts.
Examples Guide 1608
Insert the four different water cuts to be calculated and then select Continue.
1609
PROSPER
3.1.48.5.6.3 Comparing the Plots
the 'clock' button:
the results to be plotted, which in this case would be the 'No Emulsion' results which
have been saved and the current Emulsion results:
Examples Guide 1610
1611
PROSPER
Now that all eight gradient calculations are plotted together. In order to see each water
cut individually, the different curves can be selected and de-selected at the top of the
screen. First deselect all of the curves and then select Case 1 for both the emulsion and
no emulsion cases:
Examples Guide 1612
This is the 0% water-cut case and therefore the two gradients are exactly the same. This
is because, at 0% water-cut there is no concept of an emulsion and the oil viscosity
calculated from the black oil correlation is used directly.
The other three water cut cases can also be selected to see the impact of the emulsion
model:
1613
PROSPER
For these cases, where the water cut is greater than zero and therefore an emulsion is
formed, a difference can be seen. The emulsion viscosity increases and therefore the
pressure drop for each case is also higher. The higher the water cut, the higher the
difference between the two because of the emulsion viscosity is increasing. If the water
cut trend were to be continued (to very high water cuts) the difference would begin to
decrease again as the plateau on the emulsion curve would have been reached and the
emulsion viscosity would become closer to the water viscosity.
be able to:
Enable and run calculations using the Emulsion model.
two files together to view the impact of the emulsion model on our results.
Examples Guide 1614
3.1.49 Tutorial 47 - Modelling a Gas Lifted Gas Well
The Spectrum retrograde condensate field has now been producing for some time. The
reservoir pressure has dropped and the water gas ratio has increased to 500 STB/
MMscf. The increased water being produced has lead to a denser fluid in the well and
this means that the pressure drop from the well head to the bottom hole depth will
increase. In order to reduce the mixture density of the produced fluid, the intension is to
inject gas into the well via a valve at 10000 ft depth.
Like for an oil well, injecting the correct volume of gas will decrease the mixture density
and this will reduce the pressure drop and allow more fluid to be produced. However, if
too much gas is injected, the pressure drop due to friction will increase and cancel out
the advantage gained from the reduction in density. The optimum gas to inject will
depend upon the conditions within the system and will not be constant.
Management would like to an understanding of the impact of injecting gas lift gas when
the reservoir pressure is either 1750 or 1500 psig and the WGR is 500 STB/MMscf.
3.1.49.2Objectives
Setup the model to have Gas Lift activated.
Learn how to insert the required input data for a gas lifted gas well system in
PROSPER.
1615
PROSPER
b. Update the IPR section to represent the current flowing conditions in the well.
c. Carry out a coiled tubing gas lift design for the current design conditions.
d. Insert the injection depth and injection gas properties to the System | Gas Lift
Data section.
e. Run a sensitivity to find the optimum injection rate for the system.
Artificial
Lift
Method
Gas Lift
(Continuous)
Artificial
Lift
Type
No Friction
Loss in
Annulus
The gas lift properties are detailed below:
Gas Lift Gas
Gravity
0.7
% H
2
S 0
% N
2
0
% CO
2
0
Injection
Depth
10000
feet
Examples Guide 1616
Reservoir
Pressure
1750 psig
Water Gas
Raio
500 STB/
MMscf
In order to design a coiled tubing gas lifted well, the gas lift option should be enabled in
For this design, select Gas Lift (Continuous) and No Friction Loss in Annulus from the
drop down menus.
The current reservoir conditions have changed from what was previously inserted into
PROSPER. This will mean that the AOF used to calculate the rates in the system
calculation will be based upon the current AOF which will give a more representative
1617
PROSPER
range of values. These conditions should therefore be updated in the System | Inflow
Performance screen:
new IPR:
Examples Guide 1618
3.1.49.5.3 Inserting the Gas Lift Data
The injected gas properties and the depth at which the injection will occur now need to
be entered into the model. This can be done in the System | Gas Lift Data screen:
The gas being injected has a gas gravity of 0.7 and has no impurities. The Gas Lift
Method should be changed to Fixed Depth of Injection at the bottom of the screen and
the depth of injection should be fixed at 10000 feet. This means that the gas will always
1619
PROSPER
be injected at the specified depth and the ability to inject at the given depth is not
considered. In reality the ability to inject at a certain depth is dependent upon both the
pressure in the casing and the tubing at the given depth. The casing pressure must be
greater than the tubing pressure by a value which will allow the gas to be injected
through the orifice or valve which has been added to the system.
When this has been done, the gas lift system has been inserted as part of the model.
Press Done to return to the main screen.
(VLP + IPR).
At this time, we wish to calculate the gas rate which will be produced if the wellhead
pressure is set to 350 psig and the WGR and GOR should be set to 500 STB/MMscf
and 7432.66 scf/STB respectfully. This data should therefore be added to the top left
hand corner of the screen:
Examples Guide 1620
The reservoir pressure is also to be changed from 1750 psig to 1500 psig. This can
also be included in the Cases screen:
1621
PROSPER
To view the gas rate against injection rate, select Variables from the top bar and then
Gas Rate for the Y axis variable and Gaslift Gas Injection Rate for the X axis variable:
Examples Guide 1622
The plot shows that for the higher reservoir pressure (1750 psig) even with no gas lift
injected, the well can still produce. If a small amount of gas is injected (approximately
0.5-1.5 MMscf/day) then the optimum gas rate is produced. However, this is only an
increase of 0.2 MMscf/day in production and injecting any additional gas will lead to a
lower rate being produced.
When the reservoir pressure is dropped to 1500 psig, the well cannot produce without
gas being injected. When at least 1 MMscf/day of gas is injected the well can produce
and increasing the injection rate to 2 MMscf/day will allow the maximum gas rate to be
produced. If any additional gas is injected, the production rate drops due to the increase
in the frictional pressure drop within the well.
In summary, if the reservoir pressure is 1750 psig, the well can still produce at a WGR of
500 STB/MMscf, however, this rate can be increased by 0.2 MMscf/day if 1 MMscf/day
is injected. If the reservoir pressure drops down to 1500 psig then the well cannot
produce unless at least 1 MMscf/day of gas is injected. The maximum rate can be
achieved if 2 MMscf/day of gas is injected.
be able to:
Set up a Retrograde Condensate well with Gas Lift.
1623
PROSPER
Examples Guide 1624

PROSPER Complete PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

PROSPER Complete PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Petroleum Experts

Intermediate calculations are required prior to computing the dP

This dP may then be transformed into skin using an appropriate relationship.

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi